CAMWorks V3.

21 Help

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

All Rights Reserved
Published in U.S.A.

12 Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472-1610 - Tel: (203) 484-7161 - Fax: (203) 484-7118
Important Limitations
While a fire alarm system may lower insurance rates, it is not a substitute for
fire insurance!
An automatic fire alarm system- typically made up of smoke detectors, heat
detectors, manual pull stations, audible warning devices, and a fire alarm
control panel with remote notification capability - can provide early warning of a
developing fire. Such a system, however, does not assure protection against
property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire.
The Manufacturer recommends that smoke and/or heat detectors be located
throughout a protected premise following the recommendations of the current
edition of the National Fire Protection Association, Standard 72 (NFPA 72),
manufacturer’s recommendations, State and local codes, and the
recommendations contained in the Guide for Proper Use of System Smoke
Detectors, which are made available at no charge to all installing dealers.
These documents can be found at
http://www.systemsensor.com/html/applict.html. A study by the Federal
Emergency Management Agency (an agency of the United States government)
indicated that smoke detectors may not go off in as many as 35% of all fires.
While fire alarm systems are designed to provide early warning against fire,
they do not guarantee warning or protection against fire. A fire alarm system
may not provide timely or adequate warning, or simply may not function, for a
variety of reasons.
Smoke Detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors
such as in chimneys, in or behind walls, on roofs, or on the other side of closed
doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a
building. A second-floor detector, for example, may not sense a first-floor or
basement fire.
Particles of combustion or “smoke” from a developing fire may not reach the
sensing chambers of smoke detectors because:
• Barriers such as closed or partially closed doors, walls, or chimneys may
inhibit particle or smoke flow.
• Smoke particles may become "cold," stratify, and not reach the ceiling or
upper walls where detectors are located.
• Smoke particles may be blown away from detectors by air outlets.
• Smoke particles may be drawn into air returns before reaching the detector.
The amount of "smoke" present may be insufficient to alarm smoke detectors.
Smoke detectors are designed to alarm at various levels of smoke density. If
such density levels are not created by a developing fire at the location of
detectors, the detectors will not go into alarm.
Smoke detectors, even when working properly, have sensing limitations.
Detectors that have photoelectronic sensing chambers tend to detect
smoldering fires better than flaming fires, which have little visible smoke.
Detectors that have ionizing-type sensing chambers tend to detect fast-flaming
fires better than smoldering fires.
Because fires develop in different ways and are often unpredictable in their
growth, neither type of detector is necessarily best nor may a given type of
detector provide adequate warning of a fire.
Smoke detectors cannot be expected to provide adequate warning of fires
caused by arson, children playing with matches (especially in bedrooms),
smoking in bed, and violent explosions (caused by escaping gas, improper
storage of flammable materials, etc.).
Heat detectors do not sense particles of combustion and alarm only when heat
on their sensors increases at a predetermined rate or reaches a predetermined
level.
Rate-of-rise heat detectors may be subject to reduced sensitivity over time. For
this reason, the rate-of-rise feature of each detector should be tested at least
once per year by a qualified fire protection specialist. Heat detectors are
designed to protect property, not life.
IMPORTANT! Smoke detectors must be installed in the same room as the
control panel and in rooms used by the system for the connection of alarm
transmission wiring, communications, signaling, and/or power. If detectors are
not so located, a developing fire may damage the alarm system, crippling its
ability to report a fire.
Audible warning devices such as bells may not alert people if these devices are
located on the other side of closed or partly open doors or are located on
another floor of a building. Any warning device may fail to alert people with a
disability or those who have recently consumed drugs, alcohol, or medication.
Please note that:
• Strobes can, under certain circumstances, cause seizures in people with
conditions such as epilepsy.
• Studies have shown that certain people, even when they hear a fire alarm
signal, do not respond or comprehend the meaning of the signal. It is the
property owner’s responsibility to conduct fire drills and other training exercise
to make people aware of fire alarm signals and instruct them on the proper
reaction to alarm signals.
• In rare instances, the sounding of a warning device can cause temporary or
permanent hearing loss.
A fire alarm system will not operate without any electrical power. If AC power
fails the system will operate from standby batteries only for a specified time and
only if the batteries have been properly maintained and replaced regularly.
Equipment used in the system may not be technically compatible with the
control panel. It is essential to use only equipment listed for service with your
control panel.
Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premise to a central
monitoring station may be out of service or temporarily disabled. For added
protection against telephone line failure, backup radio transmission systems
are recommended.
The most common cause of fire alarm malfunction is inadequate maintenance.
To keep the entire fire alarm system in excellent working order, ongoing
maintenance is required per the manufacturer’s recommendations, and UL and
NFPA standards. At a minimum, the requirements of NFPA 72 shall be
followed. Environments with large amounts of dust, dirt, or high air velocity
require more frequent maintenance. A maintenance agreement should be
arranged through the local manufacturer’s representative. Maintenance should
be scheduled monthly.
Installation Precautions
Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term
reliability:
WARNING - Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire
alarm control panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control
unit and associated equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting
cards, modules, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not
attempt to install, service, or operate this unit until manuals are read and
understood.
CAUTION - System Re-acceptance Test after
Software Changes: To ensure proper system operation, this product must be
tested in accordance with NFPA 72 after any programming operation or change
in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after any change,
addition, or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair, or
adjustment to system hardware or wiring. All components, circuits, system
operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be
100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently
affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the
change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper
system operation verified.
This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49° C/32-120° F and
at a relative humidity 93% ± 2% RH (non-condensing) at 32° C ± 2° C (90° F ±
3° F).
However, the useful life of the system’s standby batteries and the electronic
components may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and
humidity.
Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be installed in
an environment with a normal room temperature of 15-27° C/60-80° F.
Verify that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating device loops.
Most devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified
device voltage.
Follow the instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals.
These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and
associated equipment FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper
installation
FCC Warning
WARNING: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual may cause interference
to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for Class A computing devices pursuant to
Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which is designed to provide
reasonable protection against such interference when devices
are operating in a commercial environment. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in
which case the user will be required to correct the interference at
his or her own expense
Gamewell-FCI®, SmartScan®, and E3 Series® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc. Echelon® is a registered
trademark and LonWorks™ is a trademark of Echelon Corporation. ARCNET® is a registered trademark of Datapoint Corporation.
Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.
©2014 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited.
Printed: September 2014 in Canton, MA
Survivability
Per the National Fire Alarm Code, NFPA 72, all circuits necessary for the
operation of the operation of the notification appliances shall be protected until
they enter the evacuation signaling zone that they serve. Any of the following
methods shall be considered acceptable as meeting these requirements:
1) A 2-hour rated cable or cable system
2) A 2-hour rated enclosure
3) Performance alternatives approved by Authority
Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
Like all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can
be damaged when subjected to lightning induced transients. Although no
system is completely immune from lightning transients and interference, proper
grounding will reduce susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not
recommended, due to an increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes.
Consult with the Technical Services Department if any problems are
anticipated or encountered.
Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit
boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits.
Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or
punching of the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the
sides or rear. Before making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with
battery, transformer, or printed circuit board location.
Do not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over-tightening may
damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty
with screw terminal removal.
This system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with
a proper wrist strap before handling any circuits so that static charges are
removed from the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic
assemblies removed from the unit.
Precau-D2-8-2008
Canadian Requirements
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for
radiation noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the
Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of
Communications.
Le present appareil numerique n’emet pas de bruits
radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils
numeriques de la Classe A prescrites dan le Reglement sur le
brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des
Communications du Canada.
 4 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Table of Contents
Foreword 0

Part I General 18
1 Introduction................................................................................................................................... 18
2 About the CAMWorks
...................................................................................................................................
Key 20
3 Conditional ...................................................................................................................................
Action Maps (CAMs) 21
4 Multi-ring CAM
...................................................................................................................................
Special Considerations 22
5 FocalPoint Considerations
................................................................................................................................... 24
6 Network Regions
................................................................................................................................... 24
7 Site Specific...................................................................................................................................
Key 24

Part II CAMWorks Window 27

1 The Ribbon ................................................................................................................................... 27
CAMWorks Icon .......................................................................................................................................................... 28
New Project
......................................................................................................................................................... 28
Open Project
......................................................................................................................................................... 29
Close Project
......................................................................................................................................................... 29
Save Project
......................................................................................................................................................... 29
Save As ......................................................................................................................................................... 30
Exit ......................................................................................................................................................... 30
Recent Projects
......................................................................................................................................................... 30
Quick Access..........................................................................................................................................................
Toolbar 30
Save Project
......................................................................................................................................................... 30
Close Project
......................................................................................................................................................... 30
Show Above/Below
.........................................................................................................................................................
The Ribbon 30
Minimize .........................................................................................................................................................
The Ribbon 30
File .......................................................................................................................................................... 31
New Project
......................................................................................................................................................... 31
Open Project
......................................................................................................................................................... 32
Close Project
......................................................................................................................................................... 33
Save Project
......................................................................................................................................................... 33
Save Project
.........................................................................................................................................................
As 33
Upgrade ......................................................................................................................................................... 33
Print ......................................................................................................................................................... 34
Print Preview
......................................................................................................................................................... 34
Page Setup......................................................................................................................................................... 34
Edit .......................................................................................................................................................... 34
Find/Replace
.........................................................................................................................................................
CAM 34
View .......................................................................................................................................................... 34
Show/Hide .........................................................................................................................................................
Project Explorer 35
Communications.......................................................................................................................................................... 35
Download......................................................................................................................................................... 35
Upload ......................................................................................................................................................... 35
Project Globals
.......................................................................................................................................................... 35
Network Settings
......................................................................................................................................................... 35
Passwords ......................................................................................................................................... 35

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Contents 5

User Defined Types ......................................................................................................................................... 36

Miscellaneous ......................................................................................................................................... 41
Display Priorities......................................................................................................................................... 41
Regional .........................................................................................................................................................
Settings 43
Night/Weekend/Holiday .........................................................................................................................................
Settings 43
Walk Test Timeout ......................................................................................................................................... 44
Silence Settings
......................................................................................................................................................... 44
Tools .......................................................................................................................................................... 45
CAMWorks .........................................................................................................................................................
Options 46
Add Node......................................................................................................................................................... 47
Import Node
......................................................................................................................................................... 48
Copy Node .........................................................................................................................................................
Configuration 49
Program Validation
......................................................................................................................................................... 49
Export Node
.........................................................................................................................................................
Details 50
Network Query
......................................................................................................................................................... 51
OTS-E3 ......................................................................................................................................................... 51
Auto Save.........................................................................................................................................................
Enable 51
Convert 7100
.........................................................................................................................................................
to ILI-MB-E3 Panel 51
Convert 7100
.........................................................................................................................................................
to SLP 51
Upgrade License
......................................................................................................................................................... 51
License Information
......................................................................................................................................................... 52
Generate.........................................................................................................................................................
Low Level CAMS 52
Help .......................................................................................................................................................... 53
Help ......................................................................................................................................................... 53
Printable .........................................................................................................................................................
Documentation 53
System Status
.........................................................................................................................................................
Map 53
About ......................................................................................................................................................... 53
2 Project Explorer
................................................................................................................................... 53
3 Main Area ................................................................................................................................... 53
4 Status Bar ................................................................................................................................... 54

Part III Project Explorer 56

1 Node Summary
...................................................................................................................................
/ Sytem Overview 57
Enable / Disable
..........................................................................................................................................................
Nodes 59
Add Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 59
Delete Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 60
2 Project Globals
................................................................................................................................... 61
Network Settings
.......................................................................................................................................................... 61
Passwords ......................................................................................................................................................... 61
User Defined
.........................................................................................................................................................
Types 62
Miscellaneous
......................................................................................................................................................... 66
Display Priorities
......................................................................................................................................................... 67
Silence Settings
.......................................................................................................................................................... 69
Regional Settings
.......................................................................................................................................................... 70
Night/Weekend/Holiday
.........................................................................................................................................................
Schedule 70
3 Rings ................................................................................................................................... 71
4 ILI-MB-E3 ................................................................................................................................... 71
Copy Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 72
Print Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 73
Convert to Standalone
..........................................................................................................................................................
ILI-MB-E3 panel 73
5 ILI-S-E3 ................................................................................................................................... 73

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

5
 6 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Copy Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 74

Print Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 75
6 ILI95-MB-E3................................................................................................................................... 75
Copy Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 76
Print Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 76
Convert to Standalone
..........................................................................................................................................................
ILI95-MB-E3 panel 77
7 ILI95-S-E3 ................................................................................................................................... 77
Copy Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 77
Print Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 78
8 INI-7100 ................................................................................................................................... 78
Copy Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 79
Print Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 80
Convert to ILI-MB-E3
..........................................................................................................................................................
panel 80
9 NGA ................................................................................................................................... 80
Copy Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 80
Print Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 81
10 INCC ................................................................................................................................... 81
Copy Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 82
Print Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 83
11 INX ................................................................................................................................... 83
Copy Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 83
Print Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 84
12 INI-VGE ................................................................................................................................... 84
Copy Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 85
Print Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 86
13 ANX-SR ................................................................................................................................... 86
Copy Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 86
Print Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 87
14 ANX-MR ................................................................................................................................... 87
Copy Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 87
Print Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 87
15 SLP-E3 ................................................................................................................................... 88
Copy Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 88
Print Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 89
16 SLP95-E3 ................................................................................................................................... 89
Copy Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 90
Print Node .......................................................................................................................................................... 91

Part IV S3 Series (Apollo) 93

1 Basic steps ...................................................................................................................................
in configuring an S3 Series Panel 93
Programming..........................................................................................................................................................
node-wide parameters and defaults 93
Programming..........................................................................................................................................................
loop devices and groups 93
Entering labels
..........................................................................................................................................................
and modifying default settings for loop devices 94
Downloading ..........................................................................................................................................................
System Configuration 94
Printing/Viewing
..........................................................................................................................................................
configuration data tables 96
2 S3 Series - How
...................................................................................................................................
Do I 96
Include Output
..........................................................................................................................................................
in system General Output List 96
Assign specific
..........................................................................................................................................................
input to output relationships 96
Create a custom
..........................................................................................................................................................
display banner for panel 97

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Contents 7

Create my own..........................................................................................................................................................
SLC device types 97
Disable downloading
..........................................................................................................................................................
for a particular SLC address? 97
Disable DACT-E3
.......................................................................................................................................................... 98
View selected..........................................................................................................................................................
reports in a window 98
Create Zone Codes
.......................................................................................................................................................... 98
Setup a cross..........................................................................................................................................................
zone 98
3 S3 Series - ...................................................................................................................................
Configuration Screens 100
Miscellaneous.......................................................................................................................................................... 100
SLP Miscellaneous
.......................................................................................................................................................... 101
User Defined
.........................................................................................................................................................
Types 101
Display Priorities
......................................................................................................................................................... 105
Passwords......................................................................................................................................................... 107
Night/Weekend/Holiday
.........................................................................................................................................................
Schedule 108
Input Output..........................................................................................................................................................
Relation 108
General Settings
.......................................................................................................................................................... 109
General .........................................................................................................................................................
Settings 110
DACT Settings
......................................................................................................................................................... 113
NAC Settings
......................................................................................................................................................... 119
Zone Code......................................................................................................................................................... 121
Devices .......................................................................................................................................................... 122
Input Devices
......................................................................................................................................................... 122
Add ......................................................................................................................................... 126
Output Devices
......................................................................................................................................................... 127
Add ......................................................................................................................................... 127
RCE-95 ......................................................................................................................................... 128
SCE-95 ......................................................................................................................................... 131
BCE-95 ......................................................................................................................................... 133
Cross Zones.......................................................................................................................................................... 137
ASM/ANU .......................................................................................................................................................... 139
Virtual Switch
.......................................................................................................................................................... 140
Annunciators .......................................................................................................................................................... 141
CAM .......................................................................................................................................................... 143
CAM Output
.........................................................................................................................................................
Group 144
CAM ASM/ANU
.........................................................................................................................................................
LED 147
CAM Scratchpad
......................................................................................................................................................... 151
CAM Special
.........................................................................................................................................................
Functions 154
Schedule ......................................................................................................................................... 155
Counters ......................................................................................................................................... 159
Sequence ......................................................................................................................................... 161
Timers ......................................................................................................................................... 165
CAM Group.........................................................................................................................................................
Disable 165
CAM Disable
.........................................................................................................................................................
Type Tags 169
CAM Sensor
.........................................................................................................................................................
Output 173
CAM Reset.........................................................................................................................................................
Inhibit 176
CAM LCD-SLP
.........................................................................................................................................................
Annunciators 180
Virtual CAM
......................................................................................................................................................... 184
Advanced .........................................................................................................................................................
CAM Programming 188
Communication.......................................................................................................................................................... 188
4 General ................................................................................................................................... 188
Sensor Device
..........................................................................................................................................................
Types 188
Element Device
..........................................................................................................................................................
Types 191
Disable Groups
.......................................................................................................................................................... 196
DACT Reporting
..........................................................................................................................................................
Codes 197

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

7
8 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Part V S3 Series (System Sensor) 199

1 Basic steps...................................................................................................................................
in configuring an S3 Series Panel 199
Programming ..........................................................................................................................................................
node-wide parameters and defaults 199
Programming ..........................................................................................................................................................
loop devices and groups 199
Entering labels
..........................................................................................................................................................
and modifying default settings for loop devices 200
Downloading..........................................................................................................................................................
System Configuration 200
Printing/Viewing
..........................................................................................................................................................
configuration data tables 202
2 S3 Series - ...................................................................................................................................
How Do I 202
Include Output
..........................................................................................................................................................
in system General Output List 202
Assign specific
..........................................................................................................................................................
input to output relationships 203
Create a custom
..........................................................................................................................................................
display banner for panel 203
Create my own
..........................................................................................................................................................
SLC device types 203
Disable downloading
..........................................................................................................................................................
for a particular SLC address? 204
Disable DACT-E3
.......................................................................................................................................................... 204
View selected
..........................................................................................................................................................
reports in a window 204
Create Zone..........................................................................................................................................................
Codes 204
Setup a cross
..........................................................................................................................................................
zone 205
3 S3 Series - ...................................................................................................................................
Configuration Screens 206
Miscellaneous.......................................................................................................................................................... 206
SLP Miscellaneous
.......................................................................................................................................................... 207
User Defined
.........................................................................................................................................................
Types 207
Display Priorities
......................................................................................................................................................... 212
Passwords......................................................................................................................................................... 213
Night/Weekend/Holiday
.........................................................................................................................................................
Schedule 214
Input Output..........................................................................................................................................................
Relation 215
General Settings
.......................................................................................................................................................... 216
General .........................................................................................................................................................
Settings 216
DACT Settings
......................................................................................................................................................... 221
NAC Settings
......................................................................................................................................................... 227
Zone Code......................................................................................................................................................... 229
Devices .......................................................................................................................................................... 230
Input Devices
......................................................................................................................................................... 230
Add ......................................................................................................................................... 235
Output Devices
......................................................................................................................................................... 236
Add ......................................................................................................................................... 238
Cross Zones.......................................................................................................................................................... 238
ASM/ANU .......................................................................................................................................................... 240
Virtual Switch
.......................................................................................................................................................... 242
Annunciators .......................................................................................................................................................... 243
CAM .......................................................................................................................................................... 245
CAM Output
.........................................................................................................................................................
Group 245
CAM ASM/ANU
.........................................................................................................................................................
LED 249
CAM Scratchpad
......................................................................................................................................................... 252
CAM Special
.........................................................................................................................................................
Functions 256
Schedule ......................................................................................................................................... 256
Counters ......................................................................................................................................... 260
Sequence ......................................................................................................................................... 263
Timers ......................................................................................................................................... 266
CAM Group.........................................................................................................................................................
Disable 267
CAM Disable
.........................................................................................................................................................
Type Tags 270
CAM Sensor
.........................................................................................................................................................
Output 274
CAM Reset.........................................................................................................................................................
Inhibit 278

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Contents 9

CAM LCD-SLP
.........................................................................................................................................................
Annunciators 282
CAM Sounder
.........................................................................................................................................................
Base Coded Patterns 286
Virtual CAM
......................................................................................................................................................... 290
Advanced .........................................................................................................................................................
CAM Programming 293
Communication
.......................................................................................................................................................... 294
4 General ................................................................................................................................... 294
Sensor Device
..........................................................................................................................................................
Types 294
Module Device
..........................................................................................................................................................
Types 314
Disable Groups
.......................................................................................................................................................... 321
DACT Reporting
..........................................................................................................................................................
Codes 322

Part VI E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 324

1 Basic steps...................................................................................................................................
in configuring an E3 Series Panel 324
Programming ..........................................................................................................................................................
loop devices and groups 324
Entering labels
..........................................................................................................................................................
and modifying default settings for loop devices 324
Downloading..........................................................................................................................................................
System Configuration 324
Printing/Viewing
..........................................................................................................................................................
configuration data tables 326
Programming ..........................................................................................................................................................
node-wide parameters and defaults 327
2 E3 Series - ...................................................................................................................................
How Do I? 327
Include Output
..........................................................................................................................................................
in system General Output List 327
Assign specific
..........................................................................................................................................................
input to output relationships 328
Create a custom
..........................................................................................................................................................
display banner for panel 328
Create my own
..........................................................................................................................................................
SLC device types 328
Disable downloading
..........................................................................................................................................................
for a particular SLC address? 328
Disable DACT-E3
.......................................................................................................................................................... 329
View selected
..........................................................................................................................................................
reports in a window 329
Export configuration
..........................................................................................................................................................
in a different format 329
Create Zone..........................................................................................................................................................
Codes 329
Setup a cross
..........................................................................................................................................................
zone 330
3 E3 Series - ...................................................................................................................................
Configuration Screens 331
Passwords .......................................................................................................................................................... 331
User Defined..........................................................................................................................................................
Types 332
Miscellaneous
.......................................................................................................................................................... 337
Display Priorities
.......................................................................................................................................................... 337
Night/Weekend/Holiday
..........................................................................................................................................................
Schedule 339
General Settings
.......................................................................................................................................................... 339
Annunciators.......................................................................................................................................................... 344
NAC Settings.......................................................................................................................................................... 346
DACT Settings
.......................................................................................................................................................... 349
Zone Code .......................................................................................................................................................... 354
Input Devices
.......................................................................................................................................................... 355
Add ......................................................................................................................................................... 358
Block Add
......................................................................................................................................................... 360
Output Devices
.......................................................................................................................................................... 363
Add ......................................................................................................................................................... 364
Block Add
......................................................................................................................................................... 368
RCE-95 ......................................................................................................................................................... 373
SCE-95 ......................................................................................................................................................... 376
BCE-95 ......................................................................................................................................................... 378
Cross Zones.......................................................................................................................................................... 381
ASM/ANU .......................................................................................................................................................... 383
Label Groups.......................................................................................................................................................... 385

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

9
 10 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

CAM Output..........................................................................................................................................................
Groups 385
CAM Annunciators
.......................................................................................................................................................... 389
CAM ASM/ANU..........................................................................................................................................................
LED 393
CAM Scratchpad
.......................................................................................................................................................... 396
CAM Special..........................................................................................................................................................
Function 400
Schedule......................................................................................................................................................... 401
Counters......................................................................................................................................................... 404
Sequence......................................................................................................................................................... 407
Timers ......................................................................................................................................................... 411
CAM Group ..........................................................................................................................................................
Disable 411
CAM Disable..........................................................................................................................................................
Type Tag 415
CAM Sensor..........................................................................................................................................................
Output 418
CAM Reset Inhibit
.......................................................................................................................................................... 422
Advanced CAM
..........................................................................................................................................................
Programming 426
Communication
.......................................................................................................................................................... 426
4 General ................................................................................................................................... 426
Sensor Device
..........................................................................................................................................................
Types 426
Element Device
..........................................................................................................................................................
Types 429
Disable Groups
.......................................................................................................................................................... 434
5 DACT Reporting
................................................................................................................................... 435
Auto-creation
..........................................................................................................................................................
of DACT Codes 436
Device Address
.........................................................................................................................................................
Table 436
Device Type
.........................................................................................................................................................
Table 436
System Response
.........................................................................................................................................................
Table 439

Part VII E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 442

1 Basic steps...................................................................................................................................
in configuring an E3 Series Panel 442
Programming ..........................................................................................................................................................
node-wide parameters and defaults 442
Programming ..........................................................................................................................................................
loop devices and groups 442
Entering labels
..........................................................................................................................................................
and modifying default settings for loop devices 443
Downloading..........................................................................................................................................................
System Configuration 443
Printing/Viewing
..........................................................................................................................................................
configuration data tables 445
2 E3 Series - ...................................................................................................................................
How Do I? 446
Include Output
..........................................................................................................................................................
in system General Output List 446
Assign specific
..........................................................................................................................................................
input to output relationships 446
Create a custom
..........................................................................................................................................................
display banner for panel 446
Create my own
..........................................................................................................................................................
SLC device types 446
Disable downloading
..........................................................................................................................................................
for a particular SLC address? 447
Disable DACT-E3
.......................................................................................................................................................... 447
View selected
..........................................................................................................................................................
reports in a window 447
Export configuration
..........................................................................................................................................................
in a different format 447
Create Zone..........................................................................................................................................................
Codes 448
Setup a cross
..........................................................................................................................................................
zone 448
Configure Custom
..........................................................................................................................................................
Responses for Multi-criteria Sensors 450
3 E3 Series - ...................................................................................................................................
Configuration Screens 453
Passwords .......................................................................................................................................................... 453
User Defined..........................................................................................................................................................
Types 454
Miscellaneous
.......................................................................................................................................................... 458
Display Priorities
.......................................................................................................................................................... 459
Night/Weekend/Holiday
..........................................................................................................................................................
Schedule 461
General Settings
.......................................................................................................................................................... 461
Annunciators.......................................................................................................................................................... 467

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Contents 11

NAC Settings .......................................................................................................................................................... 468

DACT Settings .......................................................................................................................................................... 471
Zone Code .......................................................................................................................................................... 476
Multi-criteria..........................................................................................................................................................
Sensor Profiles 477
Input Devices .......................................................................................................................................................... 483
Add ......................................................................................................................................................... 492
Block Add ......................................................................................................................................................... 495
Output Devices.......................................................................................................................................................... 498
Add ......................................................................................................................................................... 500
Block Add ......................................................................................................................................................... 501
Cross Zones.......................................................................................................................................................... 503
ASM/ANU .......................................................................................................................................................... 505
Label Groups .......................................................................................................................................................... 507
CAM Output..........................................................................................................................................................
Groups 507
CAM Annunciators
.......................................................................................................................................................... 510
CAM ASM/ANU ..........................................................................................................................................................
LED 515
CAM Scratchpad.......................................................................................................................................................... 518
CAM Special..........................................................................................................................................................
Function 522
Schedule ......................................................................................................................................................... 523
Counters......................................................................................................................................................... 526
Sequence ......................................................................................................................................................... 529
Timers ......................................................................................................................................................... 532
CAM Group ..........................................................................................................................................................
Disable 533
CAM Disable..........................................................................................................................................................
Type Tag 537
CAM Sensor..........................................................................................................................................................
Output 540
CAM Reset Inhibit
.......................................................................................................................................................... 544
CAM Sounder ..........................................................................................................................................................
Base Coded Patterns 545
Advanced CAM ..........................................................................................................................................................
Programming 545
Communication .......................................................................................................................................................... 545
4 General ................................................................................................................................... 545
Sensor Device..........................................................................................................................................................
Types 545
Module Device..........................................................................................................................................................
Types 565
Disable Groups
.......................................................................................................................................................... 572
Fivel-level Multi-level
..........................................................................................................................................................
Response 573
5 DACT Reporting
................................................................................................................................... 574
Auto-creation
..........................................................................................................................................................
of DACT Codes 575
Device Address
.........................................................................................................................................................
Table 575
Device Type
.........................................................................................................................................................
Table 576
System Response
.........................................................................................................................................................
Table 578

Part VIII 7100 582

1 Basic steps...................................................................................................................................
in configuring a 7100 panel 582
Programming ..........................................................................................................................................................
node-wide parameters and default settings 582
Programming ..........................................................................................................................................................
Loop devices and groups 582
Entering labels
..........................................................................................................................................................
and modifying default settings for Loop devices 583
Entering labels
..........................................................................................................................................................
for LED Annunciator 583
Programming ..........................................................................................................................................................
Group Options 583
Downloading..........................................................................................................................................................
System Configuration 584
Printing/Viewing
..........................................................................................................................................................
configuration data tables 586
2 7100 - How...................................................................................................................................
Do I? 586
Include Output
..........................................................................................................................................................
in system General Output List 586
Assign specific
..........................................................................................................................................................
input to output relationships for 7100 586

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

11
12 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Create a custom
..........................................................................................................................................................
display banner for panel 586
Define my own ..........................................................................................................................................................
AMM device type 587
Change default..........................................................................................................................................................
settings for a particular SLC address 587
Disable downloading
..........................................................................................................................................................
for a particular SLC address 587
View selected ..........................................................................................................................................................
reports in a window 587
Export file in..........................................................................................................................................................
different formats 588
Create Zone..........................................................................................................................................................
Codes 588
Setup a cross ..........................................................................................................................................................
zone 588
3 7100 - Configuration
...................................................................................................................................
Settings 590
Passwords .......................................................................................................................................................... 590
User Defined..........................................................................................................................................................
Types 591
Miscellaneous.......................................................................................................................................................... 592
Night/Weekend/Holiday
..........................................................................................................................................................
Schedule 592
General Settings
.......................................................................................................................................................... 593
Default Verification
.........................................................................................................................................................
Settings 597
Default Sensitivity
.........................................................................................................................................................
Settings 598
LED Annunciators
.......................................................................................................................................................... 598
NAC Settings .......................................................................................................................................................... 599
DACT Settings.......................................................................................................................................................... 601
Zone Code .......................................................................................................................................................... 604
Input Devices.......................................................................................................................................................... 605
Add ......................................................................................................................................................... 607
Block Add......................................................................................................................................................... 608
Input Groups.......................................................................................................................................................... 610
Output Devices
.......................................................................................................................................................... 611
Add ......................................................................................................................................................... 614
Block Add......................................................................................................................................................... 615
Cross Zones.......................................................................................................................................................... 616
Label Groups .......................................................................................................................................................... 618
CAM Output..........................................................................................................................................................
groups 618
CAM Scratchpad
.......................................................................................................................................................... 622
CAM Special..........................................................................................................................................................
Function 625
Schedule ......................................................................................................................................................... 626
Counters......................................................................................................................................................... 629
Sequence ......................................................................................................................................................... 632
Timers ......................................................................................................................................................... 636
CAM Reset Inhibit
.......................................................................................................................................................... 636
Advanced CAM ..........................................................................................................................................................
Programming 643
Communication.......................................................................................................................................................... 643
4 General ................................................................................................................................... 643
7100 Input/Output
..........................................................................................................................................................
Functionality 643
Cross Zone Functions
.......................................................................................................................................................... 644
Zone Coding..........................................................................................................................................................
Functions 647
Sensor Device
..........................................................................................................................................................
Types 647
Module Device
..........................................................................................................................................................
Types 650

Part IX INCC 663

1 What Is the...................................................................................................................................
INCC? 663
2 INCC - Configuration
...................................................................................................................................
Screens 663
ASM / ANU .......................................................................................................................................................... 663
Output Devices
.......................................................................................................................................................... 663
CAM Telephone
..........................................................................................................................................................
Modules 664

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Contents 13

CAM ASM/ANU..........................................................................................................................................................
LED 667
CAM Phone ..........................................................................................................................................................
Function 671
CAM Scratchpad
.......................................................................................................................................................... 675
CAM Audio Outputs
.......................................................................................................................................................... 678
CAM Reset Inhibit
.......................................................................................................................................................... 682
CAM Special..........................................................................................................................................................
Function 686
Counters......................................................................................................................................................... 686
Sequence......................................................................................................................................................... 689
Timers ......................................................................................................................................................... 692
Audio Messages
.......................................................................................................................................................... 693
Advanced CAM
..........................................................................................................................................................
Programming 694
Communication
.......................................................................................................................................................... 695

Part X INX 697

1 What Is the...................................................................................................................................
INX? 697
2 INX - Configuration
...................................................................................................................................
Screens 697
General Settings
.......................................................................................................................................................... 697
ASM / ANU .......................................................................................................................................................... 697
Output Devices
.......................................................................................................................................................... 698
CAM Modules .......................................................................................................................................................... 699
CAM Audio Outputs
.......................................................................................................................................................... 703
CAM Scratchpads
.......................................................................................................................................................... 707
CAM ASM/ANU ..........................................................................................................................................................
LED 711
CAM Phone ..........................................................................................................................................................
Function 714
CAM Reset Inhibit
.......................................................................................................................................................... 718
CAM Special..........................................................................................................................................................
Function 721
Counters......................................................................................................................................................... 722
Sequence ......................................................................................................................................................... 725
Timers ......................................................................................................................................................... 728
Audio Messages
.......................................................................................................................................................... 729
Advanced CAM..........................................................................................................................................................
Programming 730
Communication
.......................................................................................................................................................... 730

Part XI INI-VGE 732

1 What is the...................................................................................................................................
INI-VGE? 732
2 INI-VGE - Configuration
...................................................................................................................................
Screens 732
General Settings
.......................................................................................................................................................... 732
ASM / ANU .......................................................................................................................................................... 732
Output Devices
.......................................................................................................................................................... 733
CAM Modules .......................................................................................................................................................... 734
CAM ASM/ANU ..........................................................................................................................................................
LED 738
CAM Audio Outputs
.......................................................................................................................................................... 741
CAM Scratchpads
.......................................................................................................................................................... 746
CAM Phone ..........................................................................................................................................................
Function 749
CAM Reset Inhibit
.......................................................................................................................................................... 753
CAM Special..........................................................................................................................................................
Function 756
Counters......................................................................................................................................................... 757
Sequence ......................................................................................................................................................... 759
Timers ......................................................................................................................................................... 763
Audio Messages
.......................................................................................................................................................... 763
Advanced CAM..........................................................................................................................................................
Programming 765
Communication
.......................................................................................................................................................... 765

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

13
 14 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Part XII NGA 767

1 What is the...................................................................................................................................
NGA? 767
2 NGA - Configuration
...................................................................................................................................
Screens 767
General Settings
.......................................................................................................................................................... 767
NGA CAM Text..........................................................................................................................................................
Messages 769
CAM Scratchpad
.......................................................................................................................................................... 775
CAM Special..........................................................................................................................................................
Functions 778
Schedule ......................................................................................................................................................... 779
Counters......................................................................................................................................................... 782
Sequence ......................................................................................................................................................... 785
Timers ......................................................................................................................................................... 789
CAM Reset Inhibit
.......................................................................................................................................................... 789
Advanced CAM..........................................................................................................................................................
Programming 793
NGA Logo .......................................................................................................................................................... 793
NGA Screen..........................................................................................................................................................
Saver 794
Communication
.......................................................................................................................................................... 795
3 Requirements
...................................................................................................................................
for NGA Graphics 795

Part XIII ANX 797

1 What is the...................................................................................................................................
ANX? 797
2 ANX - Configuration
...................................................................................................................................
Screens 798
General Settings
.......................................................................................................................................................... 798
Virtual Switches
.......................................................................................................................................................... 800
Virtual CAM .......................................................................................................................................................... 801
Scratchpads.......................................................................................................................................................... 805
CAM Reset Inhibit
.......................................................................................................................................................... 808
CAM Special..........................................................................................................................................................
Function 815
Schedule ......................................................................................................................................................... 816
Counters......................................................................................................................................................... 819
Sequence ......................................................................................................................................................... 822
Timers ......................................................................................................................................................... 826
Advanced CAM ..........................................................................................................................................................
Programming 826
Communication.......................................................................................................................................................... 827

Part XIV Utilities 829

1 Network Query
................................................................................................................................... 829
How To Use ..........................................................................................................................................................
Network Query 829
2 OTS-E3 ................................................................................................................................... 831
Menu Bar .......................................................................................................................................................... 832
File Menu......................................................................................................................................................... 832
New Session ......................................................................................................................................... 832
Open Session ......................................................................................................................................... 832
Save ......................................................................................................................................... 832
Save As ......................................................................................................................................... 833
Print ......................................................................................................................................... 833
Print Preview ......................................................................................................................................... 833
Page Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 833
Exit ......................................................................................................................................... 833
Connect.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 833
Connect ......................................................................................................................................... 833

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Contents 15

Disconnect ......................................................................................................................................... 833

Commands .........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 834
Read Sensitivity ......................................................................................................................................... 834
View Device ......................................................................................................................................... 834
Monitor Device......................................................................................................................................... 835
Network Update ......................................................................................................................................... 835
Autoconfig ......................................................................................................................................... 836
Event Logs ......................................................................................................................................... 836
Service Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 836
IP Settings ......................................................................................................................................... 837
Reset Intelligent .........................................................................................................................................
FAAST Device 838
Toolbar .......................................................................................................................................................... 839
New Session
......................................................................................................................................................... 840
Open Session
......................................................................................................................................................... 840
Save ......................................................................................................................................................... 840
Print ......................................................................................................................................................... 840
Connect......................................................................................................................................................... 840
Disconnect......................................................................................................................................................... 840
Exit ......................................................................................................................................................... 840
COM Port .........................................................................................................................................................
Selection 840
Access Code..........................................................................................................................................................
Buttons 840
Command Buttons
.......................................................................................................................................................... 840
Send Command .......................................................................................................................................................... 841
3 Download Utilties
................................................................................................................................... 841
Configuration
..........................................................................................................................................................
Download 841
Firmware Download
.......................................................................................................................................................... 843
7100 Firmware
.........................................................................................................................................................
Download 845
INI-7100.........................................................................................................................................................
Firmware Download 847
INCC Firmware
.........................................................................................................................................................
Download 848
INX Firmware
.........................................................................................................................................................
Download 849
INI-VGE.........................................................................................................................................................
Firmware Download 850
NGA Firmware
.........................................................................................................................................................
Download 851
ILI-MB-E3.........................................................................................................................................................
Firmware Download 852
ILI-S-E3.........................................................................................................................................................
Firmware Download 853
ILI95-MB-E3
.........................................................................................................................................................
Firmware Download 854
ILI95-S-E3
.........................................................................................................................................................
Firmware Download 856
ANX-SR.........................................................................................................................................................
Firmware Download 857
ANX-MR.........................................................................................................................................................
Firmware Download 858
SLP-E3 .........................................................................................................................................................
Firmware Download 859
SLP95-E3 .........................................................................................................................................................
Firmware Download 860
LCD-SLP .........................................................................................................................................................
Firmware Download 861
RPT-E3 .........................................................................................................................................................
Firmware Download 862
Message Download
.......................................................................................................................................................... 864
NGA Graphics..........................................................................................................................................................
Download 865
NGA Logo Download
.......................................................................................................................................................... 867
NGA Screen..........................................................................................................................................................
Saver Download 868
4 Configuration
...................................................................................................................................
Upload 870
7100 Standalone
..........................................................................................................................................................
Projects 870
View Uploaded
.........................................................................................................................................................
Configuration 871
E3 Series Projects
.......................................................................................................................................................... 871
View Uploaded
.........................................................................................................................................................
Configuration 873
5 Find/Replace
...................................................................................................................................
CAM 874

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

15
 16 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Part XV CAM Programming Examples 877

1 Microphone
...................................................................................................................................
Paging 877
All Call Paging
.......................................................................................................................................................... 877
Selective Paging
.......................................................................................................................................................... 878
2 Typical System
...................................................................................................................................
Function Examples 879
Introduction.......................................................................................................................................................... 879
Linking An Alarm
..........................................................................................................................................................
Condition To An Audio Message 879
Sample .........................................................................................................................................................
1 879
Sample .........................................................................................................................................................
2 881
Providing By..........................................................................................................................................................
Floor Alarm Audio Signaling Disable While Allowing Alarm Override To Remaining System 883
Sample .........................................................................................................................................................
1 883
Programming ..........................................................................................................................................................
A Fire Fighter Phone System 891
Sample .........................................................................................................................................................
1 891
Setup All-Call
..........................................................................................................................................................
And Selective Paging 895
Sample .........................................................................................................................................................
1 895
Sample .........................................................................................................................................................
2 900
Programming ..........................................................................................................................................................
A Backup Amplifier 905
Sample .........................................................................................................................................................
1 905
Linking An Alarm
..........................................................................................................................................................
Condition To Elevator Recall 911
Sample .........................................................................................................................................................
1 911
3 Latching Lockout
................................................................................................................................... 912
4 Firefighter ...................................................................................................................................
Phones 915

Part XVI Advanced CAM Programming 920

1 Programming
...................................................................................................................................
CAMs Manually 920
2 Timers, Counters,
...................................................................................................................................
Sequences 924
3 Advanced CAM
...................................................................................................................................
Programming Editor 925
Main Menu .......................................................................................................................................................... 926
File ......................................................................................................................................................... 926
Edit ......................................................................................................................................................... 927
Search ......................................................................................................................................................... 927
View ......................................................................................................................................................... 927
Help ......................................................................................................................................................... 928
Toolbar .......................................................................................................................................................... 928

Part XVII Technical Documentation 930

Part XVIII Technical Support 932

Part XIX PipeIQ Introduction 934

Part XX PipeIQ Frequently Asked Questions 936

Index 0

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

Part

I
 18 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

1 General

1.1 Introduction
Welcome! CAMWorks is the user configuration system for all E3 Series, S3 Series,
NetSOLO Series and 7100 Series systems.

The Gamewell-FCI network is a peer-to-peer, self-regenerating token-ring network

consisting of up to two networks that are interconnected by an ANX-MR (Addressable Node
Expander, Multi-Ring). The two networks, each referred to as a "Ring", are capable of both
interconnected and independent operation. The first ring may contain Node 1 through Node
63 (Node 63 is the ANX-MR. Node 62 and Node 64 are reserved addresses). The second
ring may contain Node 65 through Node 127 (Node 126 is the ANX-MR. Node 127 is a
reserved address). This yields a total system capacity of 122 nodes, including the ANX-MR.
The system is of modular design, allowing a wide range of configurations. The various types
of nodes available come together to form an integrated, distributed fire alarm system with
audio evacuation and fire command capability. The network communication conveys all fire
alarm, audio evacuation, voice paging, and fire fighter communications over a single pair of
wires or fiber optic cable.

NOTE: Fire Fighter Phone voice communications do not pass through the ANX-MR from
one ring to another.

A node can consist of:

A Model E3 Series Fire Alarm Control Panel comprised of the following equipment:
· ILI-MB-E3 - Intelligent Loop Interface - Main Board, System Sensor.
· ILI-S-E3 - Intelligent Loop Interface - Supplemental (optional, and can only be used
as an add-on to an ILI-MB-E3 or ILI95-MB-E3), System Sensor.
· ILI95-MB-E3 - Intelligent Loop Interface - Main Board, Apollo XP-95.
· ILI95-S-E3 - Intelligent Loop Interface - Supplemental (optional, and can only be
used as an add-on to an ILI-MB-E3 or ILI95-MB-E3), Apollo XP-95.

Optional equipment for the E3 Series includes:

· LCD-E3 - LCD Keypad sub assembly. (optional)

· LCD-SLP - Color LCD touchscreen sub assembly with keypad.
· LCD-7100 - Remote LCD Annunciator. (optional)
· ASM-16 - Addressable Switch Module. (optional)
· ANU-48 - Addressable Annunciator Driver with 48 points. (optional)
· RPT-E3 - Network Repeater. (optional)
· DACT-E3 - Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter. (optional)
· PM-9 - Nine Ampere Power Supply.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 General 19

A Model S3 Series Fire Alarm Control Panel comprised of the following equipment:
· SLP-E3 - S3 Series Fire Alarm Control Panel - Main Board.
· LCD-SLP - Color LCD touchscreen sub assembly with keypad.
· FLPS-7 - Seven Ampere Power Supply.

Optional equipment for the S3 Series includes:

· SLC-PM - Signalling Line Circuit interface, System Sensor.

· SLC95-PM - Signalling Line Circuit interface, Apollo XP-95.

NOTE: It is not possible to mix Apollo and System Sensor SLC's on the
same S3 Series FACP. However it is possible to mix Apollo and S3 Series
(System Sensor) FACP's on the same network.

· LCD-E3 - LCD Keypad sub assembly. (optional)

· LCD-7100 - Remote LCD Annunciator. (optional)
· ASM-16 - Addressable Switch Module. (optional)
· ANU-48 - Addressable Annunciator Driver with 48 points. (optional)
· RPT-E3 - Network Interface with Repeater. (optional)
· DACT-E3 - Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter. (optional)

A Model 7100 series Fire Alarm Networked System comprised of the following equipment:
· A 7100 BSM - Basic System Module
· INI-7100 - Network Interface Module

An Intelligent Network Command Center (INCC) equipped with an Intelligent Network

Interface sub assembly (INI-VGC).

An Intelligent Network Transponder (INX) equipped with with an Intelligent Network Interface
sub assembly (INI-VGX).

An Intelligent Network Command Center with Bulk Amplification (INI-VGE) equipped with an
Intelligent Network interface sub assembly (INI-VGE).

A Network Graphic Annunciator (NGA) LCD touchscreen unit.

An Addressable Node Expander (Single Ring) (ANX-SR), network interface unit.

An Addressable Node Expander (Multi Ring) (ANX-MR), network bridge & interface unit.

NOTE: Networked systems cannot contain both INI-7100 panels and ANX-MR or ANX-SR
nodes. Therefore, INI-7100 nodes are not allowed in multi-ring systems.

NOTE: Networked systems cannot contain both INI-7100 panels and ILI95-MB-E3 or
ILI95-S-E3 nodes.

The first step in the configuration process is creating a project. The user selects the New

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 20 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Project 31 icon on the File tab 31 of The Ribbon 27 and enters a project name (this name
can be up to 64 characters long). Additional information is also required to be entered
before creating the project. The type and amount information required varies based on the
selected project type. For more information about creating a new project, see the New
Project 31 help topic.

Nodes can be added to the project at any time by selecting the Tools 45 tab (in The Ribbon
27 ) > Add Node 47 menu item. After selecting the node type, node address and System ID

label, the new node data will be added to the project.

Once the project has been created, each node may be separately edited and Downloaded
using the Communication/Download menu item.

The connection for downloading can be made from the PC to one of the following types of
nodes:

NOTE: S3 Series FACP, ANX-SR and ANX-MR nodes contain both a traditional RS-232
port and an Ethernet (TCP/IP) port that may be used for downloading. The Ethernet port
may use either standard or crossover CAT5, CAT5e or CAT6 cables to connect directly to
a host computer, a Local Area Network (LAN) or a Wide Area Network (WAN).

· An INI-7100 - Downloads to only the following node types are supported:

INI-7100
INCC
INX
INI-VGE

· An NGA - All node types are supported.

· An ILI-MB-E3 - All node types are supported.

· An ILI-S-E3 - All node types are supported.

· An ILI95-MB-E3 - All node types are supported.

· An ILI95-S-E3 - All node types are supported.

· An ANX-SR - All node types are supported.

· An ANX-MR - All node types are supported.

· An S3 Series FACP - All node types are supported

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

1.2 About the CAMWorks Key

This version of CAMWorks requires a USB key. This key must be connected when
CAMWorks is started up and at all times afterward. CAMWorks will not launch if the USB

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 General 21

key is not connected.

License information for the current key may be viewed by selecting License Information 52

screen, which is available from the Tools tab 45 in The Ribbon 27 .

NOTE: CAMWorks License Keys are issued with a twelve month activation period.
Once that activation period expires, the key must be renewed in order to continue using
CAMWorks. See Upgrade License 51 for more information.

WARNING: Do not remove the CAMWorks USB key while CAMWorks is running. Doing
so will disable CAMWorks until the key is reconnected.

1.3 Conditional Action Maps (CAMs)

One of the most exciting features of the S3 Series, E3 Series and NetSOLO Series systems
is that they have the ability to make logical decisions based on the information in the System
Status Map (SSM). Any network node that needs to make such decisions implements
"Conditional Action Map" (CAM) logic.

A CAM is a collection of logic operations that takes input from bit addresses in the System
Status Map and modifies other SSM bit addresses on the basis of the results. The bit
address numbers are referred to as Groups throughout CAMWorks. Do not be confused
by the name. These group numbers are simply aliases for the SSM bit addresses. The CAM
logic on a given node can use any group (bit address number) in the entire SSM as part of a
CAM logic expression, but can only modify groups (bit addresses) in its own SSM block.
For example, if node 1 in a network system is a 7100 FACP, the CAM logic in that panel can
examine any Group of any node, but can only output to a group in the SSM block for Node
1. For all standalone systems, all CAMs must refer to to the panel as Node 0.

Just as the meaning of the SSM status groups varies from one node type to another, so
does the meaning of output control. For example, on the 7100 and the ILI-MB-E3, groups
125-224 are associated with "output group" control. In other words, the true or false result
of a CAM logic expression is used to control the associated output group, which may turn
physical output devices on or off.

A CAM logic expression consists of at least one instruction. However, a more typical CAM
expression include several operands and one or more logic operators (AND, OR, XOR,
NOT). The evaluation of these expressions are used to control the appropriate output. Each
logic operator is given its own "symbol" in CAMWorks. The following table explains the logic
symbol conventions used by CAMWorks.

Logic Operator: Symbol: Key Combination to enter this

symbol:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 22 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

AND & SHIFT-7 (standard 7)

OR | SHIFT-\ (usually located

above ENTER key)

NOT ~ SHIFT-` (located to the left of

the 1 key)

XOR (Exclusive OR) ^ SHIFT-6 (standard 6)

1.4 Multi-ring CAM Special Considerations

In a multi-ring system, special considerations must be made when writing CAMs. In general,
each node can only "see" bitmaps from other nodes on the same ring. The ANX-MR has
two bitmaps, one for each ring that it belongs to. All nodes on all rings can "see" both of the
bitmaps from the ANX-MR. If the need exists for one or more non-ANX-MR nodes to have
access to bits from a ring different from the ring that the node belongs to, the user must
manually CAM that bit into one of the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. Once that is done, nodes on
the opposite ring must refer to the Scratchpad location on the ANX-MR.

Here is an example for this application. For example, a particular E3 Series system has two
command centers (INCC nodes), one on each ring. These Command Centers are Nodes 1
and 65, respectively. There are two INX nodes in the system, Nodes 2 and 66, respectively.
Both INX's need to page when either Microphone switch is pressed.

On the ANX-MR (Ring 1; Node 63), the required CAMs are:

Scratchpad #1: N1G1

On the ANX-MR (Ring 2; Node 126), the required CAMs are:

Scratchpad #1: N65G1

On Node 2, the CAMs to enable Paging from both Command Centers will be:

Page Enable: N1G1 | N62G1

Activate Amplifier Channel A and Channel B: N1G1 | N62G1

On Node 66, the CAMs to enable Paging from both Command Centers will be:

Page Enable: N65G1 | N127G1

Activate Amplifier Channel A and Channel B: N65G1 | N127G1

You'll notice that the ANX-MR has two physical node addresses (63 & 126), as well as two
"virtual" node addresses (62 & 127). The ANX-MR actually is two physical nodes (one node
for each ring) and has two bitmaps (one for each ring). The two virtual addresses are used
to permit System Status Map information to cross from one ring to another.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 General 23

It's important to note that the reason that we used a scratchpad in each of the ANX-MR's
bitmaps for this application is because the ANX-MR, just like other nodes, can only "see"
bitmaps from the other nodes within its own ring. The ANX-MR can see both of the ANX-
MR's two bitmaps. It's important to note that in CAMWorks, the ANX-MR's bitmaps are
referred to using the following conventions:

· When writing CAMs on a node on Ring 1, the ANX-MR's Ring 1 bitmap is referred to as
Node 63 (physical address).
· When writing CAMs on a node on Ring 1, the ANX-MR's Ring 2 bitmap is referred to as
Node 62 (virtual address).

· When writing CAMs on a node on Ring 2, the ANX-MR's Ring 1 bitmap is referred to as
Node 127 (virtual address).
· When writing CAMs on a node on Ring 2, the ANX-MR's Ring 2 bitmap is referred to as
Node 126 (physical address).

NOTE: Nodes 62 and 127 are not physical nodes in the system, and there are no
icons representing these nodes in CAMWorks.
These "virtual" nodes are used to refer to the ANX-MR's bitmaps on the opposite ring.
Nodes in Ring 2 can read the ANX-MR's Ring 1 bitmap by using the Node 127 virtual
address, while nodes in Ring 1 can read the ANX-MR's Ring 2 bitmap by using the Node
62 virtual address. See Figure 1 below.

Figure 1 -- System Status Map correlation between two Rings.

NOTE: It is important to note that both of the ANX-MR's bitmaps are independent of each
other and may not necessarily contain the same status information.

In general, the following table defines which nodes can see which other node's bitmaps:

Node Number Nodes on Ring 1 (including Nodes on Ring 2 (including

ANX-MR) Can See Bitmap? ANX-MR) Can See Bitmap?

Node 1-61 Yes No

Node 62 (ANX-MR Ring 2 Yes No
Bitmap)
Node 63 (ANX-MR Ring 1 Yes No
Bitmap)

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 24 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Node 65-125 No Yes

Node 126 (ANX-MR Ring 2 No Yes
Bitmap)
Node 127 (ANX-MR Ring 1 No Yes
Bitmap)

1.5 FocalPoint Considerations

There are several considerations that must be taken into account when an E3 Series (or S3
Series) system is connected to FocalPoint via an S3 Series FACP. Please see the following
notes for more information.

NOTE: If FocalPoint is connected to the E3 Series system via an ANX, only that ANX
may be permanently installed in the system.

NOTE: In multi-ring E3 Series systems, FocalPoint must be connected to the E3 Series

system via the ANX-MR, and no other ANX nodes are allowed in the system.

NOTE: In networked systems where FocalPoint is connected, one node per region must
be configured as the "Network Global Silence Receiver" for that region in order for
FocalPoint's signal silence commands to properly function.

NOTE: In single-region systems where FocalPoint is connected, the node that FocalPoint
is connected to must be configured as a "Network Global Silence Receiver" in order for
FocalPoint's signal silence commands to properly function.

1.6 Network Regions

The network region concept allows the user to create sub-networks within the network
proper. These regions may be programmed to respond as separate sections of the system
in terms of event reporting, acknowledgement of events, silencing alarms, and the resetting
of a region's member nodes without affecting any other region's equipment in any way.

There are 64 possible regions, numbered 0 - 63, available in the system. The regions are
defined in Node Summary 57 screen where individual nodes can be assigned to the desired
region. By default, all nodes in the network are set to region 0.

NOTE: Network Regions are not applicable to E3 Series Standalone or 7100 Standalone
systems.

1.7 Site Specific Key

This version of CAMWorks supports a feature called a "Site Specific Key". A Site Specific
Key is an extension to the standard CAMWorks Key 20 that has been designed to support
the requirements of the United States Federal Government's Uniform Facilities Criteria.

Specifically, the "Site Specific Key" will configure all S3 Series, 7100, NGA, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-
E3, ILI95-MB-E3, ILI95-S-E3, ANX-SR or ANX-MR nodes so that only that specific key may
be used in the future to perform all downloads 841 to a target or uploads 870 from a target

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 General 25

node that has been so configured. This process is completely transparent to the user and is
performed as part of the configuration download.

Once an S3 Series FACP, 7100, NGA, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3, ILI95-S-E3, ANX-
SR or ANX-MR node has been configured to use a "Site Specific Key", the target node will
allow Level 4 access only if the correct "Site Specific Key" has been connected to the
computer, even if the user has the correct Level 4 password and a standard .

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

Part

II
 CAMWorks Window 27

2 CAMWorks Window
The CAMWorks window has been redesigned to include several different sections that are
used to provide access to all of the features of CAMWorks. Specifically, the sections of the
CAMWorks window are:

The Ribbon 27

Project Explorer 53

Main Window 53

Status Bar 54

2.1 The Ribbon

The Ribbon is a prominent row of tabs and icons located at the top of the CAMWorks
window, above the Project Explorer 53 and Main Area 53 . The Ribbon replaces both the
main menu bar and toolbar that were present in previous versions of CAMWorks. The
Ribbon contains the following sections:

CAMWorks Icon 28

Quick Access Toolbar 30 - Normally, located to the right of the CAMWorks icon, this toolbar
provides quick access to the Save Project and Close Project functions.

Tab Bar - The tab bar makes up the bulk of The Ribbon. The following tabs listed below are
present in The Ribbon. Clicking on one of the tabs makes that tab become active, exposing
all of the icons that belong to the tab.

File 31

Edit 34

View 34

Communications 35

Project Globals 35

Tools 45

Help 53

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 28 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

2.1.1 CAMWorks Icon

Located at the upper-left of the CAMWorks window, clicking the Gamewell-FCI logo icon
opens a menu with the following important functions:

New Project 28

Open Project 29

Close Project 29

Save Project 29

Save As 30

Exit 30

Recent Projects 30

2.1.1.1 New Project

To create a new CAMWorks project choose this option. A New Project Wizard will appear to
assist in the creation of the project.

The first page of the New Project Wizard allows you to enter the name for the project (this
can be up to 64 characters and may not contain the following special characters: / \ * : ? < >
| or .).

In addition, CAMWorks will prompt for the location to save the new project. This defaults to
a folder called "CAMWorks2.0_Projects" under the user's "My Documents" folder. Use the "
..." button to select a different location for this project if desired, or select CAMWorks
Options 46 " from the "Tools 45 " tab on The Ribbon to change the default setting.

The New Project Wizard will allow a selection of several different types of projects, including
S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone, E3 Series Standalone, E3 Series / NetSOLO
Series Network or E3 Series Multi-ring Network.

The first page of the New Project Wizard will also prompt for the following information:

SLC Type - System Sensor or Apollo. This applies to S3 Series Standalone and E3 Series
Standalone applications only.

The following job site specific information may also be entered, if desired:

Site Name (Optional) - The name of the job site that this project is associated with. This
information is only used in the reports generated by CAMWorks.

Address (Optional) - The street address of the job site that this project is associated with.
This information is only used in the reports generated by CAMWorks.

City (Optional) - The job site's city. This information is only used in the reports generated
by CAMWorks.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAMWorks Window 29

State (Optional) - The job site's state. This information is only used in the reports
generated by CAMWorks.

ZIP Code (Optional) - The job site's ZIP code. This information is only used in the reports
generated by CAMWorks.

Telephone (Optional) - The telephone number of the job site. This information is only used
in the reports generated by CAMWorks.

Selecting Next> brings up the Node Selection page (E3 Series / NetSOLO Series Network
and E3 Series Multi-ring Network applications) or the System ID Label selection page (S3
Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone applications).

On the Node Selection page is a grid that shows checkboxes for every possible network
address. Above the node selection checkboxes is a row of icons for every supported node
type. To add nodes to the project, click on the desired node type icon and then click on one
or more node address checkboxes to assign the node type. Repeat this process for each
node type. To unassign a node, just uncheck its address checkbox. After all addresses
have been defined, press Next>.

On the System ID Label selection page, CAMWorks gives the user the option of defining a
System ID Label (which is downloaded to the system) and a Node Description, which is
intended for user convenience only. These may be changed later, in the Node Summary
screen, if desired.
If an E3 Series Multi-ring Network project has been selected, CAMWorks gives the user the
opportunity to give each ring its own descriptive label. These labels are for user reference
only and are not downloaded to the system. By default, these labels simply indicate the
ring's number. These may be changed at any time in the ANX General Settings 798 screen.

When Finish is selected, CAMWorks will now create the new project and set the default
options for each node. Once the new project has been created, CAMWorks will display the
Node Summary Screen (called System Overview for S3 Series Standalone, E3 Series
Standalone and 7100 Standalone projects).

NOTE: A unique Level 4 password must be assigned before the project may be created.

2.1.1.2 Open Project

Selecting this icon allows you to choose an existing CAMWorks project to open. A standard
Windows "browse for file" window will open and allow the user to select a file.
2.1.1.3 Close Project

Closes the currently open project, prompting to save any changes as necessary.

2.1.1.4 Save Project

Saves any changes to the current project.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 30 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

2.1.1.5 Save As

Prompts the user to select a new location to save a copy of the current project. Once the
user selects Save Project As, a standard Windows "browse for file" window will appear to
allow for a selection of the new file name and the location to save the copy of the project.

2.1.1.6 Exit

Selecting this option will close CAMWorks and any project that may be currently open. If the
current screen has been modified but not yet saved, CAMWorks will prompt the user to save
the changes before closing.

2.1.1.7 Recent Projects

This menu contains a list of the most recently opened projects. Selecting one from this
menu will open the project.

2.1.2 Quick Access Toolbar

The Quick Access Toolbar is normally located immediately to the right of the CAMWorks
icon. This toolbar has icons for Save Project 30 and Close Project 30 .

To the left of the Close Project icon is a drop-down menu button. Clicking on this button
brings up the following options:

Show Below/Above The Ribbon 30

Minimize The Ribbon 30

2.1.2.1 Save Project

Saves any changes to the current project.

2.1.2.2 Close Project

Closes the currently open project, prompting to save any changes as necessary.

2.1.2.3 Show Above/Below The Ribbon

This option toggles between "Show Above The Ribbon" to "Show Below The Ribbon".
Selecting this option moves the Quick Access Toolbar above or below The Ribbon.

2.1.2.4 Minimize The Ribbon

Selecting this option will shrink The Ribbon down to just showing the tab bar with no icons
below it when The Ribbon is not actively being used. When a tab is selected, the full Ribbon
will temporarily appear and then disappear again after an icon in The Ribbon has been
selected. This menu option is a toggle that can turn this feature on and off as desired.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAMWorks Window 31

2.1.3 File
The File tab provides access to the following options:

New Project 31

Open Project 32

Save Project 33

Upgrade 33

Print 34

Print Preview 34

Page Setup 34

2.1.3.1 New Project

To create a new CAMWorks project choose this option. A New Project Wizard will appear to
assist in the creation of the project.

The first page of the New Project Wizard allows you to enter the name for the project (this
can be up to 64 characters and may not contain the following special characters: / \ * : ? < >
| or .).

In addition, CAMWorks will prompt for the location to save the new project. This defaults to
a folder called "CAMWorks2.0_Projects" under the user's "My Documents" folder. Use the "
..." button to select a different location for this project if desired, or select CAMWorks
Options 46 " from the "Tools 45 " tab on The Ribbon to change the default setting.

The New Project Wizard will allow a selection of several different types of projects, including
S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone, E3 Series Standalone, E3 Series / NetSOLO
Series Network or E3 Series Multi-ring Network.

The first page of the New Project Wizard will also prompt for the following information:

SLC Type - System Sensor or Apollo. This applies to S3 Series Standalone and E3 Series
Standalone applications only.

The following job site specific information may also be entered, if desired:

Site Name (Optional) - The name of the job site that this project is associated with. This

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 32 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

information is only used in the reports generated by CAMWorks.

Address (Optional) - The street address of the job site that this project is associated with.
This information is only used in the reports generated by CAMWorks.

City (Optional) - The job site's city. This information is only used in the reports generated
by CAMWorks.

State (Optional) - The job site's state. This information is only used in the reports
generated by CAMWorks.

ZIP Code (Optional) - The job site's ZIP code. This information is only used in the reports
generated by CAMWorks.

Telephone (Optional) - The telephone number of the job site. This information is only used
in the reports generated by CAMWorks.

Selecting Next> brings up the Node Selection page (E3 Series / NetSOLO Series Network
and E3 Series Multi-ring Network applications) or the System ID Label selection page (S3
Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone applications).

On the Node Selection page is a grid that shows checkboxes for every possible network
address. Above the node selection checkboxes is a row of icons for every supported node
type. To add nodes to the project, click on the desired node type icon and then click on one
or more node address checkboxes to assign the node type. Repeat this process for each
node type. To unassign a node, just uncheck its address checkbox. After all addresses
have been defined, press Next>.

On the System ID Label selection page, CAMWorks gives the user the option of defining a
System ID Label (which is downloaded to the system) and a Node Description, which is
intended for user convenience only. These may be changed later, in the Node Summary
screen, if desired.
If an E3 Series Multi-ring Network project has been selected, CAMWorks gives the user the
opportunity to give each ring its own descriptive label. These labels are for user reference
only and are not downloaded to the system. By default, these labels simply indicate the
ring's number. These may be changed at any time in the ANX General Settings 798 screen.

When Finish is selected, CAMWorks will now create the new project and set the default
options for each node. Once the new project has been created, CAMWorks will display the
Node Summary Screen (called System Overview for S3 Series Standalone, E3 Series
Standalone and 7100 Standalone projects).

NOTE: A unique Level 4 password must be assigned before the project may be created.

2.1.3.2 Open Project

Selecting this icon allows you to choose an existing CAMWorks project to open. A standard
Windows "browse for file" window will open and allow the user to select a file.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAMWorks Window 33

2.1.3.3 Close Project

Closes the currently open project, prompting to save any changes as necessary.

2.1.3.4 Save Project

Saves any changes to the current project.

2.1.3.5 Save Project As

Prompts the user to select a new location to save a copy of the current project. Once the
user selects Save Project As, a standard Windows "browse for file" window will appear to
allow for a selection of the new file name and the location to save the copy of the project.

2.1.3.6 Upgrade

Selecting this option will open a secondary window that allows the user to convert projects
from previous versions of Gamewell-FCI configuration software into the format used by this
version of CAMWorks. This command only functions when there is no project file currently
open. If a project is currently open, selecting this option will cause CAMWorks to ask
whether the user would like to close the currently open project and continue or to cancel the
upgrade operation.

Project Type Selection - Select the type of project to convert. The available selections
include 7100 Standalone, E3 Series / NetSOLO Series Network and E3 Series Standalone
projects.

Select The Source Folder (File for 7100 Standalone Projects) - The user may either type
the full path to an existing project or use the "..." button located on the right to open a
standard "browse" window to locate the desired project.

Select The Destination Folder - The user may either type the full path to the desired folder
that will contain the converted project or use the "..." button located on the right to open a
standard "browse" window to locate the desired folder.

OK - Performs the conversion and closes the window. During the conversion process,
CAMWorks may display prompts to request information from the user or to inform the user
about the status of the conversion process.

Apply - Performs the conversion, but leaves the window open so that additional projects
may be converted.

Close - Closes the window without performing a conversion.

NOTE: If a project is currently opened, CAMWorks will prompt the user to indicate that
the current project will be closed before using this function.

NOTE: When upgrading projects created in FCP-7100 - Panel Network V5.x or V6.x,
CAMWorks will examine all I/O group assignments on all nodes. All I/O group
assignments that use network groups to directly link inputs and outputs will be deleted.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 34 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

These I/O relationships will need to be manually recreated using CAM 21 logic.
CAMWorks will alert the user if this is necessary for a given project.

NOTE: It is not necessary to use the Upgrade Projects feature to convert projects created
in previous versions of CAMWorks 2.x to this version of CAMWorks.

2.1.3.7 Print

Used with the Network Query 829 tool, the Print function allows the user to print a hard-copy
of the current Query report.

2.1.3.8 Print Preview

Used with the Network Query 829 tool, the Print Preview function allows the user to preview
the appearance of the current Query report as it would be printed.

2.1.3.9 Page Setup

Opens a configuration window that contains the following printer settings:

Paper Size - Select from one of the the standard paper sizes in the list.
Paper Source - Select the paper tray that will be used as the source of paper. This varies
from printer to printer.

2.1.4 Edit
The Edit tab provides access to the following functions:

Find/Replace CAM 34

2.1.4.1 Find/Replace CAM

Selecting this option opens the Find/Replace CAM screen in the main window.

See this section 874 for more information.

2.1.5 View
The View tab contains an option that change the appearance of the CAMWorks window.
This includes:

Show/Hide Project Explorer 35

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAMWorks Window 35

2.1.5.1 Show/Hide Project Explorer

Choosing this option hides or unhides the "Project Explorer" that appears (by default) on the
left of the screen.

2.1.6 Communications
The Communications tab provides access to the following functions:

Download 35

Upload 35

2.1.6.1 Download

Opens the Download screen in the main window. See the Download Utilities 841 section for
more information.

2.1.6.2 Upload

Opens the Upload screen in the main window. See the Upload Utility 871 section for more
information.

2.1.7 Project Globals

Some configuration options are set on a per-project basis. These include:

Network Settings 35

Regional Settings 43

Silence Settings 44

2.1.7.1 Network Settings

Network Settings provides access to configuration settings that will be applied to all nodes in
the network. These settings include:

Passwords 35

User Defined Types 36

Miscellaneous Settings 41

Display Priorities 41

2.1.7.1.1 Passwords

The system allows four levels of password access to prevent unauthorized modification of
critical system functions. In addition, the system supports a maximum of five different

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 36 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

passwords for each of the four access levels to provide for unique identification of up to five
different users. Each password must be numeric and may range from (000001 - 999999).
The value of 000000 is not allowed.

There are four levels of access granted by the system. These are Level 1, Level 2, Level 3,
and Level 4. Level 4 grants the user the greatest amount of access, while Level 1 grants the
least amount of access.

NOTE: The Level 4 Password may not be set to any of the standard default passwords
(111111, 222222, 333333 or 444444.)

There are five different users available, labeled as Users 1-5. This allows the user to create
five different sets of passwords (one for each access level.) The system's history log will
indicate which user gained access to the system when unique passwords are assigned to
each user.

NOTE: Even though CAMWorks requires the user to assign a non-default Level 4
password, it is still highly recommended to change the remaining system passwords to
non-default values.

Since this is a Project Level option, this will affect all nodes present in the system.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

2.1.7.1.2 User Defined Types

The E3 Series and S3 Series FACPs provides a great degree of flexibility for user defined
device types. In the past, the User Defined AMM Types in the 7100 were configured at the
individual node level. This function has been combined with the E3 Series/S3 Series User
Defined Device Types into one configuration screen.

Device types 48-55 are reserved for 7100 User Defined Device Types. In the grid, the
device type number is highlighted in yellow for these device types.

NOTE: These device types can be used with 7100 nodes, ILI-E3 Series nodes and S3
Series (System Sensor) FACPs, but not with ILI95-E3 Series nodes or S3 Series (Apollo)
FACPs.

The options available for each user defined type are as follows:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAMWorks Window 37

SLC Type - Select whether this device type should be a System Sensor or Apollo device
type. This selection may or may not be available, depending on the nodes that are present
in the current project.

NOTE: This setting is fixed to "System Sensor" for the 7100 User Defined Device Types.

User Defined Device Type - This identifies what the physical device type is for this user
defined type. The following device types are available:

Available User Defined Device Types for the 7100:

User Defined Device Type Description Allowed Response Types

AMM Module Addressable Monitor See AMM Modules.

Module, used to monitor any
normally open contact
device.

Available Physical Device Types for the ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3 and S3 Series (System Sensor)
FACPs:

User Defined Device Description Allowed in CLIP Allowed Response

Type Mode Types
No Device Used to indicate Yes See No Device.
there is no device
type configured.
Ion Sensor Analog/addressable Yes See Ion Sensors.
Ion smoke detectors,
such as the ASD-
IL2F.
Photo Sensor Analog/addressable Yes See Photo Sensors.
Photoelectric smoke
detectors, such as
the ASD-PL2F.
Thermal Sensor Analog/addressable Yes See Thermal
Thermal sensors, Sensors.
such as the ATD-L2F
(standard
temperature), ATD-
HL2F (high
temperature) or
ATD-RL2F (rate of
rise).
Acclimate Sensor Analog/addressable Yes * See Acclimate
multi-criteria sensor, Sensors.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

38 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

such as MCS-
Acclimate2F.
AMM Module Addressable Monitor Yes See AMM Modules.
Module, used to
monitor any normally
open contact device.
Signal Module Notification Yes See NAC Modules.
Appliance/Speaker
Circuit Control
Module, such as the
AOM-2SF or MMO-
6SF
Form-C Module Form-C Dry Contact Yes See Form-C Modules
Module, such as .
AOM-2RF or MMO-
6RF.
CLIP Laser Sensor Analog/Addressable Yes See CLIP Laser
High Sensitivity Sensors.
NOTE: This device Photoelectric smoke
type is supported in detectors, such as
both Velociti and ASD-LS.
CLIP modes, even
though the device
itself only supports
CLIP mode.
Photo/Thermal Analog/addressable Yes See Photo/Thermal
Sensor Photoelectric/ Sensors.
Thermal sensor,
such as ASD-PTL2F.
Zone Module Addressable Monitor Yes See Zone Modules.
Module, such as
AMM-4SF, used to
monitor certain two-
wire conventional
smoke detectors.
See Gamewell-FCI
Compatibility
Addendum (P/N:
9000-0427) for more
details.
Manual Station Addressable Manual Yes See Manual Station
Module Station, such as the Modules.
MS-7AF.
Intelligent Beam Analog/addressable No See Intelligent Beam
Detector Beam Photoelectric Detectors.
Smoke Detector,
such as ABD-2F.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAMWorks Window 39

Vel Laser Sensor Analog/Addressable No See Verlociti Laser

High Sensitivity Sensors.
Photoelectric smoke
detectors.
4-Warn Sensor Velociti Series No See 4-Warn Sensors
combination smoke, .
carbon monoxide,
temperature and
flame detector.
Photo/CO Sensor Velociti Series multi- No See Photo/CO
criteria sensor, with Sensors.
carbon monoxide
detection and
reporting, such as
the MCS-COF.
Intelligent FAAST System Sensor No See Intelligent
Sensor Intelligent Aspirating FAAST Sensors.
(Single-Channel) Smoke Detector
Intelligent FAAST System Sensor No See Intelligent
Sensor Intelligent Multi- FAAST Sensors.
(Multi-Channel) Channel Aspirating
Smoke Detector

Available User Defined Device Types for the ILI95-MB-E3, ILI95-S-E3 and S3 Series
(Apollo) FACPs:

User Defined Device Type Description Allowed Response Types

No Device Used to indicate there is no See No Device.
device type configured.
Ion Sensor Analog/addressable Ion See Ion Sensors.
smoke detectors, such as
the XP95-I.
Optical Sensor Analog/addressable See Photo Sensors.
Photoelectric smoke
detectors, such as the XP95-
P.
Temperature Sensor Analog/addressable Thermal See Thermal Sensors.
sensors, such as the XP95-
T.
Multi-Sensor Analog/addressable multi- See Multi-Sensors.
criteria sensor, such as the
XP95-M.
PID-95 Point Identification Device See Point Identification
used to monitor any normally Devices.
open contact device.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

40 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

SCE-95 Signal Control Element used See Signal Control Elements

to control Notification .
Appliance Circuits.
RCE-95 Relay Control Element that See Relay Control Elements.
provides one Form-C Dry
Contact.
BCE-95 Building Control Element See Building Control
that provides two Form-C Elementsol Elements.
Dry Contacts for On/Off/Auto
(HOA) operation.
MS-95 / MS-95 T Addressable Manual Station. See Manual Station
Elements.
CZI-95 (Non-Interrupting) Conventional Zone Interface, See Conventional Zone
used to monitor certain two- Interfaces.
wire conventional smoke
detectors. See Gamewell-
FCI Compatibility Addendum
(P/N: 9000-0427) for more
details.
CZI-95 (Interrupting) Conventional Zone Interface, See Conventional Zone
used to monitor certain two- Interfaces.
wire conventional smoke
detectors. See Gamewell-
FCI Compatibility Addendum
(P/N: 9000-0427) for more
details.

System Response Type - Selects the desired response to an activation from this device
type. See tables above for information about the available response types for each physical
device type.

Description - The text that will be associated with this User Defined Type. This will be used
for both on-screen and printed event reports. This description may be up to fourteen
characters in length.

Silenceable - This option applies only when the physical device type is set to Signal Module,
Form-C Module, SCE-95 or RCE-95. This indicates whether this device type can be
silenced or not.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAMWorks Window 41

2.1.7.1.3 Miscellaneous

The following system-wide settings are configured through the Miscellaneous screen:

Trouble Reminder - If this option is enabled then acknowledged trouble events will be
periodically "unacknowledged". This means that the system's buzzer will be turned back on
and the System Trouble LED will blink as if a new trouble condition were being reported.

Multiple Trouble Acknowledge - Turning this option on will allow up to ten trouble
conditions to be acknowledged with one Trouble Acknowledge command.

NOTE: This setting is not available in mixed E3 Series / NetSOLO Series systems that
contain both 7100 nodes and E3 Series or S3 Series nodes.

Report Extra Node Troubles - When enabled, the system will supervise for nodes that are
present on the network but are not in the configured network map.
NOTE: This setting does not apply to E3 Series Standalone or S3 Series Standalone
applications.

NOTE: This configuration option is available only if the CAMWorks Project contains one or
more E3 Series or S3 Series FACP nodes or one or more NGA nodes.

Walk Test Timeout - The Walk Test timeout will cause the system to automatically cancel
the Walk Test mode if it isn't manually turned off. This value may be (30, 60 or 90 Minutes)
if the system contains at least one 7100 panel, or (30, 60, 90, 120 or 180 Minutes) if the
system does not contain a 7100 panel. This setting will affect all nodes in the system that
support walk test.
Action Condition Acknowledged By - This configuration option selects whether the
Trouble Acknowledge button is used to acknowledge Action (pre-alarm) conditions or the
Alarm Acknowledge button is used to acknowledge Action conditions. This setting defaults
to the Alarm Acknowledge button. This setting is not available when 7100 nodes are
present in the network.

NOTE: This setting is not available in mixed E3 Series / NetSOLO Series systems that
contain both 7100 nodes and E3 Series or S3 Series nodes.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

2.1.7.1.4 Display Priorities

NOTE: These settings apply to S3 Series FACP, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3 Series

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

42 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

and NGA nodes only.

The S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3 Series and NGA displays conform to UL 864 9th
edition and UL 2572 1st edition event display requirements. The most significant change
from the 7100 display is that concurrent events do not automatically scroll. Instead, the
display always shows the earliest (oldest) event of the highest priority present in the system
(or region), unless the user scrolls the events manually.

Since events do not scroll, the behavior of the display depends entirely on what priority the
system assigns to each event. These priorities can be modified in this screen. Note that
this only configures how events are DISPLAYED. To configure a different system response,
a User Defined Type 36 should be used instead.

Each system condition listed has both an Acknowledged and Unacknowledged priority.
Typically, the Unacknowledged priority for each condition is of a higher priority than its
Acknowledged priority. The system has e ight different priority levels, ranging from Level 1
to Level 8. Level 1 is the lowest priority level, while Level 8 is the highest priority level.

The following system conditions may be assigned new display priorities:

ALARM - Fire Alarm Conditions

CO/GAS ALARM - CO/Gas alarm conditions.
MNS ALARM - Mass Notification alarm conditions.
ACTION - Action (pre-alarm) Conditions. This applies to multi-level devices, Cross Zones
and other pre-alarm conditions.
SUPERVISORY- All Supervisory Off-Normal and Tamper conditions.
MNS SUPERVISORY - All Supervisory Off-Normal and Tamper conditions related to
mass-notification devices.
TROUBLE - All System Trouble conditions.
MNS TROUBLE - All System Trouble conditions conditions related to mass-notification
devices

NOTE: The priority settings for MNS Alarm, MNS Trouble and MNS Supervisory only
affect NGA nodes.

These settings are automatically configured for ALL S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3
Series and NGA nodes in the system, therefore all S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3 Series
and NGA nodes will have the same set of display priorities once they have all been
downloaded.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAMWorks Window 43

To change a priority, click and drag its slider and move it to the left or to the right. Moving a
slider to the right gives the event a higher priority, while sliding it to the left gives it a lower
priority. The currently selected priority level is displayed to the right of the slider.

NOTE: To revert all Display Priority settings to their UL approved settings, click either
the "MNS Overrides Fire" or "Fire Overrides MNS" button at the top of the window.

NOTE: These settings should be left to their default settings, unless there is a
specific need to change them.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

2.1.7.2 Regional Settings

In CAMWorks, there are certain configuration settings that affect all nodes within a region.
Specifically, these are the Night/Weekend/Holiday 43 settings.

2.1.7.2.1 Night/Weekend/Holiday Settings

In S3 Series, E3 Series and NetSOLO Series systems, you can optimize the sensitivity of
the sensors for particular times during the day, on weekends and on holidays. This can be
used to increase sensitivity for those times when a building is not in use. When the system's
real-time clock reaches a configured time or day, the system will automatically begin to use
the Night Sensitivity settings configured for each sensor. In addition, any Fire alarm that
occurs during this time will activate the General Night Alarm output list as well as both SSM
bit 440 (Day Alarm or Night Alarm) and SSM bit 441 (Night Alarm.)

NOTE: These settings affect the fire alarm response only.

Select Region - Choose the network region that the settings on this screen will modify from
the drop-down list.

Night Schedule - Select Night Start and Night Stop operation times from the drop-down
lists. During the programmed times, the sensors will operate with the defined Night
Sensitivity settings.

NOTE: Only the hour may be selected if a network region contains a mixture of 7100 and
ILI-E3 Series or S3Series nodes.

Weekend Schedule - Define weekend days for night sensitivity operation by checking the
appropriate days.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 44 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Holiday Schedule - Configure Holidays for Night sensitivity operation by clicking on the
calendar icon ( ). A calendar will be displayed. Select the holiday by clicking on the day of
the month. The user can move through the calendar by clicking on the arrow icons located
at the top of the calendar. The user may enter up to sixteen holidays. Dates can be cleared
by placing a check in the "Sel" column next to the appropriate holiday and clicking the Clear
button at the bottom of the window.

NOTE: Holidays 11-16 are not available on 7100 panels and cannot be used in network
regions that contain both 7100 and ILI-E3 Series or S3 Series nodes.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

2.1.7.2.2 Walk Test Timeout

2.1.7.3 Silence Settings

NOTE: This screen is not available in S3 Series Standalone, E3 Series Standalone or

7100 Standalone projects.

This screen contains certain network-related options for each node. Each node in the
current project is displayed in a grid. This grid displays several pieces of information related
to each node. These settings, which cannot be edited on this screen, include the node
number, the node type, the system ID label, the node description and the node's region.
The settings that can be modified from this screen include:

Node Type - Selecting a node type in this drop-down list will cause CAMWorks to display
only nodes of the selected type in the grid below.

Region Number - Selecting a region number in this drop-down list will cause CAMWorks to
display only nodes that are members of selected region in the grid below.

Net Global Report - If this option is turned on, this node will report all events that occur on
the network. If it is turned off, it will only report events from other nodes in the same region
24 . This setting is not available on INCC, INX, and INI-VGE nodes.

NOTE: On NGA nodes, this option will be automatically turned on by enabling the
Proprietary Supervising Station mode, and cannot be disabled until the Proprietary
Supervising Station mode is disabled.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAMWorks Window 45

Net Global Reset - If this option is turned on, a reset command that originates from this
node will reset the entire network. If it is turned off, it will only reset other nodes in the same
region 24 . This setting is not available on INCC, INX, and INI-VGE nodes.

Network Global Silence Transmitter - Selecting this option will allow Silence requests to
be sent from this node to nodes in other regions that are configured as a "Network Global
Silence Receiver". This setting is not available on INCC, INX, and INI-VGE nodes.

NOTE: When the "Network Global Silence Transmitter" option is enabled, the Signal
Silence buttons will function as Silence only. Unsilence will no longer be available,
however subsequent alarms will re-activate silenced output devices.

Network Global Silence Receiver - Selecting this option will allow this node to receive
silence requests from nodes in other regions that are configured as a "Network Global
Silence Transmitter". If enabled, this node will send silence request commands to the other
nodes in the same region as this node. This setting is not available on INCC, INX, and
INI-VGE nodes.
NOTE: Only one node per region may be configured as a "Network Global Silence
Receiver".

NOTE: In networked systems where FocalPoint is connected, one node per region must
be configured as the "Network Global Silence Receiver" for that region in order for
FocalPoint's signal silence commands to properly function.

NOTE: In single-region systems where FocalPoint is connected, the node that FocalPoint
is connected to must be configured as a "Network Global Silence Receiver" in order for
FocalPoint's signal silence commands to properly function.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

2.1.8 Tools
The Tools tab provides access to the following functions:

CAMWorks Options 46

Add Node 47

Import Node 48

Copy Node Configuration 49

Program Validation 49

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 46 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Export Node Details 50

Network Query 51

OTS-E3 51

Auto Save Enable 51

Convert 7100 to ILI-MB-E3 Panel 51

Upgrade License 51

License Information 52

Generate Low Level CAMS 52

2.1.8.1 CAMWorks Options

Several options pertaining to CAMWorks itself are available in this screen.

Default Path - This is the location that CAMWorks uses by default to store new projects.
This may be overridden when creating a new project.
Distributor Name (Optional) - The name of the distributor configuring the project. This
information is only used in the reports generated by CAMWorks.
Address (Optional) - The street address of the distributor. This information is only used in
the reports generated by CAMWorks.
City (Optional) - That city that the distributor is located in. This information is only used in
the reports generated by CAMWorks.
State (Optional) - The state that the distributor is located in. This information is only used
in the reports generated by CAMWorks.
ZIP Code (Optional) - The ZIP code of the city that the distributor is located in. This
information is only used in the reports generated by CAMWorks.
Telephone (Optional) - The distributor's telephone number. This information is only used in
the reports generated by CAMWorks.
E-mail (Optional) - A contact e-mail address for the distributor. This information is only
used in the reports generated by CAMWorks.
Logo Path (Optional) - This field specifies the location of an image file that will appear on
the all of the reports generated by CAMWorks. The "..." button opens a standard "browse
for file" window to allow the selection of an image file.
NOTE: In order to be displayed properly, the logo image must be 100 pixels x 100 pixels.

Technician's Name (Optional) - This field specifies the name of the technician that is
configuring this project. This information is only used in the reports generated by
CAMWorks.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAMWorks Window 47

Time For AutoSave - If AutoSave is enabled, this setting will configure CAMWorks how
often it should perform AutoSave. This may range from 15 to 60 minutes (in 5 minute
intervals). A one-minute interval is also available for a nearly-instantaneous AutoSave.
NOTE: AutoSave must already be enabled (in the Tools 45 tab in The Ribbon 27 ) in order
to change this setting.

Site Name (Optional) - The name of the job site that this project is associated with. This
information is only used in the reports generated by CAMWorks.

Address (Optional) - The street address of the job site that this project is associated with.
This information is only used in the reports generated by CAMWorks.

City (Optional) - The job site's city. This information is only used in the reports generated
by CAMWorks.

State (Optional) - The job site's state. This information is only used in the reports
generated by CAMWorks.

ZIP Code (Optional) - The job site's ZIP code. This information is only used in the reports
generated by CAMWorks.

Telephone (Optional) - The telephone number of the job site. This information is only used
in the reports generated by CAMWorks.

Save - Saves the changes to any of the fields in the window.

Close - Closes the window. If any of the fields have been modified, CAMWorks will prompt
the user to either save or discard the changes.
2.1.8.2 Add Node

Select this option to add a new node to the current project (S3 Series Standalone, E3 Series
Standalone, E3 Series / NetSOLO Series Network and E3 Series Multi-ring Network projects
only).

NOTE: If the current project is an E3 Series Standalone or S3 Series Standalone project,

using the "Add Node" function will convert the project to an E3 Series / NetSOLO Series
Network project. The S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3 or ILI95-MB-E3 that is already in the
project will be converted to Node 1. All CAMs will be automatically updated to Node 1.
For E3 Series Standalone projects, the address selector switches on the ILI-MB-E3 or
ILI95-MB-E3 must be changed to Node 1. For S3 Series Standalone projects, an RPT-E3
must be added to the system and it must be addressed as Node 1.

In order to add a new node to the project, CAMWorks prompts the user to provide the
following information:

Node Number - Select an available node number from the drop-down list. Addresses that
are already in use are not shown in the list.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 48 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Node Type - Select the node type that will be added using one of the option buttons.

NOTE: A network may not contain 7100 nodes if S3 Series (Apollo) FACP, ANX or
ILI95-E3 Series nodes are present in the system. The Add Node window prevents adding
a 7100 if the network already contains an S3 Series (Apollo) FACP, ILI95-E3 Series or
ANX node. The Add Node window also prevents adding an S3 Series (Apollo) FACP or
ILI95-E3 Series node when a network already contains a 7100. Likewise, the Add Node
window also prevents adding an ANX node when a network already contains a 7100.

System Label - Enter up to nineteen (19) characters that will be downloaded to the panel to
identify events that originate from this node.

Region - This option selects which network region 24 this node belongs to. This can range
from 0 to 63.

NOTE: Some special considerations must be taken into account when assigning regions
on multi-ring systems. Please see the Network Regions 24 help topic for more
information.

Description (Optional) - An optional description may be added which may be used to

describe the location and/or function of the node (or any other information desired). This
information is not downloaded to the panel.

OK - This will create the new node and close this window.
Apply - This will create the new node and leave this window open.
Close - This will close the window without creating a new node.
2.1.8.3 Import Node

Import Node allows the user to copy an entire node from one project to another. This is
useful when multiple projects require similar configuration. This window has the following
fields:

Select the Project - Select a CAMWorks project that contains the node to be imported. The
"..." button opens a standard "browse for file" window to allow the user to select the desired
project.

NOTE: This must be a project that has been created by or converted by CAMWorks .
Nodes created in versions of CAMWorks prior to CAMWorks 2.x cannot be imported in this
manner.

Grid Display - The grid display shows all nodes that are contained within the selected
project. This grid displays the node number, node type, System ID Label and Description for
each node. A node may be selected by clicking on the row that contains the desired node.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAMWorks Window 49

Select the Destination Node - Select an available node number from the drop-down list.
This may range from 1-64, however addresses that are already in use are not shown in the
list.

Import Node - Select this button to import the selected node into the current project.
Close - Closes this window.

2.1.8.4 Copy Node Configuration

Copy Node Configuration allows the user to copy configuration data from one node within a
project to another node within the same project. This is useful when multiple nodes within a
project require similar configuration.

The Copy Node Configuration window prompts the user for the following information:

Node Type - Select the type of node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Source Node - Select the node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Destination Node - Select an available node number from the drop-down list. Note that
addresses that are already in use are not shown in the list.
Node Features - Each node type contains various types of information that may be copied.
The various selection boxes allow the user to select what aspects of the source node should
be copied to the destination node.

Copy - Select this button to copy the selected node.

Close - Closes this window.

NOTE: The Copy Node Configuration function requires that both the source and
destination nodes be of the same node type, with the following exceptions:
1. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-MB-E3 to an ILI-S-E3.
2. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-S-E3 to an ILI-MB-E3.
3. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-MB-E3 to an ILI95-S-E3.
4. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-S-E3 to an ILI95-MB-E3.

2.1.8.5 Program Validation

Program Validation is a tool that may be used to run a quick check on your project for known
types of configuration errors.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 50 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: Program Validation is not intended to be used as a substitute for proper fire alarm
testing processes and procedures.

Node No/ Node Type/ System ID Label - Select the node to validate from the drop-down
list.
Start - Run the validation process on the selected node(s). All results will be displayed in
the grids below.
Download - Opens the Download 841 screen to download the configuration to the system.
Close - Closes this window.

2.1.8.6 Export Node Details

Export Node Details allows the user to export project configuration to Excel spreadsheets.
This process is configurable, the options that are present on this screen allow the user to
choose what configuration information to export.

Node Type - Select the type of node to export. If All node types are selected, all
configuration information is exported from the selected nodes.

Features - CAMWorks allows the user to select which portion(s) of the configuration to
export. This selection is available only when the user selects an individual node type to
export.

Select All Node(s) - Selects all nodes that are currently displayed in the grid.

Grid Display - The grid display shows all nodes of the selected type (see Node Type above)
that are contained within the current project. This grid displays the node number, node type,
System ID Label and Description for each node. A node may be selected by clicking on the
checkbox in the "Sel" column for the row that contains the desired node.

Export To - Select the location where CAMWorks should save the exported spreadsheets.
The "..." button to the right opens a standard "browse for folder" window to select the
location.

Export - Click this button to perform the export process.

Close - Closes this window.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAMWorks Window 51

2.1.8.7 Network Query

Opens the Network Query tool. See this page 829 for more information.

2.1.8.8 OTS-E3

Opens the OTS-E3 tool. See this page 831 for more information.

2.1.8.9 Auto Save Enable

CAMWorks has a feature called "Auto Save" that will automatically save any data on the
current screen if it has been changed at periodic intervals. Click this icon to turn this feature
on or off.

2.1.8.10 Convert 7100 to ILI-MB-E3 Panel

Select this option to convert one of more INI-7100 nodes into ILI-MB-E3 nodes.

NOTE: This action is not reversible.

2.1.8.11 Convert 7100 to SLP

Select this option to convert one of more INI-7100 nodes into S3 Series FACP (System
Sensor) nodes.

NOTE: This action is not reversible.

2.1.8.12 Upgrade License

The Upgrade License function is used to update the CAMWorks License Key. Doing so is
necessary under three scenarios:

1.) The current key is about to expire or has expired.

2.) Access to additional node types is required.

3.) The customer is requesting an Administrator Key.

In order to request an Administrator Key, Gamewell-FCI Engineered Systems Distributors

must contact their Regional Sales Manager to initiate the key request process. All other
License Key renewal requests must be made to the Gamewell-FCI Technical Support
Department 932 .

NOTE: The CAMWorks License Key must be connected to the computer in order to use
this function.

When Upgrade License is selected from the Tools tab 45 in The Ribbon 27 , CAMWorks will

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 52 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

open a "Browse for File" dialog box. The user must select the .EXE or .V2C file that
contains the license information supplied by Gamewell-FCI.

NOTE: This function cannot be used if a CAMWorks project is currently open. If one is
currently open, CAMWorks will prompt the user to close the project.

Once the .EXE or .V2C file has been selected, an "Apply License File" screen appears. All
that the user needs to do is click on the "Apply License" button. The screen will display
status information about the key upgrade process.

Once the key upgrade process is complete, the user can close the "Apply License File"
screen. The license key upgrade can be confirmed in the License Information 52 screen,
which is available from the Tools tab 45 in The Ribbon 27 .

NOTE: Gamewell-FCI's Policy on Issuing of CAMWorks License Keys, as well as the Key
Renewal Request form, are available in both English and Spanish.

2.1.8.13 License Information

On this screen, the user can view information about the CAMWorks Key 20 that is currently
connected to the PC. The information that is displayed includes the following:

1.) The Key Level of the connected key (1-11).

2.) A description of the key.
3.) A grid showing all of the node types that are available with the key that is currently
connected.
4.) The expiration date of the attached key.

This information is for reference only. The key can be upgraded (to extend the expiration
date or add support for additional node types) via the Upgrade Key 51 function.

2.1.8.14 Generate Low Level CAMS

High-level CAM 21 expressions, written in the form of a Boolean logic expression, are
translated into what is termed Low-Level CAMs, otherwise known as Advanced CAM
Programming 920 before they are downloaded to a target node. In some situations, it may be
necessary to examine the translated low-level CAMs especially for Technical Support 932
reasons. In order to examine the translated CAMs, it is necessary to use the "Generate Low
Level CAMs" function.

Clicking on the "Generate Low Level CAMs" icon in the Ribbon 27 opens a window
requesting the node to generate Low-level CAMs from. Once the node has been chosen,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAMWorks Window 53

clicking OK causes CAMWorks to convert all high-level CAMs into low-level. CAMWorks
then saves these CAMs in a text file located in the Log folder contained within the project
folder. CAMWorks will pop up a message to indicate exactly where the low-level CAM text
file was saved.
2.1.9 Help
The Help tab provides access to the following:

Help Contents 53

Printable Documentation 53

System Status Map 53

About 53

2.1.9.1 Help

Displays the CAMWorks help system.

2.1.9.2 Printable Documentation

Displays a printable Adobe Acrobat version of the CAMWorks help documentation.

2.1.9.3 System Status Map

Selecting this option will open an online reference to the E3 Series and NetSOLO Series
System Status Map (bitmap.) This reference provides definition and group number (bit
address) lookup information for each of the node types available to assist in CAM
expression programming.

2.1.9.4 About

Displays the CAMWorks version information.

2.2 Project Explorer

The Project Explorer is the main means of navigating within CAMWorks. See the Project
Explorer 56 section for more information.

2.3 Main Area

The main area is used to display all screens within CAMWorks, except for a few pop-up
screens. The contents of the main window change depending on which Ribbon icon 27 or
Project Explorer 56 icon has been selected. At the top of the main window is a strip that
shows what screen is currently being displayed within the main area. This strip changes
color to red when changes have been made to any of the settings in the current screen and
reverts back to its normal color when the changes have been saved.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 54 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

2.4 Status Bar

The status bar, located at the very bottom of the CAMWorks window, is used to display
various status messages and progress indicators.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

Part

III
 56 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

3 Project Explorer
The Project Explorer, located by default on the left of the CAMWorks window, is one of the
most important elements of the new CAMWorks user interface. It is through here that all
node configuration screens can be reached.

The Project Explorer is organized as a hierarchical list, much like Windows Explorer. This
means that icons are organized such that icons can appear under other icons. If an icon
has a "+" icon to its left, that icon can be expanded to reveal other icons that belong to that
icon. If an icon has a "-" icon to its left, all of the icons belonging to the the icon may be
hidden by clicking the "-" icon. Below is an example of how the Project Explorer is
organized.

In this example, "HelpFile" is the name of the project. Clicking on the name "HelpFile" or the
icon beside it will open the Node Summary 57 screen (called System Overview for S3 Series
Standalone, E3 Series Standalone or 7100 Standalone projects) in the main area 53 of the
CAMWorks window. Besides some of the icons are small "+" or "-" icons. These icons
either reveal (the "+" icon) or hide (the "-" icon) other icons that "belong to" another icon. In
this example, Project Globals 61 "belongs to" the Project icon (titled "HelpFile" in this
example.) The Network Settings 61 , Silence Settings 69 and Regional Settings 70 icons all
"belong to" the Project Globals 61 icon. The Network Settings 61 and Regional Settings 70
icons both have their own set of icons that "belong to" them, but Silence Settings 69 does
not (because there is no "+" or "-" icon beside it).

NOTE: Clicking on some icons will open a new screen in the main area 53 of the
CAMWorks window, while clicking other icons will not open a new screen in the main area
53 of the CAMWorks window

At the very top of the Project Explorer is an icon representing the current project itself.
Clicking on the Project icon will open the Node Summary 57 screen (called System
Overview for S3 Series Standalone, E3 Series Standalone or 7100 Standalone projects),
which can be considered "home base" in your project. Project Globals 61 is the next icon in
the list. This icon provides access to various system wide configuration settings. Below
Project Globals 61 are icons for each node type that is present in the project.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Project Explorer 57

The Project Explorer itself contains a title bar and one small toolbar. The title bar contains
the name "Project Explorer" as well as a small "push-pin" icon and a small "x" icon. The
"push-pin" icon is used to make the Project Explorer always display, unless hidden (push-pin
facing vertically) or auto-hide (push-pin facing horizontally). When set to auto-hide, the
Project Explorer will shrink down to the side of the screen, allowing for more room to display
the main window. Hovering the mouse pointer over the "Project Explorer" text on the edge
of the window will temporarily display the full Project Explorer on top of the main window.
The "x" icon in the toolbar will hide the Project Explorer. The Project Explorer may be
unhidden using the Show/Hide Project Explorer 35 command in the View tab 34 of The
Ribbon 27 .

The Project Explorer may be moved from its default location (if the push-pin icon is oriented
vertically) by clicking and dragging the Project Explorer title bar. The Project Explorer may "
float" as a secondary window that appears above the main window, or may be dragged to
one of the four edges of the window and "docked".

The Project Explorer toolbar contains a drop-down list that allows the user to filter what icons
are displayed within the Project Explorer. The available selections depend on the types of
nodes contained within the current project. Project Globals 61 is always included in the
drop-down list. Regardless of the selection, the Project icon will always be present.

3.1 Node Summary / Sytem Overview

The Node Summary screen (called System Overview when an S3 Series Standalone, E3
Series Standalone or 7100 Standalone project is being configured) is represented in the
Project Explorer as an icon with the name of the project itself. It is the screen that opens
first after an existing project is opened or a new project is created. The Node Summary /
System Overview screen contains a few configuration settings for each node, as well as
some Node Management functions.

At the top of the Node Summary screen are three drop-down lists. These lists allow the user
to filter the list of nodes that will appear in the grid. The nodes may be filtered by node type,
network region or whether they've been downloaded or not.

At the bottom of the window are four command buttons. These are used to Add nodes 59 ,
Delete nodes 60 , Save any of the changes made on this screen or Close the window.

The grid contains a grid that lists all of nodes that are configured in the project. The grid
contains the following fields:

Sel - Select the nodes that will be deleted using the Delete Node 60 function.

NOTE: This setting does not apply to S3 Series Standalone, E3 Series Standalone or
7100 Standalone applications.

Enable - Double-clicking this field (or, if this field is currently selected, pressing the space
bar) will toggle whether the selected node should be considered enabled or disabled. See
this page 59 for more information.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

58 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: This setting does not apply to S3 Series Standalone, E3 Series Standalone or
7100 Standalone applications.

Node # - The network address of the node. This field may not be edited. This field is not
available for 7100 Standalone projects.

Node Type - The type of node at this address. This field may not be edited. This field is not
available for 7100 Standalone projects.

System ID Label - The system ID label is used to identify this node. It is also included in
event report displays and printouts. Up to 19 characters may be entered.

NOTE: Even though the ANX-MR appears as two nodes, it has only one System ID
Label. Both System ID Label fields associated with the ANX-MR will change when the
other is changed.

Node Description - This field may be used to include descriptive information about the
node, for example its location and/or function. This information is used for programming
reference only and is not downloaded to any node. This field is called System Description
for S3 Series Standalone, E3 Series Standalone or 7100 Standalone projects.

Region - This option selects which network region 24 this node belongs to. This can range
from 0 to 63.

NOTE: This setting does not apply to S3 Series Standalone, E3 Series Standalone or
7100 Standalone applications.

NOTE: Some special considerations must be taken into account when assigning regions
on multi-ring systems. Please see the Network Regions 24 help topic for more
information.

Created On - The date that this node was created. This field may not be edited.

Validation - Indicates whether the Program Validation process has been run since this node
(or panel for S3 Series Standalone, E3 Series Standalone or 7100 Standalone projects) has
been modified. This field may not be edited.

Last Modified - The date that this node was last modified. This field may not be edited.

Downloaded - Indicates YES if the node has been downloaded since it was last modified,
otherwise it will indicate NO. This field may not be edited.

Last Downloaded - The date and time that this node was most recently downloaded. This
field may not be edited.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Project Explorer 59

screen or navigating to another screen.

3.1.1 Enable / Disable Nodes

NOTE: These settings apply only to E3 Series / NetSOLO Series Network systems and E3
Series Multi-ring Network projects.

Each node in the system contains a network map that keeps track of all of the nodes that
are expected to be in the system. This information is configured by CAMWorks directly
based upon the nodes that have been defined in the CAMWorks project.

Once a node is configured with a valid network map, it will supervise the network. If it
detects a loss of communication with a node that it expects to be on the network it will issue
a "Node Missing" trouble condition.

The Node Summary screen displays a grid showing all nodes in the system, their type and
whether they are enabled or disabled. To disable certain nodes, all one needs to do is
double-click the green button in the Enabled field to turn the button gray. Likewise, double-
clicking the gray button in the Enabled field restores the node into the network map.

NOTE: Enable/Disable node only affects the supervision of the network. "Disabled" nodes
will still function normally.

NOTE: "Node Xtra" troubles may be reported by the system if a node, that is configured
as "Disabled", is actually present in the the system if the "Report Extra Node Troubles"
option in the Project Globals > Network Settings > Miscellaneous 41 screen is enabled,
and the system contains one or more ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3 Series or ANX nodes.

3.1.2 Add Node

Select this option to add a new node to the current project (S3 Series Standalone, E3 Series
Standalone, E3 Series / NetSOLO Series Network and E3 Series Multi-ring Network projects
only).

NOTE: If the current project is an E3 Series Standalone or S3 Series Standalone project,

using the "Add Node" function will convert the project to an E3 Series / NetSOLO Series
Network project. The S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3 or ILI95-MB-E3 that is already in the
project will be converted to Node 1. All CAMs will be automatically updated to Node 1.
For E3 Series Standalone projects, the address selector switches on the ILI-MB-E3 or
ILI95-MB-E3 must be changed to Node 1. For S3 Series Standalone projects, an RPT-E3
must be added to the system and it must be addressed as Node 1.

In order to add a new node to the project, CAMWorks prompts the user to provide the
following information:

Node Number - Select an available node number from the drop-down list. Addresses that
are already in use are not shown in the list.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 60 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Node Type - Select the node type that will be added using one of the option buttons.

NOTE: A network may not contain 7100 nodes if S3 Series (Apollo) FACP, ANX or
ILI95-E3 Series nodes are present in the system. The Add Node window prevents adding
a 7100 if the network already contains an S3 Series (Apollo) FACP, ILI95-E3 Series or
ANX node. The Add Node window also prevents adding an S3 Series (Apollo) FACP or
ILI95-E3 Series node when a network already contains a 7100. Likewise, the Add Node
window also prevents adding an ANX node when a network already contains a 7100.

System Label - Enter up to nineteen (19) characters that will be downloaded to the panel to
identify events that originate from this node.

Region - This option selects which network region 24 this node belongs to. This can range
from 0 to 63.

NOTE: Some special considerations must be taken into account when assigning regions
on multi-ring systems. Please see the Network Regions 24 help topic for more
information.

Description (Optional) - An optional description may be added which may be used to

describe the location and/or function of the node (or any other information desired). This
information is not downloaded to the panel.

OK - This will create the new node and close this window.
Apply - This will create the new node and leave this window open.
Close - This will close the window without creating a new node.
3.1.3 Delete Node
Selecting Delete will remove the selected node(s) from the current project. All data
associated with selected nodes is permanently deleted. There is no recovery method for
retrieving deleted nodes.

NOTE: It is not possible to convert an E3 Series / NetSOLO Series Network or E3 Series

Multi-ring Network project to an S3 Series Standalone, E3 Series Standalone or 7100
Standalone project by deleting nodes.

NOTE: If a project contains more than seven INI-7100 nodes, an NGA, S3 Series (System
Sensor) FACP or ILI-MB-E3 must be present in the system in order to satisfy UL 864 9th
edition requirements regarding the system event log. The Delete Node function will not
permit the user to delete nodes so that a network would contain more than seven INI-7100
nodes without an NGA, S3 Series (System Sensor) FACP or ILI-MB-E3.

NOTE: If the user elects to delete the ANX-MR from an E3 Series Multi-ring Network
project, all nodes on "Ring 2" will be deleted as well as the ANX-MR. The project will be
down-converted into a standard E3 Series / NetSOLO Series Network project.
CAMWorks will automatically create a backup of the project file before deleting the ANX-
MR.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Project Explorer 61

3.2 Project Globals

When configuring an E3 Series / NetSOLO Series Network or E3 Series Multi-Ring Network
project, Project Globals appears directly under the Project. When the user first clicks on the
Project Globals icon, CAMWorks opens a Report Viewer in the main window 53 . This report
viewer provides access to the following reports:
· Node Summary
· Passwords
· Miscellaneous
· User Defined Types
· Night/Weekend/Holiday Schedule
· Display Priorities

When the Project Globals icon in the Project Explorer is expanded by clicking the small "+"
button next to the Project Globals icon, the following icons are displayed under Project
Globals:

Network Settings 61

Silence Settings 69

Regional Settings 70

3.2.1 Network Settings

Network Settings provides access to configuration settings that will be applied to all nodes in
the network. These settings include:

Passwords 61

User Defined Types 62

Miscellaneous Settings 66

Display Priorities 67

3.2.1.1 Passwords

The system allows four levels of password access to prevent unauthorized modification of
critical system functions. In addition, the system supports a maximum of five different
passwords for each of the four access levels to provide for unique identification of up to five
different users. Each password must be numeric and may range from (000001 - 999999).
The value of 000000 is not allowed.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 62 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

There are four levels of access granted by the system. These are Level 1, Level 2, Level 3,
and Level 4. Level 4 grants the user the greatest amount of access, while Level 1 grants the
least amount of access.

NOTE: The Level 4 Password may not be set to any of the standard default passwords
(111111, 222222, 333333 or 444444.)

There are five different users available, labeled as Users 1-5. This allows the user to create
five different sets of passwords (one for each access level.) The system's history log will
indicate which user gained access to the system when unique passwords are assigned to
each user.

NOTE: Even though CAMWorks requires the user to assign a non-default Level 4
password, it is still highly recommended to change the remaining system passwords to
non-default values.

Since this is a Project Level option, this will affect all nodes present in the system.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

3.2.1.2 User Defined Types

The E3 Series and S3 Series FACPs provides a great degree of flexibility for user defined
device types. In the past, the User Defined AMM Types in the 7100 were configured at the
individual node level. This function has been combined with the E3 Series/S3 Series User
Defined Device Types into one configuration screen.

Device types 48-55 are reserved for 7100 User Defined Device Types. In the grid, the
device type number is highlighted in yellow for these device types.

NOTE: These device types can be used with 7100 nodes, ILI-E3 Series nodes and S3
Series (System Sensor) FACPs, but not with ILI95-E3 Series nodes or S3 Series (Apollo)
FACPs.

The options available for each user defined type are as follows:

SLC Type - Select whether this device type should be a System Sensor or Apollo device
type. This selection may or may not be available, depending on the nodes that are present
in the current project.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Project Explorer 63

NOTE: This setting is fixed to "System Sensor" for the 7100 User Defined Device Types.

User Defined Device Type - This identifies what the physical device type is for this user
defined type. The following device types are available:

Available User Defined Device Types for the 7100:

User Defined Device Type Description Allowed Response Types

AMM Module Addressable Monitor See AMM Modules.

Module, used to monitor any
normally open contact
device.

Available Physical Device Types for the ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3 and S3 Series (System Sensor)
FACPs:

User Defined Device Description Allowed in CLIP Allowed Response

Type Mode Types
No Device Used to indicate Yes See No Device.
there is no device
type configured.
Ion Sensor Analog/addressable Yes See Ion Sensors.
Ion smoke detectors,
such as the ASD-
IL2F.
Photo Sensor Analog/addressable Yes See Photo Sensors.
Photoelectric smoke
detectors, such as
the ASD-PL2F.
Thermal Sensor Analog/addressable Yes See Thermal
Thermal sensors, Sensors.
such as the ATD-L2F
(standard
temperature), ATD-
HL2F (high
temperature) or
ATD-RL2F (rate of
rise).
Acclimate Sensor Analog/addressable Yes * See Acclimate
multi-criteria sensor, Sensors.
such as MCS-
Acclimate2F.
AMM Module Addressable Monitor Yes See AMM Modules.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

64 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Module, used to
monitor any normally
open contact device.
Signal Module Notification Yes See NAC Modules.
Appliance/Speaker
Circuit Control
Module, such as the
AOM-2SF or MMO-
6SF
Form-C Module Form-C Dry Contact Yes See Form-C Modules
Module, such as .
AOM-2RF or MMO-
6RF.
CLIP Laser Sensor Analog/Addressable Yes See CLIP Laser
High Sensitivity Sensors.
NOTE: This device Photoelectric smoke
type is supported in detectors, such as
both Velociti and ASD-LS.
CLIP modes, even
though the device
itself only supports
CLIP mode.
Photo/Thermal Analog/addressable Yes See Photo/Thermal
Sensor Photoelectric/ Sensors.
Thermal sensor,
such as ASD-PTL2F.
Zone Module Addressable Monitor Yes See Zone Modules.
Module, such as
AMM-4SF, used to
monitor certain two-
wire conventional
smoke detectors.
See Gamewell-FCI
Compatibility
Addendum (P/N:
9000-0427) for more
details.
Manual Station Addressable Manual Yes See Manual Station
Module Station, such as the Modules.
MS-7AF.
Intelligent Beam Analog/addressable No See Intelligent Beam
Detector Beam Photoelectric Detectors.
Smoke Detector,
such as ABD-2F.
Vel Laser Sensor Analog/Addressable No See Verlociti Laser
High Sensitivity Sensors.
Photoelectric smoke

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Project Explorer 65

detectors.
4-Warn Sensor Velociti Series No See 4-Warn Sensors
combination smoke, .
carbon monoxide,
temperature and
flame detector.
Photo/CO Sensor Velociti Series multi- No See Photo/CO
criteria sensor, with Sensors.
carbon monoxide
detection and
reporting, such as
the MCS-COF.
Intelligent FAAST System Sensor No See Intelligent
Sensor Intelligent Aspirating FAAST Sensors.
(Single-Channel) Smoke Detector
Intelligent FAAST System Sensor No See Intelligent
Sensor Intelligent Multi- FAAST Sensors.
(Multi-Channel) Channel Aspirating
Smoke Detector

Available User Defined Device Types for the ILI95-MB-E3, ILI95-S-E3 and S3 Series
(Apollo) FACPs:

User Defined Device Type Description Allowed Response Types

No Device Used to indicate there is no See No Device.
device type configured.
Ion Sensor Analog/addressable Ion See Ion Sensors.
smoke detectors, such as
the XP95-I.
Optical Sensor Analog/addressable See Photo Sensors.
Photoelectric smoke
detectors, such as the XP95-
P.
Temperature Sensor Analog/addressable Thermal See Thermal Sensors.
sensors, such as the XP95-
T.
Multi-Sensor Analog/addressable multi- See Multi-Sensors.
criteria sensor, such as the
XP95-M.
PID-95 Point Identification Device See Point Identification
used to monitor any normally Devices.
open contact device.
SCE-95 Signal Control Element used See Signal Control Elements
to control Notification .
Appliance Circuits.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 66 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

RCE-95 Relay Control Element that See Relay Control Elements.

BCE-95
MS-95 / MS-95 T
CZI-95 (Non-Interrupting)
CZI-95 (Interrupting)
provides one Form-C Dry
Contact.
Building Control Element See Building Control
that provides two Form-C Elementsol Elements.
Dry Contacts for On/Off/Auto
(HOA) operation.
Addressable Manual Station. See Manual Station
Elements.
Conventional Zone Interface, See Conventional Zone
used to monitor certain two- Interfaces.
wire conventional smoke
detectors. See Gamewell-
FCI Compatibility Addendum
(P/N: 9000-0427) for more
details.
Conventional Zone Interface, See Conventional Zone
used to monitor certain two- Interfaces.
wire conventional smoke
detectors. See Gamewell-
FCI Compatibility Addendum
(P/N: 9000-0427) for more
details.

System Response Type - Selects the desired response to an activation from this device
type. See tables above for information about the available response types for each physical
device type.

Description - The text that will be associated with this User Defined Type. This will be used
for both on-screen and printed event reports. This description may be up to fourteen
characters in length.

Silenceable - This option applies only when the physical device type is set to Signal Module,
Form-C Module, SCE-95 or RCE-95. This indicates whether this device type can be
silenced or not.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

3.2.1.3 Miscellaneous

The following system-wide settings are configured through the Miscellaneous screen:

Trouble Reminder - If this option is enabled then acknowledged trouble events will be

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Project Explorer 67

periodically "unacknowledged". This means that the system's buzzer will be turned back on
and the System Trouble LED will blink as if a new trouble condition were being reported.

Multiple Trouble Acknowledge - Turning this option on will allow up to ten trouble
conditions to be acknowledged with one Trouble Acknowledge command.

NOTE: This setting is not available in mixed E3 Series / NetSOLO Series systems that
contain both 7100 nodes and E3 Series or S3 Series nodes.

Report Extra Node Troubles - When enabled, the system will supervise for nodes that are
present on the network but are not in the configured network map.
NOTE: This setting does not apply to E3 Series Standalone or S3 Series Standalone
applications.

NOTE: This configuration option is available only if the CAMWorks Project contains one or
more E3 Series or S3 Series FACP nodes or one or more NGA nodes.

Walk Test Timeout - The Walk Test timeout will cause the system to automatically cancel
the Walk Test mode if it isn't manually turned off. This value may be (30, 60 or 90 Minutes)
if the system contains at least one 7100 panel, or (30, 60, 90, 120 or 180 Minutes) if the
system does not contain a 7100 panel. This setting will affect all nodes in the system that
support walk test.
Action Condition Acknowledged By - This configuration option selects whether the
Trouble Acknowledge button is used to acknowledge Action (pre-alarm) conditions or the
Alarm Acknowledge button is used to acknowledge Action conditions. This setting defaults
to the Alarm Acknowledge button. This setting is not available when 7100 nodes are
present in the network.

NOTE: This setting is not available in mixed E3 Series / NetSOLO Series systems that
contain both 7100 nodes and E3 Series or S3 Series nodes.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

3.2.1.4 Display Priorities

NOTE: These settings apply to S3 Series FACP, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3 Series
and NGA nodes only.

The S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3 Series and NGA displays conform to UL 864 9th
edition and UL 2572 1st edition event display requirements. The most significant change
from the 7100 display is that concurrent events do not automatically scroll. Instead, the
display always shows the earliest (oldest) event of the highest priority present in the system

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

68 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

(or region), unless the user scrolls the events manually.

Since events do not scroll, the behavior of the display depends entirely on what priority the
system assigns to each event. These priorities can be modified in this screen. Note that
this only configures how events are DISPLAYED. To configure a different system response,
a User Defined Type 36 should be used instead.

Each system condition listed has both an Acknowledged and Unacknowledged priority.
Typically, the Unacknowledged priority for each condition is of a higher priority than its
Acknowledged priority. The system has e ight different priority levels, ranging from Level 1
to Level 8. Level 1 is the lowest priority level, while Level 8 is the highest priority level.

The following system conditions may be assigned new display priorities:

ALARM - Fire Alarm Conditions

CO/GAS ALARM - CO/Gas alarm conditions.
MNS ALARM - Mass Notification alarm conditions.
ACTION - Action (pre-alarm) Conditions. This applies to multi-level devices, Cross Zones
and other pre-alarm conditions.
SUPERVISORY- All Supervisory Off-Normal and Tamper conditions.
MNS SUPERVISORY - All Supervisory Off-Normal and Tamper conditions related to
mass-notification devices.
TROUBLE - All System Trouble conditions.
MNS TROUBLE - All System Trouble conditions conditions related to mass-notification
devices

NOTE: The priority settings for MNS Alarm, MNS Trouble and MNS Supervisory only
affect NGA nodes.

These settings are automatically configured for ALL S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3
Series and NGA nodes in the system, therefore all S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3 Series
and NGA nodes will have the same set of display priorities once they have all been
downloaded.

To change a priority, click and drag its slider and move it to the left or to the right. Moving a
slider to the right gives the event a higher priority, while sliding it to the left gives it a lower
priority. The currently selected priority level is displayed to the right of the slider.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Project Explorer 69

NOTE: To revert all Display Priority settings to their UL approved settings, click either
the "MNS Overrides Fire" or "Fire Overrides MNS" button at the top of the window.

NOTE: These settings should be left to their default settings, unless there is a
specific need to change them.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

3.2.2 Silence Settings

NOTE: This screen is not available in S3 Series Standalone, E3 Series Standalone or
7100 Standalone projects.

This screen contains certain network-related options for each node. Each node in the
current project is displayed in a grid. This grid displays several pieces of information related
to each node. These settings, which cannot be edited on this screen, include the node
number, the node type, the system ID label, the node description and the node's region.
The settings that can be modified from this screen include:

Node Type - Selecting a node type in this drop-down list will cause CAMWorks to display
only nodes of the selected type in the grid below.

Region Number - Selecting a region number in this drop-down list will cause CAMWorks to
display only nodes that are members of selected region in the grid below.

Net Global Report - If this option is turned on, this node will report all events that occur on
the network. If it is turned off, it will only report events from other nodes in the same region
24 . This setting is not available on INCC, INX, and INI-VGE nodes.

NOTE: On NGA nodes, this option will be automatically turned on by enabling the
Proprietary Supervising Station mode, and cannot be disabled until the Proprietary
Supervising Station mode is disabled.

Net Global Reset - If this option is turned on, a reset command that originates from this
node will reset the entire network. If it is turned off, it will only reset other nodes in the same
region 24 . This setting is not available on INCC, INX, and INI-VGE nodes.

Network Global Silence Transmitter - Selecting this option will allow Silence requests to

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 70 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

be sent from this node to nodes in other regions that are configured as a "Network Global
Silence Receiver". This setting is not available on INCC, INX, and INI-VGE nodes.

NOTE: When the "Network Global Silence Transmitter" option is enabled, the Signal
Silence buttons will function as Silence only. Unsilence will no longer be available,
however subsequent alarms will re-activate silenced output devices.

Network Global Silence Receiver - Selecting this option will allow this node to receive
silence requests from nodes in other regions that are configured as a "Network Global
Silence Transmitter". If enabled, this node will send silence request commands to the other
nodes in the same region as this node. This setting is not available on INCC, INX, and
INI-VGE nodes.
NOTE: Only one node per region may be configured as a "Network Global Silence
Receiver".

NOTE: In networked systems where FocalPoint is connected, one node per region must
be configured as the "Network Global Silence Receiver" for that region in order for
FocalPoint's signal silence commands to properly function.

NOTE: In single-region systems where FocalPoint is connected, the node that FocalPoint
is connected to must be configured as a "Network Global Silence Receiver" in order for
FocalPoint's signal silence commands to properly function.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

3.2.3 Regional Settings

In CAMWorks, there are certain configuration settings that affect all nodes within a region.
Specifically, these are the Night/Weekend/Holiday 70 settings.

3.2.3.1 Night/Weekend/Holiday Schedule

In S3 Series, E3 Series and NetSOLO Series systems, you can optimize the sensitivity of
the sensors for particular times during the day, on weekends and on holidays. This can be
used to increase sensitivity for those times when a building is not in use. When the system's
real-time clock reaches a configured time or day, the system will automatically begin to use
the Night Sensitivity settings configured for each sensor. In addition, any Fire alarm that
occurs during this time will activate the General Night Alarm output list as well as both SSM
bit 440 (Day Alarm or Night Alarm) and SSM bit 441 (Night Alarm.)

NOTE: These settings affect the fire alarm response only.

Select Region - Choose the network region that the settings on this screen will modify from
the drop-down list.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Project Explorer 71

Night Schedule - Select Night Start and Night Stop operation times from the drop-down
lists. During the programmed times, the sensors will operate with the defined Night
Sensitivity settings.

NOTE: Only the hour may be selected if a network region contains a mixture of 7100 and
ILI-E3 Series or S3Series nodes.

Weekend Schedule - Define weekend days for night sensitivity operation by checking the
appropriate days.

Holiday Schedule - Configure Holidays for Night sensitivity operation by clicking on the
calendar icon ( ). A calendar will be displayed. Select the holiday by clicking on the day of
the month. The user can move through the calendar by clicking on the arrow icons located
at the top of the calendar. The user may enter up to sixteen holidays. Dates can be cleared
by placing a check in the "Sel" column next to the appropriate holiday and clicking the Clear
button at the bottom of the window.

NOTE: Holidays 11-16 are not available on 7100 panels and cannot be used in network
regions that contain both 7100 and ILI-E3 Series or S3 Series nodes.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

3.3 Rings
In a multi-ring system, CAMWorks organizes the Project Explorer so that each ring is
represented by an icon. When the ring is expanded by clicking on the "+" icon, all of the
nodes belonging to that particular ring will appear below the ring icon.

3.4 ILI-MB-E3
If the project contains one or more ILI-MB-E3 nodes, an ILI-MB-E3 icon appears. A "+" icon
appears next to the ILI-MB-E3 icon. Once the "+" icon is used to expand the ILI-MB-E3
icon, icons for each ILI-MB-E3 node will appear.

Several options are available when the user right-clicks an ILI-MB-E3 node icon. These
include Copy Node 72 , Print Node 73 and Convert to Standalone ILI-MB-E3 panel 73 .

When the user first clicks on one of the ILI-MB-E3 node icons, CAMWorks opens a Report
Viewer in the main window 53 . This report viewer provides access to the following reports:

· General Settings
· NAC Settings
· Coded Patterns and Sync Settings
· Sensor Records

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 72 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

· Module Records
· AOM Records
· AOM General Output Lists
· ASM-16/ANU-48 Modules
· ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches
· CAM ASM-16/ANU-48 LED On/Off
· CAM ASM-16/ANU-48 LED Blink
· Zone Code
· Cross Zones
· CAM Output Groups
· CAM Scratchpad
· CAM Cross Zone
· DACT Settings
· CAM Special Functions
· CAM Group Disable
· CAM Disable Type Tag
· CAM Remote
· Label Groups
· CAM Reset Inhibit
· CAM Sounder Base Coded Patterns
· Sensor Sensitivity
· Sounder Base Settings

See the "E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 442 " section for more information regarding the
ILI-MB-E3.
3.4.1 Copy Node
Copy Node Configuration allows the user to copy configuration data from one node within a
project to another node within the same project. This is useful when multiple nodes within a
project require similar configuration.

The Copy Node Configuration window prompts the user for the following information:

Node Type - Select the type of node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Source Node - Select the node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Destination Node - Select an available node number from the drop-down list. Note that
addresses that are already in use are not shown in the list.
Node Features - Each node type contains various types of information that may be copied.
The various selection boxes allow the user to select what aspects of the source node should
be copied to the destination node.

Copy - Select this button to copy the selected node.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Project Explorer 73

Close - Closes this window.

NOTE: The Copy Node Configuration function requires that both the source and
destination nodes be of the same node type, with the following exceptions:
1. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-MB-E3 to an ILI-S-E3.
2. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-S-E3 to an ILI-MB-E3.
3. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-MB-E3 to an ILI95-S-E3.
4. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-S-E3 to an ILI95-MB-E3.

3.4.2 Print Node

This option allows the user to print all available reports for the selected node.

NOTE: A Windows printer must be configured properly to use this option. In addition, the
printout will be made to the printer that has been selected as the "default" in the Windows
Control Panel.

3.4.3 Convert to Standalone ILI-MB-E3 panel

Select this option to convert the current project into an E3 Series Standalone project. The
selected node will be retained in the project and all other nodes will be deleted, as will all
CAM expressions in the current node.

NOTE: This action is not reversible. All deleted data is non-recoverable.

3.5 ILI-S-E3
If the project contains one or more ILI-S-E3 nodes, an ILI-S-E3 icon appears. A "+" icon
appears next to the ILI-S-E3. Once the "+" icon is used to expand the ILI-S-E3 icon, icons
for each ILI-S-E3 node will appear.

Several options are available when the user right-clicks an ILI-S-E3 node icon. These
include Copy Node 74 and Print Node 75 .

When the user first clicks on one of the ILI-S-E3 node icons, CAMWorks opens a Report
Viewer in the main window 53 . This report viewer provides access to the following reports:

· General Settings
· Sensor Records
· Module Records
· AOM Records
· AOM General Output Lists
· Cross Zones

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 74 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

· CAM Output Groups

· CAM Scratchpad
· CAM Cross Zone
· CAM Special Functions
· CAM Group Disable
· CAM Disable Type Tag
· CAM Remote
· Label Groups
· CAM Reset Inhibit
· CAM Sounder Base Coded Patterns
· Sensor Sensitivity
· Sounder Base Settings

See the "E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 442 " section for more information regarding the
ILI-S-E3.
3.5.1 Copy Node
Copy Node Configuration allows the user to copy configuration data from one node within a
project to another node within the same project. This is useful when multiple nodes within a
project require similar configuration.

The Copy Node Configuration window prompts the user for the following information:

Node Type - Select the type of node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Source Node - Select the node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Destination Node - Select an available node number from the drop-down list. Note that
addresses that are already in use are not shown in the list.
Node Features - Each node type contains various types of information that may be copied.
The various selection boxes allow the user to select what aspects of the source node should
be copied to the destination node.

Copy - Select this button to copy the selected node.

Close - Closes this window.

NOTE: The Copy Node Configuration function requires that both the source and
destination nodes be of the same node type, with the following exceptions:
1. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-MB-E3 to an ILI-S-E3.
2. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-S-E3 to an ILI-MB-E3.
3. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-MB-E3 to an ILI95-S-E3.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Project Explorer 75

4. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-S-E3 to an ILI95-MB-E3.

3.5.2 Print Node

This option allows the user to print all available reports for the selected node.

NOTE: A Windows printer must be configured properly to use this option. In addition, the
printout will be made to the printer that has been selected as the "default" in the Windows
Control Panel.

3.6 ILI95-MB-E3
If the project contains one or more ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, an ILI95-MB-E3 icon appears. A "+"
icon appears next to the ILI95-MB-E3 icon. Once the "+" icon is used to expand the ILI-MB-
E3 icon, icons for each ILI95-MB-E3 node will appear.

Several options are available when the user right-clicks an ILI95-MB-E3 node icon. These
include Copy Node 76 , Print Node 73 and Convert to Standalone ILI95-MB-E3 panel 77 .

When the user first clicks on one of the ILI95-MB-E3 node icons, CAMWorks opens a
Report Viewer in the main window 53 . This report viewer provides access to the following
reports:

· General Settings
· NAC Settings
· Coded Patterns and Sync Settings
· Sensor Records
· Monitor Elements
· Control Elements
· Control Elements General Output Lists
· ASM-16/ANU-48 Modules
· ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches
· CAM ASM-16/ANU-48 LED On/Off
· CAM ASM-16/ANU-48 LED Blink
· Zone Code
· Cross Zones
· CAM Output Groups
· CAM Scratchpad
· CAM Cross Zone
· DACT Settings
· CAM Special Functions
· CAM Group Disable
· CAM Disable Type Tag
· CAM Remote
· Label Groups
· CAM Reset Inhibit
· Sensor Sensitivity

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 76 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

See the "E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 327 " section for more information regarding
the ILI95-MB-E3.
3.6.1 Copy Node
Copy Node Configuration allows the user to copy configuration data from one node within a
project to another node within the same project. This is useful when multiple nodes within a
project require similar configuration.

The Copy Node Configuration window prompts the user for the following information:

Node Type - Select the type of node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Source Node - Select the node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Destination Node - Select an available node number from the drop-down list. Note that
addresses that are already in use are not shown in the list.
Node Features - Each node type contains various types of information that may be copied.
The various selection boxes allow the user to select what aspects of the source node should
be copied to the destination node.

Copy - Select this button to copy the selected node.

Close - Closes this window.

NOTE: The Copy Node Configuration function requires that both the source and
destination nodes be of the same node type, with the following exceptions:
1. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-MB-E3 to an ILI-S-E3.
2. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-S-E3 to an ILI-MB-E3.
3. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-MB-E3 to an ILI95-S-E3.
4. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-S-E3 to an ILI95-MB-E3.

3.6.2 Print Node

This option allows the user to print all available reports for the selected node.

NOTE: A Windows printer must be configured properly to use this option. In addition, the
printout will be made to the printer that has been selected as the "default" in the Windows
Control Panel.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Project Explorer 77

3.6.3 Convert to Standalone ILI95-MB-E3 panel

Select this option to convert the current project into an E3 Series Standalone project. The
selected node will be retained in the project and all other nodes will be deleted, as will all
CAM expressions in the current node.

NOTE: This action is not reversible. All deleted data is non-recoverable.

3.7 ILI95-S-E3
If the project contains one or more ILI95-S-E3 nodes, an ILI95-S-E3 icon appears. A "+"
icon appears next to the ILI95-S-E3. Once the "+" icon is used to expand the ILI95-S-E3
icon, icons for each ILI95-S-E3 node will appear.

Several options are available when the user right-clicks an ILI95-S-E3 node icon. These
include Copy Node 77 and Print Node 75 .

When the user first clicks on one of the ILI95-S-E3 node icons, CAMWorks opens a Report
Viewer in the main window 53 . This report viewer provides access to the following reports:

· General Settings
· Sensor Records
· Monitor Elements
· Control Elements
· Control Elements General Output Lists
· Cross Zones
· CAM Output Groups
· CAM Scratchpad
· CAM Cross Zone
· CAM Special Functions
· CAM Group Disable
· CAM Disable Type Tag
· CAM Remote
· Label Groups
· CAM Reset Inhibit
· Sensor Sensitivity

See the "E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 327 " section for more information regarding
the ILI95-S-E3.
3.7.1 Copy Node
Copy Node Configuration allows the user to copy configuration data from one node within a
project to another node within the same project. This is useful when multiple nodes within a
project require similar configuration.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 78 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

The Copy Node Configuration window prompts the user for the following information:

Node Type - Select the type of node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Source Node - Select the node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Destination Node - Select an available node number from the drop-down list. Note that
addresses that are already in use are not shown in the list.
Node Features - Each node type contains various types of information that may be copied.
The various selection boxes allow the user to select what aspects of the source node should
be copied to the destination node.

Copy - Select this button to copy the selected node.

Close - Closes this window.

NOTE: The Copy Node Configuration function requires that both the source and
destination nodes be of the same node type, with the following exceptions:
1. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-MB-E3 to an ILI-S-E3.
2. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-S-E3 to an ILI-MB-E3.
3. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-MB-E3 to an ILI95-S-E3.
4. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-S-E3 to an ILI95-MB-E3.

3.7.2 Print Node

This option allows the user to print all available reports for the selected node.

NOTE: A Windows printer must be configured properly to use this option. In addition, the
printout will be made to the printer that has been selected as the "default" in the Windows
Control Panel.

3.8 INI-7100
If the project contains one or more INI-7100 nodes, an INI-7100 icon appears. A "+" icon
appears next to the INI-7100 icon. Once the "+" icon is used to expand the INI-7100 icon,
icons for each INI-7100 node will appear.

Several options are available when the user right-clicks an INI-7100 node icon. These
include Copy Node 79 , Print Node 80 and Convert to ILI-MB-E3 panel 80 .

When the user first clicks on one of the INI-7100 node icons, CAMWorks opens a Report
Viewer in the main window 53 . This report viewer provides access to the following reports:

· General Settings

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Project Explorer 79

· NAC Settings
· Coded Patterns
· Sensor Records
· Module Records
· AOM Records
· AOM General Output Lists
· Input Groups
· LED Annunciators
· Zone Code
· Cross Zone
· CAM Output Groups
· CAM Scratchpad
· DACT Settings
· Label Groups
· CAM Special Functions
· CAM Reset Inhibit

See the "7100 582 " section for more information regarding the 7100.
3.8.1 Copy Node
Copy Node Configuration allows the user to copy configuration data from one node within a
project to another node within the same project. This is useful when multiple nodes within a
project require similar configuration.

The Copy Node Configuration window prompts the user for the following information:

Node Type - Select the type of node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Source Node - Select the node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Destination Node - Select an available node number from the drop-down list. Note that
addresses that are already in use are not shown in the list.
Node Features - Each node type contains various types of information that may be copied.
The various selection boxes allow the user to select what aspects of the source node should
be copied to the destination node.

Copy - Select this button to copy the selected node.

Close - Closes this window.

NOTE: The Copy Node Configuration function requires that both the source and
destination nodes be of the same node type, with the following exceptions:
1. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-MB-E3 to an ILI-S-E3.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 80 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

2. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-S-E3 to an ILI-MB-E3.

3. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-MB-E3 to an ILI95-S-E3.
4. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-S-E3 to an ILI95-MB-E3.

3.8.2 Print Node

This option allows the user to print all available reports for the selected node.

NOTE: A Windows printer must be configured properly to use this option. In addition, the
printout will be made to the printer that has been selected as the "default" in the Windows
Control Panel.

3.8.3 Convert to ILI-MB-E3 panel

Select this option to convert the selected node into an ILI-MB-E3.

NOTE: This action is not reversible.

3.9 NGA
If the project contains one or more NGA nodes, an NGA icon appears. A "+" icon appears
next to the NGA icon. Once the "+" icon is used to expand the NGA icon, icons for each
NGA node will appear.

Several options are available when the user right-clicks an NGA node icon. These include
Copy Node 80 and Print Node 81 .

When the user first clicks on one of the NGA node icons, CAMWorks opens a Report Viewer
in the main window 53 . This report viewer provides access to the following reports:

· General Settings
· NGA Text Messages
· CAM Scratchpad Locations
· CAM NGA Text Messages
· CAM Special Functions
· CAM Reset Inhibit

See the "NGA 767 " section for more information regarding the NGA.
3.9.1 Copy Node
Copy Node Configuration allows the user to copy configuration data from one node within a
project to another node within the same project. This is useful when multiple nodes within a
project require similar configuration.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Project Explorer 81

The Copy Node Configuration window prompts the user for the following information:

Node Type - Select the type of node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Source Node - Select the node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Destination Node - Select an available node number from the drop-down list. Note that
addresses that are already in use are not shown in the list.
Node Features - Each node type contains various types of information that may be copied.
The various selection boxes allow the user to select what aspects of the source node should
be copied to the destination node.

Copy - Select this button to copy the selected node.

Close - Closes this window.

NOTE: The Copy Node Configuration function requires that both the source and
destination nodes be of the same node type, with the following exceptions:
1. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-MB-E3 to an ILI-S-E3.
2. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-S-E3 to an ILI-MB-E3.
3. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-MB-E3 to an ILI95-S-E3.
4. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-S-E3 to an ILI95-MB-E3.

3.9.2 Print Node

This option allows the user to print all available reports for the selected node.

NOTE: A Windows printer must be configured properly to use this option. In addition, the
printout will be made to the printer that has been selected as the "default" in the Windows
Control Panel.

3.10 INCC
If the project contains one or more INCC nodes, an INCC icon appears. A "+" icon appears
next to the INCC icon. Once the "+" icon is used to expand the INCC icon, icons for each
INCC node will appear.

Several options are available when the user right-clicks an INCC node icon. These include
Copy Node 82 and Print Node 83 .

When the user first clicks on one of the INCC node icons, CAMWorks opens a Report
Viewer in the main window 53 . This report viewer provides access to the following reports:

· AOM Telephone Modules

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 82 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

· ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches
· CAM ASM-16/ANU-48 - LED On/Off
· CAM ASM-16/ANU-48 - LED Blink
· CAM Recorded Message
· CAM Paging Control
· CAM Phone Functions
· CAM Scratchpad
· CAM Local Audio Outputs
· CAM Special Functions
· CAM AOM Telephone Modules
· Audio Messages
· ASM-16/ANU-48 Modules

See the "INCC 663 " section for more information regarding the INCC.
3.10.1 Copy Node
Copy Node Configuration allows the user to copy configuration data from one node within a
project to another node within the same project. This is useful when multiple nodes within a
project require similar configuration.

The Copy Node Configuration window prompts the user for the following information:

Node Type - Select the type of node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Source Node - Select the node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Destination Node - Select an available node number from the drop-down list. Note that
addresses that are already in use are not shown in the list.
Node Features - Each node type contains various types of information that may be copied.
The various selection boxes allow the user to select what aspects of the source node should
be copied to the destination node.

Copy - Select this button to copy the selected node.

Close - Closes this window.

NOTE: The Copy Node Configuration function requires that both the source and
destination nodes be of the same node type, with the following exceptions:
1. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-MB-E3 to an ILI-S-E3.
2. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-S-E3 to an ILI-MB-E3.
3. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-MB-E3 to an ILI95-S-E3.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Project Explorer 83

4. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-S-E3 to an ILI95-MB-E3.

3.10.2 Print Node

This option allows the user to print all available reports for the selected node.

NOTE: A Windows printer must be configured properly to use this option. In addition, the
printout will be made to the printer that has been selected as the "default" in the Windows
Control Panel.

3.11 INX
If the project contains one or more INX nodes, an INX icon appears. A "+" icon appears
next to the INX icon. Once the "+" icon is used to expand the INX icon, icons for each INX
node will appear.

Several options are available when the user right-clicks an INX node icon. These include
Copy Node 83 and Print Node 84 .

When the user first clicks on one of the INX node icons, CAMWorks opens a Report Viewer
in the main window 53 . This report viewer provides access to the following reports:

· AOM Telephone Modules

· AOM MUX Modules
· ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches
· CAM ASM-16/ANU-48 - LED On/Off
· CAM ASM-16/ANU-48 - LED Blink
· CAM Recorded Messages
· CAM Paging Control
· CAM Amplifiers
· CAM AOM Telephone Modules
· CAM AOM Mux Modules
· CAM Phone Functions
· CAM Scratchpad
· CAM Special Functions
· General Settings
· Audio Messages
· ASM-16/ANU-48 Modules

See the "INX 697 " section for more information regarding the INX.
3.11.1 Copy Node
Copy Node Configuration allows the user to copy configuration data from one node within a
project to another node within the same project. This is useful when multiple nodes within a
project require similar configuration.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 84 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

The Copy Node Configuration window prompts the user for the following information:

Node Type - Select the type of node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Source Node - Select the node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Destination Node - Select an available node number from the drop-down list. Note that
addresses that are already in use are not shown in the list.
Node Features - Each node type contains various types of information that may be copied.
The various selection boxes allow the user to select what aspects of the source node should
be copied to the destination node.

Copy - Select this button to copy the selected node.

Close - Closes this window.

NOTE: The Copy Node Configuration function requires that both the source and
destination nodes be of the same node type, with the following exceptions:
1. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-MB-E3 to an ILI-S-E3.
2. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-S-E3 to an ILI-MB-E3.
3. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-MB-E3 to an ILI95-S-E3.
4. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-S-E3 to an ILI95-MB-E3.

3.11.2 Print Node

This option allows the user to print all available reports for the selected node.

NOTE: A Windows printer must be configured properly to use this option. In addition, the
printout will be made to the printer that has been selected as the "default" in the Windows
Control Panel.

3.12 INI-VGE
If the project contains one or more INI-VGE nodes, an INI-VGE icon appears. A "+" icon
appears next to the INI-VGE icon. Once the "+" icon is used to expand the INI-VGE icon,
icons for each INI-VGE node will appear.

Several options are available when the user right-clicks an INI-VGE node icon. These
include Copy Node 85 and Print Node 86 .

When the user first clicks on one of the INI-VGE node icon, CAMWorks opens a Report
Viewer in the main window 53 . This report viewer provides access to the following reports:

· AOM Telephone Modules

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Project Explorer 85

· AOM MUX Modules

· ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches
· CAM ASM-16/ANU-48 - LED On/Off
· CAM ASM-16/ANU-48 - LED Blink
· CAM Recorded Messages
· CAM Paging Control
· CAM AOM Telephone Modules
· CAM AOM Mux Modules
· CAM Phone Functions
· CAM Scratchpad
· CAM Local Audio Outputs
· CAM Special Functions
· General Settings
· Audio Messages
· ASM-16/ANU-48 Modules

See the "INI-VGE 732 " section for more information regarding the INI-VGE.
3.12.1 Copy Node
Copy Node Configuration allows the user to copy configuration data from one node within a
project to another node within the same project. This is useful when multiple nodes within a
project require similar configuration.

The Copy Node Configuration window prompts the user for the following information:

Node Type - Select the type of node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Source Node - Select the node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Destination Node - Select an available node number from the drop-down list. Note that
addresses that are already in use are not shown in the list.
Node Features - Each node type contains various types of information that may be copied.
The various selection boxes allow the user to select what aspects of the source node should
be copied to the destination node.

Copy - Select this button to copy the selected node.

Close - Closes this window.

NOTE: The Copy Node Configuration function requires that both the source and
destination nodes be of the same node type, with the following exceptions:
1. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-MB-E3 to an ILI-S-E3.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 86 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

2. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-S-E3 to an ILI-MB-E3.

3. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-MB-E3 to an ILI95-S-E3.
4. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-S-E3 to an ILI95-MB-E3.

3.12.2 Print Node

This option allows the user to print all available reports for the selected node.

NOTE: A Windows printer must be configured properly to use this option. In addition, the
printout will be made to the printer that has been selected as the "default" in the Windows
Control Panel.

3.13 ANX-SR
If the project contains one or more ANX-SR nodes, an ANX-SR icon appears. A "+" icon
appears next to the ANX-SR icon. Once the "+" icon is used to expand the ANX-SR icon,
icons for each ANX-SR node will appear.

Several options are available when the user right-clicks an ANX-SR node icon. These
include Copy Node 86 and Print Node 87 .

When the user first clicks on one of the ANX-SR node icon, CAMWorks opens a Report
Viewer in the main window 53 . This report viewer provides access to the following reports:

· General Settings
· Virtual Switches
· CAMs for Virtual Switch Feedback
· CAMs for Scratchpads
3.13.1 Copy Node
Copy Node Configuration allows the user to copy configuration data from one node within a
project to another node within the same project. This is useful when multiple nodes within a
project require similar configuration.

The Copy Node Configuration window prompts the user for the following information:

Node Type - Select the type of node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Source Node - Select the node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Destination Node - Select an available node number from the drop-down list. Note that
addresses that are already in use are not shown in the list.
Node Features - Each node type contains various types of information that may be copied.
The various selection boxes allow the user to select what aspects of the source node should
be copied to the destination node.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Project Explorer 87

Copy - Select this button to copy the selected node.

Close - Closes this window.

NOTE: The Copy Node Configuration function requires that both the source and
destination nodes be of the same node type, with the following exceptions:
1. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-MB-E3 to an ILI-S-E3.
2. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-S-E3 to an ILI-MB-E3.
3. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-MB-E3 to an ILI95-S-E3.
4. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-S-E3 to an ILI95-MB-E3.

3.13.2 Print Node

This option allows the user to print all available reports for the selected node.

NOTE: A Windows printer must be configured properly to use this option. In addition, the
printout will be made to the printer that has been selected as the "default" in the Windows
Control Panel.

3.14 ANX-MR
If the project contains one or more ANX-SR nodes, an ANX-SR icon appears. A "+" icon
appears next to the ANX-SR icon. Once the "+" icon is used to expand the ANX-SR icon,
icons for each ANX-SR node will appear.

Several options are available when the user right-clicks an ANX-SR node icon. These
include Copy Node 87 and Print Node 87 .

When the user first clicks on one of the ANX-SR node icon, CAMWorks opens a Report
Viewer in the main window 53 . This report viewer provides access to the following reports:

· General Settings
· Virtual Switches
· CAMs for Virtual Switch Feedback
· Cross-Ring Scratchpad
3.14.1 Copy Node

3.14.2 Print Node

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 88 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

3.15 SLP-E3
If the project contains one or more SLP-E3 nodes, an SLP-E3 icon appears. A "+" icon
appears next to the SLP-E3 icon. Once the "+" icon is used to expand the SLP-E3 icon,
icons for each SLP-E3 node will appear.

Several options are available when the user right-clicks an SLP-E3 node icon. These
include Copy Node 88 and Print Node 89 .

When the user first clicks on one of the ILI-MB-E3 node icons, CAMWorks opens a Report
Viewer in the main window 53 . This report viewer provides access to the following reports:

· General Settings
· NAC Settings
· Coded Patterns and Sync Settings
· Sensor Records
· Module Records
· AOM Records
· AOM General Output Lists
· ASM-16/ANU-48 Modules
· ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches
· CAM ASM-16/ANU-48 LED On/Off
· CAM ASM-16/ANU-48 LED Blink
· Zone Code
· Cross Zones
· CAM Output Groups
· CAM Scratchpad
· CAM Cross Zone
· DACT Settings
· CAM Special Functions
· CAM Group Disable
· CAM Disable Type Tag
· CAM Remote
· Label Groups
· CAM Reset Inhibit
· CAM Sounder Base Coded Patterns
· Sensor Sensitivity
· Sounder Base Settings

See the "S3 Series (System Sensor) 442 " section for more information regarding the SLP-E3.
3.15.1 Copy Node
Copy Node Configuration allows the user to copy configuration data from one node within a
project to another node within the same project. This is useful when multiple nodes within a
project require similar configuration.

The Copy Node Configuration window prompts the user for the following information:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Project Explorer 89

Node Type - Select the type of node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Source Node - Select the node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Destination Node - Select an available node number from the drop-down list. Note that
addresses that are already in use are not shown in the list.
Node Features - Each node type contains various types of information that may be copied.
The various selection boxes allow the user to select what aspects of the source node should
be copied to the destination node.

Copy - Select this button to copy the selected node.

Close - Closes this window.

NOTE: The Copy Node Configuration function requires that both the source and
destination nodes be of the same node type, with the following exceptions:
1. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-MB-E3 to an ILI-S-E3.
2. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-S-E3 to an ILI-MB-E3.
3. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-MB-E3 to an ILI95-S-E3.
4. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-S-E3 to an ILI95-MB-E3.

3.15.2 Print Node

This option allows the user to print all available reports for the selected node.

NOTE: A Windows printer must be configured properly to use this option. In addition, the
printout will be made to the printer that has been selected as the "default" in the Windows
Control Panel.

3.16 SLP95-E3
If the project contains one or more SLP95-E3 nodes, an SLP95-E3 icon appears. A "+" icon
appears next to the SLP95-E3 icon. Once the "+" icon is used to expand the SLP95-E3
icon, icons for each SLP95-E3 node will appear.

Several options are available when the user right-clicks an SLP95-E3 node icon. These
include Copy Node 90 and Print Node 91 .

When the user first clicks on one of the SLP95-E3 node icons, CAMWorks opens a Report
Viewer in the main window 53 . This report viewer provides access to the following reports:

· General Settings
· NAC Settings

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 90 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

· Coded Patterns and Sync Settings

· Sensor Records
· Monitor Elements
· Control Elements
· Control Elements General Output Lists
· ASM-16/ANU-48 Modules
· ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches
· CAM ASM-16/ANU-48 LED On/Off
· CAM ASM-16/ANU-48 LED Blink
· Zone Code
· Cross Zones
· CAM Output Groups
· CAM Scratchpad
· CAM Cross Zone
· DACT Settings
· CAM Special Functions
· CAM Group Disable
· CAM Disable Type Tag
· CAM Remote
· Label Groups
· CAM Reset Inhibit
· Sensor Sensitivity

See the "S3 Series (Apollo) 327 " section for more information regarding the SLP95-E3.
3.16.1 Copy Node
Copy Node Configuration allows the user to copy configuration data from one node within a
project to another node within the same project. This is useful when multiple nodes within a
project require similar configuration.

The Copy Node Configuration window prompts the user for the following information:

Node Type - Select the type of node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Source Node - Select the node to be copied from the drop-down list.
Destination Node - Select an available node number from the drop-down list. Note that
addresses that are already in use are not shown in the list.
Node Features - Each node type contains various types of information that may be copied.
The various selection boxes allow the user to select what aspects of the source node should
be copied to the destination node.

Copy - Select this button to copy the selected node.

Close - Closes this window.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Project Explorer 91

NOTE: The Copy Node Configuration function requires that both the source and
destination nodes be of the same node type, with the following exceptions:
1. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-MB-E3 to an ILI-S-E3.
2. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI-S-E3 to an ILI-MB-E3.
3. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-MB-E3 to an ILI95-S-E3.
4. It is possible to copy the configuration of an ILI95-S-E3 to an ILI95-MB-E3.

3.16.2 Print Node

This option allows the user to print all available reports for the selected node.

NOTE: A Windows printer must be configured properly to use this option. In addition, the
printout will be made to the printer that has been selected as the "default" in the Windows
Control Panel.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

Part

IV
 S3 Series (Apollo) 93

4 S3 Series (Apollo)
4.1 Basic steps in configuring an S3 Series Panel
4.1.1 Programming node-wide parameters and defaults
There are many global programming options available in the S3 Series system. Most of
these options have been initialized to default settings when the project was created and
initialized. These default settings should be appropriate for a basic S3 Series configuration.
However, any or all of these parameters may be modified to suit the needs of any individual
custom configuration.

To modify any of these settings, select the appropriate icons under the current S3 Series
node in the Project Explorer 56 .

NAC Settings 119

General Settings 109
DACT Options 113

The following settings, located in Project Globals, will affect the S3 Series (Apollo) FACP:
Passwords 35
User Defined Types 36
Miscellaneous Globals 41
Display Priorities 41

The following Regional Settings will affect the S3 Series (Apollo) FACP:
Night/Weekend/Holiday Schedule 43

Finally, there are settings on the Silence Settings 44 and Node Summary 57 screens that
also affect the S3 Series (Apollo) FACP.

After completing globals programming, you're ready to continue with "Programming loop
devices and groups".
4.1.2 Programming loop devices and groups
Each S3 Series (Apollo) FACP can have up to two SLC's. There are 126 total addresses
available for programming on each SLC. Sensors, monitor elements and control elements all
share the address range of 1 - 126.

Each device address has a number of programmable options available. These include
options such as Device Type, Input Group (if the device is a sensor or a monitor element),
Output Group (if the device is a control element), Description Label, etc.

To program the device types and I/O groups for each address, select the Devices screen
from the Project Explorer 56 and then select either the Input Devices 122 (all sensors and
monitor elements) or Output Devices 127 (all control elements) tab at the top of the window.

The entry screens for these types are very similar. The main difference is the list of device
types that are available on each entry screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 94 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

See Input Devices 122 and Output Devices 127 for programming information on these entry
screens.

After completing SLC devices and groups entries, continue to "Entering Labels and
modifying default settings for SLC devices"
4.1.3 Entering labels and modifying default settings for loop devices
To enter labels for each loop device, select either the Input Devices (all sensors and monitor
elements) or Output Devices (all control elements) icon from the Project Explorer 56 .

To enter a label or modify the global default settings for any device, select the appropriate
device from the grid. Labels may be entered for each address in the description label entry
field. Labels can be up to 40 characters in length.

Other fields can also can be modified by address on the entry grid. Click on the following
help links to view programming information for the various device types.

Input Devices 122

Output Devices 127

For a description of the Group I/O concept, see Input/Output Groups

4.1.4 Downloading System Configuration
In order to perform a configuration download to the system, a connection must be made
between the RS-232 port on the PC/Laptop to either the RJ11 connector of any INI-7100
node or to the serial port on an S3 Series FACP, NGA, ANX-SR, ANX-MR or ILI-E3 Series
node that may be present in the system before attempting to download. If an S3 Series
FACP, ANX-SR or ANX-MR is available, the Ethernet port may also be used for downloads
via TCP/IP.

NOTE: Downloads to Standalone 7100 panels or Standalone E3 Series systems may only
be made via the panel's local serial port. Downloads to Standalone S3 Series system may
be made via the panel's local serial port or its Ethernet port.

The following options on the Download screen are applicable to configuration downloads:

Port Options -
Select whether the download should be made via TCP/IP (Ethernet) or RS-232 (Comm).
This option is available only when the selected Gateway is an ANX or S3 Series FACP.

NOTE: It is not possible to download to INI-7100 nodes via Ethernet.

Select Comm Port -

Select the serial port to be used to connect to the system. Available COM ports range from
COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection option is also available. If selected, the
auto-detection will attempt to determine which of the PC's serial ports is connected to an
appropriate node. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct serial port it will be
necessary to manually select the correct port. This selection field is unavailable if the user
has opted to connect to the system via TCP/IP (Ethernet).

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 95

Enter IP Address -
If the user has opted to connect to the system via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the
IP address of the S3 Series FACP, ANX-SR or ANX-MR that is connected to the system.
This selection field is unavailable if the user has opted to connect via RS-232 (Comm).

Download Gateway -
You must select whether your computer is connected to an INI-7100 node, an S3 Series
FACP, an ILI-E3 Series node/NGA or to an ANX. For 7100 Standalone, S3 Series
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects, this field is not available since the PC must be
connected directly to the panel. An auto-detection option is also available. If the
auto-detection fails to determine the correct download gateway the download gateway
selection must be made manually.

NOTE: In order to download to S3 Series or E3 Series nodes such as the NGA and the
ILI-MB-E3 via RS-232, you MUST connect your computer to the serial port of an
E3-compatible node. All other node types can be downloaded from either an INI-7100 or
an E3-compatible node. All node types may be downloaded via the ANX's RS-232 port or
Ethernet port.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

Show CAM Memory Usage -

If this option is selected, CAMWorks will display a screen indicating how much of the
available CAM memory is being used by the current configuration after all of the CAMs for
the current node have been translated.

Save Configuration In Binary Format -

This option, intended only for diagnostic use, saves a binary file containing an exact image
of the target node's configuration database. This option should only be used at the
discretion of Gamewell-FCI Technical Support 932 personnel.

Select Application Type To Download -

In this section of the screen, CAMWorks presents several options for selecting what data to
download to the target panel. In the case of downloading configuration data to the target
panel, the "Configuration" option button must always be selected. The following options
appear when the user elects to perform a configuration download:

Send CAMs - When selected, CAMWorks will download CAMs to the selected node.
Send Device Labels / CAM Text (NGA nodes only) - When selected, CAMWorks
will download SLC device labels or CAM Text messages to the selected node.
Send Virtual Switch Labels (S3 Series FACP and ANX nodes only) - When
selected, CAMWorks will download Virtual Switch labels to the selected node.
Send Configuration - When selected, CAMWorks will download the configuration to
the selected node.
Download Screen Saver (NGA Only) - When selected, CAMWorks will download
images to the NGA for use as a screen saver.
Download Logo (NGA Only) - When selected, CAMWorks will download a user

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 96 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

supplied image that will be displayed on the System Normal screen.

Download -
Click on this button to begin the download. The user will be prompted to enter the system
Level 4 access code before the download will begin. If all goes well, the Download process
will continue until completed. The panel will reset following a successful download.

NOTE: If the system has not been previously configured, you should enter the system
default level 4 password. If a custom level 4 password has already been downloaded to
the panel, then that code should be entered instead.

Close -
Click on this command button to exit this screen.

Validation -
Click on this button to open the Program Validation 49 screen to scan the current project for
known types of configuration errors.

7100 Upload -
Click on this button upload a configuration from a 7100 panel. This function is only available
for 7100 Standalone projects. See this page 870 for more information.
4.1.5 Printing/Viewing configuration data tables
There are two options available for printing configuration files in CAMWorks. To print all
reports at once, right-click the current node icon in the Project Explorer 56 and select Print
Node. To view or print individual reports, click on the current node icon in the Project
Explorer 56 to bring up the Report Viewer window. In this screen, any available report can
be selected for viewing or printing.

4.2 S3 Series - How Do I

4.2.1 Include Output in system General Output List
To place a NAC circuit or Municipal circuit in a General Output List, select the the General
Settings 109 icon the Project Explorer 53 and then select the NAC Settings 119 tab. In the
data entry grid there are checkboxes for each of the General Output Lists. To assign an
output to a list, Click the checkbox to select that item.

To place a Control Element in a General Output List, select the Devices 122 icon from the
Project Explorer 56 and then the Output Devices 127 tab.

NOTE: General Output List assignments are not available for Building Control Element
devices.

4.2.2 Assign specific input to output relationships

To assign specific outputs to be activated by certain initiating devices, Input/Output Groups
must be used.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 97

By assigning individual inputs and outputs to groups the user is able to create relationships
between these groups.

Input devices can be assigned to as many as four input groups (group 1-99, 300-499) in the
Input Devices screen.

SLC output devices may be assigned to as many as four CAM controlled group (group
125-224, 500-599) in the Output Devices screen.

Built-in outputs, such as the Notification Appliances and the Municipal Circuit may be
assigned to as many as four CAM controlled group (group 125-224, 500-599) in the NAC
Settings screen.

NOTE: The E3 Series and S3 Series FACPs do not have any direct linkage
between input groups and output groups. All custom input/output relationships
must be done through Conditional Action Maps (CAMs) 21 .

On S3 Series Standalone systems, the Input/Output Relation 108 screen can be used as
method of creating the CAM expressions. The traditional CAM Output Group 144 screen may
also be be used.
4.2.3 Create a custom display banner for panel
The System ID Label appears on the panel display when the system is in "System Normal"
condition. This label will also appear as a header for any event report that originates from
this node. Any node that prints the event through it's serial port will include this information.

The System ID Label is configured in the Node Summary 57 screen, which is called System
Overview for non-networked projects. Enter the label text in the System ID Label text box.
This label can be up to 19 characters in length and may not be blank. Click on the Save
button to save the entry.
4.2.4 Create my own SLC device types
The E3 Series and S3 Series allow the user to define up to forty User Defined device types.
The first ten are 7100 compatible User Defined Device Types and are restricted to AMM
modules only. The remaining User Defined Device Types allow much greater flexibility.

The User Defined Device Types are configured on a project-level instead of the node-level.
To access these settings, you must access the User Defined Types screen, which may be
found in the Project Globals 35 > Network Settings 35 > User Defined Types 36 tab in The
Ribbon 27 , or by accessing the User Defined Types 62 icon, which is under the Network
Settings 61 icon under Project Globals 61 in the Project Explorer 56 .
4.2.5 Disable downloading for a particular SLC address?
Some projects may have to be completed in phases. CAMWorks allows the user to
configure all of the points in the system and download only those devices that are physically
present in the system at any given time.

The Input Devices and Output devices screens contain an Active field. The Active field
contains an icon that may be toggled by double-clicking or by pressing the space bar when

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 98 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

the field has the focus (the background of the field will be highlighted when the field has the
focus). The icon itself will turn green to indicate that that address is active, or gray to
indicate that the address is inactive. When downloading a configuration, the inactive
devices will be skipped. When the inactive devices are ready to be downloaded, just toggle
the Active icons back to green, and they will be sent to the panel.
4.2.6 Disable DACT-E3
If the DACT-E3 is present in the system, the DACT Settings screen can be used to
configure the DACT-E3. In CAMWorks, the DACT-E3 is enabled automatically. To disable
the DACT-E3, Select the General Settings screen under the S3 Series FACP node icon in
the Project Explorer 53 and then select the DACT Settings tab. Then, uncheck the Enable
DACT checkbox. After completing entry, click on the Save button. The DACT-E3 should now
be disabled.

NOTE: If the Enable DACT option is unchecked, the DACT-E3 is not supervised, and no
event transmissions are attempted. This option must be set to Off (unchecked) for nodes
with no DACT-E3 present.
4.2.7 View selected reports in a window
To view or print individual reports for the current node, select the node's icon in the Project
Explorer 56 . A Report Viewer window will appear in the main area 53 . Select the report of
interest from the drop-down list and then click the Show Report command button.

This feature displays the reports exactly as they will be printed. If the report contains multiple
pages, you can move among the pages by clicking on the Move Next > and the Move
Previous < arrows located at the top of the screen.

To print the report, click on the Printer icon ( ) on the toolbar at the top of the Report
Viewer window.
4.2.8 Create Zone Codes
Zone Coding allows an FACP to produce a distinct coded pattern on it's NAC outputs, based
upon the particular input device or cross zone that caused the alarm condition.

The S3 Series supports up to 63 different codes, each of which may be configured for any
pattern of two, three, or four digits. The digits may range from 1 to 14 pulses. After the
necessary codes are entered in the Zone Code screen (which can be accessed via the Zone
Code icon under the current node's icon in the Project Explorer 56 ), they can be associated
with individual input devices and cross zones in the appropriate entry screen (i.e. Input
Devices and Cross Zones). Multiple inputs may be assigned to run the same code, if
desired, or each input may have a unique code (up to a limit of 63 different codes).

To set the pulses for a particular zone code, simply select the digit in the entry grid and
choose the appropriate number of pulses for each digit from the drop-down list.
4.2.9 Setup a cross zone
The S3 Series provides up to 30 cross zones. There are two types of cross zones available.
One type is groups cross zoning, and the other is point cross zoning.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 99

Point Cross Zone – A Point Cross Zone is a collection of individual points configured into a
virtual cross zone group. Point Cross Zoning provides a two-stage fire alarm condition
where the first alarm in the virtual group initiates an Action condition. The second stage
alarm is triggered when the number of alarms in the virtual cross zone group has reached a
pre-set trigger level (user programmable).

Point Cross Zone Programming:

1.) In the Cross Zone screen, select the desired Cross Zone by clicking on the cross
zone number on the left.
2.) Click on the "..." button under the "Config" column to assign devices to the cross
zone. Click Save and then Close when done.
3.) A selection window will open that will display all devices on the current node that are
eligible to be used for cross zoning. Devices may be selected by placing a check
mark in the selection field (labeled "Sel").
4.) Click the Add button to add the devices to the cross-zone. Devices are removed
from the grid when they are added to the cross zone. Devices can be removed from
the cross zone later if desired.
5.) Click Close to dismiss the Add Devices window.
6.) Select the desired options for each virtual cross zone group. See this page 238 for
more information.

Group Cross Zone – The S3 Series system provides group cross zoning by assigning Input
Groups on S3 Series FACP, ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series nodes directly to a cross
zone. The total number of point cross zone and group cross zone virtual groups is thirty
groups in any mixture. The system will increment the trigger count when any of the
associated input groups are activated.

NOTE: If an individual Cross Zone input is non-latching, each time it activates it will
increase the trigger count. This means that if the input activates, restores and re-activates
it will increment the trigger count twice.

Group Cross Zone Programming:

1.) In the Cross Zone screen, select the desired Cross Zone by clicking on the cross
zone number on the left.
2.) Select the "Group" Cross zone type for each cross zone that is being used as a
group cross zone.
3.) Click on the "..." button under the "Config" column .
4.) Assign the desired Input Groups to the Cross Zone. Click Save and then Close
when done.

NOTE: Both a node and a group number must be specified. The node must be an S3
Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 or ILI95-S-E3.

NOTE: The selected input groups must have devices assigned to it before configuring
cross zoning.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 100 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: Only certain device types are eligible for cross zoning. See the following pages
for information about compatible device types:

S3 Series (System Sensor) Device Types 294

S3 Series (Apollo) Device Types 188

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 545

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Module Device Types 565

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 426

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Element Device Types 429

NOTE: Verification and PAS cannot be mixed with Cross Zoning.

3.) Set the desired trigger level for the cross zone.
4.) Select the desired options for each virtual cross zone group. See this page 238 for
more information.
5.) Click Save to save all of the changes.

NOTE: If a system is to use both by group and by point cross zoning, input devices must
not be shared by both types of cross zoning as this could lead to unexpected results.

Typically, a general fire alarm is activated when the configured trigger level is met.
However, the response to the Cross Zone activation is programmable via the Configure
Cross Zones screen. Regardless of user programming, the node will set bits in its
associated extended system status map for a Pre-alarm on a cross zone and for a Cross
Zone activation.

4.3 S3 Series - Configuration Screens

4.3.1 Miscellaneous
NOTE: This screen appears under the S3 Series FACP only for S3 Series Standalone
projects. For networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Network Settings 61

\Miscellaneous 66 .

The following system-wide settings are configured through the Miscellaneous screen:

Trouble Reminder - If this option is enabled then acknowledged trouble events will be
periodically "unacknowledged". This means that the system's buzzer will be turned back on
and the System Trouble LED will blink as if a new trouble condition were being reported.

Multiple Trouble Acknowledge - Turning this option on will allow up to ten trouble
conditions to be acknowledged with one Trouble Acknowledge command.

Action Condition Acknowledged By - This configuration option selects whether the

Trouble Acknowledge button is used to acknowledge Action (pre-alarm) conditions or the
Alarm Acknowledge button is used to acknowledge Action conditions. This setting defaults
to the Alarm Acknowledge button. This setting is not available when 7100 nodes are

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 101

present in the network.

Walk Test Timeout - The Walk Test timeout will cause the system to automatically cancel
the Walk Test mode if it isn't manually turned off. This value may be (30, 60, 90, 120 or 180
Minutes) .

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.2 SLP Miscellaneous

NOTE: This screen appears only when an S3 Series Standalone project is open.

The SLP Miscellaneous screen incorporates four tabs. There tabs include:

User Defined Types 101

Display Priorities 105
Passwords 107
Night/Weekend/Holiday Schedule 108

4.3.2.1 User Defined Types

NOTE: This screen appears under the S3 Series FACP only for S3 Series Standalone
projects. For networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Network Settings 61

\User Defined Device Types 62 .

The E3 Series and S3 Series FACPs provides a great degree of flexibility for user defined
device types. In the past, the User Defined AMM Types in the 7100 were configured at the
individual node level. This function has been combined with the E3 Series/S3 Series User
Defined Device Types into one configuration screen.

Device types 48-55 are reserved for 7100 User Defined Device Types. In the grid, the
device type number is highlighted in yellow for these device types.

NOTE: These device types can be used with 7100 nodes, ILI-E3 Series nodes and S3
Series (System Sensor) FACPs, but not with ILI95-E3 Series nodes or S3 Series (Apollo)
FACPs.

The options available for each user defined type are as follows:

SLC Type - Select whether this device type should be a System Sensor or Apollo device
type. This selection may or may not be available, depending on the nodes that are present
in the current project.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

102 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: This setting is fixed to "System Sensor" for the 7100 User Defined Device Types.

User Defined Device Type - This identifies what the physical device type is for this user
defined type. The following device types are available:

Available User Defined Device Types for the 7100:

User Defined Device Type Description Allowed Response Types

AMM Module Addressable Monitor See AMM Modules.

Module, used to monitor any
normally open contact
device.

Available Physical Device Types for the ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3 and S3 Series (System Sensor)
FACPs:

User Defined Device Description Allowed in CLIP Allowed Response

Type Mode Types
No Device Used to indicate Yes See No Device.
there is no device
type configured.
Ion Sensor Analog/addressable Yes See Ion Sensors.
Ion smoke detectors,
such as the ASD-
IL2F.
Photo Sensor Analog/addressable Yes See Photo Sensors.
Photoelectric smoke
detectors, such as
the ASD-PL2F.
Thermal Sensor Analog/addressable Yes See Thermal
Thermal sensors, Sensors.
such as the ATD-L2F
(standard
temperature), ATD-
HL2F (high
temperature) or
ATD-RL2F (rate of
rise).
Acclimate Sensor Analog/addressable Yes * See Acclimate
multi-criteria sensor, Sensors.
such as MCS-
Acclimate2F.
AMM Module Addressable Monitor Yes See AMM Modules.
Module, used to

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 103

monitor any normally

open contact device.
Signal Module Notification Yes See NAC Modules.
Appliance/Speaker
Circuit Control
Module, such as the
AOM-2SF or MMO-
6SF
Form-C Module Form-C Dry Contact Yes See Form-C Modules
Module, such as .
AOM-2RF or MMO-
6RF.
CLIP Laser Sensor Analog/Addressable Yes See CLIP Laser
High Sensitivity Sensors.
NOTE: This device Photoelectric smoke
type is supported in detectors, such as
both Velociti and ASD-LS.
CLIP modes, even
though the device
itself only supports
CLIP mode.
Photo/Thermal Analog/addressable Yes See Photo/Thermal
Sensor Photoelectric/ Sensors.
Thermal sensor,
such as ASD-PTL2F.
Zone Module Addressable Monitor Yes See Zone Modules.
Module, such as
AMM-4SF, used to
monitor certain two-
wire conventional
smoke detectors.
See Gamewell-FCI
Compatibility
Addendum (P/N:
9000-0427) for more
details.
Manual Station Addressable Manual Yes See Manual Station
Module Station, such as the Modules.
MS-7AF.
Intelligent Beam Analog/addressable No See Intelligent Beam
Detector Beam Photoelectric Detectors.
Smoke Detector,
such as ABD-2F.
Vel Laser Sensor Analog/Addressable No See Verlociti Laser
High Sensitivity Sensors.
Photoelectric smoke
detectors.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

104 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

4-Warn Sensor Velociti Series No See 4-Warn Sensors

combination smoke, .
carbon monoxide,
temperature and
flame detector.
Photo/CO Sensor Velociti Series multi- No See Photo/CO
criteria sensor, with Sensors.
carbon monoxide
detection and
reporting, such as
the MCS-COF.
Intelligent FAAST System Sensor No See Intelligent
Sensor Intelligent Aspirating FAAST Sensors.
(Single-Channel) Smoke Detector
Intelligent FAAST System Sensor No See Intelligent
Sensor Intelligent Multi- FAAST Sensors.
(Multi-Channel) Channel Aspirating
Smoke Detector

Available User Defined Device Types for the ILI95-MB-E3, ILI95-S-E3 and S3 Series
(Apollo) FACPs:

User Defined Device Type Description Allowed Response Types

No Device Used to indicate there is no See No Device.
device type configured.
Ion Sensor Analog/addressable Ion See Ion Sensors.
smoke detectors, such as
the XP95-I.
Optical Sensor Analog/addressable See Photo Sensors.
Photoelectric smoke
detectors, such as the XP95-
P.
Temperature Sensor Analog/addressable Thermal See Thermal Sensors.
sensors, such as the XP95-
T.
Multi-Sensor Analog/addressable multi- See Multi-Sensors.
criteria sensor, such as the
XP95-M.
PID-95 Point Identification Device See Point Identification
used to monitor any normally Devices.
open contact device.
SCE-95 Signal Control Element used See Signal Control Elements
to control Notification .
Appliance Circuits.
RCE-95 Relay Control Element that See Relay Control Elements.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 105

provides one Form-C Dry

BCE-95
MS-95 / MS-95 T
CZI-95 (Non-Interrupting)
CZI-95 (Interrupting)
Contact.
Building Control Element See Building Control
that provides two Form-C Elementsol Elements.
Dry Contacts for On/Off/Auto
(HOA) operation.
Addressable Manual Station. See Manual Station
Elements.
Conventional Zone Interface, See Conventional Zone
used to monitor certain two- Interfaces.
wire conventional smoke
detectors. See Gamewell-
FCI Compatibility Addendum
(P/N: 9000-0427) for more
details.
Conventional Zone Interface, See Conventional Zone
used to monitor certain two- Interfaces.
wire conventional smoke
detectors. See Gamewell-
FCI Compatibility Addendum
(P/N: 9000-0427) for more
details.

System Response Type - Selects the desired response to an activation from this device
type. See tables above for information about the available response types for each physical
device type.

Description - The text that will be associated with this User Defined Type. This will be used
for both on-screen and printed event reports. This description may be up to fourteen
characters in length.

Silenceable - This option applies only when the physical device type is set to Signal Module,
Form-C Module, SCE-95 or RCE-95. This indicates whether this device type can be
silenced or not.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.2.2 Display Priorities

NOTE: This screen appears under the S3 Series FACP only for S3 Series Standalone
projects. For networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Network Settings 61

\Display Priorities 67 .

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

106 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: These settings apply to S3 Series FACP, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3 Series
and NGA nodes only.

The S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3 Series and NGA displays conform to UL 864 9th
edition and UL 2572 1st edition event display requirements. The most significant change
from the 7100 display is that concurrent events do not automatically scroll. Instead, the
display always shows the earliest (oldest) event of the highest priority present in the system
(or region), unless the user scrolls the events manually.

Since events do not scroll, the behavior of the display depends entirely on what priority the
system assigns to each event. These priorities can be modified in this screen. Note that
this only configures how events are DISPLAYED. To configure a different system response,
a User Defined Type 36 should be used instead.

Each system condition listed has both an Acknowledged and Unacknowledged priority.
Typically, the Unacknowledged priority for each condition is of a higher priority than its
Acknowledged priority. The system has e ight different priority levels, ranging from Level 1
to Level 8. Level 1 is the lowest priority level, while Level 8 is the highest priority level.

The following system conditions may be assigned new display priorities:

ALARM - Fire Alarm Conditions

CO/GAS ALARM - CO/Gas alarm conditions.
MNS ALARM - Mass Notification alarm conditions.
ACTION - Action (pre-alarm) Conditions. This applies to multi-level devices, Cross Zones
and other pre-alarm conditions.
SUPERVISORY- All Supervisory Off-Normal and Tamper conditions.
MNS SUPERVISORY - All Supervisory Off-Normal and Tamper conditions related to
mass-notification devices.
TROUBLE - All System Trouble conditions.
MNS TROUBLE - All System Trouble conditions conditions related to mass-notification
devices

NOTE: The priority settings for MNS Alarm, MNS Trouble and MNS Supervisory only
affect NGA nodes.

These settings are automatically configured for ALL S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3
Series and NGA nodes in the system, therefore all S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3 Series

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 107

and NGA nodes will have the same set of display priorities once they have all been
downloaded.

To change a priority, click and drag its slider and move it to the left or to the right. Moving a
slider to the right gives the event a higher priority, while sliding it to the left gives it a lower
priority. The currently selected priority level is displayed to the right of the slider.

NOTE: To revert all Display Priority settings to their UL approved settings, click either
the "MNS Overrides Fire" or "Fire Overrides MNS" button at the top of the window.

NOTE: These settings should be left to their default settings, unless there is a
specific need to change them.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.2.3 Passwords

NOTE: This screen appears under the S3 Series FACP only for S3 Series Standalone
projects. For networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Network Settings 61

\Passwords 61 .

The system allows four levels of password access to prevent unauthorized modification of
critical system functions. In addition, the system supports a maximum of five different
passwords for each of the four access levels to provide for unique identification of up to five
different users. Each password must be numeric and may range from (000001 - 999999).
The value of 000000 is not allowed.

There are four levels of access granted by the system. These are Level 1, Level 2, Level 3,
and Level 4. Level 4 grants the user the greatest amount of access, while Level 1 grants the
least amount of access.

NOTE: The Level 4 Password may not be set to any of the standard default passwords
(111111, 222222, 333333 or 444444.)

There are five different users available, labeled as Users 1-5. This allows the user to create
five different sets of passwords (one for each access level.) The system's history log will
indicate which user gained access to the system when unique passwords are assigned to
each user.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 108 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: Even though CAMWorks requires the user to assign a non-default Level 4
password, it is still highly recommended to change the remaining system passwords to
non-default values.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.2.4 Night/Weekend/Holiday Schedule

NOTE: This screen appears under the S3 Series FACP only for S3 Series Standalone
projects. For networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Regional Settings
70 \Night/Weekend/Holiday Schedule 70 .

In S3 Series systems, you can optimize the sensitivity of the sensors for particular times
during the day, on weekends and on holidays. This can be used to increase sensitivity for
those times when a building is not in use. When the system's real-time clock reaches a
configured time or day, the system will automatically begin to use the Night Sensitivity
settings configured for each sensor. In addition, any Fire alarm that occurs during this time
will activate the General Night Alarm output list as well as both SSM bit 440 (Day Alarm or
Night Alarm) and SSM bit 441 (Night Alarm.)

NOTE: These settings affect the fire alarm response only.

Night Schedule - Select Night Start and Night Stop operation times from the drop-down
lists. During the programmed times, the sensors will operate with the defined Night
Sensitivity settings.

Weekend Schedule - Define weekend days for night sensitivity operation by checking the
appropriate days.

Holiday Schedule - Configure Holidays for Night sensitivity operation by clicking on the
calendar icon ( ). A calendar will be displayed. Select the holiday by clicking on the day of
the month. The user can move through the calendar by clicking on the arrow icons located
at the top of the calendar. The user may enter up to sixteen holidays. Dates can be cleared
by placing a check in the "Sel" column next to the appropriate holiday and clicking the Clear
button at the bottom of the window.
4.3.3 Input Output Relation
NOTE: This screen appears only when an S3 Series Standalone project is open.

The Input/Output Relation Screen is a new way to easily build CAM 21 expressions that link
together input and output devices. The screen is composed of three sections:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 109

1.) A list of all input devices. The list includes the node number, device address, device type
and all groups assigned to those devices.

2.) A set of command buttons labeled "OR", "AND", "NOT", "(" and ")".

3.) A list all output groups assigned to output groups on this node (if the "ALL" tab is
selected), or just those that already have CAMs written to them (if the "Configured" tab) is
selected.

The following tasks must be performed before one can build input/output relationships on
this screen.

1.) Assign one or more input devices of any type. These input devices must have at least
one input group assigned to them.

2.) Assign one or more output devices of a non-silenceable type to this node. Like the input
devices, each output device must have at least one output group assigned.

Once those two steps are taken care of, it is easy to begin the process of configuring
relationships between the input and output devices. To start, select the desired output
group from the list at the bottom of the screen. Once that is done, the row that contains the
selected output group will be highlighted yellow.

Then, select one of the input groups from the grid at the top of the screen. The term "NxGy"
will appear appended to the CAM expression for the selected output group. The "x" and "y"
numbers will vary based on the input device and input group chosen.

Next, select the desired logic operator (AND, OR or NOT) using one of the buttons.

This process can be repeated until the complete CAM expression has been built.

At any point, the user can manually edit any of the CAM expressions built on this screen
either directly on this screen (by clicking on the CAM expression in the list at the bottom of
the screen) or via the CAM Output Groups 144 screen.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.4 General Settings

The General Settings screen incorporates four tabs. These tabs include:

General Settings 110

DACT Settings 113
NAC Settings 119
Zone Code 121

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 110 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

4.3.4.1 General Settings

This entry screen contains various system options that pertain to this S3 Series (Apollo)
FACP node. The entry fields are grouped as follows:

General Settings -

RS-232 Baud Rate - Sets the baud rate (measured in bits per second) used
by this node to communicate with serial devices. Selections range from
115,200 BPS down to 1,200 BPS.

NOTE: All Gamewell-FCI supplied software communicates with the S3

Series at 115,200 BPS. Setting SW1-Switch #5 on the S3 Series main
board to the ON position sets the serial port baud rate back to 115,200
BPS overriding custom programming.

RS-232 Printer Supervision Test Interval - As a part of the supervision of

the node's serial port, the system can print out test messages on a periodic
rate. This option allows you to change the frequency of this test from 1 hour
up to 21 hours. Selecting Disable will turn this feature off.

Enable Supervision of RS-232 Port For Use With - This setting should be
set according to what type of device is normally connected to the node's
serial port. This setting should be set to "Printer" if a printer is connected to
this node's serial port and trouble reporting for printer out of paper or printer
offline conditions is desirable. Set this option to "None" if no printer is
connected.

SLC Class A - Select this if the SLC loops are wired Class A (Style 6 or
Style 7).

PAS Night ByPass - If this setting is turned on, then devices configured for
Positive Alarm Sequence will automatically go into alarm during the defined
Night hours as well as the defined Weekend and Holiday days.

Inhibit Reset If Any Alarm Is Still Active -

When this option is enabled, the system will not allow a reset to take place if
the system is in alarm condition unless the device that originated the alarm is
no longer reporting an alarm condition. For example, if a manual station
initiated the alarm, the system cannot be reset until the manual station is
reset. In the case of a sensor, if the amount of smoke or heat detected by
the sensor decreases to below the device's alarm threshold the system will
reset. Otherwise, the system will not reset.

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to S3 Series Standalone projects.

Municipal Circuit is used for Releasing Service - When enabled, the word
"RELEASE" will be appended to displayed event reports when the Municipal

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 111

Circuit is activated. In addition, bit #414 in the System Status Map will be
true when the Municipal Circuit is activated. Finally, a Node 0 Regional
Releasing Status bit will be true if this node belongs to Region 24 0 - Region
24 31.

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone applications, the Regional Releasing

Status bit is not available.

Fast CAM Timers - When enabled, the CAM timers have a resolution of
one-half second. When disabled, CAM timers have a one-second resolution.

NOTE: Be aware that if a timer is defined using Advanced CAM

Programming 920 , the desired timer interval must be multiplied by two when
this setting is enabled.

Unique Buzzer Indication for Supervisory Conditions - When enabled,

the panel will chirp its buzzer in a different pattern for unacknowledged
supervisory conditions and unacknowledged alarm conditions. Compatible
firmware must be installed in all connected displays in order for this option to
affect their buzzers.

Inhibit Reset & Silence Following First Alarm - When enabled, the
system may not be silenced or reset for sixty seconds following an initial
alarm.

LED Blink -

On - Checking this box will turn on the normal condition blinking for the
SLC devices LED's.

Off - Checking this box will turn off the normal condition blinking for the
SLC devices LED's.

Delays/TimeOut -

NOTE: These delay and timing functions are only available if the NAC(s)
are NOT assigned to CAMable output groups.

NAC Cut Off Delay - This option allows the NAC circuits to be
automatically silenced after a set period of time. Note that this delay
begins after the silence inhibit delay ends. This setting may range from
No CutOff (meaning no delay is applied) to fifty (50) minutes (in five (5)
minute increments).

Silence Inhibit Delay - This setting will prevent the system from being
silenced after an alarm. This setting may range from No delay to
twenty-one (21) minutes (in two (2) minute increments).

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

112 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Sequential Restart Delay - Specifies the number of seconds between

deactivation of sequential-restart AOM devices during a sequential restart.
This setting may range from No delay to twenty (20) seconds (in one (1)
second increments).

PAS Acknowledge Time - Select the time interval (in seconds) that the
panel will allow the user to acknowledge the alarm. If the fire alarm is not
acknowledged within this time interval the panel will cancel Positive Alarm
Sequence and go straight into fire alarm. This setting may range from 1 to
6553 seconds. This setting defaults to 15 seconds.

PAS Investigate Time - Select the time interval (in seconds) that the
panel will allow the user to investigate the source of the fire alarm once it
has been acknowledged. If the panel is not reset within this time interval
the system will go into fire alarm. However, if a subsequent fire alarm
occurs before this interval times out the system will go into fire alarm,
canceling the Positive Alarm Sequence. This setting may range from 1 to
6553 seconds. This setting defaults to 180 seconds.

Number of Annunciators/Displays -

LCD 7100 Annunciators - This sets the number of remote LCD-7100 displays
connected to this S3 Series FACP node. Up to five LCD-7100 annunciators
may be connected to an S3 Series FACP.

LCD E3 Displays - This option sets the total number of LCD-E3

keypad/displays that are connected to this S3 Series FACP node. The system
allows a maximum of six LCD-E3 displays per S3 Series FACP.

NOTE: LCD-SLP annunciators are configured on the Annunciators 141

screen.

Log Settings -

Enable Re-report Failed Logins - When enabled, a report of recent

access failed events will be printed to the panel's serial port upon a
successful login by a user. If the access is granted via CAMWorks, the
report will be displayed from within CAMWorks. The report will include
both the current and most recent previous access granted event as well as
all access failed events in between.

Log ASM/ANU/LCD-SLP Switch Activations - When enabled, the

system will produce a logged event when ASM-16, ANU-48 or LCD-SLP
switches on this node are activated and deactivated. These logged events
will be printed by a printer connected to this node, other nodes in the same
region as this node or on global reporting nodes, but will not be displayed.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 113

These events can be viewed on-screen using the View Log menu.

NOTE: This setting requires all ILI and ILI95 nodes to have Version
3.2 firmware or later. All NGA nodes must have Version 3.10 firmware
or later. All ANX nodes must have Version 1.30 firmware or later. S3
Series FACP nodes require Version 1.10 firmware or later.

NOTE: Logged switch activations will not be reported on INI-7100

nodes.

NOTE: This setting is applicable to S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3 and

ILI95-MB-E3 node types only.

Multilevel Percentage -

Alert Percentage - Sets the percent of alarm at which a multilevel Ion or Photo
sensor will issue an Alert condition.

Action Percentage - Sets the percent of alarm at which a multilevel Ion or

Photo sensor will issue an Action condition. This must be set to a higher
percentage than the Multilevel Alert Percentage.

Default Verification Settings -

Smoke Detector - This option selects the default sensor verification setting. It
can be set for automatic verification (Verify) or Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS)
or neither (None). When configuring sensors, they can be set to accept this
default setting or use a setting that overrides this default setting.

Pull Station - This option selects the default manual station verification setting.
It can be set for Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS) or no verification (None).
When configuring manual stations, they can be set to accept this default setting
or use a setting that overrides this default setting.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.4.2 DACT Settings

General Settings -
Enable DACT - This setting is ON by default and enables
programming and supervision of the DACT-E3. Turn this setting
OFF if no DACT-E3 is connected. When disabled, all remaining
DACT configuration options on this screen are disabled.

NOTE: The system will report a DACT Missing trouble if this

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

114 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

setting is turned ON and no DACT-E3 is connected.

DACT Reporting In order to prevent "runaway" DACT situations,

Limits - such as in "Trouble/Restore" loops, event
reporting limits are normally configured to limit
the number of events that are reported by the
DACT.

Once an event reporting limit is reached the

DACT will not continue to report events until
either the panel is reset or until eight hours
have passed since the first DACT report of
any event type on the particular day. When the
reset or timeout occurs the panel will begin
reporting all types of events again.

The default values may be overridden as

follows:

Max # of Alarm Reports - This setting

configures the total number of fire alarm and
CO/Gas alarm reports that may be issued per
eight hour period by the DACT. This may be
set in the range from 5 to 315 reports per day
(in 5 step increments) or Unlimited. The
default setting is Unlimited.

Max Trouble - This setting configures the total

number of trouble reports that may be issued
per day by the DACT. This may be set in the
range from 5 to 155 reports per eight hour
period (in 5 step increments) or Unlimited.
The default setting is 10.

Max Supervisories - This setting configures

the total number of supervisory reports that
may be issued per day by the DACT. This
may be set in the range from 5 to 155 reports
per eight hour period (in 5 step increments) or
Unlimited. The default setting is 10.

NOTE: The DACT will not report events of a

given category once a DACT Reporting Limit
has been reached (such as 10 troubles
within an eight hour period). The DACT will
begin reporting events of a given category
again eight hours after the last event of a
given category has been reported or after
the . For example, if the "Max Trouble"
setting is set to 10, the DACT will begin

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 115

reporting troubles again eight hours after the

tenth trouble was reported.

DACT Report
Format -

Use Custom (per-device) reporting codes -

When enabled, the DACT-E3 will report the
node number and a custom three-digit code
(001-899) assigned to each point by the user.
If a device does not have a code assigned, the
DACT-E3 will use the standard reporting format
for events that originate from the device.

NOTE: This setting only affects reports for

events that originate from compatible S3
Series FACP, NGA and ILI-E3 Series nodes.
Event reports from other node types will be in
the standard format.

NOTE: On standalone systems, the group

number (Tens and One's digit only) will be
reported instead of the Node number.

Use Standard (per node/per group)

reporting codes - When enabled, the
DACT-E3 will report the node number
(networked systems) or group number
(standalone systems) in addition to a one digit
event type code. This format is similar to that
used by the 7100.

NOTE: On standalone systems, only the

Tens and Ones digit of the group number is
transmitted via the DACT-E3. If more precise
reporting is required, Custom reporting codes
may be used instead.

DACT Account
Options -
There are two DACT accounts available for programming. Each
account has the following programmable options:

Format - The available formats are: SIA DCS 8, SIA DCS 20,
ADEMCO Contact ID, 4/2 1400Hz, 3/1 1400Hz, 3/1 2300Hz, and
4/2 2300 Hz. Select one from the drop-down list.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

116 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Report Alarm - Select Alarm event reporting option from

drop-down list, either OFF, CAN, or MUST.

Report Trouble - Select Trouble event reporting option from

drop-down list, either OFF, CAN, or MUST.

Report Tests - Select Test event reporting option from drop-down

list, either OFF, CAN, or MUST.

Report Supv - Select Supervisory event reporting option from

drop-down list, either OFF, CAN, or MUST.

Account Attempt - This option selects how many times the DACT
will attempt to connect with this account before giving up and
switching to the other account.

Account # - Enter the assigned account ID number in this field.

This number may be up to six digits in length.

NOTE: Not all of the supported reporting formats can actually

utilize the full six digits that the panel provides. Leading zeroes
must be entered for all account numbers that are less than six
digits. If more digits are entered than the selected reporting
format allows, only the least significant digits are transmitted.
The chart below indicates the maximum number of digits provided
for the account number in each of the supported formats.

Reporting Format Maximum Length of Account

Number
SIA DCS 8 / SIA DCS 20 6
ADEMCO Contact ID 4
4/2 1400 Hz / 4/2 2300 Hz 4
3/1 1400 Hz / 3/1 2300 Hz 3

CIC # - Enter dialing prefix for Account. The maximum number of

characters allowed is eight. This field is typically used if an access
code for a long distance carrier is required, or if certain calling
features, such as call waiting, need to be temporarily disabled
during the call. The maximum number of characters allowed is
eight.

NOTE: Besides the digits 0-9, the following special characters

may also be used:

Special Character Description

* Standard "*" key. May only be
used if Tone dialling is being
used.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 117

# Standard "#" key. May only be

used if Tone dialling is being
used.
, Inserts a two (2) second pause
in the dialing sequence.
@ Instructs the DACT to wait until
a dial tone can be detected.
This option should only be used
if the DACT is connected to a
telephone system that is
compatible with North American
standards.

Phone # - Enter phone number for the account. The maximum

number of characters allowed is sixteen.

NOTE: Besides the digits 0-9, the following special characters

may also be used:

Special Character Description

* Standard "*" key. May only be
used if Tone dialling is being
used.
# Standard "#" key. May only be
used if Tone dialling is being
used.
, Inserts a two (2) second pause
in the dialing sequence.
@ Instructs the DACT to wait until
a dial tone can be detected.
This option should only be used
if the DACT is connected to a
telephone system that is
compatible with North American
standards.

NOTE: If the MUST option is selected on both accounts for the

same report type (Alarms, Troubles, Supervisories), the
DACT-E3 will report events using both accounts. If this is not the
desired behavior, select the CAN option for one of the accounts.

DACT Phone Line

Options -
There are two DACT phone lines available for programming, Line
#1 and Line #2. There are two programmable options for each
phone line as follows:

Dialing Mode - Available options are: Tone or USA Rotary(40/60),

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

118 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

USA Rotary(40/60) Only, Tone Only, Tone or European

Rotary(33/67), and European Rotary(33/67) Only. Select the dialing
mode for line from the drop-down list.

Line Monitor - Line monitor is used to enable supervision of the

phone lines connected to the DACT. The DACT supervises the
phone lines in three ways:

1.) It measures the on-hook voltage coming from the phone

company.
2.) It periodically takes the phone line off-hook, measures the
off-hook voltage and puts the line back on-hook.

NOTE: The system will issue a Phone Line trouble if the DACT
measures an incorrect off-hook or on-hook voltage and/or is
unable to take the line off-hook.

3.) It will enable sending test signals to the configured accounts.

NOTE: The Line Monitor option must be set to ON to enable the

automatic Phone Line Test Time.

NOTE: The system makes a distinction between a "Line" and an

"Account". The system considers a "Line" to be a physical
twisted pair cable that connects the DACT to the telephone
company. The "Account" is the telephone number that the DACT
dials to report events to the designated central monitoring station.
The DACT will use either phone line to communicate to either
account.

DACT Test/Timing -
AC Fault Reporting Delay - Set number of hours to delay report of
AC failure. The delay may range from 1 to 31 hours.

Tests Per Day - Specifies the time interval between subsequent

tests after the first phone line test. 1 = 24 hours, 2 = 12 hours, 3 =
8 hours, and 4 = 6 hours. Select the number of tests per day from
the drop-down list.

First Phone Line Test - Specify the time of the first phone line
dial-out test each day. Test is enabled if either line has its Line
Monitor set to ON. Select phone line test time Hour and Minute
from drop-down lists for each item.

NOTE: The hour of the first phone line test can be configured as
follows, based on the number of tests per day.

Number of tests per day Hours allowed for first phone

line test

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 119

1 0-23
2 0-11
3 0-7
4 0-5

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.4.3 NAC Settings

This screen contains all settings that pertain to the panel's Notification Appliance Circuits,
the Municipal Circuit and the Coded Patterns used by the NAC's.

The following options are available for the Notification Appliance Circuits and the Municipal
Circuit:

Allow enable/disable of municipal circuit via display menus - When this option is
checked, users may manually enable or disable this node's built-in municipal circuit via the
front panel menus on the LCD-SLP, LCD-E3 or NGA. This option is unchecked by default.

NOTE: Enabling this option violates UL 864 9th edition.

Silenceable - Check this option to make this output device silenceable from the front panel.
(This option is not available for the Municipal Circuit).

Coded - Check this option to enable coding for this output device. (This option is not
available for the Municipal Circuit).

Sync - Check this option to enable synchronization of notification appliances connected to

this circuit. (This option is not available for the Municipal Circuit).

NOTE: NAC Circuits may not be configured for Coded and Sync operation at the same
time.

Day Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Day Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into afire alarm condition during the defined
day period, this list of outputs will be activated.

Night Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Night Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into fire alarm condition during the defined
night period, this list of outputs will be activated.

CO/Gas Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default CO/Gas Alarm
list. When any initiating device in the system goes into a CO or Gas alarm condition, this list
of outputs will be activated.

Action - Check this option to place this output in the system default Action list. When an
input defined as Multilevel reaches the programmed "Action" threshold, this list of outputs

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

120 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

will be activated.

Supv (Supervisory) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Supervisory
list. When any supervisory device in the system goes into an Off Normal condition, this list of
outputs will be activated.

WT Drill (Walk Test/Drill) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Walk
Test/Drill list. This list of outputs is activated for audible walk test or during a Fire Drill.

Trouble - Check this option to place this output in the system default Trouble list. When
there is a trouble condition in the system, this list of outputs will be activated.

Output Group(s) - The NACs and Municipal circuit can belong to as many as four output
groups. These groups range from 125 to 224 and 500-599 and are controlled by CAM logic.

NOTE: The third and fourth Output Group assignments may also be assigned to Disable
Type Tags, which range from 600 to 699. See this page 196 for more information on the
Group Disable feature.

Maufact. Sync Type - In order to synchronize notification appliances, the notification

appliance device type must be configured. The available device types are System Sensor,
Cooper-Wheelock, Gentex and Faraday.

Device Silence Option - When synchronized NAC's are silenced the system can take one
of two possible actions:

· Horn Only - Only the horns will be silenced when this option is selected.
· Horn and Strobe - Both horns and strobes will be silenced when this option is selected.

NOTE: If the Horn-only silence option is used, DO NOT silence the NAC circuit using
CAMs. Doing so will cause the circuit to completely turn off. Instead, use the
"Silenceable" checkbox to enable silencing of the NAC circuit.

The NAC Settings screen also includes the following Coded Patterns settings:

NOTE: The Coded Patterns section of the screen will appear disabled (grayed out) if
none of the Notification Appliance Circuits are configured for coded operation.

The user may set a different coded pattern for each of five system conditions. These coded
patterns selections apply only to the onboard NACS, and only if configured for coded
operation. Control elements cannot be coded.

To choose a coded pattern, click on the drop-down list for each condition and select one of
the available options. The default setting for each condition is Steady.

The available codes are Steady, March Time 60 BPM, March Time 120 BPM, Temporal
Pattern, California Code, and Coded 4's.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 121

The four system conditions are:

Day Alarm - Selected code will run when a fire alarm condition occurs and the system is in
the Day operating hours.
Night Alarm - Selected code will run when a fire alarm condition occurs and the system is in
the Night operating hours.
Action - Selected code will run when a pre-alarm condition has been activated.
Supervisory - Selected code will run when a supervisory device goes off-normal.
CO/Gas Alarm - Selected code will run when a CO or gas alarm occurs.

NOTE: The CO/Gas Alarm coded pattern is set to Coded 4's by default. All other
coded patterns are set to steady by default.

In addition to the four system conditions listed above, a fifth condition called "Post Code" is
available. This setting determines the code that the NAC circuits will run after zone coding
has completed. Any of the standard codes listed above may be used as a post-code. The
post-code may be enabled via the "NACs After Last Code" option on the General Settings
screen.

See this page 121 for more information about Zone Code options.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.4.4 Zone Code

Zone Coding allows an FACP to produce a distinct coded pattern on its NAC outputs, based
upon the particular input device or cross zone that caused the alarm condition.

The S3 Series supports up to 63 different codes, each of which may be configured for any
pattern of two, three, or four digits. The digits may range from 1 to 14 pulses. After the
necessary codes are entered in the Zone Code table (in the Zone Code screen), they can be
associated with individual input devices and cross zones in the appropriate entry screen (i.e.
Input Devices and Cross Zones). Multiple inputs may be assigned to run the same code, if
desired, or each input may have a unique code (up to a limit of 63 different codes).

To set the pulses for a particular zone code, simply select the digit in the entry grid and
choose the appropriate number of pulses for each digit from the drop-down list.

The following Zone Code settings are also available:

Zone Code Speed - Selects the speed of the zone coding, 60 beats per minute or 120
beats per minute.

Rounds per Zone Code - Selects how many times each code runs. This setting can be for
either three or four runs.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 122 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NACs after Last Code - This setting indicates what state the NAC circuits will be in after the
last zone code runs. This can be set to either Off or Post Code (which allows a standard
code or steady operation.) See this page 119 for more information.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.5 Devices
The Devices screen incorporates two tabs. These tabs include:

Input Devices 122

Output Devices 127

4.3.5.1 Input Devices

The input devices screen is used to configure all sensors and monitor elements connected
to an S3 Series (Apollo) FACP node.

At the very top of the screen is a field labeled "Show Devices". This field allows the user to
filter the list of devices in the grid below to show all devices, all Ion sensors, all Photo
sensors, all Thermal sensors or all Monitor Elements. Once a selection is made,
CAMWorks will automatically filter the list.

Below the "Show Devices" field is a large grid that displays all of the input devices that are
configured, based on the filter setting above. The following are the configurable settings for
Input Devices that appear in the grid.

Sel - Place a check in this field and click the Delete button to remove the device from this
address. Multiple devices may be selected if desired.

Active - To disable Downloading for a particular address, double-click or press the space
bar within this field to turn it grey. To re-enable the device, repeat the process to make the
field green.

Description - Enter a location description for the current address. This label will appear as
the identifier for this address when any event occurs at this address. The maximum number
of characters for this label is 40.
NOTE: Any part of the description text can be copied to the Windows clipboard by
highlighting the text and pressing Ctrl-C. The text can then be copied to the description
field of another address by selecting that field and pressing Ctrl-V.

Input Group Numbers - To modify one of the four numbers, enter the group (1-99,
300-499) number in the Group field. (Outputs assigned to this group will be shown in the list
at the bottom of the screen). If you are unclear on I/O groups concepts, see Help topic
Input/Output Functionality.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 123

NOTE: While the S3 Series does allow for multiple input groups for each device, should
a trouble condition occur on a device only the first group assigned to the device will set
its respective Trouble SSM bit.

WARNING: Group 0, which really means "No Group Assignment", may be assigned to
input devices. There is no bit in the System Status Map for Group 0. Therefore, no
custom I/O relationships may be created for an input device if all of its Input Group
assignments are set to Group 0.

NOTE: When an input device produces a verification, PAS, cross zone or multilevel
pre-alarm, only the first group assigned to the device will be activated. Once the device
produces a fire alarm response alarm groups will be activated (see note in blue below).
For cross zone alarms, only the first group assigned will be activated upon the
pre-alarm. The rest of the groups assigned to the device will not activate. Instead, the
groups assigned to the cross zone will activate when the cross zone goes into alarm.

NOTE: The group assignment fields are color coded for device types that produce the
following response types:

· CO Alarm Response (user-defined PID-95 and/or CZI-95 elements)

· Gas Alarm Response (user-defined PID-95 and/or CZI-95 elements)

The colors are as follows:

Color Description
BLUE Groups colored BLUE will activate upon a CO or Gas alarm condition
from the device.
NO COLOR If any of the other group columns are color coded for this device, the
group assigned to this column will not activate.

NOTE: Action (pre-alarm) conditions and supervisory conditions will only activate the
input group assigned to first group column.

NOTE: The third and fourth Input Group assignments may also be assigned to Disable
Type Tags, which range from 600 to 699. See this page 434 for more information on the
Group Disable feature.

To the right of the grid is the Properties window. The properties include most of the
configuration settings for the device as described below.

NOTE: The settings shown in the Properties window are for the device that is currently
highlighted in the grid.

Verify - To change the verification setting for a particular address, select a new option from
the drop-down list in this field. Setting this field to "Verify" enables the automatic verification,
while setting this option to "PAS" enables Positive Alarm Sequence. Setting this field to

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

124 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

"None" disables verification for this device.

NOTE: Only certain device types are eligible for verification and/or PAS. See the
following pages for information about compatible device types:

S3 Series (Apollo) Sensor Device Types 188

S3 Series (Apollo) Element Device Types 191

S3 Series (System Sensor) Sensor Device Types 294

S3 Series (System Sensor) Module Device Types 314

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 545

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Module Device Types 565

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 426

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Element Device Types 429

NOTE: Verification and PAS cannot be mixed with Cross Zoning.

Day Alarm - Selecting this option will cause this input device to activate outputs that are
configured for the General Fire Alarm Day list.
NOTE: This option is not available if this input device is not a Fire Alarm input.

Night Alarm - Selecting this option will cause this input device to activate outputs that are
configured for the General Fire Alarm Night list.
NOTE: This option is not available if this input device is not a Fire Alarm input.

CO/Gas Alarm - Selecting this option will cause this input device to activate outputs that are
configured for the General CO/Gas Alarm list.
NOTE: This option is not available if this input device is not a CO/Gas Alarm input.

Supv - Selecting this option will cause this input device to activate outputs that are
configured for the General Supervisory List.
NOTE: This option is not available if this input device is not a Supervisory input.

Trouble - Selecting this option will cause this input device to activate outputs that are
configured for the General Trouble List when the device experiences a fault condition.

Action - Selecting this option will cause this input device to activate outputs that are
configured for the General Action List when the device goes into a pre-alarm condition.
NOTE: This option is not available if this input device is not a Fire Alarm input.

Zone Code - An optional coded pattern may be configured for each address. These patterns
are configured in the Zone Code entry screen. To choose a Zone code pattern, highlight the
Zone Code entry field and click on the down arrow button that appears. Select the
appropriate code from the drop-down list.

High Temp - This field is not applicable to Apollo devices.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 125

Day Sensitivity - To change the Day Sensitivity setting for a particular address, select a
new setting from the drop-down list in this field.

NOTE: For thermal detectors, this setting will change the device's temperature
threshold.

NOTE: This setting only applies to sensors.

Night Sensitivity - To change the Night Sensitivity setting for a particular address, select a
new setting from the drop-down list in this field.

NOTE: For thermal detectors, this setting will change the device's temperature
threshold.

NOTE: This setting only applies to sensors.

DACT Report Code - When using custom DACT reporting codes 197 , the code entered in
this field will be reported by the DACT-E3 when using Contact ID or SIA formats. This may
range from 1-899. The node number will be transmitted in addition to this information.

HEPA - This field is not applicable to Apollo devices.

Freeze - When enabled, the Thermal detector will issue a trouble condition when it senses
temperatures near 32°F (0°C). This setting is only applicable to Thermal sensors.

Below the grid are the following buttons:

Select All Devices - Places a check mark in the select field for all devices currently
displayed.
Add 126 - Opens a screen where input devices may be added to the configuration.
Delete - Clicking the delete button will remove devices that have their "SE" field checked
from the configuration.

Finally, below the row of buttons is an information area, called Device Summary. This area
contains three tabs of information. The first is called "Input Groups", the second is "Used/
Unused" and the third is "Linked SLC Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of each
information tab.

Input Groups - This tab shows all input devices that are assigned to the group that is
selected in the "Select Input Group" drop-down list.

Used/Unused - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the input groups on this node. A
group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more input devices and green
if the input group has not been assigned to any input devices. Double-clicking one of the
input groups in this list will add the selected input group to one of the Input Group fields in
the grid if one of the Input Group fields is highlighted.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 126 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Linked SLC Output Devices - This tab shows all SLC output devices that are affected by
the status of the input groups assigned to this device. This may display either devices on
the current node or all nodes by selecting one of the option buttons and clicking "Show".

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.5.1.1 Add

The Add Devices screen is used to define new input devices. The following procedure may
be used to define new input devices:
Step 1:
Select Sensors or Elements - In order to add input devices, the user must select
between Sensors and Elements. Doing so will filter the list of available devices types to
show only the devices types that are applicable for sensors or device types that are
applicable to elements.

Step 2:
Select Device Type - Select the device type to be assigned to the selected addresses
from the tabs and icons at the top of the screen. See this page 188 for information on the
available sensor device types or this page 191 for information on the available element
device types.

Step 3:
Select Loop - Select the Loop where device(s) to be added are located. Click on the
Loop 1 or Loop 2 option button.

Step 4:
Input Group 1 - Select the group number for the devices to be added (this may also be
set in the Input Devices entry screen) from the drop-down list. Input devices may belong
to input groups ranging from 1-99 and 300-499.

NOTE: This will only set the first group for the device. If you wish to assign more groups,
this must be done in the Input Devices screen.

Step 5:
Check Addresses To Add - Select all addresses to be added by checking the address
number(s).

List View - The list view at the bottom of the screen lists all of the device types and
groups for the addresses on the currently selected loop.

Select All - Click on this button to toggle between placing or clearing check marks from
all addresses.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 127

4.3.5.2 Output Devices

The output devices screen is used to configure all control elements connected to an S3
Series (Apollo) FACP node. This screen houses a large grid that displays all of the output
devices that are configured.

The S3 Series FACP supports three different control element device types. These are the
RCE-95 (Relay Control Element), the SCE-95 (Signal Control Element) and the BCE-95
(Building Control Element.)

Since each of these different device types offer different configuration options, each control
element type will be described on its own page. Use one of the following links to display
information about configuring the RCE-95 128 , the SCE-95 131 and the BCE-95 133 .

Below the grid are the following buttons:

Add 127 - Opens a screen where input devices may be added to the configuration.
Delete - Clicking the delete button will remove devices that have their "Sel" field checked
from the configuration.

Finally, below the row of buttons is an information area, called Device Summary. This area
contains three tabs of information. The first is called "Input Groups", the second is "Used/
Unused" and the third is "Linked SLC Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of each
information tab.

Input Groups - This tab shows all input devices that are assigned to the group that is
selected in the "Select Input Group" drop-down list.

Used/Unused - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the input groups on this node. A
group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more input devices and green
if the input group has not been assigned to any input devices. Double-clicking one of the
input groups in this list will add the selected input group to one of the Input Group fields in
the grid if one of the Input Group fields is highlighted.

Linked SLC Output Devices - This tab shows all SLC output devices that are affected by
the status of the input groups assigned to this device. This may display either devices on
the current node or all nodes by selecting one of the option buttons and clicking "Show".

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.5.2.1 Add

The Add Devices screen is used to define new output devices. The following procedure may
be used to define new input devices:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 128 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Step 1:
Select Device Type - Select the device type to be assigned to the selected addresses
from the tabs and icons at the top of the screen. See this page 191 for information on the
available module device types.

Step 2:
Select Loop - Select the Loop where device(s) to be added are located. Click on the
Loop 1 or Loop 2 option button.

Step 3:
Check Addresses To Add - Select all addresses to be added by checking the address
number(s).

Step 4:
Add - Click on the "Add" button to program the selected addresses. (The user will be
asked to confirm the selections).

List View - The list view at the bottom of the screen lists all of the device types and
groups for the addresses on the currently selected loop.

Select All - Click on this button to toggle between placing or clearing check marks from
all addresses.

4.3.5.2.2 RCE-95

The following programmable options affect the RCE-95 (Relay Control Element):

Sel - Place a check in this field and click the Delete button to remove the device from this
address. Multiple devices may be selected if desired.

Active - To disable Downloading for a particular address, double-click or press the space
bar within this field to turn it grey. To re-enable the device, repeat the process to make the
field green.

Description - Enter a location description for the current address. This label will appear as
the identifier for this address when any event occurs at this address. The maximum number
of characters for this label is 40.
NOTE: Any part of the description text can be copied to the Windows clipboard by
highlighting the text and pressing Ctrl-C. The text can then be copied to the description
field of another address by selecting that field and pressing Ctrl-V.

Output Group Number(s) - To program group numbers, enter group numbers in the Group
entry fields. Up to four output groups (125-224, 500-599) can be entered. If you are unclear
on I/O groups concepts, see Help topic Input/Output Functionality.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 129

NOTE: You cannot assign both output groups and General Output lists to the same
control element.

NOTE: The third and fourth Output Group assignments may also be assigned to Disable
Type Tags, which range from 600 to 699. See this page 196 for more information on the
Group Disable feature.

NOTE: While the E3 Series does allow for multiple output groups for each device, should
a trouble condition occur on a device only the first group assigned to the device will set its
respective Trouble SSM bit.

NOTE: You cannot assign output groups to "Silenceable" output device types.

To the right of the grid is the Properties window. The properties include most of the
configuration settings for the device as described below.

NOTE: The settings shown in the Properties window are for the device that is currently
highlighted in the grid.

Day Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Day Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into afire alarm condition during the defined
day period, this list of outputs will be activated.

Night Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Night Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into fire alarm condition during the defined
night period, this list of outputs will be activated.

CO/Gas Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default CO/Gas Alarm
list. When any initiating device in the system goes into a CO or Gas alarm condition, this list
of outputs will be activated.

Action - Check this option to place this output in the system default Action list. When an
input defined as Multilevel reaches the programmed "Action" threshold, this list of outputs
will be activated.

Supv (Supervisory) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Supervisory
list. When any supervisory device in the system goes into an Off Normal condition, this list of
outputs will be activated.

WT Drill (Walk Test/Drill) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Walk
Test/Drill list. This list of outputs is activated for audible walk test or during a Fire Drill.

Trouble - Check this option to place this output in the system default Trouble list. When
there is a trouble condition in the system, this list of outputs will be activated.

Fan Restart - The E3 Series supports a "Fan Restart" configuration option for Control
Element devices. If this option is selected, the panel leaves such devices undisturbed during

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

130 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

reset. The panel indicates a Trouble condition "FANS OFF" fault message after the reset. To
turn off the fan restart Control Elements, a function is available on the keypad's zero (0) key
or, optionally an ASM-16/ANU-48 switch. Activating the key or switch deactivates the Control
Elements that were left on during reset and cancels the "FANS OFF" fault.

NOTE: Fan Restart may not be assigned to Control Elements that are assigned to the
General Trouble output list.

Seq Restart - The E3 Series also provides "sequential restart" capability. Any outputs
configured for sequential restart are deactivated at a slow rate, either during reset (if not
configured for "Fan Restart"), or upon use of the zero "0" key or, optionally an
ASM-16/ANU-48 switch (if configured for "Fan Restart"). The time delay interval for
sequential reset is set in the Globals/Miscellaneous entry screen.

DACT Report Code - When using custom DACT reporting codes 197 , the code entered in
this field will be reported by the DACT-E3 when using Contact ID or SIA formats. This may
range from 1-899. The node number will be transmitted in addition to this information.

Feedback Reporting -
The RCE-95 supports supervising its output state. Feedback verification uses the device’s
ON/OFF state and the device's feedback input state to determine a “feedback error”
condition. The RCE-95 is considered to have a feedback error under one or both of two
conditions: output ON with feedback input not shorted, or output OFF with feedback input
shorted. A feedback error will produce an OUTPUT FAIL system trouble, but only if
configured to do so. This option selects whether or not to issue a Feedback Error. This
may be set to Never, Always, or Only When Output Is On.

NOTE: Disabling Feedback Reporting will disable ALL feedback supervision of the
RCE-95.

NOTE: The RCE-95 must have DIP Switch S1 - Switch #8 (labeled as "A" on the RCE-95)
in the OPEN (OFF) position to enable the feedback hardware. Feedback Reporting will be
completely disabled if this DIP Switch is in the CLOSED (ON) position, regardless of the
configuration option in CAMWorks.

The following chart describes the behavior of the various feedback settings and states:

Device States

Relay: Relay: Relay: Relay:

Feedback Standby Standby Relay: Relay:
Active Active
Error Standby Active
Setting: Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback
Feedback Feedback
Input: Input: Input: Input:
Input: Input:
Open Not Open Not
Shorted Shorted
Shorted Shorted

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 131

Activates the Stays Activates the Activates the Activates the Activates the
first Output Normal. No Feedback first Output Feedback Feedback
Group's fault is Input Group's Group's Input Group's Input Group's
Trouble Bit reported. Trouble Bit Trouble Bit. Alarm and Alarm Bit.
Always and reports and reports Activates the Trouble Bits No fault is
Fault. Output Fail Feedback and reports reported.
Input Group's Output Fail
Alarm Bit and
reports Fault.
Activates the Stays Activates the Activates the Activates the Activates the
first Output Normal. No Feedback first Output Feedback Feedback
Group's fault is Input Group's Group's Input Group's Input Group's
Only when Trouble Bit reported. Trouble Bit Trouble Bit. Alarm and Alarm Bit.
output is and reports but does not Activates the Trouble Bits No fault is
On Fault. report any Feedback and reports reported.
fault. Input Group's Output Fail
Alarm Bit and
reports Fault.
Stays Stays Stays Stays Activates the Activates the
Normal. No Normal. No Normal. No Normal. No Feedback Feedback
fault is fault is fault is fault is Input Group's Input Group's
Never reported. reported. reported. reported. Alarm Bit and Alarm Bit.
does not No fault is
report. reported.

Feedback Grp - To provide feedback and LED indication, there is a feedback group
associated with the RCE-95. It is treated as a special-purpose input group. There are two
bits in the ILI95's System Status Map associated with this group which, for other device
types, represent the input’s Trouble and Alarm condition but have different meanings when
the Input Group is assigned as the RCE-95's feedback group.
a) In order for an ASM-16/ANU-48 LED to indicate the RCE-95's on/off state,
the feedback group’s Alarm bit indicates the RCE-95’s ON/OFF state. The bit
is True when the RCE relay is ON and False when it is is OFF.
b) To allow CAMs to verify the actual position of the RCE-95 relay or its
associated external equipment, the group’s Trouble bit shows the state of the
feedback input. The bit is True when the feedback input is shorted, and
False otherwise (open or normal EOL).

NOTE: It is highly recommended to assign each RCE-95 Feedback Group to a distinct

Input Group that is not used for any other purpose.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.5.2.3 SCE-95

The following programmable options affect the SCE-95 (Signal Control Element):

Sel - Place a check in this field and click the Delete button to remove the device from this
address. Multiple devices may be selected if desired.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

132 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Floor # - Enter the floor of the building that the device is located on. This field is used for
user reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.

Active - To disable Downloading for a particular address, double-click or press the space
bar within this field to turn it grey. To re-enable the device, repeat the process to make the
field green.

Description - Enter a location description for the current address. This label will appear as
the identifier for this address when any event occurs at this address. The maximum number
of characters for this label is 40.
NOTE: Any part of the description text can be copied to the Windows clipboard by
highlighting the text and pressing Ctrl-C. The text can then be copied to the description
field of another address by selecting that field and pressing Ctrl-V.

Output Group Number(s) - To program group numbers, enter group numbers in the Group
entry fields. Up to four output groups (125-224, 500-599) can be entered. If you are unclear
on I/O groups concepts, see Help topic Input/Output Functionality.

NOTE: You cannot assign both output groups and General Output lists to the same
control element.

NOTE: The third and fourth Output Group assignments may also be assigned to Disable
Type Tags, which range from 600 to 699. See this page 196 for more information on the
Group Disable feature.

NOTE: While the E3 Series does allow for multiple output groups for each device, should
a trouble condition occur on a device only the first group assigned to the device will set its
respective Trouble SSM bit.

NOTE: You cannot assign output groups to "Silenceable" output device types.

To the right of the grid is the Properties window. The properties include most of the
configuration settings for the device as described below.

NOTE: The settings shown in the Properties window are for the device that is currently
highlighted in the grid.

Day Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Day Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into afire alarm condition during the defined
day period, this list of outputs will be activated.

Night Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Night Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into fire alarm condition during the defined
night period, this list of outputs will be activated.

CO/Gas Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default CO/Gas Alarm
list. When any initiating device in the system goes into a CO or Gas alarm condition, this list

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 133

of outputs will be activated.

Action - Check this option to place this output in the system default Action list. When an
input defined as Multilevel reaches the programmed "Action" threshold, this list of outputs
will be activated.

Supv (Supervisory) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Supervisory
list. When any supervisory device in the system goes into an Off Normal condition, this list of
outputs will be activated.

WT Drill (Walk Test/Drill) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Walk
Test/Drill list. This list of outputs is activated for audible walk test or during a Fire Drill.

Trouble - Check this option to place this output in the system default Trouble list. When
there is a trouble condition in the system, this list of outputs will be activated.

Fan Restart - The E3 Series supports a "Fan Restart" configuration option for Control
Element devices. If this option is selected, the panel leaves such devices undisturbed during
reset. The panel indicates a Trouble condition "FANS OFF" fault message after the reset. To
turn off the fan restart Control Elements, a function is available on the keypad's zero (0) key
or, optionally an ASM-16/ANU-48 switch. Activating the key or switch deactivates the Control
Elements that were left on during reset and cancels the "FANS OFF" fault.

NOTE: Fan Restart may not be assigned to Control Elements that are assigned to the
General Trouble output list.

Seq Restart - The E3 Series also provides "sequential restart" capability. Any outputs
configured for sequential restart are deactivated at a slow rate, either during reset (if not
configured for "Fan Restart"), or upon use of the zero "0" key or, optionally an
ASM-16/ANU-48 switch (if configured for "Fan Restart"). The time delay interval for
sequential reset is set in the Globals/Miscellaneous entry screen.

DACT Report Code - When using custom DACT reporting codes 197 , the code entered in
this field will be reported by the DACT-E3 when using Contact ID or SIA formats. This may
range from 1-899. The node number will be transmitted in addition to this information.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.5.2.4 BCE-95

The following programmable options affect the BCE-95 (Building Control Element):

Sel - Place a check in this field and click the Delete button to remove the device from this
address. Multiple devices may be selected if desired.

Active - To disable Downloading for a particular address, double-click or press the space
bar within this field to turn it grey. To re-enable the device, repeat the process to make the
field green.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

134 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Description - Enter a location description for the current address. This label will appear as
the identifier for this address when any event occurs at this address. The maximum number
of characters for this label is 40.
NOTE: Any part of the description text can be copied to the Windows clipboard by
highlighting the text and pressing Ctrl-C. The text can then be copied to the description
field of another address by selecting that field and pressing Ctrl-V.

Group 1 (AUTO ON Group) - This Output Group, and its associated CAM Expression, will
determine the "Automatic" operation of the ON relay.

Group 2 (AUTO OFF Group) - This Output Group, and its associated CAM Expression, will
determine the "Automatic" operation of the OFF relay.

Group 3 (Manual ON Group) - This Output Group, and its associated CAM Expression, will
determine the "Manual" operation of the ON relay.

Group 4 (Manual OFF Group) - This Output Group, and its associated CAM Expression,
will determine the "Manual" operation of the OFF relay.

NOTE: The Group 3 (Manual ON Group) and Group 4 (Manual OFF Group) output group
assignments may also be assigned to Disable Type Tags, which range from 600 to 699.
See this page 434 for more information on the Group Disable feature.

NOTE: Should a trouble condition occur on a BCE-95 device, only the group assigned to
Group 1 (AUTO ON Group) will set its respective Trouble SSM bit.

NOTE: To prevent conflicts or illegal states, the ILI95 enforces the following
conditions:
· The BCE-95 is a non-silenceable device. Any silence functionality must be
implemented in CAMs.
· If user-disabled, the BCE-95 remains in the standby state (both relays reset)
regardless of any control actions.
· Either Manual state overrides either Auto state.
· If both are active, Manual ON overrides Manual OFF.
· If both are active, Auto ON overrides Auto OFF.

To the right of the grid is the Properties window. The properties include most of the
configuration settings for the device as described below.

NOTE: The settings shown in the Properties window are for the device that is currently
highlighted in the grid.

DACT Report Code - When using custom DACT reporting codes 197 , the code entered in

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 135

this field will be reported by the DACT-E3 when using Contact ID or SIA formats. This may
range from 1-899. The node number will be transmitted in addition to this information.

Feedback Reporting -
When enabled, a missing feedback EOL resistor will cause a FAULT condition to be
reported. When disabled, a missing feedback EOL resistor will not cause a trouble
condition.

NOTE: Disabling Feedback Reporting will disable ALL feedback supervision of the
BCE-95.

NOTE: The BCE-95 must have DIP Switch S1 - Switch #8 (labeled as "FB" on the
BCE-95) in the OPEN (OFF) position to enable the feedback hardware. Feedback
Reporting will be completely disabled if this DIP Switch is in the CLOSED (ON) position,
regardless of the configuration option in CAMWorks.

The following charts describe the behavior of the various feedback settings:

ON Relay States

Feedback Relay: Relay: Relay: Relay:

Relay: Relay:
Error Standby Standby Active Active
Standby Active
Setting:
FB1 Input: FB1 Input: FB1 Input: FB1 Input:
FB1 Input: FB1 Input:
Open Not Open Not
Shorted Shorted
Shorted Shorted
Activates the Neither Activates the Activates Activates Activates
first Output Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback
Group's Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group
Trouble Bit is affected. 1's Trouble 1's Alarm Bit. 1's Alarm Bit. 1's Alarm Bit.
and reports Bit.
Fault. Deactivates Deactivates Deactivates
Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group
Enabled 2's Alarm bit. 2's Alarm bit. 2's Alarm bit.

Activates the Activates

first Output Feedback
Group's Input Group
Trouble Bit 1's Trouble
and reports Bit.
Fault.
Neither Neither Neither Activates Activates Activates
Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group
Disabled is affected. is affected. is affected. 1's Alarm Bit. 1's Alarm Bit. 1's Alarm Bit.

Deactivates Deactivates Deactivates

Feedback Feedback Feedback

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

136 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Input Group Input Group Input Group

2's Alarm bit. 2's Alarm bit. 2's Alarm bit.

OFF Relay States

Feedback Relay: Relay: Relay: Relay:

Relay: Relay:
Error Standby Standby Active Active
Standby Active
Setting:
FB2 Input: FB2 Input: FB2 Input: FB2 Input:
FB2 Input: FB2 Input:
Open Not Open Not
Shorted Shorted
Shorted Shorted
Activates the Neither Activates the Activates Activates Activates
first Output Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback
Group's Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group
Trouble Bit is affected. 2's Trouble 2's Alarm Bit. 2's Alarm Bit. 2's Alarm Bit.
and reports Bit.
Fault. Deactivates Deactivates Deactivates
Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group
Enabled 1's Alarm bit. 1's Alarm bit. 1's Alarm bit.

Activates the Activates

first Output Feedback
Group's Input Group
Trouble Bit 2's Trouble
and reports Bit.
Fault.
Neither Neither Neither Activates Activates Activates
Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group
is affected. is affected. is affected. 2's Alarm Bit. 2's Alarm Bit. 2's Alarm Bit.
Disabled
Deactivates Deactivates Deactivates
Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group
1's Alarm bit. 1's Alarm bit. 1's Alarm bit.

Feedback Group 1 (ON Feedback Group) - To provide feedback and LED indication, there
are two feedback groups associated with the BCE-95. These groups are treated as
special-purpose input groups. There are two bits in the ILI95's System Status Map
associated with each feedback group which, for other device types, represent the input’s
Trouble and Alarm condition but have different meanings when the Input Group is assigned
as the BCE-95's feedback group. This field specifies which Input Group will be serving as
the Feedback Group for the BCE-95's ON relay.
a) In order for an ASM-16/ANU-48 LED to indicate the BCE-95's on/off state, the
feedback group’s Alarm bit indicates the BCE-95’s ON/OFF state. The bit is
True when the BCE relay is ON and False when it is is OFF.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 137

b) To allow CAMs to verify the actual position of the BCE-95 relay or its
associated external equipment, the group’s Trouble bit shows the state of the
feedback input. The bit is True when the feedback input is shorted, and
False otherwise (open or normal EOL).

NOTE: It is highly recommended to assign each BCE-95 Feedback Group to a distinct

Input Group that is not used for any other purpose.

Feedback Group 2 (OFF Feedback Group) - Similar to the ON Feedback Group, but
provides feedback for the BCE-95's OFF relay.

NOTE: A feedback error DOES NOT produce a system trouble. The NGA CAM Text
Message 769 feature could be used for this purpose, if desired.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.6 Cross Zones

This screen allows the user to configure the behavior of each of the node's thirty cross
zones. Like many other screens in CAMWorks, the display is arranged in a grid. The
settings available for each cross zone is described below:

Cross Zone - Indicates which virtual cross zone group will be affected by these settings.
This field is read-only.

Cross Zone Type - If this virtual cross zone group will be used as a group cross zone,
select "Group". If it will be used as a point cross zone, select "Point".

Config - Clicking this button opens a secondary screen that allows the user to assign the
desired points (point cross zoning) or input groups (group cross zoning).

Trigger - This option sets the trigger level of the cross zone (how many inputs or sets of
inputs need to activate before the cross zone activates). This can be set from two to seven
for point cross zoning or two to four for group cross zoning.

Response - The S3 Series currently allows two response types. The first is the Alarm
response, which will cause a fire alarm condition when the cross zone is activated. Second
is the non-reporting response. This response allows you to chain multiple cross zones
together or trigger outputs without causing a fire alarm on the system.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

138 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Zone Code - When the cross zone is activated it can trigger a zone code to sound, just like
any other input. This menu allows you to select one of up to 63 user-defined zone codes.

Virtual Alarm Group - The cross zone may be configured to trigger an output group or a
scratchpad when the activation threshold has been reached. This may range from 125-224
(Output Groups), 500-599 (Extended Output Groups) and 416-439 (Scratchpads).

Virtual Pre-Alarm Group - When the one or more of the cross zone triggers activates (but
the configured trigger level has not yet been reached), it can be configured to trigger an
output group or a scratchpad. This may range from 125-224 (Output Groups), 500-599
(Extended Output Groups) and 416-439 (Scratchpads).
NOTE: Regardless of user programming, the S3 Series FACP will set bits in its associated
extended system status map for a Pre-alarm on a cross zone and for a Cross Zone
activation.

Day Alarm - If the response type is configured for the Alarm Response, this will cause the
system to turn on all outputs configured for the General Alarm Day output list when the cross
zone is activated during the configured day hours.

Night Alarm - If the response type is configured for the Alarm Response, this will cause the
system to turn on all outputs configured for the General Alarm Night output list when the
cross zone is activated during the configured night hours, as well as the defined weekend
and holiday days.

The following control appears outside of the grid:

Enable Multiple Point Cross Zone Activations When System is in Alarm - When
checked, point cross zone inputs will continue to prealarm after the system is already in
alarm, and the cross zones will activate when their threshold is reached. When unchecked,
all smoke detectors that are configured for point cross zoning will automatically go into alarm
when the system is in alarm and the outputs assigned to the cross zone will not activate.

Below the grid is an information area. This information area contains three tabs of
information. The first is called "CrossZone # > Input Devices", the second is "Input Group #
> Input Devices" and the third is "Used / Unused Groups". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

CrossZone # > Input Devices - This section of the window shows which devices are
assigned to the selected cross zone. Devices may be added by using the Add button below.
To remove devices from the cross zone place a check in the "Sel" column next to the
desired device and click the Delete button below.

Input Group # > Input Devices - This tab shows all input devices that are assigned to the
group that is selected in the "Select Input Group" drop-down list.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 139

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the input groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more input devices
and green if the input group has not been assigned to any input devices. Double-clicking
one of the input groups in this list will add the selected input group to one of the Input Group
fields in the grid if one of the Input Group fields is highlighted.

Group CrossZone > Input Devices - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the devices
that are a member of a group cross zone that is highlighted in the grid above.

See this page 98 for more information about configuring cross zoning.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.7 ASM/ANU
Each S3 Series FACP supports a combination of up to sixteen Switch and Annunciator
Modules of the following types:
ASM-16 and ANU-48.

The following settings may be selected for each module through this screen:

Board # - This field simply indicates which module will be affected by these settings. This
field cannot be changed.

Board Type - Select a board type to indicate that a board should be assigned to this
address or select "None", if no board should be assigned to this address.

Lamp Test - Selecting Yes will cause the ASM-16 or ANU-48 to perform a lamp test when it
is reset. Selecting No will cause the ASM-16 or ANU-48 to not perform a lamp test.

At the right of the ASM/ANU screen is a configuration window to allow the configuration of
the module's switches. This window changes depending on which module is selected. The
following fields are displayed in the grid in this window:

Switch Input # - This field is a reference that indicates which switches are available.

Bit # - This field indicates the system status map bit assigned to this switch.

Switch Type - This option sets the function that the switch performs. All switches are
defaulted to the "Control" option. When configured for this function, the switch will toggle its
associated Bit Number and can be used in CAM expressions. Switches one through eight
may also be configured for an Auxiliary Function, except for Switch #6. This auxiliary
function differs for each switch and may be viewed by clicking here. Even though the ANU-
48 only supports eight physical switches, switches #9-16 are displayed as Toggle/Selector
switches to acknowledge the fact that each ANU-48 switch has two bits associated with it in
the System Status Map.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 140 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: When a switch is configured for its Auxiliary Function, it will not trigger its
associated bit number.

NOTE: When a switch is configured for its Auxiliary Function, its associated LED's will be
taken over by the Auxiliary Function and will no longer be programmable via CAMs.

NOTE: If an ASM-16 or ANU-48 switch is reconfigured for an Auxiliary Function, any

CAMs previously written for the LED's associated with that switch will be deleted. Before
deleting the CAMs, CAMWorks will issue a warning asking for confirmation.

Momentary - When the switch type is configured as a control switch, the switch can be
configured as a momentary switch by placing a check mark in this field. When enabled, a
switch press will cause the associated SSM bit location to go true once and then false again.

Latching - The switch may be configured for latching operation when the switch type is
configured as a control switch. When selected, the current switch state (ON or OFF) will
persist through reset.
NOTE: On the ANU-48, switches #9-16 are always configured as Latching and cannot be
changed.

NOTE: A switch may not be configured for both momentary and latching operation at the
same time.

Description - This descriptive text is available for display while programming CAMs and is
not downloaded to the panel.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.8 Virtual Switch

Virtual Switches are a feature of the S3 Series FACP that allows the Gamewell-FCI
FocalPoint Workstation to control any system function that may be presently controlled by
an ASM-16 or ANU-48 switch. Each Virtual Switch has a control bit in the S3 Series FACP's
System Status Map associated with it. Upon command from the FocalPoint Workstation, the
S3 Series FACP will set the appropriate bit to TRUE or FALSE. From there, the user must
refer to the Virtual Switch's bit in CAMs to link the Virtual Switch to actual system functions.

This screen is where the user sets up the following options relating to each of the S3 Series
FACP's 256 Virtual Switches:

Switch Number - This field shows the System Status Map (bitmap) bit location associated
with each switch. This field cannot be edited.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 141

On/Off - Enables or disables this switch. When the switch is disabled (or set as a "Status"
switch), the System Status Map bit associated with this switch may be used as a scratchpad
instead.

Switch Type - This option sets the function that the switch performs. All switches are
defaulted to the "Control" option. When configured for this function, the switch will toggle its
associated Bit Number and can be used in CAM expressions. The switches may be
configured as a "Status" switch instead of "Control." "Status" switches are used only if the
user requires the FocalPoint Workstation to display a status indicator in response to the
TRUE evaluation of CAM expression. Note that if the switch is configured as a "Status"
switch, the System Status Map bit associated with the switch may be used as a scratchpad
instead.

Latching - The switch may be configured for latching operation when the switch type is
configured as a control switch. When selected, the current switch state (ON or OFF) will
persist through reset.

Momentary - When the switch type is configured as a control switch, the switch can be
configured as a momentary switch by placing a check mark in this field. When enabled, a
switch press will cause the associated SSM bit location to go true once and then false again.

NOTE: A switch may not be configured for both momentary and latching operation at the
same time.

Switch Label - Up to forty characters may be used to describe this switch and its function.
These are downloaded to the system and are displayed by the FocalPoint Workstation.

MNS Switch - Enable this option if this virtual switch performs an MNS function, otherwise
leave it disabled. When enabled, the virtual switch will be reset by an MNS reset instead of
a fire reset.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.9 Annunciators
The LCD-SLP is an annunciator that uses an LCD touchscreen for primary user interaction.
The system supports up to fifteen (15) supervised and fully functional LCD-SLP
annunciators (addressed 1-15) as well as unsupervised (display only) LCD-SLP
annunciators (addressed as 0). The LCD-SLP also includes five user-programmable push-
buttons (with multi-color LEDs) and three pre-defined push-buttons (Menu, Fire Drill and
Reset.)

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

142 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

The LCD-SLP allows access to various system functions including:

- Acknowledging alarm, trouble and supervisory conditions.

- Silencing the system.
- Resetting the nodes in its region (or all nodes in the system).
- System Configuration, Walk Test / Drill, I/O, System Clock and other system functions.

NOTE: The unsupervised, display-only LCD-SLP's are not configurable.

The Annunciators screen is used to configure the LCD-SLP annunciators connected to this
panel. On the left of the screen, is a set of buttons and check boxes that represent each of
the fifteen LCD-SLP annunciators. The right side of the screen is the primary work area that
allows configuration of the currently selected LCD-SLP.

To configure an LCD-SLP, first select the LCD-SLP addresses that are present in the
system by placing a check mark in the check box for the desired LCD-SLP addresses.

Next, select an individual LCD-SLP to configure by clicking on its associated button on the
left side of the screen. The contents of the right side of the screen will change to reflect the
current configuration settings for the selected LCD-SLP.

The right side of the screen has an image that represents the LCD-SLP. Within the image
of the LCD-SLP are five buttons that represent the five user-programmable push buttons.
Pressing one of those buttons opens the configuration settings for that specific button on the
bottom right of the screen.

The following settings pertain to the LCD-SLP itself:

Lamp Test - Selecting Yes will cause the LCD-SLP to perform a lamp test when it is reset.
Selecting No will cause the LCD-SLP to not perform a lamp test.

The following settings pertain to the selected LCD-SLP switch (selected by pressing on the
buttons that represent the LCD-SLP user-programmable push buttons):

Switch Type - This option sets the function that the switch performs. All switches are
defaulted to the "Control" option. When configured for this function, the switch will toggle its
associated Bit Number and can be used in CAM expressions. Each switch may be
optionally configured for an Auxiliary Function. This auxiliary function differs for each switch
and may be viewed by clicking here.

NOTE: When a switch is configured for its Auxiliary Function, it will not trigger its
associated bit number.

NOTE: When a switch is configured for its Auxiliary Function, its associated LED's will be

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 143

taken over by the Auxiliary Function and will no longer be programmable via CAMs.

NOTE: If an LCD-SLP switch is reconfigured for an Auxiliary Function, any CAMs

previously written for the LED's associated with that switch will be deleted. Before deleting
the CAMs, CAMWorks will issue a warning asking for confirmation.

Momentary - When the switch type is configured as a control switch, the switch can be
configured as a momentary switch by placing a check mark in this field. When enabled, a
switch press will cause the associated SSM bit location to go true once and then false again.

Latching - The switch may be configured for latching operation when the switch type is
configured as a control switch. When selected, the current switch state (ON or OFF) will
persist through reset.

NOTE: A switch may not be configured for both momentary and latching operation at the
same time.

Description - The user may enter up to ten characters to describe this switch. This label
will be displayed on the LCD-SLP display to identify the switch's function.

The LCD-SLP's LED's are configured via CAMs. Please see this page 180 for more
information.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.10 CAM
The CAM icon incorporates ten sub-icons. These icons are used to display the following
CAM screens:

CAM Output Group 144

CAM ASM/ANU LED 147
CAM Scratchpad 151
CAM Special Functions 154
CAM Group Disable 165
CAM Disable Type Tags 270
CAM Sensor Output 173
CAM Reset Inhibit 176

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 144 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

CAM LCD-SLP Annunciators 180

Virtual CAM 184
Advanced CAM Programming 188

4.3.10.1 CAM Output Group

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 145

and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

146 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 147

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs in this screen will control Output Groups that can be assigned to AOMs and
discrete outputs such as the NAC Circuits and the Municipal Circuit.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.10.2 CAM ASM/ANU LED

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

148 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 149

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

150 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

includes the Scratchpad number,

Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs in this screen control the state of the LED's on ASM-16 or ANU-48 modules. A
CAM expression written in this area will either light steady or blink the LED when the CAM
evaluates to a TRUE and will turn the LED off when the CAM evaluates to a false.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 151

NOTE: The LED blink CAM Expression takes priority over the LED On/Off if both CAM
expressions are TRUE at the same time.

NOTE: If an ASM-16 or ANU-48 switch has been configured for its Auxiliary Function, the
CAM entry field, as well as the description field will be grayed out.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.10.3 CAM Scratchpad

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

152 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

field. This field cannot be edited.

Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 153

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 154 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Scratchpads on the selected node. This

includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs in this screen will turn on or off the Scratchpads associated with this node.
Scratchpads can be referred to in other CAM expressions and are extremely useful in
reducing the complexity of other CAM expressions.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.10.4 CAM Special Functions

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM Special Functions screen incorporates several advanced functions that can be

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 155

useful for certain applications. Specifically, these functions are:

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

[****] 155
Schedule 155 - Configure certain output devices to activate according to a specific schedule.

Counters 159 - Activate outputs after a certain number of specific events occur.

Sequence 161 - Activate several outputs in succession.

Timers 165 - Delay the activation of output devices.

4.3.10.4.1 Schedule

NOTE: Schedules are not available on INX, INCC or INI-VGE nodes.

There are 10 schedules available per node for automatically activating Output Groups and
Scratchpads according to a fixed schedule. Three types of schedules are available. These
are:

1.) Daily - Outputs can be activated on a daily basis at a given time.

2.) Weekly - Outputs can be activated at a certain time on one or more different days of the
week.
3.) Monthly - Outputs can be activated on a certain day of the selected month or on a certain
day of every month.

The process of configuring a schedule is the same regardless of the type of schedule being
used, with a few exceptions. Below is the procedure for configuring a schedule:

1. In the grid, select the Group that will be triggered by the scheduler. The allowed selection
of groups will vary based on the current node type, but will always at least include the
node's scratchpad locations.
2. In the "Information" pane at the bottom of the screen select the "Schedule Details" tab, if it
isn't already selected.
3. Select one of the following schedule types:
a. Daily – When a Daily schedule is desired, the user must supply the time of day that
should be used for the schedule. This is done through the Hours/Minutes drop-down
lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every hour
and/or every minute.
b. Weekly – When a Weekly schedule is desired, the user must select which days of the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

156 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

week that the schedule should run. Selection boxes are provided for each day of the
week and any or all days may be selected by placing a check in the appropriate box.
Like a Daily schedule, the Weekly schedule also requires that a time of day must be
selected for when the schedule is to be run. This is done through the Hours/Minutes
drop-down lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every
hour and/or every minute.
c. Monthly – A Monthly schedule is used when it is desired to activate certain outputs on a
certain day of the month. Option buttons are provided for the month. Unlike the
Weekly schedule, the user may only select one month or every month. A date
selection is also provided, allowing the user to select which day of the month to run the
schedule. An option is available to run the schedule every day of the selected month.
Like a Daily schedule, the Monthly schedule also requires that a time of day must be
selected for when the schedule is to be run. This is done through the Hours/Minutes
drop-down lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every
hour and/or every minute.
NOTE: If you choose the 29th then there will be no schedule activation for
February except on a leap year. If you choose the 30th then there will be no
schedule activation for February at all. If you choose the 31st then all months with
less than 31 days will not have a schedule activation.

4. Disable Schedule CAM Expression - If there are any circumstances where it would be
desirable to NOT run an automatic schedule, this CAM expression should be entered.
The TRUE evaluation of this CAM expression will prevent the schedule from running.
NOTE: Disable Schedule CAM Expression feature is not available on the 7100.

5. Description - A description may be added to indicate what the schedule will be used for.
This information is used for reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.
NOTE: The CAM Schedule will be true for exactly one minute if the user specifies a
specific minute within the selected hour.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
four tabs of information. The first is called "Schedule Details", the second is "Node
Devices", the third is "Reference Search" and the fourth is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is
a brief explanation of each information tab.

Schedule Details - This tab allows the user to view or set the scheduling information for the
selected schedule. See above for more information on how the schedule is configured.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 157

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

158 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 159

4.3.10.4.2 Counters

There are 10 counters available per node for activating outputs after an input triggers the
counter a specified number of times.

The process of configuring a counter is as follows:

1. In the grid, choose how many times the counter must be run by selecting a value in the
"Count" field.
2. Select the Group that will be triggered by the scheduler. The allowed selection of groups
will vary based on the current node type, but will always at least include the node's
scratchpad locations.
3. A Define Counter CAM Expression may be written. If present, this CAM expression will
determine under what condition the counter will be reset. If this CAM is blank, the counter
will operate as a one-shot (meaning that a reset is required in order to trigger the counter
again after it has activated its output.)
4. Select a "Working Bit". This is a bit that is used internally by the CAM engine to perform
the counter function. This bit must not be used by any other function.
5. Counter Trigger CAM Expression. This CAM Expression describes what condition will
cause the counter to be incremented.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is a brief explanation of each
information tab.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

160 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Groups, Device Type and Description. On

ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 161

AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the

selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.10.4.3 Sequence

There are 10 sequences available per node for activating multiple Output Groups or
Scratchpads in a sequence. There are two types of sequences. The table below explains
the differences between the two.

Sequence Type Description Visual Sample

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

162 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

A 'Bar Graph' sequence

leaves any current
Bar Graph
outputs ON when the
sequence is triggered.

A 'Shift' sequence turns

OFF its current output
when the sequence is
Shift
triggered and then
activates the next
output.

The process of configuring a sequence is the same regardless of the type of sequence
being used. Below is the procedure for configuring a sequence:

1. Select a "Working Bit" - This is a bit that is used internally by the CAM engine to perform
the sequence function. This bit must not be used by any other function.
2. Select the number of outputs - The sequencer must know how many outputs are going to
be affected by the scheduler.This may range from 2 to 12.
3. Type of Sequence - Select either a Bar Graph sequence or a Shift sequence. See above
for an explanation of the two types of sequence.
4. CAM Sequence Reinitialize - A CAM Expression must be written for the sequence to be
enabled to run the first time (or be reset so that it may be run again once it has already
run through).
5. Sequence Triggering CAM - This CAM Expression describes what condition will cause the
next output in the sequence to be activated.
6. At the bottom of the screen, select the "Output List" tab.
7. Select the desired output groups and/or scratchpads that should be added to the
sequence. These should be selected in the desired order of activation. Outputs may be
added to the sequence by selecting a group from the list box on the left and clicking the
right arrow button. Outputs may be removed from the sequence by selecting the group in
the list in the list box on the right and clicking on the left arrow button.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
four tabs of information. The first is called "Output List", the second is "Node Devices", the
third is "Reference Search" and the fourth is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is a brief
explanation of each information tab.

Output List - This tab allows the user to select the output groups/scratchpads that will be
activated by this sequence. See above for more information on how the sequence is

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 163

configured.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

164 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the

selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 165

node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.10.4.4 Timers

There are 10 timers available per node for creating delays for Output Groups and
Scratchpads. To configure a timer, set the desired timer interval in seconds, and select the
appropriate Output Group or Scratchpad from the Group drop-down list. If set, the timer
information will be displayed in the CAM entry screen for the selected group. This delay will
apply when the output group or scratchpad is activated through the CAM logic expression.
The options for the timers are displayed in a table format. Each option is described below.

Timer - This is a read-only display that shows the timer number (1-10).

Time (Seconds) - This sets the delay time for this timer. The delay time is entered in
seconds. This may range from 1 to 3600 seconds .

Group - Select the Output Group or Scratchpad that you would like to delay.

Resettable Timer - This option allows you to choose between standard and resettable
timers. If set to No, the timer will be a standard timer. Standard timers will only trigger
once. In order to be triggered again, the system will need to be reset. If this setting is
changed to Yes, the timer can be triggered multiple times. In order to be triggered again,
the timer will have time out and the CAM expression assigned to the output group or
scratchpad will need to transition from false to true again.

Free/Used - If this timer has been configured and assigned to an Output Group or
Scratchpad, this will read Used, otherwise it will read Free.

NOTE: If a Timer is used by Advanced CAM Programming, this field will read Used, even
if it doesn't appear to have any other configuration information assigned.

NOTE: If a Timer is used by Advanced CAM Programming, no timer parameters may be

changed via this screen.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.10.5 CAM Group Disable

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

166 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 167

three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

168 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 169

the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAM expressions in this section are a part of the Group Disable 196 feature of the S3
Series. Each Input and Output Group has one CAM expression assigned. When the CAM
expression is TRUE, all devices assigned to the associated Group will enter DISCONNECT
trouble and will be treated as a disabled device. When the CAM expression goes back to
FALSE, the DISCONNECT troubles associated with the assigned Input Group will be
restored.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.10.6 CAM Disable Type Tags

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

170 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 171

Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and

Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

172 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAM expressions in this section are a part of the Group Disable 196 feature of the S3
Series. Input and/or output devices may individually be assigned to Disable Type Tags.

Each Disable Type Tag has one CAM expression assigned. When the CAM expression is
TRUE, all devices assigned to the associated Disable Type Tag will enter DISCONNECT
trouble and will be treated as a disabled device. When the CAM expression goes back to
FALSE, the DISCONNECT troubles associated with the assigned Disable Type Tag will be
restored.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 173

4.3.10.7 CAM Sensor Output

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

174 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 175

CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 176 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

the selected node. Includes Text Message

Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The S3 Series has complete control over several aspects of the operation of the smoke
detectors that was not possible in earlier products. One of these features includes
controlling the so-called Remote Outputs of the smoke detectors. These include both
sounder bases and relay bases.

Each sensor has a CAM expression to control its remote output. When the CAM expression
evaluates to TRUE the output will turn ON, when it evaluates to FALSE the output will turn
OFF.

NOTE: Once a CAM expression has been entered for a Sensor Remote Output, it will
override the automatic activation of the output (ie. the standard follow-the-LED activation).
If automatic operation is desired after a CAM expression has been written, simply erase
the CAM expression.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.10.8 CAM Reset Inhibit

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 177

expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

178 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 179

selected node. Includes Loop, Address,

Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 180 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

the current output group.

The CAMs on this screen will prevent this node from being reset. There are three bits, a
Fire Reset Inhibit Bit, an MNS Reset Inhibit Bit and and Enable Reset Inhibit. Both the Fire
Reset Inhibit Bit and the Enable Reset Inhibit bit must be TRUE in order to prevent a fire
reset from affecting this node. Both the MNS Reset Inhibit Bit and the Enable Reset Inhibit
bit must be TRUE in order to prevent an MNS reset from affecting this node.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.10.9 CAM LCD-SLP Annunciators

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 181

field. This field cannot be edited.

Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

182 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 183

Scratchpads on the selected node. This

includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs on this screen affect the user-programmable LEDs on the LCD-SLP annunciators
connected to this panel. At the top of the screen are three filters:

LCD-SLP No. - Display the CAMs only for the selected LCD-SLP.

Switch No. - Display the CAMs only for the selected switch.

LED Type - Display the CAMs only for the selected type of CAM (ON/Off, Blink, Red or
Green).

The filters are ANDed with each other. This means that only the CAMs that match all criteria
will be displayed in the grid below.

The following describes the four different types of CAMs that control the behavior of each
LCD-SLP programmable LED:

On/Off - A CAM expression written in this area will turn the LED ON steady when the CAM
evaluates to a TRUE and will turn the LED off when the CAM evaluates to a false.

Blink - A CAM expression written in this area will blink the LED when the CAM evaluates to
a TRUE and will turn the LED off (or on steady, based on the On/Off CAM expression) when
the CAM evaluates to a false.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 184 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: The LED blink CAM Expression takes priority over the LED On/Off if both CAM
expressions are TRUE at the same time.

Red - The LCD-SLP programmable LEDs can be configured to be Green, Red or Amber.
When the "Red" CAM expression evaluates to TRUE, the the LED will appear Red, unless
the Green CAM expression also evaluates to TRUE at the same time.

Green - The LCD-SLP programmable LEDs can be configured to be Green, Red or Amber.
When the "Green" CAM expression evaluates to TRUE, the the LED will appear Green,
unless the Red CAM expression also evaluates to TRUE at the same time.

NOTE: The LED will appear Amber when both the Red and Green CAM Expressions
evaluate to TRUE or both evaluate to FALSE.

NOTE: If an LCD-SLP switch has been configured for its Auxiliary Function, the CAM
entry fields, as well as the description field will be grayed out.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.10.10 Virtual CAM

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 185

differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

186 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or

PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 187

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs on this screen are used to provide the FocalPoint Workstation visual feedback
that the functions controlled by the Virtual Switches feature of the S3 Series FACP have
been activated or deactivated.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 188 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

4.3.10.11 Advanced CAM Programming

Selecting this option will open the Advanced CAM Programming Editor.

See this page 925 for more information about the Advanced CAM Programming Editor.
See this page 920 for more information about Advanced CAM Programming in general.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

4.3.11 Communication
Opens the Download screen in the main window. See the Download Utilities 841 section for
more information.

4.4 General
4.4.1 Sensor Device Types
The following sensor device types are available on the S3 Series (Apollo) FACP:

Sensor Devi Physical Descripti Respo Latchi PAS Allowed? Verific Cross
Device ce Device on nse ng? ation Zonin
Type Type Type Type Allowe g
As d? Allow
Repo ed?
rted
By
Pane
l

None No No No device No N/A N/A N/A N/A

Assign Devic Device at this Respo
ed e address nse
Ion Ion Ion Standard Fire Yes Yes Yes Yes
Detecto Detec Sensor Ion Alarm
r tor (XP95-I, Sensor,
XP95-ID, such as
XP95-ID XP95-I
R)
Critical Critic Ion Standard Fire Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ion al Ion Sensor Ion Alarm
(XP95-I, Sensor.
XP95-ID, The

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 189

XP95-ID system
R) reserves
power to
run the
sensor's
LEDs.
Photo Photo Optical Standard Fire Yes Yes Yes Yes
Detecto Detec Sensor Photo Alarm
r tor (XP95-P, Sensor,
XP95-PD, such as
XP95-PD XP95-P
R,
VLC-400)
Critical Critic Optical Standard Fire Yes Yes Yes Yes
Photo al Sensor Photo Alarm
Photo (XP95-P, Sensor.
XP95-PD, The
XP95-PD system
R, reserves
VLC-400) power to
run the
sensor's
LEDs.
Therma Ther Temperat Standard Fire Yes No No No
l Det mal ure Heat Alarm
Det Sensor Detector,
(XP95-T) such as
XP95-T
NR Ion NR Ion Standard Non- No No No No
Det NL Ion Sensor Ion reporti
Det (XP95-I, Sensor, ng
NL XP95-ID, such as
XP95-ID XP95-I
R)
NR NR Optical Standard Non- No No No No
Photo Photo Sensor Photo reporti
Det NL Det (XP95-P, Sensor, ng
NL XP95-PD, such as
XP95-PD XP95-P
R,
VLC-400)
Ion Ion Standard Multi- Yes No No No
Multilev Multil Ion Ion level
el evel Sensor Sensor, (three-
(XP95-I, such as level)
XP95-ID, XP95-I (Alert,
XP95-ID Action,
R) Fire

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

190 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Alarm)
Pho Pho Standard Multi- Yes No No No
Multilev Multil Optical Photo level
el evel Sensor Sensor, (three-
(XP95-P, such as level)
XP95-PD, XP95-P (Alert,
XP95-PD Action,
R, Fire
VLC-400) Alarm)
Ion Ion Ion Analog, Superv Yes No No No
Duct Duct Sensor Addressa isory
Spv Spv (XP95-I, ble Ion
XP95-ID, Duct
XP95-ID Detector
R)
Photo Photo Optical Analog, Superv Yes No No No
Duct Duct Sensor Addressa isory
Spv Spv (XP95-P, ble Photo
XP95-PD, Duct
XP95-PD Detector
R,
VLC-400)
Ion Ion Ion Analog, Fire Yes Yes Yes Yes
Duct Duct Sensor Addressa Alarm
Det Det (XP95-I, ble Ion
XP95-ID, Duct
XP95-ID Detector,
R) such as
XP95-ID
Photo Photo Optical Analog, Fire Yes Yes Yes Yes
Duct Duct Sensor Addressa Alarm
Det Det (XP95-P, ble Photo
XP95-PD, Duct
XP95-PD Detector,
R, such as
VLC-400) XP95-PD
Ion Ion Ion Standard Superv No No No No
Supv Supv Sensor Ion isory
(XP95-I, Sensor,
XP95-ID, such as
XP95-ID XP95-I
R)
Photo Photo Optical Standard Superv No No No No
Supv Supv Sensor Photo isory
(XP95-P, Sensor,
XP95-PD, such as
XP95-PD XP95-P
R,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 191

VLC-400)
Multi Multi Multi- Multi- Fire Yes No Yes Yes
Sensor Sens Sensor Criteria Alarm
or (XP95-M) Sensor,
such as
XP95-M.
Multi Multi Multi- Superv No No No No
Supvsr Supv (XP95-M) Criteria isory
y sry Sensor,
such as
XP95-DM
or XP95-
M
Multilvl Multil Temperat Standard Multi- Yes No No No
Heat vl ure Heat level
Heat Sensor Detector, (three-
(XP95-T) such as level)
XP95-T (Alert,
Action,
Fire
Alarm)
Aspirati Aspir Optical Vesda Multi- Yes No No No
ng ating Sensor VLC-400 level
(XP95-P, (three-
XP95-PD, level)
XP95-PD (Alert,
R, Action,
VLC-400) Fire
Alarm)

4.4.2 Element Device Types

The following element device types are available on the S3 Series (Apollo) FACP:

Monitor Elements -

Monitor Device Physica Descrip Respon Latchin PAS Verifica Cross

Device Type As l Device tion se Type g? Allowed tion Zoning
Type Reporte Type ? Allowed Allowed
d By ? ?
Panel

None No No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A

Assigne Device Device device Respons
d at this e
address
Smoke Smoke PID-95 Conventi Fire Yes Yes No Yes
Detector Detector (PID-95, onal Alarm

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

192 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

PID-95P Smoke
) Detector
monitore
d by
PID-95
Conv. Manual PID-95 Conventi Fire Yes Yes No No
Manual Station (PID-95, onal pull Alarm
Station PID-95P station
) monitore
d by
PID-95
Plenum Plenum PID-95 Conventi Fire Yes No No Yes
Det Det (PID-95, onal Alarm
PID-95P Plenum
) Smoke
Detector
monitore
d by
PID-95
N.O. N.O. PID-95 Any Fire Yes No No No
Contact Contact (PID-95, normally Alarm
s s PID-95P open
) contact
device
monitore
d by
PID-95
Heat Heat PID-95 Any Fire Yes No No No
Detector Detector (PID-95, conventi Alarm
PID-95P onal
) heat
detector
monitore
d by
PID-95
Sub Sub PID-95 Any Fire Yes No No Yes
Loop Loop (PID-95, conventi Alarm
PID-95P onal
) initiating
device
circuit
monitore
d by
PID-95
Waterflo Waterflo PID-95 Any Fire Yes No No No
w Sil w Sil (PID-95, waterflo Alarm
PID-95P w switch
) monitore

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 193

d by
PID-95.
Beam Beam PID-95 Any Fire Yes Yes No Yes
Smoke Smoke (PID-95, conventi Alarm
Det Det PID-95P onal
) beam
smoke
detector
monitore
d by
PID-95.
Duct Duct PID-95 Any Fire Yes No No Yes
Detector Detector (PID-95, conventi Alarm
PID-95P onal
) Duct
detector
monitore
d by
PID-95
FACP FACP PID-95 Any Fire Yes No No No
(PID-95, remote Alarm
PID-95P FACP
) Alarm
dry
contacts
monitore
d by
PID-95
Remote Remote CZI-95 Any Fire Yes No No Yes
Zone Zone (Non- conventi Alarm
(non- Interrupt onal
interrupti ing) initiating
ng) (CZI-95) device
circuit
monitore
d by
CZI-95
Smoke/ Smoke/ PID-95 Any Fire Yes No No Yes
Heat Heat (PID-95, conventi Alarm
Det Det PID-95P onal
) photo/
thermal
detector
monitore
d by
PID-95
Supervis Supervis PID-95 Any Supervis No No No No
ory Sw ory Sw (PID-95, normally ory

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

194 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

PID-95P open
) contact
initiating
device
monitore
d by
PID-95
Tamper Tamper PID-95 Any Supervis Yes No No No
Sw Sw (PID-95, normally ory
PID-95P open
) contact
initiating
device
monitore
d by
PID-95
Waterflo Waterflo PID-95 Any Fire Yes No No No
w NS w NS (PID-95, waterflo Alarm
PID-95P w switch (Non-sil
) monitore enceabl
d by e)
PID-95.
NR NR PID-95 Any Non- Yes No No No
Actuator Actuator (PID-95, normally reportin
L L PID-95P open g
) contact
initiating
device
monitore
d by
PID-95
NR NR PID-95 Any Non- No No No No
Actuator Actuator (PID-95, normally reportin
NL NL PID-95P open g
) contact
initiating
device
monitore
d by
PID-95
NAC NAC PID-95 Any Silence N/A N/A N/A N/A
Silence Silence (PID-95, normally Switch
Sw Sw PID-95P open
) contact
initiating
device
monitore
d by
PID-95

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 195

Reset Reset PID-95 Any Reset N/A N/A N/A N/A

Sw Sw (PID-95, normally Switch
PID-95P open
) contact
initiating
device
monitore
d by
PID-95
Fire Drill Fire Drill PID-95 Any Alarm N/A N/A N/A N/A
Sw Sw (PID-95, normally Acknowl
PID-95P open edge
) contact Switch
initiating
device
monitore
d by
PID-95
Alarm Alarm PID-95 Any Alarm N/A N/A N/A N/A
Ack Sw Ack Sw (PID-95, normally Acknowl
PID-95P open edge
) contact Switch
initiating
device
monitore
d by
PID-95
Trbl Ack Trbl Ack PID-95 Any Trouble N/A N/A N/A N/A
Sw Sw (PID-95, normally Acknowl
PID-95P open edge
) contact Switch
initiating
device
monitore
d by
PID-95
Addr. Manual MS-95 / MS-95 Fire Yes Yes No No
Manual Station MS-95 T Address Alarm
Station (MS-95, able pull
MS-95T) station
Remote Remote CZI-95 Any Fire Yes No No Yes
Zone Zone (Interrup conventi Alarm
(Interrup ting) onal
ting) (CZI-95) initiating
device
circuit
monitore
d by
CZI-95

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 196 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Control Elements -

Control Device Device Type As Physical Description Silenceable?

Type Reported By Device Type
Panel

Signal AOM Sil NAC AOM Sil SCE-95 Supervised Yes

(SCE-95) signal control
element, such
as SCE-95.
Signal AOM NS NAC AOM NS SCE-95 Supervised No
(SCE-95) signal control
element, such
as SCE-95.
Form C AOM Sil Form C AOM Sil RCE-95 Form-C Dry Yes
(RCE-95) Contact control
element, such
as RCE-95.
Form C AOM Form C AOM RCE-95 Form-C Dry No
NS NS (RCE-95) Contact control
element, such
as RCE-95.
Building Ctrl Building Ctrl BCE-95 Building Control No
(BCE-95) Element, such
as BCE-95.

4.4.3 Disable Groups

The E3 Series has the ability to disable groups of input devices and output devices based on
the evaluation of CAM expressions. There are three classifications of Disable Groups that
are available:

1.) Disable Input Groups - When the CAM expression for the indicated Input Group goes
TRUE, all devices assigned to the Input Group will enter DISCONNECT trouble and will
become disabled.

2.) Disable Output Groups - When the CAM expression for the indicated Output Group goes
TRUE, all devices assigned to the Output Group will enter DISCONNECT trouble and will
become disabled.

3.) Disable Type Tags - Disable Type Tags allow both input and output devices to be
disabled with the activation of one CAM expression. Disable Type Tags, which range in
number from 600-699, may be assigned to the third and/or fourth Input/Output Group
assignment of a device. When the CAM expression for the indicated Disable Type Tag goes
TRUE, all devices assigned to the Disable Type Tag will enter DISCONNECT trouble and
will become disabled.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (Apollo) 197

4.4.4 DACT Reporting Codes

One of the features of S3 Series systems is the ability to configure Custom DACT Reporting
Codes that are reported when the DACT-E3 is using either Ademco Contact ID or SIA
formats. This feature allows better identification of system events at the central station
receiver allowing for faster response to system events by appropriate personnel.

This feature is not enabled by default. To enable this feature, the user must do the
following:

1.) Open the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3 or ILI95-MB-E3 node that hosts the DACT-E3.

2.) For ILI-MB-E3 or ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, open the DACT Settings screen. For S3 Series
FACP nodes, select the General Settings screen and then select the DACT Settings tab.
Ensure that the DACT Enabled checkbox is checked.

3.) Select the "Use Custom (per-device) reporting codes" option.

4.) Configure custom codes using the Input Devices and Output Devices screens.

NOTE: If this feature is not enabled, the DACT-E3 will use the "Standard" reporting code
format, which is similar to the format used by the 7100.

NOTE: Only events reported from NGA, S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series or ILI95-E3 Series nodes
will be reported using the "custom" reporting code format. Events originating from all
other node types will use the "Standard" reporting code format, which is similar to the
format used by the 7100.

NOTE: All ILI-MB-E3 and ILI-S-E3 nodes in a network must contain at least V1.2 firmware
in order to take advantage of this feature. All ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3 nodes are
already compatible with this feature and do not require a firmware upgrade. All S3 Series
nodes are already compatible with this feature and do not require a firmware upgrade.
NGA nodes require at least V3.00 firmware in order to issue events that include "custom"
reporting codes.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

Part

V
 S3 Series (System Sensor) 199

5 S3 Series (System Sensor)

5.1 Basic steps in configuring an S3 Series Panel
5.1.1 Programming node-wide parameters and defaults
There are many global programming options available in the S3 Series system. Most of
these options have been initialized to default settings when the project was created and
initialized. These default settings should be appropriate for a basic S3 Series configuration.
However, any or all of these parameters may be modified to suit the needs of any individual
custom configuration.

To modify any of these settings, select the appropriate icons under the current S3 Series
node in the Project Explorer 56 .

NAC Settings 227

General Settings 216
DACT Options 221

The following settings, located in Project Globals, will affect the S3 Series (System Sensor)
FACP:
Passwords 35
User Defined Types 36
Miscellaneous Globals 41
Display Priorities 41

The following Regional Settings will affect the S3 Series (System Sensor) FACP:
Night/Weekend/Holiday Schedule 43

Finally, there are settings on the Silence Settings 44 and Node Summary 57 screens that
also affect the S3 Series (System Sensor) FACP.

After completing globals programming, you're ready to continue with "Programming loop
devices and groups".
5.1.2 Programming loop devices and groups
Each S3 Series (System Sensor) FACP can have up to two SLC's. There are 318 total
addresses available for programming on each SLC. The device addresses for each loop
include 1 - 159 for sensors and 1 - 159 for modules (AMMs and AOMs).

NOTE: Addresses above 99 may only be used in the following two cases:

1.) No 7100 nodes are present in the network.

2.) SLC Loops on this S3 Series FACP are using the Velociti protocol.

NOTE: It is possible to use the full address range provided by the Velociti protocol on

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 200 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

E3 Series/S3 Series nodes using Velociti even if other E3 Series/S3 Series nodes are
using CLIP Mode, as long as there are no 7100 panels in the network.

Each device address has a number of programmable options available. These include
options such as Device Type, Input Group (if the device is a sensor or a monitor module),
Output Group (if the device is an output module), Description Label, etc.

To program the device types and I/O groups for each address, select the Devices screen
from the Project Explorer 56 and then select either the Input Devices 230 (all sensors and
monitor modules) or Output Devices 236 (all output modules) tab at the top of the window.

The entry screens for these types are very similar. The main difference is the list of device
types that are available on each entry screen.

See Input Devices 230 and Output Devices 236 for programming information on these entry
screens.

After completing SLC devices and groups entries, continue to "Entering Labels and
modifying default settings for SLC devices"
5.1.3 Entering labels and modifying default settings for loop devices
To enter labels for each loop device, select either the Input Devices (all sensors and AMM's)
or Output Devices (all AOM's) icon from the Project Explorer 56 .

To enter a label or modify the global default settings for any device, select the appropriate
device from the grid. Labels may be entered for each address in the description label entry
field. Labels can be up to 40 characters in length.

Other fields can also can be modified by address on the entry grid. Click on the following
help links to view programming information for the various device types.

Input Devices 230

Output Devices 236

For a description of the Group I/O concept, see Input/Output Groups

5.1.4 Downloading System Configuration
In order to perform a configuration download to the system, a connection must be made
between the RS-232 port on the PC/Laptop to either the RJ11 connector of any INI-7100
node or to the serial port on an S3 Series FACP, NGA, ANX-SR, ANX-MR or ILI-E3 Series
node that may be present in the system before attempting to download. If an S3 Series
FACP, ANX-SR or ANX-MR is available, the Ethernet port may also be used for downloads
via TCP/IP.

NOTE: Downloads to Standalone 7100 panels or Standalone E3 Series systems may only
be made via the panel's local serial port. Downloads to Standalone S3 Series system may
be made via the panel's local serial port or its Ethernet port.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 201

The following options on the Download screen are applicable to configuration downloads:

Port Options -
Select whether the download should be made via TCP/IP (Ethernet) or RS-232 (Comm).
This option is available only when the selected Gateway is an ANX or S3 Series FACP.

NOTE: It is not possible to download to INI-7100 nodes via Ethernet.

Select Comm Port -

Select the serial port to be used to connect to the system. Available COM ports range from
COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection option is also available. If selected, the
auto-detection will attempt to determine which of the PC's serial ports is connected to an
appropriate node. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct serial port it will be
necessary to manually select the correct port. This selection field is unavailable if the user
has opted to connect to the system via TCP/IP (Ethernet).

Enter IP Address -
If the user has opted to connect to the system via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the
IP address of the S3 Series FACP, ANX-SR or ANX-MR that is connected to the system.
This selection field is unavailable if the user has opted to connect via RS-232 (Comm).

Download Gateway -
You must select whether your computer is connected to an INI-7100 node, an S3 Series
FACP, an ILI-E3 Series node/NGA or to an ANX. For 7100 Standalone, S3 Series
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects, this field is not available since the PC must be
connected directly to the panel. An auto-detection option is also available. If the
auto-detection fails to determine the correct download gateway the download gateway
selection must be made manually.

NOTE: In order to download to S3 Series or E3 Series nodes such as the NGA and the
ILI-MB-E3 via RS-232, you MUST connect your computer to the serial port of an
E3-compatible node. All other node types can be downloaded from either an INI-7100 or
an E3-compatible node. All node types may be downloaded via the ANX's RS-232 port or
Ethernet port.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

Show CAM Memory Usage -

If this option is selected, CAMWorks will display a screen indicating how much of the
available CAM memory is being used by the current configuration after all of the CAMs for
the current node have been translated.

Save Configuration In Binary Format -

This option, intended only for diagnostic use, saves a binary file containing an exact image
of the target node's configuration database. This option should only be used at the
discretion of Gamewell-FCI Technical Support 932 personnel.

Select Application Type To Download -

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 202 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

In this section of the screen, CAMWorks presents several options for selecting what data to
download to the target panel. In the case of downloading configuration data to the target
panel, the "Configuration" option button must always be selected. The following options
appear when the user elects to perform a configuration download:

Send CAMs - When selected, CAMWorks will download CAMs to the selected node.
Send Device Labels / CAM Text (NGA nodes only) - When selected, CAMWorks
will download SLC device labels or CAM Text messages to the selected node.
Send Virtual Switch Labels (S3 Series FACP and ANX nodes only) - When
selected, CAMWorks will download Virtual Switch labels to the selected node.
Send Configuration - When selected, CAMWorks will download the configuration to
the selected node.
Download Screen Saver (NGA Only) - When selected, CAMWorks will download
images to the NGA for use as a screen saver.
Download Logo (NGA Only) - When selected, CAMWorks will download a user
supplied image that will be displayed on the System Normal screen.

Download -
Click on this button to begin the download. The user will be prompted to enter the system
Level 4 access code before the download will begin. If all goes well, the Download process
will continue until completed. The panel will reset following a successful download.

NOTE: If the system has not been previously configured, you should enter the system
default level 4 password. If a custom level 4 password has already been downloaded to
the panel, then that code should be entered instead.

Close -
Click on this command button to exit this screen.

Validation -
Click on this button to open the Program Validation 49 screen to scan the current project for
known types of configuration errors.

7100 Upload -
Click on this button upload a configuration from a 7100 panel. This function is only available
for 7100 Standalone projects. See this page 870 for more information.
5.1.5 Printing/Viewing configuration data tables
There are two options available for printing configuration files in CAMWorks. To print all
reports at once, right-click the current node icon in the Project Explorer 56 and select Print
Node. To view or print individual reports, click on the current node icon in the Project
Explorer 56 to bring up the Report Viewer window. In this screen, any available report can
be selected for viewing or printing.

5.2 S3 Series - How Do I

5.2.1 Include Output in system General Output List
To place a NAC circuit or Municipal circuit in a General Output List, select the the General
Settings 109 icon the Project Explorer 53 and then select the NAC Settings 119 tab. In the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 203

data entry grid there are checkboxes for each of the General Output Lists. To assign an
output to a list, Click the checkbox to select that item.

To place an AOM in a General Output List, select the Device icon from the Project Explorer
56 and then select the Output Devices 236 tab icon from Project Explorer 56 and follow the

same procedure outlined above.

5.2.2 Assign specific input to output relationships

To assign specific outputs to be activated by certain initiating devices, Input/Output Groups
must be used.

By assigning individual inputs and outputs to groups the user is able to create relationships
between these groups.

Input devices can be assigned to as many as four input groups (group 1-99, 300-499) in the
Input Devices screen.

SLC output devices may be assigned to as many as four CAM controlled group (group
125-224, 500-599) in the Output Devices screen.

Built-in outputs, such as the Notification Appliances and the Municipal Circuit may be
assigned to as many as four CAM controlled group (group 125-224, 500-599) in the NAC
Settings screen.

NOTE: The E3 Series and S3 Series FACPs do not have any direct linkage
between input groups and output groups. All custom input/output relationships
must be done through Conditional Action Maps (CAMs) 21 .

On S3 Series Standalone systems, the Input/Output Relation 215 screen can be used as
method of creating the CAM expressions. The traditional CAM Output Group 245 screen may
also be be used.
5.2.3 Create a custom display banner for panel
The System ID Label appears on the panel display when the system is in "System Normal"
condition. This label will also appear as a header for any event report that originates from
this node. Any node that prints the event through it's serial port will include this information.

The System ID Label is configured in the Node Summary 57 screen, which is called System
Overview for non-networked projects. Enter the label text in the System ID Label text box.
This label can be up to 19 characters in length and may not be blank. Click on the Save
button to save the entry.
5.2.4 Create my own SLC device types
The E3 Series and S3 Series allow the user to define up to forty User Defined device types.
The first ten are 7100 compatible User Defined Device Types and are restricted to AMM
modules only. The remaining User Defined Device Types allow much greater flexibility.

The User Defined Device Types are configured on a project-level instead of the node-level.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 204 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

To access these settings, you must access the User Defined Types screen, which may be
found in the Project Globals 35 > Network Settings 35 > User Defined Types 36 tab in The
Ribbon 27 , or by accessing the User Defined Types 62 icon, which is under the Network
Settings 61 icon under Project Globals 61 in the Project Explorer 56 .
5.2.5 Disable downloading for a particular SLC address?
Some projects may have to be completed in phases. CAMWorks allows the user to
configure all of the points in the system and download only those devices that are physically
present in the system at any given time.

The Input Devices and Output devices screens contain an Active field. The Active field
contains an icon that may be toggled by double-clicking or by pressing the space bar when
the field has the focus (the background of the field will be highlighted when the field has the
focus). The icon itself will turn green to indicate that that address is active, or gray to
indicate that the address is inactive. When downloading a configuration, the inactive
devices will be skipped. When the inactive devices are ready to be downloaded, just toggle
the Active icons back to green, and they will be sent to the panel.
5.2.6 Disable DACT-E3
If the DACT-E3 is present in the system, the DACT Settings screen can be used to
configure the DACT-E3. In CAMWorks, the DACT-E3 is enabled automatically. To disable
the DACT-E3, Select the General Settings screen under the S3 Series FACP node icon in
the Project Explorer 53 and then select the DACT Settings tab. Then, uncheck the Enable
DACT checkbox. After completing entry, click on the Save button. The DACT-E3 should now
be disabled.

NOTE: If the Enable DACT option is unchecked, the DACT-E3 is not supervised, and no
event transmissions are attempted. This option must be set to Off (unchecked) for nodes
with no DACT-E3 present.
5.2.7 View selected reports in a window
To view or print individual reports for the current node, select the node's icon in the Project
Explorer 56 . A Report Viewer window will appear in the main area 53 . Select the report of
interest from the drop-down list and then click the Show Report command button.

This feature displays the reports exactly as they will be printed. If the report contains multiple
pages, you can move among the pages by clicking on the Move Next > and the Move
Previous < arrows located at the top of the screen.

To print the report, click on the Printer icon ( ) on the toolbar at the top of the Report
Viewer window.
5.2.8 Create Zone Codes
Zone Coding allows an FACP to produce a distinct coded pattern on it's NAC outputs, based
upon the particular input device or cross zone that caused the alarm condition.

The S3 Series supports up to 63 different codes, each of which may be configured for any
pattern of two, three, or four digits. The digits may range from 1 to 14 pulses. After the
necessary codes are entered in the Zone Code screen (which can be accessed via the Zone

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 205

Code icon under the current node's icon in the Project Explorer 56 ), they can be associated
with individual input devices and cross zones in the appropriate entry screen (i.e. Input
Devices and Cross Zones). Multiple inputs may be assigned to run the same code, if
desired, or each input may have a unique code (up to a limit of 63 different codes).

To set the pulses for a particular zone code, simply select the digit in the entry grid and
choose the appropriate number of pulses for each digit from the drop-down list.
5.2.9 Setup a cross zone
The S3 Series provides up to 30 cross zones. There are two types of cross zones available.
One type is groups cross zoning, and the other is point cross zoning.

Point Cross Zone – A Point Cross Zone is a collection of individual points configured into a
virtual cross zone group. Point Cross Zoning provides a two-stage fire alarm condition
where the first alarm in the virtual group initiates an Action condition. The second stage
alarm is triggered when the number of alarms in the virtual cross zone group has reached a
pre-set trigger level (user programmable).

Point Cross Zone Programming:

1.) In the Cross Zone screen, select the desired Cross Zone by clicking on the cross
zone number on the left.
2.) Click on the "..." button under the "Config" column to assign devices to the cross
zone. Click Save and then Close when done.
3.) A selection window will open that will display all devices on the current node that are
eligible to be used for cross zoning. Devices may be selected by placing a check
mark in the selection field (labeled "Sel").
4.) Click the Add button to add the devices to the cross-zone. Devices are removed
from the grid when they are added to the cross zone. Devices can be removed from
the cross zone later if desired.
5.) Click Close to dismiss the Add Devices window.
6.) Select the desired options for each virtual cross zone group. See this page 238 for
more information.

Group Cross Zone – The S3 Series system provides group cross zoning by assigning Input
Groups on S3 Series FACP, ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series nodes directly to a cross
zone. The total number of point cross zone and group cross zone virtual groups is thirty
groups in any mixture. The system will increment the trigger count when any of the
associated input groups are activated.

NOTE: If an individual Cross Zone input is non-latching, each time it activates it will
increase the trigger count. This means that if the input activates, restores and re-activates
it will increment the trigger count twice.

Group Cross Zone Programming:

1.) In the Cross Zone screen, select the desired Cross Zone by clicking on the cross
zone number on the left.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 206 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

2.) Select the "Group" Cross zone type for each cross zone that is being used as a
group cross zone.
3.) Click on the "..." button under the "Config" column .
4.) Assign the desired Input Groups to the Cross Zone. Click Save and then Close
when done.

NOTE: Both a node and a group number must be specified. The node must be an S3
Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 or ILI95-S-E3.

NOTE: The selected input groups must have devices assigned to it before configuring
cross zoning.

NOTE: Only certain device types are eligible for cross zoning. See the following pages
for information about compatible device types:

S3 Series (System Sensor) Device Types 294

S3 Series (Apollo) Device Types 188

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 545

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Module Device Types 565

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 426

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Element Device Types 429

NOTE: Verification and PAS cannot be mixed with Cross Zoning.

3.) Set the desired trigger level for the cross zone.
4.) Select the desired options for each virtual cross zone group. See this page 238 for
more information.
5.) Click Save to save all of the changes.

NOTE: If a system is to use both by group and by point cross zoning, input devices must
not be shared by both types of cross zoning as this could lead to unexpected results.

Typically, a general fire alarm is activated when the configured trigger level is met.
However, the response to the Cross Zone activation is programmable via the Configure
Cross Zones screen. Regardless of user programming, the node will set bits in its
associated extended system status map for a Pre-alarm on a cross zone and for a Cross
Zone activation.

5.3 S3 Series - Configuration Screens

5.3.1 Miscellaneous
NOTE: This screen appears under the S3 Series FACP only for S3 Series Standalone
projects. For networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Network Settings 61

\Miscellaneous 66 .

The following system-wide settings are configured through the Miscellaneous screen:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 207

Trouble Reminder - If this option is enabled then acknowledged trouble events will be
periodically "unacknowledged". This means that the system's buzzer will be turned back on
and the System Trouble LED will blink as if a new trouble condition were being reported.

Multiple Trouble Acknowledge - Turning this option on will allow up to ten trouble
conditions to be acknowledged with one Trouble Acknowledge command.

Action Condition Acknowledged By - This configuration option selects whether the

Trouble Acknowledge button is used to acknowledge Action (pre-alarm) conditions or the
Alarm Acknowledge button is used to acknowledge Action conditions. This setting defaults
to the Alarm Acknowledge button. This setting is not available when 7100 nodes are
present in the network.

Walk Test Timeout - The Walk Test timeout will cause the system to automatically cancel
the Walk Test mode if it isn't manually turned off. This value may be (30, 60, 90, 120 or 180
Minutes) .

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.2 SLP Miscellaneous

NOTE: This screen appears only when an S3 Series Standalone project is open.

The SLP Miscellaneous screen incorporates four tabs. These tabs include:

User Defined Types 207

Display Priorities 212
Passwords 213
Night/Weekend/Holiday Schedule 214

5.3.2.1 User Defined Types

NOTE: This screen appears under the S3 Series FACP only for S3 Series Standalone
projects. For networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Network Settings 61

\User Defined Device Types 62 .

The E3 Series and S3 Series FACPs provides a great degree of flexibility for user defined
device types. In the past, the User Defined AMM Types in the 7100 were configured at the
individual node level. This function has been combined with the E3 Series/S3 Series User
Defined Device Types into one configuration screen.

Device types 48-55 are reserved for 7100 User Defined Device Types. In the grid, the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

208 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

device type number is highlighted in yellow for these device types.

NOTE: These device types can be used with 7100 nodes, ILI-E3 Series nodes and S3
Series (System Sensor) FACPs, but not with ILI95-E3 Series nodes or S3 Series (Apollo)
FACPs.

The options available for each user defined type are as follows:

SLC Type - Select whether this device type should be a System Sensor or Apollo device
type. This selection may or may not be available, depending on the nodes that are present
in the current project.

NOTE: This setting is fixed to "System Sensor" for the 7100 User Defined Device Types.

User Defined Device Type - This identifies what the physical device type is for this user
defined type. The following device types are available:

Available User Defined Device Types for the 7100:

User Defined Device Type Description Allowed Response Types

AMM Module Addressable Monitor See AMM Modules.

Module, used to monitor any
normally open contact
device.

Available Physical Device Types for the ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3 and S3 Series (System Sensor)
FACPs:

User Defined Device Description Allowed in CLIP Allowed Response

Type Mode Types
No Device Used to indicate Yes See No Device.
there is no device
type configured.
Ion Sensor Analog/addressable Yes See Ion Sensors.
Ion smoke detectors,
such as the ASD-
IL2F.
Photo Sensor Analog/addressable Yes See Photo Sensors.
Photoelectric smoke
detectors, such as
the ASD-PL2F.
Thermal Sensor Analog/addressable Yes See Thermal
Thermal sensors, Sensors.
such as the ATD-L2F
(standard

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 209

temperature), ATD-
HL2F (high
temperature) or
ATD-RL2F (rate of
rise).
Acclimate Sensor Analog/addressable Yes * See Acclimate
multi-criteria sensor, Sensors.
such as MCS-
Acclimate2F.
AMM Module Addressable Monitor Yes See AMM Modules.
Module, used to
monitor any normally
open contact device.
Signal Module Notification Yes See NAC Modules.
Appliance/Speaker
Circuit Control
Module, such as the
AOM-2SF or MMO-
6SF
Form-C Module Form-C Dry Contact Yes See Form-C Modules
Module, such as .
AOM-2RF or MMO-
6RF.
CLIP Laser Sensor Analog/Addressable Yes See CLIP Laser
High Sensitivity Sensors.
NOTE: This device Photoelectric smoke
type is supported in detectors, such as
both Velociti and ASD-LS.
CLIP modes, even
though the device
itself only supports
CLIP mode.
Photo/Thermal Analog/addressable Yes See Photo/Thermal
Sensor Photoelectric/ Sensors.
Thermal sensor,
such as ASD-PTL2F.
Zone Module Addressable Monitor Yes See Zone Modules.
Module, such as
AMM-4SF, used to
monitor certain two-
wire conventional
smoke detectors.
See Gamewell-FCI
Compatibility
Addendum (P/N:
9000-0427) for more
details.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

210 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Manual Station Addressable Manual Yes See Manual Station

Module Station, such as the Modules.
MS-7AF.
Intelligent Beam Analog/addressable No See Intelligent Beam
Detector Beam Photoelectric Detectors.
Smoke Detector,
such as ABD-2F.
Vel Laser Sensor Analog/Addressable No See Verlociti Laser
High Sensitivity Sensors.
Photoelectric smoke
detectors.
4-Warn Sensor Velociti Series No See 4-Warn Sensors
combination smoke, .
carbon monoxide,
temperature and
flame detector.
Photo/CO Sensor Velociti Series multi- No See Photo/CO
criteria sensor, with Sensors.
carbon monoxide
detection and
reporting, such as
the MCS-COF.
Intelligent FAAST System Sensor No See Intelligent
Sensor Intelligent Aspirating FAAST Sensors.
(Single-Channel) Smoke Detector
Intelligent FAAST System Sensor No See Intelligent
Sensor Intelligent Multi- FAAST Sensors.
(Multi-Channel) Channel Aspirating
Smoke Detector

Available User Defined Device Types for the ILI95-MB-E3, ILI95-S-E3 and S3 Series
(Apollo) FACPs:

User Defined Device Type Description Allowed Response Types

No Device Used to indicate there is no See No Device.
device type configured.
Ion Sensor Analog/addressable Ion See Ion Sensors.
smoke detectors, such as
the XP95-I.
Optical Sensor Analog/addressable See Photo Sensors.
Photoelectric smoke
detectors, such as the XP95-
P.
Temperature Sensor Analog/addressable Thermal See Thermal Sensors.
sensors, such as the XP95-

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 211

T.
Multi-Sensor Analog/addressable multi- See Multi-Sensors.
criteria sensor, such as the
XP95-M.
PID-95 Point Identification Device See Point Identification
used to monitor any normally Devices.
open contact device.
SCE-95 Signal Control Element used See Signal Control Elements
to control Notification .
Appliance Circuits.
RCE-95 Relay Control Element that See Relay Control Elements.
provides one Form-C Dry
Contact.
BCE-95 Building Control Element See Building Control
that provides two Form-C Elementsol Elements.
Dry Contacts for On/Off/Auto
(HOA) operation.
MS-95 / MS-95 T Addressable Manual Station. See Manual Station
Elements.
CZI-95 (Non-Interrupting) Conventional Zone Interface, See Conventional Zone
used to monitor certain two- Interfaces.
wire conventional smoke
detectors. See Gamewell-
FCI Compatibility Addendum
(P/N: 9000-0427) for more
details.
CZI-95 (Interrupting) Conventional Zone Interface, See Conventional Zone
used to monitor certain two- Interfaces.
wire conventional smoke
detectors. See Gamewell-
FCI Compatibility Addendum
(P/N: 9000-0427) for more
details.

System Response Type - Selects the desired response to an activation from this device
type. See tables above for information about the available response types for each physical
device type.

Description - The text that will be associated with this User Defined Type. This will be used
for both on-screen and printed event reports. This description may be up to fourteen
characters in length.

Silenceable - This option applies only when the physical device type is set to Signal Module,
Form-C Module, SCE-95 or RCE-95. This indicates whether this device type can be

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 212 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

silenced or not.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.2.2 Display Priorities

NOTE: This screen appears under the S3 Series FACP only for S3 Series Standalone
projects. For networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Network Settings 61

\Display Priorities 67 .

NOTE: These settings apply to S3 Series FACP, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3 Series
and NGA nodes only.

The S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3 Series and NGA displays conform to UL 864 9th
edition and UL 2572 1st edition event display requirements. The most significant change
from the 7100 display is that concurrent events do not automatically scroll. Instead, the
display always shows the earliest (oldest) event of the highest priority present in the system
(or region), unless the user scrolls the events manually.

Since events do not scroll, the behavior of the display depends entirely on what priority the
system assigns to each event. These priorities can be modified in this screen. Note that
this only configures how events are DISPLAYED. To configure a different system response,
a User Defined Type 36 should be used instead.

Each system condition listed has both an Acknowledged and Unacknowledged priority.
Typically, the Unacknowledged priority for each condition is of a higher priority than its
Acknowledged priority. The system has e ight different priority levels, ranging from Level 1
to Level 8. Level 1 is the lowest priority level, while Level 8 is the highest priority level.

The following system conditions may be assigned new display priorities:

ALARM - Fire Alarm Conditions

CO/GAS ALARM - CO/Gas alarm conditions.
MNS ALARM - Mass Notification alarm conditions.
ACTION - Action (pre-alarm) Conditions. This applies to multi-level devices, Cross Zones
and other pre-alarm conditions.
SUPERVISORY- All Supervisory Off-Normal and Tamper conditions.
MNS SUPERVISORY - All Supervisory Off-Normal and Tamper conditions related to
mass-notification devices.
TROUBLE - All System Trouble conditions.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 213

MNS TROUBLE - All System Trouble conditions conditions related to mass-notification

devices

NOTE: The priority settings for MNS Alarm, MNS Trouble and MNS Supervisory only
affect NGA nodes.

These settings are automatically configured for ALL S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3
Series and NGA nodes in the system, therefore all S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3 Series
and NGA nodes will have the same set of display priorities once they have all been
downloaded.

To change a priority, click and drag its slider and move it to the left or to the right. Moving a
slider to the right gives the event a higher priority, while sliding it to the left gives it a lower
priority. The currently selected priority level is displayed to the right of the slider.

NOTE: To revert all Display Priority settings to their UL approved settings, click either
the "MNS Overrides Fire" or "Fire Overrides MNS" button at the top of the window.

NOTE: These settings should be left to their default settings, unless there is a
specific need to change them.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.2.3 Passwords

NOTE: This screen appears under the S3 Series FACP only for S3 Series Standalone
projects. For networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Network Settings 61

\Passwords 61 .

The system allows four levels of password access to prevent unauthorized modification of
critical system functions. In addition, the system supports a maximum of five different
passwords for each of the four access levels to provide for unique identification of up to five
different users. Each password must be numeric and may range from (000001 - 999999).
The value of 000000 is not allowed.

There are four levels of access granted by the system. These are Level 1, Level 2, Level 3,
and Level 4. Level 4 grants the user the greatest amount of access, while Level 1 grants the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 214 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

least amount of access.

NOTE: The Level 4 Password may not be set to any of the standard default passwords
(111111, 222222, 333333 or 444444.)

There are five different users available, labeled as Users 1-5. This allows the user to create
five different sets of passwords (one for each access level.) The system's history log will
indicate which user gained access to the system when unique passwords are assigned to
each user.

NOTE: Even though CAMWorks requires the user to assign a non-default Level 4
password, it is still highly recommended to change the remaining system passwords to
non-default values.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.2.4 Night/Weekend/Holiday Schedule

NOTE: This screen appears under the S3 Series FACP only for S3 Series Standalone
projects. For networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Regional Settings
70 \Night/Weekend/Holiday Schedule 70 .

In S3 Series systems, you can optimize the sensitivity of the sensors for particular times
during the day, on weekends and on holidays. This can be used to increase sensitivity for
those times when a building is not in use. When the system's real-time clock reaches a
configured time or day, the system will automatically begin to use the Night Sensitivity
settings configured for each sensor. In addition, any Fire alarm that occurs during this time
will activate the General Night Alarm output list as well as both SSM bit 440 (Day Alarm or
Night Alarm) and SSM bit 441 (Night Alarm.)

NOTE: These settings affect the fire alarm response only.

Night Schedule - Select Night Start and Night Stop operation times from the drop-down
lists. During the programmed times, the sensors will operate with the defined Night
Sensitivity settings.

Weekend Schedule - Define weekend days for night sensitivity operation by checking the
appropriate days.

Holiday Schedule - Configure Holidays for Night sensitivity operation by clicking on the
calendar icon ( ). A calendar will be displayed. Select the holiday by clicking on the day of

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 215

the month. The user can move through the calendar by clicking on the arrow icons located
at the top of the calendar. The user may enter up to sixteen holidays. Dates can be cleared
by placing a check in the "Sel" column next to the appropriate holiday and clicking the Clear
button at the bottom of the window.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.3 Input Output Relation

NOTE: This screen appears only when an S3 Series Standalone project is open.

The Input/Output Relation Screen is a new way to easily build CAM 21 expressions that link
together input and output devices. The screen is composed of three sections:

1.) A list of all input devices. The list includes the node number, device address, device type
and all groups assigned to those devices.

2.) A set of command buttons labeled "OR", "AND", "NOT", "(" and ")".

3.) A list all output groups assigned to output groups on this node (if the "ALL" tab is
selected), or just those that already have CAMs written to them (if the "Configured" tab) is
selected.

The following tasks must be performed before one can build input/output relationships on
this screen.

1.) Assign one or more input devices of any type. These input devices must have at least
one input group assigned to them.

2.) Assign one or more output devices of a non-silenceable type to this node. Like the input
devices, each output device must have at least one output group assigned.

Once those two steps are taken care of, it is easy to begin the process of configuring
relationships between the input and output devices. To start, select the desired output
group from the list at the bottom of the screen. Once that is done, the row that contains the
selected output group will be highlighted yellow.

Then, select one of the input groups from the grid at the top of the screen. The term "NxGy"
will appear appended to the CAM expression for the selected output group. The "x" and "y"
numbers will vary based on the input device and input group chosen.

Next, select the desired logic operator (AND, OR or NOT) using one of the buttons.

This process can be repeated until the complete CAM expression has been built.

At any point, the user can manually edit any of the CAM expressions built on this screen
either directly on this screen (by clicking on the CAM expression in the list at the bottom of

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 216 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

the screen) or via the CAM Output Groups 245 screen.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.4 General Settings

The General Settings screen incorporates four tabs. These tabs include:

General Settings 216

DACT Settings 221
NAC Settings 227
Zone Code 229

5.3.4.1 General Settings

This entry screen contains various system options that pertain to this S3 Series (System
Sensor) FACP node. The entry fields are grouped as follows:

General Settings -

RS-232 Baud Rate - Sets the baud rate (measured in bits per second) used
by this node to communicate with serial devices. Selections range from
115,200 BPS down to 1,200 BPS.

NOTE: All Gamewell-FCI supplied software communicates with the S3

Series at 115,200 BPS. Setting SW1-Switch #5 on the S3 Series main
board to the ON position sets the serial port baud rate back to 115,200
BPS overriding custom programming.

RS-232 Printer Supervision Test Interval - As a part of the supervision of

the node's serial port, the system can print out test messages on a periodic
rate. This option allows you to change the frequency of this test from 1 hour
up to 21 hours. Selecting Disable will turn this feature off.

Enable Supervision of RS-232 Port For Use With - This setting should be
set according to what type of device is normally connected to the node's
serial port. This setting should be set to "Printer" if a printer is connected to
this node's serial port and trouble reporting for printer out of paper or printer
offline conditions is desirable. Set this option to "None" if no printer is
connected.

SLC Class A - Select this if the SLC loops are wired Class A (Style 6 or
Style 7).

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 217

PAS Night ByPass - If this setting is turned on, then devices configured for
Positive Alarm Sequence will automatically go into alarm during the defined
Night hours as well as the defined Weekend and Holiday days.

CLIP Mode - Checking this box enables the use of older FCI
analog/addressable smoke detectors and modules that use the older CLIP
protocol. This option is unchecked by default, enabling the use of Velociti
Series and SmartScan Series smoke detectors and modules. For more
information, see this page.

Inhibit Reset If Any Alarm Is Still Active -

When this option is enabled, the system will not allow a reset to take place if
the system is in alarm condition unless the device that originated the alarm is
no longer reporting an alarm condition. For example, if a manual station
initiated the alarm, the system cannot be reset until the manual station is
reset. In the case of a sensor, if the amount of smoke or heat detected by
the sensor decreases to below the device's alarm threshold the system will
reset. Otherwise, the system will not reset.

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to S3 Series Standalone projects.

Municipal Circuit is used for Releasing Service - When enabled, the word
"RELEASE" will be appended to displayed event reports when the Municipal
Circuit is activated. In addition, bit #414 in the System Status Map will be
true when the Municipal Circuit is activated. Finally, a Node 0 Regional
Releasing Status bit will be true if this node belongs to Region 24 0 - Region
24 31.

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone applications, the Regional Releasing

Status bit is not available.

Fast CAM Timers - When enabled, the CAM timers have a resolution of
one-half second. When disabled, CAM timers have a one-second resolution.

NOTE: Be aware that if a timer is defined using Advanced CAM

Programming 920 , the desired timer interval must be multiplied by two when
this setting is enabled.

Unique Buzzer Indication for Supervisory Conditions - When enabled,

the panel will chirp its buzzer in a different pattern for unacknowledged
supervisory conditions and unacknowledged alarm conditions. Compatible
firmware must be installed in all connected displays in order for this option to
affect their buzzers.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

218 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Inhibit Reset & Silence Following First Alarm - When enabled, the
system may not be silenced or reset for sixty seconds following an initial
alarm.

Sounder Base Settings -

NOTE: The following settings only affect B200S Sounder Bases.

NOTE: These settings are not available when CLIP Mode is selected.

Status Chirp during walk test - When enabled, B200S sounder bases
will produce a brief chirp sound when the sensor that it is connected to is
tested during walk test. If disabled, the B200S sounder bases will be
silent during walk test. This setting is independent of the "Sounder Base
Chirp Activates When" setting below and the individual sounder base chirp
settings in the Input Devices 230 screen.

Sounder base sync via SLC Loop 1 - When enabled, B200S sounder
bases on this Loop will be synchronized via commands sent by the panel
via the SLC. All three coded patterns (Temporal-3, Temporal-4 and March
Time) support being synchronized via the SLC. When disabled, the panel
does not send synchronization commands to the B200S sounder bases.

Sounder base sync via SLC Loop 2 - When enabled, B200S sounder
bases on this Loop will be synchronized via commands sent by the panel
via the SLC. All three coded patterns (Temporal-3, Temporal-4 and March
Time) support being synchronized via the SLC. When disabled, the panel
does not send synchronization commands to the B200S sounder bases.

NOTE: The B200S sounder bases also support synchronization of the

Temporal-3 coded pattern via a compatible System Sensor
synchronization module, NAC booster panel (such as the HPFF8 or
GFPS-9) or fire alarm control panel (FACP) NAC circuit. If this is being
done, the appropriate sync via SLC setting must be disabled.

Sounder Base Chirp Activates When - The B200S offers a periodic

status chirp feature. This provides local notification of non-alarm
events. This chirp is enabled for each sounder base on the Input
Devices 230 screen. There are several different conditions that may
activate the status chirp of a given sounder base. The sounder
bases may also be configured to chirp during walk test (see above).
The available settings are:

· The sounder base or the attached sensor is reporting a

trouble.
· The sounder base is reporting a trouble.
· The attached sensor is reporting a trouble.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 219

· The sounder base’s address does not match its attached

sensor’s address.

Sounder Base Chirp Interval - This setting specifies how frequently the
sounder bases will chirp when the chirp feature is activated. Valid settings
range from 5 seconds to 75 seconds (in five second increments).

LED Blink -

On - Checking this box will turn on the normal condition blinking for the
SLC devices LED's.

Off - Checking this box will turn off the normal condition blinking for the
SLC devices LED's.

Blink Rate - Because the Velociti series devices poll much faster than
standard SLC devices, the option exists to change the frequency of the
LED blink. Selecting 0 indicates the fastest blink rate, while 15 is the
slowest blink rate.

NOTE: This option is not available when using the CLIP protocol.

Delays/TimeOut -

NOTE: These delay and timing functions are only available if the NAC(s)
are NOT assigned to CAMable output groups.

NAC Cut Off Delay - This option allows the NAC circuits to be
automatically silenced after a set period of time. Note that this delay
begins after the silence inhibit delay ends. This setting may range from
No CutOff (meaning no delay is applied) to fifty (50) minutes (in five (5)
minute increments).

Silence Inhibit Delay - This setting will prevent the system from being
silenced after an alarm. This setting may range from No delay to
twenty-one (21) minutes (in two (2) minute increments).

Sequential Restart Delay - Specifies the number of seconds between

deactivation of sequential-restart AOM devices during a sequential restart.
This setting may range from No delay to twenty (20) seconds (in one (1)
second increments).

PAS Acknowledge Time - Select the time interval (in seconds) that the
panel will allow the user to acknowledge the alarm. If the fire alarm is not
acknowledged within this time interval the panel will cancel Positive Alarm
Sequence and go straight into fire alarm. This setting may range from 1 to

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

220 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

6553 seconds. This setting defaults to 15 seconds.

PAS Investigate Time - Select the time interval (in seconds) that the
panel will allow the user to investigate the source of the fire alarm once it
has been acknowledged. If the panel is not reset within this time interval
the system will go into fire alarm. However, if a subsequent fire alarm
occurs before this interval times out the system will go into fire alarm,
canceling the Positive Alarm Sequence. This setting may range from 1 to
6553 seconds. This setting defaults to 180 seconds.

Number of Annunciators/Displays -

LCD 7100 Annunciators - This sets the number of remote LCD-7100

displays connected to this S3 Series FACP node. Up to five LCD-7100
annunciators may be connected to an S3 Series FACP.

LCD E3 Displays - This option sets the total number of LCD-E3

keypad/displays that are connected to this S3 Series FACP node. The
system allows a maximum of six LCD-E3 displays per S3 Series FACP.

NOTE: LCD-SLP annunciators are configured on the Annunciators 243

screen.

Log Settings -

Enable Re-report Failed Logins - When enabled, a report of recent

access failed events will be printed to the panel's serial port upon a
successful login by a user. If the access is granted via CAMWorks, the
report will be displayed from within CAMWorks. The report will include
both the current and most recent previous access granted event as well as
all access failed events in between.

Log ASM/ANU/LCD-SLP Switch Activations - When enabled, the

system will produce a logged event when ASM-16, ANU-48 or LCD-SLP
switches on this node are activated and deactivated. These logged events
will be printed by a printer connected to this node, other nodes in the same
region as this node or on global reporting nodes, but will not be displayed.
These events can be viewed on-screen using the View Log menu.

NOTE: This setting requires all ILI and ILI95 nodes to have Version
3.2 firmware or later. All NGA nodes must have Version 3.10 firmware
or later. All ANX nodes must have Version 1.30 firmware or later. S3
Series FACP nodes require Version 1.10 firmware or later.

NOTE: Logged switch activations will not be reported on INI-7100

nodes.

NOTE: This setting is applicable to S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3 and

ILI95-MB-E3 node types only.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 221

Multilevel Percentage -

Alert Percentage - Sets the percent of alarm at which a multilevel Ion or

Photo sensor will issue an Alert condition.

Action Percentage - Sets the percent of alarm at which a multilevel Ion or

Photo sensor will issue an Action condition. This must be set to a higher
percentage than the Multilevel Alert Percentage.

Default Verification Settings -

Smoke Detector - This option selects the default sensor verification

setting. It can be set for automatic verification (Verify) or Positive Alarm
Sequence (PAS) or neither (None). When configuring sensors, they can
be set to accept this default setting or use a setting that overrides this
default setting.

Pull Station - This option selects the default manual station verification
setting. It can be set for Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS) or no verification
(None). When configuring manual stations, they can be set to accept this
default setting or use a setting that overrides this default setting.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.4.2 DACT Settings

General Settings -
Enable DACT - This setting is ON by default and enables
programming and supervision of the DACT-E3. Turn this setting
OFF if no DACT-E3 is connected. When disabled, all remaining
DACT configuration options on this screen are disabled.

NOTE: The system will report a DACT Missing trouble if this

setting is turned ON and no DACT-E3 is connected.

DACT Reporting In order to prevent "runaway" DACT situations,

Limits - such as in "Trouble/Restore" loops, event
reporting limits are normally configured to limit
the number of events that are reported by the
DACT.

Once an event reporting limit is reached the

DACT will not continue to report events until
either the panel is reset or until eight hours

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

222 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

have passed since the first DACT report of

any event type on the particular day. When the
reset or timeout occurs the panel will begin
reporting all types of events again.

The default values may be overridden as

follows:

Max # of Alarm Reports - This setting

configures the total number of fire alarm and
CO/Gas alarm reports that may be issued per
eight hour period by the DACT. This may be
set in the range from 5 to 315 reports per day
(in 5 step increments) or Unlimited. The
default setting is Unlimited.

Max Trouble - This setting configures the total

number of trouble reports that may be issued
per day by the DACT. This may be set in the
range from 5 to 155 reports per eight hour
period (in 5 step increments) or Unlimited.
The default setting is 10.

Max Supervisories - This setting configures

the total number of supervisory reports that
may be issued per day by the DACT. This
may be set in the range from 5 to 155 reports
per eight hour period (in 5 step increments) or
Unlimited. The default setting is 10.

NOTE: The DACT will not report events of a

given category once a DACT Reporting Limit
has been reached (such as 10 troubles
within an eight hour period). The DACT will
begin reporting events of a given category
again eight hours after the last event of a
given category has been reported or after
the . For example, if the "Max Trouble"
setting is set to 10, the DACT will begin
reporting troubles again eight hours after the
tenth trouble was reported.

DACT Report
Format -

Use Custom (per-device) reporting codes -

When enabled, the DACT-E3 will report the
node number and a custom three-digit code
(001-899) assigned to each point by the user.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 223

If a device does not have a code assigned, the

DACT-E3 will use the standard reporting format
for events that originate from the device.

NOTE: This setting only affects reports for

events that originate from compatible S3
Series FACP, NGA and ILI-E3 Series nodes.
Event reports from other node types will be in
the standard format.

NOTE: On standalone systems, the group

number (Tens and One's digit only) will be
reported instead of the Node number.

Use Standard (per node/per group)

reporting codes - When enabled, the
DACT-E3 will report the node number
(networked systems) or group number
(standalone systems) in addition to a one digit
event type code. This format is similar to that
used by the 7100.

NOTE: On standalone systems, only the

Tens and Ones digit of the group number is
transmitted via the DACT-E3. If more precise
reporting is required, Custom reporting codes
may be used instead.

DACT Account
Options -
There are two DACT accounts available for programming. Each
account has the following programmable options:

Format - The available formats are: SIA DCS 8, SIA DCS 20,
ADEMCO Contact ID, 4/2 1400Hz, 3/1 1400Hz, 3/1 2300Hz, and
4/2 2300 Hz. Select one from the drop-down list.

Report Alarm - Select Alarm event reporting option from

drop-down list, either OFF, CAN, or MUST.

Report Trouble - Select Trouble event reporting option from

drop-down list, either OFF, CAN, or MUST.

Report Tests - Select Test event reporting option from drop-down

list, either OFF, CAN, or MUST.

Report Supv - Select Supervisory event reporting option from

drop-down list, either OFF, CAN, or MUST.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

224 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Account Attempt - This option selects how many times the DACT
will attempt to connect with this account before giving up and
switching to the other account.

Account # - Enter the assigned account ID number in this field.

This number may be up to six digits in length.

NOTE: Not all of the supported reporting formats can actually

utilize the full six digits that the panel provides. Leading zeroes
must be entered for all account numbers that are less than six
digits. If more digits are entered than the selected reporting
format allows, only the least significant digits are transmitted.
The chart below indicates the maximum number of digits provided
for the account number in each of the supported formats.

Reporting Format Maximum Length of Account

Number
SIA DCS 8 / SIA DCS 20 6
ADEMCO Contact ID 4
4/2 1400 Hz / 4/2 2300 Hz 4
3/1 1400 Hz / 3/1 2300 Hz 3

CIC # - Enter dialing prefix for Account. The maximum number of

characters allowed is eight. This field is typically used if an access
code for a long distance carrier is required, or if certain calling
features, such as call waiting, need to be temporarily disabled
during the call. The maximum number of characters allowed is
eight.

NOTE: Besides the digits 0-9, the following special characters

may also be used:

Special Character Description

* Standard "*" key. May only be
used if Tone dialling is being
used.
# Standard "#" key. May only be
used if Tone dialling is being
used.
, Inserts a two (2) second pause
in the dialing sequence.
@ Instructs the DACT to wait until
a dial tone can be detected.
This option should only be used
if the DACT is connected to a
telephone system that is
compatible with North American
standards.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 225

Phone # - Enter phone number for the account. The maximum

number of characters allowed is sixteen.

NOTE: Besides the digits 0-9, the following special characters

may also be used:

Special Character Description

* Standard "*" key. May only be
used if Tone dialling is being
used.
# Standard "#" key. May only be
used if Tone dialling is being
used.
, Inserts a two (2) second pause
in the dialing sequence.
@ Instructs the DACT to wait until
a dial tone can be detected.
This option should only be used
if the DACT is connected to a
telephone system that is
compatible with North American
standards.

NOTE: If the MUST option is selected on both accounts for the

same report type (Alarms, Troubles, Supervisories), the
DACT-E3 will report events using both accounts. If this is not the
desired behavior, select the CAN option for one of the accounts.

DACT Phone Line

Options -
There are two DACT phone lines available for programming, Line
#1 and Line #2. There are two programmable options for each
phone line as follows:

Dialing Mode - Available options are: Tone or USA Rotary(40/60),

USA Rotary(40/60) Only, Tone Only, Tone or European
Rotary(33/67), and European Rotary(33/67) Only. Select the dialing
mode for line from the drop-down list.

Line Monitor - Line monitor is used to enable supervision of the

phone lines connected to the DACT. The DACT supervises the
phone lines in three ways:

1.) It measures the on-hook voltage coming from the phone

company.
2.) It periodically takes the phone line off-hook, measures the
off-hook voltage and puts the line back on-hook.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

226 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: The system will issue a Phone Line trouble if the DACT
measures an incorrect off-hook or on-hook voltage and/or is
unable to take the line off-hook.

3.) It will enable sending test signals to the configured accounts.

NOTE: The Line Monitor option must be set to ON to enable the

automatic Phone Line Test Time.

NOTE: The system makes a distinction between a "Line" and an

"Account". The system considers a "Line" to be a physical
twisted pair cable that connects the DACT to the telephone
company. The "Account" is the telephone number that the DACT
dials to report events to the designated central monitoring station.
The DACT will use either phone line to communicate to either
account.

DACT Test/Timing -
AC Fault Reporting Delay - Set number of hours to delay report of
AC failure. The delay may range from 1 to 31 hours.

Tests Per Day - Specifies the time interval between subsequent

tests after the first phone line test. 1 = 24 hours, 2 = 12 hours, 3 =
8 hours, and 4 = 6 hours. Select the number of tests per day from
the drop-down list.

First Phone Line Test - Specify the time of the first phone line
dial-out test each day. Test is enabled if either line has its Line
Monitor set to ON. Select phone line test time Hour and Minute
from drop-down lists for each item.

NOTE: The hour of the first phone line test can be configured as
follows, based on the number of tests per day.

Number of tests per day Hours allowed for first phone

line test

1 0-23
2 0-11
3 0-7
4 0-5

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 227

5.3.4.3 NAC Settings

This screen contains all settings that pertain to the panel's Notification Appliance Circuits,
the Municipal Circuit and the Coded Patterns used by the NAC's.

The following options are available for the Notification Appliance Circuits and the Municipal
Circuit:

Allow enable/disable of municipal circuit via display menus - When this option is
checked, users may manually enable or disable this node's built-in municipal circuit via the
front panel menus on the LCD-SLP, LCD-E3 or NGA. This option is unchecked by default.

NOTE: Enabling this option violates UL 864 9th edition.

Silenceable - Check this option to make this output device silenceable from the front panel.
(This option is not available for the Municipal Circuit).

Coded - Check this option to enable coding for this output device. (This option is not
available for the Municipal Circuit).

Sync - Check this option to enable synchronization of notification appliances connected to

this circuit. (This option is not available for the Municipal Circuit).

NOTE: NAC Circuits may not be configured for Coded and Sync operation at the same
time.

Day Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Day Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into afire alarm condition during the defined
day period, this list of outputs will be activated.

Night Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Night Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into fire alarm condition during the defined
night period, this list of outputs will be activated.

CO/Gas Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default CO/Gas Alarm
list. When any initiating device in the system goes into a CO or Gas alarm condition, this list
of outputs will be activated.

Action - Check this option to place this output in the system default Action list. When an
input defined as Multilevel reaches the programmed "Action" threshold, this list of outputs
will be activated.

Supv (Supervisory) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Supervisory
list. When any supervisory device in the system goes into an Off Normal condition, this list of
outputs will be activated.

WT Drill (Walk Test/Drill) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Walk
Test/Drill list. This list of outputs is activated for audible walk test or during a Fire Drill.

Trouble - Check this option to place this output in the system default Trouble list. When

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

228 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

there is a trouble condition in the system, this list of outputs will be activated.

Output Group(s) - The NACs and Municipal circuit can belong to as many as four output
groups. These groups range from 125 to 224 and 500-599 and are controlled by CAM logic.

NOTE: The third and fourth Output Group assignments may also be assigned to Disable
Type Tags, which range from 600 to 699. See this page 196 for more information on the
Group Disable feature.

Maufact. Sync Type - In order to synchronize notification appliances, the notification

appliance device type must be configured. The available device types are System Sensor,
Cooper-Wheelock, Gentex and Faraday.

Device Silence Option - When synchronized NAC's are silenced the system can take one
of two possible actions:

· Horn Only - Only the horns will be silenced when this option is selected.
· Horn and Strobe - Both horns and strobes will be silenced when this option is selected.

NOTE: If the Horn-only silence option is used, DO NOT silence the NAC circuit using
CAMs. Doing so will cause the circuit to completely turn off. Instead, use the
"Silenceable" checkbox to enable silencing of the NAC circuit.

The NAC Settings screen also includes the following Coded Patterns settings:

NOTE: The Coded Patterns section of the screen will appear disabled (grayed out) if
none of the Notification Appliance Circuits are configured for coded operation.

The user may set a different coded pattern for each of five system conditions. These coded
patterns selections apply only to the onboard NACS, and only if configured for coded
operation. Control elements cannot be coded.

To choose a coded pattern, click on the drop-down list for each condition and select one of
the available options. The default setting for each condition is Steady.

The available codes are Steady, March Time 60 BPM, March Time 120 BPM, Temporal
Pattern, California Code, and Coded 4's.

The four system conditions are:

Day Alarm - Selected code will run when a fire alarm condition occurs and the system is in
the Day operating hours.
Night Alarm - Selected code will run when a fire alarm condition occurs and the system is in
the Night operating hours.
Action - Selected code will run when a pre-alarm condition has been activated.
Supervisory - Selected code will run when a supervisory device goes off-normal.
CO/Gas Alarm - Selected code will run when a CO or gas alarm occurs.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 229

NOTE: The CO/Gas Alarm coded pattern is set to Coded 4's by default. All other
coded patterns are set to steady by default.

In addition to the four system conditions listed above, a fifth condition called "Post Code" is
available. This setting determines the code that the NAC circuits will run after zone coding
has completed. Any of the standard codes listed above may be used as a post-code. The
post-code may be enabled via the "NACs After Last Code" option on the General Settings
screen.

See this page 229 for more information about Zone Code options.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.4.4 Zone Code

Zone Coding allows an FACP to produce a distinct coded pattern on its NAC outputs, based
upon the particular input device or cross zone that caused the alarm condition.

The S3 Series supports up to 63 different codes, each of which may be configured for any
pattern of two, three, or four digits. The digits may range from 1 to 14 pulses. After the
necessary codes are entered in the Zone Code table (in the Zone Code screen), they can be
associated with individual input devices and cross zones in the appropriate entry screen (i.e.
Input Devices and Cross Zones). Multiple inputs may be assigned to run the same code, if
desired, or each input may have a unique code (up to a limit of 63 different codes).

To set the pulses for a particular zone code, simply select the digit in the entry grid and
choose the appropriate number of pulses for each digit from the drop-down list.

The following Zone Code settings are also available:

Zone Code Speed - Selects the speed of the zone coding, 60 beats per minute or 120
beats per minute.

Rounds per Zone Code - Selects how many times each code runs. This setting can be for
either three or four runs.

NACs after Last Code - This setting indicates what state the NAC circuits will be in after the
last zone code runs. This can be set to either Off or Post Code (which allows a standard
code or steady operation.) See this page 227 for more information.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 230 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

5.3.5 Devices
The Devices screen incorporates two tabs. These tabs include:

Input Devices 230

Output Devices 236

5.3.5.1 Input Devices

The input devices screen is used to configure all sensors and monitor modules connected to
an S3 Series (System Sensor) FACP node.

At the very top of the screen is a field labeled "Show Devices". This field allows the user to
filter the list of devices in the grid below to show all devices, all Ion sensors, all Photo
sensors, all Thermal sensors, all Multi-criteria Sensors or all Monitor Modules. Once a
selection is made, CAMWorks will automatically filter the list.

Below the "Show Devices" field is a large grid that displays all of the input devices that are
configured, based on the filter setting above. The following are the configurable settings for
Input Devices that appear in the grid.

Sel - Place a check in this field and click the Delete button to remove the device from this
address. Multiple devices may be selected if desired.

Active - To disable Downloading for a particular address, double-click or press the space
bar within this field to turn it grey. To re-enable the device, repeat the process to make the
field green.

Description - Enter a location description for the current address. This label will appear as
the identifier for this address when any event occurs at this address. The maximum number
of characters for this label is 40.
NOTE: Any part of the description text can be copied to the Windows clipboard by
highlighting the text and pressing Ctrl-C. The text can then be copied to the description
field of another address by selecting that field and pressing Ctrl-V.

Input Group Numbers - To modify one of the four numbers, enter the group (1-99,
300-499) number in the Group field. (Outputs assigned to this group will be shown in the list
at the bottom of the screen). If you are unclear on I/O groups concepts, see Help topic
Input/Output Functionality.

NOTE: While the S3 Series does allow for multiple input groups for each device, should
a trouble condition occur on a device only the first group assigned to the device will set
its respective Trouble SSM bit.

WARNING: Group 0, which really means "No Group Assignment", may be assigned to
input devices. There is no bit in the System Status Map for Group 0. Therefore, no
custom I/O relationships may be created for an input device if all of its Input Group
assignments are set to Group 0.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 231

NOTE: When an input device produces a verification, PAS, cross zone or multilevel
pre-alarm, only the first group assigned to the device will be activated. Once the device
produces a fire alarm response alarm groups will be activated (see note in blue below).
For cross zone alarms, only the first group assigned will be activated upon the
pre-alarm. The rest of the groups assigned to the device will not activate. Instead, the
groups assigned to the cross zone will activate when the cross zone goes into alarm.

NOTE: The group assignment fields are color coded for device types that produce the
following response types:

· CO Alarm Response (user-defined MCS-COF sensors, user-defined AMM modules)

· Gas Alarm Response (user-defined AMM modules)
· Dual Response (MCS-Acclimate2F and MCS-4-Warn sensors)
· Dual Smoke/CO Alarm Response (MCS-COF only)
· Triple Smoke/Heat/CO Response (MCS-COF only)

The colors are as follows:

Color Description
RED Groups colored RED will activate upon a fire alarm condition from the
device.
YELLOW Groups colored YELLOW will activate upon a supervisory condition from
the device.
BLUE Groups colored BLUE will activate upon a CO or Gas alarm condition
from the device.
NO COLOR If any of the other group columns are color coded for this device, the
group assigned to this column will not activate.

NOTE: Action (pre-alarm) conditions and supervisory conditions will only activate the
input group assigned to first group column.

NOTE: The third and fourth Input Group assignments may also be assigned to Disable
Type Tags, which range from 600 to 699. See this page 321 for more information on the
Group Disable feature. A Disable Type Tag may only be assigned to the fourth Input
Group assignment for MCS-COF Devices configured for "Triple Smoke/Heat/CO Alarm
Response", including the "Photo/CO Trpl" pre-defined device type.

NOTE: A Disable Type Tag may only be assigned to the fourth Input Group assignment
for MCS-COF Devices configured for "Triple Smoke/Heat/CO Alarm Response",
including the "Photo/CO Trpl" pre-defined device type. Likewise, a Disable Type Tag
may only be assigned to the fourth Input Group assignment for intelligent FAAST
devices on an E3 Series FACP that are configured for the default Five-level Multi-level
Alarm Response 573 .

To the right of the grid is the Properties window. The properties include most of the
configuration settings for the device as described below.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

232 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: The settings shown in the Properties window are for the device that is currently
highlighted in the grid.

Verify - To change the verification setting for a particular address, select a new option from
the drop-down list in this field. Setting this field to "Verify" enables the automatic verification,
while setting this option to "PAS" enables Positive Alarm Sequence. Setting this field to
"None" disables verification for this device.

NOTE: Only certain device types are eligible for verification and/or PAS. See the
following pages for information about compatible device types:

S3 Series (Apollo) Sensor Device Types 188

S3 Series (Apollo) Element Device Types 191

S3 Series (System Sensor) Sensor Device Types 294

S3 Series (System Sensor) Module Device Types 314

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 545

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Module Device Types 565

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 426

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Element Device Types 429

NOTE: Verification and PAS cannot be mixed with Cross Zoning.

Day Alarm - Selecting this option will cause this input device to activate outputs that are
configured for the General Fire Alarm Day list.
NOTE: This option is not available if this input device is not a Fire Alarm input.

Night Alarm - Selecting this option will cause this input device to activate outputs that are
configured for the General Fire Alarm Night list.
NOTE: This option is not available if this input device is not a Fire Alarm input.

CO/Gas Alarm - Selecting this option will cause this input device to activate outputs that are
configured for the General CO/Gas Alarm list.
NOTE: This option is not available if this input device is not a CO/Gas Alarm input.

Supv - Selecting this option will cause this input device to activate outputs that are
configured for the General Supervisory List.
NOTE: This option is not available if this input device is not a Supervisory input.

Trouble - Selecting this option will cause this input device to activate outputs that are
configured for the General Trouble List when the device experiences a fault condition.

Action - Selecting this option will cause this input device to activate outputs that are
configured for the General Action List when the device goes into a pre-alarm condition.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 233

NOTE: This option is not available if this input device is not a Fire Alarm input.

Zone Code - An optional coded pattern may be configured for each address. These patterns
are configured in the Zone Code entry screen. To choose a Zone code pattern, highlight the
Zone Code entry field and click on the down arrow button that appears. Select the
appropriate code from the drop-down list.

High Temp - If this device is a high-temperature thermal sensor, selecting this option will
update the sensitivity settings options to reflect the temperature settings that are available
for high-temperature thermal sensors.

Day Sensitivity - To change the Day Sensitivity setting for a particular address, select a
new setting from the drop-down list in this field.

NOTE: For thermal detectors, this setting will change the device's temperature
threshold.

NOTE: This setting only applies to sensors.

Night Sensitivity - To change the Night Sensitivity setting for a particular address, select a
new setting from the drop-down list in this field.

NOTE: For thermal detectors, this setting will change the device's temperature
threshold.

NOTE: This setting only applies to sensors.

DACT Report Code - When using custom DACT reporting codes 322 , the code entered in
this field will be reported by the DACT-E3 when using Contact ID or SIA formats. This may
range from 1-899. The node number will be transmitted in addition to this information.

HEPA - When a Velociti Laser Sensor is used in a HEPA filtered clean-room environment,
this option may be enabled to enable faster response time. This option may only be
selected for Velociti Laser Sensor device types.

Freeze - When enabled, the Thermal detector will issue a trouble condition when it senses
temperatures near 32°F (0°C). This setting is only applicable to Thermal sensors.

Application Specific Settings - Used with the MCS-4-Warn or MCS-COF sensors, this
setting allows the user to tailor the device to its environment. Under most circumstances,
the default setting is appropriate. However, some installations may desire or require
increased rejection of nuisance alarms. Choose the setting that best describes the device's
installation environment. Note that once a selection is made, CAMWorks selects a
recommended day and night sensitivity setting. These can be changed manually, if desired.

NOTE: The following settings only affect B200S Sounder Bases.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

234 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: These settings are not available when CLIP Mode is selected.

Enable Sounder Base - Place a check mark in this field to indicate that a B200S sounder
base is present at this address. If this field is not checked, the panel will report an EXTRA
ADDRESS trouble if a B200S sounder base is present at this address. If this field is
checked and a B200S sounder base is NOT present, the panel will report a MISSING
device.

Sounder Base Volume - Choose a volume level for this sounder base. The available
selections are High (85 dBa) and Low (75 dBa). This volume setting is used at all times.

Sounder Base Group - One output group (125-224, 500-599) can be assigned to the
B200S sounder base to enable full Boolean logic control of the sounder base via CAMs 21 .
If you are unclear on I/O groups concepts, see Help topic Input/Output Functionality.

NOTE: While the S3 Series does support an output group assignment for B200S sounder
bases, the sensor's first group assigned will set its respective Trouble SSM bit should a
trouble condition occur on the B200S rather than the output group assigned to the
sounder base.

Chirp - When enabled, the B200S sounder base at this address will periodically make a
brief audible chirp to annunciate local trouble conditions. This feature may be customized in
the General Settings 216 screen.

NOTE: The S3 Series system has an option to chirp the sounder bases when the
attached sensor is tested during walk test (see the General Settings 216 page). This
feature will function regardless of whether or not the sounder base is configured to chirp
for local annunciation purposes.

Sounder Base NAC Supv - Place a check mark in this field if the sounder base at this
address is powered from a NAC circuit instead of from a continuous duty power supply.

NOTE: It is important that this setting be set correctly to ensure proper power supply
supervision by the B200S sounder base.

Below the grid are the following buttons:

Select All Devices - Places a check mark in the select field for all devices currently
displayed.
Add 126 - Opens a screen where input devices may be added to the configuration.
Delete - Clicking the delete button will remove devices that have their "SE" field checked
from the configuration.

Finally, below the row of buttons is an information area, called Device Summary. This area
contains three tabs of information. The first is called "Input Groups", the second is "Used/
Unused" and the third is "Linked SLC Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of each
information tab.

Input Groups - This tab shows all input devices that are assigned to the group that is

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 235

selected in the "Select Input Group" drop-down list.

Used/Unused - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the input groups on this node. A
group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more input devices and green
if the input group has not been assigned to any input devices. Double-clicking one of the
input groups in this list will add the selected input group to one of the Input Group fields in
the grid if one of the Input Group fields is highlighted.

Linked SLC Output Devices - This tab shows all SLC output devices that are affected by
the status of the input groups assigned to this device. This may display either devices on
the current node or all nodes by selecting one of the option buttons and clicking "Show".

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.5.1.1 Add

The Add Devices screen is used to define new input devices. The following procedure may
be used to define new input devices:

Step 1:
Select Sensors or Modules - In order to add input devices, the user must select
between Sensors and Modules. Doing so will filter the list of available devices types to
show only the devices types that are applicable for sensors or device types that are
applicable to modules.

Step 2:
Select Device Type - Select the device type to be assigned to the selected addresses
from the tabs and icons at the top of the screen. See this page 294 for information on the
available sensor device types or this page 314 for information on the available module
device types.

Step 3:
Select Loop - Select the Loop where device(s) to be added are located. Click on the
Loop 1 or Loop 2 option button.

Step 4:
Input Group 1 - Select the group number for the devices to be added (this may also be
set in the Input Devices entry screen) from the drop-down list. Input devices may belong
to input groups ranging from 1-99 and 300-499.

NOTE: This will only set the first group for the device. If you wish to assign more groups,
this must be done in the Input Devices screen.

Step 5:
Check Addresses To Add - Select all addresses to be added by checking the address
number(s).

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 236 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

List View - The list view at the bottom of the screen lists all of the device types and
groups for the addresses on the currently selected loop.

Select All - Click on this button to toggle between placing or clearing check marks from
all addresses.

5.3.5.2 Output Devices

The output devices screen is used to configure all Addressable Output Modules (AOM's)
connected to an S3 Series (System Sensor) FACP node. This screen houses a large grid
that displays all of the output devices that are configured.

The S3 Series (System Sensor) FACP supports supports two basic AOM device types.
These are the Form-C Relay module (AOM-2RF/RCE-SS/MMO-6RF/RCM-SS), and the
Signal/NAC module (AOM-2SF/SCE-SS/MMO-6SF/SCM-SS).

The following programmable options are available for all AOM modules:

Sel - Place a check in this field and click the Delete button to remove the device from this
address. Multiple devices may be selected if desired.

Floor # - Enter the floor of the building that the device is located on. This field is used for
user reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.

Active - To disable Downloading for a particular address, double-click or press the space
bar within this field to turn it grey. To re-enable the device, repeat the process to make the
field green.

Description - Enter a location description for the current address. This label will appear as
the identifier for this address when any event occurs at this address. The maximum number
of characters for this label is 40.
NOTE: Any part of the description text can be copied to the Windows clipboard by
highlighting the text and pressing Ctrl-C. The text can then be copied to the description
field of another address by selecting that field and pressing Ctrl-V.

Output Group Number(s) - To program group numbers, enter group numbers in the Group
entry fields. Up to four output groups (125-224, 500-599) can be entered. If you are unclear
on I/O groups concepts, see Help topic Input/Output Functionality.

NOTE: You cannot assign both output groups and General Output lists to the same
output module.

NOTE: The third and fourth Output Group assignments may also be assigned to Disable
Type Tags, which range from 600 to 699. See this page 321 for more information on the
Group Disable feature.

NOTE: While the E3 Series does allow for multiple output groups for each device, should
a trouble condition occur on a device only the first group assigned to the device will set its

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 237

respective Trouble SSM bit.

To the right of the grid is the Properties window. The properties include most of the
configuration settings for the device as described below.

NOTE: The settings shown in the Properties window are for the device that is currently
highlighted in the grid.

Day Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Day Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into afire alarm condition during the defined
day period, this list of outputs will be activated.

Night Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Night Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into fire alarm condition during the defined
night period, this list of outputs will be activated.

CO/Gas Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default CO/Gas Alarm
list. When any initiating device in the system goes into a CO or Gas alarm condition, this list
of outputs will be activated.

Action - Check this option to place this output in the system default Action list. When an
input defined as Multilevel reaches the programmed "Action" threshold, this list of outputs
will be activated.

Supv (Supervisory) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Supervisory
list. When any supervisory device in the system goes into an Off Normal condition, this list of
outputs will be activated.

WT Drill (Walk Test/Drill) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Walk
Test/Drill list. This list of outputs is activated for audible walk test or during a Fire Drill.

Trouble - Check this option to place this output in the system default Trouble list. When
there is a trouble condition in the system, this list of outputs will be activated.

Fan Restart - The E3 Series supports a "Fan Restart" configuration option for AOM devices.
If this option is selected, the panel leaves such devices undisturbed during reset. The panel
indicates a Trouble condition "FANS OFF" fault message after the reset. To turn off the fan
restart AOM's, a function is available on the keypad's zero (0) key or, optionally an
ASM-16/ANU-48 switch. Activating the key or switch deactivates the AOM's that were left on
during reset and cancels the "FANS OFF" fault.
NOTE: Fan Restart may not be assigned to AOM's that are assigned to the General
Trouble output list.

Seq Restart - The E3 Series also provides "sequential restart" capability. Any outputs
configured for sequential restart are deactivated at a slow rate, either during reset (if not
configured for "Fan Restart"), or upon use of the zero "0" key or, optionally an
ASM-16/ANU-48 switch (if configured for "Fan Restart"). The time delay interval for
sequential reset is set in the Globals/Miscellaneous entry screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 238 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

DACT Report Code - When using custom DACT reporting codes 322 , the code entered in
this field will be reported by the DACT-E3 when using Contact ID or SIA formats. This may
range from 1-899. The node number will be transmitted in addition to this information.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.5.2.1 Add

The Add Devices screen is used to define new output devices. The following procedure may
be used to define new output devices:

Step 1:
Select Device Type - Select the device type to be assigned to the selected addresses
from the tabs and icons at the top of the screen. See this page 314 for information on the
available module device types.

Step 2:
Select Loop - Select the Loop where device(s) to be added are located. Click on the
Loop 1 or Loop 2 option button.

Step 3:
Check Addresses To Add - Select all addresses to be added by checking the address
number(s).

Step 4:
Add - Click on the "Add" button to program the selected addresses. (The user will be
asked to confirm the selections).

List View - The list view at the bottom of the screen lists all of the device types and
groups for the addresses on the currently selected loop.

Select All - Click on this button to toggle between placing or clearing check marks from
all addresses.

5.3.6 Cross Zones

This screen allows the user to configure the behavior of each of the node's thirty cross
zones. Like many other screens in CAMWorks, the display is arranged in a grid. The
settings available for each cross zone is described below:

Cross Zone - Indicates which virtual cross zone group will be affected by these settings.
This field is read-only.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 239

Cross Zone Type - If this virtual cross zone group will be used as a group cross zone,
select "Group". If it will be used as a point cross zone, select "Point".

Config - Clicking this button opens a secondary screen that allows the user to assign the
desired points (point cross zoning) or input groups (group cross zoning).

Trigger - This option sets the trigger level of the cross zone (how many inputs or sets of
inputs need to activate before the cross zone activates). This can be set from two to seven
for point cross zoning or two to four for group cross zoning.

Response - The S3 Series currently allows two response types. The first is the Alarm
response, which will cause a fire alarm condition when the cross zone is activated. Second
is the non-reporting response. This response allows you to chain multiple cross zones
together or trigger outputs without causing a fire alarm on the system.

Zone Code - When the cross zone is activated it can trigger a zone code to sound, just like
any other input. This menu allows you to select one of up to 63 user-defined zone codes.

Virtual Alarm Group - The cross zone may be configured to trigger an output group or a
scratchpad when the activation threshold has been reached. This may range from 125-224
(Output Groups), 500-599 (Extended Output Groups) and 416-439 (Scratchpads).

Virtual Pre-Alarm Group - When the one or more of the cross zone triggers activates (but
the configured trigger level has not yet been reached), it can be configured to trigger an
output group or a scratchpad. This may range from 125-224 (Output Groups), 500-599
(Extended Output Groups) and 416-439 (Scratchpads).
NOTE: Regardless of user programming, the S3 Series FACP will set bits in its associated
extended system status map for a Pre-alarm on a cross zone and for a Cross Zone
activation.

Day Alarm - If the response type is configured for the Alarm Response, this will cause the
system to turn on all outputs configured for the General Alarm Day output list when the cross
zone is activated during the configured day hours.

Night Alarm - If the response type is configured for the Alarm Response, this will cause the
system to turn on all outputs configured for the General Alarm Night output list when the
cross zone is activated during the configured night hours, as well as the defined weekend
and holiday days.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 240 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

The following control appears outside of the grid:

Enable Multiple Point Cross Zone Activations When System is in Alarm - When
checked, point cross zone inputs will continue to prealarm after the system is already in
alarm, and the cross zones will activate when their threshold is reached. When unchecked,
all smoke detectors that are configured for point cross zoning will automatically go into alarm
when the system is in alarm and the outputs assigned to the cross zone will not activate.

Below the grid is an information area. This information area contains three tabs of
information. The first is called "CrossZone # > Input Devices", the second is "Input Group #
> Input Devices" and the third is "Used / Unused Groups". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

CrossZone # > Input Devices - This section of the window shows which devices are
assigned to the selected cross zone. Devices may be added by using the Add button below.
To remove devices from the cross zone place a check in the "Sel" column next to the
desired device and click the Delete button below.

Input Group # > Input Devices - This tab shows all input devices that are assigned to the
group that is selected in the "Select Input Group" drop-down list.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the input groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more input devices
and green if the input group has not been assigned to any input devices. Double-clicking
one of the input groups in this list will add the selected input group to one of the Input Group
fields in the grid if one of the Input Group fields is highlighted.

Group CrossZone > Input Devices - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the devices
that are a member of a group cross zone that is highlighted in the grid above.

See this page 205 for more information about configuring cross zoning.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.7 ASM/ANU
Each S3 Series FACP supports a combination of up to sixteen Switch and Annunciator
Modules of the following types:
ASM-16 and ANU-48.

The following settings may be selected for each module through this screen:

Board # - This field simply indicates which module will be affected by these settings. This
field cannot be changed.

Board Type - Select a board type to indicate that a board should be assigned to this
address or select "None", if no board should be assigned to this address.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 241

Lamp Test - Selecting Yes will cause the ASM-16 or ANU-48 to perform a lamp test when it
is reset. Selecting No will cause the ASM-16 or ANU-48 to not perform a lamp test.

At the right of the ASM/ANU screen is a configuration window to allow the configuration of
the module's switches. This window changes depending on which module is selected. The
following fields are displayed in the grid in this window:

Switch Input # - This field is a reference that indicates which switches are available.

Bit # - This field indicates the system status map bit assigned to this switch.

Switch Type - This option sets the function that the switch performs. All switches are
defaulted to the "Control" option. When configured for this function, the switch will toggle its
associated Bit Number and can be used in CAM expressions. Switches one through eight
may also be configured for an Auxiliary Function, except for Switch #6. This auxiliary
function differs for each switch and may be viewed by clicking here. Even though the ANU-
48 only supports eight physical switches, switches #9-16 are displayed as Toggle/Selector
switches to acknowledge the fact that each ANU-48 switch has two bits associated with it in
the System Status Map.

NOTE: When a switch is configured for its Auxiliary Function, it will not trigger its
associated bit number.

NOTE: When a switch is configured for its Auxiliary Function, its associated LED's will be
taken over by the Auxiliary Function and will no longer be programmable via CAMs.

NOTE: If an ASM-16 or ANU-48 switch is reconfigured for an Auxiliary Function, any

CAMs previously written for the LED's associated with that switch will be deleted. Before
deleting the CAMs, CAMWorks will issue a warning asking for confirmation.

Momentary - When the switch type is configured as a control switch, the switch can be
configured as a momentary switch by placing a check mark in this field. When enabled, a
switch press will cause the associated SSM bit location to go true once and then false again.

Latching - The switch may be configured for latching operation when the switch type is
configured as a control switch. When selected, the current switch state (ON or OFF) will
persist through reset.
NOTE: On the ANU-48, switches #9-16 are always configured as Latching and cannot be
changed.

NOTE: A switch may not be configured for both momentary and latching operation at the
same time.

Description - This descriptive text is available for display while programming CAMs and is

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 242 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

not downloaded to the panel.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.8 Virtual Switch

Virtual Switches are a feature of the S3 Series FACP that allows the Gamewell-FCI
FocalPoint Workstation to control any system function that may be presently controlled by
an ASM-16 or ANU-48 switch. Each Virtual Switch has a control bit in the S3 Series FACP's
System Status Map associated with it. Upon command from the FocalPoint Workstation, the
S3 Series FACP will set the appropriate bit to TRUE or FALSE. From there, the user must
refer to the Virtual Switch's bit in CAMs to link the Virtual Switch to actual system functions.

This screen is where the user sets up the following options relating to each of the S3 Series
FACP's 256 Virtual Switches:

Switch Number - This field shows the System Status Map (bitmap) bit location associated
with each switch. This field cannot be edited.

On/Off - Enables or disables this switch. When the switch is disabled (or set as a "Status"
switch), the System Status Map bit associated with this switch may be used as a scratchpad
instead.

Switch Type - This option sets the function that the switch performs. All switches are
defaulted to the "Control" option. When configured for this function, the switch will toggle its
associated Bit Number and can be used in CAM expressions. The switches may be
configured as a "Status" switch instead of "Control." "Status" switches are used only if the
user requires the FocalPoint Workstation to display a status indicator in response to the
TRUE evaluation of CAM expression. Note that if the switch is configured as a "Status"
switch, the System Status Map bit associated with the switch may be used as a scratchpad
instead.

Latching - The switch may be configured for latching operation when the switch type is
configured as a control switch. When selected, the current switch state (ON or OFF) will
persist through reset.

Momentary - When the switch type is configured as a control switch, the switch can be
configured as a momentary switch by placing a check mark in this field. When enabled, a
switch press will cause the associated SSM bit location to go true once and then false again.

NOTE: A switch may not be configured for both momentary and latching operation at the
same time.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 243

Switch Label - Up to forty characters may be used to describe this switch and its function.
These are downloaded to the system and are displayed by the FocalPoint Workstation.

MNS Switch - Enable this option if this virtual switch performs an MNS function, otherwise
leave it disabled. When enabled, the virtual switch will be reset by an MNS reset instead of
a fire reset.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.9 Annunciators
The LCD-SLP is an annunciator that uses an LCD touchscreen for primary user interaction.
The system supports up to fifteen (15) supervised and fully functional LCD-SLP
annunciators (addressed 1-15) as well as unsupervised (display only) LCD-SLP
annunciators (addressed as 0). The LCD-SLP also includes five user-programmable push-
buttons (with multi-color LEDs) and three pre-defined push-buttons (Menu, Fire Drill and
Reset.)

The LCD-SLP allows access to various system functions including:

- Acknowledging alarm, trouble and supervisory conditions.

- Silencing the system.
- Resetting the nodes in its region (or all nodes in the system).
- System Configuration, Walk Test / Drill, I/O, System Clock and other system functions.

NOTE: The unsupervised, display-only LCD-SLP's are not configurable.

The Annunciators screen is used to configure the LCD-SLP annunciators connected to this
panel. On the left of the screen, is a set of buttons and check boxes that represent each of
the fifteen LCD-SLP annunciators. The right side of the screen is the primary work area that
allows configuration of the currently selected LCD-SLP.

To configure an LCD-SLP, first select the LCD-SLP addresses that are present in the
system by placing a check mark in the check box for the desired LCD-SLP addresses.

Next, select an individual LCD-SLP to configure by clicking on its associated button on the
left side of the screen. The contents of the right side of the screen will change to reflect the
current configuration settings for the selected LCD-SLP.

The right side of the screen has an image that represents the LCD-SLP. Within the image
of the LCD-SLP are five buttons that represent the five user-programmable push buttons.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

244 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Pressing one of those buttons opens the configuration settings for that specific button on the
bottom right of the screen.

The following settings pertain to the LCD-SLP itself:

Lamp Test - Selecting Yes will cause the LCD-SLP to perform a lamp test when it is reset.
Selecting No will cause the LCD-SLP to not perform a lamp test.

The following settings pertain to the selected LCD-SLP switch (selected by pressing on the
buttons that represent the LCD-SLP user-programmable push buttons):

Switch Type - This option sets the function that the switch performs. All switches are
defaulted to the "Control" option. When configured for this function, the switch will toggle its
associated Bit Number and can be used in CAM expressions. Each switch may be
optionally configured for an Auxiliary Function. This auxiliary function differs for each switch
and may be viewed by clicking here.

NOTE: When a switch is configured for its Auxiliary Function, it will not trigger its
associated bit number.

NOTE: When a switch is configured for its Auxiliary Function, its associated LED's will be
taken over by the Auxiliary Function and will no longer be programmable via CAMs.

NOTE: If an LCD-SLP switch is reconfigured for an Auxiliary Function, any CAMs

previously written for the LED's associated with that switch will be deleted. Before deleting
the CAMs, CAMWorks will issue a warning asking for confirmation.

Momentary - When the switch type is configured as a control switch, the switch can be
configured as a momentary switch by placing a check mark in this field. When enabled, a
switch press will cause the associated SSM bit location to go true once and then false again.

Latching - The switch may be configured for latching operation when the switch type is
configured as a control switch. When selected, the current switch state (ON or OFF) will
persist through reset.

NOTE: A switch may not be configured for both momentary and latching operation at the
same time.

Description - The user may enter up to ten characters to describe this switch. This label
will be displayed on the LCD-SLP display to identify the switch's function.

The LCD-SLP's LED's are configured via CAMs. Please see this page 282 for more
information.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 245

5.3.10 CAM
The CAM icon incorporates eleven sub-icons. These icons are used to display the following
CAM screens:

CAM Output Group 245

CAM ASM/ANU LED 249
CAM Scratchpad 252
CAM Special Functions 256
CAM Group Disable 267
CAM Disable Type Tags 267
CAM Sensor Output 274
CAM Reset Inhibit 278
CAM LCD-SLP Annunciators 282
CAM Sounder Base Coded Patterns 286
Virtual CAM 290
Advanced CAM Programming 293

5.3.10.1 CAM Output Group

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

246 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 247

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

248 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs in this screen will control Output Groups that can be assigned to AOMs and
discrete outputs such as the NAC Circuits and the Municipal Circuit.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 249

5.3.10.2 CAM ASM/ANU LED

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

250 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 251

CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 252 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

the selected node. Includes Text Message

Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs in this screen control the state of the LED's on ASM-16 or ANU-48 modules. A
CAM expression written in this area will either light steady or blink the LED when the CAM
evaluates to a TRUE and will turn the LED off when the CAM evaluates to a false.

NOTE: The LED blink CAM Expression takes priority over the LED On/Off if both CAM
expressions are TRUE at the same time.

NOTE: If an ASM-16 or ANU-48 switch has been configured for its Auxiliary Function, the
CAM entry field, as well as the description field will be grayed out.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.10.3 CAM Scratchpad

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 253

in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

254 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

AMM/PID Modules
AOM's
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches
node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 255

Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 256 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

The CAMs in this screen will turn on or off the Scratchpads associated with this node.
Scratchpads can be referred to in other CAM expressions and are extremely useful in
reducing the complexity of other CAM expressions.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.10.4 CAM Special Functions

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM Special Functions screen incorporates several advanced functions that can be
useful for certain applications. Specifically, these functions are:

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

[****] 256
Schedule 256 - Configure certain output devices to activate according to a specific schedule.

Counters 260 - Activate outputs after a certain number of specific events occur.

Sequence 263 - Activate several outputs in succession.

Timers 266 - Delay the activation of output devices.

5.3.10.4.1 Schedule

NOTE: Schedules are not available on INX, INCC or INI-VGE nodes.

There are 10 schedules available per node for automatically activating Output Groups and
Scratchpads according to a fixed schedule. Three types of schedules are available. These
are:

1.) Daily - Outputs can be activated on a daily basis at a given time.

2.) Weekly - Outputs can be activated at a certain time on one or more different days of the
week.
3.) Monthly - Outputs can be activated on a certain day of the selected month or on a certain

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 257

day of every month.

The process of configuring a schedule is the same regardless of the type of schedule being
used, with a few exceptions. Below is the procedure for configuring a schedule:

1. In the grid, select the Group that will be triggered by the scheduler. The allowed selection
of groups will vary based on the current node type, but will always at least include the
node's scratchpad locations.
2. In the "Information" pane at the bottom of the screen select the "Schedule Details" tab, if it
isn't already selected.
3. Select one of the following schedule types:
a. Daily – When a Daily schedule is desired, the user must supply the time of day that
should be used for the schedule. This is done through the Hours/Minutes drop-down
lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every hour
and/or every minute.
b. Weekly – When a Weekly schedule is desired, the user must select which days of the
week that the schedule should run. Selection boxes are provided for each day of the
week and any or all days may be selected by placing a check in the appropriate box.
Like a Daily schedule, the Weekly schedule also requires that a time of day must be
selected for when the schedule is to be run. This is done through the Hours/Minutes
drop-down lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every
hour and/or every minute.
c. Monthly – A Monthly schedule is used when it is desired to activate certain outputs on a
certain day of the month. Option buttons are provided for the month. Unlike the
Weekly schedule, the user may only select one month or every month. A date
selection is also provided, allowing the user to select which day of the month to run the
schedule. An option is available to run the schedule every day of the selected month.
Like a Daily schedule, the Monthly schedule also requires that a time of day must be
selected for when the schedule is to be run. This is done through the Hours/Minutes
drop-down lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every
hour and/or every minute.
NOTE: If you choose the 29th then there will be no schedule activation for
February except on a leap year. If you choose the 30th then there will be no
schedule activation for February at all. If you choose the 31st then all months with
less than 31 days will not have a schedule activation.

4. Disable Schedule CAM Expression - If there are any circumstances where it would be
desirable to NOT run an automatic schedule, this CAM expression should be entered.
The TRUE evaluation of this CAM expression will prevent the schedule from running.
NOTE: Disable Schedule CAM Expression feature is not available on the 7100.

5. Description - A description may be added to indicate what the schedule will be used for.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

258 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

This information is used for reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.
NOTE: The CAM Schedule will be true for exactly one minute if the user specifies a
specific minute within the selected hour.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
four tabs of information. The first is called "Schedule Details", the second is "Node
Devices", the third is "Reference Search" and the fourth is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is
a brief explanation of each information tab.

Schedule Details - This tab allows the user to view or set the scheduling information for the
selected schedule. See above for more information on how the schedule is configured.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 259

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 260 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for

Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.10.4.2 Counters

There are 10 counters available per node for activating outputs after an input triggers the
counter a specified number of times.

The process of configuring a counter is as follows:

1. In the grid, choose how many times the counter must be run by selecting a value in the
"Count" field.
2. Select the Group that will be triggered by the scheduler. The allowed selection of groups
will vary based on the current node type, but will always at least include the node's
scratchpad locations.
3. A Define Counter CAM Expression may be written. If present, this CAM expression will
determine under what condition the counter will be reset. If this CAM is blank, the counter
will operate as a one-shot (meaning that a reset is required in order to trigger the counter
again after it has activated its output.)
4. Select a "Working Bit". This is a bit that is used internally by the CAM engine to perform
the counter function. This bit must not be used by any other function.
5. Counter Trigger CAM Expression. This CAM Expression describes what condition will
cause the counter to be incremented.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is a brief explanation of each
information tab.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 261

in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

262 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

also includes the on board NAC's and

Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 263

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.10.4.3 Sequence

There are 10 sequences available per node for activating multiple Output Groups or
Scratchpads in a sequence. There are two types of sequences. The table below explains
the differences between the two.

Sequence Type Description Visual Sample

A 'Bar Graph' sequence

leaves any current
Bar Graph
outputs ON when the
sequence is triggered.

A 'Shift' sequence turns

OFF its current output
when the sequence is
Shift
triggered and then
activates the next
output.

The process of configuring a sequence is the same regardless of the type of sequence
being used. Below is the procedure for configuring a sequence:

1. Select a "Working Bit" - This is a bit that is used internally by the CAM engine to perform
the sequence function. This bit must not be used by any other function.
2. Select the number of outputs - The sequencer must know how many outputs are going to
be affected by the scheduler.This may range from 2 to 12.
3. Type of Sequence - Select either a Bar Graph sequence or a Shift sequence. See above
for an explanation of the two types of sequence.
4. CAM Sequence Reinitialize - A CAM Expression must be written for the sequence to be
enabled to run the first time (or be reset so that it may be run again once it has already
run through).
5. Sequence Triggering CAM - This CAM Expression describes what condition will cause the
next output in the sequence to be activated.
6. At the bottom of the screen, select the "Output List" tab.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

264 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

7. Select the desired output groups and/or scratchpads that should be added to the
sequence. These should be selected in the desired order of activation. Outputs may be
added to the sequence by selecting a group from the list box on the left and clicking the
right arrow button. Outputs may be removed from the sequence by selecting the group in
the list in the list box on the right and clicking on the left arrow button.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
four tabs of information. The first is called "Output List", the second is "Node Devices", the
third is "Reference Search" and the fourth is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is a brief
explanation of each information tab.

Output List - This tab allows the user to select the output groups/scratchpads that will be
activated by this sequence. See above for more information on how the sequence is
configured.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 265

CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 266 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

the selected node. Includes Text Message

Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.10.4.4 Timers

There are 10 timers available per node for creating delays for Output Groups and
Scratchpads. To configure a timer, set the desired timer interval in seconds, and select the
appropriate Output Group or Scratchpad from the Group drop-down list. If set, the timer
information will be displayed in the CAM entry screen for the selected group. This delay will
apply when the output group or scratchpad is activated through the CAM logic expression.
The options for the timers are displayed in a table format. Each option is described below.

Timer - This is a read-only display that shows the timer number (1-10).

Time (Seconds) - This sets the delay time for this timer. The delay time is entered in
seconds. This may range from 1 to 3600 seconds .

Group - Select the Output Group or Scratchpad that you would like to delay.

Resettable Timer - This option allows you to choose between standard and resettable
timers. If set to No, the timer will be a standard timer. Standard timers will only trigger
once. In order to be triggered again, the system will need to be reset. If this setting is
changed to Yes, the timer can be triggered multiple times. In order to be triggered again,
the timer will have time out and the CAM expression assigned to the output group or
scratchpad will need to transition from false to true again.

Free/Used - If this timer has been configured and assigned to an Output Group or
Scratchpad, this will read Used, otherwise it will read Free.

NOTE: If a Timer is used by Advanced CAM Programming, this field will read Used, even
if it doesn't appear to have any other configuration information assigned.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 267

NOTE: If a Timer is used by Advanced CAM Programming, no timer parameters may be

changed via this screen.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.10.5 CAM Group Disable

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

268 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 269

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 270 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAM expressions in this section are a part of the Group Disable 321 feature of the S3
Series. Each Input and Output Group has one CAM expression assigned. When the CAM
expression is TRUE, all devices assigned to the associated Group will enter DISCONNECT
trouble and will be treated as a disabled device. When the CAM expression goes back to
FALSE, the DISCONNECT troubles associated with the assigned Input Group will be
restored.

This screen also hosts a single CAM Expression to enable EasyTest mode. EasyTest is a
feature of the MCS-Acclimate2F (in Velociti mode only) and MCS-4-Warn multi-criteria
sensors that simplifies detector testing. When the CAM expression at bit location #3777
evaluates to TRUE, the panel will activate EasyTest mode for all MCS-Acclimate2F (in
Velociti mode only), MCS-COF and MCS-4-Warn multi-criteria sensors on that node. When
EasyTest mode is enabled, these multi-criteria sensors may be tested using canned smoke.

NOTE: The panel will activate EasyTest mode automatically during Walk Test, regardless
of the state of bit #3777.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.10.6 CAM Disable Type Tags

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 271

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

272 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 273

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 274 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAM expressions in this section are a part of the Group Disable 321 feature of the S3
Series. Input and/or output devices may individually be assigned to Disable Type Tags.

Each Disable Type Tag has one CAM expression assigned. When the CAM expression is
TRUE, all devices assigned to the associated Disable Type Tag will enter DISCONNECT
trouble and will be treated as a disabled device. When the CAM expression goes back to
FALSE, the DISCONNECT troubles associated with the assigned Disable Type Tag will be
restored.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.10.7 CAM Sensor Output

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 275

to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

276 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)

assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 277

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The S3 Series has complete control over several aspects of the operation of the smoke
detectors that was not possible in earlier products. One of these features includes
controlling the so-called Remote Outputs of the smoke detectors. These include both
sounder bases and relay bases.

Each sensor has a CAM expression to control its remote output. When the CAM expression
evaluates to TRUE the output will turn ON, when it evaluates to FALSE the output will turn
OFF.

NOTE: Once a CAM expression has been entered for a Sensor Remote Output, it will
override the automatic activation of the output (ie. the standard follow-the-LED activation).

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 278 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

If automatic operation is desired after a CAM expression has been written, simply erase
the CAM expression.
NOTE: These settings are not available when CLIP Mode is selected.

NOTE: These CAMS have no effect on B200S sounder bases. B200S sounder bases
may belong to an output group instead.

This screen also allows users to write CAMs to control the panel's on-board Alarm and
Supervisory dry contacts. To do so, select the "Alarm and Supervisory Dry Contacts" option
button at the top of the screen. CAM expressions, if present, will override the firmware
default operation of the relays.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.10.8 CAM Reset Inhibit

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 279

in this row. This field cannot be edited.

CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

280 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 281

the selected node. Includes the Module

Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs on this screen will prevent this node from being reset. There are three bits, a
Fire Reset Inhibit Bit, an MNS Reset Inhibit Bit and and Enable Reset Inhibit. Both the Fire
Reset Inhibit Bit and the Enable Reset Inhibit bit must be TRUE in order to prevent a fire
reset from affecting this node. Both the MNS Reset Inhibit Bit and the Enable Reset Inhibit
bit must be TRUE in order to prevent an MNS reset from affecting this node.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 282 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

5.3.10.9 CAM LCD-SLP Annunciators

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 283

and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

284 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 285

the selected node. Includes Text Message

Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs on this screen affect the user-programmable LEDs on the LCD-SLP annunciators
connected to this panel. At the top of the screen are three filters:

LCD-SLP No. - Display the CAMs only for the selected LCD-SLP.

Switch No. - Display the CAMs only for the selected switch.

LED Type - Display the CAMs only for the selected type of CAM (ON/Off, Blink, Red or
Green).

The filters are ANDed with each other. This means that only the CAMs that match all criteria
will be displayed in the grid below.

The following describes the four different types of CAMs that control the behavior of each
LCD-SLP programmable LED:

On/Off - A CAM expression written in this area will turn the LED ON steady when the CAM
evaluates to a TRUE and will turn the LED off when the CAM evaluates to a false.

Blink - A CAM expression written in this area will blink the LED when the CAM evaluates to
a TRUE and will turn the LED off (or on steady, based on the On/Off CAM expression) when
the CAM evaluates to a false.

NOTE: The LED blink CAM Expression takes priority over the LED On/Off if both CAM
expressions are TRUE at the same time.

Red - The LCD-SLP programmable LEDs can be configured to be Green, Red or Amber.
When the "Red" CAM expression evaluates to TRUE, the the LED will appear Red, unless
the Green CAM expression also evaluates to TRUE at the same time.

Green - The LCD-SLP programmable LEDs can be configured to be Green, Red or Amber.
When the "Green" CAM expression evaluates to TRUE, the the LED will appear Green,
unless the Red CAM expression also evaluates to TRUE at the same time.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 286 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: The LED will appear Amber when both the Red and Green CAM Expressions
evaluate to TRUE or both evaluate to FALSE.

NOTE: If an LCD-SLP switch has been configured for its Auxiliary Function, the CAM
entry fields, as well as the description field will be grayed out.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.10.10 CAM Sounder Base Coded Patterns

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 287

field. This field cannot be edited.

Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

288 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 289

Scratchpads on the selected node. This

includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

NOTE: The following settings only affect B200S Sounder Bases.

NOTE: These settings are not available when CLIP Mode is selected.

In this screen, the CAMs control the coded patterns produced by the B200S sounder bases.
There are two bits for every output group on the node, plus two bits that serve as a default
coded pattern selection. The default coded pattern is used for those B200S sounder bases
that are not configured as members of an output group or for those output groups that do
not have sounder base coded pattern selection CAMs written.

The B200S sounder base supports three distinct coded patterns, plus continuous (steady)
output. Because of this, two bits are required to select the default coded pattern and two
bits are required per output group. The coded patterns are selected per this table:

Coded Pattern Value of Bit 2 Value of Bit 1

(Cyan) (Light Blue)

Temporal 3 FALSE FALSE

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 290 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Non-coded (steady) FALSE TRUE

Temporal 4 TRUE FALSE
March Time TRUE TRUE

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.10.11 Virtual CAM

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 291

this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

292 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

the selected node. Includes the Module

Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 293

includes the Scratchpad number,

Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs on this screen are used to provide the FocalPoint Workstation visual feedback
that the functions controlled by the Virtual Switches feature of the S3 Series FACP have
been activated or deactivated.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

5.3.10.12 Advanced CAM Programming

Selecting this option will open the Advanced CAM Programming Editor.

See this page 925 for more information about the Advanced CAM Programming Editor.
See this page 920 for more information about Advanced CAM Programming in general.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 294 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

5.3.11 Communication
Opens the Download screen in the main window. See the Download Utilities 841 section for
more information.

5.4 General
5.4.1 Sensor Device Types
The following sensor device types are available on the S3 Series (System Sensor) FACP:

Sensor Device Type Device Type As Ph De Re La PA Ve Cr De

Reported By Panel ysi sc sp tc S rifi os vi
cal rip on hi All ca s ce
De tio se ng o tio Zo Ty
vic n Ty ? we n ni pe
e pe d? All ng all
Ty o All o
pe we o we
d? we d
d? in
CL
IP
M
od
e?

None Assigned No Device No No No N/ N/ N/ N/ N/

De de Re A A A A A
vic vic sp
e e on
at se
thi
s
ad
dr
es
s
Ion Detector Ion Detector Ion St Fir Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye
Se an e s s s s s
ns da Al
or rd ar
(A Io m
SD n
-IL Se
2F) ns
or,
su

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 295

ch
as
AS
D-
IL
2F
Critical Ion Critical Ion Ion St Fir Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye
Se an e s s s s s
ns da Al
or rd ar
(A Io m
SD n
-IL Se
2F) ns
or.
T
he
sy
ste
m
re
se
rv
es
po
we
r
to
ru
n
th
e
se
ns
or'
s
LE
Ds
.
Photo Detector Photo Detector Ph St Fir Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye
oto an e s s s s s
Se da Al
ns rd ar
or Ph m
(A ot
SD o
-P Se
L2 ns
F, or,
AS su

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

296 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

D- ch
PL as
2F AS
R, D-
AD PL
P- 2F
RF
,
AD
S-
P2
00,
AD
S-
RP
20
0,
AS
D-
FIL
TR
EX
F)
Critical Photo Critical Photo Ph St Fir Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye
oto an e s s s s s
Se da Al
ns rd ar
or Ph m
(A ot
SD o
-P Se
L2 ns
F, or.
AS T
D- he
PL sy
2F ste
R, m
AD re
P- se
RF rv
, es
AD po
S- we
P2 r
00, to
AD ru
S- n
RP th
20 e

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 297

0, se
AS ns
D- or'
FIL s
TR LE
EX Ds
F) .
Photo/Heat Det Photo/Heat Det Ph St Fir Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye
oto an e s s s s s
/Th da Al
er rd ar
ma Ph m
l ot
Se o/
ns He
or ar
(A De
SD tec
-P tor
TL ,
2F) su
ch
as
AS
D-
PT
L2
F
Thermal Det Thermal Det Th St Fir Ye No No No Ye
er an e s s
ma da Al
l rd ar
Se He m
ns at
or De
(A tec
TD tor
-L2 ,
F, su
AT ch
D- as
HL AT
2F, D-
AT L2
D- F
RL
2F)
Acclimate Acclimate Ac An Fir Ye No No Ye Ye
cli alo e s s s
ma g, Al

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

298 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

te ad ar
Se dr m
ns es
or sa
(M ble
CS m
-Ac ulti
cli -
ma crit
te2 eri
F) a
se
ns
or
NR Ion Det NL NR Ion Det NL Ion St No No No No No Ye
Se an n- s
ns da re
or rd po
(A Io rti
SD n ng
-IL Se
2F) ns
or,
su
ch
as
AS
D-
IL
2F
NR Photo Det NL NR Photo Det NL Ph St No No No No No Ye
oto an n- s
Se da re
ns rd po
or Ph rti
(A ot ng
SD o
-P Se
L2 ns
F, or,
AS su
D- ch
PL as
2F AS
R, D-
AD PL
P- 2F
RF
,
AD

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 299

S-
P2
00,
AD
S-
RP
20
0,
AS
D-
FIL
TR
EX
F)
Ion Multilevel Ion Multilevel Ion St M Ye No No Ye Ye
Se an ulti s s s
ns da -
or rd lev
(A Io el
SD n (th
-IL Se re
2F) ns e-
or, lev
su el)
ch (Al
as ert
AS ,
D- Ac
IL tio
2F n,
Fir
e
Al
ar
m)
Pho Multilevel Pho Multilevel Ph St M Ye No No Ye Ye
oto an ulti s s s
Se da -
ns rd lev
or Ph el
(A ot (th
SD o re
-P Se e-
L2 ns lev
F, or, el)
AS su (Al
D- ch ert
PL as ,
2F AS Ac
R, D- tio

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

300 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

AD PL n,
P- 2F Fir
RF e
, Al
AD ar
S- m)
P2
00,
AD
S-
RP
20
0,
AS
D-
FIL
TR
EX
F)
Ion Duct Spv Ion Duct Spv Ion An Su Ye No No No Ye
Se alo pe s s
ns g, rvi
or Ad so
(A dr ry
SD es
-IL sa
2F) ble
Io
n
Du
ct
De
tec
tor
Photo Duct Spv Photo Duct Spv Ph An Su Ye No No No Ye
oto alo pe s s
Se g, rvi
ns Ad so
or dr ry
(A es
SD sa
-P ble
L2 Ph
F, ot
AS o
D- Du
PL ct
2F De
R, tec
AD tor

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 301

P-
RF
,
AD
S-
P2
00,
AD
S-
RP
20
0,
AS
D-
FIL
TR
EX
F)
Ion Duct Det Ion Duct Det Ion An Fir Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye
Se alo e s s s s s
ns g, Al
or Ad ar
(A dr m
SD es
-IL sa
2F) ble
Io
n
Du
ct
De
tec
tor
Photo Duct Det Photo Duct Det Ph An Fir Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye
oto alo e s s s s s
Se g, Al
ns Ad ar
or dr m
(A es
SD sa
-P ble
L2 Ph
F, ot
AS o
D- Du
PL ct
2F De
R, tec
AD tor
P-

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

302 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

RF
,
AD
S-
P2
00,
AD
S-
RP
20
0,
AS
D-
FIL
TR
EX
F)
Laser Sensor CLIP Laser Sensor CL An Fir Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye
IP alo e s s s s s
La g, Al
ser Ad ar
Se dr m
ns es
or sa
ble
N La
O se
TE r
: Ph
Th ot
is o
de Se
vic ns
e or,
typ su
e ch
is as
su AS
pp D-
ort LS
ed
in
bo
th
Ve
loc
iti
an
d
CL

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 303

IP
m
od
es,
ev
en
th
ou
gh
th
e
de
vic
e
its
elf
onl
y
su
pp
ort
s
CL
IP
m
od
e.
(A
SD
-L
S)
Ion Supv Ion Supv Ion St Su No No No No Ye
Se an pe s
ns da rvi
or rd so
(A Io ry
SD n
-IL Se
2F) ns
or,
su
ch
as
AS
D-
IL
2F
Photo Supv Photo Supv Ph St Su No No No No Ye
oto an pe s
Se da rvi

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

304 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

ns rd so
or Ph ry
(A ot
SD o
-P Se
L2 ns
F, or,
AS su
D- ch
PL as
2F AS
R, D-
AD PL
P- 2F
RF
,
AD
S-
P2
00,
AD
S-
RP
20
0,
AS
D-
FIL
TR
EX
F)
Acclimate Supv Acclimate Supv Ac An Su No No No No Ye
cli alo pe s
ma g, rvi
te ad so
Se dr ry
ns es
or sa
(M ble
CS m
-Ac ulti
cli -
ma crit
te2 eri
F) a
se
ns
or
Vel. Laser Sensor Laser Sensor Vel Ve Fir Ye No No Ye No
La loc e s s

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 305

ser iti Al
Se Se ar
ns rie m
or s
La
se
r
Se
ns
or
Vel. Laser Multilvl Laser Multilvl Vel Ve M Ye No No Ye No
La loc ulti s s
ser iti -
Se Se lev
ns rie el
or s (th
La re
se e-
r lev
Se el)
ns (Al
or ert
,
Ac
tio
n,
Fir
e
Al
ar
m)
Acclimate Dual Acclimate Dual Ac An Du Ye No No Ye Ye
cli alo al s s s
ma g, Re (fo
te ad sp r
Se dr on Al
ns es se ar
or sa (Fi m
(M ble re Re
CS m Al sp
-Ac ulti ar on
cli - m se
ma crit for )
te2 eri He No
F) a at (fo
se or r
ns He Su
or at pe
wit rvi
h so

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

306 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

sm ry
ok Re
e sp
Su on
pe se
rvi )
so
ry
for
sm
ok
e
wit
ho
ut
he
at)
Laser Multilvl CLIP Laser Multilvl CL An M Ye No No Ye Ye
IP alo ulti s s s
La g, -
ser Ad lev
Se dr el
ns es (th
or sa re
ble e-
N La lev
O se el)
TE r (Al
: Ph ert
Th ot ,
is o Ac
de Se tio
vic ns n,
e or, Fir
typ su e
e ch Al
is as ar
su AS m)
pp D-
ort LS
ed
in
bo
th
Ve
loc
iti
an
d
CL

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 307

IP
m
od
es,
ev
en
th
ou
gh
th
e
de
vic
e
its
elf
onl
y
su
pp
ort
s
CL
IP
m
od
e.
(A
SD
-L
S)
Beam Smoke Det Beam Smoke Det CL An Fir Ye Ye Ye Ye No
IP alo e s s s s
La g, Al
ser Ad ar
Se dr m
ns es
or sa
ble
N Be
O a
TE m
: S
Th m
is ok
de e
vic De
e tec
typ tor
e

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

308 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

is (V
su elo
pp citi
ort /
ed S
in m
bo art
th Sc
Ve an
loc m
iti od
an e
d onl
CL y)
IP
m
od
es,
ev
en
th
ou
gh
th
e
de
vic
e
its
elf
onl
y
su
pp
ort
s
CL
IP
m
od
e.
(A
SD
-L
S)
4-Warn Sensor 4-Warn Sensor Ve Fir Ye No No Ye No
4- loc e s s
W iti Al
arn Se ar
Se rie m

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 309

ns s
or m
(M ulti
CS -
-4- crit
W eri
arn a
) se
ns
or,
su
ch
as
M
C
S-
4-
W
ar
n
4-Warn Dual 4-Warn Dual 4- Ve Du Ye No No No No
W loc al s
arn iti Re
Se Se sp
ns rie on
or s se
(M m (Fi
CS ulti re
-4- - Al
W crit ar
arn eri m
) a for
se He
ns at
or, or
su He
ch at
as wit
M h
C sm
S- ok
4- e,
W fla
ar m
n e
an
d
ca
rb
on

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

310 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

m
on
oxi
de
Su
pe
rvi
so
ry
for
sm
ok
e,
fla
m
e
an
d
ca
rb
on
m
on
oxi
de
wit
ho
ut
he
at)
Fire/CO Sens Fire/CO Sens Ph Ve Du Ye No No Ye No
oto loc al s s
/ iti Re (Fi
CO Se sp re
Se rie on ala
ns s se rm
or m (Fi re
(M ulti re sp
CS - Al on
-C crit ar se
OF eri m onl
) a for y)
sm He
ok at
e or
an He
d at
C wit
O h
se sm

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 311

ns ok
or, e
su or
ch fla
as m
M e
C C
S- O
C Al
O ar
F. m
in
re
sp
on
se
to
ca
rb
on
m
on
oxi
de
.)
Fire/CO Trpl Fire/CO Trpl Ph Ve Tri Ye No No No No
oto loc ple s
/ iti Re (fo
CO Se sp r
Se rie on Fir
ns s se e
or m (Fi Al
(M ulti re ar
CS - Al m
-C crit ar Re
OF eri m sp
) a for on
sm He se
ok at )
e or Ye
an He s
d at (fo
C wit r
O h C
se sm O
ns ok Al
or, e ar
su or m
ch fla Re
as m sp

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

312 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

M e on
C C se
S- O )
C Al No
O ar (fo
F. m r
in Su
re pe
sp rvi
on so
se ry
to Re
ca sp
rb on
on se
m )
on
oxi
de
Su
pe
rvi
so
ry
for
sm
ok
e
or
fla
m
e
wit
ho
ut
he
at.
)
Aspirating Aspirating Int Sy M Ye No No Ye Ye
elli ste ulti s s s
ge m -
nt Se lev
FA ns el
AS or (fiv
T Int e-
Se elli lev
ns ge el)
or nt (Al
(Si As ert
ngl pir ,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 313

e- ati Ac
Ch ng tio
an S n
nel m 1,
) ok Ac
(A e tio
AD De n
-81 tec 2,
00) tor Fir
e
Al
ar
m
1,
Fir
e
Al
ar
m
2)
Asprating Multi Asprating Multi Int Sy M Ye No No Ye Ye
elli ste ulti s s s
ge m -
nt Se lev
FA ns el
AS or (fiv
T Int e-
Se elli lev
ns ge el)
or nt (Al
(M M ert
ulti ulti ,
-C - Ac
ha Ch tio
nn an n
el) nel 1,
(A As Ac
AD pir tio
-94 ati n
00) ng 2,
S Fir
m e
ok Al
e ar
De m
tec 1,
tor Fir
e
Al
ar

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 314 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

m
2)

5.4.2 Module Device Types

The following pre-defined module device types are available on the S3 Series (System
Sensor) FACP:

Input Modules -

Input Device Type Device Type As Phy Des Res Latc PAS Verif Cro
Reported By sical cript pon hing Allo icati ss
Panel Devi ion se ? wed on Zoni
ce Typ ? Allo ng
Typ e wed Allo
e ? wed
?

None Assigned No Device No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A

Devi devi Res
ce ce at pons
this e
addr
ess
Smoke Detector Smoke Detector AM Con Fire Yes Yes No Yes
M venti Alar
Mod onal m
ule Smo
(AM ke
M-2 Dete
F, ctor
AM moni
M-2I tore
F, d by
AM AM
M-4 M
F,
MMI-
10F)
Conv. Manual Station Manual Station AM Con Fire Yes Yes No No
M venti Alar
Mod onal m
ule pull
(AM stati
M-2 on
F, moni
AM tore

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 315

M-2I d by
F, AM
AM M
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Plenum Det Plenum Det AM Con Fire Yes No No Yes
M venti Alar
Mod onal m
ule Plen
(AM um
M-2 Smo
F, ke
AM Dete
M-2I ctor
F, moni
AM tore
M-4 d by
F, AM
MMI- M
10F)
N.O. Contacts N.O. Contacts AM Any Fire Yes No No No
M nor Alar
Mod mall m
ule y
(AM open
M-2 cont
F, act
AM devi
M-2I ce
F, moni
AM tore
M-4 d by
F, AM
MMI- M
10F)
Heat Detector Heat Detector AM Any Fire Yes No No No
M conv Alar
Mod entio m
ule nal
(AM heat
M-2 dete
F, ctor
AM
M-2I
F,
AM
M-4
F,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

316 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

MMI-
10F)
Sub Loop Sub Loop AM Any Fire Yes No No Yes
M conv Alar
Mod entio m
ule nal
(AM initia
M-2 ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-2I circu
F, it.
AM
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Waterflow Sil Waterflow Sil AM Any Fire Yes No No No
M wate Alar
Mod rflow m
ule switc
(AM h
M-2 moni
F, tore
AM d by
M-2I AM
F, M.
AM
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Beam Smoke Det Beam Smoke AM Any Fire Yes Yes No Yes
Det M conv Alar
Mod entio m
ule nal
(AM bea
M-2 m
F, smo
AM ke
M-2I dete
F, ctor
AM moni
M-4 tore
F, d by
MMI- AM
10F) M.
Duct Detector Duct Detector AM Any Fire Yes No No Yes
M conv Alar

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 317

Mod entio m
ule nal
(AM Duct
M-2 dete
F, ctor
AM moni
M-2I tore
F, d by
AM AM
M-4 M
F,
MMI-
10F)
FACP FACP AM Any Fire Yes No No No
M rem Alar
Mod ote m
ule FAC
(AM P
M-2 Alar
F, m
AM dry
M-2I cont
F, acts
AM moni
M-4 tore
F, d by
MMI- AM
10F) M
Remote Zone Remote Zone Zon Any Fire Yes No No Yes
e conv Alar
Mod entio m
ule nal
(AM initia
M-4 ting
SF, devi
MMI- ce
6SF) circu
it
Smoke/Heat Det Smoke/Heat Det AM Any Fire Yes No No Yes
M conv Alar
Mod entio m
ule nal
(AM phot
M-2 o/
F, ther
AM mal
M-2I dete
F, ctor
AM moni
M-4 tore

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

318 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

F, d by
MMI- AM
10F) M
Supervisory Sw Supervisory Sw AM Any Sup No No No No
M nor ervis
Mod mall ory
ule y
(AM open
M-2 cont
F, act
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Tamper Sw Tamper Sw AM Any Sup Yes No No No
M nor ervis
Mod mall ory
ule y
(AM open
M-2 cont
F, act
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Waterflow NS Waterflow NS AM Any Fire Yes No No No
M wate Alar
Mod rflow m
ule switc (Non
(AM h -sile
M-2 moni ncea
F, tore ble)
AM d by
M-2I AM
F, M.
AM
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
NR Actuator L NR Actuator L AM Any Non- Yes No No No

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 319

M nor repo
Mod mall rting
ule y
(AM open
M-2 cont
F, act
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
NR Actuator NL NR Actuator NL AM Any Non- No No No No
M nor repo
Mod mall rting
ule y
(AM open
M-2 cont
F, act
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
NAC Silence Sw NAC Silence Sw AM Any Silen N/A N/A N/A N/A
M nor ce
Mod mall Swit
ule y ch
(AM open
M-2 cont
F, act
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Reset Sw Reset Sw AM Any Res N/A N/A N/A N/A
M nor et
Mod mall Swit
ule y ch
(AM open
M-2 cont

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

320 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

F, act
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Fire Drill Sw Fire Drill Sw AM Any Fire N/A N/A N/A N/A
M nor Drill
Mod mall Swit
ule y ch
(AM open
M-2 cont
F, act
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Alarm Ack Sw Alarm Ack Sw AM Any Alar N/A N/A N/A N/A
M nor m
Mod mall Ackn
ule y owle
(AM open dge
M-2 cont Swit
F, act ch
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Trbl Ack Sw Trbl Ack Sw AM Any Trou N/A N/A N/A N/A
M nor ble
Mod mall Ackn
ule y owle
(AM open dge
M-2 cont Swit
F, act ch
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 S3 Series (System Sensor) 321

M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Addr. Manual Station Manual Station Man MS- Fire Yes Yes No No
ual 7AF Alar
Stati Addr m
on essa
Mod ble
ule pull
(MS- stati
7AF) on

Output Modules -

Output Device Device Type As Physical Description Silenceable?

Type Reported By Device Type
Panel

Signal AOM Sil NAC AOM Sil Signal Module Supervised Yes
(AOM-2SF, signal control
MMO-6SF) module, such as
AOM-2SF.
Signal AOM NS NAC AOM NS Signal Module Supervised No
(AOM-2SF, signal control
MMO-6SF) module, such as
AOM-2SF.
Form C AOM Form C AOM Form-C Module Form-C Dry Yes
NS NS (AOM-2RF, Contact control
MMO-6RF) module, such as
AOM-2RF
Form C AOM Form C AOM Form-C Module Form-C Dry No
NS NS (AOM-2RF, Contact control
MMO-6RF) module, such as
AOM-2RF

5.4.3 Disable Groups

The E3 Series has the ability to disable groups of input devices and output devices based on
the evaluation of CAM expressions. There are three classifications of Disable Groups that
are available:

1.) Disable Input Groups - When the CAM expression for the indicated Input Group goes
TRUE, all devices assigned to the Input Group will enter DISCONNECT trouble and will
become disabled.

2.) Disable Output Groups - When the CAM expression for the indicated Output Group goes

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 322 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

TRUE, all devices assigned to the Output Group will enter DISCONNECT trouble and will
become disabled.

3.) Disable Type Tags - Disable Type Tags allow both input and output devices to be
disabled with the activation of one CAM expression. Disable Type Tags, which range in
number from 600-699, may be assigned to the third and/or fourth Input/Output Group
assignment of a device. When the CAM expression for the indicated Disable Type Tag goes
TRUE, all devices assigned to the Disable Type Tag will enter DISCONNECT trouble and
will become disabled.
5.4.4 DACT Reporting Codes
One of the features of S3 Series systems is the ability to configure Custom DACT Reporting
Codes that are reported when the DACT-E3 is using either Ademco Contact ID or SIA
formats. This feature allows better identification of system events at the central station
receiver allowing for faster response to system events by appropriate personnel.

This feature is not enabled by default. To enable this feature, the user must do the
following:

1.) Open the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3 or ILI95-MB-E3 node that hosts the DACT-E3.

2.) For ILI-MB-E3 or ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, open the DACT Settings screen. For S3 Series
FACP nodes, select the General Settings screen and then select the DACT Settings tab.
Ensure that the DACT Enabled checkbox is checked.

3.) Select the "Use Custom (per-device) reporting codes" option.

4.) Configure custom codes using the Input Devices and Output Devices screens.

NOTE: If this feature is not enabled, the DACT-E3 will use the "Standard" reporting code
format, which is similar to the format used by the 7100.

NOTE: Only events reported from NGA, S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series or ILI95-E3 Series nodes
will be reported using the "custom" reporting code format. Events originating from all
other node types will use the "Standard" reporting code format, which is similar to the
format used by the 7100.

NOTE: All ILI-MB-E3 and ILI-S-E3 nodes in a network must contain at least V1.2 firmware
in order to take advantage of this feature. All ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3 nodes are
already compatible with this feature and do not require a firmware upgrade. All S3 Series
nodes are already compatible with this feature and do not require a firmware upgrade.
NGA nodes require at least V3.00 firmware in order to issue events that include "custom"
reporting codes.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

Part

VI
 324 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

6 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3)

6.1 Basic steps in configuring an E3 Series Panel
6.1.1 Programming loop devices and groups
Each ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3 in an E3 Series system has two SLC's. There are 126
total addresses available for programming on each SLC. Sensors, monitor elements and
control elements all share the address range of 1 - 126.

Each device address has a number of programmable options available. These include
options such as Device Type, Input Group (if the device is a sensor or a monitor element),
Output Group (if the device is a control element), Description Label, etc.

To program the device types and I/O groups for each address, select either the Input
Devices (all sensors and monitor elements) or Output Devices (all control elements) icon
from the Project Explorer 56 .

The entry screens for these types are very similar. The main difference is the list of device
types that are available on each entry screen.

See Input Devices 355 and Output Devices 363 for programming information on these entry
screens.

After completing SLC devices and groups entries, continue to "Entering Labels and
modifying default settings for SLC devices"
6.1.2 Entering labels and modifying default settings for loop devices
To enter labels for each loop device, select either the Input Devices (all sensors and monitor
elements) or Output Devices (all control elements) icon from the Project Explorer 56 .

To enter a label or modify the global default settings for any device, select the appropriate
device from the grid. Labels may be entered for each address in the description label entry
field. Labels can be up to 40 characters in length.

Other fields can also can be modified by address on the entry grid. Click on the following
help links to view programming information for the various device types.

Input Devices 355

Output Devices 363

For a description of the Group I/O concept, see Input/Output Groups

6.1.3 Downloading System Configuration
In order to perform a configuration download to the system, a connection must be made
between the RS-232 port on the PC/Laptop to either the RJ11 connector of any INI-7100
node or to the serial port on an S3 Series FACP, NGA, ANX-SR, ANX-MR or ILI-E3 Series
node that may be present in the system before attempting to download. If an S3 Series
FACP, ANX-SR or ANX-MR is available, the Ethernet port may also be used for downloads
via TCP/IP.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 325

NOTE: Downloads to Standalone 7100 panels or Standalone E3 Series systems may only
be made via the panel's local serial port. Downloads to Standalone S3 Series system may
be made via the panel's local serial port or its Ethernet port.

The following options on the Download screen are applicable to configuration downloads:

Port Options -
Select whether the download should be made via TCP/IP (Ethernet) or RS-232 (Comm).
This option is available only when the selected Gateway is an ANX or S3 Series FACP.

NOTE: It is not possible to download to INI-7100 nodes via Ethernet.

Select Comm Port -

Select the serial port to be used to connect to the system. Available COM ports range from
COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection option is also available. If selected, the
auto-detection will attempt to determine which of the PC's serial ports is connected to an
appropriate node. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct serial port it will be
necessary to manually select the correct port. This selection field is unavailable if the user
has opted to connect to the system via TCP/IP (Ethernet).

Enter IP Address -
If the user has opted to connect to the system via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the
IP address of the S3 Series FACP, ANX-SR or ANX-MR that is connected to the system.
This selection field is unavailable if the user has opted to connect via RS-232 (Comm).

Download Gateway -
You must select whether your computer is connected to an INI-7100 node, an S3 Series
FACP, an ILI-E3 Series node/NGA or to an ANX. For 7100 Standalone, S3 Series
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects, this field is not available since the PC must be
connected directly to the panel. An auto-detection option is also available. If the
auto-detection fails to determine the correct download gateway the download gateway
selection must be made manually.

NOTE: In order to download to S3 Series or E3 Series nodes such as the NGA and the
ILI-MB-E3 via RS-232, you MUST connect your computer to the serial port of an
E3-compatible node. All other node types can be downloaded from either an INI-7100 or
an E3-compatible node. All node types may be downloaded via the ANX's RS-232 port or
Ethernet port.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

Show CAM Memory Usage -

If this option is selected, CAMWorks will display a screen indicating how much of the
available CAM memory is being used by the current configuration after all of the CAMs for
the current node have been translated.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 326 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Save Configuration In Binary Format -

This option, intended only for diagnostic use, saves a binary file containing an exact image
of the target node's configuration database. This option should only be used at the
discretion of Gamewell-FCI Technical Support 932 personnel.

Select Application Type To Download -

In this section of the screen, CAMWorks presents several options for selecting what data to
download to the target panel. In the case of downloading configuration data to the target
panel, the "Configuration" option button must always be selected. The following options
appear when the user elects to perform a configuration download:

Send CAMs - When selected, CAMWorks will download CAMs to the selected node.
Send Device Labels / CAM Text (NGA nodes only) - When selected, CAMWorks
will download SLC device labels or CAM Text messages to the selected node.
Send Virtual Switch Labels (S3 Series FACP and ANX nodes only) - When
selected, CAMWorks will download Virtual Switch labels to the selected node.
Send Configuration - When selected, CAMWorks will download the configuration to
the selected node.
Download Screen Saver (NGA Only) - When selected, CAMWorks will download
images to the NGA for use as a screen saver.
Download Logo (NGA Only) - When selected, CAMWorks will download a user
supplied image that will be displayed on the System Normal screen.

Download -
Click on this button to begin the download. The user will be prompted to enter the system
Level 4 access code before the download will begin. If all goes well, the Download process
will continue until completed. The panel will reset following a successful download.

NOTE: If the system has not been previously configured, you should enter the system
default level 4 password. If a custom level 4 password has already been downloaded to
the panel, then that code should be entered instead.

Close -
Click on this command button to exit this screen.

Validation -
Click on this button to open the Program Validation 49 screen to scan the current project for
known types of configuration errors.

7100 Upload -
Click on this button upload a configuration from a 7100 panel. This function is only available
for 7100 Standalone projects. See this page 870 for more information.
6.1.4 Printing/Viewing configuration data tables
There are two options available for printing configuration files in CAMWorks. To print all
reports at once, right-click the current node icon in the Project Explorer 56 and select Print
Node. To view or print individual reports, click on the current node icon in the Project
Explorer 56 to bring up the Report Viewer window. In this screen, any available report can
be selected for viewing or printing.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 327

6.1.5 Programming node-wide parameters and defaults

There are many global programming options available in the E3 Series system. Most of
these options have been initialized to default settings when the project was created and
initialized. These default settings should be appropriate for a basic E3 Series configuration.
However, any or all of these parameters may be modified to suit the needs of any individual
custom configuration.

To modify any of these settings, select the appropriate icons under the current ILI-E3 Series
node in the Project Explorer 56 .

NAC Settings 346 (Not available on the ILI95-S-E3.)

ASM/ANU 383 (Not available on the ILI95-S-E3.)
General Settings 339
Label Groups 385
DACT Options 349

The following settings, located in Project Globals, will affect the ILI95-MB-E3 and
ILI95-S-E3:
Passwords 35
User Defined Types 36
Miscellaneous Globals 41
Display Priorities 41

The following Regional Settings will affect the ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:
Night/Weekend/Holiday Schedule 43

Finally, there are settings on the Silence Settings 44 and Node Summary 57 screens that
also affect the ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3.

After completing globals programming, you're ready to continue with "Programming loop
devices and groups".

6.2 E3 Series - How Do I?

6.2.1 Include Output in system General Output List
To place NAC1, NAC2, or Municipal circuit in a General Output List, select the NAC Settings
346 icon in the Project Explorer 56 . In the data entry grid there are checkboxes for each of

the General Output Lists. To assign an output to a list, Click the checkbox to select that
item.

To place a Control Element in a General Output List, select the Output Devices 363 icon from
the Project Explorer 56 .

NOTE: General Output List assignments are not available for Building Control Element
devices.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 328 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

6.2.2 Assign specific input to output relationships

To assign specific outputs to be activated by certain initiating devices, Input/Output Groups
must be used.

By assigning individual inputs and outputs to groups the user is able to create relationships
between these groups.

Input devices can be assigned to as many as four input groups (group 1-99, 300-499) in the
Input Devices screen.

SLC output devices may be assigned to as many as four CAM controlled group (group
125-224, 500-599) in the Output Devices screen.

Built-in outputs, such as the Notification Appliances and the Municipal Circuit may be
assigned to as many as four CAM controlled group (group 125-224, 500-599) in the NAC
Settings screen.

NOTE: The E3 Series and S3 Series FACPs do not have any direct linkage
between input groups and output groups. All custom input/output relationships
must be done through Conditional Action Maps (CAMs) 21 .
6.2.3 Create a custom display banner for panel
The System ID Label appears on the panel display when the system is in "System Normal"
condition. This label will also appear as a header for any event report that originates from
this node. Any node that prints the event through it's serial port will include this information.

The System ID Label is configured in the Node Summary 57 screen, which is called System
Overview for non-networked projects. Enter the label text in the System ID Label text box.
This label can be up to 19 characters in length and may not be blank. Click on the Save
button to save the entry.
6.2.4 Create my own SLC device types
The E3 Series and S3 Series allow the user to define up to forty User Defined device types.
The first ten are 7100 compatible User Defined Device Types and are restricted to AMM
modules only. The remaining User Defined Device Types allow much greater flexibility.

The User Defined Device Types are configured on a project-level instead of the node-level.
To access these settings, you must access the User Defined Types screen, which may be
found in the Project Globals 35 > Network Settings 35 > User Defined Types 36 tab in The
Ribbon 27 , or by accessing the User Defined Types 62 icon, which is under the Network
Settings 61 icon under Project Globals 61 in the Project Explorer 56 .
6.2.5 Disable downloading for a particular SLC address?
Some projects may have to be completed in phases. CAMWorks allows the user to
configure all of the points in the system and download only those devices that are physically
present in the system at any given time.

The Input Devices and Output devices screens contain an Active field. The Active field
contains an icon that may be toggled by double-clicking or by pressing the space bar when

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 329

the field has the focus (the background of the field will be highlighted when the field has the
focus). The icon itself will turn green to indicate that that address is active, or gray to
indicate that the address is inactive. When downloading a configuration, the inactive
devices will be skipped. When the inactive devices are ready to be downloaded, just toggle
the Active icons back to green, and they will be sent to the panel.
6.2.6 Disable DACT-E3
If the DACT-E3 is present in the system, the DACT Settings screen can be used to
configure the DACT-E3. In CAMWorks, the DACT-E3 is enabled automatically. To disable
the DACT-E3, Select the DACT Settings screen under the ILI-MB-E3 or ILI95-MB-E3 icon in
the Project Explorer 53 . Then, uncheck the Enable DACT checkbox. After completing entry,
click on the Save button. The DACT-E3 should now be disabled.

NOTE: If the Enable DACT option is unchecked, the DACT-E3 is not supervised, and no
event transmissions are attempted. This option must be set to Off (unchecked) for nodes
with no DACT-E3 present.
6.2.7 View selected reports in a window
To view or print individual reports for the current node, select the node's icon in the Project
Explorer 56 . A Report Viewer window will appear in the main area 53 . Select the report of
interest from the drop-down list and then click the Show Report command button.

This feature displays the reports exactly as they will be printed. If the report contains multiple
pages, you can move among the pages by clicking on the Move Next > and the Move
Previous < arrows located at the top of the screen.

To print the report, click on the Printer icon ( ) on the toolbar at the top of the Report
Viewer window.
6.2.8 Export configuration in a different format
CAMWorks allows the user to export data files in different formats. For example, if you
would like to export a file in a Word For Windows format, select node's icon in the Project
Explorer 56 . A Report Viewer window will appear in the main area 53 of the screen. Select
the report of interest from the grid by placing a check mark in the selection field next to the
desired report and then click on the Show Report command button. The selected report will
appear on the screen. To export this document in the chosen format, click on the Export icon
(disk icon, ) at the top of the screen. Select the format option from the list of available
options and click OK to create the file.

CAMWorks also includes a method of performing a direct export to a Microsoft Excel file.
See this page 50 for more information.
6.2.9 Create Zone Codes
NOTE: These settings apply only to the ILI95-MB-E3.

Zone Coding allows an FACP to produce a distinct coded pattern on it's NAC outputs, based
upon the particular input device or cross zone that caused the alarm condition.

The E3 Series supports up to 63 different codes, each of which may be configured for any

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 330 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

pattern of two, three, or four digits. The digits may range from 1 to 14 pulses. After the
necessary codes are entered in the Zone Code screen (which can be accessed via the Zone
Code icon under the current node's icon in the Project Explorer 56 ), they can be associated
with individual input devices and cross zones in the appropriate entry screen (i.e. Input
Devices and Cross Zones). Multiple inputs may be assigned to run the same code, if
desired, or each input may have a unique code (up to a limit of 63 different codes).

To set the pulses for a particular zone code, simply select the digit in the entry grid and
choose the appropriate number of pulses for each digit from the drop-down list.
6.2.10 Setup a cross zone
The E3 Series provides up to 30 cross zones. There are two types of cross zones available.
One type is groups cross zoning, and the other is point cross zoning.

Point Cross Zone – A Point Cross Zone is a collection of individual points configured into a
virtual cross zone group. Point Cross Zoning provides a two-stage fire alarm condition
where the first alarm in the virtual group initiates an Action condition. The second stage
alarm is triggered when the number of alarms in the virtual cross zone group has reached a
pre-set trigger level (user programmable).

Point Cross Zone Programming:

1.) In the Cross Zone screen, select the desired Cross Zone by clicking on the cross
zone number on the left.
2.) Click on the "..." button under the "Config" column to assign devices to the cross
zone. Click Save and then Close when done.
3.) A selection window will open that will display all devices on the current node that are
eligible to be used for cross zoning. Devices may be selected by placing a check
mark in the selection field (labeled "Sel").
4.) Click the Add button to add the devices to the cross-zone. Devices are removed
from the grid when they are added to the cross zone. Devices can be removed from
the cross zone later if desired.
5.) Click Close to dismiss the Add Devices window.
6.) Select the desired options for each virtual cross zone group. See this page 381 for
more information.

Group Cross Zone – The E3 Series system provides group cross zoning by assigning Input
Groups on S3 Series FACP, ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series nodes directly to a cross
zone. The total number of point cross zone and group cross zone virtual groups is thirty
groups in any mixture. The system will increment the trigger count when any of the
associated input groups are activated.

NOTE: If an individual Cross Zone input is non-latching, each time it activates it will
increase the trigger count. This means that if the input activates, restores and re-activates
it will increment the trigger count twice.

Group Cross Zone Programming:

1.) In the Cross Zone screen, select the desired Cross Zone by clicking on the cross

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 331

zone number on the left.

2.) Select the "Group" Cross zone type for each cross zone that is being used as a
group cross zone.
3.) Click on the "..." button under the "Config" column .
4.) Assign the desired Input Groups to the Cross Zone. Click Save and then Close
when done.

NOTE: Both a node and a group number must be specified. The node must be an S3
Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 or ILI95-S-E3.

NOTE: The selected input groups must have devices assigned to it before configuring
cross zoning.

NOTE: Only certain device types are eligible for cross zoning. See the following pages
for information about compatible device types:

S3 Series (System Sensor) Device Types 294

S3 Series (Apollo) Device Types 188

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 545

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Module Device Types 565

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 426

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Element Device Types 429

NOTE: Verification and PAS cannot be mixed with Cross Zoning.

3.) Set the desired trigger level for the cross zone.
4.) Select the desired options for each virtual cross zone group. See this page 381 for
more information.
5.) Click Save to save all of the changes.

NOTE: If a system is to use both by group and by point cross zoning, input devices must
not be shared by both types of cross zoning as this could lead to unexpected results.

Typically, a general fire alarm is activated when the configured trigger level is met.
However, the response to the Cross Zone activation is programmable via the Configure
Cross Zones screen. Regardless of user programming, the node will set bits in its
associated extended system status map for a Pre-alarm on a cross zone and for a Cross
Zone activation.

6.3 E3 Series - Configuration Screens

6.3.1 Passwords
NOTE: This screen appears under the ILI95-MB-E3 only for E3 Series Standalone
projects. For networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Network Settings 61

\Passwords 61 .

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 332 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

The system allows four levels of password access to prevent unauthorized modification of
critical system functions. In addition, the system supports a maximum of five different
passwords for each of the four access levels to provide for unique identification of up to five
different users. Each password must be numeric and may range from (000001 - 999999).
The value of 000000 is not allowed.

There are four levels of access granted by the system. These are Level 1, Level 2, Level 3,
and Level 4. Level 4 grants the user the greatest amount of access, while Level 1 grants the
least amount of access.

NOTE: The Level 4 Password may not be set to any of the standard default passwords
(111111, 222222, 333333 or 444444.)

There are five different users available, labeled as Users 1-5. This allows the user to create
five different sets of passwords (one for each access level.) The system's history log will
indicate which user gained access to the system when unique passwords are assigned to
each user.

NOTE: Even though CAMWorks requires the user to assign a non-default Level 4
password, it is still highly recommended to change the remaining system passwords to
non-default values.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.2 User Defined Types

NOTE: This screen appears under the ILI95-MB-E3 only for E3 Series Standalone
projects. For networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Network Settings 61

\User Defined Types 62 .

The E3 Series and S3 Series FACPs provides a great degree of flexibility for user defined
device types. In the past, the User Defined AMM Types in the 7100 were configured at the
individual node level. This function has been combined with the E3 Series/S3 Series User
Defined Device Types into one configuration screen.

Device types 48-55 are reserved for 7100 User Defined Device Types. In the grid, the
device type number is highlighted in yellow for these device types.

NOTE: These device types can be used with 7100 nodes, ILI-E3 Series nodes and S3
Series (System Sensor) FACPs, but not with ILI95-E3 Series nodes or S3 Series (Apollo)
FACPs.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 333

The options available for each user defined type are as follows:

SLC Type - Select whether this device type should be a System Sensor or Apollo device
type. This selection may or may not be available, depending on the nodes that are present
in the current project.

NOTE: This setting is fixed to "System Sensor" for the 7100 User Defined Device Types.

User Defined Device Type - This identifies what the physical device type is for this user
defined type. The following device types are available:

Available User Defined Device Types for the 7100:

User Defined Device Type Description Allowed Response Types

AMM Module Addressable Monitor See AMM Modules.

Module, used to monitor any
normally open contact
device.

Available Physical Device Types for the ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3 and S3 Series (System Sensor)
FACPs:

User Defined Device Description Allowed in CLIP Allowed Response

Type Mode Types
No Device Used to indicate Yes See No Device.
there is no device
type configured.
Ion Sensor Analog/addressable Yes See Ion Sensors.
Ion smoke detectors,
such as the ASD-
IL2F.
Photo Sensor Analog/addressable Yes See Photo Sensors.
Photoelectric smoke
detectors, such as
the ASD-PL2F.
Thermal Sensor Analog/addressable Yes See Thermal
Thermal sensors, Sensors.
such as the ATD-L2F
(standard
temperature), ATD-
HL2F (high
temperature) or
ATD-RL2F (rate of
rise).

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

334 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Acclimate Sensor Analog/addressable Yes * See Acclimate

multi-criteria sensor, Sensors.
such as MCS-
Acclimate2F.
AMM Module Addressable Monitor Yes See AMM Modules.
Module, used to
monitor any normally
open contact device.
Signal Module Notification Yes See NAC Modules.
Appliance/Speaker
Circuit Control
Module, such as the
AOM-2SF or MMO-
6SF
Form-C Module Form-C Dry Contact Yes See Form-C Modules
Module, such as .
AOM-2RF or MMO-
6RF.
CLIP Laser Sensor Analog/Addressable Yes See CLIP Laser
High Sensitivity Sensors.
NOTE: This device Photoelectric smoke
type is supported in detectors, such as
both Velociti and ASD-LS.
CLIP modes, even
though the device
itself only supports
CLIP mode.
Photo/Thermal Analog/addressable Yes See Photo/Thermal
Sensor Photoelectric/ Sensors.
Thermal sensor,
such as ASD-PTL2F.
Zone Module Addressable Monitor Yes See Zone Modules.
Module, such as
AMM-4SF, used to
monitor certain two-
wire conventional
smoke detectors.
See Gamewell-FCI
Compatibility
Addendum (P/N:
9000-0427) for more
details.
Manual Station Addressable Manual Yes See Manual Station
Module Station, such as the Modules.
MS-7AF.
Intelligent Beam Analog/addressable No See Intelligent Beam
Detector Beam Photoelectric Detectors.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 335

Smoke Detector,
such as ABD-2F.
Vel Laser Sensor Analog/Addressable No See Verlociti Laser
High Sensitivity Sensors.
Photoelectric smoke
detectors.
4-Warn Sensor Velociti Series No See 4-Warn Sensors
combination smoke, .
carbon monoxide,
temperature and
flame detector.
Photo/CO Sensor Velociti Series multi- No See Photo/CO
criteria sensor, with Sensors.
carbon monoxide
detection and
reporting, such as
the MCS-COF.
Intelligent FAAST System Sensor No See Intelligent
Sensor Intelligent Aspirating FAAST Sensors.
(Single-Channel) Smoke Detector
Intelligent FAAST System Sensor No See Intelligent
Sensor Intelligent Multi- FAAST Sensors.
(Multi-Channel) Channel Aspirating
Smoke Detector

Available User Defined Device Types for the ILI95-MB-E3, ILI95-S-E3 and S3 Series
(Apollo) FACPs:

User Defined Device Type Description Allowed Response Types

No Device Used to indicate there is no See No Device.
device type configured.
Ion Sensor Analog/addressable Ion See Ion Sensors.
smoke detectors, such as
the XP95-I.
Optical Sensor Analog/addressable See Photo Sensors.
Photoelectric smoke
detectors, such as the XP95-
P.
Temperature Sensor Analog/addressable Thermal See Thermal Sensors.
sensors, such as the XP95-
T.
Multi-Sensor Analog/addressable multi- See Multi-Sensors.
criteria sensor, such as the
XP95-M.
PID-95 Point Identification Device See Point Identification

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

336 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

used to monitor any normally Devices.

open contact device.
SCE-95 Signal Control Element used See Signal Control Elements
to control Notification .
Appliance Circuits.
RCE-95 Relay Control Element that See Relay Control Elements.
provides one Form-C Dry
Contact.
BCE-95 Building Control Element See Building Control
that provides two Form-C Elementsol Elements.
Dry Contacts for On/Off/Auto
(HOA) operation.
MS-95 / MS-95 T Addressable Manual Station. See Manual Station
Elements.
CZI-95 (Non-Interrupting) Conventional Zone Interface, See Conventional Zone
used to monitor certain two- Interfaces.
wire conventional smoke
detectors. See Gamewell-
FCI Compatibility Addendum
(P/N: 9000-0427) for more
details.
CZI-95 (Interrupting) Conventional Zone Interface, See Conventional Zone
used to monitor certain two- Interfaces.
wire conventional smoke
detectors. See Gamewell-
FCI Compatibility Addendum
(P/N: 9000-0427) for more
details.

System Response Type - Selects the desired response to an activation from this device
type. See tables above for information about the available response types for each physical
device type.

Description - The text that will be associated with this User Defined Type. This will be used
for both on-screen and printed event reports. This description may be up to fourteen
characters in length.

Silenceable - This option applies only when the physical device type is set to Signal Module,
Form-C Module, SCE-95 or RCE-95. This indicates whether this device type can be
silenced or not.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 337

6.3.3 Miscellaneous
NOTE: This screen appears under the ILI95-MB-E3 only for E3 Series Standalone
projects. For networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Network Settings 61

\Miscellaneous 66 .

The following system-wide settings are configured through the Miscellaneous screen:

Trouble Reminder - If this option is enabled then acknowledged trouble events will be
periodically "unacknowledged". This means that the system's buzzer will be turned back on
and the System Trouble LED will blink as if a new trouble condition were being reported.

Multiple Trouble Acknowledge - Turning this option on will allow up to ten trouble
conditions to be acknowledged with one Trouble Acknowledge command.

Action Condition Acknowledged By - This configuration option selects whether the

Trouble Acknowledge button is used to acknowledge Action (pre-alarm) conditions or the
Alarm Acknowledge button is used to acknowledge Action conditions. This setting defaults
to the Alarm Acknowledge button. This setting is not available when 7100 nodes are
present in the network.

Walk Test Timeout - The Walk Test timeout will cause the system to automatically cancel
the Walk Test mode if it isn't manually turned off. This value may be (30, 60, 90, 120 or 180
Minutes) .

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.4 Display Priorities

NOTE: This screen appears under the ILI95-MB-E3 only for E3 Series Standalone
projects. For networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Network Settings 61

\Display Priorities 67 .

NOTE: These settings apply to S3 Series FACP, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3 Series
and NGA nodes only.

The S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3 Series and NGA displays conform to UL 864 9th
edition and UL 2572 1st edition event display requirements. The most significant change
from the 7100 display is that concurrent events do not automatically scroll. Instead, the
display always shows the earliest (oldest) event of the highest priority present in the system
(or region), unless the user scrolls the events manually.

Since events do not scroll, the behavior of the display depends entirely on what priority the
system assigns to each event. These priorities can be modified in this screen. Note that
this only configures how events are DISPLAYED. To configure a different system response,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

338 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

a User Defined Type 36 should be used instead.

Each system condition listed has both an Acknowledged and Unacknowledged priority.
Typically, the Unacknowledged priority for each condition is of a higher priority than its
Acknowledged priority. The system has e ight different priority levels, ranging from Level 1
to Level 8. Level 1 is the lowest priority level, while Level 8 is the highest priority level.

The following system conditions may be assigned new display priorities:

ALARM - Fire Alarm Conditions

CO/GAS ALARM - CO/Gas alarm conditions.
MNS ALARM - Mass Notification alarm conditions.
ACTION - Action (pre-alarm) Conditions. This applies to multi-level devices, Cross Zones
and other pre-alarm conditions.
SUPERVISORY- All Supervisory Off-Normal and Tamper conditions.
MNS SUPERVISORY - All Supervisory Off-Normal and Tamper conditions related to
mass-notification devices.
TROUBLE - All System Trouble conditions.
MNS TROUBLE - All System Trouble conditions conditions related to mass-notification
devices

NOTE: The priority settings for MNS Alarm, MNS Trouble and MNS Supervisory only
affect NGA nodes.

These settings are automatically configured for ALL S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3
Series and NGA nodes in the system, therefore all S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3 Series
and NGA nodes will have the same set of display priorities once they have all been
downloaded.

To change a priority, click and drag its slider and move it to the left or to the right. Moving a
slider to the right gives the event a higher priority, while sliding it to the left gives it a lower
priority. The currently selected priority level is displayed to the right of the slider.

NOTE: To revert all Display Priority settings to their UL approved settings, click either
the "MNS Overrides Fire" or "Fire Overrides MNS" button at the top of the window.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 339

NOTE: These settings should be left to their default settings, unless there is a
specific need to change them.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.5 Night/Weekend/Holiday Schedule

NOTE: This screen appears under the ILI95-MB-E3 only for E3 Series Standalone
projects. For networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Regional Settings
70 \Night/Weekend/Holiday Schedule 70 .

In E3 Series systems, you can optimize the sensitivity of the sensors for particular times
during the day, on weekends and on holidays. This can be used to increase sensitivity for
those times when a building is not in use. When the system's real-time clock reaches a
configured time or day, the system will automatically begin to use the Night Sensitivity
settings configured for each sensor. In addition, any Fire alarm that occurs during this time
will activate the General Night Alarm output list as well as both SSM bit 440 (Day Alarm or
Night Alarm) and SSM bit 441 (Night Alarm.)

NOTE: These settings affect the fire alarm response only.

Night Schedule - Select Night Start and Night Stop operation times from the drop-down
lists. During the programmed times, the sensors will operate with the defined Night
Sensitivity settings.

Weekend Schedule - Define weekend days for night sensitivity operation by checking the
appropriate days.

Holiday Schedule - Configure Holidays for Night sensitivity operation by clicking on the
calendar icon ( ). A calendar will be displayed. Select the holiday by clicking on the day of
the month. The user can move through the calendar by clicking on the arrow icons located
at the top of the calendar. The user may enter up to sixteen holidays. Dates can be cleared
by placing a check in the "Sel" column next to the appropriate holiday and clicking the Clear
button at the bottom of the window.
6.3.6 General Settings
This entry screen contains various system options that pertain to this ILI95-MB-E3 or
ILI95-S-E3 node. The entry fields are grouped as follows:

General Settings -

RS-232 Baud Rate - Sets the baud rate (measured in bits per second)
used by this node to communicate with serial devices. Selections range
from 115,200 BPS down to 1,200 BPS.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

340 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: All Gamewell-FCI supplied software communicates with the

ILI-E3 Series at 115,200 BPS. Closing the W14 jumper or SW2-Switch
#5 on the ILI-E3 Series node sets the serial port baud rate back to
115,200 BPS overriding custom programming.

RS-232 Printer Supervision Test Interval - As a part of the supervision of

the node's serial port, the system can print out test messages on a periodic
rate. This option allows you to change the frequency of this test from 1
hour up to 21 hours. Selecting Disable will turn this feature off.

Enable Supervision of RS-232 Port For Use With - This setting should
be set according to what type of device is normally connected to the node's
serial port. This setting should be set to "Printer" if a printer is connected
to this node's serial port and trouble reporting for printer out of paper or
printer offline conditions is desirable. Set this option to "None" if no printer
is connected.

SLC Class A - Select this if the SLC loops are wired Class A (Style 6 or
Style 7).

NOTE: If one SLC loop remains unused, you must connect the B+ and
A+ terminals as well as the B- and A- terminals of the unused SLC loop
to prevent Loop Break troubles from being reported.

PAS Night ByPass - If this setting is turned on, then devices configured
for Positive Alarm Sequence will automatically go into alarm during the
defined Night hours as well as the defined Weekend and Holiday days.

Supervise PM-9 Power Supply - Selecting this option will cause the
ILI95-MB-E3 to supervise the PM-9 power supply. If the PM-9 is
connected to this ILI95-MB-E3 via ribbon cable, the ILI95-MB-E3 will
supervise the PM-9 regardless of this setting.

NOTE: This setting applies only to the ILI95-MB-E3.

Municipal Circuit is used for Releasing Service - When enabled, the

word "RELEASE" will be appended to displayed event reports when the
Municipal Circuit is activated. In addition, bit #414 in the System Status
Map will be true when the Municipal Circuit is activated. Finally, a Node 0
Regional Releasing Status bit will be true if this node belongs to Region 24
0 - Region 24 31.

NOTE: For E3 Series Standalone applications, the Regional Releasing

Status bit is not available.

NOTE: This setting applies only to the ILI95-MB-E3.

Inhibit Reset If Any Alarm Is Still Active -

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 341

When this option is enabled, the system will not allow a reset to take place
if the system is in alarm condition unless the device that originated the
alarm is no longer reporting an alarm condition. For example, if a manual
station initiated the alarm, the system cannot be reset until the manual
station is reset. In the case of a sensor, if the amount of smoke or heat
detected by the sensor decreases to below the device's alarm threshold
the system will reset. Otherwise, the system will not reset.

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to E3 Series Standalone projects.

NOTE: This setting applies only to the ILI95-MB-E3.

Fast CAM Timers - When enabled, the CAM timers have a resolution of
one-half second. When disabled, CAM timers have a one-second
resolution.

NOTE: Be aware that if a timer is defined using Advanced CAM

Programming 920 , the desired timer interval must be multiplied by two
when this setting is enabled.

Unique Buzzer Indication for Supervisory Conditions - When enabled,

the panel will chirp its buzzer in a different pattern for unacknowledged
supervisory conditions and unacknowledged alarm conditions. Compatible
firmware must be installed in all connected displays in order for this option
to affect their buzzers.

Inhibit Reset & Silence Following First Alarm - When enabled, the
system may not be silenced or reset for sixty seconds following an initial
alarm.
LED Blink -

On - Checking this box will turn on the normal condition blinking for the
SLC devices LED's.

Off - Checking this box will turn off the normal condition blinking for the
SLC devices LED's.

Delays/TimeOut -

NOTE: These delay and timing functions are only available if the NAC(s)
are NOT assigned to CAMable output groups.

NAC Cut Off Delay - This option allows the NAC circuits to be
automatically silenced after a set period of time. Note that this delay
begins after the silence inhibit delay ends. This setting may range from
No CutOff (meaning no delay is applied) to fifty (50) minutes (in five (5)
minute increments).

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

342 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: This setting applies only to the ILI95-MB-E3.

Silence Inhibit Delay - This setting will prevent the system from being
silenced after an alarm. This setting may range from No delay to
twenty-one (21) minutes (in two (2) minute increments).

Sequential Restart Delay - Specifies the number of seconds between

deactivation of sequential-restart AOM devices during a sequential restart.
This setting may range from No delay to twenty (20) seconds (in one (1)
second increments).

PAS Acknowledge Time - Select the time interval (in seconds) that the
panel will allow the user to acknowledge the alarm. If the fire alarm is not
acknowledged within this time interval the panel will cancel Positive Alarm
Sequence and go straight into fire alarm. This setting may range from 1 to
6553 seconds. This setting defaults to 15 seconds.

PAS Investigate Time - Select the time interval (in seconds) that the
panel will allow the user to investigate the source of the fire alarm once it
has been acknowledged. If the panel is not reset within this time interval
the system will go into fire alarm. However, if a subsequent fire alarm
occurs before this interval times out the system will go into fire alarm,
canceling the Positive Alarm Sequence. This setting may range from 1 to
6553 seconds. This setting defaults to 180 seconds.

Number of Annunciators/Displays -

LCD 7100 Annunciators - This sets the number of remote LCD-7100 displays
connected to this ILI95-MB-E3 node. Up to five LCD-7100 annunciators may
be connected to an ILI95-MB-E3.

NOTE: This setting applies only to the ILI95-MB-E3.

LCD E3 Displays - This option sets the total number of LCD-E3

keypad/displays that are connected to this ILI95-MB-E3 node. The system
allows a maximum of six LCD-E3 displays per ILI95-MB-E3.

NOTE: This setting applies only to the ILI95-MB-E3.

NOTE: LCD-SLP annunciators are configured on the Annunciators 344

screen.

Log Settings -

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 343

Enable Re-report Failed Logins - When enabled, a report of recent

access failed events will be printed to the panel's serial port upon a
successful login by a user. If the access is granted via CAMWorks, the
report will be displayed from within CAMWorks. The report will include
both the current and most recent previous access granted event as well as
all access failed events in between.

Log ASM/ANU/LCD-SLP Switch Activations - When enabled, the

system will produce a logged event when ASM-16, ANU-48 or LCD-SLP
switches on this node are activated and deactivated. These logged events
will be printed by a printer connected to this node, other nodes in the same
region as this node or on global reporting nodes, but will not be displayed.
These events can be viewed on-screen using the View Log menu.

NOTE: This setting requires all ILI and ILI95 nodes to have Version
3.2 firmware or later. All NGA nodes must have Version 3.10 firmware
or later. All ANX nodes must have Version 1.30 firmware or later. S3
Series FACP nodes require Version 1.10 firmware or later.

NOTE: Logged switch activations will not be reported on INI-7100

nodes.

NOTE: This setting is applicable to S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3 and

ILI95-MB-E3 node types only.

Multilevel Percentage -

Alert Percentage - Sets the percent of alarm at which a multilevel Ion or

Photo sensor will issue an Alert condition.

Action Percentage - Sets the percent of alarm at which a multilevel Ion or

Photo sensor will issue an Action condition. This must be set to a higher
percentage than the Multilevel Alert Percentage.

Default Verification Settings -

Smoke Detector - This option selects the default sensor verification

setting. It can be set for automatic verification (Verify) or Positive Alarm
Sequence (PAS) or neither (None). When configuring sensors, they can
be set to accept this default setting or use a setting that overrides this
default setting.

Pull Station - This option selects the default manual station verification
setting. It can be set for Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS) or no verification
(None). When configuring manual stations, they can be set to accept this
default setting or use a setting that overrides this default setting.

Zone Code Options -

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 344 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: These settings apply only to the ILI95-MB-E3.

Zone Code Speed - Selects the speed of the zone coding, 60 beats per
minute or 120 beats per minute.

Rounds per Zone Code - Selects how many times each code runs. This
setting can be for either three or four runs.

NACs after Last Code - This setting indicates what state the NAC circuits
will be in after the last zone code runs. This can be set to either Off or
Post Code (which allows a standard code or steady operation.) See this
page 346 for more information.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.7 Annunciators
The LCD-SLP is an annunciator that uses an LCD touchscreen for primary user interaction.
The system supports up to fifteen (15) supervised and fully functional LCD-SLP
annunciators (addressed 1-15) as well as unsupervised (display only) LCD-SLP
annunciators (addressed as 0). The LCD-SLP also includes five user-programmable push-
buttons (with multi-color LEDs) and three pre-defined push-buttons (Menu, Fire Drill and
Reset.)

The LCD-SLP allows access to various system functions including:

- Acknowledging alarm, trouble and supervisory conditions.

- Silencing the system.
- Resetting the nodes in its region (or all nodes in the system).
- System Configuration, Walk Test / Drill, I/O, System Clock and other system functions.

NOTE: The unsupervised, display-only LCD-SLP's are not configurable.

The Annunciators screen is used to configure the LCD-SLP annunciators connected to this
panel. On the left of the screen, is a set of buttons and check boxes that represent each of
the fifteen LCD-SLP annunciators. The right side of the screen is the primary work area that
allows configuration of the currently selected LCD-SLP.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 345

To configure an LCD-SLP, first select the LCD-SLP addresses that are present in the
system by placing a check mark in the check box for the desired LCD-SLP addresses.

Next, select an individual LCD-SLP to configure by clicking on its associated button on the
left side of the screen. The contents of the right side of the screen will change to reflect the
current configuration settings for the selected LCD-SLP.

The right side of the screen has an image that represents the LCD-SLP. Within the image
of the LCD-SLP are five buttons that represent the five user-programmable push buttons.
Pressing one of those buttons opens the configuration settings for that specific button on the
bottom right of the screen.

The following settings pertain to the LCD-SLP itself:

Lamp Test - Selecting Yes will cause the LCD-SLP to perform a lamp test when it is reset.
Selecting No will cause the LCD-SLP to not perform a lamp test.

The following settings pertain to the selected LCD-SLP switch (selected by pressing on the
buttons that represent the LCD-SLP user-programmable push buttons):

Switch Type - This option sets the function that the switch performs. All switches are
defaulted to the "Control" option. When configured for this function, the switch will toggle its
associated Bit Number and can be used in CAM expressions. Each switch may be
optionally configured for an Auxiliary Function. This auxiliary function differs for each switch
and may be viewed by clicking here.

NOTE: When a switch is configured for its Auxiliary Function, it will not trigger its
associated bit number.

NOTE: When a switch is configured for its Auxiliary Function, its associated LED's will be
taken over by the Auxiliary Function and will no longer be programmable via CAMs.

NOTE: If an LCD-SLP switch is reconfigured for an Auxiliary Function, any CAMs

previously written for the LED's associated with that switch will be deleted. Before deleting
the CAMs, CAMWorks will issue a warning asking for confirmation.

Momentary - When the switch type is configured as a control switch, the switch can be
configured as a momentary switch by placing a check mark in this field. When enabled, a
switch press will cause the associated SSM bit location to go true once and then false again.

Latching - The switch may be configured for latching operation when the switch type is
configured as a control switch. When selected, the current switch state (ON or OFF) will
persist through reset.

NOTE: A switch may not be configured for both momentary and latching operation at the
same time.

Description - The user may enter up to ten characters to describe this switch. This label
will be displayed on the LCD-SLP display to identify the switch's function.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 346 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

The LCD-SLP's LED's are configured via CAMs. Please see this page 389 for more
information.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.8 NAC Settings

NOTE: These settings apply only to the ILI95-MB-E3.

This screen contains all settings that pertain to the panel's Notification Appliance Circuits,
the Municipal Circuit and the Coded Patterns used by the NAC's.

The following options are available for the Notification Appliance Circuits and the Municipal
Circuit:

Allow enable/disable of municipal circuit via display menus - When this option is
checked, users may manually enable or disable this node's built-in municipal circuit via the
front panel menus on the LCD-SLP, LCD-E3 or NGA. This option is unchecked by default.

NOTE: Enabling this option violates UL 864 9th edition.

Silenceable - Check this option to make this output device silenceable from the front panel.
(This option is not available for the Municipal Circuit).

Coded - Check this option to enable coding for this output device. (This option is not
available for the Municipal Circuit).

MNS Dedicated - If this circuit is being used solely as a mass-notification output, enable
this option. Doing so will cause the panel to issue all trouble events from this circuit as Mass
Notification Troubles. (This option is not available for the Municipal Circuit).

NOTE: This option must be enabled for UL2572 compliance.

Sync - Check this option to enable synchronization of notification appliances connected to

this circuit. (This option is not available for the Municipal Circuit).

NOTE: NAC Circuits may not be configured for Coded and Sync operation at the same
time.

NOTE: In order to maintain UL Listing, the ILI-MB-E3 must be hardware revision K or

later and the ILI95-MB-E3 must be hardware revision D or later if the NAC Sync feature
is used.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 347

Day Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Day Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into afire alarm condition during the defined
day period, this list of outputs will be activated.

Night Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Night Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into fire alarm condition during the defined
night period, this list of outputs will be activated.

CO/Gas Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default CO/Gas Alarm
list. When any initiating device in the system goes into a CO or Gas alarm condition, this list
of outputs will be activated.

Action - Check this option to place this output in the system default Action list. When an
input defined as Multilevel reaches the programmed "Action" threshold, this list of outputs
will be activated.

Supv (Supervisory) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Supervisory
list. When any supervisory device in the system goes into an Off Normal condition, this list of
outputs will be activated.

WT Drill (Walk Test/Drill) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Walk
Test/Drill list. This list of outputs is activated for audible walk test or during a Fire Drill.

Trouble - Check this option to place this output in the system default Trouble list. When
there is a trouble condition in the system, this list of outputs will be activated.

Output Group(s) - The NACs and Municipal circuit can belong to as many as four output
groups. These groups range from 125 to 224 and 500-599 and are controlled by CAM logic.

NOTE: The third and fourth Output Group assignments may also be assigned to Disable
Type Tags, which range from 600 to 699. See this page 434 for more information on the
Group Disable feature.

Maufact. Sync Type - In order to synchronize notification appliances, the notification

appliance device type must be configured. The available device types are System Sensor,
Cooper-Wheelock, Gentex and Faraday.

Device Silence Option - When synchronized NAC's are silenced the system can take one
of two possible actions:

· Horn Only - Only the horns will be silenced when this option is selected.
· Horn and Strobe - Both horns and strobes will be silenced when this option is selected.

NOTE: If the Horn-only silence option is used, DO NOT silence the NAC circuit using
CAMs. Doing so will cause the circuit to completely turn off. Instead, use the
"Silenceable" checkbox to enable silencing of the NAC circuit.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

348 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: In order to maintain UL Listing, the ILI-MB-E3 must be hardware revision K or

later and the ILI95-MB-E3 must be hardware revision D or later if the NAC Sync feature
is used.

The NAC Settings screen also includes the following Coded Patterns settings:

NOTE: The Coded Patterns section of the screen will appear disabled (grayed out) if
none of the Notification Appliance Circuits are configured for coded operation.

The user may set a different coded pattern for each of five system conditions. These coded
patterns selections apply only to the onboard NACS, and only if configured for coded
operation. Control elements cannot be coded.

To choose a coded pattern, click on the drop-down list for each condition and select one of
the available options. The default setting for each condition is Steady.

The available codes are Steady, March Time 60 BPM, March Time 120 BPM, Temporal
Pattern, California Code, and Coded 4's.

The four system conditions are:

Day Alarm - Selected code will run when a fire alarm condition occurs and the system is in
the Day operating hours.
Night Alarm - Selected code will run when a fire alarm condition occurs and the system is in
the Night operating hours.
Action - Selected code will run when a pre-alarm condition has been activated.
Supervisory - Selected code will run when a supervisory device goes off-normal.
CO/Gas Alarm - Selected code will run when a CO or gas alarm occurs.

NOTE: The CO/Gas Alarm coded pattern is set to Coded 4's by default. All other
coded patterns are set to steady by default.

In addition to the four system conditions listed above, a fifth condition called "Post Code" is
available. This setting determines the code that the NAC circuits will run after zone coding
has completed. Any of the standard codes listed above may be used as a post-code. The
post-code may be enabled via the "NACs After Last Code" option on the General Settings
screen.

See this page 343 for more information about Zone Code options.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 349

6.3.9 DACT Settings

NOTE: These settings apply only to the ILI95-MB-E3.

General Settings -
Enable DACT - This setting is ON by default and enables
programming and supervision of the DACT-E3. Turn this setting
OFF if no DACT-E3 is connected. When disabled, all remaining
DACT configuration options on this screen are disabled.

NOTE: The system will report a DACT Missing trouble if this

setting is turned ON and no DACT-E3 is connected.

DACT Reporting In order to prevent "runaway" DACT situations,

Limits - such as in "Trouble/Restore" loops, event
reporting limits are normally configured to limit
the number of events that are reported by the
DACT.

Once an event reporting limit is reached the

DACT will not continue to report events until
either the panel is reset or until eight hours
have passed since the first DACT report of
any event type on the particular day. When the
reset or timeout occurs the panel will begin
reporting all types of events again.

The default values may be overridden as

follows:

Max # of Alarm Reports - This setting

configures the total number of fire alarm and
CO/Gas alarm reports that may be issued per
eight hour period by the DACT. This may be
set in the range from 5 to 315 reports per day
(in 5 step increments) or Unlimited. The
default setting is Unlimited.

Max Trouble - This setting configures the total

number of trouble reports that may be issued
per day by the DACT. This may be set in the
range from 5 to 155 reports per eight hour
period (in 5 step increments) or Unlimited.
The default setting is 10.

Max Supervisories - This setting configures

the total number of supervisory reports that
may be issued per day by the DACT. This
may be set in the range from 5 to 155 reports

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

350 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

per eight hour period (in 5 step increments) or

Unlimited. The default setting is 10.

NOTE: The DACT will not report events of a

given category once a DACT Reporting Limit
has been reached (such as 10 troubles
within an eight hour period). The DACT will
begin reporting events of a given category
again eight hours after the last event of a
given category has been reported or after
the . For example, if the "Max Trouble"
setting is set to 10, the DACT will begin
reporting troubles again eight hours after the
tenth trouble was reported.

DACT Report
Format -

Use Custom (per-device) reporting codes -

When enabled, the DACT-E3 will report the
node number and a custom three-digit code
(001-899) assigned to each point by the user.
If a device does not have a code assigned, the
DACT-E3 will use the standard reporting format
for events that originate from the device.

NOTE: This setting only affects reports for

events that originate from compatible S3
Series FACP, NGA and ILI-E3 Series nodes.
Event reports from other node types will be in
the standard format.

NOTE: On standalone systems, the group

number (Tens and One's digit only) will be
reported instead of the Node number.

Use Standard (per node/per group)

reporting codes - When enabled, the
DACT-E3 will report the node number
(networked systems) or group number
(standalone systems) in addition to a one digit
event type code. This format is similar to that
used by the 7100.

NOTE: On standalone systems, only the

Tens and Ones digit of the group number is
transmitted via the DACT-E3. If more precise

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 351

reporting is required, Custom reporting codes

may be used instead.

DACT Account
Options -
There are two DACT accounts available for programming. Each
account has the following programmable options:

Format - The available formats are: SIA DCS 8, SIA DCS 20,
ADEMCO Contact ID, 4/2 1400Hz, 3/1 1400Hz, 3/1 2300Hz, and
4/2 2300 Hz. Select one from the drop-down list.

Report Alarm - Select Alarm event reporting option from

drop-down list, either OFF, CAN, or MUST.

Report Trouble - Select Trouble event reporting option from

drop-down list, either OFF, CAN, or MUST.

Report Tests - Select Test event reporting option from drop-down

list, either OFF, CAN, or MUST.

Report Supv - Select Supervisory event reporting option from

drop-down list, either OFF, CAN, or MUST.

Account Attempt - This option selects how many times the DACT
will attempt to connect with this account before giving up and
switching to the other account.

Account # - Enter the assigned account ID number in this field.

This number may be up to six digits in length.

NOTE: Not all of the supported reporting formats can actually

utilize the full six digits that the panel provides. Leading zeroes
must be entered for all account numbers that are less than six
digits. If more digits are entered than the selected reporting
format allows, only the least significant digits are transmitted.
The chart below indicates the maximum number of digits provided
for the account number in each of the supported formats.

Reporting Format Maximum Length of Account

Number
SIA DCS 8 / SIA DCS 20 6
ADEMCO Contact ID 4
4/2 1400 Hz / 4/2 2300 Hz 4
3/1 1400 Hz / 3/1 2300 Hz 3

CIC # - Enter dialing prefix for Account. The maximum number of

characters allowed is eight. This field is typically used if an access
code for a long distance carrier is required, or if certain calling

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

352 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

features, such as call waiting, need to be temporarily disabled

during the call. The maximum number of characters allowed is
eight.

NOTE: Besides the digits 0-9, the following special characters

may also be used:

Special Character Description

* Standard "*" key. May only be
used if Tone dialling is being
used.
# Standard "#" key. May only be
used if Tone dialling is being
used.
, Inserts a two (2) second pause
in the dialing sequence.
@ Instructs the DACT to wait until
a dial tone can be detected.
This option should only be used
if the DACT is connected to a
telephone system that is
compatible with North American
standards.

Phone # - Enter phone number for the account. The maximum

number of characters allowed is sixteen.

NOTE: Besides the digits 0-9, the following special characters

may also be used:

Special Character Description

* Standard "*" key. May only be
used if Tone dialling is being
used.
# Standard "#" key. May only be
used if Tone dialling is being
used.
, Inserts a two (2) second pause
in the dialing sequence.
@ Instructs the DACT to wait until
a dial tone can be detected.
This option should only be used
if the DACT is connected to a
telephone system that is
compatible with North American
standards.

NOTE: If the MUST option is selected on both accounts for the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 353

same report type (Alarms, Troubles, Supervisories), the

DACT-E3 will report events using both accounts. If this is not the
desired behavior, select the CAN option for one of the accounts.

DACT Phone Line

Options -
There are two DACT phone lines available for programming, Line
#1 and Line #2. There are two programmable options for each
phone line as follows:

Dialing Mode - Available options are: Tone or USA Rotary(40/60),

USA Rotary(40/60) Only, Tone Only, Tone or European
Rotary(33/67), and European Rotary(33/67) Only. Select the dialing
mode for line from the drop-down list.

Line Monitor - Line monitor is used to enable supervision of the

phone lines connected to the DACT. The DACT supervises the
phone lines in three ways:

1.) It measures the on-hook voltage coming from the phone

company.
2.) It periodically takes the phone line off-hook, measures the
off-hook voltage and puts the line back on-hook.

NOTE: The system will issue a Phone Line trouble if the DACT
measures an incorrect off-hook or on-hook voltage and/or is
unable to take the line off-hook.

3.) It will enable sending test signals to the configured accounts.

NOTE: The Line Monitor option must be set to ON to enable the

automatic Phone Line Test Time.

NOTE: The system makes a distinction between a "Line" and an

"Account". The system considers a "Line" to be a physical
twisted pair cable that connects the DACT to the telephone
company. The "Account" is the telephone number that the DACT
dials to report events to the designated central monitoring station.
The DACT will use either phone line to communicate to either
account.

DACT Test/Timing -
AC Fault Reporting Delay - Set number of hours to delay report of
AC failure. The delay may range from 1 to 31 hours.

Tests Per Day - Specifies the time interval between subsequent

tests after the first phone line test. 1 = 24 hours, 2 = 12 hours, 3 =
8 hours, and 4 = 6 hours. Select the number of tests per day from
the drop-down list.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 354 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

First Phone Line Test - Specify the time of the first phone line
dial-out test each day. Test is enabled if either line has its Line
Monitor set to ON. Select phone line test time Hour and Minute
from drop-down lists for each item.

NOTE: The hour of the first phone line test can be configured as
follows, based on the number of tests per day.

Number of tests per day Hours allowed for first phone

line test

1 0-23
2 0-11
3 0-7
4 0-5

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.10 Zone Code

NOTE: These settings apply only to the ILI95-MB-E3.

Zone Coding allows an FACP to produce a distinct coded pattern on its NAC outputs, based
upon the particular input device or cross zone that caused the alarm condition.

The E3 Series supports up to 63 different codes, each of which may be configured for any
pattern of two, three, or four digits. The digits may range from 1 to 14 pulses. After the
necessary codes are entered in the Zone Code table (in the Zone Code screen), they can be
associated with individual input devices and cross zones in the appropriate entry screen (i.e.
Input Devices and Cross Zones). Multiple inputs may be assigned to run the same code, if
desired, or each input may have a unique code (up to a limit of 63 different codes).

To set the pulses for a particular zone code, simply select the digit in the entry grid and
choose the appropriate number of pulses for each digit from the drop-down list.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 355

6.3.11 Input Devices

The input devices screen is used to configure all sensors and monitor elements connected
to an ILI95-MB-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 node.

At the very top of the screen is a field labeled "Show Devices". This field allows the user to
filter the list of devices in the grid below to show all devices, all Ion sensors, all Photo
sensors, all Thermal sensors or all Monitor Elements. Once a selection is made,
CAMWorks will automatically filter the list.

Below the "Show Devices" field is a large grid that displays all of the input devices that are
configured, based on the filter setting above.

Sel - Place a check in this field and click the Delete button to remove the device from this
address. Multiple devices may be selected if desired.

Floor # - Enter the floor of the building that the device is located on. This field is used for
user reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.

Description - Enter a location description for the current address. This label will appear as
the identifier for this address when any event occurs at this address. The maximum number
of characters for this label is 40.
NOTE: Any part of the description text can be copied to the Windows clipboard by
highlighting the text and pressing Ctrl-C. The text can then be copied to the description
field of another address by selecting that field and pressing Ctrl-V.

DACT Report Code - When using custom DACT reporting codes 435 , the code entered in
this field will be reported by the DACT-E3 when using Contact ID or SIA formats. This may
range from 1-899. The node number will be transmitted in addition to this information.

Freeze - This field is not applicable to Apollo devices.

Input Group Numbers - To modify one of the four numbers, enter the group (1-99,
300-499) number in the Group field. (Outputs assigned to this group will be shown in the list
at the bottom of the screen). If you are unclear on I/O groups concepts, see Help topic
Input/Output Functionality.

NOTE: While the E3 Series does allow for multiple input groups for each device, should
a trouble condition occur on a device only the first group assigned to the device will set
its respective Trouble SSM bit.

WARNING: Group 0, which really means "No Group Assignment", may be assigned to
input devices. There is no bit in the System Status Map for Group 0. Therefore, no
custom I/O relationships may be created for an input device if all of its Input Group
assignments are set to Group 0.

NOTE: When an input device produces a verification, PAS, cross zone or multilevel
pre-alarm, only the first group assigned to the device will be activated. Once the device
produces a fire alarm response alarm groups will be activated (see note in blue below).
For cross zone alarms, only the first group assigned will be activated upon the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

356 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

pre-alarm. The rest of the groups assigned to the device will not activate. Instead, the
groups assigned to the cross zone will activate when the cross zone goes into alarm.

NOTE: The group assignment fields are color coded for device types that produce the
following response types:

· CO Alarm Response (user-defined PID-95 and/or CZI-95 elements)

· Gas Alarm Response (user-defined PID-95 and/or CZI-95 elements)

The colors are as follows:

Color Description
BLUE Groups colored BLUE will activate upon a CO or Gas alarm condition
from the device.
NO COLOR If any of the other group columns are color coded for this device, the
group assigned to this column will not activate.

NOTE: Action (pre-alarm) conditions and supervisory conditions will only activate the
input group assigned to first group column.

NOTE: The third and fourth Input Group assignments may also be assigned to Disable
Type Tags, which range from 600 to 699. See this page 434 for more information on the
Group Disable feature.

Day Sensitivity - To change the Day Sensitivity setting for a particular address, select a
new setting from the drop-down list in this field.

NOTE: For thermal detectors, this setting will change the device's temperature
threshold.

NOTE: This setting only applies to sensors.

Night Sensitivity - To change the Night Sensitivity setting for a particular address, select a
new setting from the drop-down list in this field.

NOTE: For thermal detectors, this setting will change the device's temperature
threshold.

NOTE: This setting only applies to sensors.

Verify - To change the verification setting for a particular address, select a new option from
the drop-down list in this field. Setting this field to "Verify" enables the automatic verification,
while setting this option to "PAS" enables Positive Alarm Sequence. Setting this field to
"None" disables verification for this device. Select "DFlt" to use the default verification
setting chosen on the General Settings 339 screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 357

NOTE: Only certain device types are eligible for verification and/or PAS. See the
following pages for information about compatible device types:

S3 Series (Apollo) Sensor Device Types 188

S3 Series (Apollo) Element Device Types 191

S3 Series (System Sensor) Sensor Device Types 294

S3 Series (System Sensor) Module Device Types 314

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 545

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Module Device Types 565

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 426

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Element Device Types 429

NOTE: Verification and PAS cannot be mixed with Cross Zoning.

Day Alarm - Selecting this option will cause this input device to activate outputs that are
configured for the General Fire Alarm Day list.
NOTE: This option is not available if this input device is not a Fire Alarm input.

Night Alarm - Selecting this option will cause this input device to activate outputs that are
configured for the General Fire Alarm Night list.
NOTE: This option is not available if this input device is not a Fire Alarm input.
Supv - Selecting this option will cause this input device to activate outputs that are
configured for the General Supervisory List.
NOTE: This option is not available if this input device is not a Supervisory input.

Trouble - Selecting this option will cause this input device to activate outputs that are
configured for the General Trouble List when the device experiences a fault condition.

Action - Selecting this option will cause this input device to activate outputs that are
configured for the General Action List when the device goes into a pre-alarm condition.
NOTE: This option is not available if this input device is not a Fire Alarm input.

Zone Code - An optional coded pattern may be configured for each address. These patterns
are configured in the Zone Code entry screen. To choose a Zone code pattern, highlight the
Zone Code entry field and click on the down arrow button that appears. Select the
appropriate code from the drop-down list.
NOTE: This setting applies to the ILI95-MB-E3 only.

Active - To disable Downloading for a particular address, double-click or press the space
bar within this field to turn it grey. To re-enable the device, repeat the process to make the
field green.

Below the grid are the following buttons:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 358 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Add 358 - Opens a screen where input devices may be added to the configuration.
Delete - Clicking the delete button will remove devices that have their "Sel" field checked
from the configuration.

Finally, below the row of buttons is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Input Group # > Input Devices", the second is
"Used/Unused Groups" and the third is "Linked SLC Output Devices". Below is a brief
explanation of each information tab.

Input Group # > Input Devices - This tab shows all input devices that are assigned to the
group that is selected in the "Select Input Group" drop-down list.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the input groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more input devices
and green if the input group has not been assigned to any input devices. Double-clicking
one of the input groups in this list will add the selected input group to one of the Input Group
fields in the grid if one of the Input Group fields is highlighted.

Linked SLC Output Devices - This tab shows all SLC output devices that are affected by
the status of the input groups assigned to this device. This may display either devices on
the current node or all nodes by selecting one of the option buttons and clicking "Show".

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.11.1 Add

The Add Devices screen is used to define new input devices. The following procedure may
be used to define new input devices:

Step 1:
Select Sensors or Elements - In order to add input devices, the user must select
between Sensors and Elements. Doing so will filter the list of available devices types to
show only the devices types that are applicable for sensors or device types that are
applicable to elements.

Step 2:
Select Device Type - Select the device type to be assigned to the selected addresses
from the drop-down list. See this page 426 for information on the available sensor
device types or this page 429 for information on the available element device types.

Step 3:
Select Loop - Select the Loop where device(s) to be added are located. Click on the
Loop 1 or Loop 2 option button.

Step 4:
Input Group 1 - Select the group number for the devices to be added (this may also be

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 359

set in the Input Devices entry screen) from the drop-down list. Input devices may belong
to input groups ranging from 1-99 and 300-499.

NOTE: This will only set the first group for the device. If you wish to assign more groups,
this must be done in the Input Devices screen.

Step 5:
Check Addresses To Add - Select all addresses to be added by checking the address
number(s).

Step 6:
Verify - To change the verification setting for a particular address, select a new option
from the drop-down list in this field. Setting this field to "Verify" enables the automatic
verification, while setting this option to "PAS" enables Positive Alarm Sequence. Setting
this field to "None" disables verification for this device. Select "DFlt" to use the default
verification setting chosen on the General Settings 339 screen.

NOTE: Only certain device types are eligible for verification and/or PAS. See the
following pages for information about compatible device types:

S3 Series (Apollo) Sensor Device Types 188

S3 Series (Apollo) Element Device Types 191

S3 Series (System Sensor) Sensor Device Types 294

S3 Series (System Sensor) Module Device Types 314

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 545

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Module Device Types 565

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 426

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Element Device Types 429

NOTE: Verification and PAS cannot be mixed with Cross Zoning.

Step 7:
Description - Enter a location description for the current address. This label will appear
as the identifier for this address when any event occurs at this address. The maximum
number of characters for this label is 40.
NOTE: Any part of the description text can be copied to the Windows clipboard by
highlighting the text and pressing Ctrl-C. The text can then be copied to the
description field of another address by selecting that field and pressing Ctrl-V.

NOTE: The same description will be added to all selected addresses.

Step 8:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 360 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Floor # - Enter the floor of the building that the device is located on. This field is used for
user reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.

Step 9:
DACT Code - Choose the method that CAMWorks will use to assign a DACT Code 435 to
the new devices. See this page 436 for more information.

Step 10:
Add - Click on the "Add" button to program the selected addresses. (The user will be
asked to confirm the selections).

List View - The list view at the bottom of the screen lists all of the device types and
groups for the addresses on the currently selected loop.

6.3.11.2 Block Add

Block Add is a method of adding new devices to the configuration. It is used when many
devices of the same type need to be added to sequential addresses. Block Add is similar to
the standard method of adding devices and many of the same settings may be configured
via Block Add as with the standard Add Devices screen. The following procedure may be
used to define new input devices using Block Add:

Step 1:
Select Sensors or Elements - In order to add input devices, the user must select
between Sensors and Elements. Doing so will filter the list of available devices types to
show only the devices types that are applicable for sensors or device types that are
applicable to elements.

Step 2:
Select Device Type - Select the device type to be assigned to the selected addresses
from the drop-down list. See this page 426 for information on the available sensor
device types or this page 429 for information on the available element device types.

Step 3:
Select Loop - Select the Loop where device(s) to be added are located. Click on the
Loop 1 or Loop 2 option button.

Step 4:
Input Group 1 - Select the group number for the devices to be added (this may also be
set in the Input Devices entry screen) from the drop-down list. Input devices may belong
to input groups ranging from 1-99 and 300-499.

NOTE: This will only set the first group for the device. If you wish to assign more groups,
this must be done in the Input Devices screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 361

Step 4:
Block Add Options - When Block Add is used the address selection check boxes are not
used. Instead, Block Add requires the following information from the user in order to add
devices in a sequence:

a. Number of Devices - Select how many devices should be added.

b. Starting Address - Select the first address in the block. All devices will be
added starting with this address.

NOTE: The "Block Add Option" checkbox must be checked in order to use the Block
Add feature.

Block Add has several options for handling address overlaps. An address overlap occurs
when there are devices already programmed in the range of addresses that Block Add is
set to add new devices to. For example, an address overlap exists if Block Add is
configured to add 4 devices starting at address 10 and addresses 12 and 13 already have
devices assigned to them. CAMWorks offers the following methods of handling address
overlaps:

Overlap Handling Method Description

Skip address and continue with the next When an address overlap occurs,
address CAMWorks skips adding a new device at
this address and continues with the next
address and adds a the number of devices
selected above to the configuration.
For example, If you have devices at
addresses 4-8 and want to add 10 devices
starting at address 2, you will end up having
addresses 2-3 and 9-16 containing new
devices, while 4-8 will contain their original
device assignments.
Overwrite existing address Erases the existing device at the address
and adds a new one in its place.
Abort this entry and continue to next When an address overlap occurs,
address CAMWorks skips adding a new device at
this address and continues with the next
address and stops at the address (Number
of Devices + Starting Address).
For example, If you have devices at
addresses 4-8 and want to add 10 devices
starting at address 2, you will end up having
addresses 2-3 and 9-11 containing new
devices, while 4-8 will contain their original
device assignments.
Abort auto entry and save the entries made When an address overlap occurs,
up to this point CAMWorks aborts adding new devices.
Abort auto entry without keeping the new When an address overlap occurs,
entries CAMWorks aborts adding new devices and

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

362 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

discards any changes that would have been

made by Block Add.

Step 6:
Verify - To change the verification setting for a particular address, select a new option
from the drop-down list in this field. Setting this field to "Verify" enables the automatic
verification, while setting this option to "PAS" enables Positive Alarm Sequence. Setting
this field to "None" disables verification for this device. Select "DFlt" to use the default
verification setting chosen on the General Settings 339 screen.

NOTE: Only certain device types are eligible for verification and/or PAS. See the
following pages for information about compatible device types:

S3 Series (Apollo) Sensor Device Types 188

S3 Series (Apollo) Element Device Types 191

S3 Series (System Sensor) Sensor Device Types 294

S3 Series (System Sensor) Module Device Types 314

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 545

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Module Device Types 565

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 426

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Element Device Types 429

NOTE: Verification and PAS cannot be mixed with Cross Zoning.

Step 7:
Description - Enter a location description for the current address. This label will appear
as the identifier for this address when any event occurs at this address. The maximum
number of characters for this label is 40.
NOTE: Any part of the description text can be copied to the Windows clipboard by
highlighting the text and pressing Ctrl-C. The text can then be copied to the
description field of another address by selecting that field and pressing Ctrl-V.

NOTE: The same description will be added to all selected addresses.

Step 8:
Floor # - Enter the floor of the building that the device is located on. This field is used for
user reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.

Step 9:
DACT Code - Choose the method that CAMWorks will use to assign a DACT Code 435 to
the new devices. See this page 436 for more information.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 363

Step 10:
Add - Click on the "Add" button to program the selected addresses. (The user will be
asked to confirm the selections).

List View - The list view at the bottom of the screen lists all of the device types and
groups for the addresses on the currently selected loop.

6.3.12 Output Devices

The output devices screen is used to configure all control elements connected to an ILI95-
MB-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 node. This screen houses a large grid that displays all of the output
devices that are configured.

The ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3 nodes support three different control element device types.
These are the RCE-95 (Relay Control Element), the SCE-95 (Signal Control Element) and
the BCE-95 (Building Control Element.)

Since each of these different device types offer different configuration options, each control
element type will be described on its own page. Use one of the following links to display
information about configuring the RCE-95 373 , the SCE-95 376 and the BCE-95 378 .

Below the grid are the following buttons:

Add 364 - Opens a screen where input devices may be added to the configuration.
Delete - Clicking the delete button will remove devices that have their "Sel" field checked
from the configuration.

Finally, below the row of buttons is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Output Group # > Output Devices", the second
is "Used/Unused Groups" and the third is "Linked Input Devices". Below is a brief
explanation of each information tab.

Output Group # > Output Devices - This tab shows all output devices that are assigned to
the group that is selected in the "Select Output Group" drop-down list.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices. Double-clicking
one of the output groups in this list will add the selected output group to one of the Output
Group fields in the grid if one of the Output Group fields is highlighted.

Linked Input Devices - This tab shows SLC input devices that affect the status of the
output groups assigned to this device. This may display either devices on the current node
(local) or all nodes (network) by selecting one of the option buttons and clicking "Show".

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 364 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

6.3.12.1 Add

The Add Devices screen is used to define new output devices. The following procedure may
be used to define new output devices:

Step 1:
Select Device Type - Select the device type to be assigned to the selected addresses from
the drop-down list. See this page 429 for information on the available element device types.

Step 2:
Select Loop - Select the Loop where device(s) to be added are located. Click on the Loop 1
or Loop 2 option button.

Step 3:
Output Group 1 - Select the group number for the devices to be added (this may also be
set in the Output Devices entry screen) from the drop-down list. Control Elements may
belong to output groups ranging from 125-224 and 500-599. An output group assignment of
0 indicates that no output group should be assigned to the device.

NOTE: This will only set the first group for the device. If you wish to assign more groups,
this must be done in the Output Devices screen.

NOTE: Output groups cannot be assigned to "Silenceable" Control Element device types.
Step 4:
Feedback Reporting - This setting is available for both the RCE-95 and the BCE-95.
However, each element type handles this setting differently. The operation of this feature is
described below:

For the BCE-95:

When enabled, a missing feedback EOL resistor will cause a FAULT condition to be
reported. When disabled, a missing feedback EOL resistor will not cause a trouble
condition.

NOTE: Disabling Feedback Reporting will disable ALL feedback supervision of the
BCE-95.

NOTE: The BCE-95 must have DIP Switch S1 - Switch #8 (labeled as "FB" on the
BCE-95) in the OPEN (OFF) position to enable the feedback hardware. Feedback
Reporting will be completely disabled if this DIP Switch is in the CLOSED (ON) position,
regardless of the configuration option in CAMWorks.

The following charts describe the behavior of the various feedback settings:

Feedback
Error ON Relay States
Setting:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 365

Relay: Relay: Relay: Relay:

Relay: Relay:
Standby Standby Active Active
Standby Active
FB1 Input: FB1 Input: FB1 Input: FB1 Input:
FB1 Input: FB1 Input:
Open Not Open Not
Shorted Shorted
Shorted Shorted
Activates the Neither Activates the Activates Activates Activates
first Output Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback
Group's Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group
Trouble Bit is affected. 1's Trouble 1's Alarm Bit. 1's Alarm Bit. 1's Alarm Bit.
and reports Bit.
Fault. Deactivates Deactivates Deactivates
Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group
Enabled 2's Alarm bit. 2's Alarm bit. 2's Alarm bit.

Activates the Activates

first Output Feedback
Group's Input Group
Trouble Bit 1's Trouble
and reports Bit.
Fault.
Neither Neither Neither Activates Activates Activates
Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group
is affected. is affected. is affected. 1's Alarm Bit. 1's Alarm Bit. 1's Alarm Bit.
Disabled
Deactivates Deactivates Deactivates
Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group
2's Alarm bit. 2's Alarm bit. 2's Alarm bit.

OFF Relay States

Feedback Relay: Relay: Relay: Relay:

Relay: Relay:
Error Standby Standby Active Active
Standby Active
Setting:
FB2 Input: FB2 Input: FB2 Input: FB2 Input:
FB2 Input: FB2 Input:
Open Not Open Not
Shorted Shorted
Shorted Shorted
Activates the Neither Activates the Activates Activates Activates
first Output Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback
Group's Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group
Trouble Bit is affected. 2's Trouble 2's Alarm Bit. 2's Alarm Bit. 2's Alarm Bit.
and reports Bit.
Enabled Fault. Deactivates Deactivates Deactivates
Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group
1's Alarm bit. 1's Alarm bit. 1's Alarm bit.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

366 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Activates the Activates

first Output Feedback
Group's Input Group
Trouble Bit 2's Trouble
and reports Bit.
Fault.
Neither Neither Neither Activates Activates Activates
Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group
is affected. is affected. is affected. 2's Alarm Bit. 2's Alarm Bit. 2's Alarm Bit.
Disabled
Deactivates Deactivates Deactivates
Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group
1's Alarm bit. 1's Alarm bit. 1's Alarm bit.

For the RCE-95:

The RCE-95 supports supervising its output state. Feedback verification uses the device’s
ON/OFF state and the device's feedback input state to determine a “feedback error”
condition. The RCE-95 is considered to have a feedback error under one or both of two
conditions: output ON with feedback input not shorted, or output OFF with feedback input
shorted. A feedback error will produce an OUTPUT FAIL system trouble, but only if
configured to do so. This option selects whether or not to issue a Feedback Error. This
may be set to Never, Always, or Only When Output Is On.

NOTE: Disabling Feedback Reporting will disable ALL feedback supervision of the
RCE-95.

NOTE: The RCE-95 must have DIP Switch S1 - Switch #8 (labeled as "A" on the RCE-95)
in the OPEN (OFF) position to enable the feedback hardware. Feedback Reporting will be
completely disabled if this DIP Switch is in the CLOSED (ON) position, regardless of the
configuration option in CAMWorks.

The following chart describes the behavior of the various feedback settings and states:

Device States

Relay: Relay: Relay: Relay:

Feedback Standby Standby Relay: Relay:
Active Active
Error Standby Active
Setting: Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback
Feedback Feedback
Input: Input: Input: Input:
Input: Input:
Open Not Open Not
Shorted Shorted
Shorted Shorted

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 367

Activates the Stays Activates the Activates the Activates the Activates the
first Output Normal. No Feedback first Output Feedback Feedback
Group's fault is Input Group's Group's Input Group's Input Group's
Trouble Bit reported. Trouble Bit Trouble Bit. Alarm and Alarm Bit.
Always and reports and reports Activates the Trouble Bits No fault is
Fault. Output Fail Feedback and reports reported.
Input Group's Output Fail
Alarm Bit and
reports Fault.
Activates the Stays Activates the Activates the Activates the Activates the
first Output Normal. No Feedback first Output Feedback Feedback
Group's fault is Input Group's Group's Input Group's Input Group's
Only when Trouble Bit reported. Trouble Bit Trouble Bit. Alarm and Alarm Bit.
output is and reports but does not Activates the Trouble Bits No fault is
On Fault. report any Feedback and reports reported.
fault. Input Group's Output Fail
Alarm Bit and
reports Fault.
Stays Stays Stays Stays Activates the Activates the
Normal. No Normal. No Normal. No Normal. No Feedback Feedback
fault is fault is fault is fault is Input Group's Input Group's
Never reported. reported. reported. reported. Alarm Bit and Alarm Bit.
does not No fault is
report. reported.

Step 5:
Check Addresses To Add - Select all addresses to be added by checking the address
number(s).

Step 6:
Description - Enter a location description for the current address. This label will appear
as the identifier for this address when any event occurs at this address. The maximum
number of characters for this label is 40.
NOTE: Any part of the description text can be copied to the Windows clipboard by
highlighting the text and pressing Ctrl-C. The text can then be copied to the
description field of another address by selecting that field and pressing Ctrl-V.

Step 7:
Floor # - Enter the floor of the building that the device is located on. This field is used for
user reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.

Step 8:
DACT Code - Choose the method that CAMWorks will use to assign a DACT Code 435 to
the new devices. See this page 436 for more information.

Step 9:
Add - Click on the "Add" button to program the selected addresses. (The user will be
asked to confirm the selections).

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 368 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

List View - The list view at the bottom of the screen lists all of the device types and
groups for the addresses on the currently selected loop.

Select All - Click on this button to toggle between placing or clearing check marks from
all addresses.

NOTE: CAMWorks supports a new feature called "Block Add" that allows the user to
easily assign sequential blocks of SLC devices. See this page 368 for more information.

6.3.12.2 Block Add

Block Add is a method of adding new devices to the configuration. It is used when many
devices of the same type need to be added to sequential addresses. Block Add is similar to
the standard method of adding devices and many of the same settings may be configured
via Block Add as with the standard Add Devices screen. The following procedure may be
used to define new output devices using Block Add:

Step 1:
Select Device Type - Select the device type to be assigned to the selected addresses from
the drop-down list. See this page 429 for information on the available element device types.

Step 2:
Select Loop - Select the Loop where device(s) to be added are located. Click on the Loop 1
or Loop 2 option button.

Step 3:
Output Group 1 - Select the group number for the devices to be added (this may also be
set in the Output Devices entry screen) from the drop-down list. Control Elements may
belong to output groups ranging from 125-224 and 500-599. An output group assignment of
0 indicates that no output group should be assigned to the device.

NOTE: This will only set the first group for the device. If you wish to assign more groups,
this must be done in the Output Devices screen.

NOTE: Output groups cannot be assigned to "Silenceable" Control Element device types.
Step 4:
Feedback Reporting - This setting is available for both the RCE-95 and the BCE-95.
However, each element type handles this setting differently. The operation of this feature is
described below:

For the BCE-95:

When enabled, a missing feedback EOL resistor will cause a FAULT condition to be
reported. When disabled, a missing feedback EOL resistor will not cause a trouble
condition.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 369

NOTE: Disabling Feedback Reporting will disable ALL feedback supervision of the
BCE-95.

NOTE: The BCE-95 must have DIP Switch S1 - Switch #8 (labeled as "FB" on the
BCE-95) in the OPEN (OFF) position to enable the feedback hardware. Feedback
Reporting will be completely disabled if this DIP Switch is in the CLOSED (ON) position,
regardless of the configuration option in CAMWorks.

The following charts describe the behavior of the various feedback settings:

ON Relay States

Feedback Relay: Relay: Relay: Relay:

Relay: Relay:
Error Standby Standby Active Active
Standby Active
Setting:
FB1 Input: FB1 Input: FB1 Input: FB1 Input:
FB1 Input: FB1 Input:
Open Not Open Not
Shorted Shorted
Shorted Shorted
Activates the Neither Activates the Activates Activates Activates
first Output Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback
Group's Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group
Trouble Bit is affected. 1's Trouble 1's Alarm Bit. 1's Alarm Bit. 1's Alarm Bit.
and reports Bit.
Fault. Deactivates Deactivates Deactivates
Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group
Enabled 2's Alarm bit. 2's Alarm bit. 2's Alarm bit.

Activates the Activates

first Output Feedback
Group's Input Group
Trouble Bit 1's Trouble
and reports Bit.
Fault.
Neither Neither Neither Activates Activates Activates
Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group
is affected. is affected. is affected. 1's Alarm Bit. 1's Alarm Bit. 1's Alarm Bit.
Disabled
Deactivates Deactivates Deactivates
Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group
2's Alarm bit. 2's Alarm bit. 2's Alarm bit.

Feedback
Error OFF Relay States
Setting:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

370 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Relay: Relay: Relay: Relay:

Relay: Relay:
Standby Standby Active Active
Standby Active
FB2 Input: FB2 Input: FB2 Input: FB2 Input:
FB2 Input: FB2 Input:
Open Not Open Not
Shorted Shorted
Shorted Shorted
Activates the Neither Activates the Activates Activates Activates
first Output Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback
Group's Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group
Trouble Bit is affected. 2's Trouble 2's Alarm Bit. 2's Alarm Bit. 2's Alarm Bit.
and reports Bit.
Fault. Deactivates Deactivates Deactivates
Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group
Enabled 1's Alarm bit. 1's Alarm bit. 1's Alarm bit.

Activates the Activates

first Output Feedback
Group's Input Group
Trouble Bit 2's Trouble
and reports Bit.
Fault.
Neither Neither Neither Activates Activates Activates
Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group
is affected. is affected. is affected. 2's Alarm Bit. 2's Alarm Bit. 2's Alarm Bit.
Disabled
Deactivates Deactivates Deactivates
Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group
1's Alarm bit. 1's Alarm bit. 1's Alarm bit.

For the RCE-95:

The RCE-95 supports supervising its output state. Feedback verification uses the device’s
ON/OFF state and the device's feedback input state to determine a “feedback error”
condition. The RCE-95 is considered to have a feedback error under one or both of two
conditions: output ON with feedback input not shorted, or output OFF with feedback input
shorted. A feedback error will produce an OUTPUT FAIL system trouble, but only if
configured to do so. This option selects whether or not to issue a Feedback Error. This
may be set to Never, Always, or Only When Output Is On.

NOTE: Disabling Feedback Reporting will disable ALL feedback supervision of the
RCE-95.

NOTE: The RCE-95 must have DIP Switch S1 - Switch #8 (labeled as "A" on the RCE-95)
in the OPEN (OFF) position to enable the feedback hardware. Feedback Reporting will be
completely disabled if this DIP Switch is in the CLOSED (ON) position, regardless of the
configuration option in CAMWorks.

The following chart describes the behavior of the various feedback settings and states:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 371

Device States

Relay: Relay: Relay: Relay:

Feedback Standby Standby Relay: Relay:
Active Active
Error Standby Active
Setting: Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback
Feedback Feedback
Input: Input: Input: Input:
Input: Input:
Open Not Open Not
Shorted Shorted
Shorted Shorted
Activates the Stays Activates the Activates the Activates the Activates the
first Output Normal. No Feedback first Output Feedback Feedback
Group's fault is Input Group's Group's Input Group's Input Group's
Trouble Bit reported. Trouble Bit Trouble Bit. Alarm and Alarm Bit.
Always and reports and reports Activates the Trouble Bits No fault is
Fault. Output Fail Feedback and reports reported.
Input Group's Output Fail
Alarm Bit and
reports Fault.
Activates the Stays Activates the Activates the Activates the Activates the
first Output Normal. No Feedback first Output Feedback Feedback
Group's fault is Input Group's Group's Input Group's Input Group's
Only when Trouble Bit reported. Trouble Bit Trouble Bit. Alarm and Alarm Bit.
output is and reports but does not Activates the Trouble Bits No fault is
On Fault. report any Feedback and reports reported.
fault. Input Group's Output Fail
Alarm Bit and
reports Fault.
Stays Stays Stays Stays Activates the Activates the
Normal. No Normal. No Normal. No Normal. No Feedback Feedback
fault is fault is fault is fault is Input Group's Input Group's
Never reported. reported. reported. reported. Alarm Bit and Alarm Bit.
does not No fault is
report. reported.

Step 4:
Block Add Options - When Block Add is used the address selection check boxes are not
used. Instead, Block Add requires the following information from the user in order to add
devices in a sequence:

a. Number of Devices - Select how many devices should be added.

b. Starting Address - Select the first address in the block. All devices will be
added starting with this address.

NOTE: The "Block Add Option" checkbox must be checked in order to use the Block
Add feature.

Block Add has several options for handling address overlaps. An address overlap occurs
when there are devices already programmed in the range of addresses that Block Add is
set to add new devices to. For example, an address overlap exists if Block Add is
configured to add 4 devices starting at address 10 and addresses 12 and 13 already have

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

372 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

devices assigned to them. CAMWorks offers the following methods of handling address
overlaps:

Overlap Handling Method Description

Skip address and continue with the next When an address overlap occurs,
address CAMWorks skips adding a new device at
this address and continues with the next
address and adds a the number of devices
selected above to the configuration.
For example, If you have devices at
addresses 4-8 and want to add 10 devices
starting at address 2, you will end up having
addresses 2-3 and 9-16 containing new
devices, while 4-8 will contain their original
device assignments.
Overwrite existing address Erases the existing device at the address
and adds a new one in its place.
Abort this entry and continue to next When an address overlap occurs,
address CAMWorks skips adding a new device at
this address and continues with the next
address and stops at the address (Number
of Devices + Starting Address).
For example, If you have devices at
addresses 4-8 and want to add 10 devices
starting at address 2, you will end up having
addresses 2-3 and 9-11 containing new
devices, while 4-8 will contain their original
device assignments.
Abort auto entry and save the entries made When an address overlap occurs,
up to this point CAMWorks aborts adding new devices.
Abort auto entry without keeping the new When an address overlap occurs,
entries CAMWorks aborts adding new devices and
discards any changes that would have been
made by Block Add.

Step 6:
Description - Enter a location description for the current address. This label will appear
as the identifier for this address when any event occurs at this address. The maximum
number of characters for this label is 40.
NOTE: Any part of the description text can be copied to the Windows clipboard by
highlighting the text and pressing Ctrl-C. The text can then be copied to the
description field of another address by selecting that field and pressing Ctrl-V.

Step 7:
Floor # - Enter the floor of the building that the device is located on. This field is used for
user reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 373

Step 8:
DACT Code - Choose the method that CAMWorks will use to assign a DACT Code 435 to
the new devices. See this page 436 for more information.

Step 9:
Add - Click on the "Add" button to program the selected addresses. (The user will be
asked to confirm the selections).

List View - The list view at the bottom of the screen lists all of the device types and
groups for the addresses on the currently selected loop.

6.3.12.3 RCE-95

The following programmable options affect the RCE-95 (Relay Control Element):
Sel - Place a check in this field and click the Delete button to remove the device from this
address. Multiple devices may be selected if desired.

Floor # - Enter the floor of the building that the device is located on. This field is used for
user reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.

Description - Enter a location description for the current address. This label will appear as
the identifier for this address when any event occurs at this address. The maximum number
of characters for this label is 40.
NOTE: Any part of the description text can be copied to the Windows clipboard by
highlighting the text and pressing Ctrl-C. The text can then be copied to the description
field of another address by selecting that field and pressing Ctrl-V.

Feedback Reporting -
The RCE-95 supports supervising its output state. Feedback verification uses the device’s
ON/OFF state and the device's feedback input state to determine a “feedback error”
condition. The RCE-95 is considered to have a feedback error under one or both of two
conditions: output ON with feedback input not shorted, or output OFF with feedback input
shorted. A feedback error will produce an OUTPUT FAIL system trouble, but only if
configured to do so. This option selects whether or not to issue a Feedback Error. This
may be set to Never, Always, or Only When Output Is On.

NOTE: Disabling Feedback Reporting will disable ALL feedback supervision of the
RCE-95.

NOTE: The RCE-95 must have DIP Switch S1 - Switch #8 (labeled as "A" on the RCE-95)
in the OPEN (OFF) position to enable the feedback hardware. Feedback Reporting will be
completely disabled if this DIP Switch is in the CLOSED (ON) position, regardless of the
configuration option in CAMWorks.

The following chart describes the behavior of the various feedback settings and states:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

374 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Device States

Relay: Relay: Relay: Relay:

Feedback Standby Standby Relay: Relay:
Active Active
Error Standby Active
Setting: Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback
Feedback Feedback
Input: Input: Input: Input:
Input: Input:
Open Not Open Not
Shorted Shorted
Shorted Shorted
Activates the Stays Activates the Activates the Activates the Activates the
first Output Normal. No Feedback first Output Feedback Feedback
Group's fault is Input Group's Group's Input Group's Input Group's
Trouble Bit reported. Trouble Bit Trouble Bit. Alarm and Alarm Bit.
Always and reports and reports Activates the Trouble Bits No fault is
Fault. Output Fail Feedback and reports reported.
Input Group's Output Fail
Alarm Bit and
reports Fault.
Activates the Stays Activates the Activates the Activates the Activates the
first Output Normal. No Feedback first Output Feedback Feedback
Group's fault is Input Group's Group's Input Group's Input Group's
Only when Trouble Bit reported. Trouble Bit Trouble Bit. Alarm and Alarm Bit.
output is and reports but does not Activates the Trouble Bits No fault is
On Fault. report any Feedback and reports reported.
fault. Input Group's Output Fail
Alarm Bit and
reports Fault.
Stays Stays Stays Stays Activates the Activates the
Normal. No Normal. No Normal. No Normal. No Feedback Feedback
fault is fault is fault is fault is Input Group's Input Group's
Never reported. reported. reported. reported. Alarm Bit and Alarm Bit.
does not No fault is
report. reported.

Feedback Grp1 - To provide feedback and LED indication, there is a feedback group
associated with the RCE-95. It is treated as a special-purpose input group. There are two
bits in the ILI95's System Status Map associated with this group which, for other device
types, represent the input’s Trouble and Alarm condition but have different meanings when
the Input Group is assigned as the RCE-95's feedback group.
a) In order for an ASM-16/ANU-48 LED to indicate the RCE-95's on/off state,
the feedback group’s Alarm bit indicates the RCE-95’s ON/OFF state. The bit
is True when the RCE relay is ON and False when it is is OFF.
b) To allow CAMs to verify the actual position of the RCE-95 relay or its
associated external equipment, the group’s Trouble bit shows the state of the
feedback input. The bit is True when the feedback input is shorted, and
False otherwise (open or normal EOL).

NOTE: It is highly recommended to assign each RCE-95 Feedback Group to a distinct

Input Group that is not used for any other purpose.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 375

DACT Report Code - When using custom DACT reporting codes 435 , the code entered in
this field will be reported by the DACT-E3 when using Contact ID or SIA formats. This may
range from 1-899. The node number will be transmitted in addition to this information.

Output Group Number(s) - To program group numbers, enter group numbers in the Group
entry fields. Up to four output groups (125-224, 500-599) can be entered. If you are unclear
on I/O groups concepts, see Help topic Input/Output Functionality.

NOTE: You cannot assign both output groups and General Output lists to the same
control element.

NOTE: The third and fourth Output Group assignments may also be assigned to Disable
Type Tags, which range from 600 to 699. See this page 434 for more information on the
Group Disable feature.

NOTE: While the E3 Series does allow for multiple output groups for each device, should
a trouble condition occur on a device only the first group assigned to the device will set its
respective Trouble SSM bit.

NOTE: You cannot assign output groups to "Silenceable" output device types.

Day Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Day Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into afire alarm condition during the defined
day period, this list of outputs will be activated.

Night Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Night Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into fire alarm condition during the defined
night period, this list of outputs will be activated.

CO/Gas Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default CO/Gas Alarm
list. When any initiating device in the system goes into a CO or Gas alarm condition, this list
of outputs will be activated.

Action - Check this option to place this output in the system default Action list. When an
input defined as Multilevel reaches the programmed "Action" threshold, this list of outputs
will be activated.

Supv (Supervisory) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Supervisory
list. When any supervisory device in the system goes into an Off Normal condition, this list of
outputs will be activated.

WT Drill (Walk Test/Drill) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Walk
Test/Drill list. This list of outputs is activated for audible walk test or during a Fire Drill.

Trouble - Check this option to place this output in the system default Trouble list. When
there is a trouble condition in the system, this list of outputs will be activated.

Fan Restart - The E3 Series supports a "Fan Restart" configuration option for Control
Element devices. If this option is selected, the panel leaves such devices undisturbed during

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 376 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

reset. The panel indicates a Trouble condition "FANS OFF" fault message after the reset. To
turn off the fan restart Control Elements, a function is available on the keypad's zero (0) key
or, optionally an ASM-16/ANU-48 switch. Activating the key or switch deactivates the Control
Elements that were left on during reset and cancels the "FANS OFF" fault.

NOTE: Fan Restart may not be assigned to Control Elements that are assigned to the
General Trouble output list.

Seq Restart - The E3 Series also provides "sequential restart" capability. Any outputs
configured for sequential restart are deactivated at a slow rate, either during reset (if not
configured for "Fan Restart"), or upon use of the zero "0" key or, optionally an
ASM-16/ANU-48 switch (if configured for "Fan Restart"). The time delay interval for
sequential reset is set in the Globals/Miscellaneous entry screen.

Active - To disable Downloading for a particular address, double-click or press the space
bar within this field to turn it grey. To re-enable the device, repeat the process to make the
field green.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.12.4 SCE-95

The following programmable options affect the RCE-95 (Relay Control Element):
Sel - Place a check in this field and click the Delete button to remove the device from this
address. Multiple devices may be selected if desired.

Floor # - Enter the floor of the building that the device is located on. This field is used for
user reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.

Description - Enter a location description for the current address. This label will appear as
the identifier for this address when any event occurs at this address. The maximum number
of characters for this label is 40.
NOTE: Any part of the description text can be copied to the Windows clipboard by
highlighting the text and pressing Ctrl-C. The text can then be copied to the description
field of another address by selecting that field and pressing Ctrl-V.

DACT Report Code - When using custom DACT reporting codes 435 , the code entered in
this field will be reported by the DACT-E3 when using Contact ID or SIA formats. This may
range from 1-899. The node number will be transmitted in addition to this information.

Output Group Number(s) - To program group numbers, enter group numbers in the Group
entry fields. Up to four output groups (125-224, 500-599) can be entered. If you are unclear
on I/O groups concepts, see Help topic Input/Output Functionality.

NOTE: You cannot assign both output groups and General Output lists to the same
control element.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 377

NOTE: The third and fourth Output Group assignments may also be assigned to Disable
Type Tags, which range from 600 to 699. See this page 434 for more information on the
Group Disable feature.

NOTE: While the E3 Series does allow for multiple output groups for each device, should
a trouble condition occur on a device only the first group assigned to the device will set its
respective Trouble SSM bit.

NOTE: You cannot assign output groups to "Silenceable" output device types.

Day Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Day Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into afire alarm condition during the defined
day period, this list of outputs will be activated.

Night Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Night Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into fire alarm condition during the defined
night period, this list of outputs will be activated.

CO/Gas Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default CO/Gas Alarm
list. When any initiating device in the system goes into a CO or Gas alarm condition, this list
of outputs will be activated.

Action - Check this option to place this output in the system default Action list. When an
input defined as Multilevel reaches the programmed "Action" threshold, this list of outputs
will be activated.

Supv (Supervisory) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Supervisory
list. When any supervisory device in the system goes into an Off Normal condition, this list of
outputs will be activated.

WT Drill (Walk Test/Drill) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Walk
Test/Drill list. This list of outputs is activated for audible walk test or during a Fire Drill.

Trouble - Check this option to place this output in the system default Trouble list. When
there is a trouble condition in the system, this list of outputs will be activated.

Fan Restart - The E3 Series supports a "Fan Restart" configuration option for Control
Element devices. If this option is selected, the panel leaves such devices undisturbed during
reset. The panel indicates a Trouble condition "FANS OFF" fault message after the reset. To
turn off the fan restart Control Elements, a function is available on the keypad's zero (0) key
or, optionally an ASM-16/ANU-48 switch. Activating the key or switch deactivates the Control
Elements that were left on during reset and cancels the "FANS OFF" fault.

NOTE: Fan Restart may not be assigned to Control Elements that are assigned to the
General Trouble output list.

Seq Restart - The E3 Series also provides "sequential restart" capability. Any outputs
configured for sequential restart are deactivated at a slow rate, either during reset (if not
configured for "Fan Restart"), or upon use of the zero "0" key or, optionally an

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 378 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

ASM-16/ANU-48 switch (if configured for "Fan Restart"). The time delay interval for
sequential reset is set in the Globals/Miscellaneous entry screen.

Active - To disable Downloading for a particular address, double-click or press the space
bar within this field to turn it grey. To re-enable the device, repeat the process to make the
field green.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.12.5 BCE-95

The following programmable options affect the BCE-95 (Building Control Element):

Sel - Place a check in this field and click the Delete button to remove the device from this
address. Multiple devices may be selected if desired.

Floor # - Enter the floor of the building that the device is located on. This field is used for
user reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.

Description - Enter a location description for the current address. This label will appear as
the identifier for this address when any event occurs at this address. The maximum number
of characters for this label is 40.
NOTE: Any part of the description text can be copied to the Windows clipboard by
highlighting the text and pressing Ctrl-C. The text can then be copied to the description
field of another address by selecting that field and pressing Ctrl-V.

Feedback Reporting -
When enabled, a missing feedback EOL resistor will cause a FAULT condition to be
reported. When disabled, a missing feedback EOL resistor will not cause a trouble
condition.

NOTE: Disabling Feedback Reporting will disable ALL feedback supervision of the
BCE-95.

NOTE: The BCE-95 must have DIP Switch S1 - Switch #8 (labeled as "FB" on the
BCE-95) in the OPEN (OFF) position to enable the feedback hardware. Feedback
Reporting will be completely disabled if this DIP Switch is in the CLOSED (ON) position,
regardless of the configuration option in CAMWorks.

The following charts describe the behavior of the various feedback settings:

Feedback
ON Relay States
Error

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 379

Relay:
Standby
Setting:
FB1 Input:
Open
Activates the Neither Activates the Activates Activates Activates
first Output Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback
Group's Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group
Trouble Bit is affected. 1's Trouble 1's Alarm Bit. 1's Alarm Bit. 1's Alarm Bit.
and reports Bit.
Fault. Deactivates Deactivates Deactivates
Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group
Enabled 2's Alarm bit. 2's Alarm bit. 2's Alarm bit.

Activates the Activates

first Output Feedback
Group's Input Group
Trouble Bit 1's Trouble
and reports Bit.
Fault.
Neither Neither Neither Activates Activates Activates
Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group
is affected. is affected. is affected. 1's Alarm Bit. 1's Alarm Bit. 1's Alarm Bit.
Disabled
Deactivates Deactivates Deactivates
Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group
2's Alarm bit. 2's Alarm bit. 2's Alarm bit.

OFF Relay States

Feedback Relay: Relay: Relay: Relay:

Relay: Relay:
Error Standby Standby Active Active
Standby Active
Setting:
FB2 Input: FB2 Input: FB2 Input: FB2 Input:
FB2 Input: FB2 Input:
Open Not Open Not
Shorted Shorted
Shorted Shorted
Activates the Neither Activates the Activates Activates Activates
first Output Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback
Group's Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group
Trouble Bit is affected. 2's Trouble 2's Alarm Bit. 2's Alarm Bit. 2's Alarm Bit.
and reports Bit.
Enabled Fault. Deactivates Deactivates Deactivates
Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group
1's Alarm bit. 1's Alarm bit. 1's Alarm bit.

Activates the Activates

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

380 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

first Output Feedback

Group's Input Group
Trouble Bit 2's Trouble
and reports Bit.
Fault.
Neither Neither Neither Activates Activates Activates
Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group Input Group
is affected. is affected. is affected. 2's Alarm Bit. 2's Alarm Bit. 2's Alarm Bit.
Disabled
Deactivates Deactivates Deactivates
Feedback Feedback Feedback
Input Group Input Group Input Group
1's Alarm bit. 1's Alarm bit. 1's Alarm bit.

Feedback Group 1 (ON Feedback Group) - To provide feedback and LED indication, there
are two feedback groups associated with the BCE-95. These groups are treated as
special-purpose input groups. There are two bits in the ILI95's System Status Map
associated with each feedback group which, for other device types, represent the input’s
Trouble and Alarm condition but have different meanings when the Input Group is assigned
as the BCE-95's feedback group. This field specifies which Input Group will be serving as
the Feedback Group for the BCE-95's ON relay.
a) In order for an ASM-16/ANU-48 LED to indicate the BCE-95's on/off state, the
feedback group’s Alarm bit indicates the BCE-95’s ON/OFF state. The bit is
True when the BCE relay is ON and False when it is is OFF.
b) To allow CAMs to verify the actual position of the BCE-95 relay or its
associated external equipment, the group’s Trouble bit shows the state of the
feedback input. The bit is True when the feedback input is shorted, and
False otherwise (open or normal EOL).

NOTE: It is highly recommended to assign each BCE-95 Feedback Group to a distinct

Input Group that is not used for any other purpose.

Feedback Group 2 (OFF Feedback Group) - Similar to the ON Feedback Group, but
provides feedback for the BCE-95's OFF relay.

NOTE: A feedback error DOES NOT produce a system trouble. The NGA CAM Text
Message 769 feature could be used for this purpose, if desired.

DACT Report Code - When using custom DACT reporting codes 435 , the code entered in
this field will be reported by the DACT-E3 when using Contact ID or SIA formats. This may
range from 1-899. The node number will be transmitted in addition to this information.

Group 1 (AUTO ON Group) - This Output Group, and its associated CAM Expression, will
determine the "Automatic" operation of the ON relay.

Group 2 (AUTO OFF Group) - This Output Group, and its associated CAM Expression, will
determine the "Automatic" operation of the OFF relay.

Group 3 (Manual ON Group) - This Output Group, and its associated CAM Expression, will

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 381

determine the "Manual" operation of the ON relay.

Group 4 (Manual OFF Group) - This Output Group, and its associated CAM Expression,
will determine the "Manual" operation of the OFF relay.

NOTE: The Group 3 (Manual ON Group) and Group 4 (Manual OFF Group) output group
assignments may also be assigned to Disable Type Tags, which range from 600 to 699.
See this page 434 for more information on the Group Disable feature.

NOTE: Should a trouble condition occur on a BCE-95 device, only the group assigned to
Group 1 (AUTO ON Group) will set its respective Trouble SSM bit.

NOTE: To prevent conflicts or illegal states, the ILI95 enforces the following
conditions:
· The BCE-95 is a non-silenceable device. Any silence functionality must be
implemented in CAMs.
· If user-disabled, the BCE-95 remains in the standby state (both relays reset)
regardless of any control actions.
· Either Manual state overrides either Auto state.
· If both are active, Manual ON overrides Manual OFF.
· If both are active, Auto ON overrides Auto OFF.

Active - To disable Downloading for a particular address, double-click or press the space
bar within this field to turn it grey. To re-enable the device, repeat the process to make the
field green.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.13 Cross Zones

This screen allows the user to configure the behavior of each of the node's thirty cross
zones. Like many other screens in CAMWorks, the display is arranged in a grid. The
settings available for each cross zone is described below:

Cross Zone - Indicates which virtual cross zone group will be affected by these settings.
This field is read-only.

Cross Zone Type - If this virtual cross zone group will be used as a group cross zone,
select "Group". If it will be used as a point cross zone, select "Point".

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

382 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Config - Clicking this button opens a secondary screen that allows the user to assign the
desired points (point cross zoning) or input groups (group cross zoning).

Trigger - This option sets the trigger level of the cross zone (how many inputs or sets of
inputs need to activate before the cross zone activates). This can be set from two to seven
for point cross zoning or two to four for group cross zoning.

Response - The E3 Series currently allows two response types. The first is the Alarm
response, which will cause a fire alarm condition when the cross zone is activated. Second
is the non-reporting response. This response allows you to chain multiple cross zones
together or trigger outputs without causing a fire alarm on the system.

Zone Code - When the cross zone is activated it can trigger a zone code to sound, just like
any other input. This menu allows you to select one of up to 63 user-defined zone codes.
NOTE: This setting applies only to the ILI95-MB-E3.

Virtual Alarm Group - The cross zone may be configured to trigger an output group or a
scratchpad when the activation threshold has been reached. This may range from 125-224
(Output Groups), 500-599 (Extended Output Groups) and 416-439 (Scratchpads).

Virtual Pre-Alarm Group - When the one or more of the cross zone triggers activates (but
the configured trigger level has not yet been reached), it can be configured to trigger an
output group or a scratchpad. This may range from 125-224 (Output Groups), 500-599
(Extended Output Groups) and 416-439 (Scratchpads).
NOTE: Regardless of user programming, the ILI95-MB-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 will set bits in its
associated extended system status map for a Pre-alarm on a cross zone and for a Cross
Zone activation.

Day Alarm - If the response type is configured for the Alarm Response, this will cause the
system to turn on all outputs configured for the General Alarm Day output list when the cross
zone is activated during the configured day hours.

Night Alarm - If the response type is configured for the Alarm Response, this will cause the
system to turn on all outputs configured for the General Alarm Night output list when the
cross zone is activated during the configured night hours, as well as the defined weekend
and holiday days.

The following control appears outside of the grid:

Enable Multiple Point Cross Zone Activations When System is in Alarm - When
checked, point cross zone inputs will continue to prealarm after the system is already in

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 383

alarm, and the cross zones will activate when their threshold is reached. When unchecked,
all smoke detectors that are configured for point cross zoning will automatically go into alarm
when the system is in alarm and the outputs assigned to the cross zone will not activate.

Below the grid is an information area. This information area contains three tabs of
information. The first is called "CrossZone # > Input Devices", the second is "Input Group #
> Input Devices" and the third is "Used / Unused Groups". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

CrossZone # > Input Devices - This section of the window shows which devices are
assigned to the selected cross zone. Devices may be added by using the Add button below.
To remove devices from the cross zone place a check in the "Sel" column next to the
desired device and click the Delete button below.

Input Group # > Input Devices - This tab shows all input devices that are assigned to the
group that is selected in the "Select Input Group" drop-down list.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the input groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more input devices
and green if the input group has not been assigned to any input devices. Double-clicking
one of the input groups in this list will add the selected input group to one of the Input Group
fields in the grid if one of the Input Group fields is highlighted.

Group CrossZone > Input Devices - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the devices
that are a member of a group cross zone that is highlighted in the grid above.

See this page 330 for more information about configuring cross zoning.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.14 ASM/ANU
NOTE: These settings apply only to the ILI95-MB-E3.

Each ILI95-MB-E3 supports a combination of up to sixteen Switch and Annunciator Modules

of the following types:
ASM-16 and ANU-48.

The following settings may be selected for each module through this screen:

Board # - This field simply indicates which module will be affected by these settings. This
field cannot be changed.

Board Type - Select a board type to indicate that a board should be assigned to this
address or select "None", if no board should be assigned to this address.

Lamp Test - Selecting Yes will cause the ASM-16 or ANU-48 to perform a lamp test when it
is reset. Selecting No will cause the ASM-16 or ANU-48 to not perform a lamp test.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

384 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

At the bottom of the ASM/ANU screen is a configuration window to allow the configuration of
the module's switches. This section of the window changes depending on which module is
selected. The following fields are displayed in the grid in this window:

Switch Input # - This field is a reference that indicates which switches are available.

Bit # - This field indicates the system status map bit assigned to this switch.

Switch Type - This option sets the function that the switch performs. All switches are
defaulted to the "Control" option. When configured for this function, the switch will toggle its
associated Bit Number and can be used in CAM expressions. Switches one through eight
may also be configured for an Auxiliary Function, except for Switch #6. This auxiliary
function differs for each switch and may be viewed by clicking here. Even though the ANU-
48 only supports eight physical switches, switches #9-16 are displayed as Toggle/Selector
switches to acknowledge the fact that each ANU-48 switch has two bits associated with it in
the System Status Map.

NOTE: When a switch is configured for its Auxiliary Function, it will not trigger its
associated bit number.

NOTE: When a switch is configured for its Auxiliary Function, its associated LED's will be
taken over by the Auxiliary Function and will no longer be programmable via CAMs.

NOTE: If an ASM-16 or ANU-48 switch is reconfigured for an Auxiliary Function, any

CAMs previously written for the LED's associated with that switch will be deleted. Before
deleting the CAMs, CAMWorks will issue a warning asking for confirmation.

Momentary - When the switch type is configured as a control switch, the switch can be
configured as a momentary switch by placing a check mark in this field. When enabled, a
switch press will cause the associated SSM bit location to go true once and then false again.

Latching - The switch may be configured for latching operation when the switch type is
configured as a control switch. When selected, the current switch state (ON or OFF) will
persist through reset.
NOTE: On the ANU-48, switches #9-16 are always configured as Latching and cannot be
changed.

NOTE: A switch may not be configured for both momentary and latching operation at the
same time.

Description - This descriptive text is available for display while programming CAMs and is
not downloaded to the panel.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 385

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.15 Label Groups

This screen allows custom descriptions to be defined for each of the 100 Disable Type Tags,
300 Input Groups and 200 Output Groups that are available on the ILI95-E3 Series. When a
description has been entered, it will appear as a pop-up tool tip when the mouse hovers over
an Input Group or Output Group field (Input Group / Output Group labels only) or beside the
Disable Type Tag group number in the drop-down list (Disable Type Tag labels only). These
descriptions are for user reference only, and are not downloaded to the panel.

NOTE: See the following page 434 for more information about Disable Type Tags (and the
Group Disable feature in general).

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.16 CAM Output Groups

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

386 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 387

AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or

PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

388 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs in this screen will control Output Groups that can be assigned to AOMs and
discrete outputs such as the NAC Circuits and the Municipal Circuit.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 389

6.3.17 CAM Annunciators

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

390 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 391

CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

392 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

the selected node. Includes Text Message

Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs on this screen affect the user-programmable LEDs on the LCD-SLP annunciators
connected to this panel. At the top of the screen are three filters:

LCD-SLP No. - Display the CAMs only for the selected LCD-SLP.

Switch No. - Display the CAMs only for the selected switch.

LED Type - Display the CAMs only for the selected type of CAM (ON/Off, Blink, Red or
Green).

The filters are ANDed with each other. This means that only the CAMs that match all criteria
will be displayed in the grid below.

The following describes the four different types of CAMs that control the behavior of each
LCD-SLP programmable LED:

On/Off - A CAM expression written in this area will turn the LED ON steady when the CAM
evaluates to a TRUE and will turn the LED off when the CAM evaluates to a false.

Blink - A CAM expression written in this area will blink the LED when the CAM evaluates to
a TRUE and will turn the LED off (or on steady, based on the On/Off CAM expression) when
the CAM evaluates to a false.

NOTE: The LED blink CAM Expression takes priority over the LED On/Off if both CAM
expressions are TRUE at the same time.

Red - The LCD-SLP programmable LEDs can be configured to be Green, Red or Amber.
When the "Red" CAM expression evaluates to TRUE, the the LED will appear Red, unless
the Green CAM expression also evaluates to TRUE at the same time.

Green - The LCD-SLP programmable LEDs can be configured to be Green, Red or Amber.
When the "Green" CAM expression evaluates to TRUE, the the LED will appear Green,
unless the Red CAM expression also evaluates to TRUE at the same time.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 393

NOTE: The LED will appear Amber when both the Red and Green CAM Expressions
evaluate to TRUE or both evaluate to FALSE.

NOTE: If an LCD-SLP switch has been configured for its Auxiliary Function, the CAM
entry fields, as well as the description field will be grayed out.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.18 CAM ASM/ANU LED

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

394 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

field. This field cannot be edited.

Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 395

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 396 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Scratchpads on the selected node. This

includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs in this screen control the state of the LED's on ASM-16 or ANU-48 modules. A
CAM expression written in this area will either light steady or blink the LED when the CAM
evaluates to a TRUE and will turn the LED off when the CAM evaluates to a false.

NOTE: The LED blink CAM Expression takes priority over the LED On/Off if both CAM
expressions are TRUE at the same time.

NOTE: If an ASM-16 or ANU-48 switch has been configured for its Auxiliary Function, the
CAM entry field, as well as the description field will be grayed out.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.19 CAM Scratchpad

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 397

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

398 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 399

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 400 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs in this screen will turn on or off the Scratchpads associated with this node.
Scratchpads can be referred to in other CAM expressions and are extremely useful in
reducing the complexity of other CAM expressions.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.20 CAM Special Function

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM Special Functions screen incorporates several advanced functions that can be
useful for certain applications. Specifically, these functions are:
[****]

Schedule 401 - Configure certain output devices to activate according to a specific schedule.
Counters 404 - Activate outputs after a certain number of specific events occur.
Sequence 407 - Activate several outputs in succession.
Timers 411 - Delay the activation of output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 401

6.3.20.1 Schedule

NOTE: Schedules are not available on INX, INCC or INI-VGE nodes.

There are 10 schedules available per node for automatically activating Output Groups and
Scratchpads according to a fixed schedule. Three types of schedules are available. These
are:

1.) Daily - Outputs can be activated on a daily basis at a given time.

2.) Weekly - Outputs can be activated at a certain time on one or more different days of the
week.
3.) Monthly - Outputs can be activated on a certain day of the selected month or on a certain
day of every month.

The process of configuring a schedule is the same regardless of the type of schedule being
used, with a few exceptions. Below is the procedure for configuring a schedule:

1. In the grid, select the Group that will be triggered by the scheduler. The allowed selection
of groups will vary based on the current node type, but will always at least include the
node's scratchpad locations.
2. In the "Information" pane at the bottom of the screen select the "Schedule Details" tab, if it
isn't already selected.
3. Select one of the following schedule types:
a. Daily – When a Daily schedule is desired, the user must supply the time of day that
should be used for the schedule. This is done through the Hours/Minutes drop-down
lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every hour
and/or every minute.
b. Weekly – When a Weekly schedule is desired, the user must select which days of the
week that the schedule should run. Selection boxes are provided for each day of the
week and any or all days may be selected by placing a check in the appropriate box.
Like a Daily schedule, the Weekly schedule also requires that a time of day must be
selected for when the schedule is to be run. This is done through the Hours/Minutes
drop-down lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every
hour and/or every minute.
c. Monthly – A Monthly schedule is used when it is desired to activate certain outputs on a
certain day of the month. Option buttons are provided for the month. Unlike the
Weekly schedule, the user may only select one month or every month. A date
selection is also provided, allowing the user to select which day of the month to run the
schedule. An option is available to run the schedule every day of the selected month.
Like a Daily schedule, the Monthly schedule also requires that a time of day must be
selected for when the schedule is to be run. This is done through the Hours/Minutes
drop-down lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every
hour and/or every minute.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

402 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: If you choose the 29th then there will be no schedule activation for
February except on a leap year. If you choose the 30th then there will be no
schedule activation for February at all. If you choose the 31st then all months with
less than 31 days will not have a schedule activation.

4. Disable Schedule CAM Expression - If there are any circumstances where it would be
desirable to NOT run an automatic schedule, this CAM expression should be entered.
The TRUE evaluation of this CAM expression will prevent the schedule from running.
NOTE: Disable Schedule CAM Expression feature is not available on the 7100.

5. Description - A description may be added to indicate what the schedule will be used for.
This information is used for reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.
NOTE: The CAM Schedule will be true for exactly one minute if the user specifies a
specific minute within the selected hour.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
four tabs of information. The first is called "Schedule Details", the second is "Node
Devices", the third is "Reference Search" and the fourth is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is
a brief explanation of each information tab.

Schedule Details - This tab allows the user to view or set the scheduling information for the
selected schedule. See above for more information on how the schedule is configured.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 403

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 404 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Scratchpads on the selected node. This

includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.20.2 Counters

There are 10 counters available per node for activating outputs after an input triggers the
counter a specified number of times.

The process of configuring a counter is as follows:

1. In the grid, choose how many times the counter must be run by selecting a value in the
"Count" field.
2. Select the Group that will be triggered by the scheduler. The allowed selection of groups
will vary based on the current node type, but will always at least include the node's
scratchpad locations.
3. A Define Counter CAM Expression may be written. If present, this CAM expression will
determine under what condition the counter will be reset. If this CAM is blank, the counter

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 405

will operate as a one-shot (meaning that a reset is required in order to trigger the counter
again after it has activated its output.)
4. Select a "Working Bit". This is a bit that is used internally by the CAM engine to perform
the counter function. This bit must not be used by any other function.
5. Counter Trigger CAM Expression. This CAM Expression describes what condition will
cause the counter to be incremented.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is a brief explanation of each
information tab.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

406 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 407

Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for

Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.20.3 Sequence

NOTE: Schedules are not available on INX, INCC or INI-VGE nodes.

There are 10 schedules available per node for automatically activating Output Groups and
Scratchpads according to a fixed schedule. Three types of schedules are available. These
are:

1.) Daily - Outputs can be activated on a daily basis at a given time.

2.) Weekly - Outputs can be activated at a certain time on one or more different days of the
week.
3.) Monthly - Outputs can be activated on a certain day of the selected month or on a certain
day of every month.

The process of configuring a schedule is the same regardless of the type of schedule being
used, with a few exceptions. Below is the procedure for configuring a schedule:

1. In the grid, select the Group that will be triggered by the scheduler. The allowed selection
of groups will vary based on the current node type, but will always at least include the
node's scratchpad locations.
2. In the "Information" pane at the bottom of the screen select the "Schedule Details" tab, if it
isn't already selected.
3. Select one of the following schedule types:
a. Daily – When a Daily schedule is desired, the user must supply the time of day that
should be used for the schedule. This is done through the Hours/Minutes drop-down

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

408 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every hour
and/or every minute.
b. Weekly – When a Weekly schedule is desired, the user must select which days of the
week that the schedule should run. Selection boxes are provided for each day of the
week and any or all days may be selected by placing a check in the appropriate box.
Like a Daily schedule, the Weekly schedule also requires that a time of day must be
selected for when the schedule is to be run. This is done through the Hours/Minutes
drop-down lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every
hour and/or every minute.
c. Monthly – A Monthly schedule is used when it is desired to activate certain outputs on a
certain day of the month. Option buttons are provided for the month. Unlike the
Weekly schedule, the user may only select one month or every month. A date
selection is also provided, allowing the user to select which day of the month to run the
schedule. An option is available to run the schedule every day of the selected month.
Like a Daily schedule, the Monthly schedule also requires that a time of day must be
selected for when the schedule is to be run. This is done through the Hours/Minutes
drop-down lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every
hour and/or every minute.
NOTE: If you choose the 29th then there will be no schedule activation for
February except on a leap year. If you choose the 30th then there will be no
schedule activation for February at all. If you choose the 31st then all months with
less than 31 days will not have a schedule activation.

4. Disable Schedule CAM Expression - If there are any circumstances where it would be
desirable to NOT run an automatic schedule, this CAM expression should be entered.
The TRUE evaluation of this CAM expression will prevent the schedule from running.
NOTE: Disable Schedule CAM Expression feature is not available on the 7100.

5. Description - A description may be added to indicate what the schedule will be used for.
This information is used for reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.
NOTE: The CAM Schedule will be true for exactly one minute if the user specifies a
specific minute within the selected hour.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
four tabs of information. The first is called "Schedule Details", the second is "Node
Devices", the third is "Reference Search" and the fourth is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is
a brief explanation of each information tab.

Schedule Details - This tab allows the user to view or set the scheduling information for the
selected schedule. See above for more information on how the schedule is configured.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 409

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

410 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Scratchpads on the selected node. This

includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 411

6.3.20.4 Timers

There are 10 timers available per node for creating delays for Output Groups and
Scratchpads. To configure a timer, set the desired timer interval in seconds, and select the
appropriate Output Group or Scratchpad from the Group drop-down list. If set, the timer
information will be displayed in the CAM entry screen for the selected group. This delay will
apply when the output group or scratchpad is activated through the CAM logic expression.
The options for the timers are displayed in a table format. Each option is described below.

Timer - This is a read-only display that shows the timer number (1-10).

Time (Seconds) - This sets the delay time for this timer. The delay time is entered in
seconds. This may range from 1 to 3600 seconds .

Group - Select the Output Group or Scratchpad that you would like to delay.

Resettable Timer - This option allows you to choose between standard and resettable
timers. If set to No, the timer will be a standard timer. Standard timers will only trigger
once. In order to be triggered again, the system will need to be reset. If this setting is
changed to Yes, the timer can be triggered multiple times. In order to be triggered again,
the timer will have time out and the CAM expression assigned to the output group or
scratchpad will need to transition from false to true again.

Free/Used - If this timer has been configured and assigned to an Output Group or
Scratchpad, this will read Used, otherwise it will read Free.

NOTE: If a Timer is used by Advanced CAM Programming, this field will read Used, even
if it doesn't appear to have any other configuration information assigned.

NOTE: If a Timer is used by Advanced CAM Programming, no timer parameters may be

changed via this screen.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.21 CAM Group Disable

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

412 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 413

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

414 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the

selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 415

Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAM expressions in this section are a part of the Group Disable 434 feature of the E3
Series. Each Input and Output Group has one CAM expression assigned. When the CAM
expression is TRUE, all devices assigned to the associated Group will enter DISCONNECT
trouble and will be treated as a disabled device. When the CAM expression goes back to
FALSE, the DISCONNECT troubles associated with the assigned Input Group will be
restored.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.22 CAM Disable Type Tag

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

416 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

This field cannot be edited.

Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 417

includes the on board NAC's and Municipal

circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 418 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Groups, Device Type and Description.

Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAM expressions in this section are a part of the Group Disable 434 feature of the E3
Series. Input and/or output devices may individually be assigned to Disable Type Tags.

Each Disable Type Tag has one CAM expression assigned. When the CAM expression is
TRUE, all devices assigned to the associated Disable Type Tag will enter DISCONNECT
trouble and will be treated as a disabled device. When the CAM expression goes back to
FALSE, the DISCONNECT troubles associated with the assigned Disable Type Tag will be
restored.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.23 CAM Sensor Output

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 419

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

420 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 421

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 422 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The E3 Series has complete control over several aspects of the operation of the smoke
detectors that was not possible in earlier products. One of these features includes
controlling the so-called Remote Outputs of the smoke detectors. These include both
sounder bases and relay bases.

Each sensor has a CAM expression to control its remote output. When the CAM expression
evaluates to TRUE the output will turn ON, when it evaluates to FALSE the output will turn
OFF.

NOTE: Once a CAM expression has been entered for a Sensor Remote Output, it will
override the automatic activation of the output (ie. the standard follow-the-LED activation).
If automatic operation is desired after a CAM expression has been written, simply erase
the CAM expression.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.24 CAM Reset Inhibit

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 423

button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

424 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 425

includes the Scratchpad number,

Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.
NOTE: In order for the following settings to take effect, the ILI95-MB-E3 or ILI95-S-E3
must be running V2.4-001 or later of the System Operating Software.

The CAMs on this screen will prevent this node from being reset. There are three bits, a
Fire Reset Inhibit Bit, an MNS Reset Inhibit Bit and and Enable Reset Inhibit. Both the Fire

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 426 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Reset Inhibit Bit and the Enable Reset Inhibit bit must be TRUE in order to prevent a fire
reset from affecting this node. Both the MNS Reset Inhibit Bit and the Enable Reset Inhibit
bit must be TRUE in order to prevent an MNS reset from affecting this node.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.25 Advanced CAM Programming

Selecting this option will open the Advanced CAM Programming Editor.

See this page 925 for more information about the Advanced CAM Programming Editor.
See this page 920 for more information about Advanced CAM Programming in general.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

6.3.26 Communication
Opens the Download screen in the main window. See the Download Utilities 841 section for
more information.

6.4 General
6.4.1 Sensor Device Types
The following sensor device types are available on the E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-
E3):

Sensor Devi Physical Descripti Respo Latchi PAS Allowed? Verific Cross
Device ce Device on nse ng? ation Zonin
Type Type Type Type Allowe g
As d? Allow
Repo ed?
rted
By
Pane
l

None No No No device No N/A N/A N/A N/A

Assign Devic Device at this Respo
ed e address nse
Ion Ion Ion Standard Fire Yes Yes Yes Yes

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 427

Detecto Detec Sensor Ion Alarm

r tor (XP95-I, Sensor,
XP95-ID, such as
XP95-ID XP95-I
R)
Critical Critic Ion Standard Fire Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ion al Ion Sensor Ion Alarm
(XP95-I, Sensor.
XP95-ID, The
XP95-ID system
R) reserves
power to
run the
sensor's
LEDs.
Photo Photo Optical Standard Fire Yes Yes Yes Yes
Detecto Detec Sensor Photo Alarm
r tor (XP95-P, Sensor,
XP95-PD, such as
XP95-PD XP95-P
R,
VLC-400)
Critical Critic Optical Standard Fire Yes Yes Yes Yes
Photo al Sensor Photo Alarm
Photo (XP95-P, Sensor.
XP95-PD, The
XP95-PD system
R, reserves
VLC-400) power to
run the
sensor's
LEDs.
Therma Ther Temperat Standard Fire Yes No No No
l Det mal ure Heat Alarm
Det Sensor Detector,
(XP95-T) such as
XP95-T
NR Ion NR Ion Standard Non- No No No No
Det NL Ion Sensor Ion reporti
Det (XP95-I, Sensor, ng
NL XP95-ID, such as
XP95-ID XP95-I
R)
NR NR Optical Standard Non- No No No No
Photo Photo Sensor Photo reporti
Det NL Det (XP95-P, Sensor, ng
NL XP95-PD, such as
XP95-PD XP95-P

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

428 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

R,
VLC-400)
Ion Ion Standard Multi- Yes No No No
Multilev Multil Ion Ion level
el evel Sensor Sensor, (three-
(XP95-I, such as level)
XP95-ID, XP95-I (Alert,
XP95-ID Action,
R) Fire
Alarm)
Pho Pho Standard Multi- Yes No No No
Multilev Multil Optical Photo level
el evel Sensor Sensor, (three-
(XP95-P, such as level)
XP95-PD, XP95-P (Alert,
XP95-PD Action,
R, Fire
VLC-400) Alarm)
Ion Ion Ion Analog, Superv Yes No No No
Duct Duct Sensor Addressa isory
Spv Spv (XP95-I, ble Ion
XP95-ID, Duct
XP95-ID Detector
R)
Photo Photo Optical Analog, Superv Yes No No No
Duct Duct Sensor Addressa isory
Spv Spv (XP95-P, ble Photo
XP95-PD, Duct
XP95-PD Detector
R,
VLC-400)
Ion Ion Ion Analog, Fire Yes Yes Yes Yes
Duct Duct Sensor Addressa Alarm
Det Det (XP95-I, ble Ion
XP95-ID, Duct
XP95-ID Detector,
R) such as
XP95-ID
Photo Photo Optical Analog, Fire Yes Yes Yes Yes
Duct Duct Sensor Addressa Alarm
Det Det (XP95-P, ble Photo
XP95-PD, Duct
XP95-PD Detector,
R, such as
VLC-400) XP95-PD
Ion Ion Ion Standard Superv No No No No
Supv Supv Sensor Ion isory
(XP95-I, Sensor,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 429

XP95-ID, such as
XP95-ID XP95-I
R)
Photo Photo Optical Standard Superv No No No No
Supv Supv Sensor Photo isory
(XP95-P, Sensor,
XP95-PD, such as
XP95-PD XP95-P
R,
VLC-400)
Multi Multi Multi- Multi- Fire Yes No Yes Yes
Sensor Sens Sensor Criteria Alarm
or (XP95-M) Sensor,
such as
XP95-M.
Multi Multi Multi- Superv No No No No
Supvsr Supv (XP95-M) Criteria isory
y sry Sensor,
such as
XP95-DM
or XP95-
M
Multilvl Multil Temperat Standard Multi- Yes No No No
Heat vl ure Heat level
Heat Sensor Detector, (three-
(XP95-T) such as level)
XP95-T (Alert,
Action,
Fire
Alarm)
Aspirati Aspir Optical Vesda Multi- Yes No No No
ng ating Sensor VLC-400 level
(XP95-P, (three-
XP95-PD, level)
XP95-PD (Alert,
R, Action,
VLC-400) Fire
Alarm)

6.4.2 Element Device Types

The following element device types are available on the E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-
MB-E3):

Monitor Elements -

Monitor Device Physica Descrip Respon Latchin PAS Verifica Cross

Device Type As l Device tion se Type g? Allowed tion Zoning
Type Reporte Type ? Allowed Allowed

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

430 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

d By ? ?
Panel

None No No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A

Assigne Device Device device Respons
d at this e
address
Smoke Smoke PID-95 Conventi Fire Yes Yes No Yes
Detector Detector (PID-95, onal Alarm
PID-95P Smoke
) Detector
monitore
d by
PID-95
Conv. Manual PID-95 Conventi Fire Yes Yes No No
Manual Station (PID-95, onal pull Alarm
Station PID-95P station
) monitore
d by
PID-95
Plenum Plenum PID-95 Conventi Fire Yes No No Yes
Det Det (PID-95, onal Alarm
PID-95P Plenum
) Smoke
Detector
monitore
d by
PID-95
N.O. N.O. PID-95 Any Fire Yes No No No
Contact Contact (PID-95, normally Alarm
s s PID-95P open
) contact
device
monitore
d by
PID-95
Heat Heat PID-95 Any Fire Yes No No No
Detector Detector (PID-95, conventi Alarm
PID-95P onal
) heat
detector
monitore
d by
PID-95
Sub Sub PID-95 Any Fire Yes No No Yes
Loop Loop (PID-95, conventi Alarm
PID-95P onal

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 431

) initiating
device
circuit
monitore
d by
PID-95
Waterflo Waterflo PID-95 Any Fire Yes No No No
w Sil w Sil (PID-95, waterflo Alarm
PID-95P w switch
) monitore
d by
PID-95.
Beam Beam PID-95 Any Fire Yes Yes No Yes
Smoke Smoke (PID-95, conventi Alarm
Det Det PID-95P onal
) beam
smoke
detector
monitore
d by
PID-95.
Duct Duct PID-95 Any Fire Yes No No Yes
Detector Detector (PID-95, conventi Alarm
PID-95P onal
) Duct
detector
monitore
d by
PID-95
FACP FACP PID-95 Any Fire Yes No No No
(PID-95, remote Alarm
PID-95P FACP
) Alarm
dry
contacts
monitore
d by
PID-95
Remote Remote CZI-95 Any Fire Yes No No Yes
Zone Zone (Non- conventi Alarm
(non- Interrupt onal
interrupti ing) initiating
ng) (CZI-95) device
circuit
monitore
d by
CZI-95
Smoke/ Smoke/ PID-95 Any Fire Yes No No Yes

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

432 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Heat Heat (PID-95, conventi Alarm

Det Det PID-95P onal
) photo/
thermal
detector
monitore
d by
PID-95
Supervis Supervis PID-95 Any Supervis No No No No
ory Sw ory Sw (PID-95, normally ory
PID-95P open
) contact
initiating
device
monitore
d by
PID-95
Tamper Tamper PID-95 Any Supervis Yes No No No
Sw Sw (PID-95, normally ory
PID-95P open
) contact
initiating
device
monitore
d by
PID-95
Waterflo Waterflo PID-95 Any Fire Yes No No No
w NS w NS (PID-95, waterflo Alarm
PID-95P w switch (Non-sil
) monitore enceabl
d by e)
PID-95.
NR NR PID-95 Any Non- Yes No No No
Actuator Actuator (PID-95, normally reportin
L L PID-95P open g
) contact
initiating
device
monitore
d by
PID-95
NR NR PID-95 Any Non- No No No No
Actuator Actuator (PID-95, normally reportin
NL NL PID-95P open g
) contact
initiating
device
monitore
d by

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 433

PID-95
NAC NAC PID-95 Any Silence N/A N/A N/A N/A
Silence Silence (PID-95, normally Switch
Sw Sw PID-95P open
) contact
initiating
device
monitore
d by
PID-95
Reset Reset PID-95 Any Reset N/A N/A N/A N/A
Sw Sw (PID-95, normally Switch
PID-95P open
) contact
initiating
device
monitore
d by
PID-95
Fire Drill Fire Drill PID-95 Any Alarm N/A N/A N/A N/A
Sw Sw (PID-95, normally Acknowl
PID-95P open edge
) contact Switch
initiating
device
monitore
d by
PID-95
Alarm Alarm PID-95 Any Alarm N/A N/A N/A N/A
Ack Sw Ack Sw (PID-95, normally Acknowl
PID-95P open edge
) contact Switch
initiating
device
monitore
d by
PID-95
Trbl Ack Trbl Ack PID-95 Any Trouble N/A N/A N/A N/A
Sw Sw (PID-95, normally Acknowl
PID-95P open edge
) contact Switch
initiating
device
monitore
d by
PID-95
Addr. Manual MS-95 / MS-95 Fire Yes Yes No No
Manual Station MS-95 T Address Alarm

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 434 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Station (MS-95, able pull

MS-95T) station
Remote Remote CZI-95 Any Fire Yes No No Yes
Zone Zone (Interrup conventi Alarm
(Interrup ting) onal
ting) (CZI-95) initiating
device
circuit
monitore
d by
CZI-95

Control Elements -

Control Device Device Type As Physical Description Silenceable?

Type Reported By Device Type
Panel

Signal AOM Sil NAC AOM Sil SCE-95 Supervised Yes

(SCE-95) signal control
element, such
as SCE-95.
Signal AOM NS NAC AOM NS SCE-95 Supervised No
(SCE-95) signal control
element, such
as SCE-95.
Form C AOM Sil Form C AOM Sil RCE-95 Form-C Dry Yes
(RCE-95) Contact control
element, such
as RCE-95.
Form C AOM Form C AOM RCE-95 Form-C Dry No
NS NS (RCE-95) Contact control
element, such
as RCE-95.
Building Ctrl Building Ctrl BCE-95 Building Control No
(BCE-95) Element, such
as BCE-95.

6.4.3 Disable Groups

The E3 Series has the ability to disable groups of input devices and output devices based on
the evaluation of CAM expressions. There are three classifications of Disable Groups that
are available:

1.) Disable Input Groups - When the CAM expression for the indicated Input Group goes
TRUE, all devices assigned to the Input Group will enter DISCONNECT trouble and will
become disabled.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 435

2.) Disable Output Groups - When the CAM expression for the indicated Output Group goes
TRUE, all devices assigned to the Output Group will enter DISCONNECT trouble and will
become disabled.

3.) Disable Type Tags - Disable Type Tags allow both input and output devices to be
disabled with the activation of one CAM expression. Disable Type Tags, which range in
number from 600-699, may be assigned to the third and/or fourth Input/Output Group
assignment of a device. When the CAM expression for the indicated Disable Type Tag goes
TRUE, all devices assigned to the Disable Type Tag will enter DISCONNECT trouble and
will become disabled. Disable Type Tags may be assigned a short description in this screen
385 , and will appear in the third and fourth group assignment drop-down lists in the Configure

NAC's, Monitor Element Parameters, Control Element Parameters and Sensor Parameters
screens in place of the Disable Type Tag's number. It will also be disabled in the CAM entry
screen for the Disable Type Tag.

6.5 DACT Reporting

One of the features of E3 Series systems is the ability to configure Custom DACT Reporting
Codes that are reported when the DACT-E3 is using either Ademco Contact ID or SIA
formats. This feature allows better identification of system events at the central station
receiver allowing for faster response to system events by appropriate personnel.

This feature is not enabled by default. To enable this feature, the user must do the
following:

1.) Open the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3 or ILI95-MB-E3 node that hosts the DACT-E3.

2.) For ILI-MB-E3 or ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, open the DACT Settings screen. For S3 Series
FACP nodes, select the General Settings screen and then select the DACT Settings tab.
Ensure that the DACT Enabled checkbox is checked.

3.) Select the "Use Custom (per-device) reporting codes" option.

4.) Configure custom codes using the Input Devices and Output Devices screens.

NOTE: DACT Codes may also be automatically configured when adding SLC devices to
the configuration. See this page 436 for more information.

NOTE: If this feature is not enabled, the DACT-E3 will use the "Standard" reporting code
format, which is similar to the format used by the 7100.

NOTE: Only events reported from NGA, S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series or ILI95-E3 Series nodes
will be reported using the "custom" reporting code format. Events originating from all
other node types will use the "Standard" reporting code format, which is similar to the
format used by the 7100.

NOTE: All ILI-MB-E3 and ILI-S-E3 nodes in a network must contain at least V1.2 firmware
in order to take advantage of this feature. All ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3 nodes are
already compatible with this feature and do not require a firmware upgrade. All S3 Series
nodes are already compatible with this feature and do not require a firmware upgrade.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 436 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NGA nodes require at least V3.00 firmware in order to issue events that include "custom"
reporting codes.
6.5.1 Auto-creation of DACT Codes
The user may elect to allow CAMWorks to assign specific DACT codes when adding SLC
devices to the system's configuration. To do this, the user may select from the following
DACT Code options when adding new devices:

· None - When selected, a code of 000 (which is used to assign no code to a device) will be
added when assigning devices.
· Device Address - When selected, CAMWorks will add a code based on the device's
address. See this page 436 for a list of codes for each address.
· Device Type - When selected, CAMWorks will add a code representing the type of device
being added. See this page 436 for a list of codes for each device type.
· System Response - When selected, CAMWorks will add a code representing the type of
system response produced by the device when activated. See this page 439 for a list of
codes for each response type.
NOTE: The System Response selection is not available for Control Elements.
· Custom - When selected, the user may add a custom code. This custom code will be
used for all checked devices when the devices are added to the configuration.

6.5.1.1 Device Address Table

Loop DACT Codes

1 001-126
2 128-253

6.5.1.2 Device Type Table

CAMWorks Device Type Panel Device Type DACT Code

None Assigned No Device 000

Ion Detector Ion Detector 001
Critical Ion Critical Ion 002
Photo Detector Photo Detector 003
Critical Photo Critical Photo 004
Photo/Heat Det Photo/Heat Det 005
Thermal Det Thermal Det 006
Acclimate Acclimate 007
Smoke Detector Smoke Detector 008
Conv. Manual Station Manual Station 009
Plenum Det Plenum Det 010
N.O. Contacts N.O. Contacts 011
Heat Detector Heat Detector 012

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 437

Sub Loop Sub Loop 013

Waterflow Sil Waterflow Sil 014
Beam Smoke Det Beam Smoke Det 015
Duct Detector Duct Detector 016
FACP FACP 017
Remote Zone Remote Zone 018
Smoke/Heat Det Smoke/Heat Det 019
Supervisory Sw Supervisory Sw 020
Tamper Sw Tamper Sw 021
Waterflow NS Waterflow NS 022
NR Actuator L NR Actuator L 023
NR Actuator NL NR Actuator NL 024
NR Ion Det NL NR Ion Det NL 025
NR Photo Det NL NR Photo Det NL 026
Ion Multilevel Ion Multilevel 027
Pho Multilevel Pho Multilevel 028
NAC Silence Sw NAC Silence Sw 029
Reset Sw Reset Sw 030
Fire Drill Sw Fire Drill Sw 031
Alarm Ack Sw Alarm Ack Sw 032
Trbl Ack Sw Trbl Ack Sw 033
Signal AOM Sil NAC AOM Sil 036
Signal AOM NS NAC AOM NS 037
Form C AOM Sil Form C AOM Sil 038
Form C AOM NS Form C AOM NS 039
Ion Duct Spv Ion Duct Spv 040
Photo Duct Spv Photo Duct Spv 041
Ion Duct Det Ion Duct Det 042
Photo Duct Det Photo Duct Det 043
Laser Sensor CLIP Laser Sensor 044
Ion Supv Ion Supv 045
Photo Supv Photo Supv 046
Acclimate Supv Acclimate Supv 047
(User Defined) (User Defined) 048
(User Defined) (User Defined) 049
(User Defined) (User Defined) 050
(User Defined) (User Defined) 051
(User Defined) (User Defined) 052
(User Defined) (User Defined) 053
(User Defined) (User Defined) 054
(User Defined) (User Defined) 055
(User Defined) (User Defined)
or or 056
Vel. Laser Sensor Laser Sensor
(User Defined) (User Defined)
or or 057
Vel. Laser Multilvl Laser Multilvl
Acclimate Dual Acclimate Dual 058
Addr. Manual Station Manual Station 059

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

438 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Laser Multilvl CLIP Laser Multilvl 060

Beam Smoke Det Beam Smoke Det 061
Multi Sensor Multi Sensor
064
(Reserved) (Reserved) 065
(Reserved) (Reserved) 067
(Reserved) (Reserved) 070
(Reserved) (Reserved) 071
(Reserved) (Reserved) 072
4-Warn Sensor 4-Warn Sensor
073
4-Warn Dual 4-Warn Dual
074
Fire/CO Sens Fire/CO Sens
075
Fire/CO Trpl Fire/CO Trpl
076
Aspirating Aspirating
077
Asprating Multi Asprating Multi
078
(Reserved) (Reserved) 079
(Reserved) (Reserved) 080
(Reserved) (Reserved) 081
(Reserved) (Reserved) 082
(Reserved) (Reserved) 083
(Reserved) (Reserved) 084
(Reserved) (Reserved) 085
(Reserved) (Reserved) 086
(Reserved) (Reserved) 087
(Reserved) (Reserved) 088
(Reserved) (Reserved) 089
(User Defined) (User Defined) 090
(User Defined) (User Defined) 091
(User Defined) (User Defined) 092
(User Defined) (User Defined) 093
(User Defined) (User Defined) 094
(User Defined) (User Defined) 095
(User Defined) (User Defined) 096
(User Defined) (User Defined) 097
(User Defined) (User Defined) 098
(User Defined) (User Defined) 099
(User Defined) (User Defined) 100
(User Defined) (User Defined) 101
(User Defined) (User Defined) 102
(User Defined) (User Defined) 103
(User Defined) (User Defined) 104
(User Defined) (User Defined) 105
(User Defined) (User Defined) 106

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI95-MB-E3 & ILI95-S-E3) 439

(User Defined) (User Defined) 107

(User Defined) (User Defined) 108
(User Defined) (User Defined) 109
(User Defined) (User Defined) 110
(User Defined) (User Defined) 111
(User Defined) (User Defined) 112
(User Defined) (User Defined) 113
(User Defined) (User Defined) 114
(User Defined) (User Defined) 115
(User Defined) (User Defined) 116
(User Defined) (User Defined) 117
(User Defined) (User Defined) 118
(User Defined) (User Defined) 119
(User Defined) (User Defined) 120
(User Defined) (User Defined) 121
(User Defined) (User Defined) 122
(User Defined) (User Defined) 123
(User Defined) (User Defined) 124
(User Defined) (User Defined) 125
(User Defined) (User Defined) 126
(User Defined) (User Defined) 127
6.5.1.3 System Response Table

System Response Type DACT Code

Fire Alarm 000

Manual Station Alarm 001
Supervisory 002
(Non-Latch)
Supervisory 003
(Latch)
Fire Alarm 004
(Non-silenceable)
Smoke Alarm 005
Multi-level (three-level) 007
(Alert, Action, Fire Alarm)
Silence Switch 008
Reset Switch 009
Fire Drill Switch 010
Alarm Acknowledge Switch 011
Trouble Acknowledge Switch 012
Activate AOM (Signal) / Activate Control 014
Element (SCE-95)
Activate AOM (Form-C) / Activate Control 015
Element (RCE-95 & BCE-95)
Dual Response 016
Multi-criteria Sensor profile response 017

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

440 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Action (Pre-alarm) Response 018

Alert (Trouble) Response 019

Trouble Response 020

Reserved 021
Gas Alarm Response 022

CO Alarm Response 023

Dual Response 024

(Fire Alarm for Heat or Heat with smoke or
flame
CO Alarm in response to carbon monoxide.)

Triple Response 025

(Fire Alarm for Heat or Heat with smoke or
flame
CO Alarm in response to carbon monoxide
Supervisory for smoke or flame without
heat.)

Multi-level (five-level) 026

(Alert, Action 1, Action 2, Fire Alarm 1, Fire
Alarm 2)

MNS Alarm 027

MNS Supervisory 028

MNS Activate AOM (Signal) / MNS Activate 029

Control Element (SCE-95)
MNS Activate AOM (Form-C) / MNS Activate 030
Control Element (RCE-95 & BCE-95)
MNS Trouble Response 031

Carbon Monoxide (CO) Supervisory 032

Response

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

Part

VII
 442 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

7 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3)

7.1 Basic steps in configuring an E3 Series Panel
7.1.1 Programming node-wide parameters and defaults
There are many global programming options available in the E3 Series system. Most of
these options have been initialized to default settings when the project was created and
initialized. These default settings should be appropriate for a basic E3 Series configuration.
However, any or all of these parameters may be modified to suit the needs of any individual
custom configuration.

To modify any of these settings, select the appropriate icons under the current ILI-E3 Series
node in the Project Explorer 56 .

NAC Settings 468 (Not available on the ILI-S-E3.)

ASM/ANU 505 (Not available on the ILI-S-E3.)
General Settings 461
Label Groups 507
DACT Options 471 (Not available on the ILI-S-E3)

The following settings, located in Project Globals, will affect the ILI-MB-E3 and ILI-S-E3:
Passwords 61
User Defined Types 62
Miscellaneous Globals 66
Display Priorities 67

The following Regional Settings will affect the ILI-MB-E3 and ILI-S-E3:
Night/Weekend/Holiday Schedule 70

Finally, there are settings on the Silence Settings 69 and Node Summary 57 screens that
also affect the ILI-MB-E3 and ILI-S-E3.

After completing globals programming, you're ready to continue with "Programming loop
devices and groups".
7.1.2 Programming loop devices and groups
Each ILI-MB-E3 and ILI-S-E3 in an E3 Series system has two SLC's. There are 318 total
addresses available for programming on each SLC. The device addresses for each loop
include 1 - 159 for sensors and 1 - 159 for modules (AMMs and AOMs).

NOTE: Addresses above 99 may only be used in the following two cases:

1.) No 7100 nodes are present in the network.

2.) SLC Loops on this ILI are using the Velociti protocol.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 443

NOTE: It is possible to use the full address range provided by the Velociti protocol on
E3 Series/S3 Series nodes using Velociti even if other E3 Series/S3 Series nodes are
using CLIP Mode, as long as there are no 7100 panels in the network.

Each device address has a number of programmable options available. These include
options such as Device Type, Group, Output Group (if the device is an AOM), Description
Label, etc.

To program the device types and I/O groups for each address, select either the Input
Devices (all sensors and monitor modules) or Output Devices (all output modules) icon from
the Project Explorer 56 .

The entry screens for these types are very similar. The main difference is the list of device
types that are available on each entry screen.

See Input Devices 483 and Output Devices 498 for programming information on these entry
screens.

After completing SLC devices and groups entries, continue to "Entering Labels and
modifying default settings for SLC devices"
7.1.3 Entering labels and modifying default settings for loop devices
To enter labels for each loop device, select either the Input Devices (all sensors and AMM's)
or Output Devices (all AOM's) icon from the Project Explorer 56 .

To enter a label or modify the global default settings for any device, select the appropriate
device from the grid. Labels may be entered for each address in the description label entry
field. Labels can be up to 40 characters in length.

Other fields can also can be modified by address on the entry grid. Click on the following
help links to view programming information for the various device types.

Input Devices 483

Output Devices 498

For a description of the Group I/O concept, see Input/Output Groups

7.1.4 Downloading System Configuration
In order to perform a configuration download to the system, a connection must be made
between the RS-232 port on the PC/Laptop to either the RJ11 connector of any INI-7100
node or to the serial port on an S3 Series FACP, NGA, ANX-SR, ANX-MR or ILI-E3 Series
node that may be present in the system before attempting to download. If an S3 Series
FACP, ANX-SR or ANX-MR is available, the Ethernet port may also be used for downloads
via TCP/IP.

NOTE: Downloads to Standalone 7100 panels or Standalone E3 Series systems may only
be made via the panel's local serial port. Downloads to Standalone S3 Series system may
be made via the panel's local serial port or its Ethernet port.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

444 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

The following options on the Download screen are applicable to configuration downloads:

Port Options -
Select whether the download should be made via TCP/IP (Ethernet) or RS-232 (Comm).
This option is available only when the selected Gateway is an ANX or S3 Series FACP.

NOTE: It is not possible to download to INI-7100 nodes via Ethernet.

Select Comm Port -

Select the serial port to be used to connect to the system. Available COM ports range from
COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection option is also available. If selected, the
auto-detection will attempt to determine which of the PC's serial ports is connected to an
appropriate node. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct serial port it will be
necessary to manually select the correct port. This selection field is unavailable if the user
has opted to connect to the system via TCP/IP (Ethernet).

Enter IP Address -
If the user has opted to connect to the system via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the
IP address of the S3 Series FACP, ANX-SR or ANX-MR that is connected to the system.
This selection field is unavailable if the user has opted to connect via RS-232 (Comm).

Download Gateway -
You must select whether your computer is connected to an INI-7100 node, an S3 Series
FACP, an ILI-E3 Series node/NGA or to an ANX. For 7100 Standalone, S3 Series
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects, this field is not available since the PC must be
connected directly to the panel. An auto-detection option is also available. If the
auto-detection fails to determine the correct download gateway the download gateway
selection must be made manually.

NOTE: In order to download to S3 Series or E3 Series nodes such as the NGA and the
ILI-MB-E3 via RS-232, you MUST connect your computer to the serial port of an
E3-compatible node. All other node types can be downloaded from either an INI-7100 or
an E3-compatible node. All node types may be downloaded via the ANX's RS-232 port or
Ethernet port.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

Show CAM Memory Usage -

If this option is selected, CAMWorks will display a screen indicating how much of the
available CAM memory is being used by the current configuration after all of the CAMs for
the current node have been translated.

Save Configuration In Binary Format -

This option, intended only for diagnostic use, saves a binary file containing an exact image
of the target node's configuration database. This option should only be used at the
discretion of Gamewell-FCI Technical Support 932 personnel.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 445

Select Application Type To Download -

In this section of the screen, CAMWorks presents several options for selecting what data to
download to the target panel. In the case of downloading configuration data to the target
panel, the "Configuration" option button must always be selected. The following options
appear when the user elects to perform a configuration download:

Send CAMs - When selected, CAMWorks will download CAMs to the selected node.
Send Device Labels / CAM Text (NGA nodes only) - When selected, CAMWorks
will download SLC device labels or CAM Text messages to the selected node.
Send Virtual Switch Labels (S3 Series FACP and ANX nodes only) - When
selected, CAMWorks will download Virtual Switch labels to the selected node.
Send Configuration - When selected, CAMWorks will download the configuration to
the selected node.
Download Screen Saver (NGA Only) - When selected, CAMWorks will download
images to the NGA for use as a screen saver.
Download Logo (NGA Only) - When selected, CAMWorks will download a user
supplied image that will be displayed on the System Normal screen.

Download -
Click on this button to begin the download. The user will be prompted to enter the system
Level 4 access code before the download will begin. If all goes well, the Download process
will continue until completed. The panel will reset following a successful download.

NOTE: If the system has not been previously configured, you should enter the system
default level 4 password. If a custom level 4 password has already been downloaded to
the panel, then that code should be entered instead.

Close -
Click on this command button to exit this screen.

Validation -
Click on this button to open the Program Validation 49 screen to scan the current project for
known types of configuration errors.

7100 Upload -
Click on this button upload a configuration from a 7100 panel. This function is only available
for 7100 Standalone projects. See this page 870 for more information.
7.1.5 Printing/Viewing configuration data tables
There are two options available for printing configuration files in CAMWorks. To print all
reports at once, right-click the current node icon in the Project Explorer 56 and select Print
Node. To view or print individual reports, click on the current node icon in the Project
Explorer 56 to bring up the Report Viewer window. In this screen, any available report can
be selected for viewing or printing.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 446 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

7.2 E3 Series - How Do I?

7.2.1 Include Output in system General Output List
To place NAC1, NAC2, or Municipal circuit in a General Output List, select the NAC Settings
468 icon in the Project Explorer 56 . In the data entry grid there are checkboxes for each of

the General Output Lists. To assign an output to a list, Click the checkbox to select that
item.

To place an AOM in a General Output List, select the Output Devices 498 icon from Project
Explorer 56 and follow the same procedure outlined above.

7.2.2 Assign specific input to output relationships

To assign specific outputs to be activated by certain initiating devices, Input/Output Groups
must be used.

By assigning individual inputs and outputs to groups the user is able to create relationships
between these groups.

Input devices can be assigned to as many as four input groups (group 1-99, 300-499) in the
Input Devices screen.

SLC output devices may be assigned to as many as four CAM controlled group (group
125-224, 500-599) in the Output Devices screen.

Built-in outputs, such as the Notification Appliances and the Municipal Circuit may be
assigned to as many as four CAM controlled group (group 125-224, 500-599) in the NAC
Settings screen.

NOTE: The E3 Series and S3 Series FACPs do not have any direct linkage
between input groups and output groups. All custom input/output relationships
must be done through Conditional Action Maps (CAMs) 21 .
7.2.3 Create a custom display banner for panel
The System ID Label appears on the panel display when the system is in "System Normal"
condition. This label will also appear as a header for any event report that originates from
this node. Any node that prints the event through it's serial port will include this information.

The System ID Label is configured in the Node Summary 57 screen, which is called System
Overview for non-networked projects. Enter the label text in the System ID Label text box.
This label can be up to 19 characters in length and may not be blank. Click on the Save
button to save the entry.
7.2.4 Create my own SLC device types
The E3 Series and S3 Series allow the user to define up to forty User Defined device types.
The first ten are 7100 compatible User Defined Device Types and are restricted to AMM
modules only. The remaining User Defined Device Types allow much greater flexibility.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 447

The User Defined Device Types are configured on a project-level instead of the node-level.
To access these settings, you must access the User Defined Types screen, which may be
found in the Project Globals 35 > Network Settings 35 > User Defined Types 36 tab in The
Ribbon 27 , or by accessing the User Defined Types 62 icon, which is under the Network
Settings 61 icon under Project Globals 61 in the Project Explorer 56 .
7.2.5 Disable downloading for a particular SLC address?
Some projects may have to be completed in phases. CAMWorks allows the user to
configure all of the points in the system and download only those devices that are physically
present in the system at any given time.

The Input Devices and Output devices screens contain an Active field. The Active field
contains an icon that may be toggled by double-clicking or by pressing the space bar when
the field has the focus (the background of the field will be highlighted when the field has the
focus). The icon itself will turn green to indicate that that address is active, or gray to
indicate that the address is inactive. When downloading a configuration, the inactive
devices will be skipped. When the inactive devices are ready to be downloaded, just toggle
the Active icons back to green, and they will be sent to the panel.
7.2.6 Disable DACT-E3
If the DACT-E3 is present in the system, the DACT Settings screen can be used to
configure the DACT-E3. In CAMWorks, the DACT-E3 is enabled automatically. To disable
the DACT-E3, Select the DACT Settings screen under the ILI-MB-E3 or ILI95-MB-E3 icon in
the Project Explorer 53 . Then, uncheck the Enable DACT checkbox. After completing entry,
click on the Save button. The DACT-E3 should now be disabled.

NOTE: If the Enable DACT option is unchecked, the DACT-E3 is not supervised, and no
event transmissions are attempted. This option must be set to Off (unchecked) for nodes
with no DACT-E3 present.

7.2.7 View selected reports in a window

To view or print individual reports for the current node, select the node's icon in the Project
Explorer 56 . A Report Viewer window will appear in the main area 53 . Select the report of
interest from the drop-down list and then click the Show Report command button.

This feature displays the reports exactly as they will be printed. If the report contains multiple
pages, you can move among the pages by clicking on the Move Next > and the Move
Previous < arrows located at the top of the screen.

To print the report, click on the Printer icon ( ) on the toolbar at the top of the Report
Viewer window.
7.2.8 Export configuration in a different format
CAMWorks allows the user to export data files in different formats. For example, if you
would like to export a file in a Word For Windows format, select node's icon in the Project
Explorer 56 . A Report Viewer window will appear in the main area 53 of the screen. Select
the report of interest from the grid by placing a check mark in the selection field next to the
desired report and then click on the Show Report command button. The selected report will
appear on the screen. To export this document in the chosen format, click on the Export icon

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 448 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

(disk icon, ) at the top of the screen. Select the format option from the list of available
options and click OK to create the file.

CAMWorks also includes a method of performing a direct export to a Microsoft Excel file.
See this page 50 for more information.
7.2.9 Create Zone Codes
NOTE: These settings apply only to the ILI-MB-E3.

Zone Coding allows an FACP to produce a distinct coded pattern on it's NAC outputs, based
upon the particular input device or cross zone that caused the alarm condition.

The E3 Series supports up to 63 different codes, each of which may be configured for any
pattern of two, three, or four digits. The digits may range from 1 to 14 pulses. After the
necessary codes are entered in the Zone Code screen (which can be accessed via the Zone
Code icon under the current node's icon in the Project Explorer 56 ), they can be associated
with individual input devices and cross zones in the appropriate entry screen (i.e. Input
Devices and Cross Zones). Multiple inputs may be assigned to run the same code, if
desired, or each input may have a unique code (up to a limit of 63 different codes).

To set the pulses for a particular zone code, simply select the digit in the entry grid and
choose the appropriate number of pulses for each digit from the drop-down list.
7.2.10 Setup a cross zone
The E3 Series provides up to 30 cross zones. There are two types of cross zones available.
One type is groups cross zoning, and the other is point cross zoning.

Point Cross Zone – A Point Cross Zone is a collection of individual points configured into a
virtual cross zone group. Point Cross Zoning provides a two-stage fire alarm condition
where the first alarm in the virtual group initiates an Action condition. The second stage
alarm is triggered when the number of alarms in the virtual cross zone group has reached a
pre-set trigger level (user programmable).

Point Cross Zone Programming:

1.) In the Cross Zone screen, select the desired Cross Zone by clicking on the cross
zone number on the left.
2.) Click on the "..." button under the "Config" column to assign devices to the cross
zone. Click Save and then Close when done.
3.) A selection window will open that will display all devices on the current node that are
eligible to be used for cross zoning. Devices may be selected by placing a check
mark in the selection field (labeled "Sel").
4.) Click the Add button to add the devices to the cross-zone. Devices are removed
from the grid when they are added to the cross zone. Devices can be removed from
the cross zone later if desired.
5.) Click Close to dismiss the Add Devices window.
6.) Select the desired options for each virtual cross zone group. See this page 503 for
more information.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 449

Group Cross Zone – The E3 Series system provides group cross zoning by assigning Input
Groups on S3 Series FACP, ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series nodes directly to a cross
zone. The total number of point cross zone and group cross zone virtual groups is thirty
groups in any mixture. The system will increment the trigger count when any of the
associated input groups are activated.

NOTE: If an individual Cross Zone input is non-latching, each time it activates it will
increase the trigger count. This means that if the input activates, restores and re-activates
it will increment the trigger count twice.

Group Cross Zone Programming:

1.) In the Cross Zone screen, select the desired Cross Zone by clicking on the cross
zone number on the left.
2.) Select the "Group" Cross zone type for each cross zone that is being used as a
group cross zone.
3.) Click on the "..." button under the "Config" column .
4.) Assign the desired Input Groups to the Cross Zone. Click Save and then Close
when done.

NOTE: Both a node and a group number must be specified. The node must be an S3
Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 or ILI95-S-E3.

NOTE: The selected input groups must have devices assigned to it before configuring
cross zoning.

NOTE: Only certain device types are eligible for cross zoning. See the following pages
for information about compatible device types:

S3 Series (System Sensor) Device Types 294

S3 Series (Apollo) Device Types 188

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 545

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Module Device Types 565

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 426

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Element Device Types 429

NOTE: Verification and PAS cannot be mixed with Cross Zoning.

3.) Set the desired trigger level for the cross zone.
4.) Select the desired options for each virtual cross zone group. See this page 503 for
more information.
5.) Click Save to save all of the changes.

NOTE: If a system is to use both by group and by point cross zoning, input devices must
not be shared by both types of cross zoning as this could lead to unexpected results.

Typically, a general fire alarm is activated when the configured trigger level is met.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 450 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

However, the response to the Cross Zone activation is programmable via the Configure
Cross Zones screen. Regardless of user programming, the node will set bits in its
associated extended system status map for a Pre-alarm on a cross zone and for a Cross
Zone activation.
7.2.11 Configure Custom Responses for Multi-criteria Sensors
The E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 and ILI-S-E3) supports three types of multi-criteria sensors (MCS-
Acclimate2/MCS-Acclimate2F, MCS-4-Warn and MCS-COF). Previously, the E3 Series
system offered fixed response types for each of these device types. For example, the
Acclimate Dual device type provided a non-latching Supervisory response to smoke and
latching Alarm response to heat or heat and smoke. Beginning with ILI V3.2 firmware (and
CAMWorks V3.20), the system now offers a much greater degree of customization (called
profiles). These profiles allow users to define how the system should respond to smoke,
heat or CO (MCS-COF only) and whether or not those responses should be latching.
Creating multi-criteria sensors with customized response characteristics is a multi-step
process. Here is how to get started creating your very own profiles.

1. Go to the User-define Device Types 36 screen.

a. Choose an unused device type (numbered from 90 to 127).
b. Make sure the Device Protocol is “System Sensor”.
c. In the “User Defined Device Type” field, select one of the following options:
i. Acclimate Sensor (MCS-Acclimate2 (CLIP Protocol only) and MCS-Acclimate2F (
CLIP Protocol & Velociti Protocol))
ii. 4-Warn Sensor (MCS-4-Warn (Velociti Protocol only)
iii. Photo/CO Sensor (MCS-COF (Velociti Protocol only)
d. In the “System Response Type” field, you must choose the following response type:
"Multi-criteria Sensor Profile Response”.
e. Assign a unique device type description that makes sense. This is how the device type
will be identified in CAMWorks and in event reports generated by the panel.
f. Save the changes. You’re done with the User Defined Device Types screen.
2. Open the desired ILI-MB-E3 or ILI-S-E3 node icon from the Project Explorer tree.
3. Select the “Multi-criteria Sensor Profiles 477 ” icon from the tree.
a. The new “Multi-criteria Sensor Profiles” screen will appear. There are 16 total profiles
that can be assigned per ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3. This screen comprises a grid that
contains the following settings:
b. Smoke Response – Choose the response that the panel should take when the sensor
detects smoke. Set to “No Response” if the panel should not produce any response to
smoke.
c. Activate General Outputs for Smoke Response – Enable this option if you want the
panel to activate appropriate general output list(s) when the sensor detects smoke.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 451

Leave disabled if no general output list response to smoke is desired.

d. Latch Smoke Response – Enable this option if you want the response to smoke to
latch (in other words, the event can be restored only by resetting the system). Leave
this option disabled if you want the panel’s response to smoke to self-restore if the
concentration of smoke dissipates below the configured sensitivity level.
e. CO Response – Choose the response that the panel should take when the sensor
detects carbon monoxide. Set to “No Response” if the panel should not produce any
response to carbon monoxide.

NOTE: Only MCS-COF detectors will produce a carbon monoxide response,

regardless of this setting.

f. Activate General Outputs for CO Response – Enable this option if you want the
panel to activate appropriate general output list(s) when the sensor detects carbon
monoxide. Leave disabled if no general output list response to smoke is desired.
g. Latch CO Response – Enable this option if you want the response to carbon monoxide
to latch (in other words, the event can be restored only by resetting the system). Leave
this option disabled if you want the panel’s response to carbon monoxide to self-restore
if the concentration of carbon monoxide dissipates below the device’s carbon monoxide
detection threshold.
h. Heat Response – Choose the response that the panel should take when the sensor
detects heat. Set to “No Response” if the panel should not produce any response to
heat.
i. Activate General Outputs for Heat Response – Enable this option if you want the
panel to activate appropriate general output list(s) when the sensor detects heat.
Leave disabled if no general output list response to heat is desired.
j. Latch Heat Response – Enable this option if you want the response to heat to latch (in
other words, the event can be restored only by resetting the system). Leave this option
disabled if you want the panel’s response to heat to self-restore if the ambient
temperature drops below the device’s built-in alarm threshold.
k. Description – You can optionally add a description to help describe what this profile is
used for. This is not downloaded to the panel.
l. Save the changes once you’ve finished defining your settings. You’re done with the
Multi-criteria Sensor Profiles screen.
4. Open the “Input Devices” screen.
a. Click “Add” to add new sensors to the configuration.
i. Select a device type that was created in Step 1 from the “Device Type” drop-down
list.
ii. Select Loop 1 or Loop 2 to choose which SLC to add the devices to.
iii. Select one or more addresses to add to the system.
iv. In the “Event Profile” selection, you may either type in the profile number (if known)
or you may click the browse ( ) button to select the profile.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

452 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

v. If you click on the browse button, the following window appears:

vi. This window displays all of the profiles on this ILI-MB-E3 or ILI-S-E3 and their
configured settings.
1. Click anywhere in any of the rows to select a profile. The selected profile will
become highlighted.
2. Click “OK” to make your selection. The window will close at that point.
vii. Click “Add” to add the new device(s) to the configuration. The “Add Device” window
will close.
b. Once the device(s) have been added, all configuration settings become available.
i. The “event profile” may be changed by typing in the profile number in the “Event
Profile” field or by using the browse ( ) button to select the profile using the
selection window as shown above.
ii. The Input Groups behave differently for devices configured for profile response. The
basic rules for the behavior of the inputs groups are as follows:
1. The Trouble Bit associated with Input Group 1 activates whenever there is a
trouble on the device.
2. The Alarm Bit associated with Input Group 1 activates when the sensor detects
smoke and deactivates when the smoke dissipates (if the smoke response is
configured to be non-latching).
a. If the profile is configured to provide no response to smoke, the Alarm Bit
associated with Input Group 1 will activate when the sensor detects heat and
deactivates when the ambient temperature drops below the device’s heat
threshold (if the heat response is configured to be non-latching).
b. If the profile is configured to provide no response to heat, the Alarm Bit
associated with Input Group 1 will not be affected.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 453

3. The Alarm Bit associated with Input Group 2 activates when the sensor detects
carbon monoxide and deactivates when the carbon monoxide level dissipates (if
the carbon monoxide response is configured to be non-latching).
a. If the profile is configured to provide no response to carbon monoxide, the
Alarm Bit associated with Input Group 2 will activate when the sensor detects
heat and deactivates when the ambient temperature drops below the device’s
heat threshold (if the heat response is configured to be non-latching).
b. If the profile is configured to provide no response to heat, the Alarm Bit
associated with Input Group 2 will not be affected.
4. The Alarm Bit associated with Input Group 3 will activate when the sensor detects
heat and deactivates when the ambient temperature drops below the device’s heat
threshold (if the heat response is configured to be non-latching).
a. If the profile is configured to provide no response to heat, the Alarm Bit
associated with Input Group 3 will not be affected.
5. The Alarm Bit associated with Input Group 4 will activate when the sensor detects
heat and deactivates when the ambient temperature drops below the device’s heat
threshold (if the heat response is configured to be non-latching).
a. If the profile is configured to provide no response to heat, the Alarm Bit
associated with Input Group 4 will not be affected.
6. Input Group 4 may be assigned to a Disable Type Tag (600-699) or a Smoke
Disable Type Tag (700-899) to disable the smoke response only.
iii. Click on “Save” once you've completed your configuration changes.
5. It is highly recommended to run Program Validation 49 to check your configuration to
make sure that your devices and device types are properly configured.
6. Download the configuration changes to the panel.
7. Test the configured devices to make sure that they are working the way that you have
intended them to operate. You can modify any of the configuration settings at any time
should changes be necessary.

7.3 E3 Series - Configuration Screens

7.3.1 Passwords
NOTE: This screen appears under the ILI-MB-E3 only for E3 Series Standalone projects.
For networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Network Settings 61 \
Passwords 61 .

The system allows four levels of password access to prevent unauthorized modification of
critical system functions. In addition, the system supports a maximum of five different
passwords for each of the four access levels to provide for unique identification of up to five
different users. Each password must be numeric and may range from (000001 - 999999).
The value of 000000 is not allowed.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 454 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

There are four levels of access granted by the system. These are Level 1, Level 2, Level 3,
and Level 4. Level 4 grants the user the greatest amount of access, while Level 1 grants the
least amount of access.

NOTE: The Level 4 Password may not be set to any of the standard default passwords
(111111, 222222, 333333 or 444444.)

There are five different users available, labeled as Users 1-5. This allows the user to create
five different sets of passwords (one for each access level.) The system's history log will
indicate which user gained access to the system when unique passwords are assigned to
each user.

NOTE: Even though CAMWorks requires the user to assign a non-default Level 4
password, it is still highly recommended to change the remaining system passwords to
non-default values.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.2 User Defined Types

NOTE: This screen appears under the ILI-MB-E3 only for E3 Series Standalone projects.
For networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Network Settings 61 \User
Defined Types 62 .

The E3 Series and S3 Series FACPs provides a great degree of flexibility for user defined
device types. In the past, the User Defined AMM Types in the 7100 were configured at the
individual node level. This function has been combined with the E3 Series/S3 Series User
Defined Device Types into one configuration screen.

Device types 48-55 are reserved for 7100 User Defined Device Types. In the grid, the
device type number is highlighted in yellow for these device types.

NOTE: These device types can be used with 7100 nodes, ILI-E3 Series nodes and S3
Series (System Sensor) FACPs, but not with ILI95-E3 Series nodes or S3 Series (Apollo)
FACPs.

The options available for each user defined type are as follows:

SLC Type - Select whether this device type should be a System Sensor or Apollo device
type. This selection may or may not be available, depending on the nodes that are present
in the current project.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 455

NOTE: This setting is fixed to "System Sensor" for the 7100 User Defined Device Types.

User Defined Device Type - This identifies what the physical device type is for this user
defined type. The following device types are available:

Available User Defined Device Types for the 7100:

User Defined Device Type Description Allowed Response Types

AMM Module Addressable Monitor See AMM Modules.

Module, used to monitor any
normally open contact
device.

Available Physical Device Types for the ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3 and S3 Series (System Sensor)
FACPs:

User Defined Device Description Allowed in CLIP Allowed Response

Type Mode Types
No Device Used to indicate Yes See No Device.
there is no device
type configured.
Ion Sensor Analog/addressable Yes See Ion Sensors.
Ion smoke detectors,
such as the ASD-
IL2F.
Photo Sensor Analog/addressable Yes See Photo Sensors.
Photoelectric smoke
detectors, such as
the ASD-PL2F.
Thermal Sensor Analog/addressable Yes See Thermal
Thermal sensors, Sensors.
such as the ATD-L2F
(standard
temperature), ATD-
HL2F (high
temperature) or
ATD-RL2F (rate of
rise).
Acclimate Sensor Analog/addressable Yes * See Acclimate
multi-criteria sensor, Sensors.
such as MCS-
Acclimate2F.
AMM Module Addressable Monitor Yes See AMM Modules.
Module, used to

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

456 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

monitor any normally

open contact device.
Signal Module Notification Yes See NAC Modules.
Appliance/Speaker
Circuit Control
Module, such as the
AOM-2SF or MMO-
6SF
Form-C Module Form-C Dry Contact Yes See Form-C Modules
Module, such as .
AOM-2RF or MMO-
6RF.
CLIP Laser Sensor Analog/Addressable Yes See CLIP Laser
High Sensitivity Sensors.
NOTE: This device Photoelectric smoke
type is supported in detectors, such as
both Velociti and ASD-LS.
CLIP modes, even
though the device
itself only supports
CLIP mode.
Photo/Thermal Analog/addressable Yes See Photo/Thermal
Sensor Photoelectric/ Sensors.
Thermal sensor,
such as ASD-PTL2F.
Zone Module Addressable Monitor Yes See Zone Modules.
Module, such as
AMM-4SF, used to
monitor certain two-
wire conventional
smoke detectors.
See Gamewell-FCI
Compatibility
Addendum (P/N:
9000-0427) for more
details.
Manual Station Addressable Manual Yes See Manual Station
Module Station, such as the Modules.
MS-7AF.
Intelligent Beam Analog/addressable No See Intelligent Beam
Detector Beam Photoelectric Detectors.
Smoke Detector,
such as ABD-2F.
Vel Laser Sensor Analog/Addressable No See Verlociti Laser
High Sensitivity Sensors.
Photoelectric smoke
detectors.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 457

4-Warn Sensor Velociti Series No See 4-Warn Sensors

combination smoke, .
carbon monoxide,
temperature and
flame detector.
Photo/CO Sensor Velociti Series multi- No See Photo/CO
criteria sensor, with Sensors.
carbon monoxide
detection and
reporting, such as
the MCS-COF.
Intelligent FAAST System Sensor No See Intelligent
Sensor Intelligent Aspirating FAAST Sensors.
(Single-Channel) Smoke Detector
Intelligent FAAST System Sensor No See Intelligent
Sensor Intelligent Multi- FAAST Sensors.
(Multi-Channel) Channel Aspirating
Smoke Detector

Available User Defined Device Types for the ILI95-MB-E3, ILI95-S-E3 and S3 Series
(Apollo) FACPs:

User Defined Device Type Description Allowed Response Types

No Device Used to indicate there is no See No Device.
device type configured.
Ion Sensor Analog/addressable Ion See Ion Sensors.
smoke detectors, such as
the XP95-I.
Optical Sensor Analog/addressable See Photo Sensors.
Photoelectric smoke
detectors, such as the XP95-
P.
Temperature Sensor Analog/addressable Thermal See Thermal Sensors.
sensors, such as the XP95-
T.
Multi-Sensor Analog/addressable multi- See Multi-Sensors.
criteria sensor, such as the
XP95-M.
PID-95 Point Identification Device See Point Identification
used to monitor any normally Devices.
open contact device.
SCE-95 Signal Control Element used See Signal Control Elements
to control Notification .
Appliance Circuits.
RCE-95 Relay Control Element that See Relay Control Elements.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 458 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

provides one Form-C Dry

BCE-95
MS-95 / MS-95 T
CZI-95 (Non-Interrupting)
CZI-95 (Interrupting)
Contact.
Building Control Element See Building Control
that provides two Form-C Elementsol Elements.
Dry Contacts for On/Off/Auto
(HOA) operation.
Addressable Manual Station. See Manual Station
Elements.
Conventional Zone Interface, See Conventional Zone
used to monitor certain two- Interfaces.
wire conventional smoke
detectors. See Gamewell-
FCI Compatibility Addendum
(P/N: 9000-0427) for more
details.
Conventional Zone Interface, See Conventional Zone
used to monitor certain two- Interfaces.
wire conventional smoke
detectors. See Gamewell-
FCI Compatibility Addendum
(P/N: 9000-0427) for more
details.

System Response Type - Selects the desired response to an activation from this device
type. See tables above for information about the available response types for each physical
device type.

Description - The text that will be associated with this User Defined Type. This will be used
for both on-screen and printed event reports. This description may be up to fourteen
characters in length.

Silenceable - This option applies only when the physical device type is set to Signal Module,
Form-C Module, SCE-95 or RCE-95. This indicates whether this device type can be
silenced or not.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.3 Miscellaneous
NOTE: This screen appears under the ILI-MB-E3 only for E3 Series Standalone projects.
For networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Network Settings 61 \
Miscellaneous 66 .

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 459

The following system-wide settings are configured through the Miscellaneous screen:

Trouble Reminder - If this option is enabled then acknowledged trouble events will be
periodically "unacknowledged". This means that the system's buzzer will be turned back on
and the System Trouble LED will blink as if a new trouble condition were being reported.

Multiple Trouble Acknowledge - Turning this option on will allow up to ten trouble
conditions to be acknowledged with one Trouble Acknowledge command.

Action Condition Acknowledged By - This configuration option selects whether the

Trouble Acknowledge button is used to acknowledge Action (pre-alarm) conditions or the
Alarm Acknowledge button is used to acknowledge Action conditions. This setting defaults
to the Alarm Acknowledge button. This setting is not available when 7100 nodes are
present in the network.

Walk Test Timeout - The Walk Test timeout will cause the system to automatically cancel
the Walk Test mode if it isn't manually turned off. This value may be (30, 60, 90, 120 or 180
Minutes) .

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.4 Display Priorities

NOTE: This screen appears under the ILI-MB-E3 only for E3 Series Standalone projects.
For networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Network Settings 61 \Display
Priorities 67 .

NOTE: These settings apply to S3 Series FACP, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3 Series
and NGA nodes only.

The S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3 Series and NGA displays conform to UL 864 9th
edition and UL 2572 1st edition event display requirements. The most significant change
from the 7100 display is that concurrent events do not automatically scroll. Instead, the
display always shows the earliest (oldest) event of the highest priority present in the system
(or region), unless the user scrolls the events manually.

Since events do not scroll, the behavior of the display depends entirely on what priority the
system assigns to each event. These priorities can be modified in this screen. Note that
this only configures how events are DISPLAYED. To configure a different system response,
a User Defined Type 36 should be used instead.

Each system condition listed has both an Acknowledged and Unacknowledged priority.
Typically, the Unacknowledged priority for each condition is of a higher priority than its
Acknowledged priority. The system has e ight different priority levels, ranging from Level 1

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

460 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

to Level 8. Level 1 is the lowest priority level, while Level 8 is the highest priority level.

The following system conditions may be assigned new display priorities:

ALARM - Fire Alarm Conditions

CO/GAS ALARM - CO/Gas alarm conditions.
MNS ALARM - Mass Notification alarm conditions.
ACTION - Action (pre-alarm) Conditions. This applies to multi-level devices, Cross Zones
and other pre-alarm conditions.
SUPERVISORY- All Supervisory Off-Normal and Tamper conditions.
MNS SUPERVISORY - All Supervisory Off-Normal and Tamper conditions related to
mass-notification devices.
TROUBLE - All System Trouble conditions.
MNS TROUBLE - All System Trouble conditions conditions related to mass-notification
devices

NOTE: The priority settings for MNS Alarm, MNS Trouble and MNS Supervisory only
affect NGA nodes.

These settings are automatically configured for ALL S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3
Series and NGA nodes in the system, therefore all S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3 Series
and NGA nodes will have the same set of display priorities once they have all been
downloaded.

To change a priority, click and drag its slider and move it to the left or to the right. Moving a
slider to the right gives the event a higher priority, while sliding it to the left gives it a lower
priority. The currently selected priority level is displayed to the right of the slider.

NOTE: To revert all Display Priority settings to their UL approved settings, click either
the "MNS Overrides Fire" or "Fire Overrides MNS" button at the top of the window.

NOTE: These settings should be left to their default settings, unless there is a
specific need to change them.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 461

7.3.5 Night/Weekend/Holiday Schedule

NOTE: This screen appears under the ILI-MB-E3 only for E3 Series Standalone projects.
For networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Regional Settings 70 \Night/
Weekend/Holiday Schedule 70 .

In E3 Series systems, you can optimize the sensitivity of the sensors for particular times
during the day, on weekends and on holidays. This can be used to increase sensitivity for
those times when a building is not in use. When the system's real-time clock reaches a
configured time or day, the system will automatically begin to use the Night Sensitivity
settings configured for each sensor. In addition, any Fire alarm that occurs during this time
will activate the General Night Alarm output list as well as both SSM bit 440 (Day Alarm or
Night Alarm) and SSM bit 441 (Night Alarm.)

NOTE: These settings affect the fire alarm response only.

Night Schedule - Select Night Start and Night Stop operation times from the drop-down
lists. During the programmed times, the sensors will operate with the defined Night
Sensitivity settings.

Weekend Schedule - Define weekend days for night sensitivity operation by checking the
appropriate days.

Holiday Schedule - Configure Holidays for Night sensitivity operation by clicking on the
calendar icon ( ). A calendar will be displayed. Select the holiday by clicking on the day of
the month. The user can move through the calendar by clicking on the arrow icons located
at the top of the calendar. The user may enter up to sixteen holidays. Dates can be cleared
by placing a check in the "Sel" column next to the appropriate holiday and clicking the Clear
button at the bottom of the window.
7.3.6 General Settings
This entry screen contains various system options that pertain to this ILI-MB-E3 or ILI-S-E3
node. The entry fields are grouped as follows:

General Settings -

RS-232 Baud Rate - Sets the baud rate (measured in bits per second)
used by this node to communicate with serial devices. Selections range
from 115,200 BPS down to 1,200 BPS.

NOTE: All Gamewell-FCI supplied software communicates with the

ILI-E3 Series at 115,200 BPS. Closing the W14 jumper or SW2-Switch
#5 on the ILI-E3 Series node sets the serial port baud rate back to
115,200 BPS overriding custom programming.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

462 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

RS-232 Printer Supervision Test Interval - As a part of the supervision of

the node's serial port, the system can print out test messages on a periodic
rate. This option allows you to change the frequency of this test from 1
hour up to 21 hours. Selecting Disable will turn this feature off.

Enable Supervision of RS-232 Port For Use With - This setting should
be set according to what type of device is normally connected to the node's
serial port. This setting should be set to "Printer" if a printer is connected
to this node's serial port and trouble reporting for printer out of paper or
printer offline conditions is desirable. Set this option to "None" if no printer
is connected.

SLC Class A - Select this if the SLC loops are wired Class A (Style 6 or
Style 7).

NOTE: If one SLC loop remains unused, you must connect the B+ and
A+ terminals as well as the B- and A- terminals of the unused SLC loop
to prevent Loop Break troubles from being reported.

PAS Night ByPass - If this setting is turned on, then devices configured
for Positive Alarm Sequence will automatically go into alarm during the
defined Night hours as well as the defined Weekend and Holiday days.

CLIP Mode - Checking this box enables the use of older FCI
analog/addressable smoke detectors and modules that use the older CLIP
protocol. This option is unchecked by default, enabling the use of Velociti
Series and SmartScan Series smoke detectors and modules. For more
information, see this page.

Supervise PM-9 Power Supply - Selecting this option will cause the
ILI-MB-E3 to supervise the PM-9 power supply. If the PM-9 is connected
to this ILI-MB-E3 via ribbon cable, the ILI-MB-E3 will supervise the PM-9
regardless of this setting.

NOTE: This setting applies only to the ILI-MB-E3.

LED Blink -

On - Checking this box will turn on the normal condition blinking for the
SLC devices LED's.

Off - Checking this box will turn off the normal condition blinking for the
SLC devices LED's.

Blink Rate - Because the Velociti series devices poll much faster than
standard SLC devices, the option exists to change the frequency of the
LED blink. Selecting 0 indicates the fastest blink rate, while 15 is the
slowest blink rate.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 463

NOTE: This option is not available when using the CLIP protocol.

Sounder Base Settings -

NOTE: The following settings only affect B200S Sounder Bases.

NOTE: These settings are not available when CLIP Mode is selected.

NOTE: In order for the following settings to take effect, the ILI-MB-E3
or ILI-S-E3 must be running V2.4-001 or later of the System Operating
Software.

Status Chirp during walk test - When enabled, B200S sounder bases
will produce a brief chirp sound when the sensor that it is connected to is
tested during walk test. If disabled, the B200S sounder bases will be
silent during walk test. This setting is independent of the "Sounder Base
Chirp Activates When" setting below and the individual sounder base chirp
settings in the Input Devices 483 screen.

Sounder base sync via SLC Loop 1 - When enabled, B200S sounder
bases on this Loop will be synchronized via commands sent by the panel
via the SLC. All three coded patterns (Temporal-3, Temporal-4 and March
Time) support being synchronized via the SLC. When disabled, the panel
does not send synchronization commands to the B200S sounder bases.

Sounder base sync via SLC Loop 2 - When enabled, B200S sounder
bases on this Loop will be synchronized via commands sent by the panel
via the SLC. All three coded patterns (Temporal-3, Temporal-4 and March
Time) support being synchronized via the SLC. When disabled, the panel
does not send synchronization commands to the B200S sounder bases.

NOTE: The B200S sounder bases also support synchronization of the

Temporal-3 coded pattern via a compatible System Sensor
synchronization module, NAC booster panel (such as the HPFF8 or
GFPS-9) or fire alarm control panel (FACP) NAC circuit. If this is being
done, the appropriate sync via SLC setting must be disabled.

Sounder Base Chirp Activates When - The B200S offers a periodic

status chirp feature. This provides local notification of non-alarm
events. This chirp is enabled for each sounder base on the Input
Devices 483 screen. There are several different conditions that may
activate the status chirp of a given sounder base. The sounder
bases may also be configured to chirp during walk test (see above).
The available settings are:

· The sounder base or the attached sensor is reporting a

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

464 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

trouble.
· The sounder base is reporting a trouble.
· The attached sensor is reporting a trouble.
· The sounder base’s address does not match its attached
sensor’s address.

Sounder Base Chirp Interval - This setting specifies how frequently the
sounder bases will chirp when the chirp feature is activated. Valid settings
range from 5 seconds to 75 seconds (in five second increments).

Delays/TimeOut -

NOTE: These delay and timing functions are only available if the NAC(s)
are NOT assigned to CAMable output groups.

NAC Cut Off Delay - This option allows the NAC circuits to be
automatically silenced after a set period of time. Note that this delay
begins after the silence inhibit delay ends. This setting may range from
No CutOff (meaning no delay is applied) to fifty (50) minutes (in five (5)
minute increments).

NOTE: This setting applies only to the ILI-MB-E3.

Silence Inhibit Delay - This setting will prevent the system from being
silenced after an alarm. This setting may range from No delay to
twenty-one (21) minutes (in two (2) minute increments).

Sequential Restart Delay - Specifies the number of seconds between

deactivation of sequential-restart AOM devices during a sequential restart.
This setting may range from No delay to twenty (20) seconds (in one (1)
second increments).

PAS Acknowledge Time - Select the time interval (in seconds) that the
panel will allow the user to acknowledge the alarm. If the fire alarm is not
acknowledged within this time interval the panel will cancel Positive Alarm
Sequence and go straight into fire alarm. This setting may range from 1 to
6553 seconds. This setting defaults to 15 seconds.

PAS Investigate Time - Select the time interval (in seconds) that the
panel will allow the user to investigate the source of the fire alarm once it
has been acknowledged. If the panel is not reset within this time interval
the system will go into fire alarm. However, if a subsequent fire alarm
occurs before this interval times out the system will go into fire alarm,
canceling the Positive Alarm Sequence. This setting may range from 1 to
6553 seconds. This setting defaults to 180 seconds.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 465

Number of Annunciators/Displays -

LCD 7100 Annunciators - This sets the number of remote LCD-7100

displays connected to this ILI-MB-E3 node. Up to five LCD-7100
annunciators may be connected to an ILI95-MB-E3.

NOTE: This setting applies only to the ILI-MB-E3.

LCD E3 Displays - This option sets the total number of LCD-E3

keypad/displays that are connected to this ILI-MB-E3 node. The system
allows a maximum of six LCD-E3 displays per ILI-MB-E3.

NOTE: This setting applies only to the ILI-MB-E3.

NOTE: LCD-SLP annunciators are configured on the Annunciators 467

screen.

Log Settings -

Enable Re-report Failed Logins - When enabled, a report of recent

access failed events will be printed to the panel's serial port upon a
successful login by a user. If the access is granted via CAMWorks, the
report will be displayed from within CAMWorks. The report will include
both the current and most recent previous access granted event as well as
all access failed events in between.

Log ASM/ANU/LCD-SLP Switch Activations - When enabled, the

system will produce a logged event when ASM-16, ANU-48 or LCD-SLP
switches on this node are activated and deactivated. These logged events
will be printed by a printer connected to this node, other nodes in the same
region as this node or on global reporting nodes, but will not be displayed.
These events can be viewed on-screen using the View Log menu.

NOTE: This setting requires all ILI and ILI95 nodes to have Version
3.2 firmware or later. All NGA nodes must have Version 3.10 firmware
or later. All ANX nodes must have Version 1.30 firmware or later. S3
Series FACP nodes require Version 1.10 firmware or later.

NOTE: Logged switch activations will not be reported on INI-7100

nodes.

NOTE: This setting is applicable to S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3 and

ILI95-MB-E3 node types only.

Multilevel Percentage -

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

466 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Alert Percentage - Sets the percent of alarm at which a multilevel Ion,

Photo or Laser sensor will issue an Alert condition.

Action Percentage - Sets the percent of alarm at which a multilevel Ion,

Photo or Laser sensor will issue an Action condition. This must be set to a
higher percentage than the Multilevel Alert Percentage.

NOTE: Click here for an important note regarding Multilevel Ion Sensors.

NOTE: Click here for an important note regarding Multilevel Laser

Sensors.
Default Verification Settings -

Smoke Detector - This option selects the default sensor verification

setting. It can be set for automatic verification (Verify) or Positive Alarm
Sequence (PAS) or neither (None). When configuring sensors, they can
be set to accept this default setting or use a setting that overrides this
default setting.

Pull Station - This option selects the default manual station verification
setting. It can be set for Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS) or no verification
(None). When configuring manual stations, they can be set to accept this
default setting or use a setting that overrides this default setting.

Zone Code Options -

NOTE: These settings apply only to the ILI-MB-E3.

Zone Code Speed - Selects the speed of the zone coding, 60 beats per
minute or 120 beats per minute.

Rounds per Zone Code - Selects how many times each code runs. This
setting can be for either three or four runs.

NACs after Last Code - This setting indicates what state the NAC circuits
will be in after the last zone code runs. This can be set to either Off or
Post Code (which allows a standard code or steady operation.) See this
page 468 for more information.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 467

7.3.7 Annunciators
The LCD-SLP is an annunciator that uses an LCD touchscreen for primary user interaction.
The system supports up to fifteen (15) supervised and fully functional LCD-SLP
annunciators (addressed 1-15) as well as unsupervised (display only) LCD-SLP
annunciators (addressed as 0). The LCD-SLP also includes five user-programmable push-
buttons (with multi-color LEDs) and three pre-defined push-buttons (Menu, Fire Drill and
Reset.)

The LCD-SLP allows access to various system functions including:

- Acknowledging alarm, trouble and supervisory conditions.

- Silencing the system.
- Resetting the nodes in its region (or all nodes in the system).
- System Configuration, Walk Test / Drill, I/O, System Clock and other system functions.

NOTE: The unsupervised, display-only LCD-SLP's are not configurable.

The Annunciators screen is used to configure the LCD-SLP annunciators connected to this
panel. On the left of the screen, is a set of buttons and check boxes that represent each of
the fifteen LCD-SLP annunciators. The right side of the screen is the primary work area that
allows configuration of the currently selected LCD-SLP.

To configure an LCD-SLP, first select the LCD-SLP addresses that are present in the
system by placing a check mark in the check box for the desired LCD-SLP addresses.

Next, select an individual LCD-SLP to configure by clicking on its associated button on the
left side of the screen. The contents of the right side of the screen will change to reflect the
current configuration settings for the selected LCD-SLP.

The right side of the screen has an image that represents the LCD-SLP. Within the image
of the LCD-SLP are five buttons that represent the five user-programmable push buttons.
Pressing one of those buttons opens the configuration settings for that specific button on the
bottom right of the screen.

The following settings pertain to the LCD-SLP itself:

Lamp Test - Selecting Yes will cause the LCD-SLP to perform a lamp test when it is reset.
Selecting No will cause the LCD-SLP to not perform a lamp test.

The following settings pertain to the selected LCD-SLP switch (selected by pressing on the
buttons that represent the LCD-SLP user-programmable push buttons):

Switch Type - This option sets the function that the switch performs. All switches are
defaulted to the "Control" option. When configured for this function, the switch will toggle its

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 468 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

associated Bit Number and can be used in CAM expressions. Each switch may be
optionally configured for an Auxiliary Function. This auxiliary function differs for each switch
and may be viewed by clicking here.

NOTE: When a switch is configured for its Auxiliary Function, it will not trigger its
associated bit number.

NOTE: When a switch is configured for its Auxiliary Function, its associated LED's will be
taken over by the Auxiliary Function and will no longer be programmable via CAMs.

NOTE: If an LCD-SLP switch is reconfigured for an Auxiliary Function, any CAMs

previously written for the LED's associated with that switch will be deleted. Before deleting
the CAMs, CAMWorks will issue a warning asking for confirmation.

Momentary - When the switch type is configured as a control switch, the switch can be
configured as a momentary switch by placing a check mark in this field. When enabled, a
switch press will cause the associated SSM bit location to go true once and then false again.

Latching - The switch may be configured for latching operation when the switch type is
configured as a control switch. When selected, the current switch state (ON or OFF) will
persist through reset.

NOTE: A switch may not be configured for both momentary and latching operation at the
same time.

Description - The user may enter up to ten characters to describe this switch. This label
will be displayed on the LCD-SLP display to identify the switch's function.

The LCD-SLP's LED's are configured via CAMs. Please see this page 510 for more
information.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.8 NAC Settings

NOTE: These settings apply only to the ILI-MB-E3.

This screen contains all settings that pertain to the panel's Notification Appliance Circuits,
the Municipal Circuit and the Coded Patterns used by the NAC's.

The following options are available for the Notification Appliance Circuits and the Municipal
Circuit:

Allow enable/disable of municipal circuit via display menus - When this option is
checked, users may manually enable or disable this node's built-in municipal circuit via the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 469

front panel menus on the LCD-SLP, LCD-E3 or NGA. This option is unchecked by default.

NOTE: Enabling this option violates UL 864 9th edition.

Silenceable - Check this option to make this output device silenceable from the front panel.
(This option is not available for the Municipal Circuit).

Coded - Check this option to enable coding for this output device. (This option is not
available for the Municipal Circuit).

MNS Dedicated - If this circuit is being used solely as a mass-notification output, enable
this option. Doing so will cause the panel to issue all trouble events from this circuit as Mass
Notification Troubles. (This option is not available for the Municipal Circuit).

NOTE: This option must be enabled for UL2572 compliance.

Sync - Check this option to enable synchronization of notification appliances connected to

this circuit. (This option is not available for the Municipal Circuit).

NOTE: NAC Circuits may not be configured for Coded and Sync operation at the same
time.

NOTE: In order to maintain UL Listing, the ILI-MB-E3 must be hardware revision K or

later and the ILI95-MB-E3 must be hardware revision D or later if the NAC Sync feature
is used.

Day Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Day Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into afire alarm condition during the defined
day period, this list of outputs will be activated.

Night Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Night Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into fire alarm condition during the defined
night period, this list of outputs will be activated.

CO/Gas Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default CO/Gas Alarm
list. When any initiating device in the system goes into a CO or Gas alarm condition, this list
of outputs will be activated.

Action - Check this option to place this output in the system default Action list. When an
input defined as Multilevel reaches the programmed "Action" threshold, this list of outputs
will be activated.

Supv (Supervisory) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Supervisory
list. When any supervisory device in the system goes into an Off Normal condition, this list of
outputs will be activated.

WT Drill (Walk Test/Drill) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Walk

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

470 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Test/Drill list. This list of outputs is activated for audible walk test or during a Fire Drill.

Trouble - Check this option to place this output in the system default Trouble list. When
there is a trouble condition in the system, this list of outputs will be activated.

Output Group(s) - The NACs and Municipal circuit can belong to as many as four output
groups. These groups range from 125 to 224 and 500-599 and are controlled by CAM logic.

NOTE: The third and fourth Output Group assignments may also be assigned to Disable
Type Tags, which range from 600 to 699. See this page 434 for more information on the
Group Disable feature.

Maufact. Sync Type - In order to synchronize notification appliances, the notification

appliance device type must be configured. The available device types are System Sensor,
Cooper-Wheelock, Gentex and Faraday.

Device Silence Option - When synchronized NAC's are silenced the system can take one
of two possible actions:

· Horn Only - Only the horns will be silenced when this option is selected.
· Horn and Strobe - Both horns and strobes will be silenced when this option is selected.

NOTE: If the Horn-only silence option is used, DO NOT silence the NAC circuit using
CAMs. Doing so will cause the circuit to completely turn off. Instead, use the
"Silenceable" checkbox to enable silencing of the NAC circuit.

NOTE: In order to maintain UL Listing, the ILI-MB-E3 must be hardware revision K or

later and the ILI95-MB-E3 must be hardware revision D or later if the NAC Sync feature
is used.

The NAC Settings screen also includes the following Coded Patterns settings:

NOTE: The Coded Patterns section of the screen will appear disabled (grayed out) if
none of the Notification Appliance Circuits are configured for coded operation.

The user may set a different coded pattern for each of five system conditions. These coded
patterns selections apply only to the onboard NACS, and only if configured for coded
operation. Control elements cannot be coded.

To choose a coded pattern, click on the drop-down list for each condition and select one of
the available options. The default setting for each condition is Steady.

The available codes are Steady, March Time 60 BPM, March Time 120 BPM, Temporal
Pattern, California Code, and Coded 4's.

The four system conditions are:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 471

Day Alarm - Selected code will run when a fire alarm condition occurs and the system is in
the Day operating hours.
Night Alarm - Selected code will run when a fire alarm condition occurs and the system is in
the Night operating hours.
Action - Selected code will run when a pre-alarm condition has been activated.
Supervisory - Selected code will run when a supervisory device goes off-normal.
CO/Gas Alarm - Selected code will run when a CO or gas alarm occurs.

NOTE: The CO/Gas Alarm coded pattern is set to Coded 4's by default. All other
coded patterns are set to steady by default.

In addition to the four system conditions listed above, a fifth condition called "Post Code" is
available. This setting determines the code that the NAC circuits will run after zone coding
has completed. Any of the standard codes listed above may be used as a post-code. The
post-code may be enabled via the "NACs After Last Code" option on the General Settings
screen.

See this page 343 for more information about Zone Code options.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.9 DACT Settings

NOTE: These settings apply only to the ILI-MB-E3.

General Settings -
Enable DACT - This setting is ON by default and enables
programming and supervision of the DACT-E3. Turn this setting
OFF if no DACT-E3 is connected. When disabled, all remaining
DACT configuration options on this screen are disabled.

NOTE: The system will report a DACT Missing trouble if this

setting is turned ON and no DACT-E3 is connected.

DACT Reporting In order to prevent "runaway" DACT situations,

Limits - such as in "Trouble/Restore" loops, event
reporting limits are normally configured to limit
the number of events that are reported by the
DACT.

Once an event reporting limit is reached the

DACT will not continue to report events until
either the panel is reset or until eight hours
have passed since the first DACT report of

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

472 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

any event type on the particular day. When the

reset or timeout occurs the panel will begin
reporting all types of events again.

The default values may be overridden as

follows:

Max # of Alarm Reports - This setting

configures the total number of fire alarm and
CO/Gas alarm reports that may be issued per
eight hour period by the DACT. This may be
set in the range from 5 to 315 reports per day
(in 5 step increments) or Unlimited. The
default setting is Unlimited.

Max Trouble - This setting configures the total

number of trouble reports that may be issued
per day by the DACT. This may be set in the
range from 5 to 155 reports per eight hour
period (in 5 step increments) or Unlimited.
The default setting is 10.

Max Supervisories - This setting configures

the total number of supervisory reports that
may be issued per day by the DACT. This
may be set in the range from 5 to 155 reports
per eight hour period (in 5 step increments) or
Unlimited. The default setting is 10.

NOTE: The DACT will not report events of a

given category once a DACT Reporting Limit
has been reached (such as 10 troubles
within an eight hour period). The DACT will
begin reporting events of a given category
again eight hours after the last event of a
given category has been reported or after
the . For example, if the "Max Trouble"
setting is set to 10, the DACT will begin
reporting troubles again eight hours after the
tenth trouble was reported.

DACT Report
Format -

Use Custom (per-device) reporting codes -

When enabled, the DACT-E3 will report the
node number and a custom three-digit code
(001-899) assigned to each point by the user.
If a device does not have a code assigned, the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 473

DACT-E3 will use the standard reporting format

for events that originate from the device.

NOTE: This setting only affects reports for

events that originate from compatible S3
Series FACP, NGA and ILI-E3 Series nodes.
Event reports from other node types will be in
the standard format.

NOTE: On standalone systems, the group

number (Tens and One's digit only) will be
reported instead of the Node number.

Use Standard (per node/per group)

reporting codes - When enabled, the
DACT-E3 will report the node number
(networked systems) or group number
(standalone systems) in addition to a one digit
event type code. This format is similar to that
used by the 7100.

NOTE: On standalone systems, only the

Tens and Ones digit of the group number is
transmitted via the DACT-E3. If more precise
reporting is required, Custom reporting codes
may be used instead.

DACT Account
Options -
There are two DACT accounts available for programming. Each
account has the following programmable options:

Format - The available formats are: SIA DCS 8, SIA DCS 20,
ADEMCO Contact ID, 4/2 1400Hz, 3/1 1400Hz, 3/1 2300Hz, and
4/2 2300 Hz. Select one from the drop-down list.

Report Alarm - Select Alarm event reporting option from

drop-down list, either OFF, CAN, or MUST.

Report Trouble - Select Trouble event reporting option from

drop-down list, either OFF, CAN, or MUST.

Report Tests - Select Test event reporting option from drop-down

list, either OFF, CAN, or MUST.

Report Supv - Select Supervisory event reporting option from

drop-down list, either OFF, CAN, or MUST.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

474 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Account Attempt - This option selects how many times the DACT
will attempt to connect with this account before giving up and
switching to the other account.

Account # - Enter the assigned account ID number in this field.

This number may be up to six digits in length.

NOTE: Not all of the supported reporting formats can actually

utilize the full six digits that the panel provides. Leading zeroes
must be entered for all account numbers that are less than six
digits. If more digits are entered than the selected reporting
format allows, only the least significant digits are transmitted.
The chart below indicates the maximum number of digits provided
for the account number in each of the supported formats.

Reporting Format Maximum Length of Account

Number
SIA DCS 8 / SIA DCS 20 6
ADEMCO Contact ID 4
4/2 1400 Hz / 4/2 2300 Hz 4
3/1 1400 Hz / 3/1 2300 Hz 3

CIC # - Enter dialing prefix for Account. The maximum number of

characters allowed is eight. This field is typically used if an access
code for a long distance carrier is required, or if certain calling
features, such as call waiting, need to be temporarily disabled
during the call. The maximum number of characters allowed is
eight.

NOTE: Besides the digits 0-9, the following special characters

may also be used:

Special Character Description

* Standard "*" key. May only be
used if Tone dialling is being
used.
# Standard "#" key. May only be
used if Tone dialling is being
used.
, Inserts a two (2) second pause
in the dialing sequence.
@ Instructs the DACT to wait until
a dial tone can be detected.
This option should only be used
if the DACT is connected to a
telephone system that is
compatible with North American
standards.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 475

Phone # - Enter phone number for the account. The maximum

number of characters allowed is sixteen.

NOTE: Besides the digits 0-9, the following special characters

may also be used:

Special Character Description

* Standard "*" key. May only be
used if Tone dialling is being
used.
# Standard "#" key. May only be
used if Tone dialling is being
used.
, Inserts a two (2) second pause
in the dialing sequence.
@ Instructs the DACT to wait until
a dial tone can be detected.
This option should only be used
if the DACT is connected to a
telephone system that is
compatible with North American
standards.

NOTE: If the MUST option is selected on both accounts for the

same report type (Alarms, Troubles, Supervisories), the
DACT-E3 will report events using both accounts. If this is not the
desired behavior, select the CAN option for one of the accounts.

DACT Phone Line

Options -
There are two DACT phone lines available for programming, Line
#1 and Line #2. There are two programmable options for each
phone line as follows:

Dialing Mode - Available options are: Tone or USA Rotary(40/60),

USA Rotary(40/60) Only, Tone Only, Tone or European
Rotary(33/67), and European Rotary(33/67) Only. Select the dialing
mode for line from the drop-down list.

Line Monitor - Line monitor is used to enable supervision of the

phone lines connected to the DACT. The DACT supervises the
phone lines in three ways:

1.) It measures the on-hook voltage coming from the phone

company.
2.) It periodically takes the phone line off-hook, measures the
off-hook voltage and puts the line back on-hook.

NOTE: The system will issue a Phone Line trouble if the DACT

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 476 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

measures an incorrect off-hook or on-hook voltage and/or is

unable to take the line off-hook.

3.) It will enable sending test signals to the configured accounts.

NOTE: The Line Monitor option must be set to ON to enable the

automatic Phone Line Test Time.

NOTE: The system makes a distinction between a "Line" and an

"Account". The system considers a "Line" to be a physical
twisted pair cable that connects the DACT to the telephone
company. The "Account" is the telephone number that the DACT
dials to report events to the designated central monitoring station.
The DACT will use either phone line to communicate to either
account.

DACT Test/Timing -
AC Fault Reporting Delay - Set number of hours to delay report of
AC failure. The delay may range from 1 to 31 hours.

Tests Per Day - Specifies the time interval between subsequent

tests after the first phone line test. 1 = 24 hours, 2 = 12 hours, 3 =
8 hours, and 4 = 6 hours. Select the number of tests per day from
the drop-down list.

First Phone Line Test - Specify the time of the first phone line
dial-out test each day. Test is enabled if either line has its Line
Monitor set to ON. Select phone line test time Hour and Minute
from drop-down lists for each item.

NOTE: The hour of the first phone line test can be configured as
follows, based on the number of tests per day.

Number of tests per day Hours allowed for first phone

line test

1 0-23
2 0-11
3 0-7
4 0-5

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.10 Zone Code

NOTE: These settings apply only to the ILI-MB-E3.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 477

Zone Coding allows an FACP to produce a distinct coded pattern on its NAC outputs, based
upon the particular input device or cross zone that caused the alarm condition.

The E3 Series supports up to 63 different codes, each of which may be configured for any
pattern of two, three, or four digits. The digits may range from 1 to 14 pulses. After the
necessary codes are entered in the Zone Code table (in the Zone Code screen), they can be
associated with individual input devices and cross zones in the appropriate entry screen (i.e.
Input Devices and Cross Zones). Multiple inputs may be assigned to run the same code, if
desired, or each input may have a unique code (up to a limit of 63 different codes).

To set the pulses for a particular zone code, simply select the digit in the entry grid and
choose the appropriate number of pulses for each digit from the drop-down list.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.11 Multi-criteria Sensor Profiles

Multi-criteria Sensor Profiles are used to configure custom responses to smoke, CO and/or
heat for Acclimate, 4-Warn and Fire/CO sensors. This is desirable in cases where the pre-
defined response types do not meet local code requirements. Configuring sensors to
provide custom responses is a multi-step process, which is detailed on this page 450 .

On this screen, there is a large grid the contains entries for sixteen "Profiles". A "profile"
defines a set of response characteristics that can be applied to one or more Acclimate, 4-
Warn and/or Fire/CO Sensors. Each profile is broken down into the following configurable
settings:

Profile Number - This number identifies the profile. It ranges from 1 to 16. This field is not
editable.

Smoke Response - Chooses the panel's response to smoke. The following options are
available:
Response Type Description

Fire Alarm Produces a fire alarm condition. Activates

RED alarm LEDs, activates general output
lists (Day or Night alarm), if configured to do
so. Reports event via DACT, if configured to
do so. Activates Alarm contacts on panel.
Supervisory Produces a supervisory off-normal condition.
Activates YELLOW "supervisory" LEDs,
activates supervisory general output list, if
configured to do so. Reports event via
DACT, if configured to do so. Activates
supervisory contacts on panel.
Fire Alarm Produces a fire alarm condition. Activates
RED alarm LEDs, activates general output

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

478 CAMWorks V3.21 Help
Action (Pre-alarm) Response
Alert (Trouble) Response
Trouble Response
Gas Alarm Response
CO Alarm Response
Carbon Monoxide (CO) Supervisory
Response
lists (Day or Night alarm), if configured to do
so. Reports event via DACT, if configured to
do so. Activates Alarm contacts on panel.
Produces a pre-alarm condition. Activates
RED alarm LEDs, activates general Action
output list, if configured to do so. Reports
event via DACT, if configured to do so.
Activates Alarm contacts on panel.
Produces a pre-alarm condition. Activates
RED alarm LEDs, activates general Action
output list, if configured to do so. Reports
event via DACT, if configured to do so.
Activates Alarm contacts on panel.
Produces a trouble condition. Activates
YELLOW trouble LEDs, activates general
trouble output list, if configured to do so.
Reports event via DACT, if configured to do
so. Activates Trouble contacts.
Produces a Gas alarm condition. Toggles
LCD backlight on LCD-E3 and LCD-7100,
activates general CO/Gas Alarm output list,
if configured to do so. Reports event via
DACT, if configured to do so. Activates
Alarm contacts on panel, if configured to do
so. On NGA displays, causes CO ALRM to
be displayed in the top title bar of the
System Status screen which blinks white text
on blue to blue text on white.
Produces a Carbon Monoxide alarm
condition. Toggles LCD backlight on
LCD-E3 and LCD-7100, activates general
CO/Gas Alarm output list, if configured to do
so. Reports event via DACT, if configured to
do so. Activates Alarm contacts on panel, if
configured to do so. On NGA displays,
causes CO ALRM to be displayed in the top
title bar of the System Status screen which
blinks white text on blue to blue text on
white.
Produces a Carbon Monoxide supervisory
condition. Toggles LCD backlight on
LCD-E3 and LCD-7100, activates general
CO/Gas Alarm output list. Reports event via
DACT, if configured to do so. Activates
Alarm contacts on panel, if configured to do
so. On NGA displays, causes CO ALRM to
© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.
 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 479

be displayed in the top title bar of the

System Status screen which blinks white text
on blue to blue text on white.

NOTE: This response type is currently

only available on ILI-E3 and ILI95-E3
Series nodes, and only in firmware
V3.2-001 and later.

No Response Performs no actions.

Non-reporting A Non-reporting device will not cause an
event on the system, however it will trigger
any input group(s) assigned to it.

WARNING For CLIP protocol Acclimate Sensors:

If the "Smoke" response for the profile is configured for "No Response", the panel will not
respond to a magnet test on the device, even if the "Heat" response is configured for a
valid response type.

Activate General Outputs for Smoke Response - When checked, the panel will activate
the appropriate general output list as a response to smoke.

Latch Smoke Response - When checked, the event generated as a response to smoke will
be latching. If unchecked, the event will restore if the level of smoke dissipates below the
sensor's configured smoke sensitivity setting.

CO Response (Fire/CO Sensors only) - Chooses the panel's response to carbon

monoxide. The following options are available:
Response Type Description

Fire Alarm Produces a fire alarm condition. Activates

RED alarm LEDs, activates general output
lists (Day or Night alarm), if configured to do
so. Reports event via DACT, if configured to
do so. Activates Alarm contacts on panel.
Supervisory Produces a supervisory off-normal condition.
Activates YELLOW "supervisory" LEDs,
activates supervisory general output list, if
configured to do so. Reports event via
DACT, if configured to do so. Activates
supervisory contacts on panel.
Fire Alarm Produces a fire alarm condition. Activates
RED alarm LEDs, activates general output
lists (Day or Night alarm), if configured to do
so. Reports event via DACT, if configured to
do so. Activates Alarm contacts on panel.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

480 CAMWorks V3.21 Help
Action (Pre-alarm) Response
Alert (Trouble) Response
Trouble Response
Gas Alarm Response
CO Alarm Response
Carbon Monoxide (CO) Supervisory
Response
Produces a pre-alarm condition. Activates
RED alarm LEDs, activates general Action
output list, if configured to do so. Reports
event via DACT, if configured to do so.
Activates Alarm contacts on panel.
Produces a pre-alarm condition. Activates
RED alarm LEDs, activates general Action
output list, if configured to do so. Reports
event via DACT, if configured to do so.
Activates Alarm contacts on panel.
Produces a trouble condition. Activates
YELLOW trouble LEDs, activates general
trouble output list, if configured to do so.
Reports event via DACT, if configured to do
so. Activates Trouble contacts.
Produces a Gas alarm condition. Toggles
LCD backlight on LCD-E3 and LCD-7100,
activates general CO/Gas Alarm output list,
if configured to do so. Reports event via
DACT, if configured to do so. Activates
Alarm contacts on panel, if configured to do
so. On NGA displays, causes CO ALRM to
be displayed in the top title bar of the
System Status screen which blinks white text
on blue to blue text on white.
Produces a Carbon Monoxide alarm
condition. Toggles LCD backlight on
LCD-E3 and LCD-7100, activates general
CO/Gas Alarm output list, if configured to do
so. Reports event via DACT, if configured to
do so. Activates Alarm contacts on panel, if
configured to do so. On NGA displays,
causes CO ALRM to be displayed in the top
title bar of the System Status screen which
blinks white text on blue to blue text on
white.
Produces a Carbon Monoxide supervisory
condition. Toggles LCD backlight on
LCD-E3 and LCD-7100, activates general
CO/Gas Alarm output list. Reports event via
DACT, if configured to do so. Activates
Alarm contacts on panel, if configured to do
so. On NGA displays, causes CO ALRM to
be displayed in the top title bar of the
System Status screen which blinks white text
on blue to blue text on white.
© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.
 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 481

NOTE: This response type is currently

only available on ILI-E3 and ILI95-E3
Series nodes, and only in firmware
V3.2-001 and later.

No Response Performs no actions.

Non-reporting A Non-reporting device will not cause an
event on the system, however it will trigger
any input group(s) assigned to it.

Activate General Outputs for CO Response (Fire/CO Sensors only) - When checked,
the panel will activate the appropriate general output list as a response to CO.

Latch CO Response (Fire/CO Sensors only) - When checked, the event generated as a
response to CO will be latching. If unchecked, the event will restore if the level of CO
dissipates below the sensor's pre-defined CO sensitivity setting.

Heat Response - Chooses the panel's response to carbon monoxide. The following options
are available:
Response Type Description

Fire Alarm Produces a fire alarm condition. Activates

RED alarm LEDs, activates general output
lists (Day or Night alarm), if configured to do
so. Reports event via DACT, if configured to
do so. Activates Alarm contacts on panel.
Supervisory Produces a supervisory off-normal condition.
Activates YELLOW "supervisory" LEDs,
activates supervisory general output list, if
configured to do so. Reports event via
DACT, if configured to do so. Activates
supervisory contacts on panel.
Fire Alarm Produces a fire alarm condition. Activates
RED alarm LEDs, activates general output
lists (Day or Night alarm), if configured to do
so. Reports event via DACT, if configured to
do so. Activates Alarm contacts on panel.
Action (Pre-alarm) Response Produces a pre-alarm condition. Activates
RED alarm LEDs, activates general Action
output list, if configured to do so. Reports
event via DACT, if configured to do so.
Activates Alarm contacts on panel.
Alert (Trouble) Response Produces a pre-alarm condition. Activates
RED alarm LEDs, activates general Action
output list, if configured to do so. Reports
event via DACT, if configured to do so.
Activates Alarm contacts on panel.
Trouble Response Produces a trouble condition. Activates

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

482 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

YELLOW trouble LEDs, activates general

Gas Alarm Response
CO Alarm Response
trouble output list, if configured to do so.
Reports event via DACT, if configured to do
so. Activates Trouble contacts.
Produces a Gas alarm condition. Toggles
LCD backlight on LCD-E3 and LCD-7100,
activates general CO/Gas Alarm output list,
if configured to do so. Reports event via
DACT, if configured to do so. Activates
Alarm contacts on panel, if configured to do
so. On NGA displays, causes CO ALRM to
be displayed in the top title bar of the
System Status screen which blinks white text
on blue to blue text on white.
Produces a Carbon Monoxide alarm
condition. Toggles LCD backlight on
LCD-E3 and LCD-7100, activates general
CO/Gas Alarm output list, if configured to do
so. Reports event via DACT, if configured to
do so. Activates Alarm contacts on panel, if
configured to do so. On NGA displays,
causes CO ALRM to be displayed in the top
title bar of the System Status screen which
blinks white text on blue to blue text on
white.

Carbon Monoxide (CO) Supervisory Produces a Carbon Monoxide supervisory

Response condition. Toggles LCD backlight on
LCD-E3 and LCD-7100, activates general
CO/Gas Alarm output list. Reports event via
DACT, if configured to do so. Activates
Alarm contacts on panel, if configured to do
so. On NGA displays, causes CO ALRM to
be displayed in the top title bar of the
System Status screen which blinks white text
on blue to blue text on white.

NOTE: This response type is currently

only available on ILI-E3 and ILI95-E3
Series nodes, and only in firmware
V3.2-001 and later.

No Response Performs no actions.

Non-reporting A Non-reporting device will not cause an
event on the system, however it will trigger
any input group(s) assigned to it.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 483

NOTE For Velociti protocol devices:

If the "Heat" response for the profile is configured for "No Response", the panel will use
the configured "Smoke" response for the profile for magnet tests. If the "Smoke"
response is also set for "No Response", the panel will issue an alarm when such a device
is magnet tested.

Activate General Outputs for Heat Response - When checked, the panel will activate the
appropriate general output list as a response to heat.

Latch Heat Response - When checked, the event generated as a response to heat will be
latching. If unchecked, the event will restore if the ambient temperature decreases below
sensor's pre-defined heat alarm threshold.

Description - The user may up to 40 characters of text to describe this profile. This is for
user reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.
7.3.12 Input Devices
The input devices screen is used to configure all sensors and monitor modules connected to
an ILI-MB-E3 or ILI-S-E3 node.

At the very top of the screen is a field labeled "Show Devices". This field allows the user to
filter the list of devices in the grid below to show all devices, all Ion sensors, all Photo
sensors, all Thermal sensors, all Multi-criteria sensors or all Monitor Modules. Once a
selection is made, CAMWorks will automatically filter the list.

Below the "Show Devices" field is a large grid that displays all of the input devices that are
configured, based on the filter setting above.

Sel - Place a check in this field and click the Delete button to remove the device from this
address. Multiple devices may be selected if desired.

Floor # - Enter the floor of the building that the device is located on. This field is used for
user reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.

Description - Enter a location description for the current address. This label will appear as
the identifier for this address when any event occurs at this address. The maximum number
of characters for this label is 40.
NOTE: Any part of the description text can be copied to the Windows clipboard by
highlighting the text and pressing Ctrl-C. The text can then be copied to the description
field of another address by selecting that field and pressing Ctrl-V.

Input Group Numbers - To modify one of the four numbers, enter the group (1-99,
300-499) number in the Group field. (Outputs assigned to this group will be shown in the list
at the bottom of the screen). If you are unclear on I/O groups concepts, see Help topic
Input/Output Functionality.

NOTE: While the E3 Series does allow for multiple input groups for each device, should
a trouble condition occur on a device only the first group assigned to the device will set
its respective Trouble SSM bit.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

484 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

WARNING: Group 0, which really means "No Group Assignment", may be assigned to
input devices. There is no bit in the System Status Map for Group 0. Therefore, no
custom I/O relationships may be created for an input device if all of its Input Group
assignments are set to Group 0.

NOTE: When an input device produces a verification, PAS, cross zone or multilevel
pre-alarm, only the first group assigned to the device will be activated. Once the device
produces a fire alarm response alarm groups will be activated (see note in blue below).
For cross zone alarms, only the first group assigned will be activated upon the
pre-alarm. The rest of the groups assigned to the device will not activate. Instead, the
groups assigned to the cross zone will activate when the cross zone goes into alarm.

NOTE: In ILI firmware V2.5-001 and later, the alarm group behavior for certain device
types has changed as follows:

For Acclimate Dual and 4-Warn Dual Devices: When a fire alarm occurs, the SSM ‘
alarm’ bit activates only for the second, third and fourth input groups assigned to the
device.

For MCS-COF Devices configured for "Dual Smoke/CO Alarm Response", including the
"Photo/CO Sens" pre-defined device type: When a fire alarm occurs, the SSM ‘alarm’ bit
activates for the first, third and fourth input groups assigned to the device.

For MCS-COF Devices configured for "Triple Smoke/Heat/CO Alarm Response",

including the "Photo/CO Trpl" pre-defined device type: When a fire alarm occurs, the
SSM ‘alarm’ bit activates for the third and fourth input groups assigned to the device.

NOTE: The group assignment fields are color coded for device types that produce the
following response types:

· CO Alarm Response (user-defined MCS-COF sensors, user-defined AMM modules)

· Gas Alarm Response (user-defined AMM modules)
· Dual Response (MCS-Acclimate2F and MCS-4-Warn sensors)
· Dual Smoke/CO Alarm Response (MCS-COF only)
· Triple Smoke/Heat/CO Response (MCS-COF only)

The colors are as follows:

Color Description
RED Groups colored RED will activate upon a fire alarm condition from the
device.
YELLOW Groups colored YELLOW will activate upon a supervisory condition from
the device.
BLUE Groups colored BLUE will activate upon a CO or Gas alarm condition
from the device.
NO COLOR If any of the other group columns are color coded for this device, the
group assigned to this column will not activate.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 485

NOTE: Action (pre-alarm) conditions and supervisory conditions will only activate the
input group assigned to first group column.

NOTE: The third and fourth Input Group assignments may also be assigned to Disable
Type Tags, which range from 600 to 699. See this page 572 for more information on the
Group Disable feature. A Disable Type Tag may only be assigned to the fourth Input
Group assignment for MCS-COF Devices configured for "Triple Smoke/Heat/CO Alarm
Response", including the "Photo/CO Trpl" pre-defined device type.

NOTE: A Disable Type Tag may only be assigned to the fourth Input Group assignment
for MCS-COF Devices configured for "Triple Smoke/Heat/CO Alarm Response",
including the "Photo/CO Trpl" pre-defined device type. Likewise, a Disable Type Tag
may only be assigned to the fourth Input Group assignment for intelligent FAAST
devices on an E3 Series FACP that are configured for the default Five-level Multi-level
Alarm Response 573 .

NOTE: Input devices configured for Five-level Multi-level Alarm Response set their
Input Group states differently from other device types in order to allow for unique
control-by-event for each of the five graduated response levels. See this page 573 for
more information.

DACT Report Code - When using custom DACT reporting codes 574 , the code entered in
this field will be reported by the DACT-E3 when using Contact ID or SIA formats. This may
range from 1-899. The node number will be transmitted in addition to this information.

Freeze - When enabled, the Thermal detector will issue a trouble condition when it senses
temperatures near 32°F (0°C). This setting is only applicable to Thermal sensors.

NOTE: This setting applies to Thermal detectors only.

Input Group Numbers - To modify one of the four numbers, enter the group (1-99,
300-499) number in the Group field. (Outputs assigned to this group will be shown in the list
at the bottom of the screen). If you are unclear on I/O groups concepts, see Help topic
Input/Output Functionality.

NOTE: While the E3 Series does allow for multiple input groups for each device, should
a trouble condition occur on a device only the first group assigned to the device will set
its respective Trouble SSM bit.

WARNING: Group 0, which really means "No Group Assignment", may be assigned to
input devices. There is no bit in the System Status Map for Group 0. Therefore, no
custom I/O relationships may be created for an input device if all of its Input Group
assignments are set to Group 0.

NOTE: When an input device produces a verification, PAS, cross zone or multilevel
pre-alarm, only the first group assigned to the device will be activated. Once the device
produces a fire alarm response alarm groups will be activated (see note in blue below).

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

486 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

For cross zone alarms, only the first group assigned will be activated upon the
pre-alarm. The rest of the groups assigned to the device will not activate. Instead, the
groups assigned to the cross zone will activate when the cross zone goes into alarm.

NOTE: In ILI firmware V2.5-001 and later, the alarm group behavior for certain device
types has changed as follows:

For Acclimate Dual and 4-Warn Dual Devices: When a fire alarm occurs, the SSM ‘
alarm’ bit activates only for the second, third and fourth input groups assigned to the
device.

For MCS-COF Devices configured for "Dual Smoke/CO Alarm Response", including the
"Photo/CO Sens" pre-defined device type: When a fire alarm occurs, the SSM ‘alarm’ bit
activates for the first, third and fourth input groups assigned to the device.

For MCS-COF Devices configured for "Triple Smoke/Heat/CO Alarm Response",

including the "Photo/CO Trpl" pre-defined device type: When a fire alarm occurs, the
SSM ‘alarm’ bit activates for the third and fourth input groups assigned to the device.

NOTE: The group assignment fields are color coded for device types that produce the
following response types:

· CO Alarm Response (user-defined MCS-COF sensors, user-defined AMM modules)

· Gas Alarm Response (user-defined AMM modules)
· Dual Response (MCS-Acclimate2F and MCS-4-Warn sensors)
· Dual Smoke/CO Alarm Response (MCS-COF only)
· Triple Smoke/Heat/CO Response (MCS-COF only)

The colors are as follows:

Color Description
RED Groups colored RED will activate upon a fire alarm condition from the
device.
YELLOW Groups colored YELLOW will activate upon a supervisory condition from
the device.
BLUE Groups colored BLUE will activate upon a CO or Gas alarm condition
from the device.
NO COLOR If any of the other group columns are color coded for this device, the
group assigned to this column will not activate.

NOTE: Action (pre-alarm) conditions and supervisory conditions will only activate the
input group assigned to first group column.

NOTE: The third and fourth Input Group assignments may also be assigned to Disable
Type Tags, which range from 600 to 699. See this page 572 for more information on the
Group Disable feature. A Disable Type Tag may only be assigned to the fourth Input
Group assignment for MCS-COF Devices configured for "Triple Smoke/Heat/CO Alarm

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 487

Response", including the "Photo/CO Trpl" pre-defined device type.

NOTE: A Disable Type Tag may only be assigned to the fourth Input Group assignment
for MCS-COF Devices configured for "Triple Smoke/Heat/CO Alarm Response",
including the "Photo/CO Trpl" pre-defined device type. Likewise, a Disable Type Tag
may only be assigned to the fourth Input Group assignment for intelligent FAAST
devices on an E3 Series FACP that are configured for the default Five-level Multi-level
Alarm Response 573 .

NOTE: Input devices configured for Five-level Multi-level Alarm Response set their
Input Group states differently from other device types in order to allow for unique
control-by-event for each of the five graduated response levels. See this page 573 for
more information.

Event Profile # - If the device type is a multi-criteria sensor (MCS-Acclimate2/2F, MCS-COF

or MCS-4-Warn), this field is enabled to allow choosing the response profile to assigned to
this device. The profile may be assigned by either typing the profile number (1-16, if known)
or using the browse ( ) button. Clicking the browse button will open a window that
displays the settings of all of the available profiles. Simply highlight one of the profiles in the
grid and click OK to make a selection.

NOTE: This is an advanced user feature. Please see this page 450 for more information
on how to properly configure this feature.

NOTE: This feature requires ILI firmware version 3.2-001 or later.

Day Sensitivity - To change the Day Sensitivity setting for a particular address, select a
new setting from the drop-down list in this field.

NOTE: For thermal detectors, this setting will change the device's temperature
threshold.

NOTE: This setting only applies to sensors.

NOTE: Sensitivity settings for intelligent FAAST devices may only be configured
through System Sensor's PipeIQ 934 utility.

NOTE: Two of the available sensitivity settings for the MCS-4-Warn and MCS-COF
sensors include an up to ten minute delay in the device's response to smoke. If other
products of combustion are detected during this time, the sensor will go into fire alarm
immediately.

NOTE: Once the CO detection element of the MCS-4-Warn or MCS-COF reaches its
lifetime limit, some of the sensitivity settings take on different meanings. The following
chart explains these differences.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

488 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

CO Detector Normal CO Detector Expired

4%/ft, delayed up to 10 minutes 3%/ft, delayed up to 30 seconds

3%/ft, delayed up to 10 minutes 3%/ft, delayed up to 30 seconds
3%/ft, no delay 3%/ft, delayed up to 30 seconds
2%/ft, no delay 2%/ft, no delay
1%/ft, no delay 1%/ft, no delay
Thermal alarm only Thermal alarm only

NOTE: This setting is unavailable for MCS-COF sensors configured to provide CO

Alarm only response.

Night Sensitivity - To change the Night Sensitivity setting for a particular address, select a
new setting from the drop-down list in this field.

NOTE: For thermal detectors, this setting will change the device's temperature
threshold.

NOTE: This setting only applies to sensors.

NOTE: Sensitivity settings for intelligent FAAST devices may only be configured
through System Sensor's PipeIQ 934 utility.

NOTE: Two of the available sensitivity settings for the MCS-4-Warn and MCS-COF
sensors include an up to ten minute delay in the device's response to smoke. If other
products of combustion are detected during this time, the sensor will go into fire alarm
immediately.

NOTE: Once the CO detection element of the MCS-4-Warn or MCS-COF reaches its
lifetime limit, some of the sensitivity settings take on different meanings. The following
chart explains these differences.

CO Detector Normal CO Detector Expired

4%/ft, delayed up to 10 minutes 3%/ft, delayed up to 30 seconds

3%/ft, delayed up to 10 minutes 3%/ft, delayed up to 30 seconds
3%/ft, no delay 3%/ft, delayed up to 30 seconds
2%/ft, no delay 2%/ft, no delay
1%/ft, no delay 1%/ft, no delay
Thermal alarm only Thermal alarm only

NOTE: This setting is unavailable for MCS-COF sensors configured to provide CO

Alarm only response.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 489

Verify - To change the verification setting for a particular address, select a new option from
the drop-down list in this field. Setting this field to "Verify" enables the automatic verification,
while setting this option to "PAS" enables Positive Alarm Sequence. Setting this field to
"None" disables verification for this device. Select "DFlt" to use the default verification
setting chosen on the General Settings 461 screen.

NOTE: Only certain device types are eligible for verification and/or PAS. See the
following pages for information about compatible device types:

S3 Series (Apollo) Sensor Device Types 188

S3 Series (Apollo) Element Device Types 191

S3 Series (System Sensor) Sensor Device Types 294

S3 Series (System Sensor) Module Device Types 314

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 545

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Module Device Types 565

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 426

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Element Device Types 429

NOTE: Verification and PAS cannot be mixed with Cross Zoning.

Day Alarm - Selecting this option will cause this input device to activate outputs that are
configured for the General Fire Alarm Day list.
NOTE: This option is not available if this input device is not a Fire Alarm input.

Night Alarm - Selecting this option will cause this input device to activate outputs that are
configured for the General Fire Alarm Night list.
NOTE: This option is not available if this input device is not a Fire Alarm input.

Supv - Selecting this option will cause this input device to activate outputs that are
configured for the General Supervisory List.
NOTE: This option is not available if this input device is not a Supervisory input.

Trouble - Selecting this option will cause this input device to activate outputs that are
configured for the General Trouble List when the device experiences a fault condition.

Action - Selecting this option will cause this input device to activate outputs that are
configured for the General Action List when the device goes into a pre-alarm condition.
NOTE: This option is not available if this input device is not a Fire Alarm input.

Zone Code - An optional coded pattern may be configured for each address. These patterns
are configured in the Zone Code entry screen. To choose a Zone code pattern, highlight the
Zone Code entry field and click on the down arrow button that appears. Select the
appropriate code from the drop-down list.
NOTE: This setting applies to the ILI-MB-E3 only.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

490 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: In order for the following settings to take effect, the ILI-MB-E3 or ILI-S-E3 must
be running V2.4-001 or later of the System Operating Software.

Application Specific Settings - Used with the MCS-4-Warn or MCS-COF sensors, this
setting allows the user to tailor the device to its environment. Under most circumstances,
the default setting is appropriate. However, some installations may desire or require
increased rejection of nuisance alarms. Choose the setting that best describes the device's
installation environment. Note that once a selection is made, CAMWorks selects a
recommended day and night sensitivity setting. These can be changed manually, if desired.

NOTE: The following settings only affect B200S Sounder Bases.

NOTE: These settings are not available when CLIP Mode is selected.

NOTE: In order for the following settings to take effect, the ILI-MB-E3 or ILI-S-E3 must
be running V2.4-001 or later of the System Operating Software.

Enable Sounder Base - Place a check mark in this field to indicate that a B200S sounder
base is present at this address. If this field is not checked, the panel will report an EXTRA
ADDRESS trouble if a B200S sounder base is present at this address. If this field is
checked and a B200S sounder base is NOT present, the panel will report a MISSING
device.

Sounder Base Volume - Choose a volume level for this sounder base. The available
selections are High (85 dBa) and Low (75 dBa). This volume setting is used at all times.

Sounder Base Group - One output group (125-224, 500-599) can be assigned to the
B200S sounder base to enable full Boolean logic control of the sounder base via CAMs 21 .
If you are unclear on I/O groups concepts, see Help topic Input/Output Functionality. If no
group is assigned (group is 0), the ON/OFF state of the sounder base will follow the state of
the sensor's LED.

NOTE: While the E3 Series does support an output group assignment for B200S
sounder bases, the sensor's first group assigned will set its respective Trouble SSM bit
should a trouble condition occur on the B200S rather than the output group assigned to
the sounder base.

Chirp - When enabled, the B200S sounder base at this address will periodically make a
brief audible chirp to annunciate local trouble conditions. This feature may be customized in
the General Settings 461 screen.

NOTE: The E3 Series system has an option to chirp the sounder bases when the
attached sensor is tested during walk test (see the General Settings 461 page). This
feature will function regardless of whether or not the sounder base is configured to chirp
for local annunciation purposes.

Sounder Base NAC Supv - Place a check mark in this field if the sounder base at this
address is powered from a NAC circuit instead of from a continuous duty power supply.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 491

NOTE: It is important that this setting be set correctly to ensure proper power supply
supervision by the B200S sounder base.

NOTE: In order for the following settings to take effect, the ILI-MB-E3 or ILI-S-E3 must
be running V3.1-001 or later of the System Operating Software.

NOTE: The following settings affect intelligent FAAST sensors only.

Air Flow Fault Threshold - This field sets the point (expressed as a percentage above and
below the nominal air flow rate) at which the panel will issue either a High Flow or Low Flow
fault. This may range from 3% to 45%, in 3% steps.

Air Flow Fault Delay - Sets the number of seconds to delay reporting an air flow fault. This
can be useful for rejecting transient changes in flow rate. This may range from 20 seconds
to 300 seconds in 20 second steps.

NOTE: Setting an air flow fault delay greater than 200 seconds may violate NFPA 72
and/or ANSI/UL 864 9th edition. Consult your Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for
local requirements.

Alert Relay - Assign an output group (125-224, 500-599) to enable full Boolean logic control
of the sensor's Alert relay via CAMs 21 . If you are unclear on I/O groups concepts, see Help
topic Input/Output Functionality. If no group is assigned (group is 0), the ON/OFF state of
the Alert Relay will follow the state of the sensor's Alert LED.

Action 1 Relay - Assign an output group (125-224, 500-599) to enable full Boolean logic
control of the sensor's Action 1 relay via CAMs 21 . If you are unclear on I/O groups
concepts, see Help topic Input/Output Functionality. If no group is assigned (group is 0), the
ON/OFF state of the Action 1 Relay will follow the state of the sensor's Action 1 LED.

Action 2 Relay - Assign an output group (125-224, 500-599) to enable full Boolean logic
control of the sensor's Action 2 relay via CAMs 21 . If you are unclear on I/O groups
concepts, see Help topic Input/Output Functionality. If no group is assigned (group is 0), the
ON/OFF state of the Action 2 Relay will follow the state of the sensor's Action 2 LED.

Alarm 1 Relay - Assign an output group (125-224, 500-599) to enable full Boolean logic
control of the sensor's Alarm 1 relay via CAMs 21 . If you are unclear on I/O groups
concepts, see Help topic Input/Output Functionality. If no group is assigned (group is 0), the
ON/OFF state of the Alarm 1 Relay will follow the state of the sensor's Alarm 1 LED.

Alarm 2 Relay - Assign an output group (125-224, 500-599) to enable full Boolean logic
control of the sensor's Alarm 2 relay via CAMs 21 . If you are unclear on I/O groups
concepts, see Help topic Input/Output Functionality. If no group is assigned (group is 0), the
ON/OFF state of the Alarm 2 Relay will follow the state of the sensor's Alarm 2 LED.

NOTE: Intelligent FAAST sensors are not disabled when an output group assigned to
one if its relays is disabled via the Group Disable 572 feature.

Active - To disable Downloading for a particular address, double-click or press the space

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 492 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

bar within this field to turn it grey. To re-enable the device, repeat the process to make the
field green.

HEPA - When a Velociti Laser Sensor is used in a HEPA filtered clean-room environment,
this option may be enabled to enable faster response time. This option may only be
selected for Velociti Laser Sensor device types.

Below the grid are the following buttons:

Add 492 - Opens a screen where input devices may be added to the configuration.
Delete - Clicking the delete button will remove devices that have their "Sel" field checked
from the configuration.

Finally, below the row of buttons is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Input Group # > Input Devices", the second is
"Used/Unused Groups" and the third is "Linked SLC Output Devices". Below is a brief
explanation of each information tab.

Input Group # > Input Devices - This tab shows all input devices that are assigned to the
group that is selected in the "Select Input Group" drop-down list.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the input groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more input devices
and green if the input group has not been assigned to any input devices. Double-clicking
one of the input groups in this list will add the selected input group to one of the Input Group
fields in the grid if one of the Input Group fields is highlighted.

Linked SLC Output Devices - This tab shows all SLC output devices that are affected by
the status of the input groups assigned to this device. This may display either devices on
the current node or all nodes by selecting one of the option buttons and clicking "Show".

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.12.1 Add

The Add Devices screen is used to define new input devices. The following procedure may
be used to define new input devices:

Step 1:
Select Sensors or Modules - In order to add input devices, the user must select
between Sensors and Modules. Doing so will filter the list of available devices types to
show only the devices types that are applicable for sensors or device types that are
applicable to modules.

Step 2:
Select Device Type - Select the device type to be assigned to the selected addresses
from the drop-down list. See this page 545 for information on the available sensor device

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 493

types or this page 565 for information on the available module device types.

Step 3:
Select Loop - Select the Loop where device(s) to be added are located. Click on the
Loop 1 or Loop 2 option button.

Step 4:
Input Group 1 - Select the group number for the devices to be added (this may also be
set in the Input Devices entry screen) from the drop-down list. Input devices may belong
to input groups ranging from 1-99 and 300-499.

NOTE: This will only set the first group for the device. If you wish to assign more groups,
this must be done in the Input Devices screen.

Step 5:
Check Addresses To Add - Select all addresses to be added by checking the address
number(s).

Step 6:
Verify - To change the verification setting for a particular address, select a new option
from the drop-down list in this field. Setting this field to "Verify" enables the automatic
verification, while setting this option to "PAS" enables Positive Alarm Sequence. Setting
this field to "None" disables verification for this device. Select "DFlt" to use the default
verification setting chosen on the General Settings 461 screen.

NOTE: Only certain device types are eligible for verification and/or PAS. See the
following pages for information about compatible device types:

S3 Series (Apollo) Sensor Device Types 188

S3 Series (Apollo) Element Device Types 191

S3 Series (System Sensor) Sensor Device Types 294

S3 Series (System Sensor) Module Device Types 314

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 545

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Module Device Types 565

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 426

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Element Device Types 429

NOTE: Verification and PAS cannot be mixed with Cross Zoning.

Step 7:
Day Sensitivity/Night Sensitivity - Set the desired day and night sensitivity settings for
smoke detectors via these drop-down lists. For Thermal detectors, these fields set the
device's temperature threshold. The allowable selections differ based on the device type.

NOTE: The Sensitivity settings are available for Sensor device types only.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

494 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: Sensitivity settings for intelligent FAAST devices may only be configured
through System Sensor's PipeIQ 934 utility.

Step 8:
High Temperature Detector (Thermal Detectors only) - Select this option if the devices
being added are High Temperature thermal sensors.

Step 9:
Event Profile # - If the device type is a multi-criteria sensor (MCS-Acclimate2/2F,
MCS-COF or MCS-4-Warn), this field is enabled to allow choosing the response profile to
assigned to this device. The profile may be assigned by either typing the profile number
(1-16, if known) or using the browse ( ) button. Clicking the browse button will open a
window that displays the settings of all of the available profiles. Simply highlight one of
the profiles in the grid and click OK to make a selection.

NOTE: This is an advanced user feature. Please see this page 450 for more
information on how to properly configure this feature.

NOTE: This feature requires ILI firmware version 3.2-001 or later.

Step 10:
Description - This label will appear as the identifier for these addresses when any event
occurs at one of these addresses. The maximum number of characters for this label is
40. The same description will be added to all selected addresses.

Step 11:
DACT Code - Choose the method that CAMWorks will use to assign a DACT Code 574 to
the new devices. See this page 575 for more information.

Step 12:
Add - Click on the "Add" button to program the selected addresses. (The user will be
asked to confirm the selections).

List View - The list view at the bottom of the screen lists all of the device types and
groups for the addresses on the currently selected loop.
Select All - Click on this button to toggle between placing or clearing check marks from
all addresses.

NOTE: CAMWorks supports a feature called "Block Add" that allows the user to easily
assign sequential blocks of SLC devices. See this page 495 for more information.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 495

7.3.12.2 Block Add

Block Add is a method of adding new devices to the configuration. It is used when many
devices of the same type need to be added to sequential addresses. Block Add is similar to
the standard method of adding devices and many of the same settings may be configured
via Block Add as with the standard Add Devices screen. The following procedure may be
used to define new input devices using Block Add:

Step 1:
Select Sensors or Modules - In order to add input devices, the user must select
between Sensors and Modules. Doing so will filter the list of available devices types to
show only the devices types that are applicable for sensors or device types that are
applicable to modules.

Step 2:
Select Device Type - Select the device type to be assigned to the selected addresses
from the drop-down list. See this page 545 for information on the available sensor device
types or this page 565 for information on the available module device types.

Step 3:
Select Loop - Select the Loop where device(s) to be added are located. Click on the
Loop 1 or Loop 2 option button.

Step 4:
Input Group 1 - Select the group number for the devices to be added (this may also be
set in the Input Devices entry screen) from the drop-down list. Input devices may belong
to input groups ranging from 1-99 and 300-499.

NOTE: This will only set the first group for the device. If you wish to assign more groups,
this must be done in the Input Devices screen.

Step 5:
Block Add Options - When Block Add is used the address selection check boxes are not
used. Instead, Block Add requires the following information from the user in order to add
devices in a sequence:
a. Number of Devices - Select how many devices should be added.
b. Starting Address - Select the first address in the block. All devices will be
added starting with this address.

NOTE: The "Block Add Option" checkbox must be checked in order to use the Block
Add feature.

Block Add has several options for handling address overlaps. An address overlap
occurs when there are devices already programmed in the range of addresses that
Block Add is set to add new devices to. For example, an address overlap exists if
Block Add is configured to add 4 devices starting at address 10 and addresses 12 and
13 already have devices assigned to them. CAMWorks offers the following methods of
handling address overlaps:

Overlap Handling Method Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

496 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Skip address and continue with the next
address
Overwrite existing address
Abort this entry and continue to next
address
Abort auto entry and save the entries
made up to this point
Abort auto entry without keeping the new
entries
When an address overlap occurs,
CAMWorks skips adding a new device at
this address and continues with the next
address and adds a the number of
devices selected above to the
configuration.
For example, If you have devices at
addresses 4-8 and want to add 10 devices
starting at address 2, you will end up
having addresses 2-3 and 9-16 containing
new devices, while 4-8 will contain their
original device assignments.
Erases the existing device at the address
and adds a new one in its place.
When an address overlap occurs,
CAMWorks skips adding a new device at
this address and continues with the next
address and stops at the address
(Number of Devices + Starting Address).
For example, If you have devices at
addresses 4-8 and want to add 10 devices
starting at address 2, you will end up
having addresses 2-3 and 9-11 containing
new devices, while 4-8 will contain their
original device assignments.
When an address overlap occurs,
CAMWorks aborts adding new devices.
When an address overlap occurs,
CAMWorks aborts adding new devices
and discards any changes that would have
been made by Block Add.

Step 6:
Verify - To change the verification setting for a particular address, select a new option
from the drop-down list in this field. Setting this field to "Verify" enables the automatic
verification, while setting this option to "PAS" enables Positive Alarm Sequence. Setting
this field to "None" disables verification for this device. Select "DFlt" to use the default
verification setting chosen on the General Settings 461 screen.

NOTE: Only certain device types are eligible for verification and/or PAS. See the
following pages for information about compatible device types:

S3 Series (Apollo) Sensor Device Types 188

S3 Series (Apollo) Element Device Types 191

S3 Series (System Sensor) Sensor Device Types 294

S3 Series (System Sensor) Module Device Types 314

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 545

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 497

ILI-MB-E3/ILI-S-E3 Module Device Types 565

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Sensor Device Types 426

ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 Element Device Types 429

NOTE: Verification and PAS cannot be mixed with Cross Zoning.

Step 7:
Day Sensitivity/Night Sensitivity - Set the desired day and night sensitivity settings for
smoke detectors via these drop-down lists. For Thermal detectors, these fields set the
device's temperature threshold. The allowable selections differ based on the device type.

NOTE: The Sensitivity settings are available for Sensor device types only.

NOTE: Sensitivity settings for intelligent FAAST devices may only be configured
through System Sensor's PipeIQ 934 utility.

Step 8:
High Temperature Detector (Thermal Detectors only) - Select this option if the devices
being added are High Temperature thermal sensors.

Step 9:
Event Profile # - If the device type is a multi-criteria sensor (MCS-Acclimate2/2F,
MCS-COF or MCS-4-Warn), this field is enabled to allow choosing the response profile to
assigned to this device. The profile may be assigned by either typing the profile number
(1-16, if known) or using the browse ( ) button. Clicking the browse button will open a
window that displays the settings of all of the available profiles. Simply highlight one of
the profiles in the grid and click OK to make a selection.

NOTE: This is an advanced user feature. Please see this page 450 for more
information on how to properly configure this feature.

NOTE: This feature requires ILI firmware version 3.2-001 or later.

Step 10:
Description - This label will appear as the identifier for these addresses when any event
occurs at one of these addresses. The maximum number of characters for this label is
40. The same description will be added to all selected addresses.

Step 11:
DACT Code - Choose the method that CAMWorks will use to assign a DACT Code 574 to
the new devices. See this page 575 for more information.

Step 12:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 498 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Add - Click on the "Add" button to program the selected addresses. (The user will be
asked to confirm the selections).

List View - The list view at the bottom of the screen lists all of the device types and
groups for the addresses on the currently selected loop.
7.3.13 Output Devices
The output devices screen is used to configure all Addressable Output Modules (AOM's)
connected to an ILI-MB-E3 or ILI-S-E3 node. This screen houses a large grid that displays
all of the output devices that are configured.

The ILI-MB-E3 and ILI-S-E3 nodes support two basic AOM device types. These are the
Form-C Relay module (AOM-2RF/RCE-SS/MMO-6RF/RCM-SS), and the Signal/NAC
module (AOM-2SF/SCE-SS/MMO-6SF/SCM-SS).

The following programmable options are available for all AOM modules:

Sel - Place a check in this field and click the Delete button to remove the device from this
address. Multiple devices may be selected if desired.

Floor # - Enter the floor of the building that the device is located on. This field is used for
user reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.

Description - Enter a location description for the current address. This label will appear as
the identifier for this address when any event occurs at this address. The maximum number
of characters for this label is 40.
NOTE: Any part of the description text can be copied to the Windows clipboard by
highlighting the text and pressing Ctrl-C. The text can then be copied to the description
field of another address by selecting that field and pressing Ctrl-V.

DACT Report Code - When using custom DACT reporting codes 574 , the code entered in
this field will be reported by the DACT-E3 when using Contact ID or SIA formats. This may
range from 1-899. The node number will be transmitted in addition to this information.

Output Group Number(s) - To program group numbers, enter group numbers in the Group
entry fields. Up to four output groups (125-224, 500-599) can be entered. If you are unclear
on I/O groups concepts, see Help topic Input/Output Functionality.

NOTE: You cannot assign both output groups and General Output lists to the same
output module.

NOTE: The third and fourth Output Group assignments may also be assigned to Disable
Type Tags, which range from 600 to 699. See this page 572 for more information on the
Group Disable feature.

NOTE: While the E3 Series does allow for multiple output groups for each device, should
a trouble condition occur on a device only the first group assigned to the device will set its
respective Trouble SSM bit.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 499

NOTE: You cannot assign output groups to "Silenceable" output device types.

Day Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Day Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into afire alarm condition during the defined
day period, this list of outputs will be activated.

Night Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Night Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into fire alarm condition during the defined
night period, this list of outputs will be activated.

CO/Gas Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default CO/Gas Alarm
list. When any initiating device in the system goes into a CO or Gas alarm condition, this list
of outputs will be activated.

Action - Check this option to place this output in the system default Action list. When an
input defined as Multilevel reaches the programmed "Action" threshold, this list of outputs
will be activated.

Supv (Supervisory) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Supervisory
list. When any supervisory device in the system goes into an Off Normal condition, this list of
outputs will be activated.

WT Drill (Walk Test/Drill) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Walk
Test/Drill list. This list of outputs is activated for audible walk test or during a Fire Drill.

Trouble - Check this option to place this output in the system default Trouble list. When
there is a trouble condition in the system, this list of outputs will be activated.

Fan Restart - The E3 Series supports a "Fan Restart" configuration option for AOM devices.
If this option is selected, the panel leaves such devices undisturbed during reset. The panel
indicates a Trouble condition "FANS OFF" fault message after the reset. To turn off the fan
restart AOM's, a function is available on the keypad's zero (0) key or, optionally an
ASM-16/ANU-48 switch. Activating the key or switch deactivates the AOM's that were left on
during reset and cancels the "FANS OFF" fault.
NOTE: Fan Restart may not be assigned to AOM's that are assigned to the General
Trouble output list.

Seq Restart - The E3 Series also provides "sequential restart" capability. Any outputs
configured for sequential restart are deactivated at a slow rate, either during reset (if not
configured for "Fan Restart"), or upon use of the zero "0" key or, optionally an
ASM-16/ANU-48 switch (if configured for "Fan Restart"). The time delay interval for
sequential reset is set in the Globals/Miscellaneous entry screen.

Active - To disable Downloading for a particular address, double-click or press the space
bar within this field to turn it grey. To re-enable the device, repeat the process to make the
field green.

Below the grid are the following buttons:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 500 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Add 500 - Opens a screen where input devices may be added to the configuration.
Delete - Clicking the delete button will remove devices that have their "Sel" field checked
from the configuration.

Finally, below the row of buttons is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Output Group # > Output Devices", the second
is "Used/Unused Groups" and the third is "Linked Input Devices". Below is a brief
explanation of each information tab.

Output Group # > Output Devices - This tab shows all output devices that are assigned to
the group that is selected in the "Select Output Group" drop-down list.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices. Double-clicking
one of the output groups in this list will add the selected output group to one of the Output
Group fields in the grid if one of the Output Group fields is highlighted.

Linked Input Devices - This tab shows SLC input devices that affect the status of the
output groups assigned to this device. This may display either devices on the current node
(local) or all nodes (network) by selecting one of the option buttons and clicking "Show".

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.13.1 Add

The Add Devices screen is used to define new output devices. The following procedure may
be used to define new output devices:

Step 1:
Select Device Type - Select the device type to be assigned to the selected addresses
from the drop-down list. See this page 565 for information on the available module device
types.

Step 2:
Select Loop - Select the Loop where device(s) to be added are located. Click on the
Loop 1 or Loop 2 option button.

Step 3:
Output Group 1 - Select the group number for the devices to be added (this may also be
set in the Output Devices entry screen) from the drop-down list. AOM's may belong to
output groups ranging from 125-224 and 500-599. An output group assignment of 0
indicates that no output group should be assigned to the device.

NOTE: This will only set the first group for the device. If you wish to assign more groups,
this must be done in the Output Devices screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 501

NOTE: Output groups cannot be assigned to "Silenceable" AOM device types.

Step 4:
Check Addresses To Add - Select all addresses to be added by checking the address
number(s).

Step 5:
Description - This label will appear as the identifier for these addresses when any event
occurs at one of these addresses. The maximum number of characters for this label is
40. The same description will be added to all selected addresses.

Step 6:
Floor # - Enter the floor of the building that the device is located on. This field is used for
user reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.

Step 7:
DACT Code - Choose the method that CAMWorks will use to assign a DACT Code 574 to
the new devices. See this page 575 for more information.

Step 8:
Add - Click on the "Add" button to program the selected addresses. (The user will be
asked to confirm the selections).

List View - The list view at the bottom of the screen lists all of the device types and
groups for the addresses on the currently selected loop.
Select All - Click on this button to toggle between placing or clearing check marks from
all addresses.

NOTE: CAMWorks supports a feature called "Block Add" that allows the user to easily
assign sequential blocks of SLC devices. See this page 501 for more information.

7.3.13.2 Block Add

Block Add is a method of adding new devices to the configuration. It is used when many
devices of the same type need to be added to sequential addresses. Block Add is similar to
the standard method of adding devices and many of the same settings may be configured
via Block Add as with the standard Add Devices screen. The following procedure may be
used to define new input devices using Block Add:

Step 1:
Select Device Type - Select the device type to be assigned to the selected addresses
from the drop-down list. See this page 565 for information on the available module device
types.

Step 2:
Select Loop - Select the Loop where device(s) to be added are located. Click on the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

502 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Loop 1 or Loop 2 option button.

Step 3:
Output Group 1 - Select the group number for the devices to be added (this may also be
set in the Output Devices entry screen) from the drop-down list. AOM's may belong to
output groups ranging from 125-224 and 500-599. An output group assignment of 0
indicates that no output group should be assigned to the device.

NOTE: This will only set the first group for the device. If you wish to assign more groups,
this must be done in the Output Devices screen.

NOTE: Output groups cannot be assigned to "Silenceable" AOM device types.

Step 4:
Block Add Options - When Block Add is used the address selection check boxes are not
used. Instead, Block Add requires the following information from the user in order to add
devices in a sequence:

a. Number of Devices - Select how many devices should be added.

b. Starting Address - Select the first address in the block. All devices will be
added starting with this address.

NOTE: The "Block Add Option" checkbox must be checked in order to use the Block
Add feature.

Block Add has several options for handling address overlaps. An address overlap occurs
when there are devices already programmed in the range of addresses that Block Add is
set to add new devices to. For example, an address overlap exists if Block Add is
configured to add 4 devices starting at address 10 and addresses 12 and 13 already have
devices assigned to them. CAMWorks offers the following methods of handling address
overlaps:

Overlap Handling Method Description

Skip address and continue with the next
address
Overwrite existing address
Abort this entry and continue to next
address
When an address overlap occurs,
CAMWorks skips adding a new device at
this address and continues with the next
address and adds a the number of devices
selected above to the configuration.
For example, If you have devices at
addresses 4-8 and want to add 10 devices
starting at address 2, you will end up having
addresses 2-3 and 9-16 containing new
devices, while 4-8 will contain their original
device assignments.
Erases the existing device at the address
and adds a new one in its place.
When an address overlap occurs,
CAMWorks skips adding a new device at
this address and continues with the next

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 503

address and stops at the address (Number

of Devices + Starting Address).
For example, If you have devices at
addresses 4-8 and want to add 10 devices
starting at address 2, you will end up having
addresses 2-3 and 9-11 containing new
devices, while 4-8 will contain their original
device assignments.
Abort auto entry and save the entries made When an address overlap occurs,
up to this point CAMWorks aborts adding new devices.
Abort auto entry without keeping the new When an address overlap occurs,
entries CAMWorks aborts adding new devices and
discards any changes that would have been
made by Block Add.

Step 5:
Description - This label will appear as the identifier for these addresses when any event
occurs at one of these addresses. The maximum number of characters for this label is
40. The same description will be added to all selected addresses.

Step 6:
Floor # - Enter the floor of the building that the device is located on. This field is used for
user reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.

Step 7:
DACT Code - Choose the method that CAMWorks will use to assign a DACT Code 574 to
the new devices. See this page 575 for more information.

Step 8:
Add - Click on the "Add" button to program the selected addresses. (The user will be
asked to confirm the selections).

List View - The list view at the bottom of the screen lists all of the device types and
groups for the addresses on the currently selected loop.
7.3.14 Cross Zones
This screen allows the user to configure the behavior of each of the node's thirty cross
zones. Like many other screens in CAMWorks, the display is arranged in a grid. The
settings available for each cross zone is described below:

Cross Zone - Indicates which virtual cross zone group will be affected by these settings.
This field is read-only.

Cross Zone Type - If this virtual cross zone group will be used as a group cross zone,
select "Group". If it will be used as a point cross zone, select "Point".

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

504 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Config - Clicking this button opens a secondary screen that allows the user to assign the
desired points (point cross zoning) or input groups (group cross zoning).

Trigger - This option sets the trigger level of the cross zone (how many inputs or sets of
inputs need to activate before the cross zone activates). This can be set from two to seven
for point cross zoning or two to four for group cross zoning.

Response - The E3 Series currently allows two response types. The first is the Alarm
response, which will cause a fire alarm condition when the cross zone is activated. Second
is the non-reporting response. This response allows you to chain multiple cross zones
together or trigger outputs without causing a fire alarm on the system.

Zone Code - When the cross zone is activated it can trigger a zone code to sound, just like
any other input. This menu allows you to select one of up to 63 user-defined zone codes.
NOTE: This setting applies only to the ILI-MB-E3.

Virtual Alarm Group - The cross zone may be configured to trigger an output group or a
scratchpad when the activation threshold has been reached. This may range from 125-224
(Output Groups), 500-599 (Extended Output Groups) and 416-439 (Scratchpads).

Virtual Pre-Alarm Group - When the one or more of the cross zone triggers activates (but
the configured trigger level has not yet been reached), it can be configured to trigger an
output group or a scratchpad. This may range from 125-224 (Output Groups), 500-599
(Extended Output Groups) and 416-439 (Scratchpads).
NOTE: Regardless of user programming, the ILI-MB-E3 or ILI-S-E3 will set bits in its
associated extended system status map for a Pre-alarm on a cross zone and for a Cross
Zone activation.

Day Alarm - If the response type is configured for the Alarm Response, this will cause the
system to turn on all outputs configured for the General Alarm Day output list when the cross
zone is activated during the configured day hours.

Night Alarm - If the response type is configured for the Alarm Response, this will cause the
system to turn on all outputs configured for the General Alarm Night output list when the
cross zone is activated during the configured night hours, as well as the defined weekend
and holiday days.

The following control appears outside of the grid:

Enable Multiple Point Cross Zone Activations When System is in Alarm - When

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 505

checked, point cross zone inputs will continue to prealarm after the system is already in
alarm, and the cross zones will activate when their threshold is reached. When unchecked,
all smoke detectors that are configured for point cross zoning will automatically go into alarm
when the system is in alarm and the outputs assigned to the cross zone will not activate.

Below the grid is an information area. This information area contains three tabs of
information. The first is called "CrossZone # > Input Devices", the second is "Input Group #
> Input Devices" and the third is "Used / Unused Groups". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

CrossZone # > Input Devices - This section of the window shows which devices are
assigned to the selected cross zone. Devices may be added by using the Add button below.
To remove devices from the cross zone place a check in the "Sel" column next to the
desired device and click the Delete button below.

Input Group # > Input Devices - This tab shows all input devices that are assigned to the
group that is selected in the "Select Input Group" drop-down list.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the input groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more input devices
and green if the input group has not been assigned to any input devices. Double-clicking
one of the input groups in this list will add the selected input group to one of the Input Group
fields in the grid if one of the Input Group fields is highlighted.

Group CrossZone > Input Devices - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the devices
that are a member of a group cross zone that is highlighted in the grid above.

See this page 448 for more information about configuring cross zoning.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.15 ASM/ANU
NOTE: These settings apply only to the ILI-MB-E3.

Each ILI-MB-E3 supports a combination of up to sixteen Switch and Annunciator Modules of

the following types:
ASM-16 and ANU-48.

The following settings may be selected for each module through this screen:

Board # - This field simply indicates which module will be affected by these settings. This
field cannot be changed.

Board Type - Select a board type to indicate that a board should be assigned to this
address or select "None", if no board should be assigned to this address.

Lamp Test - Selecting Yes will cause the ASM-16 or ANU-48 to perform a lamp test when it

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

506 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

is reset. Selecting No will cause the ASM-16 or ANU-48 to not perform a lamp test.

At the bottom of the ASM/ANU screen is a configuration window to allow the configuration of
the module's switches. This window changes depending on which module is selected. The
following fields are displayed in the grid in this window:

Switch Input # - This field is a reference that indicates which switches are available.

Bit # - This field indicates the system status map bit assigned to this switch.

Switch Type - This option sets the function that the switch performs. All switches are
defaulted to the "Control" option. When configured for this function, the switch will toggle its
associated Bit Number and can be used in CAM expressions. Switches one through eight
may also be configured for an Auxiliary Function, except for Switch #6. This auxiliary
function differs for each switch and may be viewed by clicking here. Even though the ANU-
48 only supports eight physical switches, switches #9-16 are displayed as Toggle/Selector
switches to acknowledge the fact that each ANU-48 switch has two bits associated with it in
the System Status Map.

NOTE: When a switch is configured for its Auxiliary Function, it will not trigger its
associated bit number.

NOTE: When a switch is configured for its Auxiliary Function, its associated LED's will be
taken over by the Auxiliary Function and will no longer be programmable via CAMs.

NOTE: If an ASM-16 or ANU-48 switch is reconfigured for an Auxiliary Function, any

CAMs previously written for the LED's associated with that switch will be deleted. Before
deleting the CAMs, CAMWorks will issue a warning asking for confirmation.

Momentary - When the switch type is configured as a control switch, the switch can be
configured as a momentary switch by placing a check mark in this field. When enabled, a
switch press will cause the associated SSM bit location to go true once and then false again.

Latching - The switch may be configured for latching operation when the switch type is
configured as a control switch. When selected, the current switch state (ON or OFF) will
persist through reset.
NOTE: On the ANU-48, switches #9-16 are always configured as Latching and cannot be
changed.

NOTE: A switch may not be configured for both momentary and latching operation at the
same time.

Description - This descriptive text is available for display while programming CAMs and is
not downloaded to the panel.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 507

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.16 Label Groups

This screen allows custom descriptions to be defined for each of the 100 Disable Type Tags,
300 Input Groups and 200 Output Groups that are available on the ILI-E3 Series. When a
description has been entered, it will appear as a pop-up tool tip when the mouse hovers over
an Input Group or Output Group field (Input Group / Output Group labels only) or beside the
Disable Type Tag group number in the drop-down list (Disable Type Tag labels only). These
descriptions are for user reference only, and are not downloaded to the panel.
NOTE: See the following page 572 for more information about Disable Type Tags (and the
Group Disable feature in general).

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.17 CAM Output Groups

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

508 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 509

PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)

assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 510 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs in this screen will control Output Groups that can be assigned to AOMs and
discrete outputs such as the NAC Circuits and the Municipal Circuit.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.18 CAM Annunciators

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 511

all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

512 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 513

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

514 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Scratchpads on the selected node. This

includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs on this screen affect the user-programmable LEDs on the LCD-SLP annunciators
connected to this panel. At the top of the screen are three filters:

LCD-SLP No. - Display the CAMs only for the selected LCD-SLP.

Switch No. - Display the CAMs only for the selected switch.

LED Type - Display the CAMs only for the selected type of CAM (ON/Off, Blink, Red or
Green).

The filters are ANDed with each other. This means that only the CAMs that match all criteria
will be displayed in the grid below.

The following describes the four different types of CAMs that control the behavior of each
LCD-SLP programmable LED:

On/Off - A CAM expression written in this area will turn the LED ON steady when the CAM
evaluates to a TRUE and will turn the LED off when the CAM evaluates to a false.

Blink - A CAM expression written in this area will blink the LED when the CAM evaluates to
a TRUE and will turn the LED off (or on steady, based on the On/Off CAM expression) when
the CAM evaluates to a false.

NOTE: The LED blink CAM Expression takes priority over the LED On/Off if both CAM
expressions are TRUE at the same time.

Red - The LCD-SLP programmable LEDs can be configured to be Green, Red or Amber.
When the "Red" CAM expression evaluates to TRUE, the the LED will appear Red, unless
the Green CAM expression also evaluates to TRUE at the same time.

Green - The LCD-SLP programmable LEDs can be configured to be Green, Red or Amber.
When the "Green" CAM expression evaluates to TRUE, the the LED will appear Green,
unless the Red CAM expression also evaluates to TRUE at the same time.

NOTE: The LED will appear Amber when both the Red and Green CAM Expressions
evaluate to TRUE or both evaluate to FALSE.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 515

NOTE: If an LCD-SLP switch has been configured for its Auxiliary Function, the CAM
entry fields, as well as the description field will be grayed out.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.19 CAM ASM/ANU LED

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

516 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 517

Number, Switch Number, Switch System

Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 518 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and

the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs in this screen control the state of the LED's on ASM-16 or ANU-48 modules. A
CAM expression written in this area will either light steady or blink the LED when the CAM
evaluates to a TRUE and will turn the LED off when the CAM evaluates to a false.

NOTE: The LED blink CAM Expression takes priority over the LED On/Off if both CAM
expressions are TRUE at the same time.

NOTE: If an ASM-16 or ANU-48 switch has been configured for its Auxiliary Function, the
CAM entry field, as well as the description field will be grayed out.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.20 CAM Scratchpad

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 519

nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

520 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 521

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 522 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs in this screen will turn on or off the Scratchpads associated with this node.
Scratchpads can be referred to in other CAM expressions and are extremely useful in
reducing the complexity of other CAM expressions.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.21 CAM Special Function

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM Special Functions screen incorporates several advanced functions that can be
useful for certain applications. Specifically, these functions are:
[****]

Schedule 523 - Configure certain output devices to activate according to a specific schedule.
Counters 526 - Activate outputs after a certain number of specific events occur.
Sequence 529 - Activate several outputs in succession.
Timers 532 - Delay the activation of output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 523

7.3.21.1 Schedule

NOTE: Schedules are not available on INX, INCC or INI-VGE nodes.

There are 10 schedules available per node for automatically activating Output Groups and
Scratchpads according to a fixed schedule. Three types of schedules are available. These
are:

1.) Daily - Outputs can be activated on a daily basis at a given time.

2.) Weekly - Outputs can be activated at a certain time on one or more different days of the
week.
3.) Monthly - Outputs can be activated on a certain day of the selected month or on a certain
day of every month.

The process of configuring a schedule is the same regardless of the type of schedule being
used, with a few exceptions. Below is the procedure for configuring a schedule:

1. In the grid, select the Group that will be triggered by the scheduler. The allowed selection
of groups will vary based on the current node type, but will always at least include the
node's scratchpad locations.
2. In the "Information" pane at the bottom of the screen select the "Schedule Details" tab, if it
isn't already selected.
3. Select one of the following schedule types:
a. Daily – When a Daily schedule is desired, the user must supply the time of day that
should be used for the schedule. This is done through the Hours/Minutes drop-down
lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every hour
and/or every minute.
b. Weekly – When a Weekly schedule is desired, the user must select which days of the
week that the schedule should run. Selection boxes are provided for each day of the
week and any or all days may be selected by placing a check in the appropriate box.
Like a Daily schedule, the Weekly schedule also requires that a time of day must be
selected for when the schedule is to be run. This is done through the Hours/Minutes
drop-down lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every
hour and/or every minute.
c. Monthly – A Monthly schedule is used when it is desired to activate certain outputs on a
certain day of the month. Option buttons are provided for the month. Unlike the
Weekly schedule, the user may only select one month or every month. A date
selection is also provided, allowing the user to select which day of the month to run the
schedule. An option is available to run the schedule every day of the selected month.
Like a Daily schedule, the Monthly schedule also requires that a time of day must be
selected for when the schedule is to be run. This is done through the Hours/Minutes
drop-down lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every
hour and/or every minute.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

524 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: If you choose the 29th then there will be no schedule activation for
February except on a leap year. If you choose the 30th then there will be no
schedule activation for February at all. If you choose the 31st then all months with
less than 31 days will not have a schedule activation.

4. Disable Schedule CAM Expression - If there are any circumstances where it would be
desirable to NOT run an automatic schedule, this CAM expression should be entered.
The TRUE evaluation of this CAM expression will prevent the schedule from running.
NOTE: Disable Schedule CAM Expression feature is not available on the 7100.

5. Description - A description may be added to indicate what the schedule will be used for.
This information is used for reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.
NOTE: The CAM Schedule will be true for exactly one minute if the user specifies a
specific minute within the selected hour.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
four tabs of information. The first is called "Schedule Details", the second is "Node
Devices", the third is "Reference Search" and the fourth is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is
a brief explanation of each information tab.

Schedule Details - This tab allows the user to view or set the scheduling information for the
selected schedule. See above for more information on how the schedule is configured.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 525

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 526 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Scratchpads on the selected node. This

includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.21.2 Counters

There are 10 counters available per node for activating outputs after an input triggers the
counter a specified number of times.

The process of configuring a counter is as follows:

1. In the grid, choose how many times the counter must be run by selecting a value in the
"Count" field.
2. Select the Group that will be triggered by the scheduler. The allowed selection of groups
will vary based on the current node type, but will always at least include the node's
scratchpad locations.
3. A Define Counter CAM Expression may be written. If present, this CAM expression will
determine under what condition the counter will be reset. If this CAM is blank, the counter

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 527

will operate as a one-shot (meaning that a reset is required in order to trigger the counter
again after it has activated its output.)
4. Select a "Working Bit". This is a bit that is used internally by the CAM engine to perform
the counter function. This bit must not be used by any other function.
5. Counter Trigger CAM Expression. This CAM Expression describes what condition will
cause the counter to be incremented.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is a brief explanation of each
information tab.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

528 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 529

Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for

Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.21.3 Sequence

There are 10 sequences available per node for activating multiple Output Groups or
Scratchpads in a sequence. There are two types of sequences. The table below explains
the differences between the two.

Sequence Type Description Visual Sample

A 'Bar Graph' sequence

leaves any current
Bar Graph
outputs ON when the
sequence is triggered.

A 'Shift' sequence turns

OFF its current output
when the sequence is
Shift
triggered and then
activates the next
output.

The process of configuring a sequence is the same regardless of the type of sequence
being used. Below is the procedure for configuring a sequence:

1. Select a "Working Bit" - This is a bit that is used internally by the CAM engine to perform
the sequence function. This bit must not be used by any other function.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

530 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

2. Select the number of outputs - The sequencer must know how many outputs are going to
be affected by the scheduler.This may range from 2 to 12.
3. Type of Sequence - Select either a Bar Graph sequence or a Shift sequence. See above
for an explanation of the two types of sequence.
4. CAM Sequence Reinitialize - A CAM Expression must be written for the sequence to be
enabled to run the first time (or be reset so that it may be run again once it has already
run through).
5. Sequence Triggering CAM - This CAM Expression describes what condition will cause the
next output in the sequence to be activated.
6. At the bottom of the screen, select the "Output List" tab.
7. Select the desired output groups and/or scratchpads that should be added to the
sequence. These should be selected in the desired order of activation. Outputs may be
added to the sequence by selecting a group from the list box on the left and clicking the
right arrow button. Outputs may be removed from the sequence by selecting the group in
the list in the list box on the right and clicking on the left arrow button.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
four tabs of information. The first is called "Output List", the second is "Node Devices", the
third is "Reference Search" and the fourth is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is a brief
explanation of each information tab.

Output List - This tab allows the user to select the output groups/scratchpads that will be
activated by this sequence. See above for more information on how the sequence is
configured.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 531

circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 532 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for

Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.21.4 Timers

There are 10 timers available per node for creating delays for Output Groups and
Scratchpads. To configure a timer, set the desired timer interval in seconds, and select the
appropriate Output Group or Scratchpad from the Group drop-down list. If set, the timer
information will be displayed in the CAM entry screen for the selected group. This delay will
apply when the output group or scratchpad is activated through the CAM logic expression.
The options for the timers are displayed in a table format. Each option is described below.

Timer - This is a read-only display that shows the timer number (1-10).

Time (Seconds) - This sets the delay time for this timer. The delay time is entered in
seconds. This may range from 1 to 3600 seconds .

Group - Select the Output Group or Scratchpad that you would like to delay.

Resettable Timer - This option allows you to choose between standard and resettable

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 533

timers. If set to No, the timer will be a standard timer. Standard timers will only trigger
once. In order to be triggered again, the system will need to be reset. If this setting is
changed to Yes, the timer can be triggered multiple times. In order to be triggered again,
the timer will have time out and the CAM expression assigned to the output group or
scratchpad will need to transition from false to true again.

Free/Used - If this timer has been configured and assigned to an Output Group or
Scratchpad, this will read Used, otherwise it will read Free.

NOTE: If a Timer is used by Advanced CAM Programming, this field will read Used, even
if it doesn't appear to have any other configuration information assigned.

NOTE: If a Timer is used by Advanced CAM Programming, no timer parameters may be

changed via this screen.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.22 CAM Group Disable

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

534 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 535

AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or

Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

536 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Number, Switch Number, Switch System

Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAM expressions in this section are a part of the Group Disable 572 feature of the E3
Series. Each Input and Output Group has one CAM expression assigned. When the CAM
expression is TRUE, all devices assigned to the associated Group will enter DISCONNECT
trouble and will be treated as a disabled device. When the CAM expression goes back to
FALSE, the DISCONNECT troubles associated with the assigned Input Group will be
restored.

NOTE: In order for the following settings to take effect, the ILI-MB-E3 or ILI-S-E3 must
be running V2.4-001 or later of the System Operating Software.

This screen also hosts a single CAM Expression to enable EasyTest mode. EasyTest is a
feature of the MCS-Acclimate2F (in Velociti mode only) and MCS-4-Warn multi-criteria
sensors that simplifies detector testing. When the CAM expression at bit location #3777
evaluates to TRUE, the panel will activate EasyTest mode for all MCS-Acclimate2F (in
Velociti mode only), MCS-COF and MCS-4-Warn multi-criteria sensors on that node. When

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 537

EasyTest mode is enabled, these multi-criteria sensors may be tested using canned smoke.

NOTE: The panel will activate EasyTest mode automatically during Walk Test, regardless
of the state of bit #3777.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.23 CAM Disable Type Tag

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

538 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 539

the selected node. Includes the Module

Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 540 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

includes the Scratchpad number,

Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAM expressions in this section are a part of the Group Disable 572 feature of the E3
Series. Input and/or output devices may individually be assigned to Disable Type Tags.

Each Disable Type Tag has one CAM expression assigned. When the CAM expression is
TRUE, all devices assigned to the associated Disable Type Tag will enter DISCONNECT
trouble and will be treated as a disabled device. When the CAM expression goes back to
FALSE, the DISCONNECT troubles associated with the assigned Disable Type Tag will be
restored.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.24 CAM Sensor Output

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 541

titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

542 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 543

Device Type and Description.

AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 544 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The E3 Series has complete control over several aspects of the operation of the smoke
detectors that was not possible in earlier products. One of these features includes
controlling the so-called Remote Outputs of the smoke detectors. These include both
sounder bases and relay bases.

Each sensor has a CAM expression to control its remote output. When the CAM expression
evaluates to TRUE the output will turn ON, when it evaluates to FALSE the output will turn
OFF.

NOTE: Once a CAM expression has been entered for a Sensor Remote Output, it will
override the automatic activation of the output (ie. the standard follow-the-LED activation).
If automatic operation is desired after a CAM expression has been written, simply erase
the CAM expression.

NOTE: These settings are not available when CLIP Mode is selected.

NOTE: These CAMS have no effect on B200S sounder bases. B200S sounder bases
may belong to an output group instead.

For Intelligent FAAST devices, the Sensor Remote Output bit takes on a different meaning.
It is used to determine whether or not to turn off the device's aspiration unit (fan) when the
device is disabled from the front-panel menus or as part of a group disable operation.

When the Sensor Remote Output bit is FALSE, the aspiration unit will be left ON (Isolate
Mode) when the device is disabled from the panel. When the Sensor Remote Output bit is
TRUE, the aspiration unit will be turned OFF (Disabled Mode) when the device is disabled
from the panel.

NOTE: There is no change in the fan state if the value of the Sensor Remote Output bit
changes while the device is already disabled.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.25 CAM Reset Inhibit

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 545

7.3.26 CAM Sounder Base Coded Patterns

7.3.27 Advanced CAM Programming

Selecting this option will open the Advanced CAM Programming Editor.

See this page 925 for more information about the Advanced CAM Programming Editor.
See this page 920 for more information about Advanced CAM Programming in general.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

7.3.28 Communication
Opens the Download screen in the main window. See the Download Utilities 841 section for
more information.

7.4 General
7.4.1 Sensor Device Types
The following sensor device types are available on the E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 and ILI-S-E3):

Sensor Device Type Device Type As Ph De Re La PA Ve Cr De

Reported By Panel ysi sc sp tc S rifi os vi
cal rip on hi All ca s ce
De tio se ng o tio Zo Ty
vic n Ty ? we n ni pe
e pe d? All ng all
Ty o All o
pe we o we
d? we d
d? in
CL
IP
M
od
e?

None Assigned No Device No No No N/ N/ N/ N/ N/

De de Re A A A A A
vic vic sp
e e on
at se

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

546 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

thi
s
ad
dr
es
s
Ion Detector Ion Detector Ion St Fir Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye
Se an e s s s s s
ns da Al
or rd ar
(A Io m
SD n
-IL Se
2F) ns
or,
su
ch
as
AS
D-
IL
2F
Critical Ion Critical Ion Ion St Fir Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye
Se an e s s s s s
ns da Al
or rd ar
(A Io m
SD n
-IL Se
2F) ns
or.
T
he
sy
ste
m
re
se
rv
es
po
we
r
to
ru
n
th
e
se
ns

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 547

or'
s
LE
Ds
.
Photo Detector Photo Detector Ph St Fir Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye
oto an e s s s s s
Se da Al
ns rd ar
or Ph m
(A ot
SD o
-P Se
L2 ns
F, or,
AS su
D- ch
PL as
2F AS
R, D-
AD PL
P- 2F
RF
,
AD
S-
P2
00,
AD
S-
RP
20
0,
AS
D-
FIL
TR
EX
F)
Critical Photo Critical Photo Ph St Fir Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye
oto an e s s s s s
Se da Al
ns rd ar
or Ph m
(A ot
SD o
-P Se
L2 ns
F, or.
AS T

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

548 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

D- he
PL sy
2F ste
R, m
AD re
P- se
RF rv
, es
AD po
S- we
P2 r
00, to
AD ru
S- n
RP th
20 e
0, se
AS ns
D- or'
FIL s
TR LE
EX Ds
F) .
Photo/Heat Det Photo/Heat Det Ph St Fir Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye
oto an e s s s s s
/Th da Al
er rd ar
ma Ph m
l ot
Se o/
ns He
or ar
(A De
SD tec
-P tor
TL ,
2F) su
ch
as
AS
D-
PT
L2
F
Thermal Det Thermal Det Th St Fir Ye No No No Ye
er an e s s
ma da Al
l rd ar
Se He m
ns at

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 549

or De
(A tec
TD tor
-L2 ,
F, su
AT ch
D- as
HL AT
2F, D-
AT L2
D- F
RL
2F)
Acclimate Acclimate Ac An Fir Ye No No Ye Ye
cli alo e s s s
ma g, Al
te ad ar
Se dr m
ns es
or sa
(M ble
CS m
-Ac ulti
cli -
ma crit
te2 eri
F) a
se
ns
or
NR Ion Det NL NR Ion Det NL Ion St No No No No No Ye
Se an n- s
ns da re
or rd po
(A Io rti
SD n ng
-IL Se
2F) ns
or,
su
ch
as
AS
D-
IL
2F
NR Photo Det NL NR Photo Det NL Ph St No No No No No Ye
oto an n- s
Se da re
ns rd po

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

550 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

or Ph rti
(A ot ng
SD o
-P Se
L2 ns
F, or,
AS su
D- ch
PL as
2F AS
R, D-
AD PL
P- 2F
RF
,
AD
S-
P2
00,
AD
S-
RP
20
0,
AS
D-
FIL
TR
EX
F)
Ion Multilevel Ion Multilevel Ion St M Ye No No Ye Ye
Se an ulti s s s
ns da -
or rd lev
(A Io el
SD n (th
-IL Se re
2F) ns e-
or, lev
su el)
ch (Al
as ert
AS ,
D- Ac
IL tio
2F n,
Fir
e
Al
ar

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 551

m)
Pho Multilevel Pho Multilevel Ph St M Ye No No Ye Ye
oto an ulti s s s
Se da -
ns rd lev
or Ph el
(A ot (th
SD o re
-P Se e-
L2 ns lev
F, or, el)
AS su (Al
D- ch ert
PL as ,
2F AS Ac
R, D- tio
AD PL n,
P- 2F Fir
RF e
, Al
AD ar
S- m)
P2
00,
AD
S-
RP
20
0,
AS
D-
FIL
TR
EX
F)
Ion Duct Spv Ion Duct Spv Ion An Su Ye No No No Ye
Se alo pe s s
ns g, rvi
or Ad so
(A dr ry
SD es
-IL sa
2F) ble
Io
n
Du
ct
De
tec
tor

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

552 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Photo Duct Spv Photo Duct Spv Ph An Su Ye No No No Ye

oto alo pe s s
Se g, rvi
ns Ad so
or dr ry
(A es
SD sa
-P ble
L2 Ph
F, ot
AS o
D- Du
PL ct
2F De
R, tec
AD tor
P-
RF
,
AD
S-
P2
00,
AD
S-
RP
20
0,
AS
D-
FIL
TR
EX
F)
Ion Duct Det Ion Duct Det Ion An Fir Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye
Se alo e s s s s s
ns g, Al
or Ad ar
(A dr m
SD es
-IL sa
2F) ble
Io
n
Du
ct
De
tec
tor
Photo Duct Det Photo Duct Det Ph An Fir Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 553

oto alo e s s s s s
Se g, Al
ns Ad ar
or dr m
(A es
SD sa
-P ble
L2 Ph
F, ot
AS o
D- Du
PL ct
2F De
R, tec
AD tor
P-
RF
,
AD
S-
P2
00,
AD
S-
RP
20
0,
AS
D-
FIL
TR
EX
F)
Laser Sensor CLIP Laser Sensor CL An Fir Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye
IP alo e s s s s s
La g, Al
ser Ad ar
Se dr m
ns es
or sa
ble
N La
O se
TE r
: Ph
Th ot
is o
de Se
vic ns
e or,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

554 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

typ su
e ch
is as
su AS
pp D-
ort LS
ed
in
bo
th
Ve
loc
iti
an
d
CL
IP
m
od
es,
ev
en
th
ou
gh
th
e
de
vic
e
its
elf
onl
y
su
pp
ort
s
CL
IP
m
od
e.
(A
SD
-L
S)
Ion Supv Ion Supv Ion St Su No No No No Ye
Se an pe s
ns da rvi

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 555

or rd so
(A Io ry
SD n
-IL Se
2F) ns
or,
su
ch
as
AS
D-
IL
2F
Photo Supv Photo Supv Ph St Su No No No No Ye
oto an pe s
Se da rvi
ns rd so
or Ph ry
(A ot
SD o
-P Se
L2 ns
F, or,
AS su
D- ch
PL as
2F AS
R, D-
AD PL
P- 2F
RF
,
AD
S-
P2
00,
AD
S-
RP
20
0,
AS
D-
FIL
TR
EX
F)
Acclimate Supv Acclimate Supv Ac An Su No No No No Ye
cli alo pe s
ma g, rvi

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

556 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

te ad so
Se dr ry
ns es
or sa
(M ble
CS m
-Ac ulti
cli -
ma crit
te2 eri
F) a
se
ns
or
Vel. Laser Sensor Laser Sensor Vel Ve Fir Ye No No Ye No
La loc e s s
ser iti Al
Se Se ar
ns rie m
or s
La
se
r
Se
ns
or
Vel. Laser Multilvl Laser Multilvl Vel Ve M Ye No No Ye No
La loc ulti s s
ser iti -
Se Se lev
ns rie el
or s (th
La re
se e-
r lev
Se el)
ns (Al
or ert
,
Ac
tio
n,
Fir
e
Al
ar
m)
Acclimate Dual Acclimate Dual Ac An Du Ye No No Ye Ye
cli alo al s s s
ma g, Re (fo

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 557

te ad sp r
Se dr on Al
ns es se ar
or sa (Fi m
(M ble re Re
CS m Al sp
-Ac ulti ar on
cli - m se
ma crit for )
te2 eri He No
F) a at (fo
se or r
ns He Su
or at pe
wit rvi
h so
sm ry
ok Re
e sp
Su on
pe se
rvi )
so
ry
for
sm
ok
e
wit
ho
ut
he
at)
Laser Multilvl CLIP Laser Multilvl CL An M Ye No No Ye Ye
IP alo ulti s s s
La g, -
ser Ad lev
Se dr el
ns es (th
or sa re
ble e-
N La lev
O se el)
TE r (Al
: Ph ert
Th ot ,
is o Ac
de Se tio
vic ns n,
e or, Fir

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

558 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

typ su e
e ch Al
is as ar
su AS m)
pp D-
ort LS
ed
in
bo
th
Ve
loc
iti
an
d
CL
IP
m
od
es,
ev
en
th
ou
gh
th
e
de
vic
e
its
elf
onl
y
su
pp
ort
s
CL
IP
m
od
e.
(A
SD
-L
S)
Beam Smoke Det Beam Smoke Det Int An Fir Ye Ye Ye Ye No
elli alo e s s s s
ge g, Al

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 559

nt Ad ar
Be dr m
am es
De sa
tec ble
tor Be
(A a
BD m
-2, S
AB m
D- ok
2F, e
AB De
D- tec
RT tor
2,
AB (V
D- elo
RT citi
2F) /
S
m
art
Sc
an
m
od
e
onl
y)
4-Warn Sensor 4-Warn Sensor 4- Ve Fir Ye No No Ye No
W loc e s s
arn iti Al
Se Se ar
ns rie m
or s
(M m
CS ulti
-4- -
W crit
arn eri
) a
se
ns
or,
su
ch
as
M
C

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

560 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

S-
4-
W
ar
n
4-Warn Dual 4-Warn Dual Ve Du Ye No No No No
4- loc al s
W iti Re
arn Se sp
Se rie on
ns s se
or m (Fi
(M ulti re
CS - Al
-4- crit ar
W eri m
arn a for
) se He
ns at
or, or
su He
ch at
as wit
M h
C sm
S- ok
4- e,
W fla
ar m
n e
an
d
ca
rb
on
m
on
oxi
de
Su
pe
rvi
so
ry
for
sm
ok
e,
fla
m

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 561

e
an
d
ca
rb
on
m
on
oxi
de
wit
ho
ut
he
at)
Fire/CO Sens Fire/CO Sens Ve Du Ye No No Ye No
Ph loc al s s
oto iti Re (Fi
/ Se sp re
CO rie on ala
Se s se rm
ns m (Fi re
or ulti re sp
(M - Al on
CS crit ar se
-C eri m onl
OF a for y)
) sm He
ok at
e or
an He
d at
C wit
O h
se sm
ns ok
or, e
su or
ch fla
as m
M e
C C
S- O
C Al
O ar
F. m
in
re
sp
on

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

562 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

se
to
ca
rb
on
m
on
oxi
de
.)
Fire/CO Trpl Fire/CO Trpl Ph Ve Tri Ye No No No No
oto loc ple s
/ iti Re (fo
CO Se sp r
Se rie on Fir
ns s se e
or m (Fi Al
(M ulti re ar
CS - Al m
-C crit ar Re
OF eri m sp
) a for on
sm He se
ok at )
e or Ye
an He s
d at (fo
C wit r
O h C
se sm O
ns ok Al
or, e ar
su or m
ch fla Re
as m sp
M e on
C C se
S- O )
C Al No
O ar (fo
F. m r
in Su
re pe
sp rvi
on so
se ry
to Re
ca sp
rb on
on se

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 563

m )
on
oxi
de
Su
pe
rvi
so
ry
for
sm
ok
e
or
fla
m
e
wit
ho
ut
he
at.
)
Aspirating Aspirating Int Sy M Ye No No Ye No
elli ste ulti s s
ge m -
nt Se lev
FA ns el
AS or (fiv
T Int e-
Se elli lev
ns ge el)
or nt (Al
(Si As ert
ngl pir ,
e- ati Ac
Ch ng tio
an S n
nel m 1,
) ok Ac
(A e tio
AD De n
-81 tec 2,
00) tor Fir
e
Al
ar
m
1,
Fir

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

564 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

e
Al
ar
m
2)
Asprating Multi Asprating Multi Int Sy M Ye No No Ye No
elli ste ulti s s
ge m -
nt Se lev
FA ns el
AS or (fiv
T Int e-
Se elli lev
ns ge el)
or nt (Al
(M M ert
ulti ulti ,
-C - Ac
ha Ch tio
nn an n
el) nel 1,
(A As Ac
AD pir tio
-94 ati n
00) ng 2,
S Fir
m e
ok Al
e ar
De m
tec 1,
tor Fir
e
Al
ar
m
2)

NOTE: The ILI-MB-E3 or ILI-S-E3 must be running at least V2.4-001 of the System
Operating Software in order to support MCS-4-Warn sensors. The ILI-MB-E3 or ILI-S-E3
must be running at least V2.5-001 of the System Operating Software in order to support
MCS-COF sensors. The ILI-MB-E3 or ILI-S-E3 must be running at least V3.1-001 of the
System Operating Software in order to support System Sensor Intelligent Aspirating
Smoke Detectors.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 565

7.4.2 Module Device Types

The following pre-defined module device types are available on the E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3
and ILI-MB-E3):

Input Modules -

Input Device Type Device Type As Phy Des Res Latc PAS Verif Cro
Reported By sical cript pon hing Allo icati ss
Panel Devi ion se ? wed on Zoni
ce Typ ? Allo ng
Typ e wed Allo
e ? wed
?

None Assigned No Device No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A

Devi devi Res
ce ce at pons
this e
addr
ess
Smoke Detector Smoke Detector AM Con Fire Yes Yes No Yes
M venti Alar
Mod onal m
ule Smo
(AM ke
M-2 Dete
F, ctor
AM moni
M-2I tore
F, d by
AM AM
M-4 M
F,
MMI-
10F)
Conv. Manual Station Manual Station AM Con Fire Yes Yes No No
M venti Alar
Mod onal m
ule pull
(AM stati
M-2 on
F, moni
AM tore
M-2I d by
F, AM
AM M
M-4

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

566 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

F,
MMI-
10F)
Plenum Det Plenum Det AM Con Fire Yes No No Yes
M venti Alar
Mod onal m
ule Plen
(AM um
M-2 Smo
F, ke
AM Dete
M-2I ctor
F, moni
AM tore
M-4 d by
F, AM
MMI- M
10F)
N.O. Contacts N.O. Contacts AM Any Fire Yes No No No
M nor Alar
Mod mall m
ule y
(AM open
M-2 cont
F, act
AM devi
M-2I ce
F, moni
AM tore
M-4 d by
F, AM
MMI- M
10F)
Heat Detector Heat Detector AM Any Fire Yes No No No
M conv Alar
Mod entio m
ule nal
(AM heat
M-2 dete
F, ctor
AM
M-2I
F,
AM
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Sub Loop Sub Loop AM Any Fire Yes No No Yes

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 567

M conv Alar
Mod entio m
ule nal
(AM initia
M-2 ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-2I circu
F, it.
AM
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Waterflow Sil Waterflow Sil AM Any Fire Yes No No No
M wate Alar
Mod rflow m
ule switc
(AM h
M-2 moni
F, tore
AM d by
M-2I AM
F, M.
AM
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Beam Smoke Det Beam Smoke AM Any Fire Yes Yes No Yes
Det M conv Alar
Mod entio m
ule nal
(AM bea
M-2 m
F, smo
AM ke
M-2I dete
F, ctor
AM moni
M-4 tore
F, d by
MMI- AM
10F) M.
Duct Detector Duct Detector AM Any Fire Yes No No Yes
M conv Alar
Mod entio m
ule nal
(AM Duct
M-2 dete

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

568 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

F, ctor
AM moni
M-2I tore
F, d by
AM AM
M-4 M
F,
MMI-
10F)
FACP FACP AM Any Fire Yes No No No
M rem Alar
Mod ote m
ule FAC
(AM P
M-2 Alar
F, m
AM dry
M-2I cont
F, acts
AM moni
M-4 tore
F, d by
MMI- AM
10F) M
Remote Zone Remote Zone Zon Any Fire Yes No No Yes
e conv Alar
Mod entio m
ule nal
(AM initia
M-4 ting
SF, devi
MMI- ce
6SF) circu
it
Smoke/Heat Det Smoke/Heat Det AM Any Fire Yes No No Yes
M conv Alar
Mod entio m
ule nal
(AM phot
M-2 o/
F, ther
AM mal
M-2I dete
F, ctor
AM moni
M-4 tore
F, d by
MMI- AM
10F) M

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 569

Supervisory Sw Supervisory Sw AM Any Sup No No No No

M nor ervis
Mod mall ory
ule y
(AM open
M-2 cont
F, act
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Tamper Sw Tamper Sw AM Any Sup Yes No No No
M nor ervis
Mod mall ory
ule y
(AM open
M-2 cont
F, act
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Waterflow NS Waterflow NS AM Any Fire Yes No No No
M wate Alar
Mod rflow m
ule switc (Non
(AM h -sile
M-2 moni ncea
F, tore ble)
AM d by
M-2I AM
F, M.
AM
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
NR Actuator L NR Actuator L AM Any Non- Yes No No No
M nor repo
Mod mall rting
ule y
(AM open

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

570 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

M-2 cont
F, act
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
NR Actuator NL NR Actuator NL AM Any Non- No No No No
M nor repo
Mod mall rting
ule y
(AM open
M-2 cont
F, act
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
NAC Silence Sw NAC Silence Sw AM Any Silen N/A N/A N/A N/A
M nor ce
Mod mall Swit
ule y ch
(AM open
M-2 cont
F, act
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Reset Sw Reset Sw AM Any Res N/A N/A N/A N/A
M nor et
Mod mall Swit
ule y ch
(AM open
M-2 cont
F, act
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 571

AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Fire Drill Sw Fire Drill Sw AM Any Fire N/A N/A N/A N/A
M nor Drill
Mod mall Swit
ule y ch
(AM open
M-2 cont
F, act
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Alarm Ack Sw Alarm Ack Sw AM Any Alar N/A N/A N/A N/A
M nor m
Mod mall Ackn
ule y owle
(AM open dge
M-2 cont Swit
F, act ch
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Trbl Ack Sw Trbl Ack Sw AM Any Trou N/A N/A N/A N/A
M nor ble
Mod mall Ackn
ule y owle
(AM open dge
M-2 cont Swit
F, act ch
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 572 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Addr. Manual Station Manual Station Man MS- Fire Yes Yes No No
ual 7AF Alar
Stati Addr m
on essa
Mod ble
ule pull
(MS- stati
7AF) on

Output Modules -

Output Device Device Type As Physical Description Silenceable?

Type Reported By Device Type
Panel

Signal AOM Sil NAC AOM Sil Signal Module Supervised Yes
(AOM-2SF, signal control
MMO-6SF) module, such as
AOM-2SF.
Signal AOM NS NAC AOM NS Signal Module Supervised No
(AOM-2SF, signal control
MMO-6SF) module, such as
AOM-2SF.
Form C AOM Form C AOM Form-C Module Form-C Dry Yes
NS NS (AOM-2RF, Contact control
MMO-6RF) module, such as
AOM-2RF
Form C AOM Form C AOM Form-C Module Form-C Dry No
NS NS (AOM-2RF, Contact control
MMO-6RF) module, such as
AOM-2RF

7.4.3 Disable Groups

The E3 Series has the ability to disable groups of input devices and output devices based on
the evaluation of CAM expressions. There are three classifications of Disable Groups that
are available:

1.) Disable Input Groups - When the CAM expression for the indicated Input Group goes
TRUE, all devices assigned to the Input Group will enter DISCONNECT trouble and will
become disabled.

2.) Disable Output Groups - When the CAM expression for the indicated Output Group goes
TRUE, all devices assigned to the Output Group will enter DISCONNECT trouble and will
become disabled.

3.) Disable Type Tags - Disable Type Tags allow both input and output devices to be

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 573

disabled with the activation of one CAM expression. Disable Type Tags, which range in
number from 600-699, may be assigned to the third and/or fourth Input/Output Group
assignment of a device. When the CAM expression for the indicated Disable Type Tag goes
TRUE, all devices assigned to the Disable Type Tag will enter DISCONNECT trouble and
will become disabled. Disable Type Tags may be assigned a short description in this screen
507 , and will appear in the third and fourth group assignment drop-down lists in the Configure

NAC's, Module Parameters and Sensor Parameters screens in place of the Disable Type
Tag's number. It will also be disabled in the CAM entry screen for the Disable Type Tag.

NOTE: A Disable Type Tag may only be assigned to the fourth Input Group assignment
for MCS-COF Devices configured for "Triple Smoke/Heat/CO Alarm Response",
including the "Photo/CO Trpl" pre-defined device type. Likewise, a Disable Type Tag
may only be assigned to the fourth Input Group assignment for intelligent FAAST
devices on an E3 Series FACP that are configured for the default Five-level Multi-level
Alarm Response 573 .

7.4.4 Fivel-level Multi-level Response

Five-level multi-level response produces a graduating response to an increase in smoke
detected by a sensor. The responses range from Alert, the lowest level, to Fire Alarm 2.
Each of the five different levels allows for unique control-by-event by activating different bits
in the System Status map. The levels are as follows:

Alert:
System Produces a trouble condition. Activates YELLOW trouble LEDs,
Response: activates general trouble output list, if configured to do so. Reports
event via DACT, if configured to do so. Activates Trouble contacts.

Input Group(s) · Activates the "Trouble" bit associated with the Input Group assigned
affected: in the "Group 2" Column.

Action 1:
System Produces a pre-alarm condition. Activates RED alarm LEDs, activates
Response: general Action output list, if configured to do so. Reports event via
DACT, if configured to do so. Activates Alarm contacts on panel.

Input Group(s) · Activates the "Trouble" bit associated with the Input Group assigned
affected: in the "Group 2" Column.
· Activates the "Trouble" bit associated with the Input Group assigned
in the "Group 3" Column.

Action 2:
System Produces a pre-alarm condition. Activates RED alarm LEDs, activates
Response: general Action output list, if configured to do so. Reports event via
DACT, if configured to do so. Activates Alarm contacts on panel.

Input Group(s) · Activates the "Trouble" bit associated with the Input Group assigned
affected: in the "Group 2" Column.
· Activates the "Trouble" bit associated with the Input Group assigned

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 574 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

in the "Group 3" Column.

· Activates the "Alarm" bit associated with the Input Group assigned
in the "Group 1" Column.

Fire Alarm 1:
System Produces a fire alarm condition. Activates RED alarm LEDs, activates
Response: general output lists (Day or Night alarm), if configured to do so.
Reports event via DACT, if configured to do so. Activates Alarm
contacts on panel.

Input Group(s) · Activates the "Trouble" bit associated with the Input Group assigned
affected: in the "Group 2" Column.
· Activates the "Trouble" bit associated with the Input Group assigned
in the "Group 3" Column.
· Activates the "Alarm" bit associated with the Input Group assigned
in the "Group 1" Column.
· Activates the "Alarm" bit associated with the Input Group assigned
in the "Group 2" Column.

Fire Alarm 2:
System Produces a fire alarm condition. Activates RED alarm LEDs, activates
Response: general output lists (Day or Night alarm), if configured to do so.
Reports event via DACT, if configured to do so. Activates Alarm
contacts on panel.

Input Group(s) · Activates the "Trouble" bit associated with the Input Group assigned
affected: in the "Group 2" Column.
· Activates the "Trouble" bit associated with the Input Group assigned
in the "Group 3" Column.
· Activates the "Alarm" bit associated with the Input Group assigned
in the "Group 1" Column.
· Activates the "Alarm" bit associated with the Input Group assigned
in the "Group 2" Column.
· Activates the "Alarm" bit associated with the Input Group assigned
in the "Group 3" Column.

7.5 DACT Reporting

One of the features of E3 Series systems is the ability to configure Custom DACT Reporting
Codes that are reported when the DACT-E3 is using either Ademco Contact ID or SIA
formats. This feature allows better identification of system events at the central station
receiver allowing for faster response to system events by appropriate personnel.

This feature is not enabled by default. To enable this feature, the user must do the
following:

1.) Open the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3 or ILI95-MB-E3 node that hosts the DACT-E3.

2.) For ILI-MB-E3 or ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, open the DACT Settings screen. For S3 Series
FACP nodes, select the General Settings screen and then select the DACT Settings tab.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 575

Ensure that the DACT Enabled checkbox is checked.

3.) Select the "Use Custom (per-device) reporting codes" option.

4.) Configure custom codes using the Input Devices and Output Devices screens.

NOTE: DACT Codes may also be automatically configured when adding SLC devices to
the configuration. See this page 575 for more information.

NOTE: If this feature is not enabled, the DACT-E3 will use the "Standard" reporting code
format, which is similar to the format used by the 7100.

NOTE: Only events reported from NGA, S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series or ILI95-E3 Series nodes
will be reported using the "custom" reporting code format. Events originating from all
other node types will use the "Standard" reporting code format, which is similar to the
format used by the 7100.

NOTE: All ILI-MB-E3 and ILI-S-E3 nodes in a network must contain at least V1.2 firmware
in order to take advantage of this feature. All ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3 nodes are
already compatible with this feature and do not require a firmware upgrade. All S3 Series
nodes are already compatible with this feature and do not require a firmware upgrade.
NGA nodes require at least V3.00 firmware in order to issue events that include "custom"
reporting codes.

7.5.1 Auto-creation of DACT Codes

The user may elect to allow CAMWorks to assign specific DACT codes when adding SLC
devices to the system's configuration. To do this, the user may select from the following
DACT Code options when adding new devices:

· None - When selected, a code of 000 (which is used to assign no code to a device) will be
added when assigning devices.
· Device Address - When selected, CAMWorks will add a code based on the device's
address. See this page 575 for a list of codes for each address.
· Device Type - When selected, CAMWorks will add a code representing the type of device
being added. See this page 576 for a list of codes for each device type.
· System Response - When selected, CAMWorks will add a code representing the type of
system response produced by the device when activated. See this page 578 for a list of
codes for each response type.
NOTE: The System Response selection is not available for AOMs.
· Custom - When selected, the user may add a custom code. This custom code will be
used for all checked devices when the devices are added to the configuration.

7.5.1.1 Device Address Table

Loop Range DACT Codes

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 576 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

1 Sensor 1-159
1 Module 161-319
2 Sensor 321-479
2 Module 481-639

7.5.1.2 Device Type Table

CAMWorks Device Type Panel Device Type DACT Code

None Assigned No Device 000

Ion Detector Ion Detector 001
Critical Ion Critical Ion 002
Photo Detector Photo Detector 003
Critical Photo Critical Photo 004
Photo/Heat Det Photo/Heat Det 005
Thermal Det Thermal Det 006
Acclimate Acclimate 007
Smoke Detector Smoke Detector 008
Conv. Manual Station Manual Station 009
Plenum Det Plenum Det 010
N.O. Contacts N.O. Contacts 011
Heat Detector Heat Detector 012
Sub Loop Sub Loop 013
Waterflow Sil Waterflow Sil 014
Beam Smoke Det Beam Smoke Det 015
Duct Detector Duct Detector 016
FACP FACP 017
Remote Zone Remote Zone 018
Smoke/Heat Det Smoke/Heat Det 019
Supervisory Sw Supervisory Sw 020
Tamper Sw Tamper Sw 021
Waterflow NS Waterflow NS 022
NR Actuator L NR Actuator L 023
NR Actuator NL NR Actuator NL 024
NR Ion Det NL NR Ion Det NL 025
NR Photo Det NL NR Photo Det NL 026
Ion Multilevel Ion Multilevel 027
Pho Multilevel Pho Multilevel 028
NAC Silence Sw NAC Silence Sw 029
Reset Sw Reset Sw 030
Fire Drill Sw Fire Drill Sw 031
Alarm Ack Sw Alarm Ack Sw 032
Trbl Ack Sw Trbl Ack Sw 033
Signal AOM Sil NAC AOM Sil 036
Signal AOM NS NAC AOM NS 037
Form C AOM Sil Form C AOM Sil 038
Form C AOM NS Form C AOM NS 039
Ion Duct Spv Ion Duct Spv 040

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 577

Photo Duct Spv Photo Duct Spv 041

Ion Duct Det Ion Duct Det 042
Photo Duct Det Photo Duct Det 043
Laser Sensor CLIP Laser Sensor 044
Ion Supv Ion Supv 045
Photo Supv Photo Supv 046
Acclimate Supv Acclimate Supv 047
(User Defined) (User Defined) 048
(User Defined) (User Defined) 049
(User Defined) (User Defined) 050
(User Defined) (User Defined) 051
(User Defined) (User Defined) 052
(User Defined) (User Defined) 053
(User Defined) (User Defined) 054
(User Defined) (User Defined) 055
(User Defined) (User Defined)
or or 056
Vel. Laser Sensor Laser Sensor
(User Defined) (User Defined)
or or 057
Vel. Laser Multilvl Laser Multilvl
Acclimate Dual Acclimate Dual 058
Addr. Manual Station Manual Station 059
Laser Multilvl CLIP Laser Multilvl 060
Beam Smoke Det Beam Smoke Det 061
Multi Sensor Multi Sensor
064
(Reserved) (Reserved) 065
(Reserved) (Reserved) 067
(Reserved) (Reserved) 070
(Reserved) (Reserved) 071
(Reserved) (Reserved) 072
4-Warn Sensor 4-Warn Sensor
073
4-Warn Dual 4-Warn Dual
074
Fire/CO Sens Fire/CO Sens
075
Fire/CO Trpl Fire/CO Trpl
076
Aspirating Aspirating
077
Asprating Multi Asprating Multi
078
(Reserved) (Reserved) 079
(Reserved) (Reserved) 080
(Reserved) (Reserved) 081
(Reserved) (Reserved) 082
(Reserved) (Reserved) 083

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 578 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

(Reserved) (Reserved) 084

(Reserved) (Reserved) 085
(Reserved) (Reserved) 086
(Reserved) (Reserved) 087
(Reserved) (Reserved) 088
(Reserved) (Reserved) 089
(User Defined) (User Defined) 090
(User Defined) (User Defined) 091
(User Defined) (User Defined) 092
(User Defined) (User Defined) 093
(User Defined) (User Defined) 094
(User Defined) (User Defined) 095
(User Defined) (User Defined) 096
(User Defined) (User Defined) 097
(User Defined) (User Defined) 098
(User Defined) (User Defined) 099
(User Defined) (User Defined) 100
(User Defined) (User Defined) 101
(User Defined) (User Defined) 102
(User Defined) (User Defined) 103
(User Defined) (User Defined) 104
(User Defined) (User Defined) 105
(User Defined) (User Defined) 106
(User Defined) (User Defined) 107
(User Defined) (User Defined) 108
(User Defined) (User Defined) 109
(User Defined) (User Defined) 110
(User Defined) (User Defined) 111
(User Defined) (User Defined) 112
(User Defined) (User Defined) 113
(User Defined) (User Defined) 114
(User Defined) (User Defined) 115
(User Defined) (User Defined) 116
(User Defined) (User Defined) 117
(User Defined) (User Defined) 118
(User Defined) (User Defined) 119
(User Defined) (User Defined) 120
(User Defined) (User Defined) 121
(User Defined) (User Defined) 122
(User Defined) (User Defined) 123
(User Defined) (User Defined) 124
(User Defined) (User Defined) 125
(User Defined) (User Defined) 126
(User Defined) (User Defined) 127
7.5.1.3 System Response Table

System Response Type DACT Code

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 E3 Series (ILI-MB-E3 & ILI-S-E3) 579

Fire Alarm 000

Manual Station Alarm 001
Supervisory 002
(Non-Latch)
Supervisory 003
(Latch)
Fire Alarm 004
(Non-silenceable)
Smoke Alarm 005
Multi-level (three-level) 007
(Alert, Action, Fire Alarm)
Silence Switch 008
Reset Switch 009
Fire Drill Switch 010
Alarm Acknowledge Switch 011
Trouble Acknowledge Switch 012
Activate AOM (Signal) / Activate Control 014
Element (SCE-95)
Activate AOM (Form-C) / Activate Control 015
Element (RCE-95 & BCE-95)
Dual Response 016
Multi-criteria Sensor profile response 017

Action (Pre-alarm) Response 018

Alert (Trouble) Response 019

Trouble Response 020

Reserved 021
Gas Alarm Response 022

CO Alarm Response 023

Dual Response 024

(Fire Alarm for Heat or Heat with smoke or
flame
CO Alarm in response to carbon monoxide.)

Triple Response 025

(Fire Alarm for Heat or Heat with smoke or
flame
CO Alarm in response to carbon monoxide
Supervisory for smoke or flame without
heat.)

Multi-level (five-level) 026

(Alert, Action 1, Action 2, Fire Alarm 1, Fire

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

580 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Alarm 2)

MNS Alarm 027

MNS Supervisory 028

MNS Activate AOM (Signal) / MNS Activate 029

Control Element (SCE-95)
MNS Activate AOM (Form-C) / MNS Activate 030
Control Element (RCE-95 & BCE-95)
MNS Trouble Response 031

Carbon Monoxide (CO) Supervisory 032

Response

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

Part

VIII
 582 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

8 7100
8.1 Basic steps in configuring a 7100 panel
8.1.1 Programming node-wide parameters and default settings
There are many global programming options available for the 7100. Most of these options
have been initialized to default settings when the project was created and initialized. These
default settings should be appropriate for a basic 7100 panel configuration. However, any or
all of these parameters may be modified to suit the needs of any individual custom
configuration.

To modify any of these settings, select the appropriate icons under the current 7100 node in
the Project Explorer 56 .

General Settings 593

NAC Settings 599
DACT Settings 601 (7100-1D and 7100-2D models only)

The following settings, located in Project Globals, will affect the 7100:
Passwords 35
User Defined Types 36
Miscellaneous Globals 41

The following Regional Settings will affect the 7100:

Night/Weekend/Holiday Schedule 43

Finally, there are settings on the Silence Settings 44 and Node Summary 57 screens that
also affect the 7100.

After completing globals programming, you're ready to continue with "Programming loop
devices and groups".
8.1.2 Programming Loop devices and groups
The 7100 system is configured as either a one or two Loop system. There are 197 total
addresses available for programming on each Loop. The device addresses for each loop
include 1 - 99 for sensors and 1 - 98 for modules (AMMs and AOMs). Module address 99 on
each Loop is reserved.

Each device address has a number of programmable options available. These include
options such as Device Type, Group(s), Description Label, etc. Some of these options, such
as sensitivity settings and verification, can be set on a node-wide basis in the "General
Settings" entry screen. These settings can also be modified by point address in the
appropriate entry screen.

To program the device types and I/O groups for each address, select either the Input
Devices (all sensors and monitor modules) or Output Devices (AOMs) icon from the Project
Explorer 56 .

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 583

The entry screens for these types are very similar. The main difference is the list of device
types that are available on each entry screen.

See Input Devices 605 and Output Devices 611 for programming information on these entry
screens.

After completing SLC devices and groups entries, continue to "Entering Labels and
modifying default settings for SLC devices"
8.1.3 Entering labels and modifying default settings for Loop devices
To enter labels for each Loop device, select either the Input Devices (all sensors and
AMM's) or Output Devices (all AOM's) icon from the Project Explorer 56 .

To enter a label or modify the global default settings for any device, select the appropriate
device from the grid. Labels may be entered for each address in the description label entry
field. Labels can be up to 19 characters in length.

Other fields can also be modified by address on the entry grid. Click on the following help
links to view programming information for the various device types.

Input Devices 605

Output Devices 611

For a description of the Group I/O concept, see Input/Output Groups

8.1.4 Entering labels for LED Annunciator
If LDM-7100 LED annunciators are present in the system, the user may assign labels for
each of the LEDs available on the annunciator. Labels can be up to thirty characters in
length. These labels are for programming convenience and are not downloaded to the 7100
panel. They appear in the "Input Groups" entry screen when selecting any of the three
programmable LEDS that are available for programming for each group. These labels
should mirror the actual user labels on the LED annunciator.

See LED Annunciators 598 and Input Groups 610 for more information.
8.1.5 Programming Group Options
Each input group in the system has several programmable options. These options can be
modified in the "Input Groups" entry screen. Options available for each group include
"Activate General Alarm List", and "Activate General Supervisory List". Input addresses
that comprise the current group are displayed in the list at the bottom of the screen. This list
is updated as the user moves from group to group.

There is also an entry field to include the group in a cross zone (1-25). For an understanding
of cross zone operation in the 7100, see Cross Zone Functions 644 .

See Input Groups 610 and General Output Lists for further information.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 584 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

8.1.6 Downloading System Configuration

In order to perform a configuration download to the system, a connection must be made
between the RS-232 port on the PC/Laptop to either the RJ11 connector of any INI-7100
node or to the serial port on an S3 Series FACP, NGA, ANX-SR, ANX-MR or ILI-E3 Series
node that may be present in the system before attempting to download. If an S3 Series
FACP, ANX-SR or ANX-MR is available, the Ethernet port may also be used for downloads
via TCP/IP.

NOTE: Downloads to Standalone 7100 panels or Standalone E3 Series systems may only
be made via the panel's local serial port. Downloads to Standalone S3 Series system may
be made via the panel's local serial port or its Ethernet port.

The following options on the Download screen are applicable to configuration downloads:

Port Options -
Select whether the download should be made via TCP/IP (Ethernet) or RS-232 (Comm).
This option is available only when the selected Gateway is an ANX or S3 Series FACP.

NOTE: It is not possible to download to INI-7100 nodes via Ethernet.

Select Comm Port -

Select the serial port to be used to connect to the system. Available COM ports range from
COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection option is also available. If selected, the
auto-detection will attempt to determine which of the PC's serial ports is connected to an
appropriate node. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct serial port it will be
necessary to manually select the correct port. This selection field is unavailable if the user
has opted to connect to the system via TCP/IP (Ethernet).

Enter IP Address -
If the user has opted to connect to the system via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the
IP address of the S3 Series FACP, ANX-SR or ANX-MR that is connected to the system.
This selection field is unavailable if the user has opted to connect via RS-232 (Comm).

Download Gateway -
You must select whether your computer is connected to an INI-7100 node, an S3 Series
FACP, an ILI-E3 Series node/NGA or to an ANX. For 7100 Standalone, S3 Series
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects, this field is not available since the PC must be
connected directly to the panel. An auto-detection option is also available. If the
auto-detection fails to determine the correct download gateway the download gateway
selection must be made manually.

NOTE: In order to download to S3 Series or E3 Series nodes such as the NGA and the
ILI-MB-E3 via RS-232, you MUST connect your computer to the serial port of an
E3-compatible node. All other node types can be downloaded from either an INI-7100 or
an E3-compatible node. All node types may be downloaded via the ANX's RS-232 port or
Ethernet port.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 585

Show CAM Memory Usage -

If this option is selected, CAMWorks will display a screen indicating how much of the
available CAM memory is being used by the current configuration after all of the CAMs for
the current node have been translated.

Save Configuration In Binary Format -

This option, intended only for diagnostic use, saves a binary file containing an exact image
of the target node's configuration database. This option should only be used at the
discretion of Gamewell-FCI Technical Support 932 personnel.

Select Application Type To Download -

In this section of the screen, CAMWorks presents several options for selecting what data to
download to the target panel. In the case of downloading configuration data to the target
panel, the "Configuration" option button must always be selected. The following options
appear when the user elects to perform a configuration download:

Send CAMs - When selected, CAMWorks will download CAMs to the selected node.
Send Device Labels / CAM Text (NGA nodes only) - When selected, CAMWorks
will download SLC device labels or CAM Text messages to the selected node.
Send Virtual Switch Labels (S3 Series FACP and ANX nodes only) - When
selected, CAMWorks will download Virtual Switch labels to the selected node.
Send Configuration - When selected, CAMWorks will download the configuration to
the selected node.
Download Screen Saver (NGA Only) - When selected, CAMWorks will download
images to the NGA for use as a screen saver.
Download Logo (NGA Only) - When selected, CAMWorks will download a user
supplied image that will be displayed on the System Normal screen.

Download -
Click on this button to begin the download. The user will be prompted to enter the system
Level 4 access code before the download will begin. If all goes well, the Download process
will continue until completed. The panel will reset following a successful download.

NOTE: If the system has not been previously configured, you should enter the system
default level 4 password. If a custom level 4 password has already been downloaded to
the panel, then that code should be entered instead.

Close -
Click on this command button to exit this screen.

Validation -
Click on this button to open the Program Validation 49 screen to scan the current project for
known types of configuration errors.

7100 Upload -
Click on this button upload a configuration from a 7100 panel. This function is only available
for 7100 Standalone projects. See this page 870 for more information.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 586 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

8.1.7 Printing/Viewing configuration data tables

There are two options available for printing configuration files in CAMWorks. To print all
reports at once, right-click the current node icon in the Project Explorer 56 and select Print
Node. To view or print individual reports, click on the current node icon in the Project
Explorer 56 to bring up the Report Viewer window. In this screen, any available report can
be selected for viewing or printing.

8.2 7100 - How Do I?

8.2.1 Include Output in system General Output List
To place NAC1, NAC2, or Municipal circuit in a General Output List, select the NAC Settings
599 icon in the Project Explorer 56 . In the data entry grid there are checkboxes for each of

the General Output Lists. To assign an output to a list, Click the checkbox to select that
item.

To place an AOM in a General Output List, select the Output Devices 611 icon from Project
Explorer 56 and follow the same procedure outlined above.

8.2.2 Assign specific input to output relationships for 7100

To assign specific outputs to be activated by certain initiating devices, Input/Output Groups
must be used.

By assigning individual inputs and outputs to groups the user is able to create relationships
between these groups.

Two methods may be used to link input devices and output devices. These are:

1.) Direct linkage using local groups. A device can be assigned a local group number
(1-99) in the Input Devices or Output Devices screen. An output device configured as a
member of any local group would automatically activate upon the activation of any input
device that is also a member of that same local group.

2.) Conditional Action Map (CAM 21 ) Logic. The user can assign a CAM controlled group
(125-224) to an output device in the NAC Settings or Output Devices) entry screens.
Once that is done, the user must write a CAM Expression in the CAM Output Groups 618
screen. When the assigned CAM Expression goes TRUE the output devices will activate.

8.2.3 Create a custom display banner for panel

The System ID Label appears on the panel display when the system is in "System Normal"
condition. This label will also appear as a header for any event report that originates from
this node. Any node that prints the event through it's serial port will include this information.

The System ID Label is configured in the Node Summary 57 screen, which is called System
Overview for non-networked projects. Enter the label text in the System ID Label text box.
This label can be up to 19 characters in length and may not be blank. Click on the Save

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 587

button to save the entry.

8.2.4 Define my own AMM device type
The 7100 allows the user to define up to eight AMM device types. These types are based on
predefined response types. The available response types are: Alarm, Manual Station,
Supervisory, Tamper, and Waterflow. The panel response is determined according to the
known characteristics of these types.

The User Defined Device Types are configured on a project-level instead of the node-level,
meaning that each S3 Series FACP, 7100, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3 and NGA that may be
present in the system will use the same set of User Defined AMM Device Types.

To access these settings, you must access the User Defined Device Types screen, which
may be found in the Project Globals 35 > Network Settings 35 > User Defined Types 36 icon
in The Ribbon 27 , or by accessing the User Defined Types 62 icon, which is under the
Network Settings 61 icon under Project Globals 61 in the Project Explorer 56 .

NOTE: For 7100 Standalone projects, the icon for User Defined Types 591 appears under
the 7100 panel icon.

See this page 36 for more information.

8.2.5 Change default settings for a particular SLC address
Default settings for Sensor sensitivity and verification can be overridden for a specific Loop
device by selecting the Input Devices screen and modifying the entries for that device.

These entry fields should currently be set to "DFlt". This indicates that this point is
configured to the global settings for these options (set in the General Settings 593 screen).
To change an entry, click on the entry field and select a new setting from the drop down list.
8.2.6 Disable downloading for a particular SLC address
Some projects may have to be completed in phases. CAMWorks allows the user to
configure all of the points in the system and download only those devices that are physically
present in the system at any given time.

The Input Devices and Output devices screens contain an Active field. The Active field
contains an icon that may be toggled by double-clicking or by pressing the space bar when
the field has the focus (the background of the field will be highlighted when the field has the
focus). The icon itself will turn green to indicate that that address is active, or gray to
indicate that the address is inactive. When downloading a configuration, the inactive
devices will be skipped. When the inactive devices are ready to be downloaded, just toggle
the Active icons back to green, and they will be sent to the panel.
8.2.7 View selected reports in a window
To view or print individual reports for the current node, select the node's icon in the Project
Explorer 56 . A Report Viewer window will appear in the main area 53 . Select the report of
interest from the drop-down list and then click the Show Report command button.

This feature displays the reports exactly as they will be printed. If the report contains multiple

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 588 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

pages, you can move among the pages by clicking on the Move Next > and the Move
Previous < arrows located at the top of the screen.

To print the report, click on the Printer icon ( ) on the toolbar at the top of the Report
Viewer window.
8.2.8 Export file in different formats
CAMWorks allows the user to export data files in different formats. For example, if you
would like to export a file in a Word For Windows format, select node's icon in the Project
Explorer 56 . A Report Viewer window will appear in the main area 53 of the screen. Select
the report of interest from the grid by placing a check mark in the selection field next to the
desired report and then click on the Show Report command button. The selected report will
appear on the screen. To export this document in the chosen format, click on the Export icon
(disk icon, ) at the top of the screen. Select the format option from the list of available
options and click OK to create the file.

CAMWorks also includes a method of performing a direct export to a Microsoft Excel file.
See this page 50 for more information.
8.2.9 Create Zone Codes
Zone Coding allows an FACP to produce a distinct coded pattern on its NAC outputs, based
upon the particular input device or cross zone that caused the alarm condition.

The 7100 supports up to 63 different codes, each of which may be configured for any
pattern of two, three, or four digits. The digits may range from 1 to 14 pulses. After the
necessary codes are entered in the Zone Code table (in Zone Code screen), they can be
associated with individual input devices and cross zones in the appropriate entry screen (i.e.
Input Devices and Cross Zones). Multiple inputs may be assigned to run the same code, if
desired, or each input may have a unique code (up to a limit of 63 different codes).

To set the pulses for a particular zone code, simply select the digit in the entry grid and
choose the appropriate number of pulses for each digit from the drop-down list.
8.2.10 Setup a cross zone
The 7100 provides up to 25 cross zones. There are two types of cross zones available. One
type is group cross zoning, and the other is point cross zoning. Each cross zone provides a
counting function with a user configurable trigger level. The trigger may be set to any value
between 2 and 7.

NOTE: If a system is to use both by group and by point cross zoning, input device groups
must not be shared by both types of cross zoning as this could lead to unexpected
results.

The cross zone activates when it has been triggered by the number of groups or points that
matches the configured trigger level. When activated, the cross zone activates the outputs
of the configured cross zone group (100-124). The system groups 100 through 124 are set
aside for cross zone use and are not available as standard I/O groups. The General Alarm
outputs are also activated, if configured to do so for that particular cross zone. An "XZONE
ALRM" is reported on the display and printer. A zone code may also be configured for cross

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 589

zones. It is executed when the cross zone activates.

Point Cross Zone – A Point Cross Zone is a collection of individual points configured into a
virtual cross zone group. Point Cross Zoning provides a two-stage fire alarm condition
where the first alarm in the virtual group initiates an Action condition. The second stage
alarm is triggered when the number of alarms in the virtual cross zone group has reached a
pre-set trigger level (user programmable).

Point Cross Zone Programming:

1.) In the Cross Zone screen, select the desired Cross Zone by clicking on the cross
zone number on the left.
2.) Click on the Add button to assign devices to the cross zone.
3.) A selection window will open that will display all devices on the current node that are
eligible to be used for cross zoning. Devices may be selected by placing a check
mark in the selection field (labeled "Sel").
4.) Click the Add button to add the devices to the cross-zone. Devices are removed
from the grid when they are added to the cross zone. Devices can be removed from
the cross zone later if desired.
5.) Click Close to dismiss the Add Devices window.
6.) Select the desired options for each virtual cross zone group. See this page 616 for
more information.

NOTE: Only certain device types are eligible for cross zoning. See the following pages
for information about compatible device types:

7100 Sensor Device Types 647

7100 Module Device Types 650

NOTE: Verification and PAS cannot be mixed with Cross Zoning.

NOTE: Cross Zone Groups on the 7100 do not have associated bits in the System Status
Map. Therefore, it is not possible to directly read the status of a cross zone in a CAM
expression. If desired, an AOM/AMM combination may be used to set a bit in the 7100's
System Status Map that may be used in CAMs.

NOTE: If desired, the system may be configured to produce the full cross-zone response
for point cross zones, even if the system is already in alarm by enabling the "Enable
Multiple Point Cross Zone Activations When System is in Alarm" option in the Cross Zone
616 screen.

Group Cross Zone – The 7100 provides group cross zoning by linking input groups directly
to a particular cross zone. The total number of point cross zone and group cross zone
virtual groups is twenty-five in any mixture. When any device in a member input group goes
into alarm, that one device will count towards the cross zone's trigger level. If another
smoke detector in the same input group goes into alarm it will not increase the trigger count.
The cross zone trigger level will increase if a smoke detector in a different input group that is
a member of the cross zone goes into alarm.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 590 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Group Cross Zone Programming:

1.) In the Input Devices screen, add at least one input group to each sensor that will be
a part of group cross zoning. More than one sensor can be assigned to the same
group, however multiple sensors in the same group will only count as one alarm input
toward the activation threshold. Group cross zones are intended to collect multiple
group assignments into a virtual group cross zone.
2.) Go to the Input Groups screen.
3.) Select the desired Cross Zone number in the "Group Cross Zone" field for each
member input group.
2.) Go to the Cross Zone screen.
3.) Set the desired trigger level for the cross zone.
4.) Select the desired options for each virtual cross zone group. See this page 616 for
more information.
5.) Click Save to save all of the changes.

NOTE: Only certain device types are eligible for cross zoning. See the following pages
for information about compatible device types:

7100 Sensor Device Types 647

7100 Module Device Types 650

NOTE: Verification and PAS cannot be mixed with Cross Zoning.

NOTE: Cross Zone Groups on the 7100 do not have associated bits in the System Status
Map. Therefore, it is not possible to directly read the status of a cross zone in a CAM
expression. If desired, an AOM/AMM combination may be used to set a bit in the 7100's
System Status Map that may be used in CAMs.

NOTE: If a system is to use both by group and by point cross zoning, input device groups
must not be shared by both types of cross zoning as this could lead to unexpected
results.

NOTE: All cross zone triggers on the 7100 must reside on the same panel.

NOTE: Cross Zone groups (used to link output devices to a cross zone activation) affect
only the local 7100 panel. If desired, an AOM/AMM combination may be used to set a bit
in the 7100's System Status Map that may be read by other nodes.

8.3 7100 - Configuration Settings

8.3.1 Passwords
NOTE: This screen appears under the 7100 only for 7100 Standalone projects. For
networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Network Settings 61 \Passwords
61 .

The system allows four levels of password access to prevent unauthorized modification of

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 591

critical system functions. In addition, the system supports a maximum of five different
passwords for each of the four access levels to provide for unique identification of up to five
different users. Each password must be numeric and may range from (000001 - 999999).
The value of 000000 is not allowed.

There are four levels of access granted by the system. These are Level 1, Level 2, Level 3,
and Level 4. Level 4 grants the user the greatest amount of access, while Level 1 grants the
least amount of access.

NOTE: The Level 4 Password may not be set to any of the standard default passwords
(111111, 222222, 333333 or 444444.)

There are five different users available, labeled as Users 1-5. This allows the user to create
five different sets of passwords (one for each access level.) The system's history log will
indicate which user gained access to the system when unique passwords are assigned to
each user.

NOTE: Even though CAMWorks requires the user to assign a non-default Level 4
password, it is still highly recommended to change the remaining system passwords to
non-default values.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

8.3.2 User Defined Types

NOTE: This screen appears under the 7100 only for 7100 Standalone projects. For
networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Network Settings 61 \User Defined
Types 62 .

The 7100 Series FACP provides the user with the ability to create custom AMM module
device types.

Device types 48-55 are reserved for 7100 User Defined Device Types. In the grid, the
device type number is highlighted in yellow for these device types.

The options available for each user defined type are as follows:

User Defined Device Type - This identifies what the physical device type is for this user
defined type. The following device types are available:

Available User Defined Device Types for the 7100:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 592 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

User Defined Device Type Description Allowed Response Types

AMM Module Addressable Monitor See AMM Modules.

Module, used to monitor any
normally open contact
device.

System Response Type - Selects the desired response to an activation from this device
type. See tables above for information about the available response types for each physical
device type.

Description - The text that will be associated with this User Defined Type. This will be used
for both on-screen and printed event reports. This description may be up to fourteen
characters in length.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

8.3.3 Miscellaneous
NOTE: This screen appears under the 7100 only for 7100 Standalone projects. For
networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Network Settings 61 \
Miscellaneous 66 .

The following system settings are configured through the Miscellaneous screen:

Trouble Reminder - If this option is enabled then acknowledged trouble events will be
periodically "unacknowledged". This means that the system's buzzer will be turned back on
and the System Trouble LED will blink as if a new trouble condition were being reported.

Multiple Trouble Acknowledge - Turning this option on will allow up to ten trouble
conditions to be acknowledged with one Trouble Acknowledge command.

Walk Test Timeout - The Walk Test timeout will cause the system to automatically cancel
the Walk Test mode if it isn't manually turned off. This value may be (30, 60 or 90 Minutes).

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

8.3.4 Night/Weekend/Holiday Schedule

NOTE: This screen appears under the 7100 only for 7100 Standalone projects. For

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 593

networked projects, it appears under Project Globals 61 \Regional Settings 70 \Night/

Weekend/Holiday Schedule 70 .

With the Gamewell-FCI 7100, you can optimize the sensitivity of the sensors for particular
times during the day, on weekends and on holidays. This can be used to increase sensitivity
for those times when a building is not in use. When the system's real-time clock reaches a
configured time or day, the system will automatically begin to use the Night Sensitivity
settings configured for each sensor. In addition, any Fire alarm that occurs during this time
will activate the General Night Alarm output list as well as both SSM bit 440 (Day Alarm or
Night Alarm) and SSM bit 441 (Night Alarm.)

Night Schedule - Select Night Start and Night Stop operation times from the drop-down
lists. During the programmed times, the sensors will operate with the defined Night
Sensitivity settings.

Weekend Schedule - Define weekend days for night sensitivity operation by checking the
appropriate days.

Holiday Schedule - Configure Holidays for Night sensitivity operation by clicking on the
calendar icon ( ). A calendar will be displayed. Select the holiday by clicking on the day of
the month. The user can move through the calendar by clicking on the arrow icons located
at the top of the calendar. The user may enter up to sixteen holidays. Dates can be cleared
by placing a check in the "Sel" column next to the appropriate holiday and clicking the Clear
button at the bottom of the window.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

8.3.5 General Settings

This entry screen contains various panel-wide options. The entry fields are arranged on a
tab control with the following tab options:

General Settings -
RS-232 Supervisory Message Rate - Enables or disables periodic
test printouts from the 7100's serial port. This setting allows two
settings for how frequent the 7100 should print its test printout, either
every five (5) minutes or every eight (8) hours.

Class A - Loop 1 - When enabled, the 7100 will enable support for
Class A wiring on SLC #1.

NOTE: The Class A Option Module (CAOM) must be installed in

order to add Class A wiring support to the 7100.

NOTE: Do not select Class A for a circuit that is not used. The
7100 will report trouble conditions for unused SLC circuits that are

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

594 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

configured as Class A.

Class A - Loop 2 - When enabled, the 7100 will enable support for
Class A wiring on SLC #2.

NOTE: The Class A Option Module (CAOM) must be installed in

order to add Class A wiring support to the 7100.

NOTE: Do not select Class A for a circuit that is not used. The
7100 will report trouble conditions for unused SLC circuits that are
configured as Class A.

PAS Night Bypass - If this setting is turned on, then devices

configured for Positive Alarm Sequence will automatically go into fire
alarm during the defined Night hours as well as the defined Weekend
and Holiday days.

No Reset While Alarm -

When this option is enabled, the system will not allow a reset to take
place if the system is in alarm condition unless the device that
originated the alarm is no longer reporting an alarm condition. For
example, if a manual station initiated the alarm, the system cannot be
reset until the manual station is reset. In the case of a sensor, if the
amount of smoke or heat detected by the sensor decreases to below
the device's alarm threshold the system will reset. Otherwise, the
system will not reset.

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to 7100 Standalone projects.

Municipal Circuit is used for Releasing Service - When enabled,

the word "RELEASE" will be appended to displayed event reports
when the Municipal Circuit is activated. In addition, bit #414 in the
System Status Map will be true when the Municipal Circuit is
activated. Finally, a Node 0 Regional Releasing Status bit will be
true if this node belongs to Region 24 0 - Region 24 31.

NOTE: For 7100 Standalone applications, a Node 0 Regional

Releasing Status bit is not available.

Enable Front Panel Programming - When enabled, the user may

change certain settings of the 7100 using the front-panel menu
system. When disabled, access to the configuration menu will be
denied.

Hide Unacked Supv when there are Unacked Alarms - When

enabled, unacknowledged supervisory conditions will not be scrolled
on the display when there are also unacknowledged alarms.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 595

Unique Buzzer Indication for Supervisory Conditions - This

setting configures the system to use different coded patterns for its
internal buzzer to distinguish between unacknowledged alarm and
supervisory conditions.

Fast CAM Timers - When enabled, the CAM timers have a

resolution of one-half second. When disabled, CAM timers have a
one-second resolution.

NOTE: Be aware that if a timer is defined using Advanced CAM

Programming 920 , the desired timer interval must be multiplied by
two when this setting is enabled.

Inhibit Reset & Silence Following First Alarm - When enabled, the
system may not be silenced or reset for sixty seconds following an
initial alarm.

Default Verification
Settings -
Smoke Detector - This option selects the default sensor verification
setting. It can be set for automatic verification (Verify) or Positive
Alarm Sequence (PAS) or neither (None). When configuring
sensors, they can be set to accept this default setting or use a setting
that overrides this default setting.

Pull Station - This option selects the default manual station

verification setting. It can be set for Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS)
or no verification (None). When configuring manual stations, they
can be set to accept this default setting or use a setting that
overrides this default setting.

For more information about these settings, see this page 597 .

LCD Annunciators -
No. of LCD Annunciators - This option specifies how many
LCD-7100 annunciator displays are connected to the 7100.

Delays/Timeout -
NOTE: These delay and timing functions are only available if the
NAC(s) are NOT assigned to CAMable output groups.

NAC Cut Off Delay - This option allows the NAC circuits to be
automatically silenced after a set period of time. Note that this delay
begins after the silence inhibit delay ends. This setting may range
from No CutOff (meaning no delay is applied) to fifteen (15) minutes

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

596 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

(in five (5) minute increments).

NOTE: If the Silence Inhibit Delay is zero, the NAC Cutoff Delay
begins when the signals are activated. If the Inhibit Delay is
nonzero, the NAC Cutoff Delay begins when the Inhibit Delay
expires.

Silence Inhibit Delay - This setting will prevent the system from
being silenced after an alarm. This setting may be set to one of the
following values: No delay, one (1) minute, three (3) minutes, or five
(5) minutes.

Sequential Restart Delay - Specifies the number of seconds

between deactivation of sequential-restart AOM devices during a
sequential restart. This setting may range from No Delay to five (5)
seconds (in one (1) second increments).

Multilevel
Percentage -
Action Percentage - The intermediate smoke response is called
"Action". This can be programmed to occur between 35% and 80%
of the device's "Alarm" level. When the "Action" condition is detected
the system will activate its Trouble Dry contacts, Trouble LED, and
the General Action output list. An "Action" message will be
displayed and printed . In addition, output devices may also be
programmed via CAMs to respond to the Action condition (Group
443). This response does not occur if the sensor is already in
"Alarm" condition.

Alert Percentage - The "Alert" event is the lowest level system

response to smoke. Detection of an "Alert" results in a system
"Trouble" response, and an "Alert" message on the printer and/or
display. This response does not occur if the initiating point is already
in the "Action" or "Alarm" condition. This condition automatically
restores to normal if the obscuration drops back into the clean-air
range.

NOTE: The "Action" response level must be set to a greater

percentage level than "Alert".

Default Sensor
Sensitivity
Settings-
Ion Day - This setting controls the default sensitivity setting for the
daytime operation of Ion sensors. This may be set to Low, L/M
(Medium Low), Med (Medium), M/H (Medium High) or High.

Ion Night - This setting controls the default sensitivity setting for the
nighttime operation of Ion sensors. This may be set to Low, L/M

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 597

(Medium Low), Med (Medium), M/H (Medium High) or High.

Photo Day - This setting controls the default sensitivity setting for the
daytime operation of Photo sensors. This may be set to Low, L/M
(Medium Low), Med (Medium), M/H (Medium High) or High.

Photo Night - This setting controls the default sensitivity setting for
the nighttime operation of Photo sensors. This may be set to Low,
L/M (Medium Low), Med (Medium), M/H (Medium High) or High.

For more information about these settings, see this page 598 .

LED Blink -
On - When selected, the 7100 will blink the LED's on the SLC
devices when they are polled.

Off - When selected, the 7100 will not blink the LED's on the SLC
devices when they are polled.

Zone Code
Options -
Zone Code Speed - Zone code pulses may be sounded at either 60
or 120 beats per minute (BPM).

Rounds Per Code - Select either 3 or 4 rounds of coding for each

zone code.

NACs After Last Code - Select OFF to turn OFF the NACS after the
last zone code has completed or select ON to turn ON the NACS
after the last zone code has completed.

NOTE: Selecting ON will cause the 7100 NACs to sound in a

steady pattern after zone coding has completed.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

8.3.5.1 Default Verification Settings

Verify/PAS:
Verification and Positive Alarm Sequence operation for Sensors and Pull Stations can also
be set on this screen. Again, these settings will apply to all devices of the selected type on
this 7100 node. Only exceptions need to be programmed individually.

Select the desired setting from the drop-down list based on type (Sensor or Pull Station).

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 598 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

8.3.5.2 Default Sensitivity Settings

Day and Night sensitivity levels can be set by selecting a level for each type from the
drop-down lists. These settings will apply for every Ion and Photo sensor on this 7100 node.
Only exceptions need to be programmed individually.

The available sensitivity settings and the equivalent percent per foot Obscuration levels
(approximate) for each device are:

Photo Sensors:
Setting % Per Foot Obscuration
Low 2.00%
L/M 1.75%
Med 1.50%
M/H 1.25%
High 1.00%

Ion Sensors:
Setting % Per Foot Obscuration
Low 1.33%
L/M 1.02%
Med 0.97%
M/H 0.83%
High 0.70%

Acclimate Sensors:
Setting % Per Foot Obscuration
Low 4.00%
L/M 2.00% - 4.00%
Med 2.00%
M/H 1.00% - 2.00%
High 1.00%

Laser Sensors:
Setting % Per Foot Obscuration
Low 0.50%
L/M 0.20%
Med 0.10%
M/H 0.05%
High 0.02%

8.3.6 LED Annunciators

On this screen, the user may define how many LDM-7100 Annunciators are present as well
as a label for each of the LEDs. Labels are for convenience in programming only and are not
Downloaded to the panel. These labels will show up when selecting programmable LED's for
each group in the Input Groups entry screen. The maximum number of characters per label
is thirty.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 599

The following configuration options appear on this screen:

Number of LED Annunciator - This option specifies how many LDM-7100 annunciator
modules are connected to the 7100.

Boards Per Annunciator - This option specifies how many driver boards are connected to
the LDM-7100 modules.

Labels - Enter a label of up to thirty (30) characters for each LED.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

8.3.7 NAC Settings

This screen contains all settings that pertain to the panel's Notification Appliance Circuits,
the Municipal Circuit and the Coded Patterns used by the NAC's.

The following options are available for the Notification Appliance Circuits and Municipal
Circuit:

Silenceable - Check this option to make this output device silenceable from the front panel.
(This option is not available for the Municipal Circuit).

Coded - Check this option to enable coding for this output device. (This option is not
available for the Municipal Circuit).

Day Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Day Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into afire alarm condition during the defined
day period, this list of outputs will be activated.

Night Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Night Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into fire alarm condition during the defined
night period, this list of outputs will be activated.

Action - Check this option to place this output in the system default Action list. When an
input defined as Multilevel reaches the programmed "Action" threshold, this list of outputs
will be activated.

Supv (Supervisory) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Supervisory
list. When any supervisory device in the system goes into an Off Normal condition, this list of
outputs will be activated.

WT Drill (Walk Test/Drill) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Walk
Test/Drill list. This list of outputs is activated for audible walk test or during a Fire Drill.

Trouble - Check this option to place this output in the system default Trouble list. When
there is a trouble condition in the system, this list of outputs will be activated.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

600 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: The 7100 does not support the CO/Gas Alarm General Output List.

NOTE: For more information on the subject of General Output lists please see General
Output Lists.

Group(s) - The NACs and Municipal circuit can belong to as many as ten groups. These
groups could be local groups (1-99), cross zone groups (100 - 124), or Conditional Action
Map (CAM) Controlled Output groups (125 - 224).

NOTE: It is very important to assign only ONE group number to an output device when
using CAM Controlled Output Groups. Otherwise, the results of the CAM logic
evaluation for the first group number may have a different “truth” than the evaluation of
the logic for the second group number. This could produce undesirable results under
certain conditions.

It is also extremely important to note that you MUST NOT mix 7100 Local Groups and
7100 General Output Lists with Conditional Action Map control on the same output.
Unpredictable results may occur should the two control methods be mixed.

The NAC Settings screen also includes the following Coded Patterns settings:

NOTE: The Coded Patterns section of the screen will appear disabled (grayed out) if none
of the Notification Appliance Circuits are configured for coded operation.

The user may set a different coded pattern for each of five system conditions. These coded
patterns selections apply only to the onboard NACS, and only if configured for coded
operation. Addressable Output Modules cannot be coded.

To choose a coded pattern, click on the drop-down list for each condition and select one of
the available options. The default setting for each condition is Steady.

The available codes are Steady, March Time 60 BPM, March Time 120 BPM, Temporal
Pattern, California Code, and Coded 4's.

The four system conditions are:

Day Alarm - Selected code will run when a fire alarm condition occurs and the system is in
the Day operating hours.
Night Alarm - Selected code will run when a fire alarm condition occurs and the system is in
the Night operating hours.
Action - Selected code will run when a pre-alarm condition has been activated.
Supervisory - Selected code will run when a supervisory device goes off-normal.
CO/Gas Alarm - Selected code will run when a CO or gas alarm occurs.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 601

NOTE: The CO/Gas Alarm coded pattern is set to Coded 4's by default. All other
coded patterns are set to steady by default.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

8.3.8 DACT Settings

General Settings
Tab -
Enable DACT - When enabled, the 7100 will communicate with and
supervise its internal serial DACT. When disabled, all other DACT
configuration options on this screen are disabled. This setting is
enabled by default.

NOTE: A DACT Missing trouble will be reported if this option is

enabled on 7100-1 and 7100-2 models, since those models do not
include the DACT.

DACT Account
Options -
There are two DACT accounts available for programming. Each
account has the following programmable options:

Account # - Enter the assigned account ID number in this field. This

number may be up to six digits in length.

NOTE: Not all of the supported reporting formats can actually

utilize the full six digits that the panel provides. Leading zeroes
must be entered for all account numbers that are less than six
digits. If more digits are entered than the selected reporting format
allows, only the least significant digits are transmitted. The chart
below indicates the maximum number of digits provided for the
account number in each of the supported formats.

Reporting Format Maximum Length of Account

Number
SIA DCS 8 / SIA DCS 20 6
ADEMCO Contact ID 4
4/2 1400 Hz / 4/2 2300 Hz 4
3/1 1400 Hz / 3/1 2300 Hz 3

Format - The available formats are: SIA DCS 8, SIA DCS 20,
ADEMCO Contact ID, 4/2 1400Hz, 3/1 1400Hz, 3/1 2300Hz, and 4/2
2300 Hz. Select one from the drop-down list.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

602 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Report Alarm - Select Alarm event reporting option from drop-down

list, either OFF, CAN, or MUST.

Report Trouble - Select Trouble event reporting option from

drop-down list, either OFF, CAN, or MUST.

Report Tests - Select Test event reporting option from drop-down

list, either OFF, CAN, or MUST.

Report Supv - Select Supervisory event reporting option from

drop-down list, either OFF, CAN, or MUST.

CIC # - Enter dialing prefix for Account. The maximum number of

characters allowed is eight. This field is typically used if an access
code for a long distance carrier is required, or if certain calling
features, such as call waiting, need to be temporarily disabled during
the call. The maximum number of characters allowed is eight.

NOTE: Besides the digits 0-9, the following special characters may
also be used:

Special Character Description

* Standard "*" key. May only be
used if Tone dialling is being
used.
# Standard "#" key. May only be
used if Tone dialling is being
used.
, Inserts a two (2) second pause
in the dialing sequence.
@ Instructs the DACT to wait until a
dial tone can be detected. This
option should only be used if the
DACT is connected to a
telephone system that is
compatible with North American
standards.

Phone # - Enter phone number for the account. The maximum

number of characters allowed is sixteen.

NOTE: Besides the digits 0-9, the following special characters may
also be used:

Special Character Description

* Standard "*" key. May only be
used if Tone dialling is being

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 603

used.
# Standard "#" key. May only be
used if Tone dialling is being
used.
, Inserts a two (2) second pause
in the dialing sequence.
@ Instructs the DACT to wait until a
dial tone can be detected. This
option should only be used if the
DACT is connected to a
telephone system that is
compatible with North American
standards.

NOTE: If the MUST option is selected on both accounts for the

same report type (Alarms, Troubles, Supervisories), the DACT will
report events using both accounts. If this is not the desired
behavior, select the CAN option for one of the accounts.

DACT Phone Line

Options -
There are two DACT phone lines available for programming, Line #1
and Line #2. There are two programmable options for each phone
line as follows:

Dialing Mode - Available options are: Tone or USA Rotary(40/60),

USA Rotary(40/60) Only, Tone Only, Tone or European
Rotary(33/67), and European Rotary(33/67) Only. Select the dialing
mode for line from the drop-down list.

Line Monitor - Line monitor is used to enable supervision of the

phone lines connected to the DACT. The DACT supervises the
phone lines in three ways:

1.) It measures the on-hook voltage coming from the phone

company.
2.) It periodically takes the phone line off-hook, measures the
off-hook voltage and puts the line back on-hook.

NOTE: The system will issue a Phone Line trouble if the DACT
measures an incorrect off-hook or on-hook voltage and/or is unable
to take the line off-hook.

3.) It will enable sending test signals to the configured accounts.

NOTE: The Line Monitor option must be set to ON to enable the

automatic Phone Line Test Time.

NOTE: The system makes a distinction between a "Line" and an

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 604 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

"Account". The system considers a "Line" to be a physical twisted

pair cable that connects the DACT to the telephone company. The
"Account" is the telephone number that the DACT dials to report
events to the designated central monitoring station. The DACT will
use either phone line to communicate to either account.

DACT
Test/Timing -
AC Fault Reporting Delay - Set number of hours to delay report of
AC failure. The delay may range from 1 to 31 hours.

Tests Per Day - Specifies the time interval between subsequent tests
after the first phone line test. 1 = 24 hours, 2 = 12 hours, 3 = 8 hours,
and 4 = 6 hours. Select the number of tests per day from the
drop-down list.

First Phone Line Test - Specify the time of the first phone line
dial-out test each day. Test is enabled if either line has its Line
Monitor set to ON. Select phone line test time Hour and Minute
from drop-down lists for each item.

NOTE: The hour of the first phone line test can be configured as
follows, based on the number of tests per day.

Number of tests per day Hours allowed for first phone

line test

1 0-23
2 0-11
3 0-7
4 0-5

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

8.3.9 Zone Code

Zone Coding allows an FACP to produce a distinct coded pattern on its NAC outputs, based
upon the particular input device or cross zone that caused the alarm condition.

The 7100 supports up to 63 different codes, each of which may be configured for any
pattern of two, three, or four digits. The digits may range from 1 to 14 pulses. After the
necessary codes are entered in the Zone Code table (in Zone Code screen), they can be
associated with individual input devices and cross zones in the appropriate entry screen (i.e.
Input Devices and Cross Zones). Multiple inputs may be assigned to run the same code, if
desired, or each input may have a unique code (up to a limit of 63 different codes).

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 605

To set the pulses for a particular zone code, simply select the digit in the entry grid and
choose the appropriate number of pulses for each digit from the drop-down list.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

8.3.10 Input Devices

The input devices screen is used to configure all sensors and monitor modules connected to
a 7100 node.

At the very top of the screen is a field labeled "Show Devices". This field allows the user to
filter the list of devices in the grid below to show all devices, all Ion sensors, all Photo
sensors, all Thermal sensors or all Monitor Modules. Once a selection is made, CAMWorks
will automatically filter the list.

Below the "Show Devices" field is a large grid that displays all of the input devices that are
configured, based on the filter setting above.

Sel - Place a check in this field and click the Delete button to remove the device from this
address. Multiple devices may be selected if desired.

Active - To disable Downloading for a particular address, double-click or press the space
bar within this field to turn it grey. To re-enable the device, repeat the process to make the
field green.

Floor # - Enter the floor of the building that the device is located on. This field is used for
user reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.

Description - Enter a location description for the current address. This label will appear as
the identifier for this address when any event occurs at this address. The maximum number
of characters for this label is 19.
NOTE: Any part of the description text can be copied to the Windows clipboard by
highlighting the text and pressing Ctrl-C. The text can then be copied to the description
field of another address by selecting that field and pressing Ctrl-V.

Group Numbers - To modify one of the two group numbers, enter the group (1-99) number
in the Group field. (Outputs assigned to this group will be shown in the list at the bottom of
the screen). If you are unclear on I/O groups concepts, see Help topic Input/Output
Functionality 643 .

NOTE: While the 7100 does allow for multiple input groups for each device, should a
trouble condition occur on a device only the first group assigned to the device will set its
respective Trouble SSM bit.

WARNING: Group 0, which really means "No Group Assignment", may be assigned to
input devices. There is no bit in the System Status Map for Group 0. Therefore, no

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

606 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

custom I/O relationships may be created for an input device if all of its Input Group
assignments are set to Group 0.

Verify - To change the verification setting for a particular address, select a new option from
the drop-down list in this field. Setting this field to "Smoke" enables the automatic
verification, while setting this option to PAS enables Positive Alarm Sequence. Setting this
field to "None" disables verification for this device. Select "DFlt" to use the default
verification setting chosen on the General Settings 593 screen.

Zone Code - An optional coded pattern may be configured for each address. These patterns
are configured in the Zone Code entry screen. To choose a Zone code pattern, highlight the
Zone Code entry field and click on the down arrow button that appears. Select the
appropriate code from the drop-down list.

Day Sensitivity - To change the Day Sensitivity setting for a particular address, select a
new setting from the drop-down list in this field.

NOTE: This setting applies to smoke detectors only.

Night Sensitivity - To change the Night Sensitivity setting for a particular address, select a
new setting from the drop-down list in this field.

NOTE: This setting applies to smoke detectors only.

Below the grid are the following three buttons:

Add 607 - Opens a screen where input devices may be added to the configuration.
Block Add 608 - Opens a screen where ranges of input devices may be added to the
configuration.
Delete - Clicking the delete button will remove devices that have their "Sel" field checked
from the configuration.

Finally, below the row of buttons is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Input Group # > Input Devices", the second is
"Used/Unused Groups" and the third is "Linked SLC Output Devices". Below is a brief
explanation of each information tab.

Input Group # > Input Devices - This tab shows all input devices that are assigned to the
group that is selected in the "Select Input Group" drop-down list.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the input groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more input devices
and green if the input group has not been assigned to any input devices. Double-clicking
one of the input groups in this list will add the selected input group to one of the Input Group
fields in the grid if one of the Input Group fields is highlighted.

Linked SLC Output Devices - This tab shows all SLC output devices that are affected by
the status of the input groups assigned to this device. This may display either devices on

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 607

the current node or all nodes by selecting one of the option buttons and clicking "Show".

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

8.3.10.1 Add

The Add Devices screen is used to define new input devices. The following procedure may
be used to define new input devices:
Step 1:
Select Sensors or Modules - In order to add input devices, the user must select
between Sensors and Modules. Doing so will filter the list of available devices types to
show only the devices types that are applicable for sensors or device types that are
applicable to modules.

Step 2:
Select Device Type - Select the device type to be assigned to the selected addresses
from the drop-down list. See this page 647 for information on the available sensor device
types or this page 650 for information on the available module device types.

Step 3:
Select Loop - Select the Loop where device(s) to be added are located. Click on the
Loop 1 or Loop 2 option button.

Step 4:
Input Group 1 - Select the group number for the devices to be added (this may also be
set in the Input Devices entry screen) from the drop-down list. Input devices may belong
to groups ranging from 1-99.

NOTE: This will only set the first group for the device. If you wish to assign an additional
group, this must be done in the Input Devices 605 screen.

Step 5:
Check Addresses To Add - Select all addresses to be added by checking the address
number(s).

Step 6:
Verify - Setting this field to "Verify" enables automatic verification. Select "DFlt" to use
the default verification setting chosen in the General Settings 593 screen. Setting this
option to "None" disables verification for these addresses. This setting is only available
for certain device types.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 608 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Step 7:
Description - This label will appear as the identifier for these addresses when any event
occurs at one of these addresses. The maximum number of characters for this label is
19. The same description will be added to all selected addresses.

Step 8:
Day Sensitivity/Night Sensitivity - Set the desired day and night sensitivity settings for
smoke detectors via these drop-down lists. These selections are only available for certain
device types.

NOTE: The Sensitivity Settings are applicable to Smoke Detector device types only.

Step 9:
Add - Click on the "Add" button to program the selected addresses. (The user will be
asked to confirm the selections).

List View - The list view at the bottom of the screen lists all of the device types and
groups for the addresses on the currently selected loop.

Select All - Click on this button to toggle between placing or clearing check marks from
all addresses.

8.3.10.2 Block Add

Block Add is a new method of adding new devices to the configuration. It is used when
many devices of the same type need to be added to sequential addresses. Block Add is
similar to the standard method of adding devices and many of the same settings may be
configured via Block Add as with the standard Add Devices screen. The following procedure
may be used to define new input devices using Block Add:

Step 1:
Select Sensors or Modules - In order to add input devices, the user must select
between Sensors and Modules. Doing so will filter the list of available devices types to
show only the devices types that are applicable for sensors or device types that are
applicable to modules.

Step 2:
Select Device Type - Select the device type to be assigned to the selected addresses
from the drop-down list. See this page 647 for information on the available sensor device
types or this page 650 for information on the available module device types.

Step 3:
Select Loop - Select the Loop where device(s) to be added are located. Click on the
Loop 1 or Loop 2 option button.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 609

Step 4:
Input Group 1 - Select the group number for the devices to be added (this may also be
set in the Input Devices entry screen) from the drop-down list. Input devices may belong
to groups ranging from 1-99.

NOTE: This will only set the first group for the device. If you wish to assign an additional
group, this must be done in the Input Devices 605 screen.

Step 5:
Block Add Options - When Block Add is used the address selection check boxes are not
used. Instead, Block Add requires the following information from the user in order to add
devices in a sequence:

a. Number of Devices - Select how many devices should be added.

b. Starting Address - Select the first address in the block. All devices will be
added starting with this address.

NOTE: The "Block Add Option" checkbox must be checked in order to use the Block
Add feature.

Block Add has several options for handling address overlaps. An address overlap occurs
when there are devices already programmed in the range of addresses that Block Add is
set to add new devices to. For example, an address overlap exists if Block Add is
configured to add 4 devices starting at address 10 and addresses 12 and 13 already have
devices assigned to them. CAMWorks offers the following methods of handling address
overlaps:

Overlap Handling Method Description

Skip address and continue with the next
address
Overwrite existing address
Abort this entry and continue to next
address
When an address overlap occurs,
CAMWorks skips adding a new device at
this address and continues with the next
address and adds a the number of devices
selected above to the configuration.
For example, If you have devices at
addresses 4-8 and want to add 10 devices
starting at address 2, you will end up having
addresses 2-3 and 9-16 containing new
devices, while 4-8 will contain their original
device assignments.
Erases the existing device at the address
and adds a new one in its place.
When an address overlap occurs,
CAMWorks skips adding a new device at
this address and continues with the next
address and stops at the address (Number
of Devices + Starting Address).
For example, If you have devices at

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 610 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

addresses 4-8 and want to add 10 devices

starting at address 2, you will end up having
addresses 2-3 and 9-11 containing new
devices, while 4-8 will contain their original
device assignments.
Abort auto entry and save the entries made When an address overlap occurs,
up to this point CAMWorks aborts adding new devices.
Abort auto entry without keeping the new When an address overlap occurs,
entries CAMWorks aborts adding new devices and
discards any changes that would have been
made by Block Add.

Step 6:
Verify - Setting this field to "Verify" enables automatic verification. Select "DFlt" to use
the default verification setting chosen in the General Settings 593 screen. Setting this
option to "None" disables verification for these addresses. This setting is only available
for certain device types.

Step 7:
Description - This label will appear as the identifier for these addresses when any event
occurs at one of these addresses. The maximum number of characters for this label is
19. The same description will be added to all selected addresses.

Step 8:
Day Sensitivity/Night Sensitivity - Set the desired day and night sensitivity settings for
smoke detectors via these drop-down lists. These selections are only available for certain
device types.

NOTE: The Sensitivity Settings are applicable to Smoke Detector device types only.

Step 9:
Add - Click on the "Add" button to program the selected addresses. (The user will be
asked to confirm the selections).

List View - The list view at the bottom of the screen lists all of the device types and
groups for the addresses on the currently selected loop.

8.3.11 Input Groups

Input Group configuration allows enabling or disabling of the following General Condition
responses of the inputs associated with the group as well as configuring a group cross-zone
for each input group.

Activate General Alarm - Place a check in this box if an alarm activation from a member
device (sensor or AMM module) should activate the Day and Night general alarm lists. The
panel will determine the activation of the Day or Night general alarm list based on the setting
in the Night/Weekend/Holiday Schedule 43 screen.

NOTE: This field also applies to the General Action output list. Un-checking this box

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 611

prevents the General Action/PreAlarm outputs from being activated.

Activate General Supervisory - Place a check in this box if if a supervisory off-normal

condition from a member device (sensor or AMM module) should activate the general
supervisory list. Applies to supervisory conditions only.

Cross Zone - To include group in a cross zone, select the appropriate cross zone number
(1-25) from the drop-down list.

NOTE: Only certain device types are eligible for cross zoning. See the following pages
for information about compatible device types:

7100 Sensor Device Types 647

7100 Module Device Types 650

NOTE: Verification and PAS cannot be mixed with Cross Zoning.

Below the grid is an information area. This information area contains two tabs of
information. The first is called "Input Group # > Input Devices", and the second is "LED
Annunciator Labels". Below is a brief explanation of each information tab.

Input Group # > Input Devices - This tab shows all input devices that belong to the current
group, if any.

LED Annunciator Labels - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the LED annunciator
labels defined on the LED Annunciators 598 screen.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

8.3.12 Output Devices

The output devices screen is used to configure all Addressable Output Modules (AOM's)
connected to a 7100 node. This screen houses a large grid that displays all of the output
devices that are configured.

The 7100 supports two basic AOM device types. These are the Form-C Relay module
(AOM-2RF/MMO-6RF), and the Signal/NAC module (AOM-2SF/MMO-6SF).

The following programmable options are available for all AOM modules:

Sel - Place a check in this field and click the Delete button to remove the device from this
address. Multiple devices may be selected if desired.

Active - To disable Downloading for a particular address, double-click or press the space
bar within this field to turn it grey. To re-enable the device, repeat the process to make the
field green.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

612 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Floor # - Enter the floor of the building that the device is located on. This field is used for
user reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.

Description - Enter a location description for the current address. This label will appear as
the identifier for this address when any event occurs at this address. The maximum number
of characters for this label is 19.
NOTE: Any part of the description text can be copied to the Windows clipboard by
highlighting the text and pressing Ctrl-C. The text can then be copied to the description
field of another address by selecting that field and pressing Ctrl-V.

Groups - To program group numbers, enter group numbers in Group entry field. If more
than one group is to be entered, group numbers must be separated by commas (Ex: 1,2,3).
Up to three local groups (1-99) or cross zone groups (100-124) can be entered for all AOM
types. Instead of using the local groups and cross zone groups, AOMs can be programmed
to respond to ONE CAM Controlled Output Group (125-224). The Ext.Groups device types
may belong to as many as ten groups, but again those ten groups must be limited to local
groups and cross zone groups. If you are unclear on I/O groups concepts, see Help topic
Input/Output Functionality 643 .

NOTE: It is very important to assign only ONE group number to an output device when
using CAM Controlled Output Groups. Otherwise, the results of the CAM logic evaluation
for the first group number may have a different “truth” than the evaluation of the logic for the
second group number. This could produce undesirable results under certain conditions.

It is also extremely important to note that you MUST NOT mix 7100 Local Groups and 7100
General Output Lists with Conditional Action Map control on the same output.
Unpredictable results may occur should the two control methods be mixed.

NOTE: You cannot assign CAM-controlled output groups to "Silenceable" output device
types.

Day Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Day Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into afire alarm condition during the defined
day period, this list of outputs will be activated.

Night Alarm - Check this option to place this output in the system default Night Alarm list.
When any initiating device in the system goes into fire alarm condition during the defined
night period, this list of outputs will be activated.

Action - Check this option to place this output in the system default Action list. When an
input defined as Multilevel reaches the programmed "Action" threshold, this list of outputs
will be activated.

Supv (Supervisory) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Supervisory
list. When any supervisory device in the system goes into an Off Normal condition, this list of
outputs will be activated.

WT Drill (Walk Test/Drill) - Check this option to place this output in the system default Walk
Test/Drill list. This list of outputs is activated for audible walk test or during a Fire Drill.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 613

Trouble - Check this option to place this output in the system default Trouble list. When
there is a trouble condition in the system, this list of outputs will be activated.

NOTE: The 7100 does not support the CO/Gas Alarm General Output List.

NOTE: For more information on the subject of General Output lists please see General
Output Lists.

Fan Restart - The 7100 supports a "Fan Restart" configuration option for AOM devices. If
this option is selected, the panel leaves such devices undisturbed during reset. The panel
indicates a Trouble condition "FANS OFF" fault message after the reset. To turn off the fan
restart AOM's, a function is available on the keypad's zero (0) key. Activating the key
deactivates the AOM's that were left on during reset and cancels the "FANS OFF" fault.
NOTE: Fan Restart may not be assigned to AOM's that are assigned to the General
Trouble output list.

Seq Restart - The 7100 also provides "sequential restart" capability. Any outputs configured
for sequential restart are deactivated at a slow rate, either during reset (if not configured for
"Fan Restart"), or upon use of the zero "0" key (if configured for "Fan Restart"). The time
delay interval for sequential reset is set in the General Settings 593 entry screen.

Below the grid are the following three buttons:

Add 614 - Opens a screen where input devices may be added to the configuration.
Block Add 615 - Opens a screen where ranges of input devices may be added to the
configuration.
Delete - Clicking the delete button will remove devices that have their "Sel" field checked
from the configuration.

Finally, below the row of buttons is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Output Group # > Output Devices", the second
is "Used/Unused Groups" and the third is "Linked Input Devices". Below is a brief
explanation of each information tab.

Output Group # > Output Devices - This tab shows all output devices that are assigned to
the group that is selected in the "Select Output Group" drop-down list.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices. Double-clicking
one of the output groups in this list will add the selected output group to one of the Output
Group fields in the grid if one of the Output Group fields is highlighted.

Linked Input Devices - This tab shows SLC input devices that affect the status of the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 614 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

output groups assigned to this device. This may display either devices on the current node
(local) or all nodes (network) by selecting one of the option buttons and clicking "Show".

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

8.3.12.1 Add

The Add Devices screen is used to define new output devices. The following procedure may
be used to define new output devices:
To program the device types and groups for all modules, follow the instruction sequence
shown below:

Step 1:
Select Device Type - Select the device type to be assigned to the selected addresses
from the drop-down list. See this page 650 for information on the available module device
types

Step 2:
Select Loop - Select the Loop where device(s) to be added are located. Click on the
Loop 1 or Loop 2 option button.

Step 3:
Output Group 1 - Select the group number for the devices to be added (this may also be
set in the Output Devices entry screen) from the drop-down list.

NOTE: This will only set the first group for the device. If you wish to assign additional
groups, this must be done in the Output Devices screen.

NOTE: AOM's can be programmed into Local Groups (1-99) or CAM Controlled Output
Groups (125-224) through this screen.

Step 4:
Check Addresses To Add - Select all addresses to be added by checking the address
number(s).

Step 5:
Description - This label will appear as the identifier for these addresses when any event
occurs at one of these addresses. The maximum number of characters for this label is
19. The same description will be added to all selected addresses.

Step 6:
Add - Click on the "Add" button to program the selected addresses. (The user will be
asked to confirm the selections).

List View - The list view at the bottom of the screen lists all of the device types and
groups for the addresses on the currently selected loop.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 615

8.3.12.2 Block Add

Block Add is a new method of adding new devices to the configuration. It is used when
many devices of the same type need to be added to sequential addresses. Block Add is
similar to the standard method of adding devices and many of the same settings may be
configured via Block Add as with the standard Add Devices screen. The following procedure
may be used to define new input devices using Block Add:

Step 1:
Select Device Type - Select the device type to be assigned to the selected addresses
from the drop-down list. See this page 650 for information on the available module device
types

Step 2:
Select Loop - Select the Loop where device(s) to be added are located. Click on the
Loop 1 or Loop 2 option button.

Step 3:
Output Group 1 - Select the group number for the devices to be added (this may also be
set in the Output Devices entry screen) from the drop-down list.

NOTE: This will only set the first group for the device. If you wish to assign additional
groups, this must be done in the Output Devices screen.

NOTE: AOM's can be programmed into Local Groups (1-99) or CAM Controlled Output
Groups (125-224) through this screen.

Step 4:
Block Add Options - When Block Add is used the address selection check boxes are not
used. Instead, Block Add requires the following information from the user in order to add
devices in a sequence:

a. Number of Devices - Select how many devices should be added.

b. Starting Address - Select the first address in the block. All devices will be
added starting with this address.

NOTE: The "Block Add Option" checkbox must be checked in order to use the Block
Add feature.

Block Add has several options for handling address overlaps. An address overlap occurs
when there are devices already programmed in the range of addresses that Block Add is
set to add new devices to. For example, an address overlap exists if Block Add is
configured to add 4 devices starting at address 10 and addresses 12 and 13 already have
devices assigned to them. CAMWorks offers the following methods of handling address
overlaps:

Overlap Handling Method Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 616 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Skip address and continue with the next When an address overlap occurs,
address CAMWorks skips adding a new device at
this address and continues with the next
address and adds a the number of devices
selected above to the configuration.
For example, If you have devices at
addresses 4-8 and want to add 10 devices
starting at address 2, you will end up having
addresses 2-3 and 9-16 containing new
devices, while 4-8 will contain their original
device assignments.
Overwrite existing address Erases the existing device at the address
and adds a new one in its place.
Abort this entry and continue to next When an address overlap occurs,
address CAMWorks skips adding a new device at
this address and continues with the next
address and stops at the address (Number
of Devices + Starting Address).
For example, If you have devices at
addresses 4-8 and want to add 10 devices
starting at address 2, you will end up having
addresses 2-3 and 9-11 containing new
devices, while 4-8 will contain their original
device assignments.
Abort auto entry and save the entries made When an address overlap occurs,
up to this point CAMWorks aborts adding new devices.
Abort auto entry without keeping the new When an address overlap occurs,
entries CAMWorks aborts adding new devices and
discards any changes that would have been
made by Block Add.

Step 5:
Description - This label will appear as the identifier for these addresses when any event
occurs at one of these addresses. The maximum number of characters for this label is
19. The same description will be added to all selected addresses.

Step 6:
Add - Click on the "Add" button to program the selected addresses. (The user will be
asked to confirm the selections).

List View - The list view at the bottom of the screen lists all of the device types and
groups for the addresses on the currently selected loop.

8.3.13 Cross Zones

This screen allows the user to configure the behavior of each of the 7100's twenty-five cross
zones. Like many other screens in CAMWorks, the display is arranged in a grid. The
settings available for each cross zone is described below:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 617

Cross Zone - Indicates which virtual cross zone group will be affected by these settings.
This field is read-only.

Trigger - This option sets the trigger level of the cross zone (how many inputs or sets of
inputs need to activate before the cross zone activates). This can be set from two (2) to
seven (7).

Cross Zone Group - When the cross zone activates, it can be configured to trigger a
special cross zone group. The range is 100 to 124. These Cross Zone groups may be
assigned to output devices connected to this 7100 node.

NOTE: Cross Zone Groups on the 7100 do not have associated bits in the System Status
Map. Therefore, it is not possible to directly read the status of a cross zone in a CAM
expression. If desired, an AOM/AMM combination may be used to set a bit in the 7100's
System Status Map that may be used in CAMs.

Zone Code - When the cross zone is activated it can trigger a zone code to sound, just like
any other input. This menu allows you to select one of up to 63 user-defined zone codes.

Activate General Alarm - When set to "Yes", this will cause the system to turn on all
outputs configured for the General Alarm Day and General Alarm Night output lists when the
cross zone is activated. The panel will determine the activation of the Day or Night general
alarm list based on the setting in the Night/Weekend/Holiday Schedule 43 screen.

NOTE: This field also applies to the General Action output list. Setting this option to NO
prevents the General Action/PreAlarm outputs from being activated.

The following control appears outside of the grid:

Enable Multiple Point Cross Zone Activations When System is in Alarm - When
checked, point cross zone inputs will continue to prealarm after the system is already in
alarm, and the cross zones will activate when their threshold is reached. When unchecked,
all smoke detectors that are configured for point cross zoning will automatically go into alarm
when the system is in alarm and the outputs assigned to the cross zone will not activate.

Below the grid is an information area. This information area contains three tabs of
information. The first is called "CrossZone # > Input Devices", the second is "Input Group #
> Input Devices" and the third is "Used / Unused Groups". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

CrossZone # > Input Devices - This section of the window shows which devices are
assigned to the selected cross zone. Devices may be added by using the Add button below.
To remove devices from the cross zone place a check in the "Sel" column next to the
desired device and click the Delete button below.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 618 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Input Group # > Input Devices - This tab shows all input devices that are assigned to the
group that is selected in the "Select Input Group" drop-down list.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the input groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more input devices
and green if the input group has not been assigned to any input devices. Double-clicking
one of the input groups in this list will add the selected input group to one of the Input Group
fields in the grid if one of the Input Group fields is highlighted.

Group CrossZone > Input Devices - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the devices
that are a member of a group cross zone that is highlighted in the grid above.

See this page 588 for more information about configuring cross zoning.

NOTE: All cross zone triggers on the 7100 must reside on the same panel.

NOTE: Cross Zone groups (used to link output devices to a cross zone activation) affect
only the local 7100 panel. If desired, an AOM/AMM combination may be used to set a bit
in the 7100's System Status Map that may be read by other nodes.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

8.3.14 Label Groups

This screen allows custom descriptions to be defined for each of the panel's Local Groups,
Cross Zone Groups and CAM-controlled Output Groups. When a description has been
entered, it will appear as a pop-up tool tip when the mouse hovers over an Input Group or
Output Group field. These descriptions are for user reference only, and are not downloaded
to the panel.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

8.3.15 CAM Output groups

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 619

configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

620 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 621

also includes the on board NAC's and

Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 622 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

The CAMs in this screen will control Output Groups that can be assigned to AOMs and
discrete outputs such as the NAC Circuits and the Municipal Circuit.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

8.3.16 CAM Scratchpad

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 623

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

624 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.

Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 625

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs in this screen will turn on or off the Scratchpads associated with this node.
Scratchpads can be referred to in other CAM expressions and are extremely useful in
reducing the complexity of other CAM expressions.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

8.3.17 CAM Special Function

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

The CAM Special Functions screen incorporates several advanced functions that can be
useful for certain applications. Specifically, these functions are:
[****]

Schedule 626 - Configure certain output devices to activate according to a specific schedule.
Counters 629 - Activate outputs after a certain number of specific events occur.
Sequence 632 - Activate several outputs in succession.
Timers 636 - Delay the activation of output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 626 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

8.3.17.1 Schedule

NOTE: Schedules are not available on INX, INCC or INI-VGE nodes.

There are 10 schedules available per node for automatically activating Output Groups and
Scratchpads according to a fixed schedule. Three types of schedules are available. These
are:

1.) Daily - Outputs can be activated on a daily basis at a given time.

2.) Weekly - Outputs can be activated at a certain time on one or more different days of the
week.
3.) Monthly - Outputs can be activated on a certain day of the selected month or on a certain
day of every month.

The process of configuring a schedule is the same regardless of the type of schedule being
used, with a few exceptions. Below is the procedure for configuring a schedule:

1. In the grid, select the Group that will be triggered by the scheduler. The allowed selection
of groups will vary based on the current node type, but will always at least include the
node's scratchpad locations.
2. In the "Information" pane at the bottom of the screen select the "Schedule Details" tab, if it
isn't already selected.
3. Select one of the following schedule types:
a. Daily – When a Daily schedule is desired, the user must supply the time of day that
should be used for the schedule. This is done through the Hours/Minutes drop-down
lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every hour
and/or every minute.
b. Weekly – When a Weekly schedule is desired, the user must select which days of the
week that the schedule should run. Selection boxes are provided for each day of the
week and any or all days may be selected by placing a check in the appropriate box.
Like a Daily schedule, the Weekly schedule also requires that a time of day must be
selected for when the schedule is to be run. This is done through the Hours/Minutes
drop-down lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every
hour and/or every minute.
c. Monthly – A Monthly schedule is used when it is desired to activate certain outputs on a
certain day of the month. Option buttons are provided for the month. Unlike the
Weekly schedule, the user may only select one month or every month. A date
selection is also provided, allowing the user to select which day of the month to run the
schedule. An option is available to run the schedule every day of the selected month.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 627

Like a Daily schedule, the Monthly schedule also requires that a time of day must be
selected for when the schedule is to be run. This is done through the Hours/Minutes
drop-down lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every
hour and/or every minute.
NOTE: If you choose the 29th then there will be no schedule activation for
February except on a leap year. If you choose the 30th then there will be no
schedule activation for February at all. If you choose the 31st then all months with
less than 31 days will not have a schedule activation.

4. Disable Schedule CAM Expression - If there are any circumstances where it would be
desirable to NOT run an automatic schedule, this CAM expression should be entered.
The TRUE evaluation of this CAM expression will prevent the schedule from running.
NOTE: Disable Schedule CAM Expression feature is not available on the 7100.

5. Description - A description may be added to indicate what the schedule will be used for.
This information is used for reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.
NOTE: The CAM Schedule will be true for exactly one minute if the user specifies a
specific minute within the selected hour.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
four tabs of information. The first is called "Schedule Details", the second is "Node
Devices", the third is "Reference Search" and the fourth is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is
a brief explanation of each information tab.

Schedule Details - This tab allows the user to view or set the scheduling information for the
selected schedule. See above for more information on how the schedule is configured.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

628 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

selected node. Includes Loop, Address,

Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 629

Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

8.3.17.2 Counters

There are 10 counters available per node for activating outputs after an input triggers the
counter a specified number of times.

The process of configuring a counter is as follows:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

630 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

1. In the grid, choose how many times the counter must be run by selecting a value in the
"Count" field.
2. Select the Group that will be triggered by the scheduler. The allowed selection of groups
will vary based on the current node type, but will always at least include the node's
scratchpad locations.
3. A Define Counter CAM Expression may be written. If present, this CAM expression will
determine under what condition the counter will be reset. If this CAM is blank, the counter
will operate as a one-shot (meaning that a reset is required in order to trigger the counter
again after it has activated its output.)
4. Select a "Working Bit". This is a bit that is used internally by the CAM engine to perform
the counter function. This bit must not be used by any other function.
5. Counter Trigger CAM Expression. This CAM Expression describes what condition will
cause the counter to be incremented.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is a brief explanation of each
information tab.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 631

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 632 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

8.3.17.3 Sequence

There are 10 sequences available per node for activating multiple Output Groups or
Scratchpads in a sequence. There are two types of sequences. The table below explains
the differences between the two.

Sequence Type Description Visual Sample

A 'Bar Graph' sequence

leaves any current
Bar Graph
outputs ON when the
sequence is triggered.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 633

A 'Shift' sequence turns

OFF its current output
when the sequence is
Shift
triggered and then
activates the next
output.

The process of configuring a sequence is the same regardless of the type of sequence
being used. Below is the procedure for configuring a sequence:

1. Select a "Working Bit" - This is a bit that is used internally by the CAM engine to perform
the sequence function. This bit must not be used by any other function.
2. Select the number of outputs - The sequencer must know how many outputs are going to
be affected by the scheduler.This may range from 2 to 12.
3. Type of Sequence - Select either a Bar Graph sequence or a Shift sequence. See above
for an explanation of the two types of sequence.
4. CAM Sequence Reinitialize - A CAM Expression must be written for the sequence to be
enabled to run the first time (or be reset so that it may be run again once it has already
run through).
5. Sequence Triggering CAM - This CAM Expression describes what condition will cause the
next output in the sequence to be activated.
6. At the bottom of the screen, select the "Output List" tab.
7. Select the desired output groups and/or scratchpads that should be added to the
sequence. These should be selected in the desired order of activation. Outputs may be
added to the sequence by selecting a group from the list box on the left and clicking the
right arrow button. Outputs may be removed from the sequence by selecting the group in
the list in the list box on the right and clicking on the left arrow button.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
four tabs of information. The first is called "Output List", the second is "Node Devices", the
third is "Reference Search" and the fourth is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is a brief
explanation of each information tab.

Output List - This tab allows the user to select the output groups/scratchpads that will be
activated by this sequence. See above for more information on how the sequence is
configured.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

634 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 635

Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and

the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 636 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

8.3.17.4 Timers

There are 10 timers available per node for creating delays for Output Groups and
Scratchpads. To configure a timer, set the desired timer interval in seconds, and select the
appropriate Output Group or Scratchpad from the Group drop-down list. If set, the timer
information will be displayed in the CAM entry screen for the selected group. This delay will
apply when the output group or scratchpad is activated through the CAM logic expression.
The options for the timers are displayed in a table format. Each option is described below.

Timer - This is a read-only display that shows the timer number (1-10).

Time (Seconds) - This sets the delay time for this timer. The delay time is entered in
seconds. This may range from 1 to 3600 seconds .

Group - Select the Output Group or Scratchpad that you would like to delay.

Resettable Timer - This option allows you to choose between standard and resettable
timers. If set to No, the timer will be a standard timer. Standard timers will only trigger
once. In order to be triggered again, the system will need to be reset. If this setting is
changed to Yes, the timer can be triggered multiple times. In order to be triggered again,
the timer will have time out and the CAM expression assigned to the output group or
scratchpad will need to transition from false to true again.

Free/Used - If this timer has been configured and assigned to an Output Group or
Scratchpad, this will read Used, otherwise it will read Free.

NOTE: If a Timer is used by Advanced CAM Programming, this field will read Used, even
if it doesn't appear to have any other configuration information assigned.

NOTE: If a Timer is used by Advanced CAM Programming, no timer parameters may be

changed via this screen.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

8.3.18 CAM Reset Inhibit

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 637

in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

638 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

AMM/PID Modules
AOM's
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches
node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 639

Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs on this screen will prevent this node from being reset when both CAMs are

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

640 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

TRUE.

NOTE: Both CAMs must be TRUE in order to inhibit system reset.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 641

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

642 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Device Type and Description.

AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 643

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs on this screen will prevent this node from being reset when both CAMs are
TRUE.

NOTE: Both CAMs must be TRUE in order to inhibit system reset.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

8.3.19 Advanced CAM Programming

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

Selecting this option will open the Advanced CAM Programming Editor.

See this page 925 for more information about the Advanced CAM Programming Editor.
See this page 920 for more information about Advanced CAM Programming in general.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

8.3.20 Communication
Opens the Download screen in the main window. See the Download Utilities 841 section for
more information.

8.4 General
8.4.1 7100 Input/Output Functionality
The 7100 implements a powerful set of input-to-output relationships. Inputs may control
outputs in three distinct ways: condition-based general output lists, point-based input/output
groups, and CAM controlled output groups.

General Output Lists define the response of each system output device to the panel's

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 644 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

current condition (e.g. Day Alarm, Night Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble, etc.). Each output
device may be programmed to activate under any combination of conditions.

NOTE: An output may not be assigned to the Walk Test/Drill and Trouble lists
simultaneously.

Input/Output Groups define relationships among specific input and output devices. Each
7100 input may be programmed to trigger two local groups (1-99). Each output may be
configured to be activated by up to three such groups (except for NACs, MuniCkt, and AOM
Extended Groups types which can belong to as many as ten groups).

Output devices may be programmed to use the 7100 General Output Lists and 7100 Local
Groups (1-99) or CAM Controlled Output Groups.

CAM Controlled Output Groups 618 - An output device may be assigned to ONE CAM
Controlled Output Group to enable full Boolean logic control. Under this case, the output is
solely controlled by the CAM expression written for the selected output group. CAM
Controlled Output Groups are incompatible with both the General Output List and local
Input/Output group control and may not be mixed. In addition, only ONE CAM Controlled
Output Group may be assigned to each output device.

NOTE: It is very important to assign only ONE group number to an output device when
using CAM Controlled Output Groups. Otherwise, the results of the CAM logic evaluation
for the first group number may have a different “truth” than the evaluation of the logic for
the second group number. This could produce undesirable results under certain
conditions.

It is also extremely important to note that you MUST NOT mix 7100 Local Groups and
7100 General Output Lists with Conditional Action Map control on the same output.
Unpredictable results may occur should the two control methods be mixed.

Group ranges...

Group Range Starting Group Ending Group 7100 Local CAM Control
Control

Local Groups 1 99 YES NO

Cross Zone Groups 100 124 YES NO
CAM Controlled Output 125 224 NO YES
Groups

8.4.2 Cross Zone Functions

The 7100 provides up to 25 cross zones. There are two types of cross zones available. One
type is group cross zoning, and the other is point cross zoning. Each cross zone provides a
counting function with a user configurable trigger level. The trigger may be set to any value
between 2 and 7.

NOTE: If a system is to use both by group and by point cross zoning, input device groups
must not be shared by both types of cross zoning as this could lead to unexpected

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 645

results.

The cross zone activates when it has been triggered by the number of groups or points that
matches the configured trigger level. When activated, the cross zone activates the outputs
of the configured cross zone group (100-124). The system groups 100 through 124 are set
aside for cross zone use and are not available as standard I/O groups. The General Alarm
outputs are also activated, if configured to do so for that particular cross zone. An "XZONE
ALRM" is reported on the display and printer. A zone code may also be configured for cross
zones. It is executed when the cross zone activates.

Point Cross Zone – A Point Cross Zone is a collection of individual points configured into a
virtual cross zone group. Point Cross Zoning provides a two-stage fire alarm condition
where the first alarm in the virtual group initiates an Action condition. The second stage
alarm is triggered when the number of alarms in the virtual cross zone group has reached a
pre-set trigger level (user programmable).

Point Cross Zone Programming:

1.) In the Cross Zone screen, select the desired Cross Zone by clicking on the cross
zone number on the left.
2.) Click on the Add button to assign devices to the cross zone.
3.) A selection window will open that will display all devices on the current node that are
eligible to be used for cross zoning. Devices may be selected by placing a check
mark in the selection field (labeled "Sel").
4.) Click the Add button to add the devices to the cross-zone. Devices are removed
from the grid when they are added to the cross zone. Devices can be removed from
the cross zone later if desired.
5.) Click Close to dismiss the Add Devices window.
6.) Select the desired options for each virtual cross zone group. See this page 616 for
more information.

NOTE: Only certain device types are eligible for cross zoning. See the following pages
for information about compatible device types:

7100 Sensor Device Types 647

7100 Module Device Types 650

NOTE: Verification and PAS cannot be mixed with Cross Zoning.

NOTE: Cross Zone Groups on the 7100 do not have associated bits in the System Status
Map. Therefore, it is not possible to directly read the status of a cross zone in a CAM
expression. If desired, an AOM/AMM combination may be used to set a bit in the 7100's
System Status Map that may be used in CAMs.

NOTE: If desired, the system may be configured to produce the full cross-zone response
for point cross zones, even if the system is already in alarm by enabling the "Enable
Multiple Point Cross Zone Activations When System is in Alarm" option in the Cross Zone
616 screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

646 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Group Cross Zone – The 7100 provides group cross zoning by linking input groups directly
to a particular cross zone. The total number of point cross zone and group cross zone
virtual groups is twenty-five in any mixture. When any device in a member input group goes
into alarm, that one device will count towards the cross zone's trigger level. If another
smoke detector in the same input group goes into alarm it will not increase the trigger count.
The cross zone trigger level will increase if a smoke detector in a different input group that is
a member of the cross zone goes into alarm.

Group Cross Zone Programming:

1.) In the Input Devices screen, add at least one input group to each sensor that will be
a part of group cross zoning. More than one sensor can be assigned to the same
group, however multiple sensors in the same group will only count as one alarm input
toward the activation threshold. Group cross zones are intended to collect multiple
group assignments into a virtual group cross zone.
2.) Go to the Input Groups screen.
3.) Select the desired Cross Zone number in the "Group Cross Zone" field for each
member input group.
2.) Go to the Cross Zone screen.
3.) Set the desired trigger level for the cross zone.
4.) Select the desired options for each virtual cross zone group. See this page 616 for
more information.
5.) Click Save to save all of the changes.

NOTE: Only certain device types are eligible for cross zoning. See the following pages
for information about compatible device types:

7100 Sensor Device Types 647

7100 Module Device Types 650

NOTE: Verification and PAS cannot be mixed with Cross Zoning.

NOTE: Cross Zone Groups on the 7100 do not have associated bits in the System Status
Map. Therefore, it is not possible to directly read the status of a cross zone in a CAM
expression. If desired, an AOM/AMM combination may be used to set a bit in the 7100's
System Status Map that may be used in CAMs.

NOTE: If a system is to use both by group and by point cross zoning, input device groups
must not be shared by both types of cross zoning as this could lead to unexpected
results.

NOTE: All cross zone triggers on the 7100 must reside on the same panel.

NOTE: Cross Zone groups (used to link output devices to a cross zone activation) affect
only the local 7100 panel. If desired, an AOM/AMM combination may be used to set a bit
in the 7100's System Status Map that may be read by other nodes.

Enable Multiple Point Cross Zone Activations When System is in Alarm - When
checked, point cross zone inputs will continue to prealarm after the system is already in

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 647

alarm, and the cross zones will activate when their threshold is reached. When unchecked,
all smoke detectors that are configured for point cross zoning will automatically go into alarm
when the system is in alarm and the outputs assigned to the cross zone will not activate.
8.4.3 Zone Coding Functions
Zone Coding allows an FACP to produce a distinct coded pattern on its NAC outputs, based
upon the particular input device or cross zone that caused the alarm condition.

The 7100 supports up to 63 different codes, each of which may be configured for any
pattern of two, three, or four digits. The digits may range from 1 to 14 pulses. After the
necessary codes are entered in the Zone Code table (in Zone Code screen), they can be
associated with individual input devices and cross zones in the appropriate entry screen (i.e.
Input Devices and Cross Zones). Multiple inputs may be assigned to run the same code, if
desired, or each input may have a unique code (up to a limit of 63 different codes).

To set the pulses for a particular zone code, simply select the digit in the entry grid and
choose the appropriate number of pulses for each digit from the drop-down list.
8.4.4 Sensor Device Types
The 7100 Series FACP supports the following sensor device types:
Se Device Type As Physical Device Type Descriptio Response La PA Ve Cr
ns Reported By Panel n Type tc S rifi os
or hi All ca s
De ng o tio Zo
vi ? we n ni
ce d? All ng
Ty o All
pe we o
d? we
d?

No No Device No Device No device Fire Alarm N/ N/ N/ N/

ne at this A A A A
As address
sig
ne
d
Io Ion Detector Ion Sensor Standard Fire Alarm Ye Ye Ye Ye
n (ASD-IL2F) Ion Sensor, s s s s
De such as
tec ASD-IL2F
tor
Cri Critical Ion Ion Sensor Standard Fire Alarm Ye Ye Ye Ye
tic (ASD-IL2F) Ion Sensor. s s s s
al The system
Io reserves
n power to
run the
sensor's

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

648 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

LEDs.
Ph Photo Detector Photo Sensor Standard Fire Alarm Ye Ye Ye Ye
ot (ASD-PL2F, Photo s s s s
o ASD-PL2FR, ADP-RF, Sensor,
De ADS-P200, ADS-RP200, such as
tec ASD-FILTREXF) ASD-PL2F
tor
Cri Critical Photo Photo Sensor Standard Fire Alarm Ye Ye Ye Ye
tic (ASD-PL2F, Photo s s s s
al ASD-PL2FR, ADP-RF, Sensor.
Ph ADS-P200, ADS-RP200, The system
ot ASD-FILTREXF) reserves
o power to
run the
sensor's
LEDs.
Ph Photo/Heat Det Photo/Thermal Sensor Standard Fire Alarm Ye Ye Ye Ye
ot (ASD-PTL2F) Photo/Heat s s s s
o/ Detector,
He such as
at ASD-PTL2F
De
t
Th Thermal Det Thermal Sensor Standard Fire Alarm Ye No No No
er (ATD-L2F, ATD-HL2F, Heat s
m ATD-RL2F) Detector,
al such as
De ATD-L2F
t
Ac Acclimate Acclimate Sensor Analog, Fire Alarm Ye Ye Ye Ye
cli (MCS-Acclimate2F) addressabl s s s s
m e multi-
at criteria
e sensor
N NR Ion Det NL Ion Sensor Standard Multi-level No No No No
R (ASD-IL2F) Ion Sensor, (three-level)
Io such as (Alert, Action,
n ASD-IL2F Fire Alarm)
De
t
NL
N NR Photo Det NL Photo Sensor Standard Non-reporting No No No No
R (ASD-PL2F, Photo
Ph ASD-PL2FR, ADP-RF, Sensor,
ot ADS-P200, ADS-RP200, such as
o ASD-FILTREXF) ASD-PL2F
De
t
NL
Io Ion Multilevel Ion Sensor Standard Multi-level Ye No No Ye
n (ASD-IL2F) Ion Sensor, (three-level) s s

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 649

M such as (Alert, Action,

ulti ASD-IL2F Fire Alarm)
lev
el
Ph Pho Multilevel Photo Sensor Standard Multi-level Ye No No Ye
o (ASD-PL2F, Photo (three-level) s s
M ASD-PL2FR, ADP-RF, Sensor, (Alert, Action,
ulti ADS-P200, ADS-RP200, such as Fire Alarm)
lev ASD-FILTREXF) ASD-PL2F
el
Io Ion Duct Spv Ion Sensor Analog, Supervisory Ye No No No
n (ASD-IL2F) Addressabl s
Du e Ion Duct
ct Detector
Sp
v
Ph Photo Duct Spv Photo Sensor Analog, Supervisory Ye No No No
ot (ASD-PL2F, Addressabl s
o ASD-PL2FR, ADP-RF, e Photo
Du ADS-P200, ADS-RP200, Duct
ct ASD-FILTREXF) Detector
Sp
v
Io Ion Duct Det Ion Sensor Analog, Fire Alarm Ye Ye Ye Ye
n (ASD-IL2F) Addressabl s s s s
Du e Ion Duct
ct Detector
De
t
Ph Photo Duct Det Photo Sensor Analog, Fire Alarm Ye Ye Ye Ye
ot (ASD-PL2F, Addressabl s s s s
o ASD-PL2FR, ADP-RF, e Photo
Du ADS-P200, ADS-RP200, Duct
ct ASD-FILTREXF) Detector
De
t
La Laser Sensor Analog, Fire Alarm Ye Ye Ye Ye
se Laser Sensor Addressabl s s s s
r (ASD-LS) e Laser
Se Photo
ns Sensor,
or such as
ASD-LS
Io Ion Supv Ion Sensor Standard Supervisory No No No Ye
n (ASD-IL2F) Ion Sensor, s
Su such as
pv ASD-IL2F
Ph Photo Supv Photo Sensor Standard Supervisory No No No Ye
ot (ASD-PL2F, Photo s
o ASD-PL2FR, ADP-RF, Sensor,
Su ADS-P200, ADS-RP200, such as

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 650 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

pv ASD-FILTREXF) ASD-PL2F
Ac Acclimate Supv Acclimate Sensor Analog, Supervisory No No No Ye
cli (MCS-Acclimate2F) addressabl s
m e multi-
at criteria
e sensor
Su
pv

8.4.5 Module Device Types

The following pre-defined module device types are available on the 7100 Series:

Input Modules -
Input Device Type Device Type As Phy Des Res Latc PAS Verif Cro
Reported By sical cript pon hing Allo icati ss
Panel Devi ion se ? wed on Zoni
ce Typ ? Allo ng
Typ e wed Allo
e ? wed
?

None Assigned No Device No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A

Devi devi Res
ce ce at pons
this e
addr
ess
Smoke Detector Smoke Detector AM Con Fire Yes No No Yes
M venti Alar
Mod onal m
ule Smo
(AM ke
M-2 Dete
F, ctor
AM moni
M-2I tore
F, d by
AM AM
M-4 M
F,
MMI-
10F)
Manual Station Manual Station AM Con Fire Yes Yes No No
M venti Alar
Mod onal m
ule pull

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 651

(AM stati
M-2 on
F, moni
AM tore
M-2I d by
F, AM
AM M
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Man
ual
Stati
on
Mod
ule
(MS-
7AF)
Plenum Det Plenum Det AM Con Fire Yes No No Yes
M venti Alar
Mod onal m
ule Plen
(AM um
M-2 Smo
F, ke
AM Dete
M-2I ctor
F, moni
AM tore
M-4 d by
F, AM
MMI- M
10F)
N.O. Contacts N.O. Contacts AM Any Fire Yes No No No
M nor Alar
Mod mall m
ule y
(AM open
M-2 cont
F, act
AM devi
M-2I ce
F, moni
AM tore
M-4 d by
F, AM
MMI- M
10F)
Heat Detector Heat Detector AM Any Fire Yes No No No

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

652 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

M conv Alar
Mod entio m
ule nal
(AM heat
M-2 dete
F, ctor
AM
M-2I
F,
AM
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Sub Loop Sub Loop AM Any Fire Yes No No Yes
M conv Alar
Mod entio m
ule nal
(AM initia
M-2 ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-2I circu
F, it
AM
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Waterflow Sil Waterflow Sil AM Any Fire Yes No No No
M wate Alar
Mod rflow m
ule switc
(AM h
M-2 moni
F, tore
AM d by
M-2I AM
F, M.
AM
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Beam Smoke Det Beam Smoke AM Any Fire Yes No No Yes
Det M conv Alar
Mod entio m
ule nal
(AM bea
M-2 m

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 653

F, smo
AM ke
M-2I dete
F, ctor
AM moni
M-4 tore
F, d by
MMI- AM
10F) M.
Duct Detector Duct Detector AM Any Fire Yes No No Yes
M conv Alar
Mod entio m
ule nal
(AM Duct
M-2 dete
F, ctor
AM moni
M-2I tore
F, d by
AM AM
M-4 M
F,
MMI-
10F)
FACP FACP AM Any Fire Yes No No No
M rem Alar
Mod ote m
ule FAC
(AM P
M-2 Alar
F, m
AM dry
M-2I cont
F, acts
AM moni
M-4 tore
F, d by
MMI- AM
10F) M
Remote Zone Remote Zone Zon Any Fire Yes No No Yes
e conv Alar
Mod entio m
ule nal
(AM initia
M-4 ting
SF, devi
MMI- ce
6SF) circu
it

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

654 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Smoke/Heat Det Smoke/Heat Det AM Any Fire Yes No No Yes

M conv Alar
Mod entio m
ule nal
(AM phot
M-2 o/
F, ther
AM mal
M-2I dete
F, ctor
AM moni
M-4 tore
F, d by
MMI- AM
10F) M
Supervisory Sw Supervisory Sw AM Any Sup No No No No
M nor ervis
Mod mall ory
ule y
(AM open
M-2 cont
F, act
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Tamper Sw Tamper Sw AM Any Sup Yes No No No
M nor ervis
Mod mall ory
ule y
(AM open
M-2 cont
F, act
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Waterflow NS Waterflow NS AM Any Fire Yes No No No
M wate Alar
Mod rflow m
ule switc (Non
(AM h -sile

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 655

M-2 moni ncea

F, tore ble)
AM d by
M-2I AM
F, M.
AM
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
NR Actuator L NR Actuator L AM Any Non- Yes No No No
M nor repo
Mod mall rting
ule y
(AM open
M-2 cont
F, act
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
NR Actuator NL NR Actuator NL AM Any Non- No No No No
M nor repo
Mod mall rting
ule y
(AM open
M-2 cont
F, act
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
NAC Silence Sw NAC Silence Sw AM Any Silen N/A N/A N/A N/A
M nor ce
Mod mall Swit
ule y ch
(AM open
M-2 cont
F, act
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

656 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Reset Sw Reset Sw AM Any Res N/A N/A N/A N/A
M nor et
Mod mall Swit
ule y ch
(AM open
M-2 cont
F, act
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Fire Drill Sw Fire Drill Sw AM Any Fire N/A N/A N/A N/A
M nor Drill
Mod mall Swit
ule y ch
(AM open
M-2 cont
F, act
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)
Alarm Ack Sw Alarm Ack Sw AM Any Alar N/A N/A N/A N/A
M nor m
Mod mall Ackn
ule y owle
(AM open dge
M-2 cont Swit
F, act ch
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 657

Trbl Ack Sw Trbl Ack Sw AM Any Trou N/A N/A N/A N/A
M nor ble
Mod mall Ackn
ule y owle
(AM open dge
M-2 cont Swit
F, act ch
AM initia
M-2I ting
F, devi
AM ce
M-4
F,
MMI-
10F)

Output Modules -

Phy
sica
Sile
l Des
Device Type As Reported nce Not
Output Device Type Dev crip
By Panel able es
ice tion
?
Typ
e

Do
not
use
this
Sup devi
ervi ce
sed type
Sign
sign in
al
al conj
Mod
cont unct
ule
rol ion
(AO
Signal AOM Sil NAC AOM Sil mod Yes with
M-2
ule, a
SF,
suc CA
MM
h as M
O-6
AO Con
SF)
M- troll
2SF ed
. Out
put
Gro
up
(125

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

658 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

-
224)
Signal AOM NS NAC AOM NS Sign Sup No
al ervi
Mod sed
ule sign
(AO al
M-2 cont
SF, rol
MM mod
O-6 ule,
SF) suc
h as
AO
M-
2SF
.
Form C AOM Sil Form C AOM Sil For For Yes Do
m-C m-C not
Mod Dry use
ule Con this
(AO tact devi
M- cont ce
2RF rol type
, mod in
MM ule, conj
O- suc unct
6RF h as ion
) AO with
M- a
2RF CA
M
Con
troll
ed
Out
put
Gro
up
(125
-
224)
Form C AOM NS For For
m-C m-C
Mod Dry
ule Con
Form C AOM NS No
(AO tact
M- cont
2RF rol
, mod

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 659

ule,
MM suc
O- h as
6RF AO
) M-
2RF
Form C (Ext. Groups) Form C AOM NS For For No 1.)
m-C m-C Do
Mod Dry not
ule Con use
(AO tact this
M- cont devi
2RF rol ce
, mod type
MM ule, in
O- suc conj
6RF h as unct
) AO ion
M- with
2RF a
CA
M
Con
troll
ed
Out
put
Gro
up
(125
-
224)

2.)
This
devi
ce
type
allo
ws
up
to
10
loca
l
grou
ps
(1-
99)
to

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

660 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

be
assi
gne
d.

3.)
A
max
imu
m
num
ber
of
22
exte
nde
d
grou
ps
devi
ces
may
be
assi
gne
d.
Signal (Ext. Groups) NAC AOM Sil Sign Sup Yes 1.)
al ervi Do
Mod sed not
ule sign use
(AO al this
M-2 cont devi
SF, rol ce
MM mod type
O-6 ule, in
SF) suc conj
h as unct
AO ion
M- with
2SF a
. CA
M
Con
troll
ed
Out
put
Gro
up
(125

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 7100 661

-
224)

2.)
This
devi
ce
type
allo
ws
up
to
10
loca
l
grou
ps
(1-
99)
to
be
assi
gne
d.

3.)
A
max
imu
m
num
ber
of
22
exte
nde
d
grou
ps
devi
ces
may
be
assi
gne
d.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

Part

IX
 INCC 663

9 INCC
9.1 What Is the INCC?
The INCC is comprised of an Intelligent Network Interface - Voice Gateway (INI-VGC)
subassembly, a mixture of one to sixteen fully programmable Addressable Switch
Sub-Assemblies (ASM-16) and Addressable LED Driver Units (ANU-48), a microphone for
paging, and a telephone handset for fire fighter communications. See this page 663 for the
full list of supported Switch and Annunciator modules.

9.2 INCC - Configuration Screens

9.2.1 ASM / ANU
Each INCC supports a combination of up to sixteen Switch and Annunciator Modules of the
following types:
ASM-16 and ANU-48.

The following settings may be selected for each module through this screen:

Board # - This field simply indicates which module will be affected by these settings. This
field cannot be changed.

Board Type - Select a board type to indicate that a board should be assigned to this
address or select "None", if no board should be assigned to this address.

Lamp Test - When enabled, pressing Switch 1 on the module will turn ON all of the
module's LED's, overriding their normal operation. A second press of Switch 1 will return the
LED's to their normal operation.

At the bottom of the screen is an area where the user can customize the switch type and
enter a label for each switch available. These are for programming convenience only, and
are not downloaded to the system. These should be programmed to use for reference when
defining CAMs. These switch types can be viewed in the information pane located at the
bottom of the CAM entry screens.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

9.2.2 Output Devices

Select each active telephone (AOM-TELF) on the INCC. Devices with addresses from 1-16
are pre-configured as AOM Telephone modules.

The maximum number of characters for the label is 19. These labels will be downloaded to
the system, and will appear for any event report from the AOM.

If the AOM is present in the system double-click on the gray circle in the Active column (or
press the spacebar if that field is highlighted) to change the circle's color to green, otherwise

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 664 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

leave that circle gray. If an address is Active, but is not present in the system, a Missing
device trouble will be reported.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

9.2.3 CAM Telephone Modules

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INCC 665

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

666 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads

on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INCC 667

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs on this screen will affect the following functions:

AOM These CAMs will activate the AOM Telephone (AOM-TELF) modules on this
Telephone node (via the Module Control bit). These modules are used to provide a
Modules - connection between a firefighter telephone jack or warden station and a
firefighter telephone riser.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

9.2.4 CAM ASM/ANU LED

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

668 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INCC 669

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

670 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for

Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs in this screen control the state of the LED's on ASM-16 or ANU-48 modules. A
CAM expression written in this area will either light steady or blink the LED when the CAM

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INCC 671

evaluates to a TRUE and will turn the LED off when the CAM evaluates to a false.

NOTE: The LED blink CAM Expression takes priority over the LED On/Off if both CAM
expressions are TRUE at the same time.

NOTE: If an ASM-16 or ANU-48 switch has been configured for its Auxiliary Function, the
CAM entry field, as well as the description field will be grayed out.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

9.2.5 CAM Phone Function

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

672 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INCC 673

the selected node. Includes the Module

Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

674 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

includes the Scratchpad number,

Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMS on this screen affect the following functions:

Phone Page - Phone Page is enabled to allow the phone channel to be paged through
the amplifiers instead of the microphone channel.

Phone Ring - Activating the Phone Ring function will cause the panel's piezo buzzer
to sound in an ON/OFF alternating pattern. The Phone Ring function
overrides the Buzzer function If both CAM Expressions are TRUE at the
same time.

Buzzer - Activating the Buzzer function will cause the panel's piezo buzzer to
sound in a steady pattern.

Phone Enable - When enabled, the Phone Enable function opens a network connection
for the firefighter telephones. This does not need to be enabled if all
phones that need to be active at a given time are all connected to the
same node, only when some phones that need to be active are located
on this node and others on other nodes.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INCC 675

9.2.6 CAM Scratchpad

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

676 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INCC 677

Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,

CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 678 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs in this screen will turn on or off the Scratchpads associated with this node.
Scratchpads can be referred to in other CAM expressions and are extremely useful in
reducing the complexity of other CAM expressions.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

9.2.7 CAM Audio Outputs

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INCC 679

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

680 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

assigned to the selected node. Includes

Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INCC 681

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMS on this screen affect the following functions:

Local Audio These CAM Expressions will activate and control the local speaker
Outputs - output. The local speaker output is a 1W (max) unsupervised audio
circuit on TB4-1 (-) and TB4-2 (+) on the INCC that is typically used for
diagnostic purposes or to provide voice instructions to the system's
operator. The following CAM Expressions affect the Local Speaker
Output:

Local This CAM is used to enable the connection to the Local

Speaker Speaker Output. The circuit will activate once this CAM
On/Off - Expression is true.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 682 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Local This CAM Expression determines whether or not this

Paging - node will send live voice paging out to the Local
Speaker Output.

Broadcast The system has the ability to stream recorded audio

Local messages across the network as if there were a live
Active page. When this CAM Expression is true, the audio
Message - currently playing through the Local Speaker Output will
be streamed across the network and will play on any
other node that has paging enabled.

Recorded
Messages - These CAMs will trigger the activation of one or more of this node's
pre-recorded audio messages, of which there are sixteen. Each
message has a built-in priority to provide for cases where multiple
messages are triggered simultaneously for the same output. Message
#1 has the highest priority level and Message #16 has the lowest
priority level. Therefore, if Message #1 and Message #2 are assigned
to the same output at the same time Message #1 will override
Message #2.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

9.2.8 CAM Reset Inhibit

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INCC 683

to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

684 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)

assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INCC 685

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

NOTE: In order for the following settings to take effect, the INI-VGC, INI-VGX or INI-VGE
must be running V2.2-001 or later of the System Operating Software.

The CAMs on this screen will prevent this node from being reset. There are three bits, a
Fire Reset Inhibit Bit, an MNS Reset Inhibit Bit and and Enable Reset Inhibit. Both the Fire
Reset Inhibit Bit and the Enable Reset Inhibit bit must be TRUE in order to prevent a fire
reset from affecting this node. Both the MNS Reset Inhibit Bit and the Enable Reset Inhibit
bit must be TRUE in order to prevent an MNS reset from affecting this node.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 686 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

9.2.9 CAM Special Function

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM Special Functions screen incorporates several advanced functions that can be
useful for certain applications. Specifically, these functions are:
[****]

Counters 686 - Activate outputs after a certain number of specific events occur.
Sequence 689 - Activate several outputs in succession.
Timers 692 - Delay the activation of output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

9.2.9.1 Counters

There are 10 counters available per node for activating outputs after an input triggers the
counter a specified number of times.

The process of configuring a counter is as follows:

1. In the grid, choose how many times the counter must be run by selecting a value in the
"Count" field.
2. Select the Group that will be triggered by the scheduler. The allowed selection of groups
will vary based on the current node type, but will always at least include the node's
scratchpad locations.
3. A Define Counter CAM Expression may be written. If present, this CAM expression will
determine under what condition the counter will be reset. If this CAM is blank, the counter
will operate as a one-shot (meaning that a reset is required in order to trigger the counter
again after it has activated its output.)
4. Select a "Working Bit". This is a bit that is used internally by the CAM engine to perform
the counter function. This bit must not be used by any other function.
5. Counter Trigger CAM Expression. This CAM Expression describes what condition will

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INCC 687

cause the counter to be incremented.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is a brief explanation of each
information tab.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

688 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,

Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INCC 689

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

9.2.9.2 Sequence

There are 10 sequences available per node for activating multiple Output Groups or
Scratchpads in a sequence. There are two types of sequences. The table below explains
the differences between the two.

Sequence Type Description Visual Sample

A 'Bar Graph' sequence

leaves any current
Bar Graph
outputs ON when the
sequence is triggered.

A 'Shift' sequence turns

OFF its current output
when the sequence is
Shift
triggered and then
activates the next
output.

The process of configuring a sequence is the same regardless of the type of sequence
being used. Below is the procedure for configuring a sequence:

1. Select a "Working Bit" - This is a bit that is used internally by the CAM engine to perform
the sequence function. This bit must not be used by any other function.
2. Select the number of outputs - The sequencer must know how many outputs are going to
be affected by the scheduler.This may range from 2 to 12.
3. Type of Sequence - Select either a Bar Graph sequence or a Shift sequence. See above
for an explanation of the two types of sequence.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

690 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

4. CAM Sequence Reinitialize - A CAM Expression must be written for the sequence to be
enabled to run the first time (or be reset so that it may be run again once it has already
run through).
5. Sequence Triggering CAM - This CAM Expression describes what condition will cause the
next output in the sequence to be activated.
6. At the bottom of the screen, select the "Output List" tab.
7. Select the desired output groups and/or scratchpads that should be added to the
sequence. These should be selected in the desired order of activation. Outputs may be
added to the sequence by selecting a group from the list box on the left and clicking the
right arrow button. Outputs may be removed from the sequence by selecting the group in
the list in the list box on the right and clicking on the left arrow button.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
four tabs of information. The first is called "Output List", the second is "Node Devices", the
third is "Reference Search" and the fourth is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is a brief
explanation of each information tab.

Output List - This tab allows the user to select the output groups/scratchpads that will be
activated by this sequence. See above for more information on how the sequence is
configured.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INCC 691

Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 692 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

9.2.9.3 Timers

There are 10 timers available per node for creating delays for Scratchpads. To configure a
timer, set the desired timer interval in seconds, and select the appropriate Scratchpad from
the Group drop-down list. If set, the timer information will be displayed in the CAM entry
screen for the selected group. This delay will apply when the output group or scratchpad is
activated through the CAM logic expression.
The options for the timers are displayed in a table format. Each option is described below.

Timer - This is a read-only display that shows the timer number (1-10).

Time (Seconds) - This sets the delay time for this timer. The delay time is entered in
seconds. This may range from 1 to 3600 seconds.

Group - Select the Output Group or Scratchpad that you would like to delay.

Resettable Timer - This option allows you to choose between standard and resettable
timers. If set to No, the timer will be a standard timer. Standard timers will only trigger
once. In order to be triggered again, the system will need to be reset. If this setting is
changed to Yes, the timer can be triggered multiple times. In order to be triggered again,
the timer will have time out and the CAM expression assigned to the output group or
scratchpad will need to transition from false to true again.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INCC 693

Free/Used - If this timer has been configured and assigned to an Output Group or
Scratchpad, this will read Used, otherwise it will read Free.

NOTE: If a Timer is used by Advanced CAM Programming, this field will read Used, even
if it doesn't appear to have any other configuration information assigned.

NOTE: If a Timer is used by Advanced CAM Programming, no timer parameters may be

changed via this screen.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

9.2.10 Audio Messages

Each flavor of the INI-VG board, specifically the INCC, INX, and INI-VGE, allows the user to
create and download custom audio messages. In addition, Gamewell-FCI provides several
stock audio messages, both tones and voice, that are available as a part of the Audio &
Utilities Library (P/N: 9020-0565). Each INCC, INX, and INI-VGE provides for up to sixteen
messages to be stored per node. Each audio message may be up to thirty (30) seconds in
length, but the total combined message length cannot exceed 180 seconds (three minutes).
Each audio message must have a sampling rate of 8000 Hz and a sample size (resolution)
of 16 bits. All audio files must also be mono only.

CAMWorks will automatically convert the audio messages to the correct format prior to
downloading if it determines that a WAV file does not conform to the requirements.

This screen is used to link one or more audio messages to a node in the project. Once
linked, audio messages may be downloaded to the target node using the Download screen.

Like most screens in CAMWorks, this screen is composed primarily of a grid interface. This
grid has sixteen entries, one for each possible message. The grid contains the following
columns:

Sel - Used to remove a message. Place a check mark in this field and click "Remove" to
remove a message.

Message # - The message number is displayed for reference only. It cannot be changed.

Wave File - This field displays the name of an audio file linked to this message. If the file
name is highlighted in red, the selected file is not a valid audio file. If the file name is
highlighted in blue, the selected file must be converted to the correct format that is
acceptable to the system. CAMWorks will automatically perform the conversion when
saving the changes made on this screen.

Description - Up to fifty-five (55) characters may be used to describe the message. This
information is for user reference only and will be printed in the Audio Messages report.

Browse - There are two methods of adding audio messages. The first is by clicking on the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 694 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

"..." button in the Browse field. Doing so will open a standard "Open" window for browsing
and selecting a message. Both standard Windows WAV files and SON files, created with
the "Gamewell-FCI Audio Converter" (provided with previous versions of CAMWorks and as
a part of the Audio & Utilities Library) may be chosen.

Time - Shows the length of the message in seconds.

Below the grid are controls that assist in the manipulation of the audio message. On the left
is a "Select All" checkbox. Clicking this box will place a check in the "Sel" field in the grid for
each message. The "Remove" button may be used to remove selected messages from the
project. Clicking "Open Explorer" will open a Windows Explorer window. From the Windows
Explorer window, the user can use drag & drop techniques to add multiple .WAV or .SON
files to the project. Finally, the up and down arrow buttons are used to move the position of
an audio message to a different slot (if available).

NOTE: The Drag & Drop feature is unavailable on Windows 7 64-bit systems.

NOTE: In order to use the up and down arrow buttons, the desired audio message must
be highlighted. To do so, click the mouse in the "Wave File" field of the desired message
and then use the up and down arrow buttons. The up and down arrow buttons do not
work if any other field in the grid is selected, nor does it work with audio messages that
have a check mark in the check mark column.

Below is an information area. In this pane appears information about the selected message
(the number of channels, 1 being for mono and 2 being for stereo), the sampling rate (in
samples per second), and the sample resolution (in bits per sample). To the right is a
Microsoft Windows Media Player plug-in, which allows the user to preview selected
messages (Windows WAV files only. Windows Media Player cannot play .SON files).

Finally, at the bottom of the screen are two buttons. These are:
Save - Saves any changes that have been made, if any.
Close - Closes the window, prompting to save any changes that have been made, if any.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

9.2.11 Advanced CAM Programming

Selecting this option will open the Advanced CAM Programming Editor.

See this page 925 for more information about the Advanced CAM Programming Editor.
See this page 920 for more information about Advanced CAM Programming in general.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INCC 695

9.2.12 Communication
Opens the Download screen in the main window. See the Download Utilities 841 section for
more information.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

Part

X
 INX 697

10 INX
10.1 What Is the INX?
The INX is an Intelligent Network Transponder that serves as an audio control system. It is
comprised of the following equipment:

1. Intelligent Network - Voice Gateway (INI-VGX) (required)

2. A nine amp power supply sub assembly (PM-9) (optional, depends on cabinetry layout
options)
3. Up to six (6) Switch and Annunciator 697 modules
3. Paging microphone (optional)
4. Local fire fighter's telephone (optional) or telephone riser (optional)
5. Up to four AM-50 Series audio amplifiers. (optional)

10.2 INX - Configuration Screens

10.2.1 General Settings
The General Settings screen of the INX affects two components of the INX, its power supply
and its amplifiers.
General Settings -

Supervise PM-9 Power Supply - If this box is checked, the INX will
supervise the PM-9 power supply. By default, this option is enabled.

Amplifier Settings -

The Amplifier Settings section of the screen is used to to indicate to

the INX which AM-50 Series amplifiers are present.

Amplifier - Shows the number of the amplifier that will be affected by

these settings. This value may not be changed.

Enable - Check this box if the amplifier is present on the INX.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

10.2.2 ASM / ANU

Each INX supports a combination of up to six Switch and Annunciator Modules of the
following types:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 698 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

ASM-16 and ANU-48.

The following settings may be selected for each module through this screen:

Board # - This field simply indicates which module will be affected by these settings. This
field cannot be changed.

Board Type - Select a board type to indicate that a board should be assigned to this
address or select "None", if no board should be assigned to this address.

Lamp Test - When enabled, pressing Switch 1 on the module will turn ON all of the
module's LED's, overriding their normal operation. A second press of Switch 1 will return the
LED's to their normal operation.

At the bottom of the screen is an area where the user can customize the switch type and
enter a label for each switch available. These are for programming convenience only, and
are not downloaded to the system. These should be programmed to use for reference when
defining CAMs. These switch types can be viewed in the information pane located at the
bottom of the CAM entry screens.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

10.2.3 Output Devices

Select each active telephone (AOM-TELF) or speaker circuit control module (AOM-MUXF or
AOM-2SF) on the INX. Devices with addresses from 1-16 are pre-configured as AOM
Telephone modules, while devices addressed from 17-48 must be configured as either an
AOM-MUXF or AOM-2SF module. CAMWorks does require the user to select which type of
module is connected at a particular address, because each device type is configured slightly
differently. For example, the AOM-MUXF device type has an Input Select bit to choose
between two different inputs. The following table compares the types of modules that may
be installed:

CAM Bits
Module Type Input Ouptput
Required
Firefighter
Phone
Module
AOM-TELF Firefighter Phone Riser Handset or
Control
Warden
Station
One Module
speaker Control
Two speaker circuits from different
AOM-MUXF circuit to
audio sources. Input
field
speakers. Select

AOM-2SF One speaker circuit. One Module

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INX 699

speaker
circuit to
Control
field
speakers.
Six
speaker
Up to six speaker circuits (jumper Module
MMO-6SF circuits to
configurable). Control
field
speakers.

NOTE: Even though MMO-6SF modules are supported by the INX and INI-VGE, these
devices need to be defined as AOM-2SF modules in CAMWorks.

The maximum number of characters for the label is 19. These labels will be downloaded to
the system, and will appear for any event report from the AOM.

If the AOM is present in the system double-click on the gray circle in the Active column (or
press the spacebar if that field is highlighted) to change the circle's color to green, otherwise
leave that circle gray. If an address is Active, but is not present in the system, a Missing
device trouble will be reported.

NOTE: Version 1.0-014 and later of the System Operating Software for the INX must be
installed to use AOM-2SF and MMO-6SF modules as speaker circuit control modules.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

10.2.4 CAM Modules

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

700 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INX 701

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

702 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs on this screen will affect the following functions:

AOM Telephone These CAMs will activate the AOM Telephone (AOM-TELF) modules
- on this node (via the Module Control bit). These modules are used to
provide a connection between a firefighter telephone jack or warden
station and a firefighter telephone riser.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INX 703

AOM-MUXF - These CAMs will activate the AOM-MUXF modules (via the Module
Control bit) and toggle between which audio source (via the Input
Select bit) is connected to the output of these modules. Input A is
connected to the output if the Input Select CAM Expression is false.

AOM-2SF - These CAMs will activate the AOM-2SF modules (via the Module
Control bit). These modules are used to provide a single-channel
speaker circuit.

These CAMs will activate the MMO-6SF modules (via the Module
Control bit). These modules are used to provide six single-channel
speaker circuits.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

10.2.5 CAM Audio Outputs

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

704 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INX 705

circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

706 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for

Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMS on this screen affect the following functions:

Local Audio These CAMs activate the following functions:

Outputs -
Amplifier Control - These CAM Expressions will activate the speaker
circuit outputs of the AM-50 amplifiers connected to this INX. The
Backup Amplifier input of each AM-50 may be activated through this
screen as well. When activated, the Backup Amplifier input simply
connects an external audio source (typically another AM-50 connected
to this INX) to the AM-50's speaker circuits.

Local Speaker Control - These CAM Expressions will activate and

control the local speaker output. The local speaker output is a 1W
(max) unsupervised audio circuit on TB4-1 (-) and TB4-2 (+) on the
INX that is typically used for diagnostic purposes or to provide voice
instructions to the system's operator. The following CAM Expressions
affect the Local Speaker Output:

Local This CAM is used to enable the connection to the Local

Speaker Speaker Output. The circuit will activate once this CAM
On/Off - Expression is true.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INX 707

Local This CAM Expression determines whether or not this

Paging - node will send live voice paging out to the Local Speaker
Output.

Broadcast The system has the ability to stream recorded audio

Local messages across the network as if there were a live
Active page. When this CAM Expression is true, the audio
Message - currently playing through the Local Speaker Output will
be streamed across the network and will play on any
other node that has paging enabled.

Paging Controls - These CAM Expression determine whether or not

this node will send live voice paging out to one or more of the
connected amplifiers.

Recorded
Messages - These CAMs will trigger the activation of one or more of this node's
pre-recorded audio messages, of which there are sixteen. Each
message has a built-in priority to provide for cases where multiple
messages are triggered simultaneously for the same output. Message
#1 has the highest priority level and Message #16 has the lowest
priority level. Therefore, if Message #1 and Message #2 are assigned
to the same output at the same time Message #1 will override
Message #2.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

10.2.6 CAM Scratchpads

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

708 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INX 709

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

710 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

includes the Scratchpad number,

Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs in this screen will turn on or off the Scratchpads associated with this node.
Scratchpads can be referred to in other CAM expressions and are extremely useful in
reducing the complexity of other CAM expressions.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INX 711

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

10.2.7 CAM ASM/ANU LED

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

712 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INX 713

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.

Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 714 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs in this screen control the state of the LED's on ASM-16 or ANU-48 modules. A
CAM expression written in this area will either light steady or blink the LED when the CAM
evaluates to a TRUE and will turn the LED off when the CAM evaluates to a false.

NOTE: The LED blink CAM Expression takes priority over the LED On/Off if both CAM
expressions are TRUE at the same time.

NOTE: If an ASM-16 or ANU-48 switch has been configured for its Auxiliary Function, the
CAM entry field, as well as the description field will be grayed out.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

10.2.8 CAM Phone Function

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INX 715

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

716 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

AMM/PID Modules
AOM's
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches
node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INX 717

Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for

Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMS on this screen affect the following functions:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 718 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Phone Page - Phone Page is enabled to allow the phone channel to be paged through
the amplifiers instead of the microphone channel.

Buzzer - Activating the Buzzer function will cause the panel's piezo buzzer to
sound in a steady pattern.

Phone Enable - When enabled, the Phone Enable function opens a network connection
for the firefighter telephones. This does not need to be enabled if all
phones that need to be active at a given time are all connected to the
same node, only when some phones that need to be active are located
on this node and others on other nodes.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

10.2.9 CAM Reset Inhibit

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INX 719

Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

720 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INX 721

Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for

Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

NOTE: In order for the following settings to take effect, the INI-VGC, INI-VGX or INI-VGE
must be running V2.2-001 or later of the System Operating Software.

The CAMs on this screen will prevent this node from being reset. There are three bits, a
Fire Reset Inhibit Bit, an MNS Reset Inhibit Bit and and Enable Reset Inhibit. Both the Fire
Reset Inhibit Bit and the Enable Reset Inhibit bit must be TRUE in order to prevent a fire
reset from affecting this node. Both the MNS Reset Inhibit Bit and the Enable Reset Inhibit
bit must be TRUE in order to prevent an MNS reset from affecting this node.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

10.2.10 CAM Special Function

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 722 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

The CAM Special Functions screen incorporates several advanced functions that can be
useful for certain applications. Specifically, these functions are:
[****]

Counters 722 - Activate outputs after a certain number of specific events occur.
Sequence 725 - Activate several outputs in succession.
Timers 728 - Delay the activation of output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

10.2.10.1 Counters

There are 10 counters available per node for activating outputs after an input triggers the
counter a specified number of times.

The process of configuring a counter is as follows:

1. In the grid, choose how many times the counter must be run by selecting a value in the
"Count" field.
2. Select the Group that will be triggered by the scheduler. The allowed selection of groups
will vary based on the current node type, but will always at least include the node's
scratchpad locations.
3. A Define Counter CAM Expression may be written. If present, this CAM expression will
determine under what condition the counter will be reset. If this CAM is blank, the counter
will operate as a one-shot (meaning that a reset is required in order to trigger the counter
again after it has activated its output.)
4. Select a "Working Bit". This is a bit that is used internally by the CAM engine to perform
the counter function. This bit must not be used by any other function.
5. Counter Trigger CAM Expression. This CAM Expression describes what condition will
cause the counter to be incremented.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is a brief explanation of each
information tab.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INX 723

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

724 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for

Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INX 725

10.2.10.2 Sequence

There are 10 sequences available per node for activating multiple Output Groups or
Scratchpads in a sequence. There are two types of sequences. The table below explains
the differences between the two.

Sequence Type Description Visual Sample

A 'Bar Graph' sequence

leaves any current
Bar Graph
outputs ON when the
sequence is triggered.

A 'Shift' sequence turns

OFF its current output
when the sequence is
Shift
triggered and then
activates the next
output.

The process of configuring a sequence is the same regardless of the type of sequence
being used. Below is the procedure for configuring a sequence:

1. Select a "Working Bit" - This is a bit that is used internally by the CAM engine to perform
the sequence function. This bit must not be used by any other function.
2. Select the number of outputs - The sequencer must know how many outputs are going to
be affected by the scheduler.This may range from 2 to 12.
3. Type of Sequence - Select either a Bar Graph sequence or a Shift sequence. See above
for an explanation of the two types of sequence.
4. CAM Sequence Reinitialize - A CAM Expression must be written for the sequence to be
enabled to run the first time (or be reset so that it may be run again once it has already
run through).
5. Sequence Triggering CAM - This CAM Expression describes what condition will cause the
next output in the sequence to be activated.
6. At the bottom of the screen, select the "Output List" tab.
7. Select the desired output groups and/or scratchpads that should be added to the
sequence. These should be selected in the desired order of activation. Outputs may be
added to the sequence by selecting a group from the list box on the left and clicking the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

726 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

right arrow button. Outputs may be removed from the sequence by selecting the group in
the list in the list box on the right and clicking on the left arrow button.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
four tabs of information. The first is called "Output List", the second is "Node Devices", the
third is "Reference Search" and the fourth is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is a brief
explanation of each information tab.

Output List - This tab allows the user to select the output groups/scratchpads that will be
activated by this sequence. See above for more information on how the sequence is
configured.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INX 727

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 728 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for

Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

10.2.10.3 Timers

There are 10 timers available per node for creating delays for Scratchpads. To configure a
timer, set the desired timer interval in seconds, and select the appropriate Scratchpad from
the Group drop-down list. If set, the timer information will be displayed in the CAM entry
screen for the selected group. This delay will apply when the output group or scratchpad is
activated through the CAM logic expression.
The options for the timers are displayed in a table format. Each option is described below.

Timer - This is a read-only display that shows the timer number (1-10).

Time (Seconds) - This sets the delay time for this timer. The delay time is entered in
seconds. This may range from 1 to 3600 seconds.

Group - Select the Output Group or Scratchpad that you would like to delay.

Resettable Timer - This option allows you to choose between standard and resettable
timers. If set to No, the timer will be a standard timer. Standard timers will only trigger
once. In order to be triggered again, the system will need to be reset. If this setting is
changed to Yes, the timer can be triggered multiple times. In order to be triggered again,
the timer will have time out and the CAM expression assigned to the output group or
scratchpad will need to transition from false to true again.

Free/Used - If this timer has been configured and assigned to an Output Group or
Scratchpad, this will read Used, otherwise it will read Free.

NOTE: If a Timer is used by Advanced CAM Programming, this field will read Used, even
if it doesn't appear to have any other configuration information assigned.

NOTE: If a Timer is used by Advanced CAM Programming, no timer parameters may be

changed via this screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INX 729

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

10.2.11 Audio Messages

Each flavor of the INI-VG board, specifically the INCC, INX, and INI-VGE, allows the user to
create and download custom audio messages. In addition, Gamewell-FCI provides several
stock audio messages, both tones and voice, that are available as a part of the Audio &
Utilities Library (P/N: 9020-0565). Each INCC, INX, and INI-VGE provides for up to sixteen
messages to be stored per node. Each audio message may be up to thirty (30) seconds in
length, but the total combined message length cannot exceed 180 seconds (three minutes).
Each audio message must have a sampling rate of 8000 Hz and a sample size (resolution)
of 16 bits. All audio files must also be mono only.

CAMWorks will automatically convert the audio messages to the correct format prior to
downloading if it determines that a WAV file does not conform to the requirements.

This screen is used to link one or more audio messages to a node in the project. Once
linked, audio messages may be downloaded to the target node using the Download screen.

Like most screens in CAMWorks, this screen is composed primarily of a grid interface. This
grid has sixteen entries, one for each possible message. The grid contains the following
columns:

Sel - Used to remove a message. Place a check mark in this field and click "Remove" to
remove a message.

Message # - The message number is displayed for reference only. It cannot be changed.

Wave File - This field displays the name of an audio file linked to this message. If the file
name is highlighted in red, the selected file is not a valid audio file. If the file name is
highlighted in blue, the selected file must be converted to the correct format that is
acceptable to the system. CAMWorks will automatically perform the conversion when
saving the changes made on this screen.

Description - Up to fifty-five (55) characters may be used to describe the message. This
information is for user reference only and will be printed in the Audio Messages report.

Browse - There are two methods of adding audio messages. The first is by clicking on the
"..." button in the Browse field. Doing so will open a standard "Open" window for browsing
and selecting a message. Both standard Windows WAV files and SON files, created with
the "Gamewell-FCI Audio Converter" (provided with previous versions of CAMWorks and as
a part of the Audio & Utilities Library) may be chosen.

Time - Shows the length of the message in seconds.

Below the grid are controls that assist in the manipulation of the audio message. On the left
is a "Select All" checkbox. Clicking this box will place a check in the "Sel" field in the grid for
each message. The "Remove" button may be used to remove selected messages from the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 730 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

project. Clicking "Open Explorer" will open a Windows Explorer window. From the Windows
Explorer window, the user can use drag & drop techniques to add multiple .WAV or .SON
files to the project. Finally, the up and down arrow buttons are used to move the position of
an audio message to a different slot (if available).

NOTE: The Drag & Drop feature is unavailable on Windows 7 64-bit systems.

NOTE: In order to use the up and down arrow buttons, the desired audio message must
be highlighted. To do so, click the mouse in the "Wave File" field of the desired message
and then use the up and down arrow buttons. The up and down arrow buttons do not
work if any other field in the grid is selected, nor does it work with audio messages that
have a check mark in the check mark column.

Below is an information area. In this pane appears information about the selected message
(the number of channels, 1 being for mono and 2 being for stereo), the sampling rate (in
samples per second), and the sample resolution (in bits per sample). To the right is a
Microsoft Windows Media Player plug-in, which allows the user to preview selected
messages (Windows WAV files only. Windows Media Player cannot play .SON files).

Finally, at the bottom of the screen are two buttons. These are:
Save - Saves any changes that have been made, if any.
Close - Closes the window, prompting to save any changes that have been made, if any.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

10.2.12 Advanced CAM Programming

Selecting this option will open the Advanced CAM Programming Editor.

See this page 925 for more information about the Advanced CAM Programming Editor.
See this page 920 for more information about Advanced CAM Programming in general.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

10.2.13 Communication
Opens the Download screen in the main window. See the Download Utilities 841 section for
more information.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

Part

XI
 732 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

11 INI-VGE
11.1 What is the INI-VGE?
The INI-VGE is an Intelligent Network Transponder that serves as a command center as
well as an audio control system. The INI-VGE is comprised of the following components:

1. Intelligent Network - Voice Gateway (INI-VGE)

2. Up to six (6) Switch and Annunciator 732 modules
3. Paging microphone (optional)
4. Local fire fighter's telephone or telephone riser (optional)
5. Up to 20 AA-100 or AA-120 audio amplifiers, with up to four amplifiers per cabinet.

11.2 INI-VGE - Configuration Screens

11.2.1 General Settings
The General Settings screen of the INI-VGE affects one component of the INI-VGE, its
power supply.
Supervise PM-9 Power Supply - If this box is checked, the INI-VGE will supervise the
PM-9 power supply. By default, this option is disabled.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

11.2.2 ASM / ANU

Each INI-VGE supports a combination of up to six Switch and Annunciator Modules of the
following types:
ASM-16 and ANU-48.

The following settings may be selected for each module through this screen:

Board # - This field simply indicates which module will be affected by these settings. This
field cannot be changed.

Board Type - Select a board type to indicate that a board should be assigned to this
address or select "None", if no board should be assigned to this address.

Lamp Test - When enabled, pressing Switch 1 on the module will turn ON all of the
module's LED's, overriding their normal operation. A second press of Switch 1 will return the
LED's to their normal operation.

For each ASM-16 and ANU-48 defined, the user can customize the switch type and enter a

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INI-VGE 733

label for each switch available. These are for programming convenience only, and are not
downloaded to the system. These should be programmed to use for reference when defining
CAMs. These types will appear in the INI-VGE Node list at the bottom of the CAM entry
screens.

NOTE: You are not restricted to using the predefined switch types. You may type any text
in that field that you would like to create custom switch types.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

11.2.3 Output Devices

Select each active telephone (AOM-TELF) or speaker circuit control module (AOM-MUXF or
AOM-2SF) on the INI-VGE. Devices with addresses from 1-16 are pre-configured as AOM
Telephone modules, while devices addressed from 17-48 must be configured as either an
AOM-MUXF or AOM-2SF module. CAMWorks does require the user to select which type of
module is connected at a particular address, because each device type is configured slightly
differently. For example, the AOM-MUXF device type has an Input Select bit to choose
between two different inputs. The following table compares the types of modules that may
be installed:

CAM Bits
Module Type Input Ouptput
Required
Firefighter
Phone
Module
AOM-TELF Firefighter Phone Riser Handset or
Control
Warden
Station
One Module
speaker Control
Two speaker circuits from different
AOM-MUXF circuit to
audio sources. Input
field
speakers. Select

One
speaker
Module
AOM-2SF One speaker circuit. circuit to
Control
field
speakers.
Six
speaker
Up to six speaker circuits (jumper Module
MMO-6SF circuits to
configurable). Control
field
speakers.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 734 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: Even though MMO-6SF modules are supported by the INX and INI-VGE, these
devices need to be defined as AOM-2SF modules in CAMWorks.

The maximum number of characters for the label is 19. These labels will be downloaded to
the system, and will appear for any event report from the AOM.

If the AOM is present in the system double-click on the gray circle in the Active column (or
press the spacebar if that field is highlighted) to change the circle's color to green, otherwise
leave that circle gray. If an address is Active, but is not present in the system, a Missing
device trouble will be reported.

NOTE: Version 1.0-014 and later of the System Operating Software for the INI-VGE must
be installed to use AOM-2S and MMO-6S modules as speaker circuit control modules.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

11.2.4 CAM Modules

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INI-VGE 735

edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

736 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Groups, Device Type and Description. On

ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INI-VGE 737

AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the

selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs on this screen will affect the following functions:

AOM Telephone These CAMs will activate the AOM Telephone (AOM-TELF) modules
- on this node (via the Module Control bit). These modules are used to
provide a connection between a firefighter telephone jack or warden
station and a firefighter telephone riser.

AOM-MUXF - These CAMs will activate the AOM-MUXF modules (via the Module
Control bit) and toggle between which audio source (via the Input
Select bit) is connected to the output of these modules. Input A is
connected to the output if the Input Select CAM Expression is false.

AOM-2SF - These CAMs will activate the AOM-2SF modules (via the Module
Control bit). These modules are used to provide a single-channel
speaker circuit.

These CAMs will activate the MMO-6SF modules (via the Module
Control bit). These modules are used to provide six single-channel

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 738 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

speaker circuits.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

11.2.5 CAM ASM/ANU LED

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INI-VGE 739

of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

740 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INI-VGE 741

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs in this screen control the state of the LED's on ASM-16 or ANU-48 modules. A
CAM expression written in this area will either light steady or blink the LED when the CAM
evaluates to a TRUE and will turn the LED off when the CAM evaluates to a false.

NOTE: The LED blink CAM Expression takes priority over the LED On/Off if both CAM
expressions are TRUE at the same time.

NOTE: If an ASM-16 or ANU-48 switch has been configured for its Auxiliary Function, the
CAM entry field, as well as the description field will be grayed out.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

11.2.6 CAM Audio Outputs

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

742 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INI-VGE 743

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

744 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMS on this screen affect the following functions:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INI-VGE 745

Local Audio These CAM Expressions will activate and control the connection
Outputs - between the INI-VGE and one or more AA-100 and/or AA-120 bulk
amplifiers. This channel is called the Local Speaker Output and it is a
1W (max) audio circuit on TB4-1 (-) and TB4-2 (+) on the INI-VGE.

NOTE: The model ACT-1 audio coupling transformer must be

installed between the INI-VGE and the first AA-100 or AA-120
amplifier.

The following CAM Expressions affect the Local Speaker Output:

Local Speaker This CAM is used to enable the connection to

On/Off - the Local Speaker Output. The circuit will
activate once this CAM Expression is true.

NOTE: The INI-VGE will provide a

supervisory tone to the AA-100 and/or
AA-120 bulk amplifiers when the Local
Speaker Output channel is off. The trouble
contacts on the AA-100 and/or AA-120 bulk
amplifiers will go off-normal if the amplifiers
do not receive this supervisory tone.

Local Paging - This CAM Expression determines whether or

not this node will send live voice paging out to
the Local Speaker Output.

Broadcast Local The system has the ability to stream recorded

Audio - audio messages across the network as if there
were a live page. When this CAM Expression
is true, the audio currently playing through the
Local Speaker Output will be streamed across
the network and will play on any other node
that has paging enabled.

Recorded
Messages - These CAMs will trigger the activation of one or more of this node's
pre-recorded audio messages, of which there are sixteen. Each
message has a built-in priority to provide for cases where multiple
messages are triggered simultaneously for the same output. Message
#1 has the highest priority level and Message #16 has the lowest
priority level. Therefore, if Message #1 and Message #2 are assigned
to the same output at the same time Message #1 will override
Message #2.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 746 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

11.2.7 CAM Scratchpads

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INI-VGE 747

and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

748 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INI-VGE 749

the selected node. Includes Text Message

Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs in this screen will turn on or off the Scratchpads associated with this node.
Scratchpads can be referred to in other CAM expressions and are extremely useful in
reducing the complexity of other CAM expressions.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

11.2.8 CAM Phone Function

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

750 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INI-VGE 751

Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and

Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

752 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMS on this screen affect the following functions:

Phone Page - Phone Page is enabled to allow the phone channel to be paged through
the amplifiers instead of the microphone channel.

Buzzer - Activating the Buzzer function will cause the panel's piezo buzzer to
sound in a steady pattern.

Phone Enable - When enabled, the Phone Enable function opens a network connection
for the firefighter telephones. This does not need to be enabled if all
phones that need to be active at a given time are all connected to the
same node, only when some phones that need to be active are located

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INI-VGE 753

on this node and others on other nodes.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

11.2.9 CAM Reset Inhibit

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

754 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INI-VGE 755

on the selected node. This includes the

Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 756 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

NOTE: In order for the following settings to take effect, the INI-VGC, INI-VGX or INI-VGE
must be running V2.2-001 or later of the System Operating Software.

The CAMs on this screen will prevent this node from being reset. There are three bits, a
Fire Reset Inhibit Bit, an MNS Reset Inhibit Bit and and Enable Reset Inhibit. Both the Fire
Reset Inhibit Bit and the Enable Reset Inhibit bit must be TRUE in order to prevent a fire
reset from affecting this node. Both the MNS Reset Inhibit Bit and the Enable Reset Inhibit
bit must be TRUE in order to prevent an MNS reset from affecting this node.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

11.2.10 CAM Special Function

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM Special Functions screen incorporates several advanced functions that can be
useful for certain applications. Specifically, these functions are:
[****]

Counters 757 - Activate outputs after a certain number of specific events occur.
Sequence 759 - Activate several outputs in succession.
Timers 763 - Delay the activation of output devices.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INI-VGE 757

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

11.2.10.1 Counters

There are 10 counters available per node for activating outputs after an input triggers the
counter a specified number of times.

The process of configuring a counter is as follows:

1. In the grid, choose how many times the counter must be run by selecting a value in the
"Count" field.
2. Select the Group that will be triggered by the scheduler. The allowed selection of groups
will vary based on the current node type, but will always at least include the node's
scratchpad locations.
3. A Define Counter CAM Expression may be written. If present, this CAM expression will
determine under what condition the counter will be reset. If this CAM is blank, the counter
will operate as a one-shot (meaning that a reset is required in order to trigger the counter
again after it has activated its output.)
4. Select a "Working Bit". This is a bit that is used internally by the CAM engine to perform
the counter function. This bit must not be used by any other function.
5. Counter Trigger CAM Expression. This CAM Expression describes what condition will
cause the counter to be incremented.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is a brief explanation of each
information tab.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

758 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and

Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INI-VGE 759

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

11.2.10.2 Sequence

There are 10 sequences available per node for activating multiple Output Groups or
Scratchpads in a sequence. There are two types of sequences. The table below explains
the differences between the two.

Sequence Type Description Visual Sample

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

760 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

A 'Bar Graph' sequence

leaves any current
Bar Graph
outputs ON when the
sequence is triggered.

A 'Shift' sequence turns

OFF its current output
when the sequence is
Shift
triggered and then
activates the next
output.

The process of configuring a sequence is the same regardless of the type of sequence
being used. Below is the procedure for configuring a sequence:

1. Select a "Working Bit" - This is a bit that is used internally by the CAM engine to perform
the sequence function. This bit must not be used by any other function.
2. Select the number of outputs - The sequencer must know how many outputs are going to
be affected by the scheduler.This may range from 2 to 12.
3. Type of Sequence - Select either a Bar Graph sequence or a Shift sequence. See above
for an explanation of the two types of sequence.
4. CAM Sequence Reinitialize - A CAM Expression must be written for the sequence to be
enabled to run the first time (or be reset so that it may be run again once it has already
run through).
5. Sequence Triggering CAM - This CAM Expression describes what condition will cause the
next output in the sequence to be activated.
6. At the bottom of the screen, select the "Output List" tab.
7. Select the desired output groups and/or scratchpads that should be added to the
sequence. These should be selected in the desired order of activation. Outputs may be
added to the sequence by selecting a group from the list box on the left and clicking the
right arrow button. Outputs may be removed from the sequence by selecting the group in
the list in the list box on the right and clicking on the left arrow button.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
four tabs of information. The first is called "Output List", the second is "Node Devices", the
third is "Reference Search" and the fourth is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is a brief
explanation of each information tab.

Output List - This tab allows the user to select the output groups/scratchpads that will be
activated by this sequence. See above for more information on how the sequence is

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INI-VGE 761

configured.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

762 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the

selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INI-VGE 763

node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

11.2.10.3 Timers

There are 10 timers available per node for creating delays for Scratchpads. To configure a
timer, set the desired timer interval in seconds, and select the appropriate Scratchpad from
the Group drop-down list. If set, the timer information will be displayed in the CAM entry
screen for the selected group. This delay will apply when the output group or scratchpad is
activated through the CAM logic expression.
The options for the timers are displayed in a table format. Each option is described below.

Timer - This is a read-only display that shows the timer number (1-10).

Time (Seconds) - This sets the delay time for this timer. The delay time is entered in
seconds. This may range from 1 to 3600 seconds.

Group - Select the Output Group or Scratchpad that you would like to delay.

Resettable Timer - This option allows you to choose between standard and resettable
timers. If set to No, the timer will be a standard timer. Standard timers will only trigger
once. In order to be triggered again, the system will need to be reset. If this setting is
changed to Yes, the timer can be triggered multiple times. In order to be triggered again,
the timer will have time out and the CAM expression assigned to the output group or
scratchpad will need to transition from false to true again.

Free/Used - If this timer has been configured and assigned to an Output Group or
Scratchpad, this will read Used, otherwise it will read Free.

NOTE: If a Timer is used by Advanced CAM Programming, this field will read Used, even
if it doesn't appear to have any other configuration information assigned.

NOTE: If a Timer is used by Advanced CAM Programming, no timer parameters may be

changed via this screen.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

11.2.11 Audio Messages

Each flavor of the INI-VG board, specifically the INCC, INX, and INI-VGE, allows the user to
create and download custom audio messages. In addition, Gamewell-FCI provides several
stock audio messages, both tones and voice, that are available as a part of the Audio &
Utilities Library (P/N: 9020-0565). Each INCC, INX, and INI-VGE provides for up to sixteen
messages to be stored per node. Each audio message may be up to thirty (30) seconds in

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

764 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

length, but the total combined message length cannot exceed 180 seconds (three minutes).
Each audio message must have a sampling rate of 8000 Hz and a sample size (resolution)
of 16 bits. All audio files must also be mono only.

CAMWorks will automatically convert the audio messages to the correct format prior to
downloading if it determines that a WAV file does not conform to the requirements.

This screen is used to link one or more audio messages to a node in the project. Once
linked, audio messages may be downloaded to the target node using the Download screen.

Like most screens in CAMWorks, this screen is composed primarily of a grid interface. This
grid has sixteen entries, one for each possible message. The grid contains the following
columns:

Sel - Used to remove a message. Place a check mark in this field and click "Remove" to
remove a message.

Message # - The message number is displayed for reference only. It cannot be changed.

Wave File - This field displays the name of an audio file linked to this message. If the file
name is highlighted in red, the selected file is not a valid audio file. If the file name is
highlighted in blue, the selected file must be converted to the correct format that is
acceptable to the system. CAMWorks will automatically perform the conversion when
saving the changes made on this screen.

Description - Up to fifty-five (55) characters may be used to describe the message. This
information is for user reference only and will be printed in the Audio Messages report.

Browse - There are two methods of adding audio messages. The first is by clicking on the
"..." button in the Browse field. Doing so will open a standard "Open" window for browsing
and selecting a message. Both standard Windows WAV files and SON files, created with
the "Gamewell-FCI Audio Converter" (provided with previous versions of CAMWorks and as
a part of the Audio & Utilities Library) may be chosen.

Time - Shows the length of the message in seconds.

Below the grid are controls that assist in the manipulation of the audio message. On the left
is a "Select All" checkbox. Clicking this box will place a check in the "Sel" field in the grid for
each message. The "Remove" button may be used to remove selected messages from the
project. Clicking "Open Explorer" will open a Windows Explorer window. From the Windows
Explorer window, the user can use drag & drop techniques to add multiple .WAV or .SON
files to the project. Finally, the up and down arrow buttons are used to move the position of
an audio message to a different slot (if available).

NOTE: The Drag & Drop feature is unavailable on Windows 7 64-bit systems.

NOTE: In order to use the up and down arrow buttons, the desired audio message must
be highlighted. To do so, click the mouse in the "Wave File" field of the desired message
and then use the up and down arrow buttons. The up and down arrow buttons do not
work if any other field in the grid is selected, nor does it work with audio messages that
have a check mark in the check mark column.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 INI-VGE 765

Below is an information area. In this pane appears information about the selected message
(the number of channels, 1 being for mono and 2 being for stereo), the sampling rate (in
samples per second), and the sample resolution (in bits per sample). To the right is a
Microsoft Windows Media Player plug-in, which allows the user to preview selected
messages (Windows WAV files only. Windows Media Player cannot play .SON files).

Finally, at the bottom of the screen are two buttons. These are:
Save - Saves any changes that have been made, if any.
Close - Closes the window, prompting to save any changes that have been made, if any.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

11.2.12 Advanced CAM Programming

Selecting this option will open the Advanced CAM Programming Editor.

See this page 925 for more information about the Advanced CAM Programming Editor.
See this page 920 for more information about Advanced CAM Programming in general.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

11.2.13 Communication
Opens the Download screen in the main window. See the Download Utilities 841 section for
more information.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

Part

XII
 NGA 767

12 NGA
12.1 What is the NGA?
The NGA is a network based annunciator that uses an LCD touchscreen for user interaction.
It occupies one node on the network. It displays the state the of the system, and allows
access to various system functions including:

- Acknowledging alarm, trouble and supervisory conditions.

- Silencing the system (if configured to do so).
- Resetting the nodes in its region (or all nodes in the system).
- System Configuration, Walk Test / Drill, I/O, System Clock and other system functions.

12.2 NGA - Configuration Screens

12.2.1 General Settings
Like other node types, the NGA has user configurable options. In addition to the following
general settings, the NGA will also inherit all of the Project Globals 61 and Regional 70
settings. The general settings available for the NGA include:

Enable Proprietary Supervising Station mode - If this option is

enabled, the NGA will function as a Proprietary Supervising Station
(event displays will remain on the screen until they are acknowledged,
even if the event has been restored.) If this option is turned off,
events that are restored will be removed from the display. When this
option is enabled, Global Report, Global Reset and Enable RS-232
Printer Supervision Tests will automatically be enabled and cannot be
disabled without first disabling Proprietary Supervising Station mode.

NOTE: When Proprietary Supervising Station mode is enabled, the

NGA can only be reset locally. In other words, it will ignore reset
commands from other nodes on the network.

Allow Silencing From This NGA - If this option is enabled, the NGA
can silence NAC circuits and other outputs that are configured as
silenceable. This setting will affect bit 400 in the NGA's System Status
Map as well as the Region Silence Request bit in the Node 0 "virtual
node".

Enable RS-232 Printer Supervision Tests - If this setting is enabled,

the NGA will automatically print test messages at the interval specified
by the RS-232 Printer Supervision Test Interval. If this setting is

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

768 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

disabled, the NGA will not print test messages and the RS-232 Printer
Supervision Test Interval field will also be disabled. This option will be
automatically turned on by enabling the Proprietary Supervising
Station mode, and cannot be disabled until the Proprietary Supervising
Station mode is disabled.

Enable Supervision of RS-232 Port - If the NGA is connected to

printer, enabling this option will allow the NGA to supervise the printer
using the supervision wire. This will cause the NGA to generate a
trouble condition if the printer becomes offline, jammed or runs out of
paper.

Unique Buzzer Indication for Supervisory Conditions - This setting

configures the system to use different coded patterns for its internal
buzzer to distinguish between unacknowledged alarm and supervisory
conditions.

Fast CAM Timers - When enabled, the CAM timers have a resolution
of one-half second. When disabled, CAM timers have a one-second
resolution.

NOTE: Be aware that if a timer is defined using Advanced CAM

Programming 920 , the desired timer interval must be multiplied by two
when this setting is enabled.

Inhibit Reset & Silence Following First Alarm - When enabled, the
system may not be silenced or reset for sixty seconds following an
initial alarm.

RS-232 Baud Rate - Sets the baud rate (measured in bits per second)
used by this node to communicate with serial devices. Selections
range from 115,200 BPS down to 1,200 BPS.

NOTE: All Gamewell-FCI supplied software communicates with the

NGA at 115,200 BPS. If a custom baud rate has been selected, the
Service Menu on the NGA must be used to change the baud rate
back to 115,200 BPS in order to use the NGA's serial port to
download.

RS-232 Printer Supervision Test Interval - Select the time interval

that the NGA will print out test messages. If "Enable RS-232 Printer
Supervision Tests" is disabled, this field will become disabled.

NGA Power Supply Supervision - The NGA has the ability to detect
whether another node in the network experiences an AC power failure
and transfers to battery power. Once an AC Fault has been detected,
the NGA will turn off the LCD backlight to conserve battery power
unless the system is in Alarm. If an Alarm occurs after an AC Fault,
the NGA will activate the backlight. This setting allows NGA to select
which node to monitor for AC Fault conditions. Only node types that

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 NGA 769

are capable of supervising a power supply may be selected. Select

"ANY NODE" to monitor for any AC Fault anywhere in the system.

Enable RS-485 Reporting - When enabled, allows supervised event

reporting from the NGA to peripheral devices via the auxiliary RS-485
bus on the NGA.

Enable NGA Display Lock - When enabled, the NGA will require the
user to enter the Level 2 password to enable the touch screen. This
option is intended for use in applications where the NGA is installed in
a flush-mount cabinet.

Enable Re-report Failed Logins - When enabled, a report of recent

access failed events will be printed to the panel's serial port upon a
successful login by a user. If the access is granted via CAMWorks,
the report will be displayed from within CAMWorks. The report will
include both the current and most recent previous access granted
event as well as all access failed events in between.

When this setting is enabled on the NGA, the report is also displayed
on the screen. It will remain on-screen for fifteen seconds, unless the
user interacts with it by scrolling through the events. The user may
manually close the report by pressing "CLOSE" which goes back to
the previous screen or "CONTINUE" to go to the selected menu. The
button is labeled "CONTINUE" only in the case where the user
requested access to a menu screen and the report was displayed
before the desired menu could be displayed.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

12.2.2 NGA CAM Text Messages

The NGA supports a feature called CAM Text. This feature allows the creation of up to 512
user-defined text messages that are displayed on the NGA's display based on user CAM
programming. This screen, which is a modified version of the standard CAM entry screen,
allows these text messages to be programmed.

CAM Description - The message number uniquely identifies a CAM Text message. This
number cannot be changed.

CAM Expression - Enter the CAM logic expression that will trigger the display of this
message.

CAM Text Message - The actual text message may be entered in this field. A maximum of
79 characters may be entered (including spaces).

NOTE: The NGA wraps the text by character not by word. For this reason, it is important
to test the appearance of the CAM Text messages before system commissioning.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

770 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Font - Each text message may be configured to be displayed in one of the following fonts:

Arial (6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 and 20 point sizes)

Bradley Hand ITC (12 point size)

Comic Sans MS (10 point size)

French Script MT (16 point size).

Event Type - Selects the type of event that the NGA will issue to the other nodes in the
NGA's region (and nodes with Global Reporting ON) when this text message is triggered.
This will activate the appropriate system response including activating panel buzzers and
illuminating the LED's. The full 80 characters of the message will be printed through the
NGA's local serial port. The first forty characters of this message will be stored in the NGA's
history log and transmitted to other S3 Series, ILI-E3 Series, ILI95-E3 Series and NGA
nodes in the network.Available event types include:

Event Type System Response Description

Displays and prints on local
CAM Text None NGA. Prints on other
nodes in the system.
Produces a trouble
condition. Activates
YELLOW trouble LEDs,
activates general trouble
Fault Trouble output list, if configured to
do so. Reports event via
DACT, if configured to do
so. Activates Trouble
contacts.
Produces a fire alarm
condition. Activates RED
alarm LEDs, activates
general output lists (Day or
Alarm Fire Alarm Night alarm), if configured
to do so. Reports event via
DACT, if configured to do
so. Activates Alarm
contacts on panel.
Produces a supervisory
off-normal condition.
Activates YELLOW
Off-Normal Supervisory "supervisory" LEDs,
activates supervisory
general output list, if

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 NGA 771

configured to do so.
Reports event via DACT, if
configured to do so.
Activates supervisory
contacts on panel.
Produces a trouble
condition. Activates
YELLOW trouble LEDs,
activates general trouble
Short Trouble output list, if configured to
do so. Reports event via
DACT, if configured to do
so. Activates Trouble
contacts.
Produces a trouble
condition. Activates
YELLOW trouble LEDs,
activates general trouble
Disconnect Trouble output list, if configured to
do so. Reports event via
DACT, if configured to do
so. Activates Trouble
contacts.
Produces a pre-alarm
condition. Activates RED
alarm LEDs, activates
general Action output list, if
Action Pre-alarm configured to do so.
Reports event via DACT, if
configured to do so.
Activates Alarm contacts on
panel.
Produces a trouble
condition. Activates
YELLOW trouble LEDs,
activates general trouble
Alert Trouble output list, if configured to
do so. Reports event via
DACT, if configured to do
so. Activates Trouble
contacts.
Produces a trouble
condition. Activates
YELLOW trouble LEDs,
Test Fail Trouble activates general trouble
output list, if configured to
do so. Reports event via

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

772 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

DACT, if configured to do
so. Activates Trouble
contacts.
Produces a trouble
condition. Activates
YELLOW trouble LEDs,
activates general trouble
Output Fail Trouble output list, if configured to
do so. Reports event via
DACT, if configured to do
so. Activates Trouble
contacts.
Produces a Gas alarm
condition. Toggles LCD
backlight on LCD-E3 and
LCD-7100, activates
general CO/Gas Alarm
output list, if configured to
do so. Reports event via
DACT, if configured to do
Gas Alarm CO/Gas Alarm so. Activates Alarm
contacts on panel, if
configured to do so. On
NGA displays, causes CO
ALRM to be displayed in
the top title bar of the
System Status screen
which blinks white text on
blue to blue text on white.
Produces a Carbon
Monoxide alarm condition.
Toggles LCD backlight on
LCD-E3 and LCD-7100,
activates general CO/Gas
Alarm output list, if
configured to do so.
Reports event via DACT, if
configured to do so.
CO Alarm CO/Gas Alarm
Activates Alarm contacts on
panel, if configured to do
so. On NGA displays,
causes CO ALRM to be
displayed in the top title bar
of the System Status
screen which blinks white
text on blue to blue text on
white.

MNS Alarm Mass Notification Alarm Produces an MNS Alarm

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 NGA 773

condition. Activates RED

"alarm" LEDs and activates
SSM Bit #1584. Reports
event via DACT, if
configured to do so.

NOTE: MNS Events are

incompatible with LCD-
SLP, LCD-E3 and LCD-
7100 displays.

Produces an MNS Trouble

condition. Activates
YELLOW "trouble" LEDs
and activates SSM Bit
#1585. Reports event via
DACT, if configured to do
MNS Trouble Mass Notification Trouble so.

NOTE: MNS Events are

incompatible with LCD-
SLP, LCD-E3 and LCD-
7100 displays.

Produces an MNS
Supervisory off-normal
condition. Activates
YELLOW "supervisory"
LEDs and activates SSM
Bit #1586. Reports event
Mass Notification via DACT, if configured to
MNS Supervisory do so.
Supervisory

NOTE: MNS Events are

incompatible with LCD-
SLP, LCD-E3 and LCD-
7100 displays.

NOTE: All event types, except for CAM Text and FAULT, require NGA Firmware V3.00 or
later.

NOTE: 7100 nodes may not properly display NGA CAM Text events.

Font Color - Each text message may be configured to be displayed in one of the following
colors:
Black

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

774 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Purple

Blue

Green

Brown

Yellow

Orange

Red

NOTE: The following options require NGA firmware version 3.00 or later in order to
work.

Latching - When enabled, the CAM Text message (and its associated event) remain active,
even when its associated SSM bit goes FALSE. The message will only be restored upon
reset.

MNS Message - When enabled, the CAM Text message will be treated as an MNS CAM
Text message and will be displayed under the MNS message tab. This option must be
enabled if the selected event type is MNS Alarm, MNS Trouble or MNS Supervisory. MNS
messages configured to be latching (see above) will only be reset upon an MNS reset.
Finally, the System Status window on the NGA will display "ACU In Control" instead of
"System Status" when there are one or more active MNS CAM Text messages, MNS
Alarms, MNS Troubles or MNS Supervisories, unless an LOC has been granted control (see
below). When disabled, the CAM Text message will be treated as a fire CAM Text message
and will be displayed under the Fire message tab. Fire messages configured to be latching
(see above) will only be reset upon a Fire reset.

LOC Message - Enable this option only when this message is an "LOC In Control"
message. The MNS Message option (see above) must also be enabled when this option is
enabled. When enabled, the activation of this message will cause the title bar of the NGA's
System Status screen will read "LOC In Control" instead of "ACU In Control".

NOTE: In order for each NGA to display "LOC In Control" in the title bar, each NGA
must locally activate an "LOC In Control" message locally, otherwise it would
erroneously display "ACU In Control".

DACT Report Code - When using custom DACT reporting codes 574 , the code entered in
this field will be reported by the DACT-E3 when using Contact ID or SIA formats. This may
range from 1-899. The node number will be transmitted in addition to this information.

NOTE: The DACT-E3 will only report the activation of a CAM Text message if its
associated event type is NOT set for "CAM Text", and only if the node that the DACT-E3
is connected to is in the same region as the NGA (or has Global Reporting enabled) and
is configured to report the specified category of event (Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory) to a

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 NGA 775

given central station account. See DACT Settings 471 for more information about
configuring the DACT-E3.

Close - Closes the screen and prompts to save the changes made, if any.
Save - Save the changes made.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

12.2.3 CAM Scratchpad

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

776 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

field. This field cannot be edited.

Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 NGA 777

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 778 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Scratchpads on the selected node. This

includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs in this screen will turn on or off the Scratchpads associated with this node.
Scratchpads can be referred to in other CAM expressions and are extremely useful in
reducing the complexity of other CAM expressions.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

12.2.4 CAM Special Functions

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM Special Functions screen incorporates several advanced functions that can be
useful for certain applications. Specifically, these functions are:
[****]

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 NGA 779

Schedule 779 - Configure certain output devices to activate according to a specific schedule.
Counters 782 - Activate outputs after a certain number of specific events occur.
Sequence 785 - Activate several outputs in succession.
Timers 789 - Delay the activation of output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

12.2.4.1 Schedule

NOTE: Schedules are not available on INX, INCC or INI-VGE nodes.

There are 10 schedules available per node for automatically activating Output Groups and
Scratchpads according to a fixed schedule. Three types of schedules are available. These
are:

1.) Daily - Outputs can be activated on a daily basis at a given time.

2.) Weekly - Outputs can be activated at a certain time on one or more different days of the
week.
3.) Monthly - Outputs can be activated on a certain day of the selected month or on a certain
day of every month.

The process of configuring a schedule is the same regardless of the type of schedule being
used, with a few exceptions. Below is the procedure for configuring a schedule:

1. In the grid, select the Group that will be triggered by the scheduler. The allowed selection
of groups will vary based on the current node type, but will always at least include the
node's scratchpad locations.
2. In the "Information" pane at the bottom of the screen select the "Schedule Details" tab, if it
isn't already selected.
3. Select one of the following schedule types:
a. Daily – When a Daily schedule is desired, the user must supply the time of day that
should be used for the schedule. This is done through the Hours/Minutes drop-down
lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every hour
and/or every minute.
b. Weekly – When a Weekly schedule is desired, the user must select which days of the
week that the schedule should run. Selection boxes are provided for each day of the
week and any or all days may be selected by placing a check in the appropriate box.
Like a Daily schedule, the Weekly schedule also requires that a time of day must be

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

780 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

selected for when the schedule is to be run. This is done through the Hours/Minutes
drop-down lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every
hour and/or every minute.
c. Monthly – A Monthly schedule is used when it is desired to activate certain outputs on a
certain day of the month. Option buttons are provided for the month. Unlike the
Weekly schedule, the user may only select one month or every month. A date
selection is also provided, allowing the user to select which day of the month to run the
schedule. An option is available to run the schedule every day of the selected month.
Like a Daily schedule, the Monthly schedule also requires that a time of day must be
selected for when the schedule is to be run. This is done through the Hours/Minutes
drop-down lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every
hour and/or every minute.
NOTE: If you choose the 29th then there will be no schedule activation for
February except on a leap year. If you choose the 30th then there will be no
schedule activation for February at all. If you choose the 31st then all months with
less than 31 days will not have a schedule activation.

4. Disable Schedule CAM Expression - If there are any circumstances where it would be
desirable to NOT run an automatic schedule, this CAM expression should be entered.
The TRUE evaluation of this CAM expression will prevent the schedule from running.
NOTE: Disable Schedule CAM Expression feature is not available on the 7100.

5. Description - A description may be added to indicate what the schedule will be used for.
This information is used for reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.
NOTE: The CAM Schedule will be true for exactly one minute if the user specifies a
specific minute within the selected hour.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
four tabs of information. The first is called "Schedule Details", the second is "Node
Devices", the third is "Reference Search" and the fourth is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is
a brief explanation of each information tab.

Schedule Details - This tab allows the user to view or set the scheduling information for the
selected schedule. See above for more information on how the schedule is configured.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 NGA 781

Device Type and Description.

AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 782 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

12.2.4.2 Counters

There are 10 counters available per node for activating outputs after an input triggers the
counter a specified number of times.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 NGA 783

The process of configuring a counter is as follows:

1. In the grid, choose how many times the counter must be run by selecting a value in the
"Count" field.
2. Select the Group that will be triggered by the scheduler. The allowed selection of groups
will vary based on the current node type, but will always at least include the node's
scratchpad locations.
3. A Define Counter CAM Expression may be written. If present, this CAM expression will
determine under what condition the counter will be reset. If this CAM is blank, the counter
will operate as a one-shot (meaning that a reset is required in order to trigger the counter
again after it has activated its output.)
4. Select a "Working Bit". This is a bit that is used internally by the CAM engine to perform
the counter function. This bit must not be used by any other function.
5. Counter Trigger CAM Expression. This CAM Expression describes what condition will
cause the counter to be incremented.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is a brief explanation of each
information tab.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

784 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 NGA 785

Scratchpads on the selected node. This

includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

12.2.4.3 Sequence

There are 10 sequences available per node for activating multiple Output Groups or
Scratchpads in a sequence. There are two types of sequences. The table below explains
the differences between the two.

Sequence Type Description Visual Sample

A 'Bar Graph' sequence

leaves any current
Bar Graph
outputs ON when the
sequence is triggered.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

786 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

A 'Shift' sequence turns

OFF its current output
when the sequence is
Shift
triggered and then
activates the next
output.

The process of configuring a sequence is the same regardless of the type of sequence
being used. Below is the procedure for configuring a sequence:

1. Select a "Working Bit" - This is a bit that is used internally by the CAM engine to perform
the sequence function. This bit must not be used by any other function.
2. Select the number of outputs - The sequencer must know how many outputs are going to
be affected by the scheduler.This may range from 2 to 12.
3. Type of Sequence - Select either a Bar Graph sequence or a Shift sequence. See above
for an explanation of the two types of sequence.
4. CAM Sequence Reinitialize - A CAM Expression must be written for the sequence to be
enabled to run the first time (or be reset so that it may be run again once it has already
run through).
5. Sequence Triggering CAM - This CAM Expression describes what condition will cause the
next output in the sequence to be activated.
6. At the bottom of the screen, select the "Output List" tab.
7. Select the desired output groups and/or scratchpads that should be added to the
sequence. These should be selected in the desired order of activation. Outputs may be
added to the sequence by selecting a group from the list box on the left and clicking the
right arrow button. Outputs may be removed from the sequence by selecting the group in
the list in the list box on the right and clicking on the left arrow button.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
four tabs of information. The first is called "Output List", the second is "Node Devices", the
third is "Reference Search" and the fourth is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is a brief
explanation of each information tab.

Output List - This tab allows the user to select the output groups/scratchpads that will be
activated by this sequence. See above for more information on how the sequence is
configured.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 NGA 787

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

788 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and

the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 NGA 789

12.2.4.4 Timers

There are 10 timers available per node for creating delays for Output Groups and
Scratchpads. To configure a timer, set the desired timer interval in seconds, and select the
appropriate Output Group or Scratchpad from the Group drop-down list. If set, the timer
information will be displayed in the CAM entry screen for the selected group. This delay will
apply when the output group or scratchpad is activated through the CAM logic expression.
The options for the timers are displayed in a table format. Each option is described below.

Timer - This is a read-only display that shows the timer number (1-10).

Time (Seconds) - This sets the delay time for this timer. The delay time is entered in
seconds. This may range from 1 to 3600 seconds .

Group - Select the Output Group or Scratchpad that you would like to delay.

Resettable Timer - This option allows you to choose between standard and resettable
timers. If set to No, the timer will be a standard timer. Standard timers will only trigger
once. In order to be triggered again, the system will need to be reset. If this setting is
changed to Yes, the timer can be triggered multiple times. In order to be triggered again,
the timer will have time out and the CAM expression assigned to the output group or
scratchpad will need to transition from false to true again.

Free/Used - If this timer has been configured and assigned to an Output Group or
Scratchpad, this will read Used, otherwise it will read Free.

NOTE: If a Timer is used by Advanced CAM Programming, this field will read Used, even
if it doesn't appear to have any other configuration information assigned.

NOTE: If a Timer is used by Advanced CAM Programming, no timer parameters may be

changed via this screen.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

12.2.5 CAM Reset Inhibit

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

790 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 NGA 791

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

792 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Scratchpads on the selected node. This

includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs on this screen will prevent this node from being reset. There are three bits, a
Fire Reset Inhibit Bit, an MNS Reset Inhibit Bit and and Enable Reset Inhibit. Both the Fire
Reset Inhibit Bit and the Enable Reset Inhibit bit must be TRUE in order to prevent a fire

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 NGA 793

reset from affecting this node. Both the MNS Reset Inhibit Bit and the Enable Reset Inhibit
bit must be TRUE in order to prevent an MNS reset from affecting this node.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

12.2.6 Advanced CAM Programming

Selecting this option will open the Advanced CAM Programming Editor.

See this page 925 for more information about the Advanced CAM Programming Editor.
See this page 920 for more information about Advanced CAM Programming in general.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

12.2.7 NGA Logo

The NGA has the ability to display a user-selected Logo image that will be displayed when
the system is in normal condition. The maximum dimensions for the Logo are as follows:
240x130 pixels, 256-color.

NOTE: The width of the Logo image must be an EVEN number of pixels.

See this topic 795 for information on preparing the image files for download to the NGA.

The following options are available on this screen:

Open Logo Image -

Text Field - The user may enter a full path to a Windows BMP file for use with the
NGA.
... - Selecting the ... button will open the "Open" window, which is similar to the
standard Windows "Open File" window. This will allow the user to find the desired
Windows BMP File.

NOTE: If the selected image file cannot be displayed by the NGA, CAMWorks
will prompt the user to ask whether or not CAMWorks should convert the
image so that it will display properly.

Select Logo Position -

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 794 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

This section features an image of the NGA. A yellow area will appear where the
NGA Custom Logo may be placed on the screen. In addition, if the Logo image has
been previously selected, the Logo image will appear at the currently selected
location. The Logo image may be moved in one of three ways:

Left, Center, Right Option Buttons - The Right, Center, and Left option
buttons may be used to move the Logo so that the edge of the logo touches
either the right or left side of the screen. The Center button may be used to
center the image horizontally in the middle of the Logo display area.
Top, Center, Bottom Option Buttons - The Top, Center, and Bottom option
buttons may be used to move the Logo so that the edge of the logo touches
either the top or bottom of the Logo area. The Center button may be used to
center the image vertically in the middle of the Logo display area.
Vertical Slider - Clicking and dragging this slider allows changing the vertical
position of the Logo within the Logo area.
Horizontal Slider - Clicking and dragging this slider allows changing the
horizontal position of the Logo within the Logo area.
Logo Image - Click and drag the Logo image to position the Logo image
anywhere within the Logo area.

NOTE: If the selected Logo Picture or the logo position is changed, the user must
select the "NGA Logo" option in the download screen to download the Logo image.

Close - Closes the screen and prompts to save the changes made, if any.
Save - Save the changes made.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

12.2.8 NGA Screen Saver

The NGA is capable of displaying up to six different full-screen (240x320 pixels, 256 color)
images in a slide-show fashion when the system is in normal condition. If a touch is
registered on the Touch Screen, the NGA will temporarily suspend the Screen Saver display
until approximately 30 seconds after the last touch is registered.
The Screen Saver will be suspended upon receipt of any Alarm, Trouble, or Supervisory
condition and will remain suspended until the system completely returns to normal condition.
Similarly, the Screen Saver will also be suspended when a CAM Text 769 message is
activated.

See this topic 795 for information on preparing the image files for download to the NGA.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 NGA 795

This screen allows full configuration of the Screen Saver. The following options are:
Thumbnail Preview - This area of the screen displays small previews of the currently
selected images, if any, for each of the NGA's six screen saver images. Below each image
is a an option button. Select the option button to modify or remove the selected image.

Open Image File -

Text Field - Displays the full path to the selected Windows BMP (Bitmap) file.
... - Selecting the ... button will display the "Open" window. This will allow the user to
find the desired Windows BMP File.
Below the Open Image File area are two information areas. On the left is Image Preview,
which displays the selected image at its full size.

Close - Close the screen and prompts the user to save the changes made, if any.
Save - Saves the changes made, if any.
Remove - Removes the selected image from the Screen Saver.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

12.2.9 Communication
Opens the Download screen in the main window. See the Download Utilities 841 section for
more information.

12.3 Requirements for NGA Graphics

The LCD display used by the NGA is a 256-color display that can display images up to 240
pixels wide and 320 pixels tall (240x320). In order to display properly on the NGA, an image
must fulfill the following requirements:

1.) Screen Saver images must be 240x320 pixels (full-screen). Logo images may be a
variable size up to 240x130 pixels.

NOTE: The width of the Logo image must be an EVEN number of pixels.

2.) Images must be saved as Windows BMP files.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

Part

XIII
 ANX 797

13 ANX
13.1 What is the ANX?
The ANX (Addressable Node Expander) is a network interface sub-assembly component of
the Gamewell-FCI E3 Series® fire alarm control panel. There are three types of ANX
sub-assemblies:

• Addressable Node Expander - Single Ring (ANX-SR)

• Addressable Node Expander - Multi-Ring Twisted Pair (ANX-MR-UTP)
• Addressable Node Expander - Multi-Ring Fiber Optic (ANX-MR-FO)

Each of the three ANX sub-assemblies provides Ethernet connectivity via a 10/100Mbps
Ethernet port using the Micro Internet Protocol (uIP™) firmware module (see below). The
Ethernet port offers an enhanced interface between the E3 Series fire alarm control panel
and the FocalPoint® Graphic Workstation that allows improved communication to monitor
the alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions on the FocalPoint Graphic Workstation. The
Ethernet port also provides enhanced configuration data exchange between the E3 Series
network and the PC.

Both the ANX Multi-Ring-Fiber-Optic and Twisted Pair sub-assemblies have the capacity to
expand the E3 Series network from 64 nodes to a maximum of 122 nodes. The
ANX-MR-UTP allows twisted-pair copper interconnections only. The ANX-MR-FO adds Fiber
Optic connectivity.

uIP License:
uIP© is an open source software, licensed under the following BSD-style license:
Copyright (c) 2001-2006, Adam Dunkels and the Swedish Institute of Computer Science All
rights reserved.

NOTE: SOFTWARE WARRANTY DISCLAIMER

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ‘AS IS’ AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION).
HOWEVER, CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 798 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

13.2 ANX - Configuration Screens

13.2.1 General Settings
NOTE: On ANX-MR nodes, this configuration screen is enabled only on the ANX-MR's
Ring 1 (Node 63) address.

This entry screen contains various system options that pertain to this ANX-MR or ANX-SR
node. The entry fields are grouped as follows:

General Settings -

RS-232 Baud Rate - Sets the baud rate (measured in bits per second)
used by this node to communicate with serial devices. Selections range
from 115,200 BPS down to 1,200 BPS.

NOTE: All Gamewell-FCI supplied software communicates with the ANX

at 115,200 BPS. If SW1-Switch #1 is set to the UP (OFF) position, the
ANX node sets its serial port baud rate back to 115,200 BPS overriding
custom programming.

Fast CAM Timers - When enabled, the CAM timers have a resolution of
one-half second. When disabled, CAM timers have a one-second
resolution.

NOTE: Be aware that if a timer is defined using Advanced CAM

Programming 920 , the desired timer interval must be multiplied by two
when this setting is enabled.

Enable Supervision of RS-232 Port For Use With - This setting should be
set according to what type of device is normally connected to the node's
serial port. This setting should be set to "Printer" if a printer is connected to
this node's serial port and trouble reporting for printer out of paper or printer
offline conditions is desirable.

RS-232 Printer Supervision Test Interval - As a part of the supervision of

the node's serial port, the system can print out test messages on a periodic
rate. This option allows you to change the frequency of this test from 1
hour up to 21 hours. Selecting Disable will turn this feature off.

Ring Label - Enter a descriptive label that identifies this ring. This label
may be up to nineteen (19) characters in length. This label is not

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 ANX 799

downloaded to the system and is only used as an identifier within

CAMWorks.

NOTE: This setting is not available on ANX-SR nodes.

Ring Select DIP Switch Position - This setting, along with the Ring Select
(SW2) DIP switches on the ANX-MR board, is used to configure the ANX-
MR's ring assignments. In other words, these settings set which ring is
connected to which physical ARCNET interface on the ANX-MR board
(ARC0 and ARC1). The "Ring Select DIP Switch Position" setting is set by
default so that ARC0 is configured as Ring 1 and ARC1 is configured as
Ring 2.

NOTE: The "Ring Select DIP Switch Position" setting must be set
correctly, and must match the setting of the physical DIP switch (SW2) on
the ANX-MR board, to ensure proper network supervision by the ANX-
MR.

Set this setting as follows:

ARC0 ARC1 DIP DIP DIP DIP Ring

Ring # Ring # Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Select
DIP
Switch
Position
setting in
CAMWor
ks
Ring 1 Ring 2 OFF OFF OFF ON 4
(Down) (Down) (Down) (Up)
Ring 2 Ring 1 OFF ON OFF OFF 2
(Down) (Up) (Down) (Down)

NOTE: This setting is not available on ANX-SR nodes.

Enable Supervision of FocalPoint Connection on Ethernet - When

enabled, the ANX will supervise its connection to a FocalPoint Gateway,
and report a trouble condition should a communication problem between
the ANX and the FocalPoint Gateway arise.

NOTE: If FocalPoint is connected to the E3 Series system via an ANX,

only that ANX may be permanently installed in the system.

NOTE: In multi-ring E3 Series systems, FocalPoint must be connected to

the E3 Series system via the ANX-MR, and no other ANX nodes are

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 800 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

allowed in the system.

NOTE: In networked systems where FocalPoint is connected, one node

per region must be configured as the "Network Global Silence Receiver"
for that region in order for FocalPoint's signal silence commands to
properly function.

NOTE: In single-region systems where FocalPoint is connected, the node

that FocalPoint is connected to must be configured as a "Network Global
Silence Receiver" in order for FocalPoint's signal silence commands to
properly function.

Enable Re-report Failed Logins - When enabled, a report of recent

access failed events will be printed to the panel's serial port upon a
successful login by a user. If the access is granted via CAMWorks, the
report will be displayed from within CAMWorks. The report will include both
the current and most recent previous access granted event as well as all
access failed events in between.

Delays/TimeOut -

Silence Inhibit Delay - This setting will prevent the system from being
silenced after an alarm. This setting may range from No delay to
twenty-one (21) minutes (in two (2) minute increments).

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

13.2.2 Virtual Switches

NOTE: On ANX-MR nodes, this configuration screen is enabled only on the ANX-MR's
Ring 1 (Node 63) address.

Virtual Switches are a feature of the ANX that allows the Gamewell-FCI FocalPoint
Workstation to control any system function that may be presently controlled by an ASM-16
or ANU-48 switch. Each Virtual Switch has a control bit in the ANX's System Status Map
associated with it. Upon command from the FocalPoint Workstation, the ANX will set the
appropriate bit to TRUE or FALSE. From there, the user must refer to the Virtual Switch's
bit in CAMs to link the Virtual Switch to actual system functions.

This screen is where the user sets up the following options relating to each of the ANX's 512
Virtual Switches:

Switch Number - This field shows the System Status Map (bitmap) bit location associated
with each switch. This field cannot be edited.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 ANX 801

Used - Indicates which of the ANX-MR's two System Status Maps (bitmaps) the switch
affects. Switches that are assigned to Ring 1 affect Node 63's bitmap, while switches
assigned to Ring 2 affect Node 126's bitmap. This field is not editable.
NOTE: This field does not exist on ANX-SR nodes.

On/Off - Enables or disables this switch. When the switch is disabled (or set as a "Status"
switch), the System Status Map bit associated with this switch may be used as a scratchpad
instead.

Switch Type - This option sets the function that the switch performs. All switches are
defaulted to the "Control" option. When configured for this function, the switch will toggle its
associated Bit Number and can be used in CAM expressions. The switches may be
configured as a "Status" switch instead of "Control." "Status" switches are used only if the
user requires the FocalPoint Workstation to display a status indicator in response to the
TRUE evaluation of CAM expression. Note that if the switch is configured as a "Status"
switch, the System Status Map bit associated with the switch may be used as a scratchpad
instead.

Latching - The switch may be configured for latching operation when the switch type is
configured as a control switch. When selected, the current switch state (ON or OFF) will
persist through reset.

Momentary - When the switch type is configured as a control switch, the switch can be
configured as a momentary switch by placing a check mark in this field. When enabled, a
switch press will cause the associated SSM bit location to go true once and then false again.

NOTE: A switch may not be configured for both momentary and latching operation at the
same time.

Switch Label - Up to forty characters may be used to describe this switch and its function.
These are downloaded to the system and are displayed by the FocalPoint Workstation.

MNS Switch - Enable this option if this virtual switch performs an MNS function, otherwise
leave it disabled. When enabled, the virtual switch will be reset by an MNS reset instead of
a fire reset.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

13.2.3 Virtual CAM

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

802 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 ANX 803

Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

804 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 ANX 805

the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs on this screen are used to provide the FocalPoint Workstation visual feedback
that the functions controlled by the Virtual Switches feature of the ANX have been activated
or deactivated.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

13.2.4 Scratchpads
NOTE: This screen is titled "Cross-Ring Scratchpads" on ANX-MR nodes.

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

806 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

field may be edited.

CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 ANX 807

Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the

selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 808 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the

Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

The CAMs in this screen will turn on or off the Scratchpads associated with this node.
Scratchpads can be referred to in other CAM expressions and are extremely useful in
reducing the complexity of other CAM expressions.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

13.2.5 CAM Reset Inhibit

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 ANX 809

titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to
shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

810 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 ANX 811

Device Type and Description.

AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

812 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.
NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM 21 entry screen occurs in many places throughout CAMWorks. These entry
screens differ only in the type of SSM output group that is associated with the CAM 21 logic
expression. For instance, the CAMs 21 for the 7100 are associated with 7100 output groups
125-224. On the INCC, they might be associated with LEDs. Whatever the SSM group, the
configuration process is the same. The following is a description of controls and entry fields
in the CAM 21 entry screens.

Like many other screens, this screen shows a grid. Above the grid are option buttons that
allow the user to select which type of CAM 21 instructions will be displayed. Once an option
button is selected, the grid will automatically be updated to show the desired CAMs 21 . Just
above the grid is a "Find CAM 21 Expression" function. A partial CAM 21 expression may be
entered in this field and CAMWorks will display all CAMs 21 in the current screen that
contain the partial CAM 21 expression when the "Search" button is clicked. The "Clear"
button may be used to restore the display to normal. The fields that are available in this grid
differ depending on which types of CAMs 21 are being entered, but most have fields similar
to the following:

CAM Description - This field indicates which function is affected by the CAM 21 expression
in this row. This field cannot be edited.
CAM Expression - The CAM 21 expression that will activate this output or resource. This
field may be edited.
CAM Comment - A user written comment used to describe this CAM 21 . This field may be
edited.
Group # - The SSM bit location that will be affected by the CAM 21 expression in this row.
This field cannot be edited.
Timer # - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer number will appear in this
field. This field cannot be edited.
Time (Sec) - If a timer has been assigned to this location, the timer's duration will appear in
this field. This field cannot be edited.

Below the grid are two large text entry fields. These are CAM 21 Expression and CAM 21
Comment. Both of these fields function exactly like their counterparts in previous versions
of CAMWorks and may be used in addition to the grid to enter and edit CAM 21 expressions
and/or CAM 21 comments.

Click on the Save button or press then Enter key when the CAM 21 entry has been
completed. You will notice when the CAM 21 is saved, the logic operators are converted to

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 ANX 813

shorthand to save space. The logic shorthand operators are "&" = AND, "|" = OR, "^" = XOR,
and "~" = NOT.

NOTE: The Enter key will save the CAM Expression only if the large text entry field is
being used to write the CAM Expression.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Output Group -> Output Devices". Below is a brief explanation of
each information tab.

NOTE: The "Output Group -> Output Devices" tab is called "Linked SLC Output Devices"
on INI-7100 nodes.

NOTE: The third tab is only shown in the CAM screen for Output Groups.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

814 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,

CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 ANX 815

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Output Group -> Output Devices (ILI-E3 Series and ILI95-E3 Series) or Linked SLC
Output Devices (INI-7100 Only)- This tab shows all SLC output devices that are signed to
the current output group.

NOTE: In order for the following settings to take effect, the ANX must be running
V1.20.001 or later of the System Operating Software.

The CAMs on this screen will prevent this node from being reset. There are three bits, a
Fire Reset Inhibit Bit, an MNS Reset Inhibit Bit and and Enable Reset Inhibit. Both the Fire
Reset Inhibit Bit and the Enable Reset Inhibit bit must be TRUE in order to prevent a fire
reset from affecting this node. Both the MNS Reset Inhibit Bit and the Enable Reset Inhibit
bit must be TRUE in order to prevent an MNS reset from affecting this node.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

13.2.6 CAM Special Function

NOTE: In a multi-ring system, only the ANX-MR's System Status Maps are visible to all
nodes on all rings. System Status Map information that must be conveyed from one ring
to another must be manually CAMmed using the ANX-MR's Scratchpads. See the page
titled "Multi-Ring CAM Special Considerations 22 " for more information.

The CAM Special Functions screen incorporates several advanced functions that can be
useful for certain applications. Specifically, these functions are:
[****]

Schedule 816 - Configure certain output devices to activate according to a specific schedule.
Counters 819 - Activate outputs after a certain number of specific events occur.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 816 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Sequence 822 - Activate several outputs in succession.

Timers 826 - Delay the activation of output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

13.2.6.1 Schedule

NOTE: Schedules are not available on INX, INCC or INI-VGE nodes.

There are 10 schedules available per node for automatically activating Output Groups and
Scratchpads according to a fixed schedule. Three types of schedules are available. These
are:

1.) Daily - Outputs can be activated on a daily basis at a given time.

2.) Weekly - Outputs can be activated at a certain time on one or more different days of the
week.
3.) Monthly - Outputs can be activated on a certain day of the selected month or on a certain
day of every month.

The process of configuring a schedule is the same regardless of the type of schedule being
used, with a few exceptions. Below is the procedure for configuring a schedule:

1. In the grid, select the Group that will be triggered by the scheduler. The allowed selection
of groups will vary based on the current node type, but will always at least include the
node's scratchpad locations.
2. In the "Information" pane at the bottom of the screen select the "Schedule Details" tab, if it
isn't already selected.
3. Select one of the following schedule types:
a. Daily – When a Daily schedule is desired, the user must supply the time of day that
should be used for the schedule. This is done through the Hours/Minutes drop-down
lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every hour
and/or every minute.
b. Weekly – When a Weekly schedule is desired, the user must select which days of the
week that the schedule should run. Selection boxes are provided for each day of the
week and any or all days may be selected by placing a check in the appropriate box.
Like a Daily schedule, the Weekly schedule also requires that a time of day must be
selected for when the schedule is to be run. This is done through the Hours/Minutes
drop-down lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every
hour and/or every minute.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 ANX 817

c. Monthly – A Monthly schedule is used when it is desired to activate certain outputs on a

certain day of the month. Option buttons are provided for the month. Unlike the
Weekly schedule, the user may only select one month or every month. A date
selection is also provided, allowing the user to select which day of the month to run the
schedule. An option is available to run the schedule every day of the selected month.
Like a Daily schedule, the Monthly schedule also requires that a time of day must be
selected for when the schedule is to be run. This is done through the Hours/Minutes
drop-down lists. An “Every” selection allows the CAM Schedule to activate either every
hour and/or every minute.
NOTE: If you choose the 29th then there will be no schedule activation for
February except on a leap year. If you choose the 30th then there will be no
schedule activation for February at all. If you choose the 31st then all months with
less than 31 days will not have a schedule activation.

4. Disable Schedule CAM Expression - If there are any circumstances where it would be
desirable to NOT run an automatic schedule, this CAM expression should be entered.
The TRUE evaluation of this CAM expression will prevent the schedule from running.
NOTE: Disable Schedule CAM Expression feature is not available on the 7100.

5. Description - A description may be added to indicate what the schedule will be used for.
This information is used for reference only and is not downloaded to the panel.
NOTE: The CAM Schedule will be true for exactly one minute if the user specifies a
specific minute within the selected hour.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
four tabs of information. The first is called "Schedule Details", the second is "Node
Devices", the third is "Reference Search" and the fourth is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is
a brief explanation of each information tab.

Schedule Details - This tab allows the user to view or set the scheduling information for the
selected schedule. See above for more information on how the schedule is configured.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

AMM/PID Modules
node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

818 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and

Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 ANX 819

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

13.2.6.2 Counters

There are 10 counters available per node for activating outputs after an input triggers the
counter a specified number of times.

The process of configuring a counter is as follows:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

820 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

1. In the grid, choose how many times the counter must be run by selecting a value in the
"Count" field.
2. Select the Group that will be triggered by the scheduler. The allowed selection of groups
will vary based on the current node type, but will always at least include the node's
scratchpad locations.
3. A Define Counter CAM Expression may be written. If present, this CAM expression will
determine under what condition the counter will be reset. If this CAM is blank, the counter
will operate as a one-shot (meaning that a reset is required in order to trigger the counter
again after it has activated its output.)
4. Select a "Working Bit". This is a bit that is used internally by the CAM engine to perform
the counter function. This bit must not be used by any other function.
5. Counter Trigger CAM Expression. This CAM Expression describes what condition will
cause the counter to be incremented.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
three tabs of information. The first is called "Node Devices", the second is "Reference
Search" and the third is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is a brief explanation of each
information tab.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 ANX 821

Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 822 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

13.2.6.3 Sequence

There are 10 sequences available per node for activating multiple Output Groups or
Scratchpads in a sequence. There are two types of sequences. The table below explains
the differences between the two.

Sequence Type Description Visual Sample

A 'Bar Graph' sequence

leaves any current
Bar Graph
outputs ON when the
sequence is triggered.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 ANX 823

A 'Shift' sequence turns

OFF its current output
when the sequence is
Shift
triggered and then
activates the next
output.

The process of configuring a sequence is the same regardless of the type of sequence
being used. Below is the procedure for configuring a sequence:

1. Select a "Working Bit" - This is a bit that is used internally by the CAM engine to perform
the sequence function. This bit must not be used by any other function.
2. Select the number of outputs - The sequencer must know how many outputs are going to
be affected by the scheduler.This may range from 2 to 12.
3. Type of Sequence - Select either a Bar Graph sequence or a Shift sequence. See above
for an explanation of the two types of sequence.
4. CAM Sequence Reinitialize - A CAM Expression must be written for the sequence to be
enabled to run the first time (or be reset so that it may be run again once it has already
run through).
5. Sequence Triggering CAM - This CAM Expression describes what condition will cause the
next output in the sequence to be activated.
6. At the bottom of the screen, select the "Output List" tab.
7. Select the desired output groups and/or scratchpads that should be added to the
sequence. These should be selected in the desired order of activation. Outputs may be
added to the sequence by selecting a group from the list box on the left and clicking the
right arrow button. Outputs may be removed from the sequence by selecting the group in
the list in the list box on the right and clicking on the left arrow button.

At the bottom of the CAM window is an information area. This information area contains
four tabs of information. The first is called "Output List", the second is "Node Devices", the
third is "Reference Search" and the fourth is "Used/Unused Groups". Below is a brief
explanation of each information tab.

Output List - This tab allows the user to select the output groups/scratchpads that will be
activated by this sequence. See above for more information on how the sequence is
configured.

Node Devices - This tab shows allows the user to look up useful information from any node
in the system. The types of information that can be displayed are as follows:

For the S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3:

Option Description

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

824 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules (System Sensor) or
PID-95 and CZI-95 Elements (Apollo)
assigned to the selected node. Includes
Loop, Address, Groups, Device Type and
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules (System Sensor) or
Control Elements (Apollo) assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. On
ILI-MB-E3 and ILI95-MB-E3 nodes, this also
includes the on board NAC's and Municipal
circuit.
ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on
the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.

NOTE: This selection is not available on

ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3 nodes.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for Scratchpads
on the selected node. This includes the
Scratchpad number, Scratchpad SSM Bit,
CAM Expression and the CAM Comment.

For the INI-7100:

Option Description

Sensors Shows all Sensors assigned to the selected

node. Includes Loop, Address, Groups,
Device Type and Description.
AMM/PID Modules Shows all AMM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description. This
also includes the on board NAC's and
Municipal circuit.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 ANX 825

Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and

the CAM Comment.

For the INCC, INX and INI-VGE:

Option Description

ASM-16/ANU-48 Switches Shows all ASM-16 and ANU-48 Switches on

the selected node. Includes the Module
Number, Switch Number, Switch System
Status Map bit, the Switch Type and the
Description.
AOM's Shows all AOM Modules assigned to the
selected node. Includes Loop, Address,
Groups, Device Type and Description.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

For the NGA:

Option Description

CAM Text Messages Shows all CAM Text Messages assigned to

the selected node. Includes Text Message
Number, SSM Bit Number, Message Text
and Generate Trouble Flag.
Scratchpads Shows all CAM Expressions for
Scratchpads on the selected node. This
includes the Scratchpad number,
Scratchpad SSM Bit, CAM Expression and
the CAM Comment.

Description Search - This tab shows the user to display all SLC input devices on a selected
(or all) nodes that match either a full or partial description. A partial description may be
entered through the use of the asterisk (*) wildcard character.

Used / Unused Groups - This tab shows a grid that displays all of the output groups on this
node. A group number is colored red if it has been assigned to one or more output devices
and green if the output group has not been assigned to any output devices.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 826 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

13.2.6.4 Timers

There are 10 timers available per node for creating delays for Output Groups and
Scratchpads. To configure a timer, set the desired timer interval in seconds, and select the
appropriate Output Group or Scratchpad from the Group drop-down list. If set, the timer
information will be displayed in the CAM entry screen for the selected group. This delay will
apply when the output group or scratchpad is activated through the CAM logic expression.
The options for the timers are displayed in a table format. Each option is described below.

Timer - This is a read-only display that shows the timer number (1-10).

Time (Seconds) - This sets the delay time for this timer. The delay time is entered in
seconds. This may range from 1 to 3600 seconds .

Group - Select the Output Group or Scratchpad that you would like to delay.

Resettable Timer - This option allows you to choose between standard and resettable
timers. If set to No, the timer will be a standard timer. Standard timers will only trigger
once. In order to be triggered again, the system will need to be reset. If this setting is
changed to Yes, the timer can be triggered multiple times. In order to be triggered again,
the timer will have time out and the CAM expression assigned to the output group or
scratchpad will need to transition from false to true again.

Free/Used - If this timer has been configured and assigned to an Output Group or
Scratchpad, this will read Used, otherwise it will read Free.

NOTE: If a Timer is used by Advanced CAM Programming, this field will read Used, even
if it doesn't appear to have any other configuration information assigned.

NOTE: If a Timer is used by Advanced CAM Programming, no timer parameters may be

changed via this screen.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

13.2.7 Advanced CAM Programming

Selecting this option will open the Advanced CAM Programming Editor.

See this page 925 for more information about the Advanced CAM Programming Editor.
See this page 920 for more information about Advanced CAM Programming in general.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 ANX 827

13.2.8 Communication
Opens the Download screen in the main window. See the Download Utilities 841 section for
more information.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

Part

XIV
 Utilities 829

14 Utilities
14.1 Network Query

Network Query is a diagnostic tool for E3 Series and NetSOLO Series networks (including
standard 7100 Panel Networks). This tool will scan either an entire network or only specific
nodes that you specify and generate a report that contains information such as:

· The node type: SLP-E3 (S3 Series (System Sensor)), SLP95-E3 (S3 Series (Apollo)),
INI-7100, INCC, INX, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3, ILI95-S-E3, ANX-SR, ANX-
MR or NGA.
· The firmware version.
· The node number.
· The number of times the node has caused a reconfiguration of the network (only
certain firmware versions support this feature.)

Gamewell-FCI's Technical Support 932 personnel may ask you to run this tool to help
diagnose network communication or download problems.

The new Network Query tool, included with CAMWorks includes some new functionality that
was not present in earlier Network Query tools. Chief among these new capabilities is
Network Query's new split-screen display. Network Query can now display two different
Query reports side-by-side, allowing for easy comparison. Differences between the two
reports are highlighted. New Query reports are displayed on the right side of the window
and previously saved Query reports are shown on the left.

NOTE: The Network Query tool is not available when an S3 Series Standalone, E3 Series
Standalone or 7100 Standalone project is open.

For further information, see:

How To Use Query 829

14.1.1 How To Use Network Query

1.) When the Network Query tool is first opened, a screen will appear in the CAMWorks
main window that appears similar to the following:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

830 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

2.) Select whether to communicate with the system via RS-232 (Comm) or TCP/IP
(Ethernet).

NOTE: TCP/IP (Ethernet) connection is available on S3 Series FACP, ANX-SR and

ANX-MR nodes only.

3.) If the user has selected to use RS-232 (Comm) for use with Network Query, the COM
port that is being used to connect to the system must be selected. An auto-detection feature
is available to allow Network Query to automatically determine the correct serial port. If the
user has selected to use TCP/IP (Ethernet) for use with Network Query, the IP address of
an ANX node must be provided. The IP address must be entered in the typical A.B.C.D
format.

4.) If the user has selected to use RS-232 (Comm) for use with Network Query, the user
must select the type of node that the PC's serial port is connected to. This can be either an
INI-7100, E3 Series, ANX-SR, ANX-MR or NGA node. An auto-detection feature is available
to allow Network Query to automatically determine the correct setting. If the user has
selected to use TCP/IP (Ethernet) for use with Network Query, this setting is automatically
defaulted to ANX.

NOTE: In an E3 Series Multi-ring Network system, you must connect to the ANX-MR in
order to use Network Query. Either RS-232 (Comm) or TCP/IP (Ethernet) may be used.

6.) Select which node or nodes you want to query.

7.) Press the Query button.

8.) A progress bar at the bottom of the CAMWorks screen will indicate the progress of the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 831

Query operation.

9.) A Query report similar to the following will appear in the right side of screen.

10.) If desired, the Query report may be saved to the left side of the screen so that it may be
compared against a future Query report. To do so, click on the Save button. When clicked,
the Clear button on the left side of the toolbar will clear out the saved Query report.

11.) If desired, the Query report may be printed by selecting Print 34 from the File 31 tab in
The Ribbon 27 , or saved to the computer's hard disk or a removable drive by using the
Export command on the toolbar.

14.2 OTS-E3
OTS-E3, or On-Line Telecommunication Support Program, is a feature of CAMWorks that is
reminiscent of the OTS program that was available for the 7200 Series FACP.

Specifically, OTS-E3 is intended to be a diagnostic and support program for S3 Series and
E3 Series FACP's. This window, which resembles a terminal emulator window, allows
convenient access to several useful terminal commands that are supported by the E3
Series. Note that since OTS-E3 relies completely on terminal commands, the PC running
OTS-E3 must be connected to the desired S3 Series or E3 Series node as most terminal
commands will only affect the local node that the PC is connected directly to.

The OTS-E3 screen is laid out very similarly to the classic OTS-7200 program. The main
screen elements are:

· Menu Bar 832 - The OTS-E3 menu bar contains commands that may be used with OTS-E3
· Toolbar 839 - Provides quick access to commonly used functions of OTS-E3.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 832 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

· Text Window - All OTS session text appears in this window.

· Access Code Buttons 840 - Pressing one the Password buttons will cause OTS-E3 to
request the desired access level with the panel.
· Command Buttons 840 - When one of the Command buttons is clicked, OTS-E3 will send
the requested command to the panel.
· Send Command 841 - This command line is provided to allow manual command entry.
14.2.1 Menu Bar
The Menu Bar contains several menus that provide access to many commonly used
functions of OTS-E3. The menus include:

File 832
Connect 833
Commands 834

14.2.1.1 File Menu

The File Menu provides access to the following options:

New Session 832

Open Session 832
Save 832
Save As 833
Print 833
Print Preview 833
Page Setup 833
Exit 833

14.2.1.1.1 New Session

Creates a new OTS-E3 session.

14.2.1.1.2 Open Session

Opens a new OTS-E3 session. A standard "browse for file" window will appear to allow the
selection of the saved session file.

14.2.1.1.3 Save

Saves any changes to the current OTS-E3 session.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 833

14.2.1.1.4 Save As

Prompts the user to select a new location to save a copy of the current OTS-E3 session.
Once the user selects Save Project As, a standard Windows "browse for file" window will
appear to allow for a selection of the new file name and the location to save the copy of the
project.

14.2.1.1.5 Print

The Print function allows the user to print a hard-copy of the current OTS-E3 session.

14.2.1.1.6 Print Preview

The Print Preview function allows the user to preview the appearance of the current OTS-E3
session as it would be printed.

14.2.1.1.7 Page Setup

Opens a configuration window that contains the following printer settings:

Paper Size - Select from one of the the standard paper sizes in the list.
Paper Source - Select the paper tray that will be used as the source of paper. This varies
from printer to printer.

14.2.1.1.8 Exit

Closes the OTS-E3 window.

14.2.1.2 Connect Menu

The Connect Menu provides access to the following options:

Connect 833
Disconnect 833

14.2.1.2.1 Connect

If OTS-E3 is not currently connected to an E3 Series node, selecting Connect will

automatically open the selected serial port.

14.2.1.2.2 Disconnect

If OTS-E3 is currently connected to an E3 Series node, selecting Disconnect will close the
serial port.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 834 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

14.2.1.3 Commands Menu

The Commands Menu of OTS-E3 provides access to commonly used commands that are
issued to the ILI-E3 Series node that OTS-E3 is connected to. Note that these commands
are considered terminal commands and only apply to the node that OTS-E3 is directly
connected to.
The commands include:

Read Sensitivity 834

View Device 834
Monitor Device 835
Network Update 835
Autoconfig 836
Event Logs 836
Service Mode 836
Set IP Address 837
Reset Intelligent FAAST Device 838

14.2.1.3.1 Read Sensitivity

The Read Sensitivity command is used to report a sensor’s current sensitivity and settings, if
available. When selected, OTS-E3 opens up a small dialog box that prompts for the
following information:

Loop - Select whether the sensor is connected to SLC 1 or SLC 2.

Address - Enter the address of the sensor to read. This may range from 0-99 in CLIP
protocol, 0-159 in Velociti/SmartScan protocol or 0-126 in Apollo XP-95 protocol.
All - Select All to obtain a sensitivity report for all sensors on the connected node.

14.2.1.3.2 View Device

NOTE: Contact Gamewell-FCI Technical Support 932 for assistance in using this
command.

View Device is used to obtain certain configuration information from SLC devices on the
connected node. When this command is chosen, OTS-E3 opens up a small dialog box that
prompts for the following information:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 835

Loop - Select whether the device is connected to SLC 1 or SLC 2.

Device Type - Select Sensor or Module.
NOTE: Use only the Sensor option on ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3 nodes.

Address - Enter the address of the device to read. This may range from 0-99 in CLIP
protocol, 0-159 in Velociti/SmartScan protocol or 0-126 in Apollo XP-95 protocol.

14.2.1.3.3 Monitor Device

NOTE: Contact Gamewell-FCI Technical Support 932 for assistance in using this
command.

Monitor Device allows the user to obtain the analog/addressable "answerbacks" from SLC
devices. When selected, OTS-E3 opens up a small dialog box that prompts for the following
information:

Monitor ON - If device monitoring is off, selecting Monitor ON will enable SLC device
answerback logging. When Monitor ON is selected, the following information is required to
specify which device to monitor.
Loop - Select whether the device is connected to SLC 1 or SLC 2.
Device Type - Select Sensor or Module.
NOTE: Use only the Sensor option on ILI95-MB-E3 and ILI95-S-E3 nodes.

Address - Enter the address of the device to read. This may range from 0-99 in CLIP
protocol, 0-159 in Velociti/SmartScan protocol or 0-126 in Apollo XP-95 protocol.
Monitor OFF - If device monitoring is on, selecting Monitor OFF will disable SLC device
answerback logging.

14.2.1.3.4 Network Update

Each node in the system contains a network map that keeps track of all of the nodes that
are expected to be in the system. This information is configured by CAMWorks directly
based upon the nodes that have been defined in the CAMWorks project.

Once a node is configured with a valid network map, it will supervise the network. If it
detects a loss of communication with a node that it expects to be on the network it will issue
a "Node Missing" trouble condition.
The Network Update command will cause the connected node to configure it's network map
based on the current state of the network. This should be used only on a troubleshooting
basis. The official network map should be configured through the Node Summary screen
and downloaded to each node.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 836 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

14.2.1.3.5 Autoconfig

Autoconfig allows the user to perform an automatic configuration of the connected node.
There are two types of auto-configuration that may be performed.

The first is SLC's Only. This option will cause the node to scan it's SLC's and reconfigure
any devices that do not match the current configuration. In addition, it will enable devices
that have been configured as "not active" if they are present when the address is scanned.
Any devices that are not present on the Loop will be removed from the configuration.

The second type of auto-configuration is Full Auto-configuration. This option will perform
everything in the above procedure, but it will also reset all other configuration information to
the default settings.

NOTE: Auto-configuration is not supported on ILI-MB-E3 or ILI-S-E3 nodes using CLIP

protocol.

14.2.1.3.6 Event Logs

Event Logs allows the user to access functions related to the system's history log. When
selected, OTS-E3 opens up a small dialog box that prompts for the desired action:

Print All - Selecting Print All will cause the panel to print its entire history log. The log will
be displayed in the OTS-E3 text window.
Print Last 20 - Selecting Print Last 20 will cause the panel to print the last twenty events in
its history log. The log will be displayed in the OTS-E3 text window.
Cancel Log Print - If the panel is currently printing the log, selecting this option will cause
the panel to stop printing its history log.
Clear Log - Clears the history log throughout the system. Selecting this option will perform
a hard reset on all nodes.

14.2.1.3.7 Service Mode

Service Mode is a feature of the E3 Series system that makes it easier for technicians in the
field to service the system. In Service Mode, normal system operation is modified in three
ways:

1.) The panel's buzzers do not sound during Trouble or Supervisory conditions. The buzzers
still operate in Action or Alarm conditions.
2.) Any new Trouble or Supervisory conditions are automatically acknowledged. The
acknowledgements are not logged, however.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 837

3.) All password access requirements are waived except for those operations requiring Level
4 access. This applies to terminal, menu and OTS-E3 operations.

Selecting the "Service Mode ON" sub-menu presents the user with the following screen:

This allows the user to specify how long the system will remain in service mode. Once the
timer has expired, the system will revert to normal operations. The timer can be extended
by Selecting the "Service Mode ON" sub-menu and selecting a new timer duration. The
"Service Mode OFF" sub-menu will immediately turn the service mode feature off.

NOTE: Service Mode affects the entire system and persists through reset.

NOTE: A node will not remain in Service Mode after a hard reset occurs(such as following
a download). Select "Service Mode ON" and select the desired timer duration and click
OK to re-enable.

NOTE: Service Mode became available beginning at V1.1-528 of the ILI firmware. The
feature is supported in all versions of ILI95 firmware. The NGA has supported it since
V2.0-691.

14.2.1.3.8 IP Settings

In this screen, the user may set the IP address, subnet mask and gateway. These are the
three TCP/IP settings necessary to connect the S3 Series FACP or ANX to the Ethernet
network.

NOTE: You must connect your computer's serial port directly to the S3 Series FACP or
ANX in order to use this command.

Set IP Address - Place a check mark in this box if you would like to assign the IP address.
This address uniquely identifies this node on the network. The default setting is
192.168.1.3.

Set Subnet Mask - Place a check mark in this box if you would like to assign the subnet
mask. This identifies which part of the IP address refers to the network the S3 Series FACP
or ANX is connected to. The default setting is 255.255.255.0.

Set Gateway - Place a check mark in this box if you would like to assign the default gateway
IP address. If the S3 Series FACP or ANX is connected to a local network that is
connected to a larger network (such as the Internet), the gateway specifies the IP address of

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 838 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

the router that connects between the two networks. The default setting is 192.168.1.1.

NOTE: The default gateway is an Ethernet router device, not a FocalPoint Gateway.

NOTE: If the S3 Series FACP or ANX is being connected to an existing building or

corporate network, be sure to contact the network administrator or IT department of the
facility in order to obtain the correct settings to allow the ANX to properly communicate on
the network.

OK - Click OK to apply the settings that are checked.

CANCEL - Click CANCEL to make no changes.

NOTE: You must obtain Level 2 access for these settings to be accepted by the S3
Series FACP or ANX.
14.2.1.3.9 Reset Intelligent FAAST Device

Selecting the "Reset Intelligent FAAST Device" option brings up the following screen. It
allows the user to send a reset command to an Intelligent FAAST sensor.

Loop - Select whether the sensor is connected to SLC 1 or SLC 2.

Device - Sensor is the only available option.

Address - Enter the address of the Intelligent FAAST sensor to reset. This may range from
0-159.

Reset Type - This allows the user to choose from one of four reset options that are
available:

Reset Type Description

Don't Reset the device Refreshes the LED and Relay states based on their logical
states.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 839

Ensures that the device’s disable state (Isolate Mode, Disable

Mode, or not disabled) matches the panel’s current state for
the device.

Sends the configured airflow fault threshold and delay settings

to the device.
Reset device's TCP/IP This command resets the device's IP address settings to the
Settings following settings:

IP Address: 192.168.1.10
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Gateway: 192.168.1.1

This command is useful if the device's IP address settings

have been lost or need to be changed. Custom IP address
settings may be set using PipeIQ 934 .
Reset airflow baselines This command will set the air flow baseline, the filter clogged
baseline, and the smoke level baseline. It is important that
the device is connected properly and the filter is installed
correctly when this command is issued, as these baselines will
be used to indicate when a fault should occur. During
initialization, the device will operate as normal with the
exception that flow and filter faults will be held off until the
baseline is set. Establishing the baselines takes
approximately 5 minutes.
Perform power-on-reset Performs a shutdown and full reset of the device.

14.2.2 Toolbar
The OTS-E3 toolbar contains icons for the following commands (from left to right):

New Session 840

Open Session 840
Save Session 840
Print 840
Connect 840
Disconnect 840
Exit 840
COM Port Selection 840

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 840 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

14.2.2.1 New Session

Creates a new OTS-E3 session.

14.2.2.2 Open Session

Opens a new OTS-E3 session. A standard "browse for file" window will appear to allow the
selection of the saved session file.

14.2.2.3 Save

Saves any changes to the current OTS-E3 session.

14.2.2.4 Print

The Print function allows the user to print a hard-copy of the current OTS-E3 session.

14.2.2.5 Connect

If OTS-E3 is not currently connected to an E3 Series node, selecting Connect will

automatically open the selected serial port.

14.2.2.6 Disconnect

If OTS-E3 is currently connected to an E3 Series node, selecting Disconnect will close the
serial port.

14.2.2.7 Exit

Closes the OTS-E3 window.

14.2.2.8 COM Port Selection

Use this drop-down list to select which COM Port is connected to the E3 Series system. An
auto-detection is also available to automatically determine the correct port.

14.2.3 Access Code Buttons

Certain commands require authentication with the panel before they will run. Clicking one of
these buttons will automatically log in to the panel using the chosen access level. The
password is automatically retrieved from your project and authenticated with the panel.
Once that is complete, the text window will indicate if access was granted or denied.

14.2.4 Command Buttons

OTS-E3 provides quick access to the following panel functions via convenient buttons
located under the text window. These buttons offer direct access to the following
commands:

Trouble Acknowledge - Acknowledge one or, optionally multiple, trouble conditions that are
present on the panel.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 841

Alarm Acknowledge - Acknowledge one fire alarm condition on the panel.

CO Alarm Acknowledge - Acknowledge one CO or Gas alarm condition on the panel.
Silence - Silences output devices configured for silencing, if the system is in alarm.
Unsilence - If the system is currently silenced, selecting Unsilence will reactivate any
silenced output devices.
Reset - Resets the system. OTS-E3 will prompt for the desired region to reset. A standard
reset, similar to pressing the panel's Reset switch, is available also.
Version - Prints the firmware version of the connected node.
Status - Prints various configuration and status information.
Query - Produces a "light-weight" Network Query report that is generated by the panel.
The Network Query 829 tool should be used if a more detailed report is desired.

14.2.5 Send Command

OTS-E3 allows manual entry of supported terminal commands via this entry field. Once the
desired command has been entered, press ENTER or click Send to issue the command to
the panel.

14.3 Download Utilties

The download screen is the "one-stop shop" for all downloads to an S3 Series Standalone,
E3 Series / NetSOLO Series Network, E3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone or E3 Series
Multi-ring Network system. Because of the different nature of each type of download, there
are dedicated page (or pages) within this section of the CAMWorks help file for each type of
download. Use the following links below to display topics related to each type of download.

Configuration Download 841

Firmware Download 843
Message Download 864
NGA Graphics Download 865
NGA Logo Download 867
NGA Screen Saver Download 868

14.3.1 Configuration Download

In order to perform a configuration download to the system, a connection must be made
between the RS-232 port on the PC/Laptop to either the RJ11 connector of any INI-7100
node or to the serial port on an S3 Series FACP, NGA, ANX-SR, ANX-MR or ILI-E3 Series
node that may be present in the system before attempting to download. If an S3 Series
FACP, ANX-SR or ANX-MR is available, the Ethernet port may also be used for downloads
via TCP/IP.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

842 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: Downloads to Standalone 7100 panels or Standalone E3 Series systems may only
be made via the panel's local serial port. Downloads to Standalone S3 Series system may
be made via the panel's local serial port or its Ethernet port.

The following options on the Download screen are applicable to configuration downloads:

Port Options -
Select whether the download should be made via TCP/IP (Ethernet) or RS-232 (Comm).
This option is available only when the selected Gateway is an ANX or S3 Series FACP.

NOTE: It is not possible to download to INI-7100 nodes via Ethernet.

Select Comm Port -

Select the serial port to be used to connect to the system. Available COM ports range from
COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection option is also available. If selected, the
auto-detection will attempt to determine which of the PC's serial ports is connected to an
appropriate node. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct serial port it will be
necessary to manually select the correct port. This selection field is unavailable if the user
has opted to connect to the system via TCP/IP (Ethernet).

Enter IP Address -
If the user has opted to connect to the system via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the
IP address of the S3 Series FACP, ANX-SR or ANX-MR that is connected to the system.
This selection field is unavailable if the user has opted to connect via RS-232 (Comm).

Download Gateway -
You must select whether your computer is connected to an INI-7100 node, an S3 Series
FACP, an ILI-E3 Series node/NGA or to an ANX. For 7100 Standalone, S3 Series
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects, this field is not available since the PC must be
connected directly to the panel. An auto-detection option is also available. If the
auto-detection fails to determine the correct download gateway the download gateway
selection must be made manually.

NOTE: In order to download to S3 Series or E3 Series nodes such as the NGA and the
ILI-MB-E3 via RS-232, you MUST connect your computer to the serial port of an
E3-compatible node. All other node types can be downloaded from either an INI-7100 or
an E3-compatible node. All node types may be downloaded via the ANX's RS-232 port or
Ethernet port.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

Show CAM Memory Usage -

If this option is selected, CAMWorks will display a screen indicating how much of the
available CAM memory is being used by the current configuration after all of the CAMs for
the current node have been translated.

Save Configuration In Binary Format -

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 843

This option, intended only for diagnostic use, saves a binary file containing an exact image
of the target node's configuration database. This option should only be used at the
discretion of Gamewell-FCI Technical Support 932 personnel.

Select Application Type To Download -

In this section of the screen, CAMWorks presents several options for selecting what data to
download to the target panel. In the case of downloading configuration data to the target
panel, the "Configuration" option button must always be selected. The following options
appear when the user elects to perform a configuration download:

Send CAMs - When selected, CAMWorks will download CAMs to the selected node.
Send Device Labels / CAM Text (NGA nodes only) - When selected, CAMWorks
will download SLC device labels or CAM Text messages to the selected node.
Send Virtual Switch Labels (S3 Series FACP and ANX nodes only) - When
selected, CAMWorks will download Virtual Switch labels to the selected node.
Send Configuration - When selected, CAMWorks will download the configuration to
the selected node.
Download Screen Saver (NGA Only) - When selected, CAMWorks will download
images to the NGA for use as a screen saver.
Download Logo (NGA Only) - When selected, CAMWorks will download a user
supplied image that will be displayed on the System Normal screen.

Download -
Click on this button to begin the download. The user will be prompted to enter the system
Level 4 access code before the download will begin. If all goes well, the Download process
will continue until completed. The panel will reset following a successful download.

NOTE: If the system has not been previously configured, you should enter the system
default level 4 password. If a custom level 4 password has already been downloaded to
the panel, then that code should be entered instead.

Close -
Click on this command button to exit this screen.

Validation -
Click on this button to open the Program Validation 49 screen to scan the current project for
known types of configuration errors.

7100 Upload -
Click on this button upload a configuration from a 7100 panel. This function is only available
for 7100 Standalone projects. See this page 870 for more information.
14.3.2 Firmware Download
The Download screen in CAMWorks can perform firmware downloads to each node in the
system. Make sure that a connection must be made between the RS-232 port on the
PC/Laptop to either the RJ11 connector of any INI-7100 node or to the serial port on an S3
Series FACP, NGA or ILI-E3 Series node that may be present in the system before
attempting to download. If an S3 Series FACP or ANX node is available, the download may
be performed via Ethernet (TCP/IP) instead of RS-232.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

844 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Since the firmware download process varies slightly for each node type, a step-by-step
guide is available for performing a firmware download to each node type. These may be
accessed using the following links:

7100 Firmware Download 845

INI-7100 Firmware Download 847
INCC Firmware Download 848
INX Firmware Download 849
INI-VGE Firmware Download 850
NGA Firmware Download 851
ILI-MB-E3 Firmware Download 852
ILI-S-E3 Firmware Download 853
ILI95-MB-E3 Firmware Download 854
ILI95-S-E3 Firmware Download 856
ANX-SR Firmware Download 857
ANX-MR Firmware Download 858
SLP-E3 Firmware Download 859
SLP95-E3 Firmware Download 860
LCD-SLP Firmware Download 861
RPT-E3 Firmware Download 862

Below is a list of the controls on the Download screen that apply to firmware downloads:

Port Options -
Select whether the download should be made via TCP/IP (Ethernet) or RS-232 (Comm).
This option is available only when the selected Gateway is an ANX or S3 Series FACP.

NOTE: It is not possible to download to INI-7100 nodes via Ethernet.

Select Comm Port -

Select the serial port to be used to connect to the system. Available COM ports range from
COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection option is also available. If selected, the
auto-detection will attempt to determine which of the PC's serial ports is connected to an
appropriate node. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct serial port it will be
necessary to manually select the correct port. This selection field is unavailable if the user
has opted to connect to the system via TCP/IP (Ethernet).

Download Gateway -
You must select whether your computer is connected to an INI-7100 node, an S3 Series
FACP, an ILI-E3 Series node/NGA or to an ANX. For 7100 Standalone, S3 Series
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects, this field is not available since the PC must be
connected directly to the panel. An auto-detection option is also available. If the
auto-detection fails to determine the correct download gateway the download gateway
selection must be made manually.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 845

NOTE: In order to download to S3 Series or E3 Series nodes such as the NGA and the
ILI-MB-E3 via RS-232, you MUST connect your computer to the serial port of an
E3-compatible node. All other node types can be downloaded from either an INI-7100 or
an E3-compatible node. All node types may be downloaded via the ANX's RS-232 port or
Ethernet port.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

Select Application Type To Download -

In this section of the screen, CAMWorks presents several options for selecting what data to
download to the target panel. In the case of downloading firmware to the target panel, the
"Firmware" option button must be selected.

NOTE: In order to download firmware to the INI-7100, the "7100 Network Card" option
must be selected instead of the "Firmware" option. See the INI-7100 Firmware Download
847 page for more information.

Firmware File Path -

This text box displays the full file path to the selected firmware file.

"..." -
This button opens a standard browse for file window to select the desired firmware file.

Download -
Click on this button to begin the download. The user will be prompted to enter the system
Level 4 access code before the download will begin. If all goes well, the Download process
will continue until completed. The panel will reset following a successful download.

NOTE: If the system has not been previously configured, you should enter the system
default level 4 password. If a custom level 4 password has already been downloaded to
the panel, then that code should be entered instead.

Below the option selections is a status window. This window displays several status
messages to indicate the progress of the download process, including the steps that are
being taken during the download. Each step is indicated as either "Done" (step completed
successfully) or "Failed" (an error occurred during this step). Gamewell-FCI Technical
Support 932 personnel may request the contents of the Status window in order to
troubleshoot problems with the download process.

Close -
Click on this command button to exit this screen.

14.3.2.1 7100 Firmware Download

NOTE: If the 7100 panel currently contains a V7 firmware, it cannot be flashed down to
V6. Likewise, if the panel currently contains a V6 firmware, it cannot be flashed up to V7.
This version of CAMWorks does not support any version of 7100 prior to V6.4

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

846 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: This option is for downloading firmware to the 7100 panel, not its attached INI-
7100 network card. See this page 847 for information about downloading firmware to the
INI-7100 network card.

The following steps must be used to download firmware to the 7100 panel using CAMWorks:

1.) Start CAMWorks, if it is not already running.

2.) Open the CAMWorks Project that contains the configuration for the target 7100 panel.

3.) Go to the Download screen, via the "Communication" icon under the 7100 node or the
"Download" icon in the "Communictions 35 " tab in The Ribbon 27 .

4.) If the download screen was not entered by clicking "Communication" icon under the
7100 node, the desired node must be selected from the grid. Simply click anywhere in
the row that contains the desired 7100 node to select it. The selected 7100 node will
be highlighted.

5.) If the selected Download Gateway is an S3 Series FACP or ANX, the user must
choose to download using RS-232 (Comm) or TCP/IP (Ethernet). This is done by
clicking on the appropriate option button under the Port Options header.

6.) If the user has chosen to download via RS-232 (Comm), select the correct serial port
that is used to communicate with the system. This is done in the "Select Comm Port"
drop-down list. Available COM ports range from COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection
option is also available. The auto-detection can attempt to determine which of the PC's
serial ports is connected to the system. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct
serial port it will be necessary to manually select the correct port. If the user has
chosen to download via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the IP address of the
ANX instead of selecting a COM port.
6.) Select the type of node that that the PC is currently connected to. This field (called
Download Gateway) is needed in order to select the proper baud rate for serial
communications or communication protocol. This may be set for an INI-7100 node, an
NGA or to an ANX. An auto-detection option is also available. If the auto-detection
fails to determine the correct download gateway the download gateway selection must
be made manually. In order to use the TCP/IP (Ethernet) option, the download
gateway must be set to ANX. This field is not available for S3 Series Standalone, 7100
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects.

NOTE: It is not possible to download to INI-7100 nodes via Ethernet.

NOTE: If the current project is an E3 Series / NetSOLO Series NetworkNetSOLO

Series Network, CAMWorks will attempt to perform a firmware download via the
network. This feature is available only on new 7100 panels that were manufactured
on or after December 1, 2006 and contain at least V7.0-045 firmware. In addition,
the INI-7100 must have at least V1.2-011 (V1 INI-7100 cards) or V2.0-003 (V2
INI-7100 cards).

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 847

8.) Select the "Firmware" option.

9.) Click on the "..." button next to the "Firmware File Path". This will open a standard
"browse for file" window to allow the user to select the desired firmware file.

10.) Click Download.

11.) Enter the system's Level 4 password when prompted and click OK.

12.) The download will now begin, assuming the correct Level 4 password was entered.
14.3.2.2 INI-7100 Firmware Download

WARNING: If the INI-7100 card currently contains a V1 firmware, it cannot be flashed up

to V2. Likewise, if the INI currently contains a V2 firmware, it cannot be flashed down to
V1. Crossing the V1/V2 threshold (in either direction) WILL RESULT IN AN INI-7100
THAT WILL NOT BOOT.

NOTE: This option is for downloading firmware to the INI-7100 network card itself, not its
attached 7100 panel. See this page 845 for information about downloading firmware to
the 7100 panel.

The following steps must be used to download firmware to the INI-7100 card using
CAMWorks:

1.) Start CAMWorks, if it is not already running.

2.) Open the CAMWorks Project that contains the target INI-7100 card.

3.) Go to the Download screen, via the "Communication" icon under the 7100 node or the
"Download" icon in the "Communictions 35 " tab in The Ribbon 27 .

4.) If the download screen was not entered by clicking "Communication" icon under the
7100 node, the desired node must be selected from the grid. Simply click anywhere in
the row that contains the desired 7100 node to select it. The selected 7100 node will
be highlighted.

5.) If the selected Download Gateway is an S3 Series FACP or ANX, the user must
choose to download using RS-232 (Comm) or TCP/IP (Ethernet). This is done by
clicking on the appropriate option button under the Port Options header.

6.) If the user has chosen to download via RS-232 (Comm), select the correct serial port
that is used to communicate with the system. This is done in the "Select Comm Port"
drop-down list. Available COM ports range from COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection
option is also available. The auto-detection can attempt to determine which of the PC's
serial ports is connected to the system. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct
serial port it will be necessary to manually select the correct port. If the user has
chosen to download via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the IP address of the
ANX instead of selecting a COM port.

7.) Select the type of node that that the PC is currently connected to. This field (called

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 848 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Download Gateway) is needed in order to select the proper baud rate for serial
communications or communication protocol. This may be set for an INI-7100 node, an
NGA or to an ANX. An auto-detection option is also available. If the auto-detection
fails to determine the correct download gateway the download gateway selection must
be made manually. In order to use the TCP/IP (Ethernet) option, the download
gateway must be set to ANX. This field is not available for S3 Series Standalone, 7100
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects.

NOTE: It is not possible to download to INI-7100 nodes via Ethernet.

8.) Select the "7100 Network Card" option.

9.) Click on the "..." button next to the "Firmware File Path". This will open a standard
"browse for file" window to allow the user to select the desired firmware file.

10.) Click Download.

11.) Enter the system's Level 4 password when prompted and click OK.

12.) The download will now begin, assuming the correct Level 4 password was entered.
14.3.2.3 INCC Firmware Download

The following steps must be used to download firmware to the INCC using CAMWorks:

1.) Start CAMWorks, if it is not already running.

2.) Open the CAMWorks Project that contains the target INCC node.

3.) Go to the Download screen, via the "Communication" icon under the INCC node or the
"Download" icon in the "Communictions 35 " tab in The Ribbon 27 .

4.) If the download screen was not entered by clicking "Communication" icon under the
INCC node, the desired node must be selected from the grid. Simply click anywhere in
the row that contains the desired INCC node to select it. The selected INCC node will
be highlighted.

5.) If the selected Download Gateway is an S3 Series FACP or ANX, the user must
choose to download using RS-232 (Comm) or TCP/IP (Ethernet). This is done by
clicking on the appropriate option button under the Port Options header.

6.) If the user has chosen to download via RS-232 (Comm), select the correct serial port
that is used to communicate with the system. This is done in the "Select Comm Port"
drop-down list. Available COM ports range from COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection
option is also available. The auto-detection can attempt to determine which of the PC's
serial ports is connected to the system. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct
serial port it will be necessary to manually select the correct port. If the user has
chosen to download via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the IP address of the
S3 Series FACP or ANX instead of selecting a COM port.

7.) Select the type of node that that the PC is currently connected to. This field (called
Download Gateway) is needed in order to select the proper baud rate for serial

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 849

communications or communication protocol. This may be set for an INI-7100 node, an

ILI-E3 Series node/NGA or to an ANX. An auto-detection option is also available. If the
auto-detection fails to determine the correct download gateway the download gateway
selection must be made manually. In order to use the TCP/IP (Ethernet) option, the
download gateway must be set to ANX. This field is not available for S3 Series
Standalone, 7100 Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

8.) Select the "Firmware" option.

9.) Click on the "..." button next to the "Firmware File Path". This will open a standard
"browse for file" window to allow the user to select the desired firmware file.

10.) Click Download.

11.) Enter the system's Level 4 password when prompted and click OK.

12.) The download will now begin, assuming the correct Level 4 password was entered.
14.3.2.4 INX Firmware Download

The following steps must be used to download firmware to the INX using CAMWorks:

1.) Start CAMWorks, if it is not already running.

2.) Open the CAMWorks Project that contains the target INX node.

3.) Go to the Download screen, via the "Communication" icon under the INX node or the
"Download" icon in the "Communictions 35 " tab in The Ribbon 27 .

4.) If the download screen was not entered by clicking "Communication" icon under the
INX node, the desired node must be selected from the grid. Simply click anywhere in
the row that contains the desired INX node to select it. The selected INX node will be
highlighted.

5.) If the selected Download Gateway is an S3 Series FACP or ANX, the user must
choose to download using RS-232 (Comm) or TCP/IP (Ethernet). This is done by
clicking on the appropriate option button under the Port Options header.

6.) If the user has chosen to download via RS-232 (Comm), select the correct serial port
that is used to communicate with the system. This is done in the "Select Comm Port"
drop-down list. Available COM ports range from COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection
option is also available. The auto-detection can attempt to determine which of the PC's
serial ports is connected to the system. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct
serial port it will be necessary to manually select the correct port. If the user has
chosen to download via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the IP address of the
S3 Series FACP or ANX instead of selecting a COM port.

7.) Select the type of node that that the PC is currently connected to. This field (called
Download Gateway) is needed in order to select the proper baud rate for serial

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 850 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

communications or communication protocol. This may be set for an INI-7100 node, an

ILI-E3 Series node/NGA or to an ANX. An auto-detection option is also available. If the
auto-detection fails to determine the correct download gateway the download gateway
selection must be made manually. In order to use the TCP/IP (Ethernet) option, the
download gateway must be set to ANX. This field is not available for S3 Series
Standalone, 7100 Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

8.) Select the "Firmware" option.

9.) Click on the "..." button next to the "Firmware File Path". This will open a standard
"browse for file" window to allow the user to select the desired firmware file.

10.) Click Download.

11.) Enter the system's Level 4 password when prompted and click OK.

12.) The download will now begin, assuming the correct Level 4 password was entered.
14.3.2.5 INI-VGE Firmware Download

The following steps must be used to download firmware to the INI-VGE using CAMWorks :

1.) Start CAMWorks, if it is not already running.

2.) Open the CAMWorks Project that contains the target INI-VGE node.

3.) Go to the Download screen, via the "Communication" icon under the INI-VGE node or
the "Download" icon in the "Communictions 35 " tab in The Ribbon 27 .

4.) If the download screen was not entered by clicking "Communication" icon under the
INI-VGE node, the desired node must be selected from the grid. Simply click anywhere
in the row that contains the desired INI-VGE node to select it. The selected INI-VGE
node will be highlighted.

5.) If the selected Download Gateway is an S3 Series FACP or ANX, the user must
choose to download using RS-232 (Comm) or TCP/IP (Ethernet). This is done by
clicking on the appropriate option button under the Port Options header.

6.) If the user has chosen to download via RS-232 (Comm), select the correct serial port
that is used to communicate with the system. This is done in the "Select Comm Port"
drop-down list. Available COM ports range from COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection
option is also available. The auto-detection can attempt to determine which of the PC's
serial ports is connected to the system. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct
serial port it will be necessary to manually select the correct port. If the user has
chosen to download via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the IP address of the
S3 Series FACP or ANX instead of selecting a COM port.

7.) Select the type of node that that the PC is currently connected to. This field (called
Download Gateway) is needed in order to select the proper baud rate for serial

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 851

communications or communication protocol. This may be set for an INI-7100 node, an

ILI-E3 Series node/NGA or to an ANX. An auto-detection option is also available. If the
auto-detection fails to determine the correct download gateway the download gateway
selection must be made manually. In order to use the TCP/IP (Ethernet) option, the
download gateway must be set to ANX. This field is not available for S3 Series
Standalone, 7100 Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

8.) Select the "Firmware" option.

9.) Click on the "..." button next to the "Firmware File Path". This will open a standard
"browse for file" window to allow the user to select the desired firmware file.

10.) Click Download.

11.) Enter the system's Level 4 password when prompted and click OK.

12.) The download will now begin, assuming the correct Level 4 password was entered.
14.3.2.6 NGA Firmware Download

The following steps must be used to download firmware to the NGA using CAMWorks:

1.) Start CAMWorks, if it is not already running.

2.) Open the CAMWorks Project that contains the target NGA node.

3.) Go to the Download screen, via the "Communication" icon under the NGA node or the
"Download" icon in the "Communictions 35 " tab in The Ribbon 27 .

4.) If the download screen was not entered by clicking "Communication" icon under the
NGA node, the desired node must be selected from the grid. Simply click anywhere in
the row that contains the desired NGA node to select it. The selected NGA node will
be highlighted.

5.) If the selected Download Gateway is an S3 Series FACP or ANX, the user must
choose to download using RS-232 (Comm) or TCP/IP (Ethernet). This is done by
clicking on the appropriate option button under the Port Options header.

6.) If the user has chosen to download via RS-232 (Comm), select the correct serial port
that is used to communicate with the system. This is done in the "Select Comm Port"
drop-down list. Available COM ports range from COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection
option is also available. The auto-detection can attempt to determine which of the PC's
serial ports is connected to the system. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct
serial port it will be necessary to manually select the correct port. If the user has
chosen to download via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the IP address of the
S3 Series FACP or ANX instead of selecting a COM port.

7.) Select the type of node that that the PC is currently connected to. This field (called

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 852 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Download Gateway) is needed in order to select the proper baud rate for serial
communications or communication protocol. For E3 compatible nodes, this field must
be set to E3/NGA. In order to use the TCP/IP (Ethernet) option, the download gateway
must be set to S3/E3. This field is not available for S3 Series Standalone, 7100
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects.

NOTE: You cannot connect your PC to an INI-7100 node and download to E3 Series
or S3 Series nodes.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

8.) Select the "Firmware" option.

9.) Click on the "..." button next to the "Firmware File Path". This will open a standard
"browse for file" window to allow the user to select the desired firmware file.

10.) Click Download.

11.) Enter the system's Level 4 password when prompted and click OK.

12.) The download will now begin, assuming the correct Level 4 password was entered.

12.) Once the firmware download is complete, CAMWorks will ask whether or not it should
download the standard graphics suite to the NGA. Click OK to perform the graphics
download or Cancel to skip the graphics download.
14.3.2.7 ILI-MB-E3 Firmware Download

The following steps must be used to download firmware to the ILI-MB-E3 using CAMWorks:

1.) Start CAMWorks, if it is not already running.

2.) Open the CAMWorks Project that contains the target ILI-MB-E3 node.

3.) Go to the Download screen, via the "Communication" icon under the ILI-MB-E3 node or
the "Download" icon in the "Communictions 35 " tab in The Ribbon 27 .

4.) If the download screen was not entered by clicking "Communication" icon under the
ILI-MB-E3 node, the desired node must be selected from the grid. Simply click
anywhere in the row that contains the desired ILI-MB-E3 node to select it. The
selected ILI-MB-E3 node will be highlighted.

5.) If the selected Download Gateway is an S3 Series FACP or ANX, the user must
choose to download using RS-232 (Comm) or TCP/IP (Ethernet). This is done by
clicking on the appropriate option button under the Port Options header.

6.) If the user has chosen to download via RS-232 (Comm), select the correct serial port

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 853

that is used to communicate with the system. This is done in the "Select Comm Port"
drop-down list. Available COM ports range from COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection
option is also available. The auto-detection can attempt to determine which of the PC's
serial ports is connected to the system. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct
serial port it will be necessary to manually select the correct port. If the user has
chosen to download via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the IP address of the
S3 Series FACP or ANX instead of selecting a COM port.

7.) Select the type of node that that the PC is currently connected to. This field (called
Download Gateway) is needed in order to select the proper baud rate for serial
communications or communication protocol. For E3 compatible nodes, this field must
be set to E3/NGA. In order to use the TCP/IP (Ethernet) option, the download gateway
must be set to S3/E3. This field is not available for S3 Series Standalone, 7100
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects.

NOTE: You cannot connect your PC to an INI-7100 node and download to E3 Series
or S3 Series nodes.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

8.) Select the "Firmware" option.

9.) Click on the "..." button next to the "Firmware File Path". This will open a standard
"browse for file" window to allow the user to select the desired firmware file.

10.) Click Download.

11.) Enter the system's Level 4 password when prompted and click OK.

12.) The download will now begin, assuming the correct Level 4 password was entered.

14.3.2.8 ILI-S-E3 Firmware Download

The following steps must be used to download firmware to the ILI-S-E3 using CAMWorks:

1.) Start CAMWorks, if it is not already running.

2.) Open the CAMWorks Project that contains the target ILI-S-E3 node.

3.) Go to the Download screen, via the "Communication" icon under the ILI-S-E3 node or
the "Download" icon in the "Communictions 35 " tab in The Ribbon 27 .

4.) If the download screen was not entered by clicking "Communication" icon under the
ILI-S-E3 node, the desired node must be selected from the grid. Simply click anywhere
in the row that contains the desired ILI-S-E3 node to select it. The selected ILI-S-E3
node will be highlighted.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 854 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

5.) If the selected Download Gateway is an S3 Series FACP or ANX, the user must
choose to download using RS-232 (Comm) or TCP/IP (Ethernet). This is done by
clicking on the appropriate option button under the Port Options header.

6.) If the user has chosen to download via RS-232 (Comm), select the correct serial port
that is used to communicate with the system. This is done in the "Select Comm Port"
drop-down list. Available COM ports range from COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection
option is also available. The auto-detection can attempt to determine which of the PC's
serial ports is connected to the system. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct
serial port it will be necessary to manually select the correct port. If the user has
chosen to download via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the IP address of the
S3 Series FACP or ANX instead of selecting a COM port.

7.) Select the type of node that that the PC is currently connected to. This field (called
Download Gateway) is needed in order to select the proper baud rate for serial
communications or communication protocol. For E3 compatible nodes, this field must
be set to E3/NGA. In order to use the TCP/IP (Ethernet) option, the download gateway
must be set to S3/E3. This field is not available for S3 Series Standalone, 7100
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects.

NOTE: You cannot connect your PC to an INI-7100 node and download to E3 Series
or S3 Series nodes.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

8.) Select the "Firmware" option.

9.) Click on the "..." button next to the "Firmware File Path". This will open a standard
"browse for file" window to allow the user to select the desired firmware file.

10.) Click Download.

11.) Enter the system's Level 4 password when prompted and click OK.

12.) The download will now begin, assuming the correct Level 4 password was entered.

14.3.2.9 ILI95-MB-E3 Firmware Download

The following steps must be used to download firmware to the ILI95-MB-E3 using
CAMWorks:

1.) Start CAMWorks, if it is not already running.

2.) Open the CAMWorks Project that contains the target ILI95-MB-E3 node.

3.) Go to the Download screen, via the "Communication" icon under the ILI95-MB-E3 node

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 855

or the "Download" icon in the "Communictions 35 " tab in The Ribbon 27 .

4.) If the download screen was not entered by clicking "Communication" icon under the
ILI95-MB-E3 node, the desired node must be selected from the grid. Simply click
anywhere in the row that contains the desired ILI95-MB-E3 node to select it. The
selected ILI95-MB-E3 node will be highlighted.

5.) If the selected Download Gateway is an S3 Series FACP or ANX, the user must
choose to download using RS-232 (Comm) or TCP/IP (Ethernet). This is done by
clicking on the appropriate option button under the Port Options header.

6.) If the user has chosen to download via RS-232 (Comm), select the correct serial port
that is used to communicate with the system. This is done in the "Select Comm Port"
drop-down list. Available COM ports range from COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection
option is also available. The auto-detection can attempt to determine which of the PC's
serial ports is connected to the system. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct
serial port it will be necessary to manually select the correct port. If the user has
chosen to download via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the IP address of the
S3 Series FACP or ANX instead of selecting a COM port.

7.) Select the type of node that that the PC is currently connected to. This field (called
Download Gateway) is needed in order to select the proper baud rate for serial
communications or communication protocol. For E3 compatible nodes, this field must
be set to E3/NGA. In order to use the TCP/IP (Ethernet) option, the download gateway
must be set to S3/E3. This field is not available for S3 Series Standalone, 7100
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects.

NOTE: You cannot connect your PC to an INI-7100 node and download to E3 Series
or S3 Series nodes.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

8.) Select the "Firmware" option.

9.) Click on the "..." button next to the "Firmware File Path". This will open a standard
"browse for file" window to allow the user to select the desired firmware file.

10.) Click Download.

11.) Enter the system's Level 4 password when prompted and click OK.

12.) The download will now begin, assuming the correct Level 4 password was entered.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 856 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

14.3.2.10 ILI95-S-E3 Firmware Download

The following steps must be used to download firmware to the ILI95-S-E3 using CAMWorks:

1.) Start CAMWorks, if it is not already running.

2.) Open the CAMWorks Project that contains the target ILI95-S-E3 node.

3.) Go to the Download screen, via the "Communication" icon under the ILI95-S-E3 node
or the "Download" icon in the "Communictions 35 " tab in The Ribbon 27 .

4.) If the download screen was not entered by clicking "Communication" icon under the
ILI95-S-E3 node, the desired node must be selected from the grid. Simply click
anywhere in the row that contains the desired ILI95-S-E3 node to select it. The
selected ILI95-S-E3 node will be highlighted.

5.) If the selected Download Gateway is an S3 Series FACP or ANX, the user must
choose to download using RS-232 (Comm) or TCP/IP (Ethernet). This is done by
clicking on the appropriate option button under the Port Options header.

6.) If the user has chosen to download via RS-232 (Comm), select the correct serial port
that is used to communicate with the system. This is done in the "Select Comm Port"
drop-down list. Available COM ports range from COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection
option is also available. The auto-detection can attempt to determine which of the PC's
serial ports is connected to the system. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct
serial port it will be necessary to manually select the correct port. If the user has
chosen to download via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the IP address of the
S3 Series FACP or ANX instead of selecting a COM port.

7.) Select the type of node that that the PC is currently connected to. This field (called
Download Gateway) is needed in order to select the proper baud rate for serial
communications or communication protocol. For E3 compatible nodes, this field must
be set to E3/NGA. In order to use the TCP/IP (Ethernet) option, the download gateway
must be set to S3/E3. This field is not available for S3 Series Standalone, 7100
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects.

NOTE: You cannot connect your PC to an INI-7100 node and download to E3 Series
or S3 Series nodes.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

8.) Select the "Firmware" option.

9.) Click on the "..." button next to the "Firmware File Path". This will open a standard
"browse for file" window to allow the user to select the desired firmware file.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 857

10.) Click Download.

11.) Enter the system's Level 4 password when prompted and click OK.

12.) The download will now begin, assuming the correct Level 4 password was entered.

14.3.2.11 ANX-SR Firmware Download

The following steps must be used to download firmware to the ANX using CAMWorks:

1.) Start CAMWorks, if it is not already running.

2.) Open the CAMWorks Project that contains the target ANX node.

3.) Go to the Download screen, via the "Communication" icon under the ANX node or the
"Download" icon in the "Communictions 35 " tab in The Ribbon 27 .
4.) If the download screen was not entered by clicking "Communication" icon under the
ANX node, the desired node must be selected from the grid. Simply click anywhere in
the row that contains the desired ANX node to select it. The selected ANX node will be
highlighted.

5.) If the selected Download Gateway is an S3 Series FACP or ANX, the user must
choose to download using RS-232 (Comm) or TCP/IP (Ethernet). This is done by
clicking on the appropriate option button under the Port Options header.

6.) If the user has chosen to download via RS-232 (Comm), select the correct serial port
that is used to communicate with the system. This is done in the "Select Comm Port"
drop-down list. Available COM ports range from COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection
option is also available. The auto-detection can attempt to determine which of the PC's
serial ports is connected to the system. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct
serial port it will be necessary to manually select the correct port. If the user has
chosen to download via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the IP address of the
S3 Series FACP or ANX instead of selecting a COM port.

7.) Select the type of node that that the PC is currently connected to. This field (called
Download Gateway) is needed in order to select the proper baud rate for serial
communications or communication protocol. For E3 compatible nodes, this field must
be set to E3/NGA. In order to use the TCP/IP (Ethernet) option, the download gateway
must be set to S3/E3. This field is not available for S3 Series Standalone, 7100
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects.

NOTE: You cannot connect your PC to an INI-7100 node and download to E3 Series
or S3 Series nodes.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 858 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

8.) Select the "Firmware" option.

9.) Click on the "..." button next to the "Firmware File Path". This will open a standard
"browse for file" window to allow the user to select the desired firmware file.

10.) Click Download.

11.) Enter the system's Level 4 password when prompted and click OK.

12.) The download will now begin, assuming the correct Level 4 password was entered.

14.3.2.12 ANX-MR Firmware Download

The following steps must be used to download firmware to the ANX using CAMWorks:

1.) Start CAMWorks, if it is not already running.

2.) Open the CAMWorks Project that contains the target ANX node.

3.) Go to the Download screen, via the "Communication" icon under the ANX node or the
"Download" icon in the "Communictions 35 " tab in The Ribbon 27 .
4.) If the download screen was not entered by clicking "Communication" icon under the
ANX node, the desired node must be selected from the grid. Simply click anywhere in
the row that contains the desired ANX node to select it. The selected ANX node will be
highlighted.

5.) If the selected Download Gateway is an S3 Series FACP or ANX, the user must
choose to download using RS-232 (Comm) or TCP/IP (Ethernet). This is done by
clicking on the appropriate option button under the Port Options header.

6.) If the user has chosen to download via RS-232 (Comm), select the correct serial port
that is used to communicate with the system. This is done in the "Select Comm Port"
drop-down list. Available COM ports range from COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection
option is also available. The auto-detection can attempt to determine which of the PC's
serial ports is connected to the system. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct
serial port it will be necessary to manually select the correct port. If the user has
chosen to download via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the IP address of the
S3 Series FACP or ANX instead of selecting a COM port.

7.) Select the type of node that that the PC is currently connected to. This field (called
Download Gateway) is needed in order to select the proper baud rate for serial
communications or communication protocol. For E3 compatible nodes, this field must
be set to E3/NGA. In order to use the TCP/IP (Ethernet) option, the download gateway
must be set to S3/E3. This field is not available for S3 Series Standalone, 7100
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects.

NOTE: You cannot connect your PC to an INI-7100 node and download to E3 Series
or S3 Series nodes.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 859

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

8.) Select the "Firmware" option.

9.) Click on the "..." button next to the "Firmware File Path". This will open a standard
"browse for file" window to allow the user to select the desired firmware file.

10.) Click Download.

11.) Enter the system's Level 4 password when prompted and click OK.

12.) The download will now begin, assuming the correct Level 4 password was entered.

14.3.2.13 SLP-E3 Firmware Download

The following steps must be used to download firmware to the SLP-E3 using CAMWorks:

1.) Start CAMWorks, if it is not already running.

2.) Open the CAMWorks Project that contains the target SLP-E3 node.

3.) Go to the Download screen, via the "Communication" icon under the SLP-E3 node or
the "Download" icon in the "Communictions 35 " tab in The Ribbon 27 .

4.) If the download screen was not entered by clicking "Communication" icon under the
SLP-E3 node, the desired node must be selected from the grid. Simply click anywhere
in the row that contains the desired SLP-E3 node to select it. The selected SLP-E3
node will be highlighted.

5.) If the selected Download Gateway is an S3 Series FACP or ANX, the user must
choose to download using RS-232 (Comm) or TCP/IP (Ethernet). This is done by
clicking on the appropriate option button under the Port Options header.

6.) If the user has chosen to download via RS-232 (Comm), select the correct serial port
that is used to communicate with the system. This is done in the "Select Comm Port"
drop-down list. Available COM ports range from COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection
option is also available. The auto-detection can attempt to determine which of the PC's
serial ports is connected to the system. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct
serial port it will be necessary to manually select the correct port. If the user has
chosen to download via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the IP address of the
S3 Series FACP or ANX instead of selecting a COM port.

7.) Select the type of node that that the PC is currently connected to. This field (called
Download Gateway) is needed in order to select the proper baud rate for serial
communications or communication protocol. For E3 compatible nodes, this field must

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 860 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

be set to E3/NGA. In order to use the TCP/IP (Ethernet) option, the download gateway
must be set to S3/E3. This field is not available for S3 Series Standalone, 7100
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects.

NOTE: You cannot connect your PC to an INI-7100 node and download to E3 Series
or S3 Series nodes.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

8.) Select the "Firmware" option.

9.) Click on the "..." button next to the "Firmware File Path". This will open a standard
"browse for file" window to allow the user to select the desired firmware file.

10.) Click Download.

11.) Enter the system's Level 4 password when prompted and click OK.

12.) The download will now begin, assuming the correct Level 4 password was entered.

14.3.2.14 SLP95-E3 Firmware Download

The following steps must be used to download firmware to the SLP95-E3 using CAMWorks:

1.) Start CAMWorks, if it is not already running.

2.) Open the CAMWorks Project that contains the target SLP95-E3 node.

3.) Go to the Download screen, via the "Communication" icon under the SLP-E3 node or
the "Download" icon in the "Communictions 35 " tab in The Ribbon 27 .

4.) If the download screen was not entered by clicking "Communication" icon under the
SLP95-E3 node, the desired node must be selected from the grid. Simply click
anywhere in the row that contains the desired SLP95-E3 node to select it. The
selected SLP95-E3 node will be highlighted.

5.) If the selected Download Gateway is an S3 Series FACP or ANX, the user must
choose to download using RS-232 (Comm) or TCP/IP (Ethernet). This is done by
clicking on the appropriate option button under the Port Options header.

6.) If the user has chosen to download via RS-232 (Comm), select the correct serial port
that is used to communicate with the system. This is done in the "Select Comm Port"
drop-down list. Available COM ports range from COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection
option is also available. The auto-detection can attempt to determine which of the PC's
serial ports is connected to the system. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 861

serial port it will be necessary to manually select the correct port. If the user has
chosen to download via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the IP address of the
S3 Series FACP or ANX instead of selecting a COM port.

7.) Select the type of node that that the PC is currently connected to. This field (called
Download Gateway) is needed in order to select the proper baud rate for serial
communications or communication protocol. For E3 compatible nodes, this field must
be set to E3/NGA. In order to use the TCP/IP (Ethernet) option, the download gateway
must be set to S3/E3. This field is not available for S3 Series Standalone, 7100
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects.

NOTE: You cannot connect your PC to an INI-7100 node and download to E3 Series
or S3 Series nodes.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

8.) Select the "Firmware" option.

9.) Click on the "..." button next to the "Firmware File Path". This will open a standard
"browse for file" window to allow the user to select the desired firmware file.

10.) Click Download.

11.) Enter the system's Level 4 password when prompted and click OK.

12.) The download will now begin, assuming the correct Level 4 password was entered.

14.3.2.15 LCD-SLP Firmware Download

The following steps must be used to download firmware to the LCD-SLP using CAMWorks:

1.) Start CAMWorks, if it is not already running.

2.) Open the CAMWorks Project that contains an SLP-E3 or SLP95-E3 node.

3.) Go to the Download screen, via the "Communication" icon under the SLP-E3 node or
the "Download" icon in the "Communictions 35 " tab in The Ribbon 27 .

4.) If the download screen was not entered by clicking "Communication" icon under the
SLP-E3 node, the desired node must be selected from the grid. Simply click anywhere
in the row that contains the desired SLP-E3 node to select it. The selected SLP-E3
node will be highlighted.

5.) If the selected Download Gateway is an S3 Series FACP or ANX, the user must
choose to download using RS-232 (Comm) or TCP/IP (Ethernet). This is done by
clicking on the appropriate option button under the Port Options header.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 862 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

6.) If the user has chosen to download via RS-232 (Comm), select the correct serial port
that is used to communicate with the system. This is done in the "Select Comm Port"
drop-down list. Available COM ports range from COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection
option is also available. The auto-detection can attempt to determine which of the PC's
serial ports is connected to the system. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct
serial port it will be necessary to manually select the correct port. If the user has
chosen to download via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the IP address of the
S3 Series FACP or ANX instead of selecting a COM port.

7.) Select the type of node that that the PC is currently connected to. This field (called
Download Gateway) is needed in order to select the proper baud rate for serial
communications or communication protocol. For E3 compatible nodes, this field must
be set to E3/NGA. In order to use the TCP/IP (Ethernet) option, the download gateway
must be set to S3/E3. This field is not available for S3 Series Standalone, 7100
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects.

NOTE: You cannot connect your PC to an INI-7100 node and download to E3 Series
or S3 Series nodes.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

8.) Select the "Enable LCD-SLP / RPT Loader" option.

9.) Select the "LCD-SLP" option button.

10.) Select the desired LCD-SLP from the drop-down list.

NOTE: You can only download to LCD-SLP's that have actually been configured
on the target S3 Series FACP.

11.) Click on the "..." button next to the "Firmware File Path". This will open a standard
"browse for file" window to allow the user to select the desired firmware file.

12.) Click Download.

13.) Enter the system's Level 4 password when prompted and click OK.

14.) The download will now begin, assuming the correct Level 4 password was entered.

14.3.2.16 RPT-E3 Firmware Download

NOTE: This operation is only supported when the RPT-E3 is connected to an S3 Series
FACP.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 863

The following steps must be used to download firmware to the RPT-E3 using CAMWorks:

1.) Start CAMWorks, if it is not already running.

2.) Open the CAMWorks Project that contains an SLP-E3 or SLP95-E3 node.

3.) Go to the Download screen, via the "Communication" icon under the SLP-E3 node or
the "Download" icon in the "Communictions 35 " tab in The Ribbon 27 .

4.) If the download screen was not entered by clicking "Communication" icon under the
SLP-E3 node, the desired node must be selected from the grid. Simply click anywhere
in the row that contains the desired SLP-E3 node to select it. The selected SLP-E3
node will be highlighted.

5.) If the selected Download Gateway is an S3 Series FACP or ANX, the user must
choose to download using RS-232 (Comm) or TCP/IP (Ethernet). This is done by
clicking on the appropriate option button under the Port Options header.

6.) If the user has chosen to download via RS-232 (Comm), select the correct serial port
that is used to communicate with the system. This is done in the "Select Comm Port"
drop-down list. Available COM ports range from COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection
option is also available. The auto-detection can attempt to determine which of the PC's
serial ports is connected to the system. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct
serial port it will be necessary to manually select the correct port. If the user has
chosen to download via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the IP address of the
S3 Series FACP or ANX instead of selecting a COM port.

7.) Select the type of node that that the PC is currently connected to. This field (called
Download Gateway) is needed in order to select the proper baud rate for serial
communications or communication protocol. For E3 compatible nodes, this field must
be set to E3/NGA. In order to use the TCP/IP (Ethernet) option, the download gateway
must be set to S3/E3. This field is not available for S3 Series Standalone, 7100
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects.

NOTE: You cannot connect your PC to an INI-7100 node and download to E3 Series
or S3 Series nodes.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

8.) Select the "Enable LCD-SLP / RPT Loader" option.

9.) Select the "RPT" option button.

10.) Click on the "..." button next to the "Firmware File Path". This will open a standard

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 864 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

"browse for file" window to allow the user to select the desired firmware file.

11.) Click Download.

12.) Enter the system's Level 4 password when prompted and click OK.

13.) The download will now begin, assuming the correct Level 4 password was entered.

14.3.3 Message Download

In order to download audio messages to an INCC, INX or INI-VGE in the system, a
connection must be made between the RS-232 port on the PC/Laptop to either the RJ11
connector of any INI-7100 node or to the serial port on an S3 Series FACP, NGA, ANX or
ILI-E3 Series node or to the Ethernet port on an S3 Series FACP or ANX that may be
present in the system before attempting to download. See this page for information on how
audio messages are assigned to a node in the CAMWorks Project.

The following options on the Download screen are applicable to audio message downloads:

Port Options -
Select whether the download should be made via TCP/IP (Ethernet) or RS-232 (Comm).
This option is available only when the selected Gateway is an ANX or S3 Series FACP.

NOTE: It is not possible to download to INI-7100 nodes via Ethernet.

Select Comm Port -

Select the serial port to be used to connect to the system. Available COM ports range from
COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection option is also available. If selected, the
auto-detection will attempt to determine which of the PC's serial ports is connected to an
appropriate node. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct serial port it will be
necessary to manually select the correct port. This selection field is unavailable if the user
has opted to connect to the system via TCP/IP (Ethernet).

Download Gateway -
You must select whether your computer is connected to an INI-7100 node, an S3 Series
FACP, an ILI-E3 Series node/NGA or to an ANX. For 7100 Standalone, S3 Series
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects, this field is not available since the PC must be
connected directly to the panel. An auto-detection option is also available. If the
auto-detection fails to determine the correct download gateway the download gateway
selection must be made manually.

NOTE: In order to download to S3 Series or E3 Series nodes such as the NGA and the
ILI-MB-E3 via RS-232, you MUST connect your computer to the serial port of an
E3-compatible node. All other node types can be downloaded from either an INI-7100 or
an E3-compatible node. All node types may be downloaded via the ANX's RS-232 port or
Ethernet port.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 865

Select Application Type To Download -

In this section of the screen, CAMWorks presents several options for selecting what data to
download to the target panel. This must be set to "Message" in order to download audio
messages to an INCC, INX or INI-VGE.

Download -
Click on this button to begin the download. The user will be prompted to enter the system
Level 4 access code before the download will begin. If all goes well, the Download process
will continue until completed. The panel will reset following a successful download.

NOTE: If the system has not been previously configured, you should enter the system
default level 4 password. If a custom level 4 password has already been downloaded to
the panel, then that code should be entered instead.

Below the option selections is a status window. This window displays several status
messages to indicate the progress of the download process, including the steps that are
being taken during the download. Each step is indicated as either "Done" (step completed
successfully) or "Failed" (an error occurred during this step). Gamewell-FCI Technical
Support 932 personnel may request the contents of the Status window in order to
troubleshoot problems with the download process.

Close -
Click on this command button to exit this screen.

14.3.4 NGA Graphics Download

Newer versions of the NGA System Operating Software require several images to be loaded
into the NGA's flash memory. These images make up much of the Graphical User Interface
of the NGA (including the various menus, buttons and windows that appear on the NGA's
screen). There are twenty-nine images that are required by the NGA. This process will
automatically download all required images. The NGA will reset once all images have been
successfully downloaded.

In order to download these graphics to an NGA, a connection must be made between the
RS-232 port on the PC/Laptop to either the RJ11 connector of any INI-7100 node or to the
serial port on an S3 Series FACP, NGA, ANX or ILI-E3 Series node or to the Ethernet port
on an S3 Series FACP or ANX that may be present in the system before attempting to
download.

The following options on the Download screen are applicable to NGA Graphics downloads:

Port Options -
Select whether the download should be made via TCP/IP (Ethernet) or RS-232 (Comm).
This option is available only when the selected Gateway is an ANX or S3 Series FACP.

NOTE: It is not possible to download to INI-7100 nodes via Ethernet.

Select Comm Port -

Select the serial port to be used to connect to the system. Available COM ports range from

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

866 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection option is also available. If selected, the

auto-detection will attempt to determine which of the PC's serial ports is connected to an
appropriate node. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct serial port it will be
necessary to manually select the correct port. This selection field is unavailable if the user
has opted to connect to the system via TCP/IP (Ethernet).

Download Gateway -
You must select whether your computer is connected to an INI-7100 node, an S3 Series
FACP, an ILI-E3 Series node/NGA or to an ANX. For 7100 Standalone, S3 Series
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects, this field is not available since the PC must be
connected directly to the panel. An auto-detection option is also available. If the
auto-detection fails to determine the correct download gateway the download gateway
selection must be made manually.

NOTE: In order to download to S3 Series or E3 Series nodes such as the NGA and the
ILI-MB-E3 via RS-232, you MUST connect your computer to the serial port of an
E3-compatible node. All other node types can be downloaded from either an INI-7100 or
an E3-compatible node. All node types may be downloaded via the ANX's RS-232 port or
Ethernet port.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

Select Application Type To Download -

In this section of the screen, CAMWorks presents several options for selecting what data to
download to the target panel. This must be set to "NGA Graphics" in order to download the
NGA's standard graphics set.

Download -
Click on this button to begin the download. The user will be prompted to enter the system
Level 4 access code before the download will begin. If all goes well, the Download process
will continue until completed. The panel will reset following a successful download.

NOTE: If the system has not been previously configured, you should enter the system
default level 4 password. If a custom level 4 password has already been downloaded to
the panel, then that code should be entered instead.

Below the option selections is a status window. This window displays several status
messages to indicate the progress of the download process, including the steps that are
being taken during the download. Each step is indicated as either "Done" (step completed
successfully) or "Failed" (an error occurred during this step). Gamewell-FCI Technical
Support 932 personnel may request the contents of the Status window in order to
troubleshoot problems with the download process.

Close -
Click on this command button to exit this screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 867

14.3.5 NGA Logo Download

Newer versions of the NGA System Operating Software have the ability to display a user-
selected Logo image that will be displayed when the system is in normal condition. This
screen allows the user to download the logo image to the NGA.

In order to download the logo image to an NGA, a connection must be made between the
RS-232 port on the PC/Laptop to either the RJ11 connector of any INI-7100 node or to the
serial port on an S3 Series FACP, NGA, ANX or ILI-E3 Series node or to the Ethernet port
on an S3 Series FACP or ANX that may be present in the system before attempting to
download.

The following options on the Download screen are applicable to NGA Logo downloads:

Port Options -
Select whether the download should be made via TCP/IP (Ethernet) or RS-232 (Comm).
This option is available only when the selected Gateway is an ANX or S3 Series FACP.

NOTE: It is not possible to download to INI-7100 nodes via Ethernet.

Select Comm Port -

Select the serial port to be used to connect to the system. Available COM ports range from
COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection option is also available. If selected, the
auto-detection will attempt to determine which of the PC's serial ports is connected to an
appropriate node. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct serial port it will be
necessary to manually select the correct port. This selection field is unavailable if the user
has opted to connect to the system via TCP/IP (Ethernet).

Download Gateway -
You must select whether your computer is connected to an INI-7100 node, an S3 Series
FACP, an ILI-E3 Series node/NGA or to an ANX. For 7100 Standalone, S3 Series
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects, this field is not available since the PC must be
connected directly to the panel. An auto-detection option is also available. If the
auto-detection fails to determine the correct download gateway the download gateway
selection must be made manually.

NOTE: In order to download to S3 Series or E3 Series nodes such as the NGA and the
ILI-MB-E3 via RS-232, you MUST connect your computer to the serial port of an
E3-compatible node. All other node types can be downloaded from either an INI-7100 or
an E3-compatible node. All node types may be downloaded via the ANX's RS-232 port or
Ethernet port.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

Select Application Type To Download -

In this section of the screen, CAMWorks presents several options for selecting what data to
download to the target panel. This must be set to "NGA Logo" in order to download the
NGA's custom logo. This option is only available if the user has configured a custom logo
image for the selected target node. When "NGA Logo" is selected, CAMWorks will also

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 868 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

provide two options that can be used with the NGA Logo feature. Specifically these are:

Display Logo - If the NGA is not currently displaying the logo image, selecting this
option will cause CAMWorks to send a command to the NGA to display the logo on
the screen. It will also provide the NGA with the current coordinates of the logo
image if the placement of the logo has changed. The logo image itself is not
downloaded when this option is selected.

Remove Logo - If the NGA is currently displaying the logo image, selecting this
option will cause CAMWorks to send a command to the NGA to remove the logo
from the screen. The logo image itself is not downloaded when this option is
selected.

Download -
Click on this button to begin the download. The user will be prompted to enter the system
Level 4 access code before the download will begin. If all goes well, the Download process
will continue until completed. The panel will reset following a successful download.

NOTE: If the system has not been previously configured, you should enter the system
default level 4 password. If a custom level 4 password has already been downloaded to
the panel, then that code should be entered instead.

Below the option selections is a status window. This window displays several status
messages to indicate the progress of the download process, including the steps that are
being taken during the download. Each step is indicated as either "Done" (step completed
successfully) or "Failed" (an error occurred during this step). Gamewell-FCI Technical
Support 932 personnel may request the contents of the Status window in order to
troubleshoot problems with the download process.

Close -
Click on this command button to exit this screen.

14.3.6 NGA Screen Saver Download

Make sure that a connection must be made between the RS-232 port on the PC/Laptop to
either the RJ11 connector of any INI-7100 node or to the serial port on an S3 Series FACP,
NGA, ANX or ILI-E3 Series node or to the Ethernet port on an S3 Series FACP or ANX that
may be present in the system before attempting to download.

The following options on the Download screen are applicable to NGA Screen Saver
downloads:

Port Options -
Select whether the download should be made via TCP/IP (Ethernet) or RS-232 (Comm).
This option is available only when the selected Gateway is an ANX or S3 Series FACP.

NOTE: It is not possible to download to INI-7100 nodes via Ethernet.

Select Comm Port -

Select the serial port to be used to connect to the system. Available COM ports range from

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 869

COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection option is also available. If selected, the

auto-detection will attempt to determine which of the PC's serial ports is connected to an
appropriate node. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct serial port it will be
necessary to manually select the correct port. This selection field is unavailable if the user
has opted to connect to the system via TCP/IP (Ethernet).

Download Gateway -
You must select whether your computer is connected to an INI-7100 node, an S3 Series
FACP, an ILI-E3 Series node/NGA or to an ANX. For 7100 Standalone, S3 Series
Standalone or E3 Series Standalone projects, this field is not available since the PC must be
connected directly to the panel. An auto-detection option is also available. If the
auto-detection fails to determine the correct download gateway the download gateway
selection must be made manually.

NOTE: In order to download to S3 Series or E3 Series nodes such as the NGA and the
ILI-MB-E3 via RS-232, you MUST connect your computer to the serial port of an
E3-compatible node. All other node types can be downloaded from either an INI-7100 or
an E3-compatible node. All node types may be downloaded via the ANX's RS-232 port or
Ethernet port.

NOTE: In multi-ring systems, all downloads to all nodes on "Ring 2" must be made
through the ANX-MR that serves as the multi-ring bridge.

Select Application Type To Download -

In this section of the screen, CAMWorks presents several options for selecting what data to
download to the target panel. This must be set to "NGA Screen Saver" in order to download
screen saver images to the NGA. This option is only available if the user has configured
screen saver images for the selected target node.

Download -
Click on this button to begin the download. The user will be prompted to enter the system
Level 4 access code before the download will begin. If all goes well, the Download process
will continue until completed. The panel will reset following a successful download.

NOTE: If the system has not been previously configured, you should enter the system
default level 4 password. If a custom level 4 password has already been downloaded to
the panel, then that code should be entered instead.

Below the option selections is a status window. This window displays several status
messages to indicate the progress of the download process, including the steps that are
being taken during the download. Each step is indicated as either "Done" (step completed
successfully) or "Failed" (an error occurred during this step). Gamewell-FCI Technical
Support 932 personnel may request the contents of the Status window in order to
troubleshoot problems with the download process.

Close -
Click on this command button to exit this screen.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 870 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

14.4 Configuration Upload

Configuration Upload is a feature of CAMWorks that allows the user to retrieve configuration
data from an existing E3 Series or 7100 Standalone system. The upload is performed
differently, depending on which type of system is being uploaded from. See the following
topics for more information.

Configuration Upload for 7100 Projects 870

Configuration Upload for E3 Series Projects 871

14.4.1 7100 Standalone Projects

Configuration upload is a feature that allows the user to retrieve the current configuration
settings from a 7100 FACP.
NOTE: This screen may only be used with 7100 Standalone projects.

NOTE: The 7100 Configuration Upload feature is accessed via the Download screen, not
via the Upload screen.

In order to perform a configuration upload from the system, a connection must be made
between the RS-232 port on the PC/Laptop to the RJ11 connector of the 7100 panel.

The following options on the Download screen are applicable to configuration uploads:

Select Comm Port -

Select the serial port to be used for uploading from the system. Available COM ports range
from COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection option is also available. If selected, the
auto-detection will attempt to determine which of the PC's serial ports is connected to the
panel. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct serial port it will be necessary to
manually select the correct port.

Select Application Type To Download -

In this section of the screen, CAMWorks presents several options for selecting what data to
download to the target panel. In the case of uploading configuration data from the target
panel, the "Configuration" option button must always be selected.

Below the option selections is a status window. This window displays several status
messages to indicate the progress of the upload process, including the steps that are being
taken during the upload. Each step is indicated as either "Done" (step completed
successfully) or "Failed" (an error occurred during this step). Gamewell-FCI Technical
Support personnel may request the contents of the Status window in order to troubleshoot
problems with the upload process.

7100 Upload -
Click on this button to begin the upload. The user will be prompted to enter the system
Level 4 access code. If all goes well, the upload process will continue until completed.
Once the upload is complete, another window appears to display information pertaining to
the uploaded configuration. See this page 871 for more information.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 871

NOTE: If the system has not been previously configured, you should enter the system
default level 4 access code. If a custom level 4 access code has already been downloaded
to the panel, then that code should be entered instead.

Close -
Click on this command button to exit this screen.
14.4.1.1 View Uploaded Configuration

Once the upload is completed, CAMWorks displays a window that shows the differences
between the configuration stored in the current project and the configuration that was just
uploaded from the 7100 panel.

This screen is primarily organized into three tabs. The first is called Features, the second is
called Input Devices and the third is called Output Devices.

The Features tab displays both the current configuration settings stored in the current
project as well as the configuration that was just uploaded from the panel. This allows the
user to compare the panel's current configuration with the configuration stored in the current
project. There are several filter options available to limit the display to certain facets of the
panel's configuration. Simply clicking on one of the filter options will cause CAMWorks to
display only the selected information. Using the "All" button will cause CAMWorks to display
all of the configuration settings that are normally displayed on the Features tab.

The Input Devices tab shows all Sensors and AMM's that were present in the configuration
that was uploaded from the panel. This is a display only. No changes may be made via this
screen.

The Output Devices tab shows all Sensors and AMM's that were present in the configuration
that was uploaded from the panel. This is a display only. No changes may be made via this
screen.

When done comparing the uploaded configuration against the current project use the
"Overwrite" button to save the uploaded configuration into the project. All existing
configuration settings in the current project will be replaced be the uploaded configuration.

14.4.2 E3 Series Projects

Configuration upload is a feature that allows the user to retrieve the current configuration
settings from an S3 Series or E3 Series system.
NOTE: This feature is only available for S3 Series Standalone, E3 Series Standalone, E3
Series Network and E3 Series Multi-ring Network projects.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

872 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

NOTE: Only S3 Series FACP, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3, ILI95-S-E3 and NGA,
ANX-SR and ANX-MR nodes support configuration upload.

NOTE: You must have the latest ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3, ILI95-S-E3 and NGA
firmware installed in order to use this feature. Please contact Gamewell-FCI Technical
Support 932 for all questions regarding compatible firmware versions.

NOTE: This process may be used whether or not a project is currently open. If a project
is not open when an upload is performed, CAMWorks will automatically create a project
when uploaded configuration data is saved.

NOTE: The 7100 Configuration Upload feature is accessed via the Download screen, not
via the Upload screen.

In order to perform a configuration upload from the system, a connection must be made
between the RS-232 port on the PC/Laptop to the serial port on an S3 Series FACP, NGA,
ANX-SR, ANX-MR or ILI-E3 Series node that may be present in the system before
attempting to upload. If an S3 Series FACP, ANX-SR or ANX-MR is available, the ANX's
Ethernet port may also be used for uploads via TCP/IP.

The following options are available on this screen:

Port Type -
Select whether the download should be made via TCP/IP (Ethernet) or RS-232 (Comm).
This option is available only when the selected Gateway is an ANX or S3 Series FACP.

Comm Port -
Select the serial port to be used to connect to the system. Available COM ports range from
COM1 to COM256. An auto-detection option is also available. If selected, the
auto-detection will attempt to determine which of the PC's serial ports is connected to an
appropriate node. If the auto-detection fails to detect the correct serial port it will be
necessary to manually select the correct port. This selection field is unavailable if the user
has opted to connect to the system via TCP/IP (Ethernet).

IP Address -
If the user has opted to connect to the system via TCP/IP (Ethernet), the user must enter the
IP address of the S3 Series FACP, ANX-SR or ANX-MR that is connected to the system.
This selection field is unavailable if the user has opted to connect via RS-232 (Comm).

Get Online Nodes -

Click this button to populate the list of nodes that are currently in the system. This works
similarly to the Network Query 829 process, so the PC must be connected to the target
system before this process can run.

Node List -
Once the node list has been populated, select a node from the list by clicking anywhere in
the row of the node that is to be uploaded from.

Select The Panel Details To Be Uploaded -

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 873

In this section of the screen, CAMWorks presents several options for selecting what data to
upload from the selected node.

All - When selected, CAMWorks will upload CAMs, User Labels (CAM Text
Messages on NGA nodes or Virtual Switch Labels on ANX nodes) and the
configuration from the selected node.
CAMs - When selected, CAMWorks will upload CAMs from the selected node.
User Labels - When selected, CAMWorks will upload SLC device labels or CAM
Text messages (NGA nodes only) from the selected node.
Virtual Switch Labels - When selected, CAMWorks will upload Virtual Switch
Labels from the selected node.
Configuration - When selected, CAMWorks will upload the configuration from the
selected node.

Below the option selections is a status window. This window displays several status
messages to indicate the progress of the upload process, including the steps that are being
taken during the upload. Each step is indicated as either "Done" (step completed
successfully) or "Failed" (an error occurred during this step). Gamewell-FCI Technical
Support 932 personnel may request the contents of the Status window in order to
troubleshoot problems with the upload process.

Upload -
Click on this button to begin the upload. The user will be prompted to enter the system
Level 4 access code before the upload will begin. If all goes well, the upload process will
continue until completed.

NOTE: If the system has not been previously configured, you should enter the system
default level 4 access code. If a custom level 4 access code has already been
downloaded to the panel, then that code should be entered instead.

Abort -
Clicking the Abort button while the upload is in progress will cancel the current upload
process.

Compare and Save -

Allows the user to compare the uploaded configuration against the configuration of the
selected node as stored in the current project. See this page 873 for more information.

Close -
Click on this command button to exit this screen.
14.4.2.1 View Uploaded Configuration

Once the user clicks on the "Compare and Save" button, CAMWorks displays a window that
shows the differences between the configuration stored in the current project and the
configuration that was just uploaded from the selected node.

This screen is divided into two main areas. At the top of the screen is a list of the various
types of configuration settings that have been uploaded. The contents of the list vary
depending on the node type that was just uploaded.

Below this list is the comparison results. This shows the configuration information that was

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 874 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

just uploaded from the panel and the configuration data for this node as it is stored in the
currently open project. If there is no project currently open, or if there is no node at this
address in the current project, this grid will only show the data that was uploaded from the
panel. Uploaded settings that are configured differently from the current project are
highlighted in red. The user may display or print a comparison report by clicking on the
"Print" button.

There are several filter options available to limit the display to certain facets of the panel's
configuration. Simply clicking on one of the filter options will cause CAMWorks to display
only the selected information. Using the "All" button will cause CAMWorks to display all of
the configuration settings that are normally displayed on the Features tab.

The user must choose what parts of the uploaded configuration should be saved. This is
done by placing check marks in the various check boxes shown in the list. Below the list is a
"Select All" check box. When checked, the "Select All" check box will check all of the entries
currently displayed in the grid.

NOTE: The "Select All" checkbox does not select all configuration settings for the current
node. It only selects all configuration settings that are currently displayed based on the
filter setting.

When comparing CAM Expressions, the uploaded CAMs may look differently than those
currently in the project file (even if there are no logical differences between them). Click on
the "Logical Comparison for CAMs" buttons to ensure that uploaded CAMs are logically
equivalent to those saved in the project file.

When done comparing the uploaded configuration against the current project use the "Save
Selected" button to save the uploaded configuration into the project. Selected configuration
settings in the current project will be replaced be the uploaded configuration. This process
may be repeated in order to save all of the configuration settings

14.5 Find/Replace CAM

The Find/Replace CAM screen is a feature of CAMWorks that allows the user to search
through all CAM Expressions and CAM Comments in the current project, and optionally
modify the search results directly from one screen.

This screen is divided into three sections. In the top section, CAMWorks prompts for what
to search for and where to search. In the middle of the screen, the results from the search
are displayed. Finally, at the bottom is an area where the user can manually change CAM
Expressions and/or CAM Comments directly from this screen.

The steps for performing a search are:

1.) Select which node (or All) from the Node No./ Node Type/ System Label drop-down to
select where CAMWorks should search.
2.) Select whether CAMWorks should search CAM Expressions, CAM Comments or Bit
Numbers using one of the option buttons.
3.) Press ENTER or click Search to begin searching.
4.) The search results will appear in the middle section of the screen once CAMWorks has
completed searching the project.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Utilities 875

If desired, the search term entered in Step #2 may be substituted by another term in all
search results. In order to do this, the desired text may be entered in the "Replace With"
field. Click on the "Replace All" button once the desired replacement text is entered.

CAM Expressions and/or CAM Comments may be manually modified through this screen as
well. The user must click on one of the search results to select it in the list in order to do
this. Once the desired CAM has been selected, the user can modify either the CAM
Expression or CAM Comment via the text fields at the bottom of the screen. The changes
must be saved once the user has completed the edits.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

Part

XV
 CAM Programming Examples 877

15 CAM Programming Examples

15.1 Microphone Paging
15.1.1 All Call Paging
All call paging is the simplest form of paging requiring the least programming, however there
are many alternate forms of paging that can be programmed, such as selective paging,
automatic evacuation zone paging and phone page from a remote firefighter phone. With
the use of a monitor module and a stereo phono jack with a circuit “cutout switch” it is
possible to program an automatic jack-in-page that detects the plug being inserted into the
jack and automatically initiates a preprogrammed paging area or all call page.

First the basic all call page:

Select a switch on an ASM-16 that will enable the all call function.

Program the Green LED next to it to turn on when the switch has been pressed to enable
the paging function: The CAM would be simply.

N1G87

N1 = node # 1 which is the INCC.

G87 is the bit location for switch #9 on the first ASM-16.

Programmed this way, the Green LED will light and stay on until the paging circuit is
disabled by pressing the same switch a second time.

A somewhat better way to program the LED is to have it on to show that the circuit is
enabled but when the switch on the microphone is pressed the Green LED turns off and
then a red LED lights to show that the paging function is active.

The CAMs for this are:

N1G87 & ~ N1G1 in the cam for the Green LED next to switch # 9.

N1G87 & N1G1 in the RED LED next to switch # 9.

N1G1 is the state of the switch on the microphone in the INCC node.

The statement for the Green LED becomes true when the switch # 9 is pressed and the
microphone switch has not been pressed i.e. the paging system is armed but not activated.

The statement for the RED LED becomes true when both the ASM-16 switch #9 and the
microphone switch are pressed. The microphone is now live and on the air.

The second half of the programming for this function takes place on the INX.

In the CAM area open the speaker circuit page and click next until you get to Amplifier # 1
Paging. Enter the following CAM.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 878 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

N1G87

With this CAM the paging will be enabled any time the ASM-16 switch has been pressed.
This also means that any recorded audio that may be playing will be interrupted immediately
and permanently until the switch has been pressed for a second time. The following CAM is
a better approach:

N1G87 & N1G1

This form won’t stop the automatic signaling until the microphone switch is actually pressed
and can’t be inadvertently left on preventing future signaling.

The last portion of the programming for this function is the activation of the amplifier output.
The same CAM can be used in the Amplifier Control page for the amplifier and output circuit
desired. Again it is recommended to use the following form for the CAM. (N1G87 & N1G1)
this way the amplifier won’t be left activated unintentionally.

To complete the system wide All CALL paging function will require that the same CAMs
used above be programmed into all amplifier output control locations and all amplifier # x
Paging locations for all INX’s in the system.

NOTE: In the case of the CAM for the Amplifier Output Control there will likely be other
conditions like a fire alarm that will also need to activate the amp, requiring their own
CAM statement. In this situation the CAM statement for paging activation would be “OR’
ed” together with the statement for fire alarm activation.

15.1.2 Selective Paging

This is simply more of the same type of CAMs used for All Call (see this page 877 ) except
each paging switch (ASM-16 switch) will activate a single speaker circuit or amplifier that is
serving a given area or floor within a building.

The programming of the individual switches for each paging area are the same as for the
ALL Call paging with only the group number for the given switch being different. For
example floor #1 page would be on switch # 10 that has the group number of 88 instead.
Therefore its CAM would be N1G88 & N1G1 etc.

On the INX the CAMs for the Amplifier #x Paging would “OR” the selective paging switch
with the all call paging switch for each amplifier that needed to respond to a given selected
area. Not all amplifiers need to be paging enabled for any given switch. For example:

Amplifier # 1 in Node 3 for paging enable would have the CAM set up to enable paging for
the All Call and floor 1 switches and would look this ( N1G87 | N1G88 ) & N1G1

For amplifier # 2 and floor 2 it would be ( N1G87 | N1G89 ) & N1G1

For amplifier # 3 and floor 3 it would be ( N1G87 | N1G90 ) & N1G1 and so on for additional
INX nodes.

Similarly for Amplifier Output Control each amplifier would have the same CAMs “OR’ed”
with the fire alarm CAM again for amplifier one, two and three.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAM Programming Examples 879

15.2 Typical System Function Examples

15.2.1 Introduction
JOB CONFIGURATION:

The building consists of five floors. There is one elevator, and two stairwells, one on the
north and one on the south side of the building. The main lobby is to have a fire command
center. The building is to be equipped with two firefighter phones per floor. Each floor will
have one ILI-MB-E3 and one INX with two amplifiers each.

NODE # 1 is the INCC command center on floor 1

NODE # 2 is an ILI-MB-E3 located at the command center on floor 1
NODE # 3 is an INX with two AM-50 amplifiers and two AOM-TEL modules (floor 1)
NODE # 4 is an ILI-MB-E3 located on floor 2
NODE # 5 is an INX with two AM-50 amplifiers and two AOM-TEL modules (floor 2)
NODE # 6 is an ILI-MB-E3 located on floor 3
NODE # 7 is an INX with two AM-50 amplifiers and two AOM-TEL modules (floor 3)
NODE # 8 is an ILI-MB-E3 located on floor 4
NODE # 9 is an INX with two AM-50 amplifiers and two AOM-TEL modules (floor 4)
NODE # 10 is an ILI-MB-E3 located on floor 5
NODE # 11 is an INX with two AM-50 amplifiers and two AOM-TEL modules (floor 5)

15.2.2 Linking An Alarm Condition To An Audio Message

15.2.2.1 Sample 1

Sample #1 One fire alarm group and one output message for the whole building.

Step 1: Program NODE 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10 such that all fire alarm input devices
(manual pull stations, ION, Photo, and Duct smoke detectors, and Thermal
detectors) as GROUP 1.
Repeat for each ILI-MB-E3 node and then download each node.

Step 2: Program NODE 3, 5, 7, 9, and 11 as follows.

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Recorded Messages dialog box:

Recorded Message #1 to AUDIO AMP 1

N2G1 | N4G1 | N6G1 | N8G1 |

N10G1

The message will play once and stop.

Recorded Message #1 to AUDIO AMP 1

(N2G1 | N4G1 | N6G1 | N8G1 |
N10G1) & ~ NxG39

Alternate 1: Message will continuously repeat.

NOTE: replace the “x” with the node # being programmed. (N3G39 – node 3, N5G39

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

880 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

for node 5, etc.)

Recorded Message #1 to AUDIO AMP 1

((N2G1 | N4G1 | N6G1 | N8G1 |
N10G1) & ~ NxG39) & ~
(N2G400 | N4G400 | N6G400 |
N8G400 | N10G400)
Alternate 2: Message will continuously repeat and can be silenced and un-silenced
by any ILI-MB-E3.
NOTE: replace the “x” with the node # being programmed. (N3G39 – node 3, N5G39
for node 5, etc. and for amp 2 the equivalent would be N3G71)

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Amplifier Control dialog box:

AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –A- output relay

N2G1 | N4G1 | N6G1 | N8G1 |

N10G1

AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –B- output relay

N2G1 | N4G1 | N6G1 | N8G1 |

N10G1

Repeat for each INX node and then download each node.
NOTE: Each INX node will require that a recorded message be downloaded into
message #1

AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –A- output relay

Alternate: Message will Continuously repeat and can be silenced and
un-silenced.

N2G1 | N4G1 | N6G1 | N8G1 |

N10G1) & ~ (N2G400 | N4G400
| N6G400 | N8G400 | N10G400)

AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –B- output relay

Alternate: Message will continuously repeat and can be silenced and
un-silenced.

N2G1 | N4G1 | N6G1 | N8G1 |

N10G1) & ~ (N2G400 | N4G400
| N6G400 | N8G400 | N10G400)

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAM Programming Examples 881

15.2.2.2 Sample 2

Sample # 2 One fire alarm group per floor with an evacuation message for the fire floor and
the floor above and an alert message for the remainder of the building using one AM-50
amplifier per floor. (MEA N. Y. std.)

Step 1: Program NODE 2 (floor # 1) such that all fire alarm input devices (manual
pull stations, ION, Photo, and Duct smoke detectors, and Thermal detectors) as
GROUP 1.

Program NODE 4 (floor # 2) such that all fire alarm input devices (manual pull
stations, ION, Photo, and Duct smoke detectors, and Thermal detectors) as GROUP
2.

Program NODE 6 (floor # 3) such that all fire alarm input devices (manual pull
stations, ION, Photo, and Duct smoke detectors, and Thermal detectors) as GROUP
3.

Program NODE 8 (floor # 4) such that all fire alarm input devices (manual pull
stations, ION, Photo, and Duct smoke detectors, and Thermal detectors) as GROUP
4.

Program NODE 10 (floor # 5) such that all fire alarm input devices (manual pull
stations, ION, Photo, and Duct smoke detectors, and Thermal detectors) as GROUP
5.
Download each node.

Step 2: Program NODE 3, 5, 7, 9, and 11 as follows.

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Recorded Messages dialog box:

CAM for Node 3
Recorded Message #1 to AUDIO AMP 1

N2G1 & ~ N3G39

Recorded Message #2 to AUDIO AMP 1

(N2G1 | N4G2 | N6G3 | N8G4 |

N10G5) & ~ N3G39

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Recorded Messages dialog box:

CAM for Node 5
Recorded Message #1 to AUDIO AMP 1

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

882 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

(N2G1 | N4G2) & ~ N5G39

Recorded Message #2 to AUDIO AMP 1

(N2G1 | N4G2 | N6G3 | N8G4 |

N10G5) & ~ N5G39

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Recorded Messages dialog box:

CAM for Node 7
Recorded Message #1 to AUDIO AMP 1

(N4G2 | N6G3) & ~ N7G39

Recorded Message #2 to AUDIO AMP 1

(N2G1 | N4G2 | N6G3 | N8G4 |

N10G5) & ~ N5G39

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Recorded Messages dialog box:

CAM for Node 9
Recorded Message #1 to AUDIO AMP 1

(N6G3 | N8G4) & ~ N9G39

Recorded Message #2 to AUDIO AMP 1

(N2G1 | N4G2 | N6G3 | N8G4 |

N10G5) & ~ N5G39

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Recorded Messages dialog box:

CAM for Node 11
Recorded Message #1 to AUDIO AMP 1

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAM Programming Examples 883

(N8G4 | N10G5) & ~ N11G39

Recorded Message #2 to AUDIO AMP 1

(N2G1 | N4G2 | N6G3 | N8G4 |

N10G5) & ~ N5G39

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Amplifier Control dialog box for all INX
nodes:
AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –A- output relay

N2G1 | N4G2 | N6G3 | N8G4 |

N10G5

AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –B- output relay

N2G1 | N4G2 | N6G3 | N8G4 |

N10G5

Repeat for each INX node and then download each node.
NOTE: Each INX node will require that the “FIRE FLOOR” message be downloaded
into message #1 and the “CHASE TONE” message be down loaded into message #
2.
15.2.3 Providing By Floor Alarm Audio Signaling Disable While Allowing Alarm
Override To Remaining System
15.2.3.1 Sample 1

This function will provide the ability to inhibit any CAM logic controlled output device from
responding to a fire alarm condition generated on any floor or for the entire building. In this
example the control input to disable a floor etc. is the ASM-16 switch module. This could just
as easily be implemented by using a key switch and AMM combination.

When a given floor has been disabled any fire alarm input initiated by a device on that floor
will not activate the audio evacuation message on any floor. Other floors within the building
however are not affected and a fire alarm condition will operate normally including on the
floor that has been disabled. If the entire building has been disabled by selecting switch 6
then there will be no response throughout the entire building.

Automatic functions that are not under CAM logic control will continue to operate normally at
all times. Therefore ILI-MB-E3 NAC circuits, Municipal circuits, alarm relay contacts,
and Dialers (DACT) if equipped will continue to function even though a floor or the

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

884 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

entire building disable has been selected. The ILI-MB-E3 will continue to annunciate a
fire alarm condition that originates on the disabled floor or from anywhere else within the
system.

Sample #1 For a 5 story building designed so each floor has a unique set of input device
group numbers and a dedicated AOM-MUX or AOM-2S for each floor as indicated. The
system consists of the following:
1 INCC node # 1
1 ILI-MB-E3 node #2
1 INX node #3
The input devices are assigned as follows :
Basement #B1 has a variety of input devices assigned to group numbers ranging from 1 to
9
Floor #1 has a variety of input devices assigned to group numbers ranging from 10 to 19
Floor #2 has a variety of input devices assigned to group numbers ranging from 20 to 29
Floor #3 has a variety of input devices assigned to group numbers ranging from 30 to 39
Floor #4 has a variety of input devices assigned to group numbers ranging from 40 to 49
Floor #5 has a variety of input devices assigned to group numbers ranging from 50 to 59

Each floor has an AOM-MUX (or AOM-2S) assigned to a unique group number as follows:
INX - AOM-MUX #1 address 17 Group 240 for Floor 1
(ILI-MB-E3 AOM-2S #1 group 125)
INX - AOM-MUX #2 address 18 Group 241 for Floor 2
(ILI-MB-E3 AOM-2S #2 group 126)
INX - AOM-MUX #3 address 19 Group 242 for Floor 3
(ILI-MB-E3 AOM-2S #3 group 127)
INX - AOM-MUX #4 address 20 Group 243 for Floor 4
(ILI-MB-E3 AOM-2S #4 group 128)
INX - AOM-MUX #5 address 21 Group 244 for Floor 5
ILI-MB-E3 AOM-2S #5 group 129)

The disable floor fire alarm switches are to be ASM-16 #1 switches 1 to 5 and switch # 6 is
to be an entire building disable switch.

Application programming:
Step 1: To begin, in the INX SCRATCHPAD CAM area of CAMWorks, assign all input
device group numbers by floor to a scratchpad that will then represent a fire alarm indication
bit by floor:

Scratchpad Location 1 (BASEMENT)

( N2G1 | N2G2 | N2G3 | N2G4 |

N2G5 | N2G6 | N2G7 | N2G8 |
N2G9 ) & ~ N1G80

(group 416)

Scratchpad Location 2 (First FLOOR)

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAM Programming Examples 885

( N2G10 | N2G11 | N2G12 |

N2G13 | N2G14 | N2G15 |
N2G16 | N2G17 | N2G18 |
N2G19 ) & ~ N1G80

(group 417)

Scratchpad Location 3 (Second FLOOR)

( N2G20 | N2G21 | N2G22 |

N2G23 | N2G24 | N2G25 |
N2G26 | N2G27 | N2G28 |
N2G29 ) & ~ N1G81

(group 418)

Scratchpad Location 3 (Third FLOOR)

( N2G30 | N2G31 | N2G32 |

N2G33 | N2G34 | N2G35 |
N2G36 | N2G37 | N2G38 |
N2G39 ) & ~ N1G82

(group 419)

Scratchpad Location 4 (Fourth FLOOR)

( N2G40 | N2G41 | N2G42 |

N2G43 | N2G44 | N2G45 |
N2G46 | N2G47 | N2G48 |
N2G49 ) & ~ N1G83

(group 420)

Scratchpad Location 5 (Fifth FLOOR)

( N2G50 | N2G51 | N2G52 |

N2G53 | N2G54 | N2G55 |
N2G56 | N2G57 | N2G58 |
N2G59 ) & ~ N1G84

(group 421)

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

886 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Scratchpad Location 6 (Building COMMON FIRE ALARM)

( N3G416 | N3G417 | N3G418 |

N3G419 | N3G420 | N3G421 ) &
~ N1G85

(group 422)

Step 2: Assign message #1 to Audio Amp #1 for common fire alarm with silence.

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Recorded Messages dialog box:

Recorded Message #1 to AUDIO AMP 1
Message will continuously repeat until silenced.

( N3G422 & ~ N3G39 ) & ~

N2G400

NOTE: using the alarm silence bit (N2G400) here the message will complete
and then silence.

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Amplifier Control dialog box:

AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –A- output relay

( N3G422 & ~ N2G400 ) & ~

N1G85

NOTE: Using the alarm silence bit (N2G400) here the message will silence
immediately.
Alarm silence is needed only in one location to operate.
NOTE: Using the expression “ & ~ N1G85” here provides audio alarm disable
for all floors.

Step 3A: Activation or disabling of the floor’s AOM-MUX (for AOM-2S see Step 3B)

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – AOM MUX Module dialog box:
Input Select: AOM-MUX Module #1
False selects channel “A”
True selects channel “B”

N3G422

NOTE: This will select input channel “B” for a common fire alarm condition.
Leave this blank if the audio message is wired to input channel “A”

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAM Programming Examples 887

Module Control: AOM-MUX Module #1 (Basement and Floor 1)

N3G416 | N3G417 | N3G418 |

N3G419 | N3G420 | N3G421

Input Select: AOM-MUX Module #2

False selects channel “A”
True selects channel “B”

N3G422

NOTE: This will select input channel “B” for a common fire alarm condition.
Leave this blank if the audio message is wired to input channel “A”

Module Control: AOM-MUX Module #2 (Floor 2)

N3G416 | N3G417 | N3G418 |

N3G419 | N3G420 | N3G421

Input Select: AOM-MUX Module #3

False selects channel “A”
True selects channel “B”

N3G422

NOTE: This will select input channel “B” for a common fire alarm condition.
Leave this blank if the audio message is wired to input channel “A”

Module Control: AOM-MUX Module #3 (Floor 3)

N3G416 | N3G417 | N3G418 |

N3G419 | N3G420 | N3G421

Input Select: AOM-MUX Module #4

False selects channel “A”
True selects channel “B”

N3G422

NOTE: This will select input channel “B” for a common fire alarm condition.
Leave this blank if the audio message is wired to input channel “A”

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

888 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Module Control: AOM-MUX Module #4 (Floor 4)

N3G416 | N3G417 | N3G418 |

N3G419 | N3G420 | N3G421

Input Select: AOM-MUX Module #5

False selects channel “A”
True selects channel “B”

N3G422

NOTE: This will select input channel “B” for a common fire alarm condition.
Leave this blank if the audio message is wired to input channel “A”

Module Control: AOM-MUX Module #5 (Floor 5)

N3G416 | N3G417 | N3G418 |

N3G419 | N3G420 | N3G421

Step 3B: Activation or disabling of the floor’s AOM-2S (for AOM-MUX see Step 3A)
In the ILI-MB-E3 CAMS FOR OUTPUT GROUPS dialog box:

In the Program Output Groups / CAMs for Output Groups

GROUP 125 (Basement and Floor 1)
Fire alarm will not activate on floor 1 when disabled by ASM-16 # 1 switch 1 when
there is afire alarm input by a device located on floor 1. When afire alarm is detected
anywhere else in the building the audio will activate on floor 1.

( N3G416 | N3G417 | N3G418 |

N3G419 | N3G420 | N3G421 ) &
N3G32

GROUP 126 (Floor 2)

Fire alarm will not activate on floor 2 when disabled by ASM-16 # 1 switch 2 when
there is afire alarm input by a device located on floor 2. When afire alarm is detected
anywhere else in the building the audio will activate on floor 2.

( N3G416 | N3G417 | N3G418 |

N3G419 | N3G420 | N3G421 ) &
N3G32

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAM Programming Examples 889

GROUP 127 (Floor 3)

Fire alarm will not activate on floor 3 when disabled by ASM-16 # 1 switch 3 when
there is aafire alarm input by a device located on floor 3. When an alarm is detected
anywhere else in the building the audio will activate on floor 3.

( N3G416 | N3G417 | N3G418 |

N3G419 | N3G420 | N3G421 ) &
N3G32

GROUP 128 (Floor 4)

Fire alarm will not activate on floor 4 when disabled by ASM-16 # 1 switch 4 when
there is afire alarm input by a device located on floor 4. When an alarm is detected
anywhere else in the building the audio will activate on floor 4.

( N3G416 | N3G417 | N3G418 |

N3G419 | N3G420 | N3G421 ) &
N3G32

GROUP 129 (Floor 5)

Fire alarm will not activate on floor 5 when disabled by ASM-16 # 1 switch 5 when
there is afire alarm input by a device located on floor 5. When afire alarm is detected
anywhere else in the building the audio will activate on floor 5.

( N3G416 | N3G417 | N3G418 |

N3G419 | N3G420 | N3G421 ) &
N3G32

Step 4: Visual indication of bypass status programming of the ASM-16 LED’s

Program the following locations so that a non-disabled condition will light the GREEN
LED for an active or non-disabled condition and YELLOW to indicate floor bypassed
/ disabled

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – ASM-16/ANU-48 – LED ON/OFF

ASM: 1 LED: 2 – Color YELLOW – By Switch 1

N1G80

ASM: 1 LED: 3 – Color GREEN – By Switch 1

~ N1G80

ASM: 1 LED: 5 – Color YELLOW – By Switch 2

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

890 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

N1G81

ASM: 1 LED: 6 – Color GREEN – By Switch 2

~ N1G81

ASM: 1 LED: 8 – Color YELLOW – By Switch 3

N1G82

ASM: 1 LED: 9 – Color GREEN – By Switch 3

~ N1G82

ASM: 1 LED: 11 – Color YELLOW – By Switch 4

N1G83

ASM: 1 LED: 12 – Color GREEN – By Switch 4

~ N1G83

ASM: 1 LED: 14 – Color YELLOW – By Switch 5

N1G84

ASM: 1 LED: 15 – Color GREEN – By Switch 5

~ N1G84

ASM: 1 LED: 17 – Color YELLOW – By Switch 6

N1G85

ASM: 1 LED: 18 – Color GREEN – By Switch 6

~ N1G85

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAM Programming Examples 891

NOTE: There are many other options for annunciation such as blinking yellow
for bypassed and solid yellow for a module trouble. A one-hour timed bypass
limit with trouble buzzer. Timer disable of the bypass function etc.

15.2.4 Programming A Fire Fighter Phone System

15.2.4.1 Sample 1

Sample # 1 Establishing five phone circuits using five switches on an ASM-16 in the INCC
Command Center. To setup this system on the above project, each of the INX nodes and
the INCC node will have to be programmed and downloaded.
The phone system will operate as follows:
When a firefighter handset is jacked into a remote phone jack, a yellow LED next to the
appropriate circuit’s switch will blink and the INCC’s sounder will beep to indicate an
incoming call. Then when an operator presses the indicated switch to answer the call the
yellow LED will light steady and the sounder will silence. At the remote INX node that
initiated the call-in the AOM-TEL will connect the audio channel and enable the phone.
Two-way communications is now enabled. Additional phones on other nodes can also be
activated simultaneously to provide a party line audio connection.

Step 1: Program the INCC (node 1) so that ASM-16 number one’s switches 9, 10,
11, 12, and 13 operate as phone circuit controls for circuits one to five.

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – ASM-16/ANU-48 – LED ON/OFF – LED

blink
ASM: 1 LED: 27 – Color GREEN – By Switch 9

(N3G160 | N3G161) & ~ N1G88

ASM: 1 LED: 30 – Color GREEN – By Switch 10

( N5G160 | N5G161 ) & ~

N1G89

ASM: 1 LED: 33 – Color GREEN – By Switch 11

( N7G160 | N7G161 ) & ~

N1G90

ASM: 1 LED: 36 – Color GREEN – By Switch 12

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

892 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

( N9G160 | N9G161) & ~ N1G91

ASM: 1 LED: 39 – Color GREEN – By Switch 13

( N11G160 | N11G161 ) & ~

N1G92

The above CAMs cause the GREEN LED to blink when a phone is plugged into
a jack, and to stop blinking when the associated switch is pressed.

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – ASM-16/ANU-48 – LED ON/OFF – LED

ON/OFF
ASM: 1 LED: 25 – Color RED – By Switch 9

( N3G160 | N3G161 ) & N1G88

ASM: 1 LED: 28 – Color RED – By Switch 10

( N5G160 | N5G161 ) & N1G89

ASM: 1 LED: 31 – Color RED – By Switch 11

( N7G160 | N7G161 ) & N1G90

ASM: 1 LED: 34 – Color RED – By Switch 12

( N9G160 | N9G161 ) & N1G91

ASM: 1 LED: 37 – Color RED – By Switch 13

( N11G160 | N11G161 ) &

N1G92

These CAMs cause the RED LED to light when there is a phone plugged in and
the associated switch has been pressed.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAM Programming Examples 893

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Phone Ring, Buzzer, Phone Enable
PHONE RING

((N3G160 | N3G161) & ~

N1G88) | ((N5G160 | N5G161) &
~ N1G89) | ((N7G160 | N7G161)
& ~ N1G90) | ((N9G160 |
N9G161) & ~ N1G91) |
((N11G160 | N11G161) & ~
N1G92)

The above causes the phone ring buzzer to sound until the associated switch
is pressed. A new circuit request or call in will again cause the sounder to
beep again till the new circuit’s switch has been pressed.

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Phone Ring, Buzzer, Phone Enable
PHONE ENABLE

((N3G176 | N3G177) & N1G88) |

((N5G176 | N5G177) & N1G89) |
((N7G176 | N7G177) & N1G90) |
((N9G176 | N9G177) & N1G91) |
((N11G176 | N11G177) &
N1G92)

The above enables the phone circuit for the INCC node when any or all circuits
are active.

Step 2: Program the INX nodes 3, 5, 7, 9, and 11 and their AOM-TEL modules.

Program each INX node as shown below:

IN the Program AOM LABELS: AOM TELEPHONE MODULES dialog box for all
INX nodes:
Loop Addr Type Label Group Active
1 1 AOM Telephone Module OPTIONAL 176 YES
1 2 AOM Telephone Module OPTIONAL 177 YES
1 3 AOM Telephone Module OPTIONAL 178 NO
1 4 AOM Telephone Module OPTIONAL 179 NO
1 5 AOM Telephone Module OPTIONAL 180 NO

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

894 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

1 6 AOM Telephone Module OPTIONAL 181 NO

1 7 AOM Telephone Module OPTIONAL 182 NO
1 8 AOM Telephone Module OPTIONAL 183 NO
1 9 AOM Telephone Module OPTIONAL 184 NO
1 10 AOM Telephone Module OPTIONAL 185 NO
1 11 AOM Telephone Module OPTIONAL 186 NO
1 12 AOM Telephone Module OPTIONAL 187 NO
1 13 AOM Telephone Module OPTIONAL 188 NO
1 14 AOM Telephone Module OPTIONAL 189 NO
1 15 AOM Telephone Module OPTIONAL 190 NO
1 16 AOM Telephone Module OPTIONAL 191 NO

Set the two AOM-TEL modules to active as shown. Add a label in place of optional if
desired. (Recommended)

For INX Node #3

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – AOM TELEPHONE MODULES
AOM TEL MODULE CONTROL #1

N3G160 & N1G88

AOM TEL MODULE CONTROL #2

N3G161 & N1G88

For INX Node #5

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – AOM TELEPHONE MODULES
AOM TEL MODULE CONTROL #1

N5G160 & N1G89

AOM TEL MODULE CONTROL #2

N5G161 & N1G89

For INX Node #7

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – AOM TELEPHONE MODULES
AOM TEL MODULE CONTROL #1

N7G160 & N1G90

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAM Programming Examples 895

AOM TEL MODULE CONTROL # 2

N7G161 & N1G90

For INX Node #9

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – AOM TELEPHONE MODULES
AOM TEL MODULE CONTROL #1

N9G160 & N1G91

AOM TEL MODULE CONTROL #2

N9G161 & N1G91

For INX Node #11

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – AOM TELEPHONE MODULES
AOM TEL MODULE CONTROL #1

N11G160 & N1G92

AOM TEL MODULE CONTROL #2

N11G161 & N1G92

Following all downloads the firefighter phones will now operate.

15.2.5 Setup All-Call And Selective Paging

15.2.5.1 Sample 1

Sample #1 All call with selective paging using ASM-16 to control all paging functions.

Step 1: Program the INCC (node 1) so that ASM-16 number one’s switches 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, and 6 so that switch #1 will give all call and switches 2 through 6 will page floors
1 through 5 respectively. When the ASM-16 switch is pressed a GREEN LED will
turn on next to the switch to indicate the paging function selected. Then when the
microphone switch is pressed the green light turns off and the RED LED turns on to
indicate the amplifiers and microphone are live.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

896 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – ASM-16/ANU-48 – LED ON/OFF

ASM: 1 LED: 1 – Color RED – By Switch 1

N1G80 & N1G1

ASM: 1 LED: 3 – Color GREEN – By Switch 1

N1G80 & ~ N1G1

ASM: 1 LED: 4 – Color RED – By Switch 2

N1G81 & N1G1

ASM: 1 LED: 6 – Color GREEN – By Switch 2

N1G81 & ~ N1G1

ASM: 1 LED: 7 – Color RED – By Switch 3

N1G82 & N1G1

ASM: 1 LED: 9 – Color GREEN – By Switch 3

N1G82 & ~ N1G1

ASM: 1 LED: 10 – Color RED – By Switch 4

N1G83 & N1G1

ASM: 1 LED: 12 – Color GREEN – By Switch 4

N1G83 & ~ N1G1

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAM Programming Examples 897

ASM: 1 LED: 13 – Color RED – By Switch 5

N1G84 & N1G1

ASM: 1 LED: 15 – Color GREEN – By Switch 5

N1G84 & ~ N1G1

ASM: 1 LED: 16 – Color RED – By Switch 6

N1G85 & N1G1

ASM: 1 LED: 18 – Color GREEN – By Switch 6

N1G85 & ~ N1G1

These CAMs cause the GREEN LED to light when a paging circuit has been
selected but has not been activated by pressing the microphone switch. When
the microphone switch has been pressed, the green LED turns off and the RED
LED turns on indicating the circuit is live.

Step 2: Program the INX nodes 3, 5, 7, 9, and 11 and their amplifiers.

For INX Node #3 (Floor 1)

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Amplifier Control dialog box: Add the
following statement to any existing cam separated with an “OR” statement:
AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –A- output relay

((N1G80 | N1G81) & N1G1)

AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –B- output relay

((N1G80 | N1G81) & N1G1)

For INX Node #5 (Floor 2)

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

898 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Amplifier Control dialog box: Add the
following statement to any existing cam separated with an “OR” statement:
AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –A- output relay

((N1G80 | N1G82) & N1G1)

AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –B- output relay

((N1G80 | N1G82) & N1G1)

For INX Node #7 (Floor 3)

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Amplifier Control dialog box: Add the
following statement to any existing cam separated with an “OR” statement:

AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –A- output relay

((N1G80 | N1G83) & N1G1)

AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –B- output relay

((N1G80 | N1G83) & N1G1)

For INX Node #9 (Floor 4)

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Amplifier Control dialog box: Add the
following statement to any existing cam separated with an “OR” statement:
AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –A- output relay

((N1G80 | N1G84) & N1G1)

AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –B- output relay

((N1G80 | N1G84) & N1G1)

For INX Node #11 (Floor 5)

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Amplifier Control dialog box: Add the
following statement to any existing cam separated with an “OR” statement:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAM Programming Examples 899

AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –A- output relay

((N1G80 | N1G85) & N1G1)

AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –B- output relay

((N1G80 | N1G85) & N1G1)

Step 3: Program the INX nodes 3, 5, 7, 9, and 11 to enable paging.

For INX Node #3 (Floor 1)

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Speaker Circuits
AUDIO AMP 1 Paging:

((N1G80 | N1G81) & N1G1)

For INX Node #5 (Floor 2)

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Speaker Circuits
AUDIO AMP 1 Paging:

((N1G80 | N1G82) & N1G1)

For INX Node #7 (Floor 3)

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Speaker Circuits
AUDIO AMP 1 Paging:

((N1G80 | N1G83) & N1G1)

For INX Node #9 (Floor 4)

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Speaker Circuits
AUDIO AMP 1 Paging:

((N1G80 | N1G84) & N1G1)

For INX Node #11 (Floor 5)

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 900 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Speaker Circuits

AUDIO AMP 1 Paging:

((N1G80 | N1G85) & N1G1)

NOTE: The above examples require either the “ALL CALL” or the floor specific
paging switch to be pressed along with the microphone switch also being
pressed to activate the paging function on any given amplifier.

15.2.5.2 Sample 2

Sample #2 All call to be controlled by the microphone switch only, when afire alarm
condition exists. When there is no fire alarm condition, the all call and selective paging
functions require use of the ASM-16 to activate the paging functions. Selective paging is not
available during afire alarm.

Step 1: Program the INCC (node 1) so that ASM-16 number one’s switches 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, and 6 so that switch #1 will give all call and switches 2 through 6 will page floors
1 through 5 respectively.

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – ASM-16/ANU-48 – LED ON/OFF

ASM: 1 LED: 1 – Color RED – By Switch 1

(N1G80 & N1G1) | ( N1G1 &

N1G416)

NOTE: N1G416 is the location of a scratch pad #1 in node #1 that will be true
whenever there is afire alarm anywhere in the building (common fire alarm).
(See step #$ below)

ASM: 1 LED: 3 – Color GREEN – By Switch 1

N1G80 & ~ N1G1

ASM: 1 LED: 4 – Color RED – By Switch 2

N1G81 & N1G1

ASM: 1 LED: 6 – Color GREEN – By Switch 2

N1G81 & ~ N1G1

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAM Programming Examples 901

ASM: 1 LED: 7 – Color RED – By Switch 3

N1G82 & N1G1

ASM: 1 LED: 9 – Color GREEN – By Switch 3

N1G82 & ~ N1G1

ASM: 1 LED: 10 – Color RED – By Switch 4

N1G83 & N1G1

ASM: 1 LED: 12 – Color GREEN – By Switch 4

N1G83 & ~ N1G1

ASM: 1 LED: 13 – Color RED – By Switch 5

N1G84 & N1G1

ASM: 1 LED: 15 – Color GREEN – By Switch 5

N1G84 & ~ N1G1

ASM: 1 LED: 16 – Color RED – By Switch 6

N1G85 & N1G1

ASM: 1 LED: 18 – Color GREEN – By Switch 6

N1G85 & ~ N1G1

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

902 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

These CAMs operate the same as sample #1 above when using the paging
function at a time when no fire alarm condition exists, however during afire
alarm the microphone switch will activate all call regardless of the state of the
selective paging or all call ASM-16 switches.

Step 2: Program the INX nodes 3, 5, 7, 9, and 11 and their amplifiers.

For INX Node #3 (Floor 1)

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Amplifier Control dialog box: Add the
following statement to any existing cam separated with an “OR” statement:
AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –A- output relay

((N1G80 | N1G81) & N1G1) |

(N1G1 & N3G416))

NOTE: N3G416 is the location of scratch pad #1 in node #3 that will be true
whenever there is afire alarm anywhere in the building (common fire alarm).
(See step #3 below)

AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –B- output relay

((N1G80 | N1G81) & N1G1) |

(N1G1 & N3G416))

For INX Node #5 (Floor 2)

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Amplifier Control dialog box: Add the
following statement to any existing cam separated with an “OR” statement:
AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –A- output relay

((N1G80 | N1G82) & N1G1) |

(N1G1 & N5G416))

AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –B- output relay

((N1G80 | N1G82) & N1G1) |

(N1G1 & N5G416))

For INX Node #7 (Floor 3)

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Amplifier Control dialog box: Add the
following statement to any existing CAM separated with an “OR” statement:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAM Programming Examples 903

AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –A- output relay

((N1G80 | N1G83) & N1G1) |

(N1G1 & N7G416))

AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –B- output relay

((N1G80 | N1G83) & N1G1) |

(N1G1 & N7G416))

For INX Node #9 (Floor 4)

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Amplifier Control dialog box: Add the
following statement to any existing CAM separated with an “OR” statement:
AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –A- output relay

((N1G80 | N1G84) & N1G1) |

(N1G1 & N9G416))

AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –B- output relay

((N1G80 | N1G84) & N1G1) |

(N1G1 & N9G416))

For INX Node #11 (Floor 5)

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Amplifier Control dialog box: Add the
following statement to any existing CAM separated with an “OR” statement:
AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –A- output relay

((N1G80 | N1G85) & N1G1) |

(N1G1 & N11G416))

AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –B- output relay

((N1G80 | N1G85) & N1G1) |

(N1G1 & N11G416))

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

904 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Step 3: Program the INX nodes 3, 5, 7, 9, and 11 to enable paging.

For INX Node #3 (Floor 1)

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Speaker Circuits
AUDIO AMP 1 Paging:

((N1G80 | N1G81) & N1G1) |

(N1G1 & N3G416))

For INX Node #5 (Floor 2)

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Speaker Circuits
AUDIO AMP 1 Paging:

((N1G80 | N1G82) & N1G1) |

(N1G1 & N5G416))

For INX Node #7 (Floor 3)

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Speaker Circuits
AUDIO AMP 1 Paging:

((N1G80 | N1G83) & N1G1) |

(N1G1 & N7G416))

For INX Node #9 (Floor 4)

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Speaker Circuits
AUDIO AMP 1 Paging:

((N1G80 | N1G84) & N1G1) |

(N1G1 & N9G416))

For INX Node #11 (Floor 5)

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Speaker Circuits
AUDIO AMP 1 Paging:

((N1G80 | N1G85) & N1G1) |

(N1G1 & N11G416))

NOTE: The above examples require either the “ALL CALL” or the floor specific
paging switch to be pressed along with the microphone switch also being
pressed to activate the paging function on any given amplifier. During afire

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAM Programming Examples 905

alarm, the microphone switch will enable paging on all INX nodes without
selecting ALL CALL.

Step 3: Program scratch pad #1 in node 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, and 11 to represent common

firealarm.

NOTE: For this sample it is assumed that all:

First floor smoke detectors are assigned to group 1

First floor pull stations are assigned to group 2.
Second floor smoke detectors are assigned to group 3
Second floor pull stations are assigned to group 4
Third floor smoke detectors are assigned to group 5
Third floor pull stations are assigned to group 6.
Fourth floor smoke detectors are assigned to group 7
Fourth floor pull stations are assigned to group 8
Fifth floor smoke detectors are assigned to group 9
Fifth floor pull stations are assigned to group 10

The following is to be programmed into nodes 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, and 11.

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – ScratchPad Locations
Scratchpad Location 1

N2G1 | N2G2 | N4G3 | N4G4 |

N6G5 | N6G6 | N8G7 | N8G8 |
N10G9 | N10G10

NOTE: This expression must be repeated in each node involved with the
paging function. This maintains the peer-to-peer nature of the network system
as well as maximizing the overall survivability potential of the system during
emergency conditions.
15.2.6 Programming A Backup Amplifier
15.2.6.1 Sample 1

Sample #1 This will demonstrate one of the possible ways to program an amplifier to
function as a backup for up to three main amplifiers. The assumption here is that each of the
three main amplifiers will need to play a different message and therefore the backup amp
will need to determine which message to play depending on which amplifier it is replacing.

NOTE: The design of the AM-50 prevents it from outputting into a shorted speaker
loop and therefore the backup amp should not activate on a loop short or open
condition for output circuit “A” or “B”. Therefore the backup amplifier and the backup
relay of the faulted amplifier must be activated only during afire alarm and only by the
amplifier fault status bit locations 40, 73, or 104 from the main amplifiers numbered
one to three respectively.

For this example there will be nine fire alarm groups from three different Network ILI-MB-E3

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

906 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

nodes. There is one INX with three AM-50 amplifiers. There are nine recorded messages
and an ALL CALL function.

Node # 1 is an INCC with one ASM-16

Node # 2 is an INX with three MAIN amplifiers and one BACKUP amplifier
Node # 3 is an ILI-MB-E3 with alarm groups 1, 2, and 3
Node # 4 is an ILI-MB-E3 with alarm groups 4, 5, and 6
Node # 5 is an ILI-MB-E3 with alarm groups 7, 8, and 9

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Recorded Messages dialog box:

CAM for Node 2
Recorded Message #1 to AUDIO AMP 1

( N3G1 & ~ N2G39 ) & ~ (

N3G400 | N4G400 | N5G400 )

Recorded Message #2 to AUDIO AMP 1

( N3G2 & ~ N2G39 ) & ~ (

N3G400 | N4G400 | N5G400 )

Recorded Message #3 to AUDIO AMP 1

(N3G3 & ~ N2G39 ) & ~ (

N3G400 | N4G400 | N5G400 )

Recorded Message #1 to AUDIO AMP 2

( N4G4 & ~ N2G71 ) & ~ (

N3G400 | N4G400 | N5G400 )

Recorded Message #4 to AUDIO AMP 2

( N4G5 & ~ N2G71 ) & ~ (

N3G400 | N4G400 | N5G400 )

Recorded Message #5 to AUDIO AMP 2

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAM Programming Examples 907

(N4G6 & ~ N2G71 ) & ~ (

N3G400 | N4G400 | N5G400 )

Recorded Message #1 to AUDIO AMP 3

(N5G7 & ~ N2G103 ) & ~ (

N3G400 | N4G400 | N5G400 )

Recorded Message #6 to AUDIO AMP 3

(N5G8 & ~ N2G103 ) & ~ (

N3G400 | N4G400 | N5G400 )

Recorded Message #7 to AUDIO AMP 3

(N5G9 & ~ N2G103 ) & ~ (

N3G400 | N4G400 | N5G400 )

Note: There are a total of seven recorded audio messages.

The following CAMs select the correct message to send out based on the witch
of the Main Amplifiers has a fault condition

Recorded Message #1 to AUDIO AMP 4

( ( ( N3G1 & N2G40 ) | ( N4G4 &

N2G72 ) | ( N5G7 & N2G104 ) )
& ~ N2G135 ) & ~ ( N3G400 |
N4G400 | N5G400 )

Recorded Message #2 to AUDIO AMP 4

( ( N3G2 & N2G40) & ~ N2G135

) & ~ ( N3G400 | N4G400 |
N5G400 )

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

908 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

Recorded Message #3 to AUDIO AMP4

( ( N3G3 & N2G40 ) & ~ N2G135

) & ~ ( N3G400 | N4G400 |
N5G400 )

Recorded Message #4 to AUDIO AMP4

( ( N4G5 & N2G72 ) & ~ N2G135

) & ~ ( N3G400 | N4G400 |
N5G400 )

Recorded Message #5 to AUDIO AMP 4

( ( N4G6 & N2G72 ) & ~ N2G135

) & ~ ( N3G400 | N4G400 |
N5G400 )

Recorded Message #6 to AUDIO AMP 4

( ( N5G8 & N2G104 ) & ~

N2G135 ) & ~ ( N3G400 |
N4G400 | N5G400 )

Recorded Message #7 to AUDIO AMP 4

( ( N5G9 & N2G104 ) & ~

N2G135 ) & ~ ( N3G400 |
N4G400 | N5G400 )

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Amplifier Control dialog box for Node 2:
AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –A- output relay

(N3G1 | N3G2 | N3G3) & ~ (

N3G400 | N4G400 | N5G400 )

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAM Programming Examples 909

AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Amplifier channel –B- output relay

(N3G1 | N3G2 | N3G3) & ~ (

N3G400 | N4G400 | N5G400 )

AUDIO AMP 1: Energize Backup Amplifier output relay

( (N3G1 | N3G2 | N3G3) & ~ (

N3G400 | N4G400 | N5G400 ) )
& N2G40

AUDIO AMP 2: Energize Amplifier channel –A- output relay

(N4G4 | N4G5 | N4G6) & ~ (

N3G400 | N4G400 | N5G400 )

AUDIO AMP 2: Energize Amplifier channel –B- output relay

(N4G4 | N4G5 | N4G6) & ~ (

N3G400 | N4G400 | N5G400 )

AUDIO AMP 2: Energize Backup Amplifier output relay

( (N4G4 | N4G5 | N4G6) & ~ (

N3G400 | N4G400 | N5G400 ) )
& N2G72

AUDIO AMP 3: Energize Amplifier channel –A- output relay

(N5G7 | N5G8 | N5G9) & ~ (

N3G400 | N4G400 | N5G400 )

AUDIO AMP 3: Energize Amplifier channel –B- output relay

(N5G7 | N5G8 | N5G9) & ~ (

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

910 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

N3G400 | N4G400 | N5G400 )

AUDIO AMP 3: Energize Backup Amplifier output relay

( (N5G7 | N3G8 | N4G9) & ~ (

N3G400 | N4G400 | N5G400 ) )
& N2G104

AUDIO AMP 4: Energize Amplifier channel –A- output relay

( ( N3G1 | N3G2 | N3G3 | N4G4 |

N4G5 | N4G6 | N5G7 | N5G8 |
N5G9 ) & ~ ( N3G400 | N4G400
| N5G400 ) ) & ( N2G40 | N2G72
| N2G104 )

Note: Only amplifier # 4 channel “A” output is being fed into the three backup
amplifier inputs on the Main Amplifiers.

To allow the Backup Amplifier to perform All Call and Selective Paging the following
will allow the Backup Amplifier to activate to the appropriate paging control switch
dependant upon which Main Amplifier is faulted. The setup here assumes that All
Call is assigned to ASM-16 #1 switch #1. Floor 1 Selective Paging is normally
performed by Main Amplifier #1 and controlled by ASM-16 #1 switch #2. Floor two is
driven by Main Amplifier #2 and selected by ASM-16 #1 switch #3. And finally, floor
three is served by Main Amplifier # 3 and activated by ASM-16 #1 switch # 4.

In the Conditional Action Maps (CAMS) – Speaker Circuits

AUDIO AMP 4 Paging:

( ( ( N1G80 | N1G81 | N1G82 |

N2G83 ) & ( N2G40 | N2G72 |
N2G104 ) ) & N1G1 )

ALSO, change CAM screen for Amplifier Control (AUDIO AMP 4: Energize
Amplifier channel –A- output relay) by adding the paging switches during a
fault to activate the output relay so that the complete expression looks like the
following.

AUDIO AMP 4: Energize Amplifier channel –A- output relay

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAM Programming Examples 911

( ( N3G1 | N3G2 | N3G3 | N4G4 |

N4G5 | N4G6 | N5G7 | N5G8 |
N5G9 ) & ~ ( N3G400 | N4G400
| N5G400 ) ) & ( N2G40 | N2G72
| N2G104 ) | ( ( ( N1G80 |
N1G81 | N1G82 | N2G83 ) & (
N2G40 | N2G72 | N2G104 ) ) &
N1G1 )

15.2.7 Linking An Alarm Condition To Elevator Recall

15.2.7.1 Sample 1

Sample #1 The elevator will recall to the first floor as a default and to the second floor
should there be a fire condition adjacent to the first floor access.

Program smoke detectors, pull stations, etc. into the ILI-MB-E3 as usual using the
Input Devices screen. Next, program AOMs using the Output Devices screen in the
usual way. NOTE: at this stage group numbers for AOMs are not important and can
be left at zero, for now.

The final stage of setting up the control modules is to assign CAM Controlled Output
group numbers to the device using the Output Devices screen. CAM Controlled
Output groups begin with group number 125 and run up to 224 and 500 to 599.
Multiple devices can have the same group number and one device can have multiple
groups.

CAM programming applies only to CAM Controlled Output groups.

The following screen shows the group assignment for the elevator recall
example.

ADDRES AlmNIG
LOOP S DEVICE TYPE GROUPS AlmDay HT
1 17 Form C AOM NS 125
1 23 Form C AOM NS 126

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 912 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

For this example, assume that NODE 2, group 14 has been assigned to the
thermal detectors in the elevator lobby on floor one, and NODE 4, group 24
has been assigned to the second floor elevator lobby. The AOMs are setup up
as shown above for groups 125 and 126.

For NODE 2

In the CAM Output Groups Screen:

ILI-MB-E3 - GROUP 125

N2G416 & ~ N2G14

ILI-MB-E3 - GROUP 126

N2G416 & N2G14 & ~ N4G24

For NODE 2
In the CAM ScratchPad Screen:
SCRATCHPAD - LOCATION 1

“ALL FIRE ALARM INPUT

GROUPS FROM ALL ILI-MB-E3
NODES ORed TOGETHER
HERE ”

(see this page 905 for combining all fire alarms into a common fire alarm)

15.3 Latching Lockout

This method will allow a switch on an ASM-16 to initiate a lockout on any output function on
the E3 Series system that will remain in effect even through a system reset. For this
example the following assignments are assumed:

NODE # 1 is an INCC
NODE # 2 is an ILI-MB-E3
NODE # 3 is an INX

The INCC has 1 ASM-16 and switch #1 is to be the lockout control switch
Switch # 2 is to be the lockout cancel control.
The YELLOW LED next to switch # 1 will indicate the lockout condition.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAM Programming Examples 913

Lockout is to inhibit group 99 from activating automatic fire alarm outputs.

Lockout will not inhibit fire alarm activation from taking place from other groups.

NAC circuit 1, MCOM, and all Amplifiers are to be locked out from activating for group 99
only.

To begin on the ILI-MB-E3 node select the “NAC Settings”.

On the line for NAC Ckt. 1 un-check all option boxes and assign a group number between
125 and 224 or 500 to 599. In this case we will assign it to 125. Then do the same to the line
for the municipal circuit. You can assign this one to group 125 as well or it can be a different
group if desired.

Save these changes by closing this area.

Next, go to the“CAM Output Groups" screen. The first output group (125) will open allowing
the following CAM to be entered.

Save and close this area.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

914 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

The next area to be programmed is scratchpad # 9 (group 424). Go to the “CAM

ScratchPad" screen and select Scratchpad # 9.

This scratchpad and its CAM form the latching bit that is used for all of the outputs that must
be inhibited. Only the INI-7100, NGA, ILI-MB-E3, ILI-S-E3, ILI95-MB-E3, ILI95-S-E3,
ANX-SR and ANX-MR nodes have these non-resetting scratchpads available. The System
Status Map help file (distributed with CAMWorks) indicates which scratchpads are latching
(non-resetting).

The next node to be programmed is the INCC. Here we will provide indicator lights that will
annunciate the status if the lockout and the state of the controlling switches.

Open the INCC section of CAMWorks and proceed to the CAM ASM/ANU LED screen and
then go to the YELLOW LED next to switch #1. We will use this LED to indicate that the
lockout is active. We will use the following CAM.

Save this CAM and then edit the CAM for the GREEN LED by switch 2 and enter the
following CAM:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAM Programming Examples 915

Save this CAM and close out of the INCC portion of CAMWorks.

The final area needing programming for lockout is the INX so open up this area and proceed
to the CAM Audio Outputs screen and scroll down to AMP 1 Circuit A - Output.

The amplifier will activate for fire alarm inputs and be silenceable as well as respond to
paging even during times when a fire alarm has been silenced or group 99 has been locked
out. The following CAM will perform these functions.

Download the configuration to each node to complete this implementation assuming all other
required functions have been programmed.

15.4 Firefighter Phones

Functional Description

The firefighter phone as setup on the E3 Series system in this example will operate as
detailed here. A phone is plugged into a remote phone jack somewhere in the premises.
This causes the AOM-TEL to issue a service request to the INX via the SLC. The INX in turn
will set a bit in the bitmap that represents the affected AOM-TEL and sends out it’s local bit
map across the network. When the copy of the bit map reaches the INCC and is processed
through the CAM programming the INCC will command the appropriate LED to begin
flashing and to pulse it’s sounder to alert an operator that there is an incoming call. The
operator must press the switch adjacent to the flashing LED on the ASM-16 to acknowledge

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

916 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

the call and enable the phone circuit. The switch press causes the INCC to set the correct
bit in its bit map, which is sent out, and to silence the beeping sounder. It also causes the
flashing LED to stop flashing and go on steady. Meanwhile when the INCC’s bit map
reaches the INX the switch press bit is processed and results in the command being output
over the SLC to turn on the AOM-TEL connecting the phone to the virtual phone channel.
The INX also enables its end of the phone circuit connecting it to the network. The INCC will
receive the INX’s bit map that now reflects the activation of the AOM-TEL and it will activate
its end of the phone circuit allowing the two locations to converse.

The programming required to make this work needs to be done in both the INX and the
INCC.

To start, at the INCC select a switch in one of the ASM-16(‘s) that will be assigned to
activate this one AOM-TEL. This will then imply which of the 3 LED’s may be used to
indicate an un-acknowledged and an acknowledged call in. Select the desired color LED and
program it in the LED BLINK page of the CAMs section to activate when the AOM-TEL
issues a service request bit and the ASM-16 switch has not been pressed.

EX.1 on the page for LED Blink ASM-16 number 2 RED LED next to switch 1 enter the
following

N3G160 & ~ N1G96

N3 is node 3 and G160 is the service request bit for AOM-TEL #1

& ~ is the logic operators AND NOT

N1 is the node number for the INCC and G96 is the bit for switch #1 of ASM-16 #2

The red LED will now blink when a phone is plugged in and the switch is not pressed.

Next in the Phone Ring, Buzzer, Phone enable section, on the page for Phone Ring enter
the same CAM expression as above in EX.1 so that the phone ring and blinking LED
operate together.

The next CAM needed is for when the switch has been pressed to acknowledge the call-in:

On the page for LED On/Off and ASM-16 #2 GREEN LED next to switch #1 enter the
following

N3G160 & N1G96

N3 is node 3 and G160 is the service request bit for AOM-TEL #1

& is the logic operators AND

N1 is the node number for the INCC and G96 is the bit for switch #1 of ASM-16 #2
The Green LED will now turn on steady because the switch has been pressed.

Alternatively the CAM can be written so that the LED will only illuminate when the AOM-TEL
confirms its activation through the bit map as well as the switch press and service request.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 CAM Programming Examples 917

This CAM would be:

N3G160 & N1G96 & N3G176

& is the logic operators AND

N3 is the node number for the INX and G176 is the bit commanding the AOM-TEL
activation.

The last thing needed in the INCC CAMming is in the Phone Ring, Buzzer, Phone enable
section, on the page for Phone Enable enter the same CAM expression (N3G160 & N1G96 )
so that the phone circuit is enabled. Alternatively the CAM (N3G160 & N1G96 & N3G176)
can also be used if desired.

This completes the programming needed in the INCC and all that remains is the
programming of the INX for the control of the AOM-TEL module and the enabling of the
virtual phone circuit.

In the INX section of CAMWorks the AOM-TEL (s) must be set to active in the Labels
AOM-TEL Modules page. Entering a label is also recommended for future reference.

Then under the CAMs on the AOM Telephone Modules page enter the CAM logic
expression that will control the activation of the module. The expression would be something
like the following:

N3G160 & N1G96

N3 is node 3 and G160 is the service request bit for AOM-TEL #1

& is the logic operators AND

N1 is the node number for the INCC and G96 is the bit for switch #1 of ASM-16 #2

This probably looks familiar by now, as it is the same expression used back in the INCC to
control the Green LED. Here it will activate the AOM-TEL only if the AOM-TEL has a phone
plugged into it’s jack and someone at the Command Center (INCC) has pressed the switch
to activate this phone circuit.

Lastly the same CAM (N3G160 & N1G96 ) is also entered in the INX’s page for Phone
Enable.

This completes all the programming needed to program one remote phone on one INX
node. More phone circuits and more nodes will have similar CAMs either in additional pages
for LED’s or will have expressions “OR’ed” with the expressions shown above.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

918 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

Part

XVI
 920 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

16 Advanced CAM Programming

Advanced CAM Programming allows the user to write Low-Level CAM code. This allows a
great deal of flexibility (even greater than standard CAM expressions), however the user
needs to learn the CAM language and how the CAM language works before this ability
becomes useful.

The Advanced CAM Programming Editor 925 is used for writing the Low-Level CAM code.
See this section for more information about the editor.

NOTE: CAMWorks contains several measures to prevent conflicts between CAM

expressions and Advanced CAM Programming. For example, if a CAM Expression has
been written for a certain location, and the user attempts to write a Low-Level CAM that
also writes to the same location, CAMWorks will not allow the user to save the Low-Level
CAMs.

16.1 Programming CAMs Manually

Adding CAM 21 logic statements manually requires that the user become familiar with the
commands and syntax of the CAM programming language. Once you've learned this simple
programming language, it becomes an easy matter to add CAM statements to the CAM
expressions that are translated and produced by CAMWorks. This allows the user to take
advantage of some CAM commands that are not presently available in CAMWorks.

Rules For Entering CAMs:

1. Each complete CAM instruction command should be on a separate line.

2. Blank lines are allowed in the file (makes for easier reading).

3. Comments are allowed either at the beginning of a line or anywhere else inline. The /
(forward slash) character begins a comment. All characters that follow the / are treated as a
comment, regardless if they are valid CAM instructions or not.

NOTE: Comment blocks are not supported. Each line of a comment must begin with a /.

4. If the command KEYWORD is not a standalone type, such as AND, OR, NOT, XOR,
END, etc., the command KEYWORD should be separated from the first instruction
parameter with a space. (Examples: INPUT 1,1 or OUTPUT 1,300).

5. Other instruction parameters after the keyword and first parameter, should be
separated with commas (as in the examples above).

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Advanced CAM Programming 921

6. Commands are not case sensitive. Use upper or lower case or any combination of the
two.

7. Each complete CAM expression should be terminated with an END command.

8. There is some validation during the pre-download translate process. If an error is

encountered during the pre-download translation, CAMWorks will respond with an error
message - Error line: X Entry not understood.

NOTE: For S3 Series Standalone, 7100 Standalone and E3 Series Standalone systems,
all CAMs 21 must refer to Node 0 (N0).

CAM Instruction Commands:

INPUT Node, Location-Address

Reads the location-address specified and pushes it onto the evaluation stack.

AND
Pops two locations off the top of the evaluation stack, performs the logical AND operation on
the bits, and pushes the result back onto the evaluation stack.

OR
Pops two locations off the top of the evaluation stack, performs the logical OR operation on
the bits, and pushes the result back onto the evaluation stack.

XOR
Pops two locations off the top of the evaluation stack, performs the logical XOR operation on
the bits, and pushes the result back onto the evaluation stack.

NOT
Pops the address off the top of the evaluation stack, performs the logical NOT operation on
the bit, and pushes the result back onto the evaluation stack.

Output Node, Location-Address

Examines the bit at the top of the evaluation stack (without destroying its contents), and
writes it to the specified output address in the local copy of this node's SSM block. The
Output Node address must be the same as the current node that is being downloaded.

ON
Pushes a one directly onto the evaluation stack.

OFF
Pushes a zero directly onto the evaluation stack.

POP
Pops the bit off the top of the evaluation stack, and discards it.

PUSH
Examines the bit at the top of the evaluation stack (without destroying it), and pushes a copy

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

922 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

of the bit onto the stack.

END
Marks the end of the current CAM. Clears the evaluation stack and flags.

DEFCNT N, O
Define Counter (0-9). Assigns an Output destination address to Counter N. Clears the
specified output in the local copy of this node's SSM Block.

SETCNT N, C
Set Counter (0-9). Assigns a count (1-65535) to counter N. Counter's associated output is
not affected, but will be turned ON after DECCNT is executed C times.

DECCNT N
Decrement Counter (0-9). Decrements the count in Counter N. If this causes the count to
reach zero, outputs a one to the counter's associated output address in the local copy of this
Node's SSM block.

DEFTMR N, O
Define Timer (0-9). Assigns an Output destination address to Timer N. Clears the specified
Output in the local copy of this Node's SSM block.

SETTMR N, C
Set Timer (0-9). Assigns a time delay (1-65535) to Timer N. Timer's associated
output is not affected, but will be turned ON C seconds after ENATMR is executed.

ENATMR N
Enable Timer (0-9). Starts Timer N running.

DISTMR N
Disable Timer (0-9). Stops Timer N and clears its time count. After this instruction is
executed, SETTMR must be executed again before timer N can be restarted. See
HOLDTMR.

HOLDTMR N
Hold Timer (0-9). Suspends the timing process of timer N, preserving the remaining time
count. ENATMR restarts timer N from the current point.

DEFSCD N, O
Define Schedule (0-9). Assigns an output destination address to Schedule N. Clears the
specified output in the local copy of this Node's SSM block.

SETSCD N, M, D, W, H, T
Set Schedule (0-9). Sets the parameters for Schedule N. Any parameter set to 255 means
"Don't Care". M = Month of year (1-12). D = Day of month (1-31). W = binary bit map for day
of week. (XXXXXXX1 = Sunday, XXXXXX1X = Monday, XXXXX1XX = Tuesday,
XXXX1XXX = Wednesday, XXX1XXXX = Thursday, XX1XXXXX = Friday, X1XXXXXX =
Saturday, 255 matches any day) Enter these days of the week as decimal numbers 1 -255.
H = Hour (0-23). T = Minute (0-59).

ENASCD N

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Advanced CAM Programming 923

Enable Schedule (0-9). Enables operation of Schedule N.

DISSCD
Disables operation of Schedule N (0-9), preserving its settings. ENASCD may be used to
Re-enable the schedule.

CLRSCD N
Clear Schedule N (0-9). Disables operation of Schedule N and clears its settings. SETSCD
must be executed before subsequent use of this schedule.

DEFSEQ N,L,P,O1,O2,O3,O4,O5,O6,O7,O8,O9,O10,O11,O12
Define Sequence. Sets the list of outputs and their order for Sequence 'N'. 'Limit'
de-termines the end point of the sequence (number of outputs 1-12). P = 0 for 'Bar Graph'
or 1 for 'Shift'. A 'Bar Graph' sequence leaves any current outputs ON when an INCSEQ is
executed. A 'Shift' sequence turns OFF its current output when an INCSEQ is executed.

INCSEQ N
Increment Sequence. Activates the next output in Sequence N. If the sequence is a 'shift'
sequence, the previously activated output (if any) is turned OFF. If the sequence has
advanced past its 'Limit', all outputs are turned OFF. If the sequence is a 'Bar Graph'
sequence, the previously-active outputs (if any) remain ON. If the sequence has advanced
past its limit, all outputs remain ON.

CLRSEQ N
Clear Sequence. Turns OFF any active outputs in Sequence N, and deletes the se-quence.
DEFSEQ must be executed before the sequence can be used again.

IF
Pops the bit off the top of the evaluation stack. If the bit is zero, skips all further instructions
up to the next ELSE or ENDIF instruction. If bit is a one, executes instructions up to the next
ELSE instruction (if any), then skips to the next ENDIF instruction. IF/ELSE/ENDIF
instructions cannot be nested. Any IF must be terminated by an ENDIF, but ELSE is
optional.

ELSE
Marks the end of IF- true instructions, and the start of IF - false instructions.

ENDIF
Marks the end of an IF conditional.

Sample CAM logic Statements:

(Two input AND... If CAM evaluates to True, turns on SSM location 300 = ILI-MB-E3 Group
125)

INPUT 1,1
INPUT 1,2
AND

OUTPUT 1,300
END

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 924 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

(Two input OR... If CAM evaluates to True, turns on SSM location 301 = 7100 Group 126)

INPUT 2,1
INPUT 2,2
OR

OUTPUT 1,301
END

(AND 2 inputs, complements (NOTs) an input, then ANDs the results If True,
activates SSM location 302 = ILI-MB-E3 Group 127)

INPUT 1,3
INPUT 1,4
AND

INPUT 1,5
NOT

AND

OUTPUT 1,302
END

(If input 1, 6 is True, activates SSM Output location 303 = ILI-MB-E3 group 128)

INPUT 1,6
OUTPUT 1,303

(Three input AND, If true, activates SSM output location 304 = ILI-MB-E3 group 129)
INPUT 1,7
INPUT 1,8
AND

INPUT 1,9
AND

OUTPUT 1,304
END

Note: See Timers, Counters, Sequences 924 for instructions on defining and using these
functions.

16.2 Timers, Counters, Sequences

Timers, Counters, and Sequences are defined and used in a similar manner. When defining
these functions, the SSM Reset Address for the current node should be used in conjunction
with an IF/ENDIF control statement to ensure that these functions are initialized only after a
Node reset. This is accomplished with the following commands:

INPUT 1, 447 (where 1 = Node Number Address and 447 = Reset Address)

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Advanced CAM Programming 925

IF
DEFTMR N,O
SETTMR N,C

DEFCNT N,O
SETCNT N,C

DEFSEQ N,L,P,O1,O2,O3,O4,O5,06,O7,O8,O9,O10,O11,O12

ENDIF

Note: See Programming CAMs Manually 920 for explanation of syntax.

Timers, Counters, and Sequences are used in tandem with CAM expressions. CAMs consist
of at least one INPUT instruction and one OUTPUT instruction. However a more typical
CAM includes multiple INPUTs, logic operation(s), and an OUTPUT instruction.

Timer Example:

INPUT 1,1
INPUT 1,2
AND
ENATMR N

END

Counter Example:

INPUT 1,3
INPUT 1,4
OR
DECCNT N

END

Sequence Example:

INPUT 1,5
INCSEQ N

END

16.3 Advanced CAM Programming Editor

The Advanced CAM Programming Editor is a basic text-editor that is built-in to CAMWorks.
It operates much like the Windows Notepad utility, but it was designed specifically for the
purpose of entering Low-Level CAMs into the current node of your CAMWorks project.

The screen contains the following elements:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 926 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

1.) Menu Bar with the following menus:

a. File 926
b. Edit 927
c. View 927
d. Help 928

2.) Toolbar 928 with the following buttons:

a. Import
b. Save
c. Print
d. Find
e. Help
f. System Status Map
g. Exit

3.) Text entry area.

The following buttons appear at the bottom of the Advanced CAM Programming Editor:

System Status Map -

Selecting this option will open an online reference to the E3 Series and NetSOLO
Series System Status Map (bitmap.) This reference provides definition and group
number (bit address) lookup information for each of the node types available to assist
in CAM expression programming.

Save -
Saves any changes that have been made.

Close -
Closes the Advanced CAM Programming Editor.

NOTE: It is advisable to manually save the changes in this screen before closing this
screen or navigating to another screen.

16.3.1 Main Menu

16.3.1.1 File

The File Menu contains the following options:

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 Advanced CAM Programming 927

· Import CAMs - Imports text from a text file and optionally over-writes existing Low-Level
CAMs or appends the selected to file to the existing Low-Level CAMs
· Save - Saves the changes to the Low-Level CAMs to the CAMWorks project file.
· Export - Saves the Low-Level CAMs to a text file.
· Print - Prints the Low-Level CAMs to a printer.
· Print Preview - Displays a preview of what the printed output would look like.
· Page Setup - Configures printer settings.
· Exit - Closes the Advanced CAM Programming Editor.

16.3.1.2 Edit

The Edit Menu contains the following options:

· Select All - Selects all text in the CAM entry field.

· Cut - Cuts the selected text and places it into the Windows Clipboard
· Copy - Copies the selected text and places it into the Windows Clipboard
· Paste - Pastes text from the Windows Clipboard into the CAM entry field at the position of
the cursor.
· Find - Opens a small entry screen that allows the user to enter a text string to search for
and finds the first occurrence of it.
· Find Next - Finds the next occurrence of the text string entered previously in the Find
screen.

16.3.1.3 Search

The Search Menu contains the following options:

· Find - Opens a small entry screen that allows the user to enter a text string to search for
and finds the first occurrence of it.
· Find Next - Finds the next occurrence of the text string entered previously in the Find
screen.

16.3.1.4 View

The View Menu contains the following options:

· Basic - Disables the display of Used/Unused Bit Locations.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 928 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

· Advanced - Enables the display of Used/Unused Bit Locations.

16.3.1.5 Help

The Help Menu contains the following options:

· Help Contents -
Displays the CAMWorks help system.

· System Status Map -

Selecting this option will open an online reference to the E3 Series and NetSOLO
Series System Status Map (bitmap.) This reference provides definition and group
number (bit address) lookup information for each of the node types available to assist
in CAM expression programming.

16.3.2 Toolbar
The Toolbar acts as a quick shortcut to the most commonly used functions that are available
through the main menu. These include:

1) Import (from File 926 menu)

2) Save (from File 926 menu)

3) Print (from File 926 menu)

4) Find (from Edit 927 menu)

5) Help Contents (from Help 928 menu)

6) System Status Map (from Help 928 menu)

7) Exit (from File 926 menu)

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

Part

XVII
 930 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

17 Technical Documentation
For a complete reference of Gamewell-FCI Technical Documentation, including Manuals,
Install Sheets, Frame & Posts and Data sheets, please visit:

http://gamewell-fci.com/esd/tech_docs.htm

NOTE: Gamewell-FCI ESD web site account required in order to access

documentation.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

Part

XVIII
 932 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

18 Technical Support
Technical Support for this software is available Monday through Friday from 7:00 AM to 7:00
PM Eastern Time by calling 1-(800)-274-4324 or by e-mail to HLSGamewell-
FCITechSupport@Honeywell.com.

Technical Support may ask you to provide some of the following:

1.) Log files - Stored in the current project folder may be several text files. These text files
contain useful troubleshooting information.

2.) The current project file - Often, it is very important to include a ZIP copy of a project file
for troubleshooting.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

Part

XIX
 934 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

19 PipeIQ Introduction
PipeIQ is the all-in-one system design, configuration and monitoring software for
Gamewell-FCI’s Intelligent FAAST aspirating smoke detector. It guides users through the
initial pipe layout and system configuration for a FAAST aspiration system. Once the
system is installed, PipeIQ enables ongoing configuration and system monitoring from
anywhere in the world via the Internet using FAAST’s onboard Ethernet connection*.

For more information about PipeIQ, please see the PipeIQ Frequently Asked Questions
(F.A.Q.) page 936 .
Please visit System Sensor's web site to download a copy of PipeIQ.

*Additional network infrastructure such as a VPN required. Connecting a FAAST detector

directly to the Internet is not recommended.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

Part

XX
 936 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

20 PipeIQ Frequently Asked Questions

Frequently Asked Questions

PipeIQ Software for FAAST Fire

Alarm Aspiration Sensing
Technology ®

What is PipeIQ Software?

PipeIQ is the all-in-one system design, configuration and monitoring
software for the System Sensor FAAST aspirating smoke detector. It
guides users through the initial pipe layout and system configuration for
a FAAST aspiration system. Once the system is installed, PipeIQ
enables ongoing configuration and system monitoring from anywhere in
the world via the Internet using FAAST’s onboard Ethernet connection.*

How can I obtain a copy of PipeIQ?

The latest version of the PipeIQ software can be downloaded free of
charge from the FAAST landing page, systemsensor.com/faast. When
downloading the software, you can register to receive update
notifications via email. This ensures that you are always notified of the
most recent version of the program as it becomes available.

What are the system requirements to ensure that PipeIQ

will
function properly?

System Requirements

To use the PipeIQ software application, the following are required:

· Microsoft® Windows® XP SP3 or Windows® 7

· 1 GB of RAM

· Graphics hardware with 128 MB of memory and support for

OpenGL 2.0 or later

· 5 GB of free hard disk space

For an optimal experience, the following are recommended:

· 4 GB of RAM

· Graphics hardware with 256 MB of memory and support for

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

 PipeIQ Frequently Asked Questions 937

OpenGL 2.0 or later

*Additional network infrastructure such as a VPN required. Connecting a FAAST detector

directly to the Internet is not recommended.

How do I connect a PC to a FAAST General Comment

detector? What kind of cable does it
require to connect a PC to a FAAST
detector?

The FAAST device has an integral Ethernet port and
uses a standard RJ45 cable. Simply connect the
RJ45 Ethernet cable to both the FAAST device and
your computer. For instructions on configuring your
network adapter, see page 28 of the Comprehensive
Instruction Manual. The Manual is included with the
PipeIQ software or can be accessed via the internet
at systemsensor.com/faast.
The PipeIQ software is a valuable tool for
designing aspiration pipe networks and calculating
expected performance. However, it is not a
substitute for knowledge of local codes governing
an installation. Users of the software are required
to adhere to all local codes and consult with the
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) if clarification is
needed. It is also recommended that all users read
the Comprehensive Installation Manual in its
entirety prior to starting a design layout with the
PipeIQ software.

For additional FAAST device and PipeIQ software

Do I need to be connected to a FAAST training, System Sensor offers regional
certification sessions. Visit systemsensor.com
device in order to lay out a pipe network in /seminars to find a certification session in your
PipeIQ? area. System Sensor also has System Sales
Engineers available for support. Please contact
technical support for guidance at 1-800-Sensor2
(1-800-736-7672).
No, a FAAST device need not be connected to a PC
when designing a pipe network in PipeIQ. A designer
can utilize the PipeIQ software to complete the
layout, verify hole sizes and sensitivities, obtain a Bill
of Material and Layout Report, and complete their
submittal before a FAAST unit is purchased.

What kind of assistance does PipeIQ offer

someone that is laying out a pipe network
for the first time?

The PipeIQ software includes a Pipe Wizard feature

that guides users through the pipe network design
process. The wizard asks a series of questions about
the area under protection and designs a pipe network
tailored to the space. While useful for inexperienced
designers, the Pipe Wizard is also suitable for
rectangular space layouts or to serve as a starting
point for more complex spaces.

For assistance with more complicated designs, a

dedicated System Sales Engineer is available to
answer your questions. Please refer to the General
Comment section for
contact information.

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.

938 CAMWorks V3.21 Help

www.systemsensor.com/faast ©2014 System Sensor. ASPFL00400 • 12/11

© 2014 Honeywell International, Inc.